《Undeads are walking》


 Road to Haga - Part 1

    After one week at the first infections with the deadly virus named Z-745, people from Holland have started to evacuate the city and hide in their shelter until the military will arrive, or some of them, are risking their luck to leave this place, just like our three survivors who were blocked in a building, and now they are on their way to freedom, Haga.


    Those three survivors who are situated in an abandoned building are searching in random apartments for supplies, weapons like a screwdriver, a pistol, or even a kitchen knife. The names of the three survivors are Ronald, the guy with long blonde hair, who got on his belt a powerful revolver and a knife on the other side of the belt, is fat, short, he got a pair of shoes whose logo is "Snickers", and he is wearing a black t-shirt with a logo about "Death" and a pair of gray trousers because the black jeans they were stained with the blood of zombies. The second survivor is a teenager whose name is Mike, this dude is wearing a yellow hoodie, got a pair of blue jeans on him, o pair of glasses to help him see the world, and having on his back a bomb logo, also he got a backpack full of ammo for his UZI, who brought from a gun store before the apocalypse was about to come, and some food supplies like water, snacks, bread, cola, and painkillers. The last survivor is named Gerald, an old man, wearing a military outfit he just found, he is slim like the second dude, he got bread, unlike those two teammates, white hair who is not natural, a pair of boots for soldiers, and he has a sheath in which he keeps his axe with which he has killed a lot of zombies since the infection began, and a backpack containing a Desert Eagle with about a hundred bullets and a few smoke grenades because zombies are also attracted to grenades and make them to no longer feel the presence of human walking around.


    These three survivors have been locked up in this building for more than a week, right since the virus started. At first, it had been twenty-nine survivors. But as the days passed very quickly, certain survivors of this building decided to leave and look for supplies or leave this place for a nearby military base, like those three survivors, but they are not going to the army, instead, they are going to Haga and take a boat from there which will help them to leave this dammed place infected with that Z virus.


    After a few hours of investigating the place and gathering some useful supplies, these three survivors are ready to make their own way to the Haga. But, right when they have left the building, on the streets, are approximately a few dozens of zombies who are walking slowly to them because they can smell survivors blood. Gerald and Mike are preparing their fire weapons, but Ronald stops them.


    You could be reading stolen content. Head to the original site for the genuine story.


    "You do not want to attract more trouble, guys," says Gerald when he has stopped them to use their guns.


    "What do you suggest, old man?" asks Ronald while he put his revolver back to his belt.


    "We will use our wrenches, screwdriver, hammers. Whatever doesn''t create such a big sound, alright?"


    "Alright," says Mike putting his UZI back into his backpack, and taking from there a hunting knife he found in an abandoned room that belongs to someone who got bit on the first day.


    "Where did take the knife, kiddo?" asks Gerald looking surprised at Mike, and then he takes from the other side of his belt a kitchen knife.


    "Whatever you got it, you better know how to use it," says Ronald after he is equipping a machete he got from a teammate who got killed a few days earlier.


    Five zombies are coming closer to them, and all three of them have started to use their weapons to protect themselves and send those nasty zombies back to be dead. Gerald, with one single, swung, has successfully decapitated a zombie who wore tourist clothes. Mark, directly stabbed the head of two zombies who were closer to him, and right when they have fallen, Mark has decided to cut the limbs of those zombies as fast as he can because he thought this kind of zombies can regenerate if the limbs are not torn apart from them, but it doesn''t work in this world. And our survivor Ronald has killed the rest of those two zombies by slashing the neck of those zombies, and then he punched their head which results in decapitation. The fists of Ronald are quite strong for a man who was working as a taxi driver and carjacker when the apocalypse has begun.


    Ronald seeing that these three have put those zombies down, they have decided to continue walking around, but right when they were started to move again, other zombies are coming to them, and this time, these three have decided to a secret weapon, a smoke grenade. Ronald, Mike, and Gerald are running away into the west, and when they were running in that direction, Mike saw that the zombies are walking slowly toward them.


    These three survivors have arrived at a narrow street that is filled with cars that are working, not working, upside down, or worse, on fire. Ronald was about to climb there, but Gerald looked at him and say.


    "We are not going that way, Ronald!"


    "Then where old geezer?" asks Ronald who look kinda pissed.


    "We..." says Gerald after he takes from his backpack two smoke grenades. "Are going to use these."


    "Good plan," says Ronald smiling at the old man.


    Then Mike saw two dozen zombies who are slowly walking in their directions. He was about to pull his UZI, but Ronald throws the first smoke grenade at those zombies. While the grenade was flying to them, these three survivors have taken left way, and they are running into a parking site, a place where they can find plenty of cars that would help them drive on Haga.

 Road to Haga - Part 2

    ---


    One week ago, in a supermarket close to the building where twenty plus survivors will stay later this day, there is a teenager on the cashier desk and he is doing what cashiers do, scan the products, asks for money at the customer, and give the change to customers who have paid too much. The cashier''s name is Mike, and this guy, is hating his job, not only because his co-workers are making fun of him, but it is the fact the money he got for an hour, it a disgrace even for slaves who are working in Brazil.


    One customer who wears a surgical mask on his face walks into the store, while Mike is looking quite amused at that guy but he is holding is laughing because he does not want to have his salary cut, not again, this month he already got cut for two times because of his annoying co-workers who have blamed him for lighting a cigarette in a storage room. "Filthy Gen Z spoiled brat," says Mike to himself when he remembers those times, but then he realizes he is also a Gen Z, but not a spoiled brat.


    The customer with surgical masks takes from a shelf a kitchen knife, and also a large box with cookies and a Coca- Cola bottle, and Mike does not even care why to do this guy needs a kitchen knife because a customer is a customer, and also, today was the day he finally decides to quit this dammed job. The customer with surgical masks approaches the cashier desk and those things he has taught there, to let Mike scan it by using the scanner every grocery store or supermarket has. After he has finished scanning, the customer paid Mike and he runs from the store, without even taking the rest, which made Mike quite upset because his co-workers will maybe do a thing and tell their boss that he is stealing the money from the cash register.


    Mike put the money back into the cash register, and then he heard a sound "BANG" outside like something has thrown a grenade or something have exploded. Mike leaves the cashier spot for a few seconds to look outside what is happening. And at that time, two co-workers of Mike have decided to go into the cash register, take all the money from there, and putting into the Mike backpack they have stolen a while ago. But when they approach the cash register, those two heard screaming from Boss'' office and they have decided to run there to see what was happening. But when they arrive there, they were greeted by their boss who is now a zombie, and another zombie, the one who was biting his neck. These got attacked by those zombies who not much later, have started to eat their organs like crows eating a wild animal body.


    Mike is still outside, and he saw there is a car accident between a truck and a bus. The truck was not carrying gas, just some pallets with supplies for a market, and on the bus, eight civilians were just dead, but there was somebody who has left somehow from the bus and he is walking around. The people who were there and looking at the accident, have decided to go and try to help the man, and Mike was coming there too, so how is that survivor holding.


    When a man approached that "survivor of the crash", the survivor already jumped on him and start biting his face. The image was horrifying for those people, and also for Mike, who has instantly thrown up. While that zombie was biting the man, a few men wanted to take that thing from there, but one of them got attacked by that thing again, but this time, he bites the neck of someone. He bites so hard, that this man has instantly fallen and laid on the ground. Other citizens were trying to help him, but when he opens his eyes, he got reanimated as a zombie and start biting another person, this time a black female who will become later a zombie. Mike remained far from those people and he realizes something. All of the zombie-apocalypse video games and movies are not a wasted time like his father said one day, now he will have to use the techniques learned to acquire liberty and be alive.


    The tale has been stolen; if detected on Amazon, report the violation.


    Mike runs into the store to alert his co-workers, but it was already too late, he saw his own co-worker, the one who intentionally light a cigarette into the storage room to then blame Mike for doing it, laying on the floor and trying to scream for help, while a zombie was eating his whole ass. Mike has weirdly smiled at that bastard and he says to him in a weird tone.


    "You get what you deserve."


    Then, Mike runs into a shelf and takes from there as fast as he can do, a knife, also a pan and he saw there something between the refrigerators which contains mineral water and juices, a crowbar. Mike takes the crowbar and he runs to that zombie who was eating his co-worker''s ass. He takes a swing and with one hit, he destroyed the head of that zombie who then is laying, with his destroyed face, on his co-worker''s ass, between the checks.


    "Thank you!" yelled the co-worker to Mike who is then is doing another swing with the crowbar. "Wait..." says the co-worker who was already too late.


    Mike has done the last swing with his crowbar, who has broken his co-worker''s head. And after he has done that, he takes his backpack who was already on the floor, he runs to another shelf and he takes from there every supply he can get, a few chocolate bars, water bottles from the refrigerator, a few great sources of food in cans, and he also takes from another shelf three pieces of bread. And before he was about to leave the place, he takes off his shirt which represents the logo of this supermarket, and yelled.


    "I QUIT!"


    Then, Mike runs into a hideout while he is carrying a whole backpack with supplies, and the hideout he is running to is a huge block where a few people were running there, the huge block where he will stay for a while and where he will meet the other two survivors which will help him go to the dock to steal a boat to help them escape this country. While he was running to that building, he also saw Ronald, who is at a few meters distance from him and runs to the same building.


    ---


    In the present day, on the block which contains three floors with cars, they are searching for a car who can help them dive into this situation, a jeep to be specific. They could take any other car, but a jeep offers to them a great chance to survive these big waves of zombies.


    These three survivors are already on the second floor, and they have found a jeep parking somewhere here. Mike arrives first at that jeep and he noticed it is looked, so, Ronald takes off Mike and he tells both of them to get away. The two take a few steps back, while Ronald is breaking the glass of the jeep by using his hammer from the backpack he got after he changed with someone''s tools on the second day of this infection or apocalypse. He successfully broke the jeep window, he gets first on the jeep and he tries to turn on the car like thieves from GTA Games are doing, trying to turn it on by working on some warriors. Then Gerald, comes to the jeep and he is sitting on the passage seat, he then unlocks the doors on the back of this jeep, and there enters Mike.


    When Mike has entered the back of the jeep, he found there two shotguns, and also three boxes of shells that belong to the shotguns.


    "Wicked," says Mike.


    "What?" he asks Ronald taking a look at Mike, and then he found there two shotguns. "Thank God for Americans!"


    After a few minutes, the jeep starts and Ronald is driving this car from this parking lot into the streets of Holland.

 Road to Haga - Part 3

    A few minutes later, our three survivors are on a jeep, who will help them go into Haga are about to encounter a major problem on their survival, gas who is about to run down. One of them drives the jeep, which is Ronaldo, because Mike doesn''t know how to drive, and the other guy, doesn''t drive that well when this vehicle is automatic.


    "So..." says Mike who is looking at the window on the back seat. "Can we turn on the radio?"


    "It will not work, kid." says Gerald who is not even trying to turn on the radio and he is looking through the windshield. "If there is no light or any electricity in the city, the radio will not even budge."


    "At least it is worth a try."


    "Alright... But you owe me a coffee if it doesn''t work." says Gerald who is turning on the radio of the jeep.


    Ronald is ignoring them and he is focusing on driving this jeep on the streets, while it tries to ignore some zombies who are slowly walking to the street. But then, he stops focusing on the road and now it listens to the radio, which is working now.


    "Does anyone hear me!? I repeat! We are stuck in Drachten! I do not know how we are going to keep all of these walkers, zombies. or who the fuck are some people calling it nowadays! Fuck! We need help! If someone hears us! Please! Ple-OH GOD! ARGGHHH!!"


    "Martinez!" yells another person from the station. "OH GOD! AHHHHH!"


    Gerald closes the radio, and all three of them are frightened because they have witnessed somebody dead on a Radio, and they have also realized that this radio station is working. Mike, was then looking at the gas indicator.


    "We should put some gas."


    "We will." says Ronald who is feeling quite terrified after the thing he was a witness.


    ---


    At the beginning of this apocalypse, in a car parking lot, there was a guy, who was wearing a costume and was about to leave his car. When he left the parking lot, somebody leaves the dark corner he was hiding, and he is going straight to the car the dude has left from it. He then tries to open the car by doing the classic trick he learned in one episode of a show called "Powerpuff Girls". After he opened the car, he saw there the wallet, he takes the money and at the moment he was about to leave the car, he heard shouting.


    The narrative has been taken without authorization; if you see it on Amazon, report the incident.


    "HEY!"


    The guy, who was Ronald by the way, turns back and he saw the guy who left the car unlocked who is in front of him. And Ronaldo has decided to use his legs and run as fast as he could from there, but the guy who had his money from the car stolen has not given up that easily, because he gets on his car, he turns on his engine and he drives to Ronald, hoping he will at least go through him and hurting him bad. But this did not happen and instead something else tragic was happening.


    After Ronald has escaped from the Third Floor of the parking lot building, he is now heading to the second floor, but there he saw, that thing that will make his life much harder and stressful, he saw his first zombie, dressed in sports clothes and having a red cap on his head with hair. The zombie was about to go near him, and Ronaldo thought this guy was kind of a friend of the man he stole money from, so he decides to push him out of the way, and continue running. But the man who is driving the car has not stopped when the zombie was in front of him, but when he saw it, he pushed the brake and the car stopped a few centimetres from the zombie who has seen the guy and he climbs his front trunk.


    The guy left his car, cursing at the man, and he tried to take him down, but the zombie jumps on him and he starts bitting his neck, which made the guy screaming, yelling for help and trying to take the monster off him, but he was too strong. Then, another zombie comes from the dark close to them, and this one is wearing a hoodie with cannabis and he jumps on the man, also eating him, the part the other zombie dude is going to let him eat it. Ronald was still there and he saw the thing those zombies are doing to the man he was stealing from and he decides to charge there with a knife he is always carrying when he is stealing, and he is attacking those things.


    At first, it stabbed the first zombie neck, but this did not work and this made Ronald realize that those things are not human anymore, more like the zombies he has heard out from an old comic book he got as a birthday present from his uncle. It knew what he has to do, and he is doing it, he stabs the first zombie head, and he stabbed the other one head. Then he looks at the man and he is feeling terrible. "He is my fault," he thought to himself. "If it wasn''t me... This man would''ve lived.".


    He saw the man trying to say something and he said to him, he lasts words, which will haunt him for his entire life. "T-Thanks... For... killing... me.". And then the dude is breathing his lasts minutes on Earth, while Ronald is feeling guilty for stealing from someone like him. He throws the money at him and he runs from the parking lot.


    When he left the parking lot, he saw a few people, including Mike, who are running into a building close, who is the one he is going to stay with for a while, and where he is going to meet Mike and Gerald.

 Road to Haga - Part 4

    Later on this day, these three survivors have arrived at a Gas station. They have come there because their jeep is running low in gas and it is risky searching for gas, especially in a zone where somebody has died on the radio. These survivors have arrived in Drachten, a place where this outbreak has struck every city on Earth, but also a place where the helicopter who was visiting them and told them to head to Haga, has crashed into a building, but they will never know that because their plan it is to take on the A6 highway until they will arrive in Haga.


    Ronald is about to enter the gas station and search for some supplies there. But, at the moment he was close to entering the room, his old friend who was a soldier in the past stops him, by using his machete he found on the concrete close to pump gas. He then whispered to him to look out the window of the building.


    Ronald is looking on the window and he sees there three zombies who are eating a corpse of a human who probably got there recently. These three have seen zombies who were eating other zombies'' corpses, but this is happening in cases where human meat is running low. Ronald is looking at Gerald, and he is telling him to go into the back of the store and check if there are some canisters left. He also told him that they will try and take gas from other gas.


    "And who will do that?"


    "I think I can do it," says Gerald. "Back when I was in the Army, we''ve taken a lot of gas from the enemy trucks for ours."


    "Good. I am going to take those canisters, and you are going to take out gas from there. And Mike..."


    Support the author by searching for the original publication of this novel.


    When Ronald was looking for Mike, he saw him coming back from the other gas station, he is carrying two canisters of gas.


    "Guys! I found the canister full of gas. It is enough?"


    "Enough for half of our road." says Ronald. "Which type of gas it is?"


    "Diesel." says Mike who is coming closer to them, and he hands the canister he found to them.


    "It is good." says Ronald. "We could try to use this gas, and then we will check at the other station."


    "If we encounter any." says Gerald. "We don''t know how far it is to the next gas station. It could be from the next city we are going in, or the other ones might be already empty."


    "We''ve better take this gas and risking since there are some zombies there." he shows the zombies who are in the building and others who are walking slowly on the highway who will lead them to Haga. "And you probably don''t want to risk your life for a few more canisters of gas. Who knows what the road is looking like and if it will be available."


    "What do you mean, Cashier?"


    "Well... What if there is a whole truck who is blocking the entire road, and other cars, like the one we encountered last time when we were scavenging in the city."


    "You might be right." says Gerald, and he is looking at Ronald. "We have to risk it. But for now. We''ve got everything."


    "Whatever you say." says Ronald who is taking those two canisters and he is pouring into the jeep they have "taken" from a parking slot.


    While Ronald was pouring the gas into that jeep, Mike has seen somebody in that building while he was looking at the window. One of the zombies who were in that building is looking exactly like one of his high school classmates who helped him one day overcome his phobia of spiders. Gerald saw him and asked why he is looking at the window. He told him that one of those guys there is a friend from high school. Gerald felt bad to hear that and he tried to make Mike feel better but he hoped in the truck when Ronald has finished with the gas.


    When they were ready, they have left the gas station, and left those three zombies blocked in the gas station, who were looking at the window when the jeep was leaving.

 Road to Haga - Part 5

    Almost thirty minutes later, the survivors have arrived in the next city whose known as Harlingen. And that city has offered a shocking surprise for those three male survivors. A few broken cars have blocked their road to the city, and there is an immense wave of zombies there.


    "We''ve made a good decision to not take too much gas." says Ronald who is in the driver''s seat and is looking at that pile of cars that is blocking his road. "Now, what?"


    "We will have to leave the car and find a way out of this city." says Gerald after he put a backpack on and has a dagger equipped in case he will have to slash a zombie''s neck or stab their head.


    "I am with you, dude." says Mike taking out a machete from the back of the jeep, and a backpack that contains a small size of supplies such as food, bandages, and two knives.


    Ronald is looking in the car torpedo, and he sees there a revolver, who is having a small box of bullets made for that revolver. He is smiling, and he looks at his friends who were meeting them a few days ago when the apocalypse has started.


    "We have one more gun. and this one is mine." he says while he is showing them that revolver.


    "Nice find." says Mike who is trying to make Ronald feeling better that he finds a gun, even though they have a few guns in their backpacks, but in Gerald''s backpack.


    These three survivors are leaving the jeep behind and enters the closest building, which is a house that got busted pretty heavily. Almost every window of that house is broken, and the door doesn''t even exist which concluded that this house was a war zone when the apocalypse was happening in this city. When they have entered the building, Mike has seen one zombie who is crawling to them, groaning and with his legs butchered.


    "This bastard is still alive?" asks Ronald.


    Stolen novel; please report.


    "They haven''t killed him completely." says Gerald getting closer to that poor zombie, and he is stabbing the zombie head with his dagger. "You remember that zombies are not truly dead if they are not stabbed in the head?"


    "I remember, old geezer." says Ronald who is looking at that veteran who is giving him that look to be cautious at the things he might say in the future.


    "Guys. We have to leave this building." says Mike who is pointing at the stairs, where eight zombies are walking slowly to them.


    "Shit." says Gerald who is taking the dagger from the zombie''s head, and he runs together with the other two survivors to the exit of the building.


    When they left that building, they encountered three more zombies who are turning at them and looked at them. Gerald saw Ronald who was about to take out the revolver he found, but he tells him to not do it and instead, use the knives since the noise will draw attention to those zombies. He put the revolver back, and he charged Gerald at those zombies, while Mike, is trying to block the door by using a dumpster that contains a few zombie''s limbs. He successfully blocks the exit door from the back of the building, and he turns around to the other two survivors and saw Ronald who is stabbing the last zombie in the neck.


    "Are you alright, kid?" asks Gerald to Mike.


    "Yes. But... I have found several zombie arms and legs into that dumpster." says Mike who is indicating the dumpster he moved.


    "Don''t say it." says Ronald who is going closer to see those limbs cut. "It looks like there was somebody, or it is still here, and killing zombies."


    "Even if somebody is still there, this place is filled with zombies. Probably has left this area long ago."


    "You might be right, dude." says Mike. "But we should get going, we don''t know if any of the zombies there could use windows."


    These three survivors are continuing their walking to the next building, where the things there seems much more peaceful, but still bloody. Ronald has seen a picture of an old couple on the floor, who is covered in blood, and at a few small feet from him, there is that old man from the photo, who is having a pistol on his left hand and a big wound on his head.


    Ronald felt sad for that man, so he decides to put that picture into his jacket pocket at his heart area, and level the corpse alone, saying a soft "Sorry..." to the poor old bastard who has lost this battle against zombies. The survivors are leaving the next building and headed to the main street where they see there are a few cars, who might get them into Haga if they have fuel and batteries.

 Road to Haga - Part 6

    On the streets of the small city known as Harlingen, those three survivors who are of different age, but have the same skin colour, are searching for a working car, since there is a big truck and a few other broken cars that are blocking their way to the city and the main road to Haga. Mike, who was working as a store clerk in the past, sees a car, but it also saw there a zombie, who is in the driver seat and blocked thanks to the safety belt. Ronald goes to that car with his knife ready, but when he touches the door, the alarm of the car started buzzing. And this is a bad sign in a zombie apocalypse.


    "Dammit, Ronald!" says Gerald looking with an angry reaction at the guy who used to steal cars in the past. "You had one fucking job. One fucking job!"


    "Sorry." says Ronald who is feeling bad that a few zombies are coming on their way from all of the directions.


    "We gotta be ready to use the guns, boys!" says Gerald who is taking out his gun from the backpack.


    Ronald and Mike are also taking their guns out from their backpacks, and all three of them, have started to shot in those zombies who are walking or running at them. They are shooting at them until none of them will be alive again.


    ---


    One week earlier, back in that building from Groningen, there is one old man, who is living on the third floor of the building, on house number 305. This man is known as Gerald, and today he will suffer the most because when he wakes up from his sleep at 10 AM, he realized it wasn''t the alarm who wake him up, it was the noise outside the house. So, he put up a pair of pants and goes looking outside where he sees horrible things.


    People fighting each other, which are zombies since Gerald did not have much knowledge about zombies, but he has some knowledge about fighting. He saw a guy who is eating alive by three other people on the corner. One guy is running from one zombie, but eventually, he got caught by the other one who came from the east and pinned him down. Gerald has also seen a group of people who are running to this building, which to be honest, was pretty big, and some people consider it a great shelter.


    Gerald was leaving the window, and feeling worried and uneasy he was calling for his wife.


    Help support creative writers by finding and reading their stories on the original site.


    "Martha. Martha!"


    He is looking in the bathroom, and in the living room, but no sign of his wife who was married to him for forty years. He had a bad feeling about this, so he put some clothes on him, and runs from the room, but when he opens the room, he saw his wife, who is alive and well, but worried, just like his husband. She hugs Gerald and she is feeling uneasy since this thing has never happened and her poor health couldn''t handle this situation like the other people from this building. Gerald goes into the room with his wife and both of them are locking the door and sitting on a couch, and try to open the TV.


    The first program on the TV, which was a Holland news program told them that today it has started an unknown infection which is turning people into zombies or walkers like the ones from the most recognized apocalypse zombie movies and series such as The Walking Dead, Shawn of the Dead, Cooties, Dead Snow, etc.ˇ­ The lady on the news told them to keep calm and wait for the reinforcements to come and seek shelter somewhere safe. She also told that they should be careful to not get bitten because one bite could make them zombies.


    Gerald was looking at his wife worried, and he saw that she has a bite on her right arm, Which broke his heart and made his wife feeling uneasy and terrified. The reporter also told them that there is no cure available to cure this disease and the only option to combat these things is to only aim for their brains or cut their limbs.


    Gerald is looking at his wife and starts crying.


    "Dear..." says his wife who is hugging him and also starts crying since she will become one of those monsters pretty soon. "We... We are going to die?"


    "I-I-I... I am sorry, Martha!" says Gerald who couldn''t stop his crying until his wife has become a monster.


    When his wife has become a zombie, Gerald was running in the kitchen and stabbed his dead wife''s brain by using a kitchen knife. He did a good stab on his wife''s grey hair from the head and a perfect one to kill the brain of the zombie. Gerald is thankful that he took those training courses from the military, but he started crying and sobbing for the rest of the day, close to his wife''s corpse, until Mike has come into his room and tried to help him, which was on the next morning.


    ---


    A few moments later, those three survivors have killed all of thirty zombies who were about to come close to them. They took a short break to breathe and congratulate each other for doing such a good job at aiming from the head. Ronald was most likely using his knife to stab the zombie''s head since he could handle a gun quite well cause he always preferred to use the knife when it comes to fighting.


    Ten minutes later, they continued searching for a working car, and after another ten minutes, they found one, but who has low gas. These three survivors didn''t mind that since Haga it is getting closer to each step. But now, these three survivors must seek shelter somewhere since the night it is about to come, and driving on the night in a zombie apocalypse is never a good decision.

 Road to Haga - Part 7

    The night it is about to come. And these survivors have concluded to remain in this part of the city, but remain hidden into a secure part of the building. These survivors could try and drive into the night, but like they have experienced one time, it was a disaster and they lost two people to the zombies and even the jumpers ( the ones who are jumping around the city, scaring survivors and pinning the survivors down ).


    After they entered a building, they do found a good, shelter, on the next floor, which is the attic, and that part doesn''t contain a window. And not having a window in a house is not good, but when we talk about the apocalypse, this is an extraordinary and great situation, since there are zombies like climbers. They also take from the living room that couch which is in a good shape, and two mattresses to help them sleep well. Mike has also taken five pillows, and Ronald has found three covers for them.


    They are now choosing which one are they going to sleep, so Mike has taken the mattress and those two guys were arguing which one should sleep on the couch. Ronald wanted to sleep since he did a lot of work today, but Gerald also did a lot of work, he even shoot a few zombies, which means that he protected them. Mike said to those two guys who were arguing for almost a minute.


    "Why don''t you two are playing Rock, Paper, and Scissors for the couch?"


    "You want to play it, old man?" asks Ronald to Gerald.


    "Why not, rascal?" he replied to Ronald.


    These two survivors are playing, Rock, Paper and Scissors for the place where they are going to sleep. But, after one single round, where Ronald use Paper, and Gerald has used Rock. Rock wins, and Gerald got to sleep on the couch, which is pretty comfortable for Gerald. Ronald told him to "Shut up and sleep!".


    These three survivors were about to sleep, but then, Mike has decided to remain awake for a while, cause you could be killed at any moment in the building while you are sleeping. This is a weird situation for them since, in that building where they used to stay, they were much safer cause of the rooms they were sleeping in. For example, the room Mike acquired, had a huge drawer that blocked the main door, and Mike could enter that room, only using the stairs which are mostly used when a fire has struck the building.


    While Mike, it is awake, he is just staying still on the mattress and he got a pistol prepared for any emergencies. While he was awake, he remembered an important detail about these zombies when he used to stay in that building together with the other three survivors.


    ***


    On the second floor, all of those nineteen remained survivors at the building, are looking down, at an entire horde of zombies who have blocked the main road, and their only way out of this dammed building. Those nineteen survivors who have gathered at the front of that window were mesmerized, shocked and mad at how their situation is going. Low food supplies and low ammunition.


    If you stumble upon this tale on Amazon, it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it.


    "There are a lot of zombies down there." says one survivor who is ginger and wears ripped clothes.


    "What are we going to do?" asks one of the girls to that survivor, and she is looking around to see if anyone had any idea, but no one replies, and she screamed. "WE ARE GOING TO DIE!"


    "De Fuq?" asks one of the survivors after she saw that girl reaction.


    "I cannot die right now. I am a celebrity on TikTok, and I have money to withdraw."


    "Can someone kill this, bitch?" says someone in the crowd, but thankfully, that autistic kid was still screaming for someone to help her and he''ll them how important she is then that man from the third floor who has both legs cut.


    Gerald was going closer to the window, he looked at that area filled with zombies, and he is wondering how they could kill all of those zombies. He had an idea, but it is quite risky. He could try and use all of those corpses from the building who are completely dead and cannot be reanimated if you even try to let a zombie bite that corpse. Thankfully, when he said his idea to some survivors, a few of them agreed, and others were unsure since that man was closed by himself in a room for a long time with a dead body.


    Out of nineteen survivors, only ten agreed to do that, the rest were just going into their room and protecting themselves, if this plan will fail. Their idea is to use all of those corpses and throw them outside, while numerous zombies were enjoying eating a corpse, they will leave the building, run it to a store, took everything they could carry and run back into the hideout. The good part, there were almost fifty corpses, but the bad news, those weren''t attracted many zombies since some of them do not even eat the corpses who were once zombies.


    Gerald''s idea wasn''t going to work, and people didn''t blame him for at least trying. That dude was even throwing his dead wife into that crowd, and he cried while he was doing that since this was the only woman in his life who completely understand him.


    They were thinking about other ideas on how they could escape this building and run for supply, but thankfully, there was a chopper who was passing by their building. These survivors are quickly running to the roof to get his attention to stop and take them from this Hellhole. But, when they arrive at the roof, the chopper has dropped two crates of food supply, ammo, weapons and new clothes. And into that box, there was a letter. Mike grabbed that letter and read later in a loud voice. "We are coming back to take you and bring you into a new home, but before that, try and survive as long as you can. Our military will try to clean the entire country. Signed by, Z.A.F.!"


    "Who''s Z.A.F.?" asked one of the survivors.


    "No idea. It isn''t written here." says Mike to that survivor who is coming at him, he takes that latter, look at it and he gave back to him, and address it to everyone. "For now, we have to wait, right?"


    "Most likely." says a large crowd.


    Ronald, Mike and Gerald are agreeing to stay put and wait for the help to come. But unfortunately, the help hasn''t come at a good time, when the evolution viruses have struck the world and transformed the zombies into much more deadly predators than they were two days ago.

 Road to Haga - Part 8

    Thankfully, the team did not encounter any trouble with sleeping. Mike has slept a few moments later when he was looking outside, with the gun in his hands. When these three survivors have wake up, first, they are packing their things up and left the attic, then the house and heading to the vehicle they found yesterday.


    Gerald is sitting in the driver seat, while Ronald and Mike are sitting on the seat behind and being carefully at their surroundings. You never knew when you encounter a zombie or a psychopath who wanted to put bullets into their heads. While Gerald was driving slowly the car, he told them.


    "We do not want to waste gas, alright."


    "So you drive slowly? Better move, old man." says Ronald to his driver who thanks him for saying that "sweet" thing by smiling.


    "Alright, Rascal." says Gerald back to Ronald, and Mike is just sitting there, wondering, why he is there and feeling like a third wheel or something similar.


    The car leaves the street successfully, attracting two zombies who were walking fast toward them, but Mike and Ronald took their knives and stabbed them. Mike stabbed the head of one of those head, and Ronald just slashed his throat and pushed him back, landing on a pile of three corpses who were lying there.


    "You shouldn''t be that careless, you know?" says Gerald to those two survivors. "You never knew what those sons of bitches can do."


    "Okay. Sorry." says Mike to Gerald. "I just wanted to be safe, you know."


    "We will be much safer if you two will close the windows, enjoy the ride and be careful if a big horde will come at us."


    "There is no chance." says Ronald. "Yesterday, I think we''ve killed all of them in this city."


    "Maybe yes, maybe not. We can never be sure about that, Rascal."


    These three survivors are going with the vehicle they have taken from the city and heading to the Docks, the place where these three survivors are going to take their boat into safety. But firstly, they have to go to another place to take a new car, since this one has fuel for only eleven more kilometres. These dudes should''ve taken the fuel out of their car and put it into that car, but, since it was morning and most of them felt dizzy since they haven''t slept that well five days ago because of zombies attacks and all, this is understandable.


    Stolen content warning: this content belongs on Royal Road. Report any occurrences.


    Their road remained the same, go through Amsterdam, then Leiden and reach Haga. But now, these survivors are taking a rural road instead of a highway or a national one because most of those roads are blockages made by zombies, corpses lying on the road, cars and trucks who crashed and probably a helicopter who did a heavy land in the middle of a street and blown everything up. This is rarely happening, but it could be happening.


    ***


    A few minutes later, their car has stopped, into an area who is almost empty, besides the small farm which is located three minutes from their car. They are getting out of their vehicles after discussing what they could do, and Ronald suggested going to the closest house, take a car from there and use it for the rest of their travelling or pumping the gas out of that vehicle. Gerald and Mike agreed on the plan, and they go to the main road, ignoring the zombies who are cut down, laying on the road, or the cars who are somehow blocking their way.


    While they were walking on the main road, carrying their backpacks and pistols, they spotted a tank, which is off the road, and crashed into a big tree. Mike suggested to those two survivors.


    "Should we take the tank guys? It might cause some noises but we will be fine until we reach Haga."


    "Do you have a driver license for this thing?" asks Gerald to the guy who proposes this scheme.


    "We are in a zombie apocalypse. Does a license count?"


    "We will not take a tank, Mike. This could be easily stopped if a horde is surrounding us. Don''t you remember that night when a tank came, they surrounded it and start attacking the tank, who made him drive slowly, and destroyed one building filled with other survivors?"


    "I do remember. Sorry."


    "... Let''s move!" says Gerald who is continuing walking to the closest house.


    "Your idea was good, but I am with Gerald." whisper Ronald to Mike. "It might be senile and crazy, but at least he got experience in a war he fought."


    "I think you are right." whispered Mike to Ronald.


    These three survivors have arrived at a small farm, and there they saw, a small van, who could help them arrive at their destination. But, when they were about to go and take the van, they encounter a fat zombie who seems to be the corpse of the owner of that Farm. Gerald is quickly shooting the zombie''s head, and he with the team, is quickly taking that van and drive as fast as possible to Amsterdam.


    The zombie who got shot in the head is getting upon his head, and his, which is doing a ridiculous process like a mutant, alien or a machine in a movie, is pulling the ammo which hit the head of that zombie. That ammo falls onto the road, and the zombie is walking back to the barnyard. The team, which was at a far distance, they have encountered another type of zombies without knowing, "Healer.", a zombie who can heal himself.

 Road to Haga - Part 9

    A few hours later, those three survivors have arrived in Amsterdam, but they have encountered another problem on their road, but this one might be quite hard for them. In the front of this city, there is a wall made by a truck trailer and spikes who have a few piles of zombies there, some of them still using their heads and growling, other who are dead for the second time. Thanks to the owner of that van who let the keys in contact when he got zombified. Without his help, they would have to search another car, or settle in a house for a while and try to contact the military with a phone. Yes, the electricity is down, but in some houses could be a phone or a detector that does not require electricity.


    But, these three survivors, have decided to find a way to go besides this city. Gerald and Ronald have investigated the area to see if they found an opening, while Mike it is in the van and he is preparing for anything.  While he waits for those survivors to come back with good news, Mike turns on the radio, wondering if someone is out there and is using the radio.


    "D-D-Do someone hears me?!" says a woman voice on the radio on a random frequency.


    Mike has observed that this van got that type of gadget the truck drivers or some bus drivers are using to communicate with each other. He takes it, turns it on and he told the woman on the radio.


    "Are you alright?"


    "...W-What? Do you h-hear me?" asks the woman on the radio.


    "Yes. I hear you loud and clear."


    "A-Are you from t-the Military?"


    "Sorry, lady. But we aren''t from the Military. We are survivors, just like you."


    "W-Where are you? Could find a way to come here and take me to the docks?"


    "What''s your location?"


    "M-Main. France. Are you close?"


    Mike sighs, and then she tells that lady one bad news.


    This narrative has been purloined without the author''s approval. Report any appearances on Amazon.


    "Sorry, madame. But we are currently in Holland, and we are heading to Haga, where we are going to take a boat and head into an island."


    "Do you think islands could be safe? I mean, do zombies even swim?"


    "For now, they do not."


    "What do you mean for now?"


    "Huh?... You haven''t observed any zombies mutations in your zone?"


    "What mutations? Do they fly or not?"


    "Not exactly. There are the ones who are eating zombies, but those are somehow half-dead-half-alive and their only goal is to eat a zombie to became full zombies. I saw one of them who was using a knife to stab one zombie and eat his back then go straight to our people without a knife."


    "Dear, God. That it is brutally."


    "And that''s not all."


    "There are more?!"


    "Probably much more types than I know. There is this one who climbs the buildings, and drags people from the closed windows and throw them on the ground. Thankfully, they could get easily killed when they reach high floor walls."


    "Jesus Christ."


    ***


    Meanwhile, into Amsterdam city. Ronald and Gerald are stabbing a few zombies into their head by using those kitchen knives. Gerald has sliced the throat of zombies and he pushes to the other, who just jumped on that zombie and grabs his stomach. Right when he was about to open with his bare hands, Ronald is stabbing a zombie in the head.


    "Undead down." says Ronald to Gerald, retrieving the knife from that zombie back of the head.


    "You do always have to say that every time you kill an undead?" asks Gerald.


    "Yes. It is something wrong?"


    "... If you do not yell to attract other zombies, then you are good."


    These two are going into a store. Before they are opening, Ronald and Gerald take a look inside and saw there one fat zombie who is barfing and vomiting everywhere. The store has food, but taking supplies from there could be risky cause they are spoiled and eating food that got contained by a zombie would most likely result in an infection. They are passing that store by and continue to see if they found a way to leave this city. Luckily they found a two truck.


    "I have a plan." says Ronald to Gerald looking at that tow truck.


    "Do you think two trucks can move a truck trailer?"


    "We would not know until we try."


    "Well, better risk than walking all day to Haga, right?"


    Ronald is going to that tow truck, but when he opens the door, the alarm goes off, and this is a bad signal cause now zombies are going to be alerted and they will walk, run, climb or crawl to those two survivors.


    Mike, who was still talking to that lady on the radio, tells her that he will go and help his friends cause the alarm could be heard from his direction, which is roughly 300 meters. He takes the guns, put on his almost empty backpack and runs in the direction where his teammates have turned on that dammed two truck. Mike has taken three pistols, a machete, two UZIs and a Machete to fight.

 Road to Haga - Part 10

    After a few seconds of running into the city, and avoiding a few zombies bites, Mike has successfully got close to Ronald and Gerald. He passes to them that backpack with guns. Quickly, Ronald has taken the first gun, which is a UZI, and Gerald has taken a pistol. Then, these three survivors, when they see a lot of zombies coming at them, they have started blasting their guns at them.


    Ronald has killed three zombies by shooting their head with the pistol, while Mike is using his UZIs to kill 14 zombies in the heads. Since Mike has some video game experience, this doesn''t seem scary to him when the first days of zombies started. Gerald is just stabbing those zombies and cutting their heads with those kitchen knives and cleavers. He stabbed one zombie head and let that knife into his head, and then he stabbed the other with the second one into the neck, then he quickly takes the knife from the first corpse, and stabbed him back into the head. He retrieves those two knives and jumps on the other one, but Ronald has shot that zombie in the head.


    Gerald is looking back at Ronald, and he thanks for doing that shot. Ronald is reloading his gun by using another fully loaded clip. Mike is also reloading his gun, and he shoots those eight zombies from the other side of that tow truck that was running at him.


    "Damn those runners!" says Mike after he killed the last zombie who runs to that tow truck.


    "We are almost ready." says Gerald running to that tow truck with his knives with blood on their blade. "Prepare the truck, Ronald."


    "Sure." say Ronald who is kicking that zombie who was coming on his left, and then he shoots that zombie in the head. "the Military couldn''t kill one of those, but we could kill almost 30 zombies."


    "Those bastards used to stay still in their base. No wonder this city or other parts of the world''s are such a mess, son." says Gerald to Ronald who heard him talking about the military and dissing them.


    Ronald is taking the wires under the wheel is used to direct the car, is conducting a few wires, who made the car turn on. They could''ve tried to search a zombie cadaver and search for a key, but they think that attempting to use Ronald car stealing skill would work much better than a key that might be broken in a worst-case scenario. Thankfully, Ronald successfully is turning on the car and jumps to the driver seat since he was the one who did the hard work at turning on the car. Mike and Gerald are going into the back seat.


    Stolen from its rightful place, this narrative is not meant to be on Amazon; report any sightings.


    Ronald is going back to that trailer that was blocking their way. When their tow truck arrived close to the trailer, Ronald and Gerald are using the hook to try and tie this trailer somehow. They found a way, a hole in the trailer, and use it to attach the hook into that hole. After they successfully put the hook into the trailer, they are signalling to Mike to put the gear forward and press the accelerator pedal.


    The trailer is successfully moving from their way, but it also made some horrible noises. Which are attracting some zombies. Ronald and Gerald are running back into the van they were driving from that van. Mike is leaving the truck fast, but without taking the pistol that was left there by Ronald. And that was the only pistol that only had a full clip of ammo made for pistols.


    They are entering the van in a good shape. Ronald is going at the driver seat, Mike on the other front seat, and Gerald on the backseat. But, when they did enter the van, the radio was still working and that woman was saying the same word.


    "Help! Help! Help! Mayday! Mayday! Mayday!"


    "A survivor?" asks Ronald.


    "Yes. But she is located in France."


    "How did you know?" asks Gerald.


    "I talked with her a bit, while you two were searching for a way out."


    "What you told her?" asks Ronald.


    "About our plan to go into the sea and the zombie types. She just told that the zombies there are the normal ones we have encountered so far."


    "There are not those zombies who are climbing on those who are running?"


    "No. That''s what she told me, but she also told me that she doesn''t know what to do."


    "Alright, we should talk this on the road, boys!" says Gerald who sees a few zombies walking to them. "The Undeads are walking and other zombies to us."


    The van is quickly leaving that place, and that van is travelling at a high speed through Amsterdam. They are travelling at a high speed until they arrive in the next city, where they will encounter a much bigger problem than the one earlier.


    ***


    A few days ago, the building where those three survivors were living, are encountering a hard time. Their shelter has both of those two doors broken, and the barricades also broken. But they do not know who did it because these three survivors were sleeping in the same room since in other rooms were a few zombie climbers who were close to drag them and drop them on the main road into the city. Luckily, there were not many people who died when those things have started to climb.


    These three survivors were sleeping like a baby and did not hear the survivors who were yelling for help, not the zombies could enter their room since it got tolerably locked up by Gerald, as a safety measure.


    When they wake up from their slumber and opened the door, a few zombies were in the hall and greeted them. Gerald saw those zombies, and he quickly locked the door back, while those two survivors are looking worried at Gerald, and he told them.


    "We are in danger."

 Road to Haga - Part 11

    After a while, these three survivors have finally made it to the last city which is on their way to safety, Leiden. A city with a rich cultural heritage, not only in science but also in the arts. Leiden has important functions as a shopping and trade centre for communities around the city. And this city is the only one who could help them get into Haga.


    But there is a problem, the main road of the city is blocked by a bunch of crashed cars, and also a part of an aeroplane which blocked almost all of those roads in the city which are leading to the highway. Their only option now is to go by foot to the docks or find other sets of wheels in this city.


    "I am sorry." says Ronald. "Guess driving through cities was a bad idea."


    "Don''t sweat it, kiddo." says Gerald putting his backpack and reloading his pistol. "At least it got us far enough. Now, we have to find another way to Haga, and then freedom."


    "Guys. Check this out!" says Mike pointing into a roof of a building a survivor, who is waving at them, and he holds, on the other hand, a sniper rifle.


    Mike was about to wave back at him, but that survivor on the roof is quickly pointing the sniper rifle at them and he was about to shoot him. But, thanks to Gerald''s military training, he drags put himself and Mike down, while Ronald is hiding on the right side of the vehicle.


    "What the fuck?" says Ronald. "Why he is shooting at us?"


    "Maybe he thinks we are infected." yelled Mike.


    "I don''t think so. Zombies cannot drive a vehicle."


    "But they can jump, right?" asks Mike.


    "They can jump and throw things, but they cannot drive a vehicle cause they do not have a brain." says Gerald who is feeling angry because Mike is saying some bullshits.


    The guy from the roof continues to shoot. he was close to hitting the car window where Ronald is hiding. And this made Ronald crawl to the other broken car who entered in collusion with the one who recently got hit by a sniper rifle bullet. He did an amazing job crawling to the next vehicle, but this doesn''t stop the sniper rifle dude who continued to shoot at him. He hit the concrete, which was almost three centimetres to him. Ronald lets a sigh of relief and he turns back to his squad, who is hiding by a barricade. Gerald sees him, and he quickly throws his gun at him.


    "Go and kill him."


    "What?" he asks Ronald not believing he has to kill a real person. "No way, man."


    "Why? Is it trying to kill us?"


    "He might think we are zombies, may-"


    "Go and kill him, now!" says the old man, who was close to getting hit by that bullet of the sniper dude.


    If you come across this story on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen from Royal Road. Please report it.


    Ronald did not want to do this thing, but he has no choice. He takes the pistol, Gerald rolled on the concrete to him, and he quickly runs to the other car. The sniper bullet was hitting the tire of the car where Ronald was running. After he arrived at the third car, he saw a zombie who is crawling from behind. He aims the gun at him without any regret and shoots his head. That zombie fall on the ground and Ronald is running to the building, which is not in that sniper dude visor.


    He got to the building, which is an apartment complex. He sees a few broken windows, smashed doors, and a few pieces of shattered glasses. This brought some nasty memories to Ronald, the ones he encountered at the building where he lived for a short while. That block got destroyed by monsters while he was sleeping. He sweated blood ( expression ) and he runs into the building while he is attacked by a few small zombies. He ignores most of them, or he pushed them while he was climbing the stairs to the roof.


    A few moments later, he arrived at the roof, and he observed the sniper it is at the other block. Ronald was about to go at the roof and tries to do a suicide mission, but thanks to the zombie climber, who was climbing the building where the sniper dude continues to shoot at the location where Ronald and Mike are hiding. That zombie climber is about to reach the sniper dude''s arms.


    "Whoa!" yelled the enemy when he saw that zombie who is climbing the building like a mountain goat, and he bashed the head of that one with the sniper rifle.


    Ronald shoots his pistol at that guy. This is not a good strategy since that pistol shoots only at a small distance, and the distance between them is almost one hundred meters. But, the bullet hits the enemy''s right arm, which made him drop the rifle, scream, and hide his scratch with the other hand. He yells at those survivors who shoot them, but Ronald continues to shoot one more bullet, which hits the knee of the enemy and made him fall on the roof.


    Now, that the enemy is incapacitated, Ronald sees a fallen huge antenna that made an unstable bridge to the building where the man is located. Ronald takes some courage and he slowly walks on the antenna while he keeps his balance cause every small mistake could conduct to death. If he falls, he will hit the concrete or one parked car at a distance of almost 30 meters. But if he is not going fast, he might get shot by that sniper rifle dude, if he will get quickly on his feet. And there is the situation that this antenna might collapse at any minute.


    Ronald is walking slowly on that antenna made of metal, while he is walking slowly, he is praying to God and he is feeling sorry that he couldn''t help those survivors back at the complex in Groningen. He is also feeling bad making fun of Gerald cause he was one of the most broken men in that building who is still standing in the face of danger.


    He arrived in that building, and he saw the enemy who was about to take out his sniper and shoot at Ronald but was slower than Ronald and this resulted in a shoot in the head. Ronald pulled the trigger as fast as he could and he shoots the head of that enemy, right between the eyes, the critical zone like some doctors from the war field would say. He goes closer to the corpse of the survivors and he sees his face. The enemy was not a man, it was an Asian woman. It looked so innocent and hurt. Almost every hand of her is covered in bandages. Ronald is feeling guilty to kill a survivor. Especially killing a girl.


    Ronald left the building without taking the sniper rifle, nor her backpack. He killed her, but he did not have the heart to throw the woman and the zombies on the street, nor to take her things. But, before he was about to head downstairs, he waved at his teammates to sign that everything it is fine and they could leave their hideout. While Ronald was heading downstairs, he got to the second floor, and then someone, bust through the door, waving a gun and aiming at Ronald, who quickly surrenders.


    The man who is aiming a gun at him is a fat Hungarian man who asks him in English.


    "Who are you?"


    "I am a survivor. Just like you, man."


    "W-W-What have you done to the girl?" he angrily asks toward Ronald.


    "S-She... She died due to a zombie who was climbing the building." lies Ronald to that man, who just hugs him, and he thanked him for freeing him from that crazy bitch.

 Road to Haga - Part 12

    Let''s recap for a little... Three survivors have wakened up in their apartment from a building in Groningen. These three have a plan to escape this building, and that it is by taking their chances to crawl into air vents who were leading them to the armoury room, a room made to store guns, riot shields and ammo. Since the military wasn''t going to rescue them, they instead gave them enough fire weapons, and some melee weapons to protect themselves against those nasty mutants.


    These three have successfully finished their first day of the mission, and when they landed in the armoury room, they observed that someone from the building is there, but his body. Apparently, he committed suicide by shooting a shotgun shell into his mouth and destroying his head. Mike got sick when he saw that head splashing on the ground, but Ronald and Gerald didn''t get sick, they instead feel awful cause he decided to die this way. While they were taking the important guns, Mike sees the body has the keys to this door. He takes the keys, but before he is about to use them, he asks his "friends".


    "Should be a good idea to open the door and go to the halls?"


    "No, idiot." says Ronald who is taking the keys from Mike. "The best idea would be to go back into the air vents, and remain there until the military would come."


    "What if they didn''t come?" asks Gerald, and Ronald is turning around, angry, he was about to push the old man, but he aims his gun at that corpse who was starting to move a hand and he shoots his first bullet from the Pistol into zombie chest, who stopped him from moving even an inch.


    "They can move even without a head?!" scream Mike.


    "Shh." warns Gerald. "We do not want to attract the ones in the hallway. Anyway, how many do you think are there?"


    "Probably an entire ocean, but what do you want to do, old man? We cannot do anything, except praying to be saved by the military."


    "... There is another way." says Gerald to those two survivors. "We could try and barricade this door back, but, to do that, we have to first find a way to the ground floor."


    If you stumble upon this narrative on Amazon, it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it.


    "We could take the air vents." says Mike.


    "Or we can try the fire stairs. The ones people are using when a fire erupts in a building. I think this one works even for zombies." jokes Mike, but nobody is laughing, which is making him feel quite awkward for him, and shame that he jokes in these hard times.


    All three of them later agrees to do a compromise. Mike is taking the other type of stairs, while Gerald and Ronald are taking the air vents. Mike has not encountered some dangerous zombies while he was taking the stairs, but when he was close to going downstairs, he encountered a few reanimated corpses who are having their back turned and blocking the way to the ground floor. But Mike, being on one floor, breaks the window of an apartment. When he breaks the window, he sees one zombie child who is walking faster to the window. He was close to grabbing Mike, but he uses his pistol and the shots the zombie child head, who falls on the floor of the house.


    He wanted to enter that house, but his gut is saying to not even try to do this shit since this might be a shit movie. He also remembers that rule from zombie movies: "Double-tap.". He goes to the other window of the same apartment, and this one leads to a kitchen. He enters the house by taking the window and he is heading into the room where the child got to shoot and zombied earlier. Mike shoots that kid again, and he falls on his knees. Feeling guilty that he killed an innocent child who didn''t know what to do. He stays there for a few more minutes, and then he breaks the door, and he uses his shotgun and pistol to kill the zombies on the first floor, while the other two survivors are taking the air vents to the ground floors.


    Ronald and Gerald are landing into the kitchen from a ground apartment, most likely the one from the room where the landlord was living, until they found him later on into the bathroom, having his legs cut and put into a bathtub. He was trying so hard to get out of that bathtub, but he didn''t make it at all, and he will never will because Gerald has quickly stabbed the poor guy head with a screwdriver he found in the air vents. After they finished the landlord, they get it to the business.


    Their strategy is simple. One of them, most likely Ronald, will open the door for a short time, hide behind the door, and opens back, while they are going to kill the zombies who entered the room. they did that a few times, and this worked, but after the third time they did that, Gerald and Ronald agree to take a small break.


    "I wonder how is that store clerk doing." says Ronald to Gerald.


    "He knows what he is doing." says Gerald reloading his UZIs he has taken from that armoury room. "Whatever he was doing in his previous life, he probably knows how to handle a gun as small as a pistol."

 Road to Haga - Part 13

    Mike has finally killed the last out of three zombies when he entered the next room. It was hard to kill them by using a single knife and stabbing their heads as Gerald taught him two days ago, while they were in another apartment designated as a training room by the owner of that room, and it was the one who got eaten alive last night while he was trying to save a little girl, but she also died that night due to a dog zombie who jumps on her and eating her face like a lump of meat in a big bone.


    After that, Mike is about to leave the second apartment, which was the one next to the one he entered via the window. He looks in the hallway, and he sees the other zombies who are just most of them crawling to Mike, or the other three who are slowly walking in his direction. Before he is about to leave the first floor, he takes few furniture pieces from the rooms of the apartment, such as a bid drawer, he then drags it into the hallway. When he got it there, he sues as a barricade, but he observed that this one is not enough, so he goes back to that apartment and takes another furniture piece, enough to block the right way where there are dozens of zombies.


    He successfully managed to block that way with only three small drawers, and one big drawer, and even put a lamp there, just as a measure precaution. After that, he goes downstairs and encountered another survivor there, but this one is in a critical case because his both legs are completely sawed. He sees Mike and asks him if he could kill him, but Mike told him he cannot. That man later asks Mike if he can borrow his pistol or the knife to put an end to his life. Mike gave him the knife, but before he was about to stab his neck, Mike told him.


    "I am sorry."


    "... It is my fault." whispers the man before Mike realizes that the man stabbed his throat by using Mike''s knife.


    Mike stood there, feeling extremely sad and depressed because a survivor that strong was taken down that easily. Sure, no one would survive in a zombie apocalypse without a pair of legs, but the fact that he killed around him six zombies, by using a pistol with a capacity of only eight bullets, is incredibly impressive for a survivor incapacitated like him.


    Mike takes back his knife and waits for that incapacitated man to transform into a zombie, who will later be killed by Mike.


    ***


    Ronald and Gerald are about to enter another apartment, but before they are about to do that, they heard choppers outside, close to their building. Ronald was close to going at the main doors, but he remembers that there are zombies, so he remains on the first floor, killing all of the zombies who remained on this floor, which isn''t as much as those from the ground floors, together with Gerald.


    Ronald has used a knife to cut the throat of a zombie, and throw it to an undead, who immediately started to eat that zombie, and he quickly stabbed that undead head before he was about to become a full zombie. He saw one zombie who was close to touching his face, and he responded to that thing by shooting the zombie head with a pistol that was used by Ronald''s left hand. That zombie falls on his back like a boxer who got knocked out instantly and forgot how to fall on his face.


    Gerald is shooting three zombies with an UZis landed by Ronald, and when the UZI didn''t have any ammo, he applied the shotgun to kill the eight reaming zombies, and almost hitting Ronald with one stray bullet. Ronald observed he dodged death again, and he looks angry at Gerald.


    The tale has been taken without authorization; if you see it on Amazon, report the incident.


    "Be careful with that thing, old man!"


    "Why you were in my front, Rascal?!" asks Gerald who is throwing the shotgun on the ground and reloads his UZIs.


    But before, Ronald was about to say something, one zombie, who had his entire face splattered by that shotgun shell, is suddenly rising from the ground. These two dudes are shocked by this thing because there isn''t a single zombie who can reanimate itself without a head or a brain. But this one can since it is a rare zombie type, which some people are calling "Indestructible". Ronald is taking the machete from the ground, and he was about to murder that zombie by cutting his entire limbs, but then, the door next to them is opened by a survivor who hides it in this building.


    "I need help!" says the survivor, whose name is Raluca by the way, who is covered in blood and having as a weapon only a butter knife.


    Gerald takes a look at the stairs this female survivor was taken to come at them. There he encountered three zombies who were coming to them, and the other four on the back. He looks at Ronald, who has successfully done a great move to cut the zombie leg who got reanimated, and he goes to those stairs, to take out those other zombies.


    ***


    Mike leaves the room where he killed that man again. He closes the door, but before he was about to leave, he sees on the ground a key. He takes it, looks carefully, and observed detail about this key. On the tag attached, it is written "De sleutel van de beveiligingskamer en de garage" ( in English: Key to the security room and garage). He puts the key into the pocket, and he is about to go to the entrance, but he then, encountered there a bunch of zombies, probably almost thirty, who are looking anywhere and standing still, or others are slowly moving. This guy is standing there, scared and having no idea what to do, while two zombies are slowly walking to him. Then, an idea came, and he attracts those other zombies'' attention by yelling at them.


    "Hey, you fuck faces! Come and eat my fatness, you skinny monsters!"


    This idea worked, but not many were attracted by him, just about twenty enough to make him run at the garage area where most of the cars are stored on the underground. Mike has an idea to block those zombies there, and deal with less of them here. Even though there could be some working cars there, it will not be a problem to take one from the road, since Ronald can turn on every car by connecting two different wires correctly.


    ***


    When he got to the garage, he got surprised to see that almost every working there is gone, and others are just burned, or a few without wheels, or one, who just straight out crushed into a poor zombie in a wall. The zombies have followed Mike who then runs to the exit, but there he got greeted by three soldiers who aimed his assault rifles at him, and they yelled at Mike.


    "DUCK!"


    Mike runs into the closest car to this garage, which is a Ferrari without gas and shattered glass windows. These three soldiers are starting to use all of their ammo on those zombies who were directed by Mike into this place. They got down pretty easy since most of them were normals, and not like the other ones. but, to be sure, one of those guys was inspecting the zombies by applying the "Double Tap" rule. One soldier goes at Mike, he pointed a thermometer like the ones they use at the markets to check the client temperature.


    "35, 3." says the soldier taking back the thermometer. "You are fine."


    "Fine?"


    "You are not going to transform into a zombie." says the soldier reloading his assault rifle. "This virus is now on air, which means anybody could get infected without a proper immunity system. But anyway, you wonder why we are here?"


    "To take us to safety?" asks Mike who is smiling, but the soldier is telling him the bad news.


    "I am afraid that we cannot take you or anybody else to the base. You have to go there on your own."


    "Why? Why?!"


    "Safety protocols." says the soldier who leaves Mike alone, while he goes to the other rooms of this building to kill the rest of those walking corpses.

 Road to Haga - Part 14

    ***


    Ronald has killed that crazy Japanese woman who kept kidnapped those innocent survivors from this area and used some of them as human meat in case the zombies were entering "her" building and they were close to eating her. That woman is crazy enough to throw a fetus at them, which he did... together with a pregnant woman who was close to become a zombie since she almost died by giving birth. Now, that the crazy lady is dead, Ronald is meeting with the remaining ones in a big apartment empty because they were just left there, without any bed or a couch, only three couches for nine people, and also a few newspapers for them to use as a toilet or to cover them when they do sleep.


    "How many are you alive and not bitten?" asks Ronald while he aims his gun at them.


    "W-W-We are not bitten nor infected." says one man who raises his hands and looks scared at Ronald, he shows him two people on the floor. "We have wounded in this room. B-But in other parts, there are corpses used as training for that sick lady."


    Ronald is going closer to those people who are laying on the floor, he checks their pulse, it seems good thought Ronald, but then he sees that they have a fever. Ronald quickly checked the people if you have any bites, but thankfully, they do not present to have any bite marks on their torso, legs, arms, neck or head. Ronald has quickly to the last seven people there, and he asks them.


    "Do you have any medicine?" asks Ronald.


    "N-No." says a man from those guys. "We do not have any medicine at us. That lady always took the medicine for herself."


    "I see... Are you guys going to head to the Haga? I heard the army is going to wait for survivors there and deliver at an island where we can live happily."


    "... I want to go there." says a man in his 40s looking scared at Ronald. "It is truly safe in that place where you told us?"


    "I do not know, yet. But I think the place it can be safe since the military was flying their helicopters across the city where I have been?"


    "And in what city you have were before any of this apocalypse was starting?" asks the same man who responded to Ronald when he was asked how many they are in this place and about those two injured people. "Is it safe? Or is in problems like this one?"


    Reading on this site? This novel is published elsewhere. Support the author by seeking out the original.


    "Like every city, we have to drive into it. Zombies everywhere. Our only chance of survival might be the islands the military was telling us. If the zombies cannot swim."


    "I hope they do not since they can jump and even fly." says a man in his lab coat.


    "Have you seen one flying?"


    "Yes. It was really horrifying how he picked people from the street and them in the air, then throwing the remaining in the street... It was really horrifying." says the same man feeling guilty to see a zombie doing this thing.


    They were discussing the other types of zombie they have been encountering so far, then exchange ID''s and then, a few of them have decided to come with them, while the other remain there and thinking that help will come somehow and save them from this hell.


    ***


    Later, the car driving by Gerald has stopped in the front of the building where Ronald was fighting against that crazy lady. Mike was pushing the horns two times, and this one alerted a few zombies who were feasting upon some corpses.


    "Good thing, boy." says Gerald feeling angry at Mike. "What about throwing a building in the air to alert even the military."


    "Sorry." says Mike thinking this apology might work, but it didn''t work out pretty well.


    Gerald is taking the AK-47, a few clips of ammo, and he runs at the building where Ronald is located. He then tells Mike to take everything he can carry, and this boy was already picking the backpack of Gerald and his own. He then tosses the backpack of Ronald to the old man, which it takes since it has valuable things like food and knives.


    "We will run into the building, and then we will try to find a way to leave this city, okay?"


    "Okay." says Mike putting a new clip in the magazine of the pistol it is using.


    "At three!... One!... Two!... THREE!"


    And those two dudes are running straight to the building, with the backpacks. For Mike, it was quite hard since he is carrying two and Ronald only one, but this old man is manoeuvring an AK-47. while Mike was running, the old man killed a few zombies who were approaching them and killed a jumper who was close to jumping on Mike without realizing he was close to meet the Reaper.


    These two soldiers have quickly entered the building, and they lock the doors, while they were helping by Ronald and the other survivors. They put drawers and a few tables which are blocking the doors of the front, and the windows... were already sealed by the other survivors who were there before that crazy bitch to over this building and used people as a way to feed zombies.


    Before they were about to say "Hello!" to each other, Gerald slapped Mike on his checks and tells him to never do this again, or he will not eat for three days. Mike, who was scared, told Gerald he understands and he is feeling very sorry for such a risky move, only to take a few guys, even though they were close, it wasn''t necessary to use the horn in these cases. Now, there is a big problem, without a van, these survivors might be going to appeal to the same strategy they used in the other cities: search for a car in the middle of a road.

 Road to Haga - Part 15

    Mike, Ronald and Gerald are in some deep shit right now. First, these three guys are now blocked in a building, while outside the building, there is an immense horde of zombies. Now, to go into the place they wanted to go, they have to take the roofs of the buildings and use everything they can to kill zombies.


    "Now what?" asks a survivor at the three of those who are on their way to Haga when they arrived at the roof and sees that the next building is at a one-meter distance, but not all of them can perform such a high jump. Gerald, Ronald and Mike could do it, since these survivors were encountering much worse things like this one, jumping to the next building.


    "Who is going first?" asks Gerald looking at Ronald.


    But before Ronald was about to say something, Mike goes a few steps back and he straight to the end of the roof. And when he got close to that place, he straight up jumps as far as he can. He landed on the other roof of the building, which was good, but in such a bad landing. He fall on his back when he did that and he screams for a few moments. But he still gets up, cringing from that pain he got.


    "Your turns!" says Mike to the other survivor.


    "You''re kidding?" says Ronald from such a distance, but Mike still heard the line he said because the distance between this building and the other one ain''t that big.


    "... your choice." says Mike to them, he turns back and looks at the distance to see if he can spot something useful, but all he sees are dozens of buildings that are still standing, two or three zombies on the roofs to the next buildings, and he sees even an apartment on a building which is on the other side of the street. "To escape this city... We must find a way to avoid all of these zombies... But how?"


    If you come across this story on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen from Royal Road. Please report it.


    He stays there for several minutes, analysing the situation, and didn''t notice that one zombie is on the same roof of the building and is crawling at Mike. But, thankfully, Mike sees the zombie, he also looked on the ground and discovered a screwdriver, he takes it, draws closer to the zombie and he pierced the zombie brain with that screwdriver, which stops moving anymore, even though one of his legs were already cut. He checks the body of that zombie and discovers a set of key on the zombie pockets. He looks at the keys and sees that they are marked with three numbers like these "101, 201. 301 etc.". He looks at the doors that are guiding to the building interior and he got a plan, which is similar to the one he has seen in one movie when he was in high school and he actually had a life. He is thinking to capture as many zombies as he can and lock them into the building, then, go back to the one with survivors and takes care of the ones down the street and lock the zombies into the building interior.


    He sees that the doors are locked, and he used a metal thing to put down those planks that were nailed to that door and blocked it. In a few minutes, he drops those planks, and before he was about to enter the building, he sees close to his feet a UZI, which was thrown by Ronald.


    "Be careful out there!" says Ronald to Mike, which took the UZI and nodded his head in a "Thanks" way.


    He enters the building, prepared to face a few zombies, while he did not realize that the UZI only has a mag with only 35 bullets. When he entered the building, he starts searching the exit, which will be quite hard since this building didn''t have enough light, and most of the windows are covered by furniture or by a few newspapers that were glued to those windows.


    "Smart people..." whispers Mike looking at all of those newspapers attached to the windows with glue. "These are some smart people, who got really unlucky."


    Mike is going downstairs a few times, he inspects a few rooms and he didn''t find anything useful, either he found them empty, filled with blood, guts, zombie corpses, or he even found one room that had a vibrator stuck in a zombie who is looking like a girl, but the dong makes Mike realize his generation is fucked up. He was close to puke, but he stopped it before he throws the food he was eating in the morning. He leaves the room he found that zombie with a vibrator stuck into corpses and heads to the exit of this building to implement the plan he is following.

 Road to Haga - Part 16

    Meanwhile, on the other building, Gerald and Ronald, with other survivors found in this building, are on the roofs and looks at the door Mike entered it to make his plan work. While they are waiting for Mike to come back by using the same door he took to enter the building, all of those survivors are looking down and sees dozens of zombies roaming on the streets, eating corpses on the street. One of them sees the Japanese woman (who caged them and used them as a meat shield) corpse on the ground, not yet infected and reanimated into a zombie.


    The survivor who has seen the corpse is a Bulgarian, who has suffered the apocalypse like every man, but he has lost someone important. His pregnant wife... And his unborn baby. This dude sees the rifle of that crazy lady who once was a human and not a corpse who is about to become a zombie at any moment. The man looks at the clip of the rifle, he sees it has only nine bullets left into a clip that has a capacity of 20 rounds. He put this rifle far from that lady, he takes the knife from her belt, and he starts stabbing the lady repeatedly while he was screaming like a warrior in a big fight.


    The other survivor heard the man screaming, and they wanted to go and help him, but Gerald and the other survivors (a blonde lady with dreadlocks) stop these survivors and told them to let that man do his thing. Ronald didn''t even want to try to go and help that man since he doesn''t know him and he doesn''t care what bullshit he is going through, because Ronald has also lost important people in his life, but nobody tried to help him overcome this revenge state.


    After the man finished doing almost fifty stabs in the face of that Japanese woman, which made it hard to be recognizable since her face is hard to be recognizable. After he finished doing his things, he looks at the other survivors, the ones who were put here and locked by this maniac. He asks a few survivors if they wanted to stab this lady, but all of them didn''t want to do that, so, he this corpse and throw it from the roof into the streets infested with zombies.


    He looks down, and he sees the corpse splashed into the street, and a few zombies have started to eat the corpse that was falling from the roof. After he finished doing that thing, the man is doing a stupid thing, he jumps out of the building, while the others were trying to stop him. They didn''t catch the man in time, and he was falling from the roof into the street with roaming zombies. Before he was about to fall on the street, he looked at the sky and a tear was leaving his left eye, and he said in a constant voice without any fear.


    "I am coming home, Isabella."


    He landed on the street, and his body splashed the blood inside his body, and also all of his bones were broken. Even if he would survive the fall (which wasn''t happening) he will still be pretty much dead since the zombies on the street have started to dig into his chest and eat his organs. Three zombies who were dressed as British tourists were the first ones who were eating that man alive.


    A few survivors were feeling bad for the man who just committed suicide in front of them, and they wanted to help him earlier, but they couldn''t because most of those are in his state, wanted to suicide since the loved ones who care about them are already dead. The people looked at Gerald and Ronald like they wanted to follow him, but Gerald stopped a few of them and tells them that all of them will be safe and will live happily after they will make it to the Dock zone and takes the boat to the closest island possible. They have listened to Gerald, and thought about it to throw this thing out of their minds, and preoccupied with the only goal they have right now. Going to Haga and take a boat to their safety.


    This content has been unlawfully taken from Royal Road; report any instances of this story if found elsewhere.


    ---


    Meanwhile, in the building where Mike is putting his plan into action, he sees a zombie who is just going at him, but this one has both of those arms cut, and a nail into his head, located between the eyes. At the moment he was close to using the hammer on that zombie, he stopped, because the zombie corpse turned around when he was close to biting him, and smashed into the wall with his head. With the pressure he did after crashing the wall, the nail got it deepens so much in his head that it reaches the cry, and the nail, he put an end to his days. Mike, is shocked by this zombie, so he turned the zombie around, and he realizes one thing about the aspect of this one, in his eyes. Almost every zombie in this world has red eyes, or orange eyes (Climbers and Wingers) but this one got one red, and one brown... What does this mean? Does the zombie is half-human, or the man has found a way to stop the zombie transformation? Whatever it is, this thing is already dead again.


    Mike continues to walk into the building until he reaches the door which is leading to the exit. Before he was about to open the door and attract the zombies to this place, he sees on the table a map. He checks the map on that table, and he takes it to the backpack he found to that table. In that backpack, there is a short food supply and only one pocket knife. Whoever was that backpack belonging, the person is already dead or is only that corpse which was killed recently by Mike. He puts the backpack on, goes to the door, opens it and yells to the thousands of ways to the zombies.


    "HEY, SHIT HEADS! Follow this LIVE MEAT!" and he also slapped his butt, and then runs to the stairs which are leading to the roof. A small wave of zombies is following Mike, while others are remaining on the street and eat whatever they find there.


    Mike is running through the stairs, while he is chased by almost fifty zombies who are walking fast toward him, and even trying to jumps on him, but most of them missed or are very clumsy. When he reaches the roof, he sees his friends and the other survivors waiting for him, he leaps from the roof, while he takes a run as he did earlier to jump to the other side... And he manages to land on the next building, while he rolled two times.


    "I did it!" says after he got back to his legs, but when he looks back he sees that not many zombies are on the roof.


    "You wanted to lock the zombies on this street to the building, right?" asks a survivor.


    "Yes." responds Mike feeling pathetic that he thought this thing might work.


    "Don''t worry, boy." says Gerald to Mike trying to make him happy for at least trying. "We could stay here and wait for them to leave this city, or eating each other."


    "And how many days would it take to make this thing happen?" asks Ronald to Gerald feeling already angry because they will now have to stay in this building, while zombies are walking on the street. "It could be days. Years. Decades. And you think hiding into a place like this will make us safer?"


    "Any other option you have, Ron." says Gerald to Ronald.


    "How about we try o gave a signal to the military, this might help us to evacuate this situation."


    "Try this if you can, boy." says Gerald to Ronald which is heading already into the building interior and search in rooms for something to attract the attention of the military, if they will pass with their helicopters this area.


    While Ronald is going to create some kind of S.O.S. signal, the remaining survivors are sitting on the rooftop and waits until the night will come and eat beans from cans. That food supply belongs to the survivors, who were hiding it from that crazy bitch.

 Road to Haga - Part 17

    Later this day, Ronald has found a few unused white blankets which will be enough to create multiple S.O.S. signals which might be enough to attract someone to attention from a helicopter or an aeroplane that is flying at a low altitude. But, while he is doing all of these tasks by himself, the other survivors are just sitting on the rooftop and chilling because a few of them knows this big horde of zombies will be gone in no time.


    "And you say they will just migrate in a different direction or just fall, like those from the building I let them there?" asks Mike to the survivor who suggested remaining on this rooftop until this wave of zombies will disappear.


    "Yes." responded the survivor. "Although, some of them seems smarter than the other ones?"


    "How come?"


    "Some of them can climb the walls of buildings."


    "Oh yeah. We have seen this shit, man." says Mike to that survivor who is a bald man with a moustache. "They climb the building and grab people down. Do not stay close to those windows when you encounter one of those things."


    "So you have seen them... I bet you haven''t seen worse things like those down here."


    "We have encountered a zombie who jumps around." says Gerald taking the last spoon from that beans can. "The ones who just crawl, but die a few seconds later due to blood loss."


    "I have seen even one with wings."


    "Jesus Christ!" says a survivor after he heard about that type of zombie who can fly. "So, if one of them from this horde got wings and fly to us, we will be completely dead!"


    "Not exactly." says Gerald.


    "Yes. Because those zombies cannot fly at a big altitude. So, if one of them for example fly to our rooftop, he would most likely do a dumb move like crashing into the walls of the building, or making a hard landing on this rooftop and die slowly after the land."


    Gerald hears some weird sounds coming down the building. He throws the empty can away with the spoon, he takes his pistol and he is preparing to face the thing who probably is a climber or a flying zombie. He stays there a bit until a few survivors noticed and made them feel concerned for Gerald, but Mike, who was living enough time with Gerald, is also preparing his pistol in case of an emergency.


    If you stumble upon this narrative on Amazon, it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it.


    Gerald sees a hand who has grabbed the metal bar from the rooftop, survivors are already scared the moment this thing has grabbed the metal part of the rooftop and they run into the building. But, they didn''t close the door after them, they just wanted to stay safe from one single zombie while they are almost eight grown-up people. But, Gerald quickly takes the shot the moment that "Climber" revealed his disfigured head. The shot has landed the zombie''s head and made him fall a few meters into the zombie who was just walking slowly in that horde and crashing all of his body parts.


    "How many climbers do you think are in this location?"


    "Probably a lot." responds Gerald. "... But these zombies can even reach this altitude even if they climb up?"


    "I do not know, man. After this one, I encountered one who just suicides in front of me."


    "What do you mean?" asks Gerald feeling curious at Mike confession. "There was one who cut his own wrists in that building you were running?"


    "That was before I opened the door... I think some zombies are still people, Gerald."


    And when he said this thing, Gerald looking at those zombies down there for a moment, feeling quite sad... The probability of seeing one of them knowing what is their fate is absolutely terrifying, yet, it is really disturbing. But, before he was about to stay there and look for those zombies, one of the survivors, which is a teenage boy, praised Gerald for landing a perfect shot, but he said to that kid.


    "It was nothing."


    ***


    A few days earlier, back in the complex, these three survivors were living for a moment, a few zombies got killed by Gerald and Ronald on the ground floor. These two dudes are using different types of weapons. Gerald is using a pistol he got from the armoury, while Ronald is using a machete cause his pistol is running out of ammo, and forgot to bring a clip to spare. Gerald landed those shoots with such a good precision, killing twelve of those things by just shooting in their head. While Ronald was struggling to stab those zombies in the head with a machete or cutting a limb and then the head.


    While they were fighting, and walk to the main doors who are the only way to let people and these zombies enter this building. Their only way to survive this attack is by sealing the doors and killing the remaining zombies into this building by using everything they had at themselves. Which they succeeded by closing the door and putting as a barricade a few furniture pieces and zombie corpses. They were even looking at the door, thanks to Gerald who has seen those keys of the door on the bloody floor. The door was closed, and these infected zombies started to hit the door with their head, legs or arms but they could since this door is a metallic type, and a few furniture pieces are on their way to a meal. When Mike and Gerald put a desk as the last furniture piece found, they slap their hands and runs to the other remaining zombies with their weapons ready.


    After a few more hours of fighting a horde of zombies into the building, they succeed to clean the first three floors and meeting with Mike. The last one will remain a task for tomorrow, but now, all of them decided to rest this day and prepare for tomorrow. And to do that, all three of them are going to sleep in a big living room in an apartment while they are drinking beer and talks about their lives back then and also joking around.

 Road to Haga - Part 18

    ***


    In the present, when the nighttime has come, Mike is closing the door which leads to the rooftop, and the other survivors are just going into their rooms. Or they selected them since all of them were put in a single room and used only when a zombie enters the building. Gerald and Ronald are sleeping in a room together with two more survivors in an apartment with four beds in a single room. One of the survivors, a lady in her twenty told them that this room belonged to four brothers who ran from this place before the apocalypse started it.


    Gerald took the comfortable bed, while Ronald was taking the last comfortable, but it got an advantage since it was close to the window. You never knew when a "Climber" just grabs your body and throw it from the building into the street while you are dreaming of female wrestlers thighs. Those two survivors are sitting on their chosen beds and try to sleep, while Gerald is just looking at the ceiling and thinking about his life in the military. He sees how his good friends were with him at the table, and how some of those good friends got killed in an Aerial strike, and when this happened, Gerald has decided to resign the military and move into Holland, where he met his wife, who unfortunately got killed by these monsters.


    "God truly hates me." he whispers to himself and then he goes to sleep. "First my brother''s arms. Then the country. And my wife... If God wanted me to jump into despair. He will need much more than this to make me lose my minds."


    "Old man." says Ronald to Gerald. "Are you having PTSD or some shit?"


    "Get to bed, rascal." says Gerald who came back to Eart (metaphorically). "Tomorrow we will flee this place and new need resting."


    "Sure, man." says Ronald getting back to his sleep and trying to fall asleep. He succeeds it, but this will happen after three minutes while he counted the sheep.


    ***


    In the next room, there is Mike, and this dude is living by himself since he tried to do a risky thing earlier this day, so the rest of the survivors has decided to spoil him a bit, by giving him room to himself, while the others are sleeping on the available rooms. But then, he decided to stay a few minutes on the balcony and look at the giant flood of zombies on the street. He slides the window door and goes to the balcony, and he didn''t see much since there is a night and the poles that support lights that can illuminate half of the Bucharest neighbourhood (Romania), are gone and they do not produce light since almost the entire electrical systems from the world are gone. He looks at a building, and there he sees a light on a window.


    This tale has been unlawfully lifted from Royal Road. If you spot it on Amazon, please report it.


    He looks focused for a moment in that building, and then, the lights go out, then it came back, and a few seconds later, it becomes black again. Mike thought to himself: "It is probably a failure of the lights on that house... but how come they have electricity? Sure, there was probably just my imagination, but what if there is a survivor in that building far across from here?"


    But then, something is happening. Mark heard a loud bang coming from that house, then the light came back and Mike could''ve seen that the walls of the house illuminated be full of red, and that is blood. Mike was about to attract the man from that house attention, but then... The person on that building opens the window and jumps from that floor as fast as he could. Mike felt awful that he was a witness to a survivor who just committed suicide, right in front of his eyes. He feels ashamed and also sad that he did not have the chance to help the man who just committed suicide. But, he is also wondering, was that a man or he was just a zombie who committed suicide? Like the one earlier when Mark saw in the halls.


    He goes back to his room, looks the window to the balcony, but before he was about to cover the window door with a drawer from his room, he turns on a flashlight, in case there is a zombie in his room, and he found something there, a thing he didn''t see earlier. Behind the drawer, he was about to push. There is a photo album, and this one shows pictures of a woman and a man, for only three pages, and then, there is a letter there. Mike felt curious but he decided to close the album photo and put it somewhere else in this room, under the bed. Mike thought to himself before he sees the letter: "I''ve seen enough sadness this day.".


    He gets to his bed and starts sleeping, while he got into his hands a pistol. Just in case if the thing will happen again.


    ***


    On the next day, Ronald and another survivor heard a noise coming from the rooftop, so they got armed up with shovels and pistols. Ronald with the survivors is opening the door with keys, taking the furniture used as a blockage and enters the rooftop prepared for anything. At the moment they entered the rooftop, all they saw there is a military man, who is sitting on a pile of zombies named "Climbers" and smokes a cigarette, while he got on his back and machete.


    "Good morning!" says the man in Deutschland. "Have you slept well, last night?"


    "Who are you?" asks Ronald in Deutschland and lowering his pistol.


    "I''m Garen Titir, a normal soldier from Human Army Regiment." says the soldier jumping from that pile of zombies who were killed again, he raised his hand to Ronald. "And you are?"


    "Ronald. Just Ronald," says Ronald shaking the hand of the soldiers and making him feel suspicious since he didn''t tell the soldier full name.


    "And why you have come here?"


    "Because we are going to clean up this entire area. This place will be the property of our army and here we are going to build a new base, but first. We have to escort all of the survivors from here to the Docks."


    "Good thing we were going there." says the survivors who stick his nose into this business. "Right?" asks Ronald to be sure we are going there and not changed the plan at the next moment.


    "Yes, we are." responds Ronald. "But first, we gotta go down and talk with the others."


    "There are more survivors into this building?" asks the man with a smile on his face. "This will seem interesting."

 Road to Haga - Part 19

    Later on, the unknown man, who just come to their rooftop and killed a few climbers and the zombies from the other building where Mike has directed them yesterday, is staying on the chair, while Gerald, Mike, Ronald and the rest survivors are standing in front of the soldier who is drinking the bottle of water the woman ( the one with big glasses and who worked on Haga as an office worker) offered to him as gratitude gift.


    "So, you wanted some information?" asks the survivor after he put the bottle back, handed it to that woman and winked at her (making her blush). "Like how this started and why we couldn''t help all of you go into the safest place and eradicate this zombie wave?"


    "We want to know how many of you are out there?" asks Gerald cold-blooded.


    "Out where? We are soldiers from different parts of this world, and most of us are collaborating. For example, I got a Japanese on another city, burning the remaining zombies to create a region where a few survivors could remain there."


    "Which city are you talking about?" asks one of that survivor group.


    "Drachten and Harlingen." says that soldier to the survivor. "These are the two cities we are focussing on. Well, our squad is focussing."


    "And you are here for what?"


    "Just to help my squad by taking down a city by myself."


    "But you haven''t finished yet." says Ronald taking a look at the window and seeing a few more zombies in the streets.


    "Do you have any idea how expensive are rockets, civilian?"


    "But we are an apocalypse. Does money matter now?"


    "As a matter of fact, they do matter in our base, with that money you could acquire weapons, but sure, food, houses and even a car is going to be free. If all of you are heading into our bases, which are currently under construction."


    "Where is your squad base?" asks Gerald.


    This narrative has been purloined without the author''s approval. Report any appearances on Amazon.


    "You''re kidding, right? You haven''t heard the radio receptions we were sending in the entire world? Take a boat or a plane and go into the artificial islands built by the UN blah, blah, blah, blah. And live happily there for a while?"


    "... so they do exists." says Gerald who is leaving the room, but he is telling something to his comrades. "Ronald and Mike, come with me and take our things."


    "Huh?" asks the soldier. "Where are you three going?"


    "To our new home." says Ronald to the soldier with a grin on his face. "And don''t worry about us, we will make it there."


    "You take care of those guys, right?" asks Mike feeling uneasy because that soldier seems scary and quite sociopath.


    "Sure, but this will cost ya."


    "What?" asks Mike feeling uneasy.


    "Just kidding." says the soldier with a grin on his face. "These survivors are enough for my paycheck. You three can go and scatter into one of those islands."


    "How many are there anyway?"


    "Do I look like a Google boss to you? How should I know, man? Just take a boat, drive front, and you will probably encounter one."


    "Thank you." says Mike and he left the room, and goes to the room where Gerald and Ronald are preparing for their leave.


    ***


    Later this day, Ronald, Gerald and Mike, after they were fast-walking to the street, they arrived at a Dealership that mostly sells motorcycles. Before they left that complex apartment, they got into some trouble, such as a big wave of zombies, their van running out of gas and electricity cause Mike hasn''t stopped the engine of the van, and now, these three are running on the streets while they are shooting random zombies with their pistols and semi-automatic weapons they got from the soldier as a buff for leaving almost empty-handed. They encountered a few zombies, but they could be killed easily since this type of zombie is easy to be put down, but some of them weren''t putting down permanently. some of them were rising from their grounds, and almost bitting Ronald and Mike. But Gerald, who is a mad lad when he got a gun and PTSD bomb turned on, killed an entire street without mercy. Mike helped him to come back to his senses when the danger lowered.


    Ronald observed that this place is busted, and a few motorcycles are still there. But before he was about to enter the store, he asked his all gang if they can drive motorcycles. Gerald said he had a few missions on his army by driving a motorcycle into the desert, but Mike, he never learned how to drive one, so Gerald took it under his wing and he will drive with him to that port in Haga. There were a few models there, a few Honda''s, Toshiba and even three Harley-Davidson. Ronald (who is the guy who knows most of the things about vehicles ) chooses to take the Davidson since he wanted to drive out of this city in style. Gerald and Mike agree on this idea and they jumped on those Davidson, turned on and leaves this place like a Japanese gangster team on motorcycles.


    "Haga here we come!" says Ronald out loudly when they left the city these three survivors were tucked for entire daylight and on the night.

 Road to Haga - Final Part

    After two hours of driving into the streets with corpses, broken cars, collapsed buildings, zombies, a few barricades put by the police to protect themselves from those zombies, our three survivors have made it to Haga, the city where their freedom will begin. After a long road from Groningen, travelling with a jeep through Drachten and taking gas from a gas station there, surviving through Hell in Harlingen, Amsterdam and finally made it in Leiden, the place where they stayed for almost a day and night, and meet the soldiers who are occupying to save this whole world.


    These three dudes are stopping in front of a fence, which is blocked by a military truck, but around them are just zombie corpses and some military officers who got killed before these three survivors arrived. They are scared cause they think that this wall of soldiers wasn''t able to face these zombies. Gerald heard a groan, and he quickly draws his pistol, and with one bullet shoot the zombie who was on the other side of the fence. That bullet shot by Gerlad hit the zombie corpses head and made him fall to the ground. These three survivors observed the corpse it is wearing a military uniform and got bite marks around his body. Ronald observed the helmet of the zombie is already damaged, a few marks were left on that helmet, which means a man could''ve destroyed that hat or even a new type of zombies these survivors haven''t met yet.


    "What happened here?" asks Mike to his friends looking down at his legs and seeing countless corpses around the ground, a big amount of used bullets, a few melee weapons and blood everywhere.


    "These bastards weren''t able to hold this port?" asks Ronald to Gerald taking a random key that doesn''t look damaged and shows to Gerald.


    "That key it is for what I think it is?"


    "Most likely." says Ronald. "But like I said one time. I wouldn''t be able to drive since I never st- I mean drive or work at boats."


    "Dude, we know you were stealing cars back then. Before all of.. this." says Mike to Ronald, and makes him feel ashamed that he hide this thing for so long.


    "Oh... Are you mad?" asks Ronald to Gerlad and Mike.


    "To me, it doesn''t matter. You do a great job at what you do, damn rascal." says Gerald smiling at Ronald.


    "Well... You did some awesome work for us, dude." says Mike smiling at Ronald.


    "Thank you, guys." says Ronald who is feeling overwhelmed by this emotion he has never experienced in his entire life.


    "Enough with this lady talk, gentlemen." says Gerald going closer to the barricaded entrance to their safety. "Our freedom is on the other side, now, our only chance is to climb over this truck, jump on the other side, and runs to any available boat out there."


    "What if the boat is running short on fuel?"


    "We will not take that one. Because we are aiming to one who doesn''t need gas. Now, before we are about to do our final mission, I want to tell you that. You two are some fine soldiers. If I were in the Army again, it would''ve been my honour to fight with you two by my side." says Gerald who is looking at those two who are clapping for this small encouragement talk, and then he turns around. "Ready?"


    "Yes!" responds these two survivors who are wielding their weapons, Ronald is wielding two pistols, while Mike is wielding an assault rifle he found on the ground with a full clip.


    "LET''S GO!" yells Gerlad who is already climbing to that truck, and with Ronald and Mike.


    On the other side, they see countless reanimated corpses who are just standing there or others who are eating the rest of those corpses left there. Gerald is aiming his weapon at those zombies and he proceeds to shot them, Ronald and Mike are doing the same. Together they gunned down a few zombies, and after they killed enough, these two are sprinting to the boats that are located on the dock.


    At the time, these three got on the wooden floor, they see there a soldier who is crawling to a boat, but these three sees the soldier it is just half, only his torso with one arm, and head are there. That soldier sees the survivors, and yells at them to save him, and bring him into a boat. Gerald was about to put an end to that man, but the soldier who is only half piece screamed at them.


    "Don''t shoot me, ma''am! I am not infected. Yet. We have a cure! WE HAVE A DAMN CURE!" says the soldier who made Gerlad, Ronald and Mike feel speechless.


    "What?" asks Mike. "There is a cure."


    "Yeah... That cure could save all of our lives! It could turn humanity back to"


    But before he was about to end his line, a scream, is coming closer from these survivors.  At third meters from there, a big zombie, with massive muscles, and wearing ripped clothes is going through a building wall, he looks angry at those survivors and he screams at the sky. These survivors are terrified of this thing because it is the first time when they encountered one.


    The soldier starts screaming for help, while Gerlad is gunning down that thing by using his assault rifle which was gifted by that soldier named Garen. The wonder soldier screamed that the bullets couldn''t destroy this thing, only explosives could do it. Ronald was also trying to shot that huge thing by using the shotgun he found earlier on their way to the pontoon. But, Mike, after he had a flashback from his past when he played a video game with his "friends" he realized that the thing in front of them is almost acting like that one he encountered many times, so, he runs to the closest boat to found something which will help them overcome this massive beast.


    Unlawfully taken from Royal Road, this story should be reported if seen on Amazon.


    "Mike! What are you doing?" asks Ronald when he sees Mike running to the closest boat and start looking in the room where the sailor is living or sleeping, to see if he can find a propane tank.


    He looks at the entire small room, on the kitchen part, but he didn''t see one, so, he runs to the other boat, hoping that he will find a propane tank or something explosive. While Mike is searching for an explosive thing, these two survivors are having a hard time gunning down that giant who is walking at them at a fast pace.


    "Die! Die, you motherfucker!" says Ronald reloading his shotgun by adding three more shells to his shotgun.


    Then, the monster starts looking at a small boat, he takes it with his boat arms, looks angry at those two survivors and at that wounded soldier. The survivors are looking terrified at that thing, and wondering how they could defeat such a monstrosity.


    "Oh, God." says Gerald who is looking around and he has an idea. "Let''s dive in, Rascal!"


    "Alright." says Ronald following Gerlad, and he jumps after him into the salty water.


    The monster throws that boat, which was supposed to be their place, and the boat has hit only the wounded soldier who was already dead, to begin with. The boat has landed on his head, the vertical part, which has crushed his entire head and will also prevent his transformation into a zombie, even though it will only be a crawler, and not one who could walk or run. A small fry who could be killed easily.


    When the boat has landed on the pontoon, it almost breaks it. And if the pontoon is breaking, some of the boats there could be lost because some are tied up and entering a boat would only be possible by swimming, but with a wind condition, you never knew where a boat could land.


    Ronald and Gerlad are swimming to the closest boat, with their guns on the back. Ronald is not an experienced swimmer, but he is a fast learner. After he saw Gerlad swimming, he already understands the technique people are using to swim. These two are swimming to the boat where Mike has is looking for something useful to stop that crazy monster.


    While Mike has entered the third boat, he is looking for that thing in the room of the sailor, he found something, but he doesn''t know if he could carry it. He found a propane tank, but after he was about to lift with both of his hands, Gerald and Ronald are entering the boat.


    "We have to go Mike!" says Ronald going to the wheel to direct this boat that is used for fishing. "We need to leave this place ASAP!"


    "Gerlad!" says Mike to Gerlad. "The thing cannot enter the water."


    "What?" says Gerald looking at that huge monster who just threw a boat at them.


    That huge monster is staying on the platoon, screaming at that boat where Mike and his gang have made it. Sure, it is five meters from them, and he could just take that boat back and throw it to them, could''ve crossed that huge zombie mind. If he wasn''t branded, but because he is, this will be extremely useful for our group. Gerald is almost smiling, and he looks at Mike, who was about to throw the propane tank at that monster.


    "What are you doing with that?" asks Gerald.


    "I was about to throw at that thing and kill him." says Mike, and Gerlad is already taking the other side of the propane tank, and says to Mike. "At three. Ready?"


    "Ready!"


    "One!" says Gerald.


    "Two!" says Mike.


    "THREE!" says both of them at the same time and threw that propane tank to the water, but close to the pontoon.


    "Quick!" says Mike to Gerlad who is already taking his rifle, aim at that propane tank.


    "Goodbye, Deutschland!" says Gerald who is trying to shoot his last clip with ammo for his assault rifle.


    Some bullets hit the propane tank, and when they did, that propane exploded. The explosion was big, and this one attracted zombies from a big distance. But this explosion has destroyed the pontoon and made the huge zombie fall into the salty water, and when he got his full body on the water, the monster started screaming, waving his arms and legs for a few minutes, until the big monster, will be drowned into the water of Deutschland.


    The survivors are looking at the huge fire gong on the dock and seeing countless zombies going through that fire, burning alive and falling into the water. When some zombies fell in the water, they weren''t able to swim, which means one thing. Every zombie could be killed by water, especially deep water. And this makes sense because zombies aren''t able to swim due to their movements, but they do still be alive in water since they are already dead.


    Gerald, Mike and Ronald are slapping their hands together, yelling "Horray!" and sitting in the room of the sailor while they are opening a pack of beers and proceed to drink them.


    "For our long road through Hell!" says Gerald to all of them, then their beer bottles collide, and proceed to drink that beer while they laugh, tell some funny jokes and confess their deepest secrets, like some good friends. While their boat was navigating by herself, a helicopter is leaving Haga, and that helicopter belongs to the army. As soon as Mike sees the helicopter, he left the room, and wave at him. Then, the helicopter left this area, and a guy with a megaphone told them from the helicopter, after he opened the door of the helicopter for a second, to follow them to safety. And that''s what they are doing.


    ***


    Three days later, on one of the fifth artificial islands, made by the soldiers ( and a few skilled survivors), on a camper van who is parked on artificial grass, Ronald is waking up in that van, on the couch. He gets up from that filthy couch which has mostly chips bags and drinks spilt... I think. He looks around, he sees Mike, who is sleeping on the only bed, also in the garbage with dirty clothes and a few rounds of bullets.


    Ronald gets up from that couch, he walks slowly to the door of the camper van, he left the van and goes to that picnic table outside where Gerlad who has already wake up, is eating a soup, made by Dolores, a great chef of this island.


    "Good morning!" says Ronald to Gerald.


    "Good morning, to you!" replies Gerlad to his friend. "Slept well?"


    "Kinda. Mike has a behaviour like an animal sometimes."


    "Well. That is our Mike. He might be weird, but extremely smart." says Gerald after he takes a spoon of that amazing soup. "You should totally eat Dolores soup."


    "Maybe later, boss... Wasnt this day your first day as a new you?"


    "New me?" asks Gerald. "Don''t laugh boy. This new me is the old one."


    Gerald finishes his soup, he takes on his helmet, his assault rifle and he goes to the training camp, to instruct the recruits who would be sent one day on the lands with roaming monsters.


    When they arrived on this island, these survivors have started new lives. Gerald has become a trainer for new fighters, Ronald hired as a Mechanic at a service auto, close to the camper van they are sleeping, and Mike is working as a supplier, with one cute girl who already fell in love with him. Things are working well for these three survivors who were going through Hell a few days ago.

 From Cluj to Athene - Part 1

    On the city Cluj-Napoca, in Romania, on a gas station, there is a woman at a young age, who got pink and brown long hair, she is tall and slim not like a plank, much like a teenage girl with an athletic body. She is staying on the table where she scans the groceries or the people who are taking the gas from those pumps. She has one client, who is a bald man wearing a black vest with a white dirt shirt with a logo, who resemble a fisherman using a spear instead of a fishing equipment. The man asks the lady about a pack of cigars, and she gives it to him. The man quickly gives him the money and then leaves without taking the paper called "Bon Fiscal" in Romanian language, but English it is known as receipt. She takes that receipt, and throws in the trash, like the others receipts, since customers aren''t taking them most of the time. After she did that, her boss came to her and told her.


    "Ana. You have to arrange the things on their shelves."


    "Where is Gus?" she asks the boss, since it is his duty to do this thing.


    "I have no idea, but when he will come back, I will put him to do shift on weekends. Now go and do this job or else I will be cutting your salary." and leaves.


    "Like you always do." she says, turning her eyes upside down for a moment and going to do the job for that lazy co-worker who is most likely smoking another cigar on the back of the store.


    She got the goods the boss put it somewhere obvious, and she proceeded to arrange it and put in order to their shelves. She first started with dairy products, she first arranged the milk who contains fifty percent grease, and then she starts with the ones with thirty percentage grease. After she finished with the milk, she started with yogurt, delicious fruit yogurts with strawberries, blueberry, bananas, mango, honey, biscuits and so many different flavours that would even make Terry from Brooklyn 99 comedy to show to feel energized to go to directly to Romania and buy a random yogurt product from a random small store.


    After she finished with the dairy products, she goes to the fruit section, but before she was about to put bananas on the specified part, she heard a scream. She goes up, looks behind her, and runs to the back store. There, she sees one of his co-worker who is bitten by a crazy guy, who seems like a homeless, but in reality, it is something much more terrifying.


    "Help! Help me, Ana!" says the guy who smoked earlier and let poor Ana do his task.


    Ana has quickly jumped back to her reality, and push that zombie from co-worker and screamed at him.


    "Leave him alone, or I will call the cops!"


    The "man" growls like a man in his thirties who haven''t drunk his eight coffee in the morning. That thing looks at Ana, and he is slowly getting up to his feet.


    Ana quickly put out her peeper spray she carries every time she leaves the store to walk to her home. In Cluj there are a lot of predators who would jump on Ana, abduct her and do different things to her, either selling her organs, forcing her to become a prostitute, or worse, making her pregnant and leaving her alone with the baby. She sprayed that thing in the face, but it didn''t work out, so she threw the thing into the monster face and nothing happens, the things were getting on his feet now and was trying to catch Ana, but she decided to push this beast one more time. The beast fell down on the ground, and she drags her co-worker into the store, to at least help him to stop the bleeding that crazy man did to him.


    This story originates from Royal Road. Ensure the author gets the support they deserve by reading it there.


    The co-worker was not that heavy to be dragged by Ana, who sued to drag things much heavier. Sure, it doesn''t look like she could pull it out, but back in the high school, she used to work at her father business, who is specialized in construction. She built complex buildings, while girls at her age are building friends, memories and chances to get pregnant. Ana throw her co-worker on the building interior, and then she closes the door behind her and blocked with three heavy boxes which contains watermelons and bananas.


    "Good. I think we-"


    But when she turned around, she sees her co-worker getting on his feet, and having those weird looking veins on his face, those eyes without any colour, a dry mouth, and growling. Ana didn''t know what does this thing is, or what does this virus is because like any girl without friends, she didn''t spend her night reading horror stories, she used her free time working to achieve a good life, but now, she works as a part-timer store clerk just to pay her studies at a University in Constructions.


    "Andrei... Are you... alright?" asks Ana, looking scared at Andrei.


    But, before the thing was close to use his attack senses to bite Ana, her boss came here, and yelled at both of them to stop idling and continue their work. And at that moment, Andrei in his zombie form ignored Ana and jumped to his boss. He caught his boss, and start biting him alive, Ana took a canned food, and she uses that weapon to smash it to Andrei head, but she simply smashed it, the thing suddenly stopped for a moment, he turns back, but before it was close to bite Ana, she did an incredible thing. She used the canned food to cover Andrei mouth, and she pushed him into a shelf.


    That zombie corpse hit the shelf, and fall on his back, with almost a few thousands kilograms of soda, water, and beer. The zombie was now under the heavy shelf and cannot move since the plastic and metal bottles are blocking his ways. Now, Ana can escape this place and find help, but she decided to take a look at Andrei and try to ask him.


    "What happened to you?"


    But the corpse which was Andrei one time only screamed at her and uses his hand, trying to reach for her, but the distance between them is too far. Ana looked at her boss, who is covering his wounds made by the zombie on his arms with towels from the nearby shelf. The boss looked at Ana scared and told her to call for help. She immediately goes to the counter, takes the phone there and calls for help. She dials 112 (emergency service phone number in Romania), but when she dialled that phone, a robotic message told her.


    "Warning! The event known as Zombie Apocalypse has begun. Everyone who got bitten or scratched by a zombie must treat by themselves or kill themselves. There are also Hospitals opened, but only for the people safe from bitten marks or scratches made by the creatures called zombies. Seek shelter far from the city or jump on one of the planes at the airport which will transport the remaining survivors to the uninhibited islands, far from our continent."


    And then it closes. Ana looked quickly at the boss who is dying slowly, and she tries to dial 112 too again, but it gave the same message. She looks at her, and tries to dial that number again, but again, it gave the same message.


    Ana looked at her boss, who is looking mercifully at her, but Ana, realizing that people are now transforming into these creatures if they are bitten or scratched she listened to the robotic voice message, she will go to the Airport. But before she was about to leave this place who used to be her part-time Hell, she takes a backpack, a few supplies and leaves while she lets her boss bleeding to death and screaming to her, but Ana, said one last thing to her boss before she truly left this building with a "stolen" backpack and supplies.


    "Goodbye, you nasty Boss!"


    And she truly left the store, letting her boss bleeding to death, screaming at her to came back. But this scream made his situation worse because the zombies has successfully freed himself by just sliding, and jumped on the laid boss who is going to be eaten by his co-worker Andrei.

 From Cluj to Athene - Part 2

    At a building where is the business called "Academy of Radu and Alin", an Academy where people are training in Martial arts and Boxing. Radu is training young children at martial arts, but mostly on karate since he is an expert to this type of fighting. And Alin, whose is step-brother, three years younger than him, he is an expert in boxing.


    These two fighters have participated in a lot of fighting competitions, and most of them were won. These two have started this sports because of a gang of bullies who used to bully them in high school. They trained hard at their sports, and one day, these two have beaten those bullies so easy. One of them was close to be sent into Hospital by Alin, whose his force it is really frightening, and the speed of Radu, could match any professional karate fighter in China.


    Now, these two brothers have built an academy of fighting by using their money earned in fighting competitions and their college savings. The business ain''t going to well since not many people joined their academy because nowadays, kinds prefer to carry a knife around them, just to be safe if somebody threatens them. Now, these two are even going to lose their place since this building didn''t have many people joining their academy. They posted advertisements online, put posters around the town, and even tried to go at some schools to show the kids martial arts and boxing styles.


    On the office of those two bosses, one of them looks on the title he earned in a tournament.


    "What is wrong with our business, brother?" asks Radu looking at his title he earned three years ago.


    "I do not know." responds Alin who is checking his e-mails, hoping he will find a person who will be willing to sponsor them.


    "We do need to give up."


    "Brother..."


    "Look, Alin. Our business aren''t going that well, we barely got one or two kids per day, and they are in bad shapes. We have to give up or sell this building to someone else."


    "I know, but we can at least wait. Maybe one day, we will get a new customer."


    Then, their ring at the door starts to sound which means that a person entered this place. Alin looks astonished at Radu, who is going to that man who entered the dojo, but not fighting, he is looking hopeless at them, while he is covered in bite marks, he looks depressed at Radu, and told his final words.


    "S-Save me." and he fells on the floor.


    Radu quickly goes to that man, and tries to wake him up, but it doesn''t responds. Alin joins this scene and he quickly takes his mobile phone and starts calling for an ambulance to come. But when he was about to call, Radu left that corpse, looking scared how the man is getting back on his legs, growling and twitching.


    "Mister. Are you all right?" asks Alin going to the man, but when he was close to touch him, the monster was close at jumping him.


    Radu has reacted quickly at this action, he punched that zombie on the face one time, and then he punched for a few times his belly, whose breaking and the monster refused to go down, he continues to attack while his organs are close to fall.


    "Brother, you remember those zombies movies we used to watch?"


    "You mean 28 Days Later, Shaun of the Dead and The Walking dead." he responds Alin who is punching this zombie so hard, that his skull could he heard breaking in half, and this made the monster fall on the floor.


    "My goodness..." says Radu looking at the zombie corpse. "If this was a zombie, does we will get arrested?"


    "It is definitely not a human." says Alin looking at the bite marks this person acquired on the neck, leg and on the cheeks, "It is monster. Not anyone would be able to jump like that being covered in these wounds."


    "What about drug users?"


    "They maybe in influence of drugs, but no drug is able to bring a people back to life and making his behaviour like an animal."


    They see another two zombies entering their building, and these two brothers are smiling at each other, and proceed to kick those zombies ass. Radu has successfully broke the arm of one of these zombies, while Alin, who used his full force, he made a hole into that skinny zombie chest, then he proceed to do an uppercut, who is flying that zombie head to the ceiling, and then landed on the floor, close to the first corpse. After Radu broke the second zombie legs he stomped on the head until he became minced meat from the Profi store. Radu and Alin are slapping their hands and proceed to barricade their doors, to be sure a zombie will not going to enter this place.


    "Radu... You do know what does this mean?"


    "We are safe from bankruptcy?" asks Radu to his brother.


    "This and... Now we can beat people without being charged."


    "Cool. But promise me, we will only fight zombies, not humans living."


    "Of course. But now, lets just watch the news, just to be sure we ain''t dreaming."


    They go their boss room, opens the TV and start looking at the news, who shows a news report on PRO TV about a zombie apocalypse report you will usually see in the movies. Andrea Esca explains how these things can be avoided, killed, how to deal with an infected and where survivors should seek shelter. The ways to kill these zombies it is by removing the head because their brain are still there and if you smash the brain or penetrate it with a bullet it might stop the mutant from moving any more. Andrea Esca told them to seek shelter by living in forests, or taking a plane to an remote islands, because staying in cities will raise risks of being infected and most people are considering this a fake sign. Radu and Alin, after they got their confirmation and what they can do, they quickly go to their desks, take each one of them a bottle of scotch and pour a few ml into their glasses they have in these desks for this special occasion. After they filled their glasses these two are doing a toast.


    This book was originally published on Royal Road. Check it out there for the real experience.


    "To our freedom!" says these two good friends at the same team before they were packing up and leaving the airport to take one of those planes there who will lead them to the freedom and maximum protection.


    ***


    After these two dudes finished with their whiskey, packing essentials and picking some pipes as weapons because they were quite durable and very useful. Alin had this idea since when he was little, he played a lot of Dead Rising and the weapons he takes are always the pipes. Alin has took a second weapon in case the pipe will break, and he took his boxing gloves because if zombies are ever going to grab his fists, it will be impossible to be bitten because this gloves are really powerful and hard to be damaged.


    "You think we will encounter survivors on our way?" asks Alin who was the last person to leave the building and didn''t closed the door since it is apocalypse and this building it is not worth it anymore since


    "If it will happen, we should help them. Not beat them." says Radu to Alin.


    They are putting the backpacks with supplies on their back, walks to their car, gets on their seats, Alin goes to driver seat, and Radu goes to the other front seat, but right when they were close to leave. A citizen runs to them and yelled at them to help him. That man who stooped in front of their car it is dressed as a mechanic, got on his left arm an wrench and got a lot of blood all over to his face.


    "I need help! Someone was trying to attack us." says the mechanic to them.


    "Who was?" asks Alin who opens the window to the car.


    "A-A guy suddenly tried to jumped at me and bite me. Could help me to carry hi to the hospital?"


    "Haven''t you heard the news. There is now a zombie apocalypse going on."


    "What?... What is a zombie apocalypse?"


    Radu sees a zombie walking slowly to them, but before he was about to leave the car and fight him. Another random guy poops out from a house, and that one wore an Anakin costume, and uses a lightsaber toy for kids. He hit that zombie with the lightsaber but it didnt worked out, instead, it made that zombie turned around and try to jump at him, but the dude continued to hit the zombie in the head. He hit the zombie while he goes with the back just to see if the zombie will have his head broken and die. It was close to pinge that cosplayer to the wall, but Radu arrived right on time, used his pipe he took from the bathroom, and he stabbed that mosnter into the head which made him dead again and his corpse collapsed to the street.


    "Thanks, young padawan!"


    "... Whatever." says Radu to that random cosplayer. "Would you like to join us?"


    "To a new planet?"


    "Most likely on a safe destination, but it is your way."


    "I will be coming with you... Because I do not have a driver license."


    "Hah." laughed Radu. "Who needs a driver license in these days, am I right?"


    "Wait!" says Alin who is coming to Radu to cheeck on him, but he stopps and he is shocked. "You do not have a driver license? Since when?"


    "I never had."


    "So you drived without a license for three years?"


    "Eight years." corrects Radu.


    "Eight years? I know this is Romania, but we are not in Arge?!"


    "What is the difference?" laughed Radu to Alin to make the mood feeling good, but it didnt worked out.


    They decided to drop it, and get into Radu car. The mechanic also joined them, but before they were about to leave, Radu asks those two survivors.


    "Who are your names?"


    "My name is Marcus." says the mechanic sounding a little nervous. "Sorry. I am not used to talk with people, nor this new changing."


    "My name is Anakin, and I-" said the cosplayer but it is stopped by Alin who says to Radu.


    "We got a few zombies coming at us."


    These four survivors looked at their back and they see a big ammount of zombies coming to them. Radu quickly pushed the acceleration pedal and drove from this mess, A few zombies were close to be hitten, but thankfully. Radu had some good skill of driving because he palyed a lot of cars games to participate in illegal races to buy money which they were founded in creating that dojo, which is now going to be a normal building in apoclaypse. An abandoned building which will be devasted by survivors hoping they will see something useful there, like the swords and blades Radu let them there, for the people who truly need it.


    They left the street and now, they drive to the closest airport to take a random plane to fly them to the islands which will spend most of their lives there. While Radu was driving, he turned on the radio and surviors heard an announcent coming from radio.


    "The virus which named Z has infected already 600 000 000 people around the world on the first day. The origin of this virus it unknown, but the goverments around the worlds are telling people to isolate themselves in their homes or risking to thake a plane and drive to an isalnd which is in possession of military. Right now, the military told us that one hundred islands around the entire globe are their terriotories. Some of them are artificial and build in this case, and others are unhibited. Now, the closest ones are in Greece since the ones in Romania are much smaller, and also ocupied by goverment."


    "That dammed goverment!" says Anakin to everybody, but he is the only person who speaks about the goverment, the other didnt really care that much into politics.


    "For the survivors who are listening to us. Be safe and survive this another apocalypse this humanity is dealing with." says the guy on the radio before the transmisson got cuted by a few screaming in the background which indicates that the zombies have already entred radio building and proced to eat the humans there.


    Alin turns off the radio, sighs and then he says.


    "Well shit... We are fucked."


    "Apparently we will go to the airport and take an plane, right? Is this still the plane?" asks the mechanic to be sure.


    But, their car suddenly stops because on the other side of the intersection, a truck is literally on fire and eight or maybe ten zombies are holding strong on that truck while one of them is eating the driver who is trying his best to continue to drive that truck, but he eventually crash into a house and that crash, the truck proceed to explode since it got a lot of damage from zombies and the other vehicles if we will analyze these marks on the cars. The boys in the car did a relief sighs because they avoided death, thanks to Radu fast instincts.


    "We avoided death there." says Anakin. "Thanks young padawan named Radu."


    "Dont mention it." says Radu who is breathing heavily. "We''ve got lucky here. But I feel bad for the truck driver."


    Radu looked around him to be sure not another car will go through the same shit that truck did earlier, but thankfully, there were a few zombies who were walking slowly to them, and survivors who needed help but they were also bitten because most of them were covered in blood and bandaged which probably indicates that these one are infected. If they were thinking to bring one of them in their car, it will be quite hard to squeze him there.

 From Cluj to Athene - Part 3

    This day was supposed to go normal for Alina, a 42 years old police office who have almost twenty years experience only in Cluj-Napoca. She got a lot of people going on this police section, drunk, on drugs, lost tourists, crackheads, homeless, gypsy people who stole a lot homes, orphan kids, irresponsible parents who couldn''t take care of a single child cause of their gender or he is dumb and etc. . But this day... she will encounter something she only heard in only science fiction could happen, a dozens of zombies who made it into her police section and she with her co-workers are trying this best to put these creatures down by using pistols and their police bats. Some are even wearing riot armor and using shields, but Alina, she is not wearing any protection cause she is tough and very quick at action.


    Some zombies fell down, but others were still standing because most of officers there haven''t shoot a real gun, only tasers in their police careers. But Alina, is a different cop from their colleagues. Some of them used connections their parents had with the police, or used their sex appeal like in the case of that secretary who is now eaten alive by two fat zombies. Alina spend her free time going at polygon with her boyfriend and practice their pistol shootings at that place, doing competitions and bets almost every-time they went there. Both of them would bet on their clothes, a sexy night, on dinner money, and one time, they bet on a room for their vacation at Euforie Sud, but it ended up badly for them because that room was already taken. Rooms on Romania beaches are selling so fast, that even the stock market is having a normal flow.


    Alina used her gun she always carry, and shoot one fat zombie head, which it made that corpse fall on the floor. Then, other zombies continues to come along, and they got shot by the other police officers, but most of them missed the heads. Alina did managed to put three zombies down with that one, before more continues to pour into this building and yelled at her colleagues.


    "Retreat!"


    She runs from this hallway to the first floor, where some prisoners are kept and yelled at each other, fighting or even faping to some questionable pictures brought by outside people. Alina and other two cops has successfully escaped that wave of zombies, but the rest of those police officers were quickly tackled by those corpses and eating, or others decided to runs from this police section and try their luck on outside. Alina and the other cops are running down the hallways where are prisoners kept, they ignored their screams, yelling and their violence acts like this is a normal thing, and it is. Also, this hallway has done a good thing for these survivors, they could use the prisoners as a zombie bite.


    Alina was thinking a that, but the other two cops didn''t want to do that, but before they were about to come to a decision, one zombie was running to them before they were about to close the door to stairways rooms. Alina has quickly take out her gun from sheathe and proceed to put a bullet on that zombie brain. It felt down, and Alina closes the gate, then uses the key to lock the door and proceed to run with the other two police officers to the second floor, and there it isn''t anything to make their run harder, so, they took everything they can from the second room of the armory room and proceed to the last floor, which is the rooftop some police officers are using it to smoke or eat their lunch.


    These people have found on the second floor some necessary weapons, but they already have those weapons so they took mostly a few backpacks, food from canteen area. Alina was the only one who took bullets while her colleagues took food and some bullets for the weapons they didn''t carry it. But, there was a thing they didnt expect to see on the roof.


    On the roof, there was their police chef, who was close to jump from the roof, while is holding his dead wife had on his left hand. The man cried and this moment felt so sad, and so depressing for some reason. But the only thing who made these police officers was the fact that this solid man was in this state, neither of them were prepared to encounter a man in this state, especially their boss who was an man who could put a man down, even though he is his 50''s.


    The man looked at Alina, probably the only competent person there, she thought, and that man told her a thing she will remember forever.


    "You are promoted. And take care of you... You were always an important person of this section."


    "Mr. Antonevici!" says Alina running to him, but it was to late, the man slowly fall on his back at almost eight meters into the concrete where three zombies are walking without a reason.


    The fat corpse of the police chief fall after a few seconds on the concrete path, and when it did, one zombie out of those three proceed to jump on him and start biting his face. Alina and her colleagues are looking there terrified and not knowing what to say in this terrifying moment.


    But before they were about to say something, a zombie saw them and he started to run to them. Alina sees the man was close to take out his pistol, but alina stops him by saying to him.


    "He cannot go anywhere. The first floor is locked, remember? He will not be able to climb from here."


    But the thing didn''t tried to use the door, he just put his both of his hands on the wall of this police section, then he uses his legs and proceed to walk on those walls like a lizard. Thanks to his sticky blood and other cells who make this mutant evolve, it helps him to climb that wall which not even a mountain goat would be able to climb it.


    "Fuck. These things are getting worse." says Alina taking the pistol and proceed to shoot into that thing, together with her colleague who draw the gun first.


    Two bullets hit the zombie head who was climbing to these walls, and it made him fall on the concrete path. And when it falls, his spine and probably other bones have been braking since these survivors heard a loud crack noises coming from that monster.


    "Now they can climb?" asks first co-worker.


    "This will be getting dangerous." says Alina to her teammates. "We need a new strategy. And a way to leave this city."


    "Are you sure leaving the city would be a good decision?"


    "Yes. Why it will not be, Alex?" asks Alina to the guy named Alex which is her co-worker.


    "No, no, no. It is a good idea." says Alex to her subordinates who scared him the moment she asked him this question.


    If you encounter this tale on Amazon, note that it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it.


    "Then shut up and be prepared for anything." says Alina reloading her pistol and preparing her police bat for the zombie who might try to come here. "We don''t know how much longer it will take these bastards to figure out these stairs are connected with the ground floor."


    "These things are like zombies from the movie right? It might not be that smart." says the second cop.


    But then, three zombies opened the door where these cops were using it to get to this rooftop. But they were slow walking type, so Alina and Alex were the ones killed these three zombies by using their pistols. Alina landed two bullets into two zombies and Alex successfully killed a female zombie who had her hand detached and this easy to defeat even in a melee combat because a missing hand on a zombie it offers and advantage even for a man who is not able to use a baseball bat on a person. These two have also did a mistake by using their pistols, which make a big noise, and this noise can attract zombies, and this attracted four more zombies.


    But Alina, shoot her four bullets to those zombies, while Alex and her co-worker are going as fast as they can to that door which leads to this rooftop, locks it by using Alex key chain to the doors of this police building, and locked the door.


    "Alina. You better stop using your gun." says Alex to her. "I-It attract noises."


    "... I am sorry." says Alina putting her pistol to her sheathe and looks around her to see if something useful will happen.


    Alina looks on the buildings next to her and she sees a lot of people on the street fighting these creatures by using different types of weapons, or one muscular building next to their police building, at fifth floor , he is pushing a zombie from the window and throw him on that floor into a fence, which impaled that zombie corpse and stops him to move permanently. That muscular man sees the cops on their rooftop and yelled at them.


    "This whole building is infected with walkers! We need help!"


    "We are trying top get help!" says Alina with a loud voice to that muscular man after she realize she could call her co-worker which is a police chopper pilot and he might going to help them leave this area.


    She takes out her radio, turns on and says a code to that thing, a code which she requests one police chopper to the police station, but after she tries for almost sixth times to try to communicate it didn''t worked out. But before she was about to gave upon this plan, a voice from their police station told them.


    "Here is Capone Alinatir. The pilot of police section number 45. I am on my way to your police section, be prepared to extraction and get put into the nearest airport available."


    "Airport?" asks Alina. "Why are you going to throw us to the airport."


    "This is the government plan. I don''t know why he is doing that instead of dealing with this thing, but at least thinks about civilians status instead of their own protection. They must be desperate to get some votes."


    "Let this thing aside. How far are you?"


    "In about three minutes I might be able to arrive here."


    And it closes the station. Alina breath a sigh of relief, the muscular man was still on that department and he asks Alina out loud.


    "Is it coming?"


    "Yeah! In three minutes! GET ON YOUR ROOFTOP AND WAIT FOR THE CHOOPER TO COME!"


    "GOT IT!" yelled the muscular man who is getting off from that window and proceed to head to the rooftop.


    ***


    Meanwhile, three blocks away from the police station, there is a zombie who runs after Ana, the chick who quit her job as a cashier and let her boss being eaten alive by zombies. She doesn''t have any weapon at her, only her legs who could help outrun the zombies who are after her, but there was only one, and that one is a fat zombie who is probably 100 ¨C 125 kilograms fatter than Ana. She screams while she is running, thinking that someone might be able to save her, and this works. A guy leaves the apartment building with a kitchen knife on his hand and runs to that fat zombie who was still running after Ana, ignoring the man behind him who stabbed his neck and then he easily rotate the zombie neck 180 degrees. That attack was fast and it made Ana stops suddenly after he heard the fat zombie falling on the concrete.


    "Thank you!" says Ana to that survivor who just looked at her, and he heads back to his apartment. "Hey! Would you like to come with me to the airport?"


    "... No. I done think I will." says the survivor who looks at Ana for a bit before he was heading back to his apartment.


    She continues walking, ignoring the rest of people who are dealing with these creatures and trying to dodge the zombies who are coming after her. She did see a crowbar on the street, next to a corpse who is about to became zombie at any moment and missing an arm, probably taken by a zombie to eat. Ana didn''t cared about the corpse or the other zombie, she just took this weapon because a crowbar in this situation might be the best decision. When she puts her hand into that crowbar, she seemed fascinated for a second.


    "It is big and... Not heavy." says Ana taking a look at that crowbar with blood from zombies or normal people, it is hard to deduce what kind of blood is that.


    A zombie walks slowly to Ana, with his arms aimed at her. Ana sensed that monster walking to her, right when it was close to touch her back. Ana quickly got up to her feet and with one hit, she smashed that monster jaws, but it didn''t killed him entirely, he still moves, but it is not a threat anymore. She doged that thing by going two steps back and did a fatal hit again, by smashing the thing head with that crowbar. The hit was so hard it made the creatures fall on his knees and with the rest of his body on the floor. Now, Ana sees a thing on how to stop these things, by smashing their heads.


    Of course we know that, but Ana didn''t know it until she decided to see if zombies series or movies can confirm this hypothesis.


    Ana looks at the crowbar is holding, and she looks on her left, then she sees a two cars who are crash into each other. Ana goes to these cars to see if she can help them, but she sees something disturbing which will be imploded on her head and make her have nightmares. A zombie in the red car who crashed into the black car, there is a mature corpse reanimated who... is eating a... child who is screaming for help, but Ana couldn''t do anything when she got to that car because it is locked and the little boy is screaming while is eating alive probably by his mother or big sister. Ana has decided to try and smash the window with the crowbar but it is to late because this little boy is already dead.


    She cries, and then she uses the crowbar to hit that zombie female head, but the first year didn''t did much damage. She did a second hit, and this one has made an injury, but not enough fatal to kill the zombie. A third one did stopped the zombie for a moment. And the fourth one almost killed the zombie. Before she was about to do a fifth hit, she turned around after she heard a male screaming close to her. That man is eating alive by nine child zombies, and that dude didn''t looked like a tasty meal to them since he is slim.


    Ana runs from this place to the nearest apartment and when it got into the building, she sees four zombies who are trying their beast to break the door where a girl is screaming for help. Ana took some courage and she yelled at those zombies.


    "Hey! Nasty people! Come and get me!"


    Two of these zombies are turning back to Ana and proceed to walk to her, but both of these things are tripping over the stairs and when they got to Ana feet, they were close to bite her feet, but Ana has successfully break the head of one zombie. But the other one was already killed, when it tripped and break his neck. Ana looked at the thing who is still moving, but it cannot get on his feet like the others things she encountered on the street. Ana still decided to apply double tap to that thing, just to be sure it will not move again and try to bite her.


    The two zombies were still trying to enter that room, and Ana goes to help the people locked in the apartment. Ana uses her crowbar to hit the thing in the head, but it doesn''t fall, the zombie but it attract those two zombies to her. Right when they were close to bite her, one arrow hit one of the zombies, and the arrow comes from her right, then another arrow hit the second zombie from the same direction. These two things lied on the floor, and Ana looks on the right side and she sees a lady with a skirt and a bullet vest, and on her back it is a Chinese man with a crossbow.

 From Cluj to Athene - Part 4

    Ana is using her crowbar to unlock the door of that apartment and when he did, a gypsy teenager leaves in hurry her room she was blocked in because of these creatures, and she probably thought they did find a way to enter the apartment. That gypsy girl was close to stabbing Ana, but she quickly told that girl she is not infected and when she speaks the gypsy girl stopped, dropped her knife and cried. She thanked Ana for saving her, and she also told her this thing.


    "You have ugly hair."


    Ana got used by this sentence for so long, she still cannot believe she didn''t murder anybody yet. And zombies doesn''t count as victims, they are just creatures who cannot think and use their combat instincts instead of rational thinking. The girl also sees that one girl with the Chinese man who helped Ana with killing two zombies. The gypsy woman looks weird at the Chinese man because she has never seen a Chinese person in real life, even though they do live in Cluj were a small Eastern Asian group is living there.


    The gypsy teenager let these four survivors enter the apartment to take a break and probably stay there until the things are going to chill out outside because on this moment, they could hear a bunch of crashing into each other and people screaming on the street for help.


    ***


    On the police station, at the rooftop, Alina with her two cops male co-workers are waiting for a police helicopter to extract them from there. Who will also try to extract the muscular man, who is on the rooftop of the next building, together with two other survivors, a girl dressed like a hooker and a blonde guy covered in blood who is speaking Romanian with a German accent.


    Alina sees a chopper coming to them, and together with her colleagues are waving their hands to the chopper to get his attention. The choppers lower down, very slowly because he might be risking causing an accident on an urban area which building have now been build higher, thanks to construct workers who have decided to finally do their job.


    At almost three meters height from the rooftop, the other man on the chopper is opening the door and pulls out a ladder to the cops locked on the rooftop. He yelled at them to go one at a time. Alina goes first, then Alex, and the moment the last one was about to climb the ladder, a zombie tackles the man down and proceed to tear his belly. Alina and Alex tried to shoot the thing, they did hit it, but Alex was already infected, and Alex shot him by mistake in the belly and throat. The co-pilot of this chopper is closing the door before these people were about to do a stupid suicide mission.


    Good news it is that Alina and with Alex managed to kill that thing by shooting his head, and the bad news that the thing killed the second cop, who is left on the rooftop, where other zombies, who can climb buildings, are going to feast upon his body.


    The helicopters managed to go to the other building are rescue the three survivors from there, right at the moment the zombies there did manage to climb the stairs and arrived at the rooftop of this building. The pilot proceed to manoeuvre this thing to head out of this place and fly to the closest airport, which is called Avram Iancu International Airport.


    These five survivors are thinking that they will be heading to a safety, but the safety it will be much further. But for now, they have time for a small break because zombies are not able to fly, nor to jump that higher to the helicopter.


    ***


    A few minutes later, on the apartment where Ho Lee (the Chinese guy), Laura (the girl with a skirt and covered in blood), Cassandra (the gypsy teenager) and Ana are sitting on the couches and sofas on living room, and analyse the situation they are in. Luckily, Ho Lee helped them a bit because he is a writer and is very well-known for apocalyptic genre because he wrote a bunch of web novels about zombies or nuclear warfare.


    The woman who assisted Ho Lee it is named Laura, and this badass girl was an IT worker, expert in First-Person Shooter Gamer such as Valorant, CS:GO, Left 4 Dead, Back 4 Blood and other series which are convenient for this event. Laura worked at this job for about eight hours and on the rest of those eight hours she spends playing video games, sometimes alone, sometimes with her fianc¨¦ which... got killed a while ago by a zombie.


    This tale has been unlawfully lifted from Royal Road. If you spot it on Amazon, please report it.


    Cassandra is looking at Ho Lee and asks him.


    "Are you Chinese?"


    "I am." says Ho Lee, feeling annoyed because this question was asked for thousands times since he came to Romania.


    "Cool." says Cassandra.


    "And you two?" says Ho Lee, looking at Cassandra and Ana. "Are you two bitten or something?"


    "No. I am not bitten by these... creatures?" asks Ana.


    "Those are zombies." says Ho Lee to Ana who probably never heard of zombie shows, novels, comic books or movies about zombie apocalypse. "Creatures who can be killed by just hitting their head."


    "Yeah. I killed a few of them on my way with this." she shows Ho Lee her bloody crowbar.


    "And you did a niece job. Also... Aren''t you scared?"


    "I am." says Ana. "But I do know how to hide my emotions."


    "... Okay." says Laura, looking weirdly at Ana, and then at Cassandra. "And... How did you get into this apartment?"


    "T-This building was of a man." says Cassandra to Laura. "Who... Bought my service."


    "You mean your prostitute?" asks Laura, being shocked by this information.


    "My parents are poor and use the money government said to them to use the lottery or play on the Bar at Slots Machines... They forgot about me and my three sisters... I just... Worked for myself." she says, starting to tear up. "But I am feeling terrible for leaving my sisters behind... I just hope... Hope they are alive..."


    The rest of those three survivors are feeling bad for Cassandra. But, they do also have families and do not know what happened to them. Laura told them she tried to contact her parents, but the phones didn''t work out cause of the signal. Apparently, zombies or something must''ve put down phones cables around this city, but most likely, there were a few cars who crashed into power poles cause of this apocalypse.


    Cassandra asked them if they can help her get to her village to see if the members of her family it is still alive, but survivors couldn''t do it because Ana asked them.


    "Should we head to the airport? And take a plane to a safe island?"


    "You want to risk your life on an island?" asks Laura. "Hell... I am in."


    "I will also go." says Ho Lee, looking at Ana. "I might found a way to head back to my hometown."


    "Do you think the virus has also spread there?" asks Ana.


    "Apparently, the news on the radio told that almost sixty million people got suddenly infected by this virus. And there is a high chance that this virus might''ve hit my country and the infection has already started it."


    "But how you two would get there?" asks Cassandra. "Without a car or a transport vehicle, you cannot do it."


    "Actually... There might be a way." says Ho Lee, who is looking at Laura. "You remember the helicopter who by-pass our area?"


    "Do you think it would take us?"


    "It is worth a try, Laura." says Ho Lee, getting out of the chair and going to the door with his crossbow prepared and his machete on the sheath at the left wrist.


    The rest of these survivors are following Ho Lee to the rooftop. While they were taking the stairs to the rooftop, they encountered only two corpses and when they do, Laura was already taken her pocket knife and stabbed these lifeless corpses into their head. She did that thing to stop the transformation, which it might be going to work. That was what these survivors thought.


    After a few minutes of walking the upstairs, they do arrive at the rooftop, and there they see nothing on the sky, no helicopter and no airplane. Only destruction down the streets of Cluj-Napoca, buildings on fire, people on the street running for their life, or fighting against these zombies by using any weapon, or being eaten by these creatures because they do a wrong moves who cost their life, literally.


    Ana and Ho Lee sees a zombie trying to climb the rooftop. And Ho Lee, has quickly used his crossbow to shoot an arrow to the thing who managed to climb this building. It got shut down when it was at the third floor, and this thing falls on a zombie who was walking clueless on the street, and probably put the other zombie to sleep forever.


    "These things can climb walls?" asks Ho Lee, surprised and shocked. "These creatures can evolve at an alarming rate, which means... In about a week... Or more than a week... Humanity, it is truly doomed, and we cannot do not many things."


    "We can still do something." says Ana. "We can put these things out of their misery."


    "Like in those series of zombies and movies, right?"


    "Yeah... Like in those series." she says at Ho Lee. "I think your parents will be alright."


    "You think... They... Are not in a good health condition since that accident at the factory... Both of them have injuries around their bodies, and my Mother has asthma. If they die... I don''t think I couldn''t handle it."


    "Lee... They will be fine!" says Ana to his new friend. "Just like us."


    Cassandra looks on the sky, and when she sees a black object from a very far distance approaching to them, she screamed like a gypsy who found her husband cheating with her cousin.


    "HELICOPTER!"


    Now, everyone looked on the sky, and they see the helicopter approaching to them. All four of them wave to the helicopter to come, stop for them and extract them from this location.


    Thankfully, the pilot sees these people waving at him, and they extract them from there by doing the same scheme they did to Alina. And as coincidence, this is the same helicopter who is carrying Alina with her colleague, Alex.

 From Cluj to Athene - Part 5

    A few minutes later, on a street who is heading to the Airport, our four males, Anakin, Marcus, Radu and Alin, are approaching their destination, right when they avoided a countless of zombies, survivors who were not caution around them and cars who were driving badly and crashed into other cars, buildings or other weird spots.


    Alin was driving like a bad ass, while his best friend, Radu, and the other two passengers, on the back seats, were encouraging Alin to drive safely, and a few times, trying to put the zombies down who managed to grab their car somehow. Alin looked on the sign from the left sign of the road which is written the number of kilometers to the airport and it shows only four kilometers, which is about one mile for the people in U.S.A. .


    "We are getting closer." says Radu to the people on the back seat. "When we got there, we will have to fight against these things."


    "T-There are going to be a lot?" asks the mechanic named Marcus.


    "Most likely." says Radu to Marcus. "Look on the streets, man. The world has really fucked up this time."


    "Indeed." says the guy who is cosplaying Anakin. "If the world has truly ends, at least I got the chance to see and fought a zombie."


    "Have you put a zombie down?" asks Alin while is driving this car and avoid other cars and other zombies on the way.


    "Yes. I do put one down to its misery... It was brutal, but that guy was already a lost cause."


    "What do you mean?" asks Marcus feeling curios about this cosplayer encounter with the first zombie.


    "I had a friend of mine... We used to live together, but... It looks like I was the only one who got a job and use my money to buy his food and pay rental. He had a family, but his parents and brothers forgot him and stopped sending him money. Even though he uses those money to never work in his entire life and only live in his apartment, eating McDonald''s and looking at porn, every single day and night. But, when I came back from a cosplay, I found him in the apartment, trying to walk to me, walking like a zombie and having blood all over the face."


    "Whose was the blood?" asks Radu.


    "From my cat, Tomi. That roommate hate my cat so much, that one time, he got it injured after he throws his phone to my poor cat."


    "What a fucked up person." says Marcus to the guy who call himself Anakin. "And how did you killed him?"


    "It was fast... I just pushed him out of the stair poles at the ninth floor and he fell a few meters to the ground and there, he probably got crushed to death. I go downstairs to see his condition, but when I got to the eight floor, I saw my neighbor being eaten alive by another zombie who looks like his eight years old child. They were screaming and trying to put the kid down. I tried to help them by taking that child, but his mother, was close to my bite my arm cause she was also an zombie. I used my light saber and put that monster down at the first occasion, the run from this building without looking back at my dead roommate."


    "Wow..." says Marcus being the only one able to talk because the other were speechless by this.


    Anakin might be a loser who cosplay as an imaginary character, but he was a guy trying to be an hero and a guy who carried a huge burden with him in this life, a obsess roommate who probably threaten Anakin like a piece of shit. Then, Marcus was about to start his story, but Alin stops the car and then he quickly turns back to his people at the back seat.


    "We have to run!"


    "Why?" asks Anakin, but then he sees the reason.


    In front of their cars,there is an immense group of cars who are stopping them to the airport, all of these people are screaming, yelling at each other and hooking like this is just a weekend in Romania mountains instead an apocalypse. There is even a gypsy guy who is trying to beat down a woman who is driving her BMV and is in front of her, but her husband quickly takes out his pistol and shoot that guy, while he is yelling.


    "You deserve to die, Gypsy!"


    Almost everyone of this highway is terrifying by this and attempt to abandon their vehicles and run to the airport. And those people were Alin, Radu, Marcus and Anakin who quickly grab their things they taken and run to the airport, together with the groups there. The man who shoot that gypsy laughs while he is shooting random people, killing a few of them, and his girlfriend, doesn''t do anything she just sits there, smiling at the killings her husband is doing it. But then, Karma has decided to hit that man in the nuts, by transforming that dead gypsy into a zombie who tackled the man down and proceed to eat him alive. The girlfriend starts screaming and attempted to leave her car and help his boyfriend, but God... This girl got jumped by a zombie who recently got killed by her husband while he was still human. The zombie starts biting the girl cheeks, and she is crying, yelling and trying to stop that thing by using her artificial nails which broke down easily.


    If you come across this story on Amazon, it''s taken without permission from the author. Report it.


    The four males are following the other groups of people who are heading to the airport. They dodged a few cars stocked, avoided a few opened doors by drivers who decided to avoid their vehicles and run to airport. Anakin even had to encounter a zombie, but he pushes that zombie into an opened and empty car, then he quickly locks it and he runs to the airport with his light saber on the right hand.


    These four survivors are at a close distance to their airport, but, right when they were close to cross on the building, they heard a giant explosion coming from a few meters from the west. Anakin, Radu, Marcus and Alin saw an helicopter, crashing into the nearest building and exploding at the impact, which made that building collapse, slowly. A few screams and "Dumnezeu!", "C?cat!", "Fereasc? sfantul!" and others phrases which Romanians are using often in their daily life.


    But they didn''t stayed there for long because an apocalypse is happening and zombies are appearing out of nowhere. These four survivors continues to run, while they are putting zombies down or they dodged them. Alin has punched a thing head so hard it made it collapse. Alin has used a great kick, who hit the zombie head, and made that nasty head flying right into an old lady, who fall on the ground and start to be taken by three close zombies, who proceed to eat her. Alin is feeling guilty for this, but Marcus told him to carry on or they will be eaten. Alin and Marcus runs to the airport, together with Radu and Anakin, who helped a family getting out of their car because they were locked thanks to the cars parked close to their doors. They broke all four of car windows and helped them get out of there. There were only three people there, a Father, Mother and a nine years old daughter. This was a fast thing to do.


    Alin, Radu, Anakin and Marcus have made it at the airport, togheter with almost eleven survivors. Some of them got killed on the run, or got lost, or worse, they got hurt while they were running to the airport. Anyway, they arrived there, and the first thing they see there, are a bunch of soldiers who proceed to aim their weapons at the eleven ones, and yelled at them.


    "FREEZE!" says the soldiers, who then let''s three doctors soldiers with equipments coming to those survivors.


    "We are going to check your temperature." says a medical soldier to Alin aiming his pistol looking thermometer. "If your temperature is higher than 38 grade Celsius, then you might be infected and proceed to be shot."


    "This is bullshit!" yelled a man in his thirty when a medical soldier finished taking his temperature and observed it is 38.1 grade Celsius, but it was to late for him to realize what is going to happen before a soldier has shot his head with an AK-47, by using only a bullet.


    That corpse has fallen on the concrete. And later on, another three human corpses has fallen on the ground because they scored a higher temperature than 38 grade Celsius. But at those three bodies, weren''t Marcus, Radu, Alin and Anakin, they were the only ones who scored about 37 grade Celsius, and there were other people there who made low to thirty seven degrees Celsius. They are escorting to the room, where they will be checked to see if they have a bite on them or an injury.


    After they finished that test in the first room of the airport, they made it. The soldiers gives the survivors who were successfully checked, a backpack with supplies which will need it when they made it to islands they choose to go. Anakin, Radu and Alin are going to the reception, were a female soldier stays at the reception, and she tells them directly.


    "Which flight are you choosing? The one to Africa is already full, and the one to Ada Kaleh. The only remaining ones are to Athens uninhabited islands which are the property of the government and Serbia. Which are you choosing?"


    "We will take the ones to Athena." says Radu for Alin and Anakin, after they discussed this thing for a short period of time.


    "Alright. The gate number six. It will start flying in about three hours."


    "Three hours?" asks Alin. "Why that late?"


    "Protocol measures." and that was the last thing she said to them, while they were escorting by two soldiers to a waiting room, where other survivors are located and wait for their plane.


    Alin asked a few passengers from there, which flight they got, and they responded that they are all flying to Athena uninhabited islands which is a big coincidence. Anakin told his friend, Radu. that this room it is probably the ones of those survivors who are boarding to Athena plane.


    Now, these three survivors are wondering about Marcus. So, Alin leaves this room, telling the soldier who is guarding the door, that he is going to search for a friend. The soldier, being a kind human being, let the man go and find his friend into this airport.


    ***


    A few minutes later, Alina and with other survivors have made it to the airport by using the helicopter, a transport way nobody has trying to use it to arrive there, since the street have started to became quickly filled with zombie, and corpses who were eating right now by these lifeless creatures.


    Alina and with the other survivors are leaving the helicopter, but when they left the soldiers aimed their guns to them and asks them if they are infected or present a bite. All of them, raised their hands surrounded and told them they are fine. But, when the soldiers with these thermometers looking like guns come, one old lady felled on her ground. A medical soldier quickly runs to her, he checked her temperature and got a shock.


    "The lady it is 38.9 grade Celsius!"


    And one soldier steeped from the ground with this glock, and shoot her head. And this, made the muscular guy feel angry. He was about to leave his spot, ignoring the soldiers who aimed his assault rifles to him. But this beast, was about to grab the soldier who shot the old lady, and the man got shoot into his head, then he got shoot all over his body by the rest of those soldier.


    All of these survivors there stood there, by in shocked by the thing what was happening in front of them. One of them, which was Cassandra screamed in agony, and these soldiers were closed to aim at her, but then, a soldier has quickly checked her temperature and tells them that she doesn''t have a high body temperature. The rest of those soldier checked the other survivors, and all of them passed this test.


    They were then escorting to the elevator, and there, they will be send to the reception, to choose a plane to the a safe land.

 From Cluj to Athene - Part 6

    A few moments later, on the hallway airport of Iancu, the mechanic guy, whose name is Marcus, is sitting on a chair, in a depressive state. He got the supply backpack on the floor, and a photo on his left hand. His eyes are red, due to the crying he did earlier when he finds out that this infection might''ve killed his family. He knows that because he tried to call his family by using a telephone from military officers, who were giving him a phone to contact someone from outside.


    Marcus has contacted his family, and when was about to ask them what is going on with them and tell them he is in safe hands, a lot of screaming are heard in the background, then, the phone calls stops by Marcus after he heard screaming of help and pain. He gave the phone back to a military officer, and he stayed on that hallway, feeling sad because his family has already been killed and transformed into these lifeless creatures.


    "Hey!" says Alin when he says Marcus on the hallway. "Are felling alright?"


    "No... My family..." tried to say to Marcus, but while he is thinking about that, he starts to tear up. "They are all dead... My daughter... My beautiful wife... My mom."


    "I know this feeling." says Alin who is taking a plastic chair who was standing on the ground for a reason and covered in blood of zombies, he sits close to Marcus and proceed to tell him something. "When I was sixteen years old. I have lost my mother. She had terminal cancer. Doctors couldn''t do anything, and my father... My father was dating another woman while my mother was on her dying bed. Even though they were divorced for a while, but still... This is not good." he takes a pause and tells Marcus another thing. "Then, after a year when she died, my father also died, but in a car accident, this didn''t make me sad, but when I was dinging in his bank account and read his will he left behind to me and Radu... The will made both of us shocked to learn the truth that my father, slept with a woman who could provide him enough money to save my mother. But the woman was lying. She didn''t pay him, but instead... She decided to kill my mother by bribing the medical staff to inject a poison. Even though she had no chance of survival... Then, that woman also decided to kill my father, by forcing a man to crash into my father car."


    "I am sorry." tried to say Marcus who was trying to stop his tears coming up.


    "... I still think about this moment. At the day, I will see this woman in front of me, and proceed to teach her the same lesson. But... I think that this lady it is already dead."


    "W-Who was the lady name?"


    "Alexandra Laura. Tall woman, blonde hair, smokes a cigarette and wears office worker costumes almost every day. My Father always told me that this woman was working on an office in this area." says Alin to Marcus, and then, the next three seconds he sees a lady in her, IT uniform walking pass by him, and this made him angry the next second because she resembled the woman.


    Alin stood from his chair, he sees the lady who looks confused at him, but before she was about to realize what it is about to happen. Alin has punched her so hard, that he broke her nose, together with four teeth''s. Marcus has tried to stop him, but Alin pushed him back, and he looks at that lady dressed in IT uniform, with blood all over the place.


    "Help!" screamed the lady for help, but before she was about to say anything, Alin looks at her tag.


    "Your name it is Alexandra Laura, right?"


    "Y-yes... W-Why are you doing this?"


    "Why?" asks Alin who is angry as hell, and he ignores the soldiers who are surrounding Alin with their guns.


    "RETREAT!" says a soldier to Alin. "GET BACK! You want to get killed so bad."


    "Do it, then!" says Alin. "Shoot me, and my brother will hunt you to the ground."


    "You ain''t scaring us." says a soldier who was close to shot Alin, but he lights have suddenly stopped, which made the whole group of soldiers looking around them, and shooting blindly.


    This tale has been unlawfully lifted without the author''s consent. Report any appearances on Amazon.


    But when the lights came back, the same soldier discovered that, a few of his colleagues are dead, due to blind shots, and he also sees that the female named Laura and Alin, aren''t there anymore. All the soldiers started to scatter around and try to find them, but when they were about to start this plan, they heard an alarm coming from the next floor. Every single soldier are heading towards the alarm to see what is going on there.


    On a dark room, not very far from the hallway where the entire action was happening earlier, Alin and with Marcus are standing in front of the female named Laura, who is tied up in a metal chair by some electronic cables as a rope. Alin turn on the light of this room via a switch. He looks angry at that lady, who doesn''t know what is going on, but before she could say anything, Alin asks her.


    "Do you remember me?"


    "W-Who are you?" asks Laura, not having any idea what is going on.


    "I am the child of a father who previously used to go on dates with you. Do you remember Albert, right?"


    "Albert... Was an asshole."


    Alin smacked her face so hard, her both cheeks got a bruise. He looks angry at her, and he asks about her mother, which Laura replied that she doesn''t know. And Alin, not being a very talkative person, he takes out the drill from a shelf, and he asks Marcus.


    "Would you like to leave me alone with this crazy chick?"


    "Y-Yes, man." says Marcus who quickly leaves this room, and runs towards somewhere safe, trying to forget the thing it is going on right now.


    Then, Alin turns on the drill, and he finds out that it still has batteries, and it is charged. He goes slowly to Laura, who tries to negotiate her freedom to him, but this is too late. Alin has already set his mind to kill this crazy lady from a long time. She even tried to tell Alin that all of this was a trick, but Alin didn''t listen, and he stops this women telling anything by inserting the sharp part of the drill directly to her skull for a few moments.


    After he finished killing her, Alin is looking on the ceiling, and he screams, joyfully that he finally revenged his parents, who were killed by this woman who seduced his mother husband when she was on her deathbed, and also killed this man by creating a car accident. He stays there for a short time, until Marcus came back at told Alin that they have to move on because these planes are about to leave the airport at any time.


    ***


    A few moments later, the soldier is encountering a severe case, a few zombies has successfully breached in by just climbing to those buildings, using the doors at the rooftops, then going downstairs and eating the survivors from this airport. The soldiers weren''t expecting zombies to climb these buildings, not even their mental capability to open doors.


    On the hallways of this airport, three soldiers were gunning down about twelve zombies by shooting them with assault rifles. A soldier was close to being bitten, but someone has saved him from that fate, by shooting the zombie head. The soldier realized that the bullet came from behind, he took a turn back, while his teammates are busy to kill these zombies who are walking to those soldiers.


    Alina it is at their back, by herself, with her pistol smoking after she delivered that bullet to the zombie skull and stopped him for good. She proceeds to shoot a few more zombies with her incredible accuracy at using the pistol. She put three zombies to their misery, while the rest of those soldiers were gunning down the rest of them. Some of those bullets didn''t hit zombies heads, only limbs and other body parts, but they managed to kill those zombies, even if they didn''t hit their head.


    "Is everyone alright?"


    "Yes." responded one of the soldiers examining a few fallen bodies by kicking their heads. "Looks like they are truly dead."


    "Good." says the soldier who was saved by Alina, and she turns around to her. "Thanks for earlier."


    "Don''t mention it." responded Alina to those soldiers. "Now, I would like to tell you that these creatures can climb walls and use doors, like you saw earlier."


    "Really?" asks one of the soldiers. "There are monsters much worse and intelligent than those outside we have killed so far."


    "Most likely yes, but we have to be careful now, cause these things ain''t like the ones from the movies or The Walking Dead."


    "The Walking Dead?" asks one of the soldiers, who doesn''t have any idea what she was talking about.


    "Anyway... We should patrol this whole building." says a soldier to those two and to Alina. "And you, go back to the survivors section. We appreciate your help here, but we have to protect every citizen and the people who couldn''t protect themselves."


    "As you wish." responded Alina. "But, I would like to know if you guys have any information about this disease."


    "Sorry, ma''am. But we do not possess such information." responded one of those soldiers who are reloading his assault rifle. "You should ask Dr. Cleatus. He is on the second floor. He is, or was, working at an institute specialized on deadly virus. Maybe he knows something about this virus."


    "I will check him. Thanks." she said to those soldiers before she was heading to the second floor, but one soldier stopped her.


    "Aren''t you going to give your gun to us?"


    "Leave it, Caesar." says the leader soldier. "She is a cop, after all. She can handle a gun and besides, she is a sharp shooter. She is probably much more precise than David."


    "Whatever you say, boss." says the soldier retreating from Alina after he failed to take her gun.


    Alina leaves those soldiers patrolling this building, and she is heading to the second floor, where she will try to speak with that doctor to see, what kind of virus has attacked them and how it can be defeated or neutralized.

 From Cluj to Athene - Part 7

    On the same room, where that woman was killed by Alin, he and with his friend, Radu, have come back, after they put three zombies down who were close to eat one little girl. They did saved the girl, but not her mother, which was eaten alive by those beats after those two fighters arrived to this place. The little girl was send to an hospital, where a few medics are going to try and help this little girl overcome this hard trauma of her mother, dying in front of her.


    They looked at that lady who ruined their life, and now, she became a zombie. Alin observed that the lady it is chained up to her chair, and Radu, he looked shocked at Alin, then back at the zombie, then at Alin.


    "Are you insane?" asks Radu.


    "To revenge my lost of my father and mother?" asks Alin. "If it is insane, well yes... I am insane."


    "... Brother. You couldn''t do that."


    "Why?"


    "Our family had problems with this lady, yes. But killing another people in the apocalypse... This is wrong, brother. Especially in this case."


    "S-She had to go. She murdered our family."


    "That it is true. But our mother, she was close to die anyway. The doctors said-"


    "THE DOCTORS SAID?!" yelled Alin at his brother. "The doctors were corrupted by her. Everyone was corrupted by her status and money! She had to go before he did a lot of bad things, even on this new world."


    Then, both of them shut up, they looked at the zombie girl who is still trying to get out of her chains. But Radu, is taking off a knife he bought to him to kill those three zombies from earlier. He goes close to the corpse, and he stabbed the head of that moving corpse. After that stabbed, the corpse stopped moving it, and Radu let that knife there. Then, he walks close to his brother and told to him.


    "Now both of us are criminals."


    And he leave this room, letting Alin alone in this room with that corpse. Then, after a few seconds of thinking, he leave this room and head to the waiting room, where their plane will be about to go.


    ***


    Meanwhile, on an medical cabinet of this airport, Alina is talking with Dr. Cleatus, the only medic on this place who could help these people how this virus works and the ways of defeating it. But most of these survivors know how to defeat these things by decapitating them, or immobilizing them by just cutting every limb of that zombie. It will not kill them, but they will be stopping from moving.


    "You should take out those teeth." says Dr. Cleatus to his assistant who is about to take out the teeth of an zombie adult, who is still kicking it.


    The assistant was scared at first, but this Doctor encouraged her to continue this extraction because the corpse is chained up, and his teeth are opened wide, thanks to that tool used for dentists to keep the moth open of he patients.


    She successfully took out the first teeth without any problem, then she took out the second one. This assistant felt quite easy and not scared while she was extracting these teeth. If the zombie was still human, this would''ve been a real painful experience and a dark memory, for both of them, but these creatures are not able to think, nor to see the reality. Their only way of thinking is to hunt human prey, something similar like the animals.


    When the assistant was halfway through this extraction, Alina came to this room, and looked around, horrified at the thing this assistant and Dr. Cleatus are doing to an alive corpse. But before Alina was about to take her gun and to shoot that thing, Dr. Cleatus stopped her, by telling her that they need to do some research on these things.


    "This thing it is breathing. It is a threat to this place." argued Alina to dr. Cleatus.


    "I know this, but we have to risk it, in order to know how we can defeat these monsters." said Dr. Cleatus to Alina before he goes closely to that corpse to see her assistant taking out the last tooth of that thing. "You see, if we are taking out their teeth, they might not going to be able to spread the virus."


    "And how you know this will not work?"


    "We will test it, on someone." respond Dr. Cleatus while he is walking to a door which is leading to an storage door for medical use, he takes from there an inmate who it is completely chained at his arms and legs. He is looking terrified at Alina, but much more terrified when he sees the creatures. He screamed and tried to hide behind his arms chained, hoping that the creature might not going to see him if he hides behind his arms. But, the thing saw him and continued to groan at him and says those zombie sounds.


    "The thing will not hurt you." said Dr. Cleatus while he is escorting the man to that zombie with his teeth removed. "We extracted their teeth, so it will be impossible to spread this flu."


    "You think so?" asks Alina.


    "That''s just a theory. I am not sure this will work, but we have to risk it in order to save our remaining humans."


    "S-So y-y-y-you say I m-might going to d-di-die?" tried to say the inmate but he is to terrified to even speak calmly.


    "Maybe." says the Dr. Cleatus who is pushing the inmate close to the creature, and he then looked at his assistant. "Open the locks!"


    The assistant is quickly taken out the locks, and that zombie is free from chains. And the zombie saw the inmate, but he looked back at his assistant and jumped on her. He pinned the assistant down and it was close at eating the assistant arm, but Alina was quick in action and she shoot the zombie head. Then, she helped the assistant getting up, and shove that dead zombie on the floor.


    This book was originally published on Royal Road. Check it out there for the real experience.


    "Why you killed him?" says the crazy Doctor. "You should have let him live, we could''ve control it."


    "Control it, my ass!" yelled Alina to the Doctor, and she approaches to him angrily. "You could''ve destroy this safe building with one zombie. You really wanted to die, or let one of your workers die."


    "What I do care about workers?" replies Dr. Cleatus. "I can replace them easily, just like that zombie you killed."


    "If you dare to bring another flash eating monster." she said that while she aimed her gun to the Doctor head. "I swear you will die pretty soon."


    Doctor agreed to her terms, by an head approval, and Alina, puts her pistol down and head to the waiting room, but before she was about to leave, she said one sarcastic thing.


    "Thanks for the information."


    "You''re welcome." responded Dr. Cleatus thinking that the thing Alina said earlier was actually true, and he looks at his assistant. "You! What are you standing there? Go and fetch me another corpse from the garage."


    "B-But, sir. I-It is dan-"


    "DO! I! CARE!" replied Dr. Cleatus by yelling at his assistant.


    Then, the assistant, being frighted by his boss, he took the keys to the garage area to unlock the gates and took one zombie from the thousands of corpses, stored there without military consent, or hiding from them. But, the assistant, which was frightened by his boss, the assistant had a dark idea. He takes the stairs to the underground, where the parking garages of the staff members or customers are stored, and where most of the zombies are located there.


    ***


    A few moments later, on the plane, which is heading to the Athena, which is called Tiju 87-j. There are about twenty passengers, together with two pilots with experienced on piloting planes for over twenty years. On the plane there are Alina, Alin, Radu, Anakin, Marcus, Ana, Ho Lee, Laura, Eliza, Claudia, Klaus, Ilie and Cassandra. And the pilots are Dimitire and Louise. There are other passengers, but the rest of them are sitting on the other class, the one mentioned earlier are staying in class one.


    The pilots are sitting on their seats, and turn on the loudspeaker to say their message before they will be about to leave this place.


    "We are about to leave this airport in a few minutes! Until then, please check your seats, turn on the device who could make our journey worse, and also, be careful where you are walking, and if you are feeling well. If you suffer of coughing, high fever, or pneumonia, please head to the staff room, where one of our medical stuff might going to help you out. Thank you again, and stay safe! We will reach safety pretty soon!"


    On the class one, every passenger has listen to the pilot message and they start to put on their belts from their seats, in case something bad will happen.


    Ana is sitting next to the women named Alina. She looks at her gun which is sitting on the sheath of her. Alina caught her looking at her gun, and she asks Ana.


    "This is your first time when you have seen a gun?"


    "N-No." she responded feeling ashamed that was caught staring at Alina gun. "I m-mean yes. Sorry. I am not feeling well."


    "I understand. This thing... Has destroyed everyone on this plane." responded Alina to Ana. "By the way, have you worked on a gas station?"


    "Yes. How do you know that?"


    "Well, every morning I used to go there and take a cup of plastic coffe from your coffee machine. The coffee our officers are making ain''t the best, but that machine, are acceptable."


    "Um... Thanks." says Ana feeling a little bit awkward. "Sorry, I am not used to talk with people."


    "Alright... Then, enjoy this trip." responded the Alina officer who is taking from her next seat an magazine and she proceeds to read it.


    ***


    On the other seats on the window, Alin sees that on the airport roads, some people there are refuelling their plane with the remaining gas they have. There are nine people who are refuelling the plane, and three soldiers who are patrolling this area, by carrying assault rifles on their arms, and wearing heavy armior, escpecially made for these cases. Alin is thinking: "How come these soldiers have came prepared for this?... Maybe it is because of their hard trainning, or... They knew about this virus spreading all along?". But then, appears one soldier, who is checking Alin temperature by using the same device the soldiers used earlier to check people temperature before they let them in. The soldier looked neutral at Alin and told him.


    "36, 5... You are alright." he proceeds to go to the other seats and checks his brother temperature, who is sitting next to Anakin.


    Alin and Radu had an argument earlier, about the lady Alin killed with old blood, and let her transform, to later be killed again. Even though the lady didn''t support any bite infection from these monsters, she was healthy as an human who is going everyday at GYM. And this argument, made these two brothers "split" into other seats.


    ***


    Into the airport, at the locked door of the garage, the assistant, who was about to be killed earlier is looking at the door where these monsters are locked and used by Dr. Cleatus in his terrifying experiments. The on he conducted earlier was close to kill the assistant, but thanks to Alina, he could live a few more seconds, until he decided to do this massive suicide. But before he was about to open the door, he starts monologuing thinking it was someone there, but there was nobody.


    "I was a waste before all of this was about to happen. But now... I am still a waste... I have loved zombie genre since I was in college, and played video games with my friends all night, and forget about assignments which needed to have about 100 pages..." he laughed thinking about a memory. "Good times... Those were the beautiful days. When nobody called my name and everyone let me do my thing... But now... I am tired of this. Tired of risking my life for an evil scientist doctor. Tired of lying to my parents that I have a wife and a child. Tired of waking up in the morning and work 12 hours shift on a minimum salary. I am tired of this old world, and also this new world, God!"


    He inserts the key into the lockers and the garage door opens up, letting a few zombies infecting the airport. Some of them stopped to eat the assistant, and it didn''t proceed to scream, he was laughing while zombies were eating his neck and proceed to open his belly to extract the intestines, livers and hearts from there, and eat it. Only nine of them were eating the assistant, while the rest of them, were going upstairs to the main floors, where most of the military staff are sitting in a break room and drink coffee.


    When these nine zombies finished eating the poor assistant, they proceed to walk along with the other zombies to the rooms situated on the ground area. The bones of the assistant were the only thing reaming there, laying on this cold floor. And a note, which was on his left hand. The note was written this message: "There is no cure.".


    ***


    A few moments later, when the fuel was stored into the plane tank, the people outside communicated to the pilots the next following.


    "You do not have enough gas to Athena. The best thing you should do it is to stop on the closest airport, and from there, take the remain gas you need it to Athena. Over."


    "I understand. And thank you again. Over." responded the pilot named Dmitri.


    "Now go. Before we will be about to proceed to the next phase. Over."


    "Alright. And good luck in your mission. Over."


    "Same to you, Dmitri. Over." responded the man who closes the radio station and leaves with his team this area.


    Later, on the pilot rooms, Dmitri opens the loudspeaker and speaks to the microphone the next message.


    "Ready to fly or not. We are about to head to Athena."


    These two pilots could hear a few passengers thanking them to do this thing, and also congratulating them for being such a brave humans on this day where the humanity might going to end forever.

 From Cluj to Athene - Part 8

    Three hours later, the plane which is heading to Athena, Greece, it is passing by a few cities from Romania, where they are burning and a lot of explosions is happening, which could be seen from this plane. Like a big explosion from a factory, and they could even see another airplane, not far from them, at about 570 meters from their plane, having some trouble at flying cause of an engine problem, and it is about to fall onto the land.


    "That plane, it is in trouble!" yelled Cassandra to a few passengers. "We have to do something!"


    "We cannot do anything." said Ho Lee. "They are on themselves. Just like us."


    These passengers are looking hopeless at the plane who is having trouble of flying. It is falling a few meters, until the right motors explode and descend from the sky, like a bird who got shot by a bird hunter. Everyone on the other plane looked terrified at the one who fall down, and pray for their safety, while the others are shaking uncontrollably thinking that they might be next.


    ***


    On the control room, the pilots have seen that plane falling from the sky, they looked terrified at the thing they might experience next. "What if the same accident will happen to us?" wondered the co-pilot. "What if this plane will not even make it to Bulgaria, or worse, leave the country without an injury?"


    Then, their radio has started to receive some signals and a few messages requiring help.


    "Mayday! Mayday!" said a female voice from the radio. "Here it is Capusan Andra! Pilot of Plane 754. We are crashing into Targu Mure?. We require major help! Mayday! Mayday! Mayday! Can someone hear our S.O.S?!"


    They were about to reply to this S.O.S. Signal, but the things didn''t work this way because right when they were about to reply, the radio was not responding because the plane who was about to crash, has already crashed into Targu Mure?.


    The pilots are feeling down, this incident has made them realize this can happen to them, if they are not careful. They do have an issue, and that is fuel shortage. Their mission it is to land to the closest airport who can provide them enough fuel until they can fly to Athene, Greece.


    ***


    On the class 1, Alina is staying at her seat, she saw the plane who descend from the sky, and it falls into the city they fly by. She is upset that they couldn''t help them, but she is also glad that this did not happen to them. Alina it is looking at the other passengers, and she sees them being very scared, other mumbling things like: "We are going to die. We are going to die.", "Please God, save us!", "We need help!" etc.ˇ­ Alina leaves her seat, and she goes to the toilet because she wanted some peace, splash her face with some water eventually.


    She stayed there a bit, looking at the window of the bath, very deep, and she is thinking about the moment she killed her first zombie. It was this day, and that zombie was a man who used to be a hobo, if you considered the clothes he wore before he became a flesh eating monster. She sees the thing eating one of her colleague, and it was a kind person who used to deliver coffee to everyone at the workplace. Sure, he was living alone and got the lowest salary from this police section, but he was still happy. He was also the one colleague who consulted Alina after her little sister committed suicide.


    Alina was trying to ask that person what is wrong, but before he could do that, the hobo zombie jumped at her and pinned her down on the floor. Alina was fighting a much as she could to avoid the bite of that hobo who couldn''t stop moving. Then, a colleague shot that monster head with the gun and stopped him from moving. Everyone was shocked by the quick reaction of that guy, who it is in fact, the person who got killed when he was at a one step from being rescued and be with Alina and the other police officer on their way to safety. He was the one who truly saved Alina, also the one, who made her realize this world it is going to turn everyone on criminals.


    If you stumble upon this tale on Amazon, it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it.


    She checked the monster corpse to see what it is going on, but when she saw the left arm, she sees the entire arm was almost entirely eaten by something. She could see the bone and a small part of meat, and only a red vein, while the other one it is non-existent there.


    But before she could properly examine the rest of the body, another gunshots was heard, and a hard thing fall upon the floor. Alina looked at the thing who fell, and she was completely shocked to see the one who fall was the other co-worker who was eaten by that thing. She looked back and observed the shooter, it is the same person as the one who killed the other monster earlier.


    Other cops were yelling at each other and arguing.


    "Why would you do that?" said the other. "Alberto could''ve been saved!"


    "You son of a bitch!" yelled a muscular cop who was close to hitting the one who shot Albert.


    "No!" yelled a cop to stop those two from fighting. "Do not figh-"


    "Could you shut up and run to the roof!" ordered Alina who leaves those zombie corpses and runs to the Armoury room to take the weapons she need it, she handed some of those to other cops, who knew how to use it. "I have seen these things in fiction, and if they are true, it means that the only thing who can kill them it is aiming their head."


    "Does will work?" asks a dumb cop who forgot that he saw his co-worker shot two things in their head.


    "Look the solutions." she says while she shows those not moving corpses. "Now, let''s try and shoot the upcoming things." she says while she reloads her pistol, as she looks at the upcoming small herd of zombies coming to them.


    Back to the present, Alina washes her blood marks from the zombies she fought earlier, and she is thinking about her sister, who used to watch horror movies when they were little and dumb girls. They did have some great times together before that accident, and now, they are not together anymore. They are parts of different worlds. Alina proceeds to cry thinking about some memories about the world she knew, but she is trying her best to stop crying, but it won''t work. She continued to cry for a few moments in the bathroom, while the passengers are feeling unsecured about the last incident they were witnessing on the sky.


    ***


    Alin and Radu are sitting on their seats, minding their own business. Radu reads a magazine about fighting moves, while Alin is using his creative skill to tie three knifes to a broom stick. He got those knives from the one stewardess after he paid her 100 RON (which are 24 dollars, somewhere at 20 euros and almost 40 leva, if you live in Bulgaria), quite cheap, and she gave him the broom stick from a random broom from free, again, cheap from a Romanian stewardess (not a stereotype though).


    "Are you creating a weapon?" asks his brother.


    "Yes." responded Alin after he tied those three knives together to the end of the broom. "A kind of "spear". I hope it will work."


    "Don''t you worry if it will not work. We still have our guns." he said that while he punched three times in the air. "We can still break the jaws of some zombies and re-kill them."


    "You can say it again." responded Ho Lee, who it is on the next seat to them, and he then introduces to them after both of them turned around to him. "My name is Ho Lee Fuc. Nice to meet you."


    "Alin. And this is my brother, Radu." responded Alina, and he shakes Lee hand, then he let Radu shakes the man hand.


    "So. You two are good at fighting?"


    "Yes, we are." says Radu. "We had our own training building. We trained a lot of people in martial arts and boxing. It was beautiful while it lasted."


    "What happened?"


    "We went deep into debt, and we have almost lost this building. But today, everything was changing when this virus has spreads. Correct, Alin?"


    "Correct." responded Alin who continues to make this broom into a functional spear.


    "Awesome. I used to be a writer before all of this happened and now, I am on my way to home. China."


    "China? It isn''t too far from Athene?"


    "It might be, but I will try to find a way to go back into China. After all, I could even try to fly a plane if that''s what it will take to arrive there."


    "You are such a motivated man." says Radu looking inspired at Lee. "Whatever you need, we are here to help you, right Alin?"


    "Right." says Alin who has finished his improvised spear. "This might work."


    "Sure. If a zombie showed up on a plane." says Radu in a sarcastic voice. "You would probably have to wait until we land to really use this thing."

 From Cluj to Athene - Part 9

    On the second class, where a few passengers are relaxing and waiting for this plane to land on the closest airport, something is happening on there. On a seat, the middle one from the left side, there is an old woman who is felling quite bad. Next to that lady it is a boy, whose age it is thirteen, and he is the only grandchildren of that grandma. But the boy it is not a polite, he is disrespectful, and he even was sent to a juvenile school, but this changed when the apocalypse started.


    However, this boy doesn''t seem concerned or frightening by other kids at their age, he seems docile, as if this will make him change his life. He looked at his grandmother and he told her.


    "Grandma, you should sleep a little more... You are... old."


    "I will try, sweetheart." said grandmother trying to use a pillow her soon took from another seat of a man who is feeling terrified by all of this, without his consent.


    The grandmother was trying to sleep, she moved a little around but then, it strikes her. She proceeds to yell, and his son, who was busy playing a video game on a switch console, told her Grandmother.


    "Would you shut up! I am trying to play Mario here! Damn you, Boomer!"


    And the grandmother stopped screaming after a while, which made her grandson feeling better, but that was a permanent stop. The grandmother has fallen on the floor of this airplane, looking pale and dead. The kid looked at her, and he told her.


    "Careful at cockroaches." then he turns back to the games.


    One passenger saw this, he run to the lady, and tried to resuscitate her, while the boy put his console down and goes to see how his grandmother doping. He feels quilt for acting as a douche bag. He yelled at her to wake up, and he promised that he will become a good kid. This make the grandmother wake up, but not in a human form. The grandmother looked at the man who has stopped resuscitating away, and the moment he was about to run from there, he got caught by the oldest zombie he ever saw, by the leg.


    If you come across this story on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen from Royal Road. Please report it.


    He tried to free himself, but he couldn''t because that zombie has managed to bite the man leg, and made him painfully screaming. The boy tried to take out his grandmother from that man, but the zombie, who was put down by that fat kid, he jumped to him, and bite his neck while the child was screaming of pain.


    A few moments later, everyone from the plane has started to panic. Alina, Radu and with Alin got into the class two after they heard those screaming, and jumped to those zombies. Alina took her pistol and shot the old woman zombie into the head, in the middle of the eyes. Alin stabbed a few times the second zombie with his improvised spear, while Radu, he beat up to death when the next zombie, which was that annoying kid raised from the floor, with a biting neck and a hole on his belly.


    These three survivors are feeling exhausted, by only killing three zombies. They looked at each other while they were breathing heavily, then Alina asked all the passenger there.


    "Is everyone from here bitten?"


    "Not me." responded an old man checking to see if he has any bite mark.


    "Me neither." responded a gypsy fat man dressed in disgusting clothes.


    "Did anyone have seen who bite her?" asks Radu of the people there, while he points to the old lady.


    "There was nobody here who could be a zombie." says the same old man. "She just transformed into that creature and was about to eat all of us, but you three saved us from these creatures. And we thanked you very much."


    These three survivors took the thanks to the old man, and he told them to be careful later on. They understand it and let these fighters go back to their plane class to relax until they will arrive to their destination. And, at the moment they came back, they encountered one small turbulence on the plane which made a few passengers already panic and pray for the Lord to save them.


    "What''s going on?" asks Radu looking at Alina.


    "We think we''ve got trouble." she told Radu while she is going to seat where Ana is siting and put her belt. "We have to stay still into the seats and remain calm!" she says to everyone in class one.


    And everyone listens to her since she was a cop, and she is the one who carries a fire weapon around, sure, there is the Chinese man, but this is another story. The people stayed on their seats, put their belts on, a few took the oxygen thing which it appears when a plane is about to fall, even though it got hit by a small turbulence, then another one came, making a few people think they are about to fall, like that plane earlier.


    "Ladies and gentlemen! Do not panic! We have hit a little turbulence, but we are going to be alright until we arrive to the closest airport, until then, enjoy this trip and remain calm. Everything it is under control!" says Dmitri on the loudspeaker while he pilots this big plane to the closest airport on this area to refuel the engine.

 From Cluj to Athene - Part 10

    On the pilots room, Dmitrie with Louise have managed to go through a few turbulence areas who scared a few people onto this plane. Louise, have managed to recalculate the trajectory to the nearest airport, and it is about to contact the people from that airport by using a radio. He turns on the radio and proceed to communicate with those pilots:


    "Here it is a plane with the destination Cluj ¨C Athene! It is available at the airport... um... " he looked at the Bulgarian name of that airport, and he asked in a broken Bulgarian accent. "Sophia International?"


    Nothing came back, just some bruised radio waves which made those two pilots feeling a little uneasy since Bulgaria, was probably not surviving this sudden virus attack, and he has fallen into the hands of these meat-eaters creatures if we have to judge by the explosions who were going on right now.


    "We got a hope we will land safely whatever it will be." responded the co-pilot after he showed his pilot the level of the fuel they have, and it almost hit zero.


    "Looks like we''ve got no option... We will have to land on something not too hard, only plain and flat."


    "This would be impossible since most of the areas here are with dense forests and cities who are already blowing up." says the co-pilot, who then points at the button which opens the cargo area of the plane. "We have to throw the supplies by the way. This is a military order."


    "I know. But we''ve still got a few meters left." responded the pilot after he reviewed the papers of the area they have to drop these supplies. "I still wonder why they are giving free supplies instead of sending entire armies around the globe to stop zombies."


    "I also wonder that thing, too. They do really want to see the world burn to the ground."


    "Yeah. Guns never bring anything good. Just look at America."


    ***


    On the class 1, the passengers are staying on their seat, some sleeping, and other waiting for their destination. Ana is siting on her seat, she talks with Alina about something meaningless in an apocalypse world.


    "... And here I am, in the front of the boy I liked... And I farted. In the front of a whole class." tells Ana her story of life to Alina about how she was trying to confess to her first crush. "From that day, the whole class called me Fart Girl until I got to Elementary school, and from there, I have become a weird girl who spend her time alone instead by doing make-up or any normal girl is doing in elementary school."


    "... When I was in Elementary school, I had to follow orders. My mother orders. Go to school, learn, come home, do your chores, work and repeat it every day, until you finish High school. And when I had weekend I either learned or I watch at the TV. Back then people didn''t have smartphones, nor Netflix, nor YouTube, nor any good television."


    "I think we both of us have something in common."


    "We sure do." says Alina, being proud that she has made a friend.


    ***


    A few moments later, something is happening with the plane. A big explosion was heard from the second class. Almost everyone from class 1 was about to go and see what is going on, but before they were about to do, a warning, coming from the loudspeaker with the Co-pilot voice, told them.


    Unauthorized use: this story is on Amazon without permission from the author. Report any sightings.


    "STAY CALM AND AT YOUR SEATS! DO NOT ATTEMPT TO GO THERE! REPEAT! DO NOT ATTEMPT TO GO ON SECOND CLASS!!!".


    Almost everyone from class 1 stayed to their seats, but one idiot decided to see what is happening there, but when he did that, he was already too late for a second chance. A big explosion came from second class, which made the part of the plane explodes, which was mostly class two and Cargo area. With that explosion, the man was sucked like a vacuum into the sky. He screamed, but nobody couldn''t do anything since everybody has fastened their seat belts to brace the impact.


    Radu and his brother, Alin, have taken their seats, put their belts on, and shakes their hands.


    "If we die, at least I had the chance to beat a zombie." says Radu to his brother.


    "If we die, at least I had a brother who share the same dream." says Alin to Radu.


    "Amen!" said both of them, then they shake their hands, thinking this would probably be their last time to shake their hands.


    Then, a big turbulence came as the plane proceed to fall from the sky into the area with a big forest, close from Sophia, and on the highway which helps people from Sophie comes to the Sunny Beaches and have a good vacations. Sure, other street helps them go there, if the drivers could handle the holes all around the roads and big traffic jam.


    Radu, Alina, Ana and Alin were able to stay safe on their seats, but some unlucky passengers didn''t make it. There was a man who got hit by little baggage on his neck, that he died. There was also an old woman who couldn''t handle this scary experience, and she died due to a heart attack, probably the lame way to die in a zombie apocalypse, but I think this old woman has an excuse.


    Screaming were still hearing into this part of the plane, and the person who screamed a lot was Cassandra because she got a passenger next to her, who decided to take out his life by using a spoon and trying to swallow it. This will give her nightmares, and probably make her terrified, since she is still a minor. Anakin with Marcus were grabbing their seats hard, thinking that if they let go, they will die. And the others were trying to stay calm, not screaming and using those oxygen things from the plane to help them.


    When the plane was close to falling into the forest, passengers have started to brace themselves, and try to pray to God to let them survive this downfall.


    ***


    A few minutes later, after that hard landing, some of those passengers from this flight have wakened up from their senses. The first one who wake up was Alin, whose seat it is on the highway, close to a truck, a Scania with a trailer. He looked around him, and he saw his brother in the seat, but he wasn''t there. Then, he looks around scared, but he couldn''t see his brother. Alin, being terrified of losing another member of the family, proceed to yell Radu''s name. He yelled once, then twice, and the third time, but nothing came. Alina leaves his seat and falls on his knees, but, when he thought he was close to think he lost him, he heard something which made him stopped from crying.


    "Brother... I am on a truck."


    Alin quickly gets up on his legs, he looks behind him, and he could see his brother on the trailer of that truck. He looks sad there, and he proceeds to use the other cars around him to try and climb it on that truck to see his brother health status. He gets on a Peugeot car, then he jumps on a small Mercedes-Benz van, and with when he got on top of that van, he jumps on the top of Scania, then he goes to his brother, laying on the top of that trailer.


    Radu is staying with his back on the trailer, with his left arm in a wrong position. Alin looks sad at his brother, and he then asks him the most important question.


    "Did you got injured?"


    "... I can feel my arm... hurting." he said that while he was trying to move his arm, but when he tried a big move, he screamed out.


    "Take it easy! Take it easy." tried Alin to calm down Radu. "We have to get you a medic."


    "H-How many are alive there?"


    "I don''t know. I haven''t checked all of them."


    "Maybe one of them might be able to help me."


    "I am going to see." says Alin leaving his brother on the top of the trailer. "Remain there until everyone wakes up."


    "Like I do have a choice." laughs Alin when his brother left him to stay on the trailer.

 From Cluj to Athene - Part 11

    A few moments later, thirty passengers of that plane have wakened up from that shock they took it earlier. And from those 13 passengers are Alin, Radu, Ana, Alina, Anakin, Marcus, Ho Lee, Laura, Eliza (a homeless lady who somehow made it to this flight), Claudia, Klaus, Ilie and Cassandra. The rest were found dead, just like the pilot and co-pilot who were found completely killed by hundreds of broken glass of that window shield and by a huge tree who stabbed Louise into his heartˇ­ From those thirty, only two of them are severely injured, Alin having a broken leg and Eliza, with a broken right arm. The one who checked on them was Klaus because he is the only one who knows something about medicine from this group.


    "Looks like I have to stay on the bench for a while." says Alin to his brother after Klaus finished his checking.


    "Don''t worry. I''ve got your back, brother." says Radu to Alin after both of them did a fist-bump.


    "So, what?" says Cassandra looking around this destroyed plane. "What are we going to do now?"


    "Good question." says Ana. "And also, we probably need a place to sleep." she showed everyone that the night, it is about to settle in.


    "Shoot." said Ilie who saw an undead creature coming out of the bushes, and he quickly threw a wrench he found on the grass to the thing, he hits the head, which it made it fall on the ground, Ilie breathes heavily after he witnesses a perfect shot."


    "Bullseye." compliments Anakin Ilie''s hit, but it didn''t take long to rest because a few more zombies started to come here.


    "There are so many of them." said Ho Lee taking his crossbow from his baggage and about to shoot one of those things, but then, someone else shot an arrow to the thing, and that person was Ilie, who found a crossbow in a random crate from the plane.


    The author''s narrative has been misappropriated; report any instances of this story on Amazon.


    "Ladies and gentlemen!" says Ilie to them, while he hands an SMG to Alin, and he catches it. "This plane has supplied us with weapons."


    "Nice!" said a few people going to the crate open, and grab a weapon or two for them.


    "Now? We run or shoot?" asked Ilie shooting another arrow into a zombie from the front of her undead group.


    "Both?" asked Alina while she aimed with her pistol and killed one fat zombie into the head.


    "Both is good." responded Ilie.


    The first people who start running were Alina, Ana, Eliza, Ilie and Claudia, they were running into the left direction, while the rest of those survivors, Alin, Radu, Ho Lee, Marcus, Anakin, Klaus, Cassandra were going into the right direction. The group of zombies started to follow the one who did the most sounds, and that was the group who run into the right because Alin was screaming out of pain while he was trying to run together with Radu, and also Cassandra who was praying to god to let her be alive. But the second groups had also good some problems, they realized they do not have a clear way to go since on the side they are running now, it just sends them into the highway, but the right will be much more in trouble because they are running into a city, which is probably completely infected by now.


    ***


    A few moments, the group who went onto the right side have made it into a building, which presents three floors, with broken windows and a bunch of dead corpses lying around this place. One of those people from the group, Ho Lee used his arrow to pierce the skull of an undead thing who was about to reanimate back to life.


    "Are you alright?" asks Alina after she witnessed Ho Lee killing an infected monster.


    "Yes." responded to the police officer while the other are searching this place. "What happened here?" he asks rhetorically while he sees a book on the floor with a Bulgarian title.


    "The Corpses of Dead People." translate Klaus to Ho Lee, and he is looking surprised at Alina. "I used to come into this country every time I got a vacation from my work."


    "I see..." he puts the book on a close shelf and let it there. "We should kill every thing here and decide what to do next."


    "Like going to save our people?" ask Alin who was helped by his brother, Radu to walk to them, and he came to these two people while he showed them a map. "I think I know where they are heading."

 From Cluj to Athene - Part 12

    The other group of survivors from that plane crash, has managed to kill those creatures who were running to them by using the guns these planes were loaded with. And they do manage to save some ammunition for the next attacks.


    "If my intuition is right." said Alina to her group while they walk on the route which will lead them to the highway. "We might be able to found salvation."


    "Do you think anyone on this city is till alive?" asks Eliza to Ilie.


    "I hope so." responded Ilie while he was looking at Eliza broken arm. "Are you feeling okay?"


    "It hurts. It hurts a lot."


    "I''m sorry I couldn''t do anything. I do not have the supplies to help you with."


    "We might be able to find something later." said Alina to those two people. "The highway must be filled with soldiers who are trying to control this virus by doing anything in their power. We might have a big chance to be survived and live well until this thing will disappears. Just like Corona did in the 20s."


    "That was really a dark time." replied Ilie. "Both for humanity and our planet."


    They do manage to get into a few trees on their way to the highway. Alina is the first one to walk into this, while the others are following her. They dodged a few trees, passed one man corpse laying next to a tree, and one dead dog with his belly open and his organs out. This gruesome image made Ana throw up when she saw that dog, and Claudia tried to make her feel better by saying it will be okay, but no matter how you look at it, it will never be an okay image, not even in an apocalypse world.


    A few minutes later, they do managed to come to the highway, but when they''ve got there, their hope for surviving have declined to zero. On the entire highway there are a bunch of cars crashed into each other, people who were once alive, are now undead creature who are walking on the street, in searching for brains and human flesh from humans alive. Alina looked shocked at all of this, and more shocked when she saw a military truck on fire, with a lot of soldiers being killed in this attack.


    When the other gathered to Alina, they are also terrified to see the military have failed this. Even though it was only a military truck, there must''ve been a big chance to kill all of these zombies. Eliza dropped on her knees, she said something on a low volume.


    "Our end has come."


    "It hasn''t come yet." said Ilie to that lady. "Sure. The military couldn''t manage to save this highway. But I think we can try our luck to take one of those cars and go to the Athene."


    "You say this will be our chance?" asks Ana. "If it is, then we have to take a bus."


    "A bus?" asks Claudia. "For only our group?"


    "We have to help the others." replied Ilie. "These people are stronger and could give us a chance to made it much farther. Especially, they have someone specialized in cars, so might. You know... Help repair it."


    "Ilie is right." replied Alina to the other who were listening to Ilie. "This is much better than walking to the Athene."


    "But why we couldn''t try to Sunny Beaches or on the other beaches from Bulgaria?"


    "Do you know how many people are there?!" asks Alina and Ilie at the same time.


    "At this time of the year, there is even dangerous to go there because most of the buildings might be going to fall down. And some are even 12 floors higher than from Cluj." says Ilie. "Athene it is our only chance of survival, plus, if these soldiers couldn''t eliminate this virus on this place, do you think they could''ve had a chance to eliminate here?"


    This story has been taken without authorization. Report any sightings.


    "That''s a good point." says Alina to Ilie. "But I prefer to follow our Army orders and go to Athene. I don''t like risking on this time, because a risk here might guarantee death of one or maybe more of us."


    "Alright." says Ana looking on the left side, and she sees a strange thing. "Is anyone from here seeing a zombie eating another zombie?"


    All of those people from their turn to the direction Ana showed up to them. All of them saw what Ana is seeing, and this made them feel disgusted. A zombie creature, is eating a small arm, who was probably from a baby, and that''s not it, one of the legs of that zombie there is the child, which is a zombie, with the missing arm and half of his face destroyed. They could definitely see the skull of that baby if they had the courage to approach it, but nobody did because this was such a gruesome image to look at it.


    Ana also saw something about that zombie, something which it made him feeling different from the rest of those she had witnessed so far, and that thing it is having a yellow dark colour at his skin than darker and green. She saw Claudia deciding to walk slower to that zombie while she was weaving a knife. Alina let her do the thing.


    Claudia approaches at a safe distance, and she proceeds to stab that creature who was still eating the arm, and when it did, she pushed the zombie onto the concrete and looked at the corpse. She was really scared by the fact that it could move, but it didn''t move. Then, she took a look at the baby, and she saw the damage he did, it was not pleasant.


    "It''s safe." says Claudia to the other survivors who are coming after her. "These creatures only react to the sound. So we are all going to be fine if nobody did a loud sound."


    "I also noticed that thing." whisper Alina to Claudia at a safe distance. "The sound of the helicopter has drawn more when they were about to rescue me and my team."


    "And where is your team?" asks Ilie.


    "Dead... All of them are dead. The last one I lost into this flight. He was moving on the second class to guard the plane in case a thing will come back."


    "I am sorry to hear it." responds Ilie, while he is looking somewhere to see if they see another zombies. "Um... We got company."


    "What do you mean?" asks Claudia, turning to Ilie in direction with the other survivors, and she is looking scared like the other survivors.


    They see almost twelve zombies coming into their direction. They are growing to them, walking slowly like they do have an injured leg, and one of them is crawling on this road. Not only that, but they do not know how they do sense them, but Alina ordered these survivors.


    "Do not open fire. Try and hit them with a tool or something."


    Ilie took out his wrench he found earlier. Claudia prepare her knife to stab a few zombies head. Alina takes out her nightstick, she hadn''t used since she escaped from Romania. Eliza sees a wooden stick, large enough to beat a zombie with it. But she couldn''t hold it because of her broken arm. And Ana, she decided to use the wrench she took it from Romania and hide it into her large sized backpack with food supplies.


    "Do not let any of those things alive." ordered Alina.


    "Yes." says Ana, being the first one to bash a thing head with her crowbar, and she looked at the thing. "I... I am sorry."


    "He is a dead creature!" responded Claudia after she slit the throat of a zombie and let Ilie hit it so hard, it made the zombie head flies from the body. "He is not human any more."


    They continued to fight these zombies, but when they thought they will be only twelve, a few more rise from the far distances and come to them. And the first survivor who decided to use the guns provided was Claudia, who took out a semi-automatic gun and proceed to kill seven zombies coming to them.


    "What the fuck are you doing, Claudia?!" yelled Ilie at her. "Now this will attract more zombies!"


    "It is too late now, Ilie! We have to find shelter somewhere!" says Claudia.


    "No. We have to kill those things!" responded Ilie. "We might be able to have much more chances into killing them than trying to what. Run and find a shelter. We have a wounded person here."


    "And what are you proposing?" asks Claudia before she proceeds to empty her magazine of ammo into another zombies who we''re coming at her. "Try and fight them. No! We need a shelter. Plus, even if we tried to hit them with a melee, they would still come."


    "Both of you!" yelled Alina. "And all of you! Run into the military truck!" she pointed at a military truck damaged not far from here.


    Now, all of those five survivors managed to run into the military truck. Get into the cabin in such a hurry. They even managed to bring Eliza here, since she was so close to be bitten by a creature. After they entered there, they see the cabin has a door, so they are using it and locked this cabin. They heard punches coming from the door, and all of those five survivors are going to the darkest cabin place and wait for the moment. If the door breaks it, they will have to fight it until they will become those things.

 From Cluj to Athene - Part 13

    On the kitchen room, of the house these survivors from the second group have entered, they are searching this place for any food, weapons or even better, medicine for Alin.


    "So. The army was here." says Alin looking at the map while he is sitting on the chair, and in front of him are Radu, Ho Lee and Klaus. Probably the only people there who could make a decision At this moment. "And how come, a team with heavy training and guns, could fail to secure this space? Or even one single city?"


    "This took all of us by surprise." responds Ho Lee. "If a virus like that started out of nowhere, and in random locations, you never knew when it is going to hit and how hard it is going to hit."


    "... But the most important thing we have to think about it is a plan to Athene." says Klaus to everyone surprised. "Not to think about what military has trying to do here."


    "Cassandra is right." says Radu. "Our mission it is to get to Athene. Military business, it is too military. We have another group who are probably trying their best to survive, and we have to go after them."


    "But how?" asks Ho Lee. "We will need a big vehicle to go after them."


    "Who says we only need one vehicle?" asks Alin having an idea. "This small city has a lot of abandoned cars, there are five of them running into that direction. We need a large vehicle to carry them and us, and we do also need to start taking all the supplies from this part..." he looks on the map, and he sees a few marked locations on the map with a "X" symbol. He looks at Radu and he asks him. "Could you go with someone and checks these areas?" he shows him those "X" locations.


    "I am not going without you, brother." says Radu.


    "Radu. You have got to go and check those locations. Maybe a few people from the army are hiding there and waiting for help."


    "Hell no." says Radu putting Alin into a close chair. "I am not leaving you. We are a family. Remember that?"


    "I know. But you have to. You''re the only one who I-"


    "I am going by myself." says Klaus, reloading his shotgun he took from the supplies who were left into the plane.


    "We are going." says Ho Lee reloading his crossbow and taking a hatchet from the table, and he looks at Klaus. "If that''s fine by you."


    "It is fine." says Klaus to Ho Lee.


    "Good..." says Alin feeling a bit sad because he has to stay behind cause of an idiotic injury. "... I am counting on you two. See if you find a supply, or a wounded soldier here. He might be able to help us escape this Hellhole."


    "Roger that." says Ho Lee to him in a funny yet badass manner.


    The story has been taken without consent; if you see it on Amazon, report the incident.


    ***


    A few minutes later, Ho Lee and Klaus are walking across the streets of this destroyed town of Bulgaria. Klaus is holding on both of his hands a shotgun weapon, and on the pocket he has a small box with 30 shells. Ho Lee is holding his crossbow and a pair of arrows into a pocket on his back, and a hatchet on the belt.


    These two scavengers encounter two zombies on their way. So they quickly attack them using their weapons. Klaus couldn''t risk in firing his shotgun because this might attract a few more zombies, so he got the idea to hit the zombie in the head like that shotgun was a baseball bat. He successfully did a fracture on there, but this didn''t stop the beast from trying to get up on his legs. Ho Lee is quickly and throw his hatchet to the zombie, which hits the head and a hit so hard, it made the zombie fall on this face into this street.


    After Klaus finished destroying the head of that monster with his shotgun, he looked at Ho Lee, who then shows him with a movement of a head they have to move it to the marked building. Klaus leads the way to the building while Ho Lee is behind him to protect his back, in case a zombie will do a surprise move. But thankfully, this didn''t happen until they arrived in the front of the marked building.


    At his door of that marked building on the map, they say it is blocked by few furniture pieces, and has a bunch of broken windows on the next floor. Ho Lee tried to peek inside to see if he founds something there, but he cannot see anything since almost everything it is dark there, and the night is about to come. Before Klaus was about to knock on the door, they heard a shout from the building.


    "GO AWAY!" says a man in Bulgarian language.


    "What?" asks Ho Lee in English.


    "Me no speak English." says the guy from the building in a broken English, and he then tried to say. "Leaver!"


    "Leaver? You want us to go?" asks Ho Lee again.


    "DA. GO AWAY!" says the Bulgarian man.


    "Okay!" says Ho Lee, then he turns to Klaus. "Let''s move to the-"


    Then they heard a bang coming from the building. It was a loud bang. But when they looked around, they do realize that he didn''t shoot a zombie, not tried to shot one of them. "He probably decided to give up on life." says Klaus to himself, before Ho Lee started to run back to their building and decide to try their search in the morning because they do have to rest for this night.


    ***


    A few minutes later, in the building secured by those survivors, Anakin and Cassandra are making the beds in the room, which was supposed to be probably Living Room or other type of room to rest were to talk with your neighbours about the latest gossip.


    "Why are dressed like a character from a movie?"


    "It is because I like it." says the guy cos playing as Anakin.


    "Okay... You are a weird man."


    "And? I like what I do, so does it matter it look weird to you?" asks the guy cosplaying as Anakin.


    "Yes. This is apocalypse, and you are acting like a child in an adult form. What is wrong with you?" asks Cassandra feeling annoyed by the fact a man wears a costume, and he is not agitated like the other people on this apocalypse.


    "No. I am not frustrated by this." he says while he put the blanket on the third bed he made. "In fact, does zombie cares if I wear a uniform or not? No. They only care about human flesh and organs. If they see we walked, they will try and attacks us. But why should I listen to you? Who are you?"


    "I am Cassandra Dumitrescu! My father is a leader of a village."


    "And I am Anakin. My true name is Paul Jorin."


    "Your name doesn''t sound Romanian. Are you from outside?"


    "No. And it is not your business." he said while he is going to make the fourth bed, while Cassandra hasn''t even touched the first one. "If you stay here, why aren''t you working on the bed. We have to sleep in order to remain awake and fight these creatures who are roaming the streets."


    "Then I will not do it." says Cassandra throwing the blankets on the floor and leaving this room and going somewhere else.


    "EY... What child." whispered Anakin, and then laughing at her who is closing the door loud. "I forgot how dumb kids can be at this age."

 From Cluj to Athene - Part 14

    Cassandra walks on the kitchen room ¨C looks like one because it has a lot of kitchen appliances around like a frying pan, cups, plates, and food ¨C feeling a little mad cause "Anakin" is acting like a child on these times. There, she sees Radu and his brother, Alin, staying on the table and looking at something. Cassandra approaches them, but before she was about to say something, Alin turned around to her, and look happy at her.


    "It''s you." he says while he was aiming with his pistol at her, but she didn''t even notice Alin take a gun out because of this darkness room (they have to shut off the lights because a zombie might be going to enter this house if he sees the lights on). "Sorry."


    "I am the one who should apologize." reply Cassandra. "I didn''t know you two are here, but what are you two doing here?"


    "We are thinking." replies Radu to Cassandra while he gave her a free seat. "At how we can help the others. And maintain contact with them."


    "Wouldn''t be good to use cellphones?"


    "It''s no use." says Alin. "I, my brother, Anakin, Klaus and Ho Lee didn''t have on the international type of telephone."


    "I have." says Cassandra, which makes those two looking at her shockingly.


    "Then, why didn''t you tell us that earlier?!" asks Radu, feeling furious towards Cassandra for not sharing this important information to them.


    "I am sorry..."


    "Ugh... It doesn''t matter." says Radu to Cassandra, and he looks at Alin. "Should we try and call them now?"


    "We didn''t have their number phone." says Alin. "Wait..."


    "ALINA!" yelled these two brothers at the same time.


    "I totally forgot She told all the passengers from that plane her phone number." says Radu.


    "And you noted it?" asks Cassandra.


    "No. My brother did." says Radu, pointing to his brother, showing Cassandra a piece of paper with a phone number.


    "Now. Hand me your phone?" asks Alin to Cassandra.


    "Here." says Cassandra, who is handing Alin her mobile phone.


    Alin proceeds to turn on the phone, let Cassandra put the number password to her phone. After she finished doing that, Alin sees the phone has nine percent battery, so they have to move fast. He opens the calling, put the phone number from the paper, and calls Alina to see if they are alright.


    Did you know this text is from a different site? Read the official version to support the creator.


    ***


    On the military truck, where those ladies and Ilie, they have survived an attack of zombie, and barricade themselves into the back of this truck by using empty boxes as a wall to the other side. This was almost their only option, because the doors are almost broken by the fists, bites and kicks of those zombies who were trying to break in, but Ilie with Alina managed to kill those zombies by stabbing their heads with knives. It took almost two hours, but it was worth it, they almost killed all the zombies from this area, only thirty have been remained here, and those are just the one who are only crawling.


    On the driver seat, there is Ilie looking disappointing that this military truck doesn''t have any fuel to help them go to the city and help the other people get rescued. There is also Alina, who is staying on the other seat, and she looks on the window, being cautions in case of a surprise attack. Alina also sees one crawler, thanks to a car light who is illuminating almost the entire area, going slowly to another zombie. There, he sees that crawler eating the zombie flesh, and she felt disgusted by this action.


    And Alina, will become much more disgusted later when the crawler will begin a normal zombie. She sees him eating that corpse, and later, when that creature finished eating that corpse, he regenerates his non-existent foot limbs, and gets up, then he starts walking around looking for more food.


    "My God." whispered Alina.


    "What''s going on?" asks Ilie getting closer to Alina to see what is happening, and he sees that zombie walking.


    "That zombie... was having his legs cut out... but now... he regenerates them." says Alina terrified by this image.


    "Maybe you should sleep a li-"


    Then, the ringtone of Alina phone starts on. Her ringtone it is the beginning part of the "I want to break free", by the Queen band. And the light of the phone has attracted one zombie close from this car.


    "Should I put him down to his misery?" asks Ilie about to take out a knife and attack that thing.


    "No." says Alina taking her phone and answering the anonymous call. "Hello?"


    "Hello. It is me." says Alin on the phone. "Are you Alina?"


    "Yes." responds Alina. "And you are?"


    "Alin."


    "Alin? The guy with an injured leg? Where are you?"


    "Yes, and I am fine. Just a small scratch. We are sitting in a building. On the morning, we are trying to find a way out, and try to help your group and head onto Athene. You are safe with your group?"


    "Yes. We are sitting on the highway, in a military truck." says Alina.


    "Wow. Does it have any fuel?"


    "Unfortunately. No." she said while she took a small look on the board of this truck. "It was empty when we arrived here."


    "Nuts. There are any cars near you?"


    "Yes. But we are going to take the gas from those in the morning."


    "Good. Use those cars fuel to refuel this military truck. This might be going to work for you, but for us, it will be a bummer since there is damaged cars. This is better than taking from the night. Who knows what creatures might be lurking there... Alright... I guess we will see you in the morning."


    "I suppose."


    "See you then and stay safe!"


    "Stay safe! And good night." says Alina to the phone, and then she closes the phone.


    "Are you good?" asks Ilie seeing Alina feeling worried.


    "Yeah..." she says to Ilie, and then she looks on the window, seeing two zombies walking clueless on the highway. "We should rest for tomorrow." she arranges her chair to make it like a bed, and after that, she proceeds to sleep while Ilie has come to his own decision to stay on guard.

 From Cluj to Athene - Part 15

    In the earliest hour of this new morning, Radu, Anakin and Ho Lee are leaving the building they have stayed for the entire night, equipped with a few melee weapons like crowbars, knives, and Radu is carrying the improvising spear his brother has made in the plane. It was a little damaged after the impact, but it got fixed by Alin in the morning and handed to Radu to help him to search for anything useful in those marked buildings from the map.


    Last night, two of those survivors have checked one building, which didn''t end well, and the negotiations were cut short because of a crazy guy. These survivors decided to check the next four buildings to see if they can found something useful there, like some car''s keys, a functional car, fuel canisters, food, and eventually weapons.


    "We are crossing the street, and head on this one." he says Radu to those two people while he showed them a building in front of them, with a damaged roof.


    "Do you think we can found something there?" asks Ho Lee.


    "Anything''s possible." responds Radu to Ho Lee.


    All these three survivors have crossed the building, and the moment they were about to open the gate of this property, they do see a zombie on the garden coming at the gate. Radu has used his spear to stab this creature from the distance, but when he did that, the knife, from the top of the spear, got stuck into that zombie head, but it killed him. Ho Lee opens the gate, and comes into this property together with Radu and Anakin.


    Radu is taking the knife from that zombie, and follows Ho Lee, while Anakin stays at their backs, and uses a crowbar instead of his toy lightsaber he bought from Kaufland at a small price. Ho Lee approaches the door of this building, he slowly opens it to the full. After he''s done that, he and his team are marching slowly into this abandoned building.


    Stolen content alert: this content belongs on Royal Road. Report any occurrences.


    While they were walking in the hallway, Radu sees a lot of broken things there like plates, wine bottles, and pictures. He also took a picture from the ground, and he sees a picture with a man and a young lady, most likely his daughter. Then, Radu puts this picture on a table, and decide to search on the first floor for something useful there, while his friends are checking the first floor.


    When he got to the upper floor, he was shocked to his in the hallway one baby who is crawling to him. This made Radu feel a remorse in killing that baby, who wouldn''t deserve such a fate at young age. But Radu has no choice, so he let the baby draws closer to him, and when he got to a close distance, he put his foot on the baby head, and he crushed the head of that creature, slowly. He pressed on him like a man would press on a sofa to test it if it is truly comfortable.


    The moment he sees the thing stopped from crawling and saying weird sounds, he leaves the poor thing while he said with a slow voice and a tear in his left eye.


    "I am sorry."


    He enters the first room, and there he sees nothing. Everything there looks nice, and untouched. He then sees on the desk of this so-called bedroom because it presents a bed, and a desk. Radu looks at the picture, and he sees there a small girl pacing the camera. After the decor of the background, it seems that this girl was taking a picture at school. But when he checked the back of this picture he found the name of the girl, which was not the only part, there was also this: "N. 23.4.1999" and "D. 26.4.2010". And this means the date when she was born and the date when she died in other language. But this letter was written in Romanian language, so the owner and this girl were from Romania. Radu let that picture there, and he leaves the room,closing the door after him.


    When he got to hallway, he sees there the door which is probably leading to the parent''s bedroom. He had the curiosity to check but at the moment he grabbed the handle to open the door, he heard from their growls which made him to take out his hands from the handle and slowly leaves this floor. Radu has decided to not explore this whole floor. He already saw enough disturbed things here.

 From Cluj to Athene - Part 16

    A few moments later, on the highway, Alina, Ilie, Claudia, Ana and Eliza, are leaving the military truck and head to the closest vehicles to grab the necessary fuel to make their truck go. There are some zombies there, but at really far distances from them, and this is no excuse for them to grab some weapons to them. Ana is carrying an MP5 she found on the supply crate. Alina is carrying her revolver, together with a hunt knife she found on this truck. Eliza is using a pistol with the other hand because the other is injured and she really wanted to help considering her state and age. Ilie is carrying an shotgun he found on the supply crate from the plane. And Claudia is carrying one single sub-machine gun, or an MP5 for people who got some Counter Strike intelligence.


    These five are armed to their teeth with fire weapons that they can even scare one American from a region who is heavily on gun''s side instead of common sense.


    Ana sees three zombies coming to them. She alerts the other members from the group. They didn''t bothered to shoot those three because they do not want to see a lot coming to them. They need to carry on this mission instead of wasting bullets in zombies.


    Ilie goes to a car. He opens the door where the fuel goes by and checks to see if the car goes by the fuel their truck needs to work. And it is Diesel, which means a good thing for them since this Military truck works on Diesel. Ilie proceed to take out the gas by suing a trick he learned from a TV movie, and the others are protecting him by aiming the weapons to the creatures.


    Then, out of nowhere, everyone jumped when an alarm was heard from a close distance. They looked from the sound of the alarm and they see there a zombie who touched an alarmed car with his head. This made everyone upset and terrified the things who might come at this moment.


    "They are coming to us!" says Eliza to everyone trying to aim the pistol to one of those things but she tremble like crazy.


    "Aim and shoot!" says Alina aiming her revolver to a zombie who was walking towards them, he hit the head of that thing, and it made him fall on the back. "See! Hit their heads!"


    Ana aimed with her MP5 and she blasted the gun to those things, killing almost nine of those zombies who were coming to them by using the full magazine of this gun. She took the magazine down, and reload it.


    Claudia goes closer and proceed to use her MP5 to kill these creatures who are still coming to them, but instead of using the full magazine, she managed to hit three of those things by using only six bullets. This made Ana feeling impressed.


    Then, out of nowhere a creature is jumping from a car close to them, but thanks to Eliza, which managed to shoot that thing with her pistol when the thing was in the mid-air. The thing landed on Eliza and it pinned her down, making her screaming out of pain. Ilie abandoned his task and took that thing from Eliza, and he looked to her.


    "Are you bitten?"


    "No.. The arm... Hurts." says Eliza showing her arm in a improvised bandage.


    "We will treat you to base! But now we gotta focus here!" says Ilie continuing to extract the gas left from the first car.


    After almost two minutes, the car was on zero fuel, and the canister of fuel was just half filled. This made Ilie and the rest of group upset, so they are running to the other random car which works on Diesel. While they were running, they have the job to kill these creatures who are still following them.


    Ana, staying in the pack of the back, manages to kill a zombie which was at three feet from her, then kill a zombie who was close to jump on the car next to Alina. That zombie fall on the car window-shield, but the thing was still saying those nasty noises. Alina put an end to this creature by smashing her revolver to the creature forehead, and the hit was so strong, it made the a big mark there and stopped the creature from moving.


    Ilie has successfully arrived on the next car and there he proceed to take the gas like he did earlier. The girls continues to shoot the things who are coming after them. Eliza shoot three times one zombie with her pistol ut she didn''t managed to bring him down cause she didn''t hit the head. At the moment another zombie was jumping out of nowhere to Eliza, Claudia manages to shoot those two zombies with her MP5. She took a look at Eliza to say something, but she then noticed that a zombie was under the car where is Ilie taking the fuel. Claudia shoots the thing head before he was about to grab Ilie leg, and this made him pause and says with a smile on his face.


    Support the creativity of authors by visiting Royal Road for this novel and more.


    "Thank you, Claudia!"


    "Don''t mention it." responds back to Ilie.


    But, at the unexpected moment, they did heard a scream coming at a close distance from them. Claudia, Ilie and the other survivors turned to the direction this scream came from and they see on the trailer of a truck, a zombie mutilated so much, that his skeleton is almost visible with pieces of human expired meat. The zombie had a loud scream which attracted a few zombies to him. And this gave this team a few minutes of peace to do their job.


    Ilie tried to take the fuel from the car as fast as he can, while the females are doing a hard work to kill the infected who weren''t going after the zombie who screamed on the top of a truck trailer. Claudia put a zombie down by trowing her empty magazine into the thing head (it was at a close distance from her) and she smashed the thing brain with the SMG.


    A few moments later, Ilie finished with taking the gas from that car and he goes to the other car, next to the one. He checks if he has some fuel like he did to the other, and it checks the type of fuel it has. On the part where you have to insert fuel, it says "Motorina", and this made Ilie jumps on the other car. It was written the same thing like on the other. But before he could check a damaged bus, Alina yelled to him.


    "This truck has diesel! And a lot of canisters inside!"


    "Awesome!" yelled Ilie running with one canister to that one truck to take the fuel from there.


    After he arrived there, he proceed to take out the fuel by using the same method as he did previously on those two cars. In just a few moments, the first canister is filled, and Alina goes on the inside of that truck and he passed to him an empty canister. Ilie is quickly opening the canister and refueling.


    While the gang was working on the cars, the screams of that zombie has gone silenced. Ana saw that the zombies who got on that trailer were eating the screamer, well, what remained of him at this moment. Ana alerted the gang that the zombies are about to come back and attack them. Claudia has quickly changed the magazine of her SMG, Eliza proceed to shoot the zombies who were running at her, Alina starts to aim precisely with her revolver and kill one of those zombies even though she was staying close to Ilie.


    The fight was a tough one for survivors. A few of those zombies managed to came closer to these survivors and close to eat them. Ilie has also put down to their misery a few of those zombies. But on this fight, someone has been taken to the side of those monstrous creatures, and that person was Eliza, who wasn''t unable to evade from the six zombies who pinned her down and eat her alive. Claudia and Alina were trying to do something, but they couldn''t do anything, only continue their mission and focus on killing zombies. These survivors also feed bad while the homeless woman was screaming because of the pain she endured from those bites and attacks of the undead people.


    When the truck fuel was completely empty, Ilie grabbed two canisters, while Alina is grabbing only one, and all of those survivors are running to their military truck they spent the night there. Claudia remained behind, only to see Eliza getting up on her feet in that zombie state and shoot her head with the pistol Eliza dropped it. Then, she tells Eliza a simple "Sorry." and goes to the military truck where the other survivors are refueling the truck.


    Alina is the only person to refuel the truck, while the other people are using their fire-weapons to kill the reaming zombies who are coming after them. Ana managed to put down to their misery one zombie, and she almost got attacked by a zombie, if Ilie sharp shooting wasn''t there to save her life. Claudia is getting into the truck back seats, while the other are still killing the reaming zombies who are coming after which it isn''t much, only ten of them are still on the highway.


    When the final canister was used in the military truck. All of the people there are getting on the military truck and prepared for a the journey to the other team of survivors who are waiting them in a small village close from Sophia. Ilie it is on the driver seat, while Alina it is on the other seat in the front. Ilie turns the truck motor on and he step on the gas as hard as he can. The truck is leaving the area where it was put down, and it make his way on a few cars who are blocking a few parts of the highway. While the truck was going full speed to the village, a few of the remaining zombies stopped in the middle of the road and "looked" at the truck going ahead.


    These people may not have the training of the man''s and women''s who joined military, but thanks to today world media, they were able to put down a big number of zombies by using weapons which are not even allowed in Romania, neither in Bulgaria. They may have lost one person in this battle, but her sacrifice will not be forgotten.


    "I am sorry." says Claudia to other other girls there, in the back of the military truck. "It is my fault Eliza was eaten alive."


    "It is not your fault." says Ana to Claudia trying to make her feel better. "The real man human responsible for this apocalypse it is the real one responsible for the death of Eliza and the other people."


    "I hope that fucker is dead by now." says Claudia who starts shaking. "What monster would be able to do this? Make us fight against creatures who wanted to eat us? Why he wanted to do this?!"


    Everyone from that side stay silent and try to forget the thing they did earlier in the highway. All the blood was shed there. And the undead who were killed there. The group didn''t even count how many they killed in total, but they silently agree it is a lot. If those people were alive, this would most likely send them to prison and have PTSD. But on this world, this would only gave them PTSD.

 From Cluj to Athene - Part 17

    The scavengers team of the second group, are leaving the third house, with backpacks filled with supplies, like batteries (in case they found a flashlight, or a radio who works on battery), food, new clothes, and a some good weapons. Radu has found in a house a real spear. He found that spear into someone bedroom, right under the bed, and this made Radu question the man sanity when he found the spear, and he wondered if he is fine or is he dead. But he then decided to take the spear and pay respect to the room, by saying a loud "Thank you! Be safe out there!" on the ceiling of the room.


    Outside, the team sees three zombies who are fighting against them. This made them feel a little weird since it is the first time they do see three zombies fighting each other. They let them do their thing, and head to the house they stayed last night. Radu is walking in the front of the pack with his weapons prepared for anything they will encounter at anytime.


    ***


    A few hours later, in the house where the second group is staying, they are minding their business. Alin is looking on the upper floor window, in any case the group with military truck will come there. He has the idea to signal them, by using his pistol by shooting an alarmed car which is parking close to other cars. How did he found out the car he will shoot it is an alarmed car? He tested out last night, and a few zombies were gathered there, then they got killed by Radu, Anakin, Ho Lee, and Klaus into this early morning.


    Cassandra is sitting on the couch, and she is shivering. "This is not a nightmare." she tells herself. "This is definitely not a nightmare!". She is very afraid of the fact the thing was happened yesterday weren''t a nightmare. And some people from this house are having the same felling, like Anakin who was close to act reckless at attacking the zombies into this morning without his friend''s help.


    "Cassandra." says Radu coming into the room where Cassandra is sitting and shivers. "Are you feeling alright?"


    This novel is published on a different platform. Support the original author by finding the official source.


    "Y-Yes... No... I am scared." says Cassandra trying to hold her tears, but Radu came to her to make her feel better, by telling her that everything will be alright, and they will find a way to go to the safety.


    Meanwhile, Radu and Cassandra were startled when someone entered the door of the house, it is Ho Lee, who is handing Cassandra phone, and he looks at those two.


    "I have talked to the other group." says Ho Lee with a smile on his face. "They are on their way to pick us up. When they will come, Alin is going to shoot an alarmed car to announce them that we are in this area. Now! I want all of you to get the supplies and everything from this house as fast as you can, pack them, and wait for the second group to come here."


    "Yes." says Radu feeling happy that they are going to be rescued, and he is going to pack the supplies into a big backpacks and cases he found on this building. Cassandra is following Radu to the room, where he and Alin we''re sleeping. "You don''t need to help me. I can pack my brother clothing."


    "Don''t worry. I promise I will take care of them." responds Cassandra, putting the clothes of Alin and other supplies with precaution into a backpack he found under bed. "Thanks."


    "For what?" asks Radu.


    "For making me feel better. It is tough, but we are together to got everyone back."


    "Right. One for all and all for one." says Radu filling the first backpack out of eight.


    ***


    A few moments later, a military truck arrives at the area where the group of males and one female is situated. The military truck is passing by a few cars, and before they were about to pass the building where is Alin waiting for them, Alin proceed to shoot a bullet from his handgun, which hits the alarmed car, and it made the military truck suddenly stops from moving. Therefore, all the survivors from the building proceed to run into the military truck, everyone carrying their backpacks. Cassandra is carrying two, while the other men are carrying four, but in Alin case, he is carrying only three because of his injury.


    They have made it into the military truck without any problem. No one got bite, nor a zombie came to attack them, or Alin didn''t have his other leg broken. The supplies are put in the back of the military truck.


    Alina is pushing the acceleration pedal of the truck, and they are going to Greece. Almost all of them are here, because Elisa was killed in a zombie horde. Now, there are only twelve people from this group who are heading to Athene.

 From Cluj to Athene - Part 18

    A few hours later, close to the nighttime, the military truck, which was driving almost 250 kilometres it has finally come to a stop because a huge airplane has fallen on the highway on a bunch of cars and is blocking the entire highway to the city of Thessaloniki, a city from Greece known for their beach. The team has a plan to go there and take a boat which will help them go faster to Athene, and if they do not find anything there, they are going to search for the help on the waters.


    "Looks like this is it." says Alina stopping the military truck. "An airplane is stopping us from advancing... Fucking planes."


    "It''s alright." says Klaus who is sitting on the front chair and next to him, it is Ana. "Maybe if we take another road."


    "Almost every single road is blocked by cars and destruction. Especially zombies." says Alina to Klaus. "Maybe the best idea it is found a way to go to another road."


    "What if we ignore Thessaloniki ? And continue to Athena?"suggest Ana.


    "We cannot." says Alina. "There might be a chance to find a boat there, and use it to go on the Athena, or better, try our luck to go on the islands."


    "If you say so." says Ana to Alina. "But, how we can even pass this gigantic wall?!" she points on the plane which blocks the entire highway.


    "We will have to go on foot." says Klaus. "Other cities might be blocked, but I can guarantee that the fastest way to reach Thessaloniki is by foot. Besides, there is about three kilometres to the city." he points to a close indicator in blood which shows the destination and route they have to take to arrive at Thessaloniki.


    "Tell the gang we have to get out and continue on foot. And take as much of the supplies as they can." says Alina getting out of the vehicle to check the perimeter.


    Ana announced to the people on the back that they have to get off and continue on foot. She showed them the plane is blocking their road, and they cannot pass that big plane or run over it. All the passengers understand, and they do get out of this truck, but for Alin was a problem because of his broken leg, and they were also no worries since Radu is here to got his back.


    All the survivors are leaving the military truck, they took all the backpacks and briefcases with supplies and proceed to walk on the left side. There, they leave the highway and proceed to walk forward, dodging a few trees who have fallen due to the plane and car accidents.


    Alin is walking in front, together with Claudia. Both of them are equipped with fire weapons, Alina having her trusty revolver, while Claudia is wielding her SMG. Almost all the survivor, except Anakin, are holding weapons such as assault rifles, SMG''s and handguns.


    When they have passed the plane, these survivors have seen the disaster which the other side didn''t show. Thousands of cars being crashed into each other, damaged or in fire. There was even a truck who had his trailer burned, and one zombie locked on the driver seat, but it was killed by Anakin who stabbed the zombie head with a kitchen knife he has taken from that building.


    If you find this story on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen. Please report the infringement.


    "Good hit." praise Marcus to Anakin.


    "Thanks." whispers Anakin to Marcus. "What do you think? A car might be working here?"


    "You mean at driving through this place?"


    "Nah."


    "You mean at turning on? Maybe..."


    Alina and Claudia were walking until they do passed a red car, then, they have stopped and told everyone to hide behind some cars. A few were asking these women why they were doing these, but before they were about to answer it, Cassandra screamed when she saw military people who were trying to kill the infected. The scream got the attention of the people in the uniforms, and one of them shoot Cassandra, hitting her in the chest with a bullet.


    This hit made her fall to the concrete and die in a few moments while she was trembling and breathing heavily. Ilie was trying to help Cassandra by applying pressure on the wound, but it was too late to do anything to help this poor girl. That bullet has hit the vital organs of the chest and killed Cassandra.


    At that moment, Claudia and Alina were terrified to see this death, right in front of their face, and the fact that military might not be their escape from this Hell, they can also escape people from the life. Alina is telling everyone in whispering that they have to stay hidden and attack if it''s necessary, and using their weapons as a defence, not as an attack. All the survivors are hiding below the cars. Marcus and Ho Lee are hiding under a yellow car, Claudia, Alina, Ana and Ilie are hiding under a Volvo truck, and the rest of the survivors, Anakin, Radu, Alin, Laura and Klaus are hiding under the truck. Alin could feel the pain of staying still under a vehicle and in a bad position for his damaged leg, he wanted to scream, but he has to contain the scream in order to escape from this gang of soldiers who just murdered an innocent woman.


    These soldiers who just shoot Cassandra are walking slowly to her, and they discuss in Greek after they have seen the woman corpse.


    "Looks like a Roma woman." says a soldier in Greek. "Feel bad for killing her."


    "Why? She is obviously infected? Cause of her Roma bloodline." says a racist soldier among this small group.


    Then, out of nowhere, the Cassandra who was once human, became a zombie and is now raising from the ground, but she was quickly put down by a soldier Greek who sued his assault rifle to kill Cassandra again, by shooting her head.


    "Fuck." though Ana. "We are in deep shit."


    "This proves that humans can come back as zombies if they are killed." says a soldier in Greek language to his colleagues.


    "Sure." responds another Greek soldier. "We should continue investigating because I do not think the woman was able to come here by herself."


    "Perhaps she has come by herself." says another Greek soldier who is walking forward, and he sees the military truck. "Guys! Look at this!"


    Then, all the Greek soldiers are going to the guy who has come to the military Tuck. He is getting on the military truck, together with his colleagues, and they are leaving this area. When they have left, Radu take courage to leave first, and he goes slowly to the place where they have parked their truck. And he did saw it get it taken, and this made the survivors furious (they thought the soldiers took another truck or another vehicle).


    "Damn it!" yells Laura hitting the close car with her leg, and it made the alarm sounds go off. "Fuck..."


    "We have to run!" says Alina taking the lead, and the other survivors followed her lead, letting the corpse of Cassandra staying on the cold concrete road surrounded by a thousand of cars.

 From Cluj to Athene - Part 19

    The survivor group had managed to walk almost 100 meters on the big mess of this highway. While they were walking, they are using their weapons as a melee because they are running short in ammo, thanks to the stupid and psychopath military people who just killed a girl in front of them. Alin has an idea to use a knife, he attached to an assault rifle and will use it to stab zombie''s head. An attack tactic well-known in Japanese''s Imperials Army.


    "Gargh!" says Claudia who used a hammer she found in the truck to smash a car window, only to unlock the door of that car, then grab the medical kit from it. She inspects it while Alina and Ilie are coming closer to her.


    "What you have found here?" asks Ilie holding his SMG.


    "A medical kit." says Claudia passing the medical kit to Ilie. "This might be your domain."


    "I am not an actual doctor, you know." says Ilie taking the medical kit, but before he could pass it to her again, she took the lead with Alina. He puts this med kit into his backpack and continue walking.


    "Are you really not a doctor?" asks Klaus holding a handgun.


    "No. Iˇ­ uh... I was a Football player for CFR Cluj."


    "Cool." says Klaus. "That was your dream?"


    "More like my father dream. You know. He always wanted to see me a football player, even though I didn''t like it. I was more attracted to medicine than football, or any type of sports. But my father, he really wished to see me becoming a footballer so I have decided to be one. It was tough, but I made it to a strong team. Then this apocalypse has happened... And you can figure it out... It has changed all of us."


    "Was your father proud?" asks Klaus after he stomp the head of a corpse who didn''t even showed movement, but he did that just in case.


    "It was. He loved me only when I was kicking the ball, not when I did when in school... He wouldn''t even be proud of me at this situation... I started to miss him, man."


    "My family is probably gone, too." says Klaus to Ilie to make him feeling sad and thinking that is the only man here who is dealing with family loss. "Most of this group has his family gone, but we have each other back, and we are together, right? Without teamwork, we wouldn''t even be able to enter Greece."


    "You''re right." says Ilie smiling to Klaus. "For a German guy, your Romanian sounds good."


    "Thank you, my dear friend." he replies in Romanian language, like he was speaking the whole time this mess started.


    Ilie sees a zombie coming under the door, at the feet of Klaus, he quickly took out his SMG and shot a few bullets into the thing head. This sudden action has almost damaged Klaus right leg, but it has also saved his life. One inch and he would''ve become a thing that eats only human meat.


    All of the survivors are turning to Ilie, and they look at him. All of those faces are curious to know why did he shoot that SMG. Then, Alina came close to Ilie and she told him.


    "Are you trying to alert the Military ? We have to run from this Hell!"


    "I''m sorry." says Ilie. "But in my defence, a zombie was close to got Klaus leg."


    "That is true." says Klaus feeling anxious about the fact he was close to become a monster who eats human meat. "And I am sorry for being this clueless."


    "Don''t worry about it." says Ana. "This can happen to everyone."


    "Um, guys." says Anakin looking in the sky and points at a helicopter who is falling from the sky into a few hundred meters from their locations on a hill. "Looks like someone got trouble!"


    "On the sky?!" asks Alina surprised. "Are zombies now able to fly?"


    "If a zombie is able to do that, he should be called a zombie?" asks Anakin.


    "If he is a he and not a she." says Laura to Anakin. "But yeah, we should be focusing on the run and not at the helicopter who is about to crash."


    The genuine version of this novel can be found on another site. Support the author by reading it there.


    "Laura is right." says Claudia to the group who gathered in one place. "We should be focusing on the walk."


    The group of survivors continued to walk to the highway crammed with broken vehicles where once we''re used by humans to travel from big distances, or in case of rich folks who can afford any gas price, to go even with their cars only five meters to only buy one milk bottle or any cheap food from a local supermarket.


    While they were walking, all of them were trying to ignore the helicopter who crashed into the hill, and when it did, a big "BOOM!" can be heard, and almost all of them have seen the helicopter being on fire, and screaming of the people from that helicopter who got crashed. A few of these survivors felt bad for these unlucky fighters, but they didn''t stay much to mourn them because the explosion have awakened a few zombies and "called" the zombies nearby.


    Three zombies were walking on the highway, but they were quickly put down by Anakin, who used a sword he found in the attic of the house he checked in Bulgaria. He ditched his lightsaber sword, in order to gain a much more deadly weapon because he finally realized his "toy" it would be useless while he is fighting against zombies. He detached the heads of these zombies by only doing three swings with the sword. Almost everyone was impressed by the skill of Anakin.


    "Great work." says Radu to Anakin.


    "Good job, mate." says Ho Lee patting the back of the Anakin before he refilled an arrow to his bow. "Watch out.". He shots a zombie who was standing idle on the top of a bus in this crowd of cars, trucks and different type of vehicles. He saw the arrow hitting the head of that zombie, and looks at him, falling with his back on the top of bus with the face looking at the sun.


    The team continues to walk and in a few minutes they were able to arrive at the intersection, and they took the one who leads to the city of Thessaloniki. But when they took the road by walking, they have seen there fewer cars for some reasons. There were many, but not as many as on the highway. And most of them were only small vehicles such as Dacia, Renault, Opel etc.


    The team saw a few zombies eating from a corpse of human. Alina was thinking that they should avoid them, but Ho Lee and Klaus proceed to use their weapons to kill those things. Ho Lee shots two arrows from the bow, which hits only one zombie, but Klaus used his pistol to shoot those two zombies. The first one has fallen later down because of another arrow shot by Ho Lee. Then a few more zombies, who heard Klaus gun shot have started to raise up and walk to the zone where the noise was made.


    "Well done, Klaus." says Laura sarcastically while she prepare her assault rifle.


    "Shoot their heads! Only the heads!" says Alina to the group who proceed to prepare their weapons to fight.


    Alin was the first person to use almost the entire clip to shoot four zombies. He used a pistol which has about 15 bullets magazines and a medium range. He did well for a man with a broken leg, and staying still by a help of a car door. Radu has stabbed the zombies who were coming close and weren''t shot by the team. He successfully stabbed the heads of nine zombies without a sweat and break the head of a creature with his martial arts skill.


    "Are you aright?" asks Laura who saw Radu punching zombie.


    "Yes!" responds Radu taking his gun with the knife attached in front. "Be ready to shot or else they will be eating your ass!"


    "Shut up." says Laura feeling a little triggered because Radu has spoken rude to her.


    Anakin, Marcus and Alina have killed together about eleven zombies with their weapons. Ana has managed to kill two of those things by using almost the entire clip magazine from her pistol. Other teammates didn''t do so well, such as Claudia who missed a bunch of zombies, and she was close to get a bite, if it wasn''t Alina and Ana who were head-shooting all of the upcoming zombies, and Radu who was stabbing the zombies and kicking their faces out of their decomposed bodies. By the zombies continued to come because of the noise, so the team had the plan to run to any vehicle who can work and drive their way to the city port.


    Anakin, Marcus and with Ana are getting in an Opel vehicle with broken windows and one small box with water and food. They did see there a zombie who was tied to the driver seat. They checked to see if they have fuel, and they do have enough to even get to Greece. Anakin put the zombie down by stabbing the forehead and dragging him from the driver seat and dropping on the concrete. Marcus is taking the driver seat while Ana and Anakin are going behind.


    Alina, Laura, Claudia, Ilie and Klaus are taking a BMW who has five seats. When they check inside there was nobody there, and it has enough fuel to help them to go to the port. Alina is taking the driver seat, Klaus sits on the other front seat, while the other are staying behind. Alina sees the car can be turned on by a button so she pressed the button and car it is turning up. These cars also has a GPS, which it will be extremely helpful. Klaus put the destination to the nearest Port, and it did get them to route to the Port of Thessaloniki.


    The rest of the survivors, Ho Lee, Radu and Alin, are taking a Dacia Logan who had two zombies tied by their seats. Ho Lee sued his arrows to stab the zombie''s head and then, with the help of Radu, dragging them out from the cars. Ho Lee is going to drive this one, while Radu and Alin are taking the backseats.


    "Is anyone ready?" asks Alina to her group.


    "Yes!" replied most of the group from there.


    "Let''s go!"


    Alina car is the first one to leave this highway, then comes the car driven by Ho Lee, and at the final, it comes Marcus''s one. While they were driving from the street, they see a few zombies walking to their direction, but they were walking so slow that the survivors didn''t even mind them. They weren''t a threat to them at this moment because of the cars.


    The port name it is Port of Thessaloniki, it is second-largest container port in Greece which it was acquired by a German consortium in 2018. This port it will probably be their key to escape this Hell from Eastern Europe.

 From Cluj to Athene - Part 20

    Meanwhile, on the military truck who was taken by the soldiers who walked past the group who were hiding from under the cars in order to not get shot like Cassandra. On the driver seat, there is one military guy, wearing a bandanna which represent the flag of Greece, has a British moustache, like the character from Call of Duty franchise, Captain Price. He wears a pair of black glasses to protect him from the sun, and make him look cool.


    He turns on the radio while he is driving on the off-roads of this country to see if he can get some signal. But nothing for the moment, there it isn''t any signal going on. Only noises who can tell you the radio''s frequency are all dead and non-existent.


    "Captain Yun." says a soldier from the back of the truck and coming to the free seat in the front. "Where are we going?"


    Stolen from its original source, this story is not meant to be on Amazon; report any sightings.


    "To clean the mess." responds Captain looking at the road and not giving a single look to his soldier. "I have an idea to create to a base into my home."


    "Are you sure, sir? Because we have been sent to do other things than finding a location."


    "Yes. Plus, these assholes can do it by themselves. They have enough weapons to even fight Americans." he sees a village on the shield-window up on the hill. "And we have found our new base, boys." he said this line with such happiness. "Tell the boys." says the one soldier next to him. "Prepare for cleaning our new base by these fucking zombies!"


    "Very well, sir." says one soldier going behind to announce the soldiers who are staying there, holding onto something after all these damaged and off-roads they are driven to. "We are about to create a new base. Captain orders, understand?"


    "Yes!" replied the soldiers feeling surprised by their captain order.

 From Cluj to Athene - Part 21

    After almost two hours of riding through the roads crumbled with cars and corpses of humans and dead zombies, the group of eleven survivors have managed to arrive at Thessaloniki, the port they are looking for. But when they arrived there, the things didn''t look that bright for them because at the moment they have looked with their eyes on the port and saw the destruction they were feeling miserable and hopeless.


    "Oh, fuck..." says Marcus looking at a few big ships who were still on fire and a few more pieces of bots who are still on the waters and a few corpses of humans who are somehow still in the waters. "We have made a big mistake coming here."


    "You think so." says Claudia looking mean at Alina, and ignoring Marcus who is looking clueless around.


    "Hey! At least I did something." says Alina to Claudia. "We can still make it to Athene, right?" she asks the surrounding people.


    "Yes." says Anakin. "We can still make it, but hey... This was only a small mistake, right?"


    Suddenly, Alin sees a few bunches of zombies coming to their direction in a fast speed walking. He alerts his brother, then his gang that a few zombies are coming over. The gang is taking out their guns and proceed to shoot the upcoming zombies.


    In just a few minutes, the upcoming zombies, who were almost eighty were put down by the artillery of these eleven survivors. Then, the team decides to check the area to see if they can fins something useful here, because after all, a few of the survivors from this group have encountered a lot of military vehicles damaged and abandoned, plus a few military human corpses with weapons on their hands.


    The tale has been stolen; if detected on Amazon, report the violation.


    ***


    Alin and Radu are staying on a military jeep because Alin it is injured, and it needs rest. This is making Alin feeling extremely irritated because he cannot move properly and not help his teammates in fighting against zombies.


    "Radu." says Alin to his brother.


    "Yeah?" asks Radu looking at his brother.


    "Are you feeling alright?"


    "Yes. You?"


    "... I''m useless."


    "No, you''re not." says Radu. "You are a great man. And you will be able to fight again in a matter of days, okay?"


    He laughs a bit, then he said to his brother.


    "I''d like to fight again by your side."


    "Yeah. Me too." says Radu fist-bumping with his brother. He then takes a look on the window to see what is going on, and he sees a zombie crawling to a container. His legs are non-existed, and they can see a few intestines coming out of the torso."You see that zombie?"


    "Yes." he looks at the zombie Radu showed him. "How are they even able to crawl without any legs."


    "These mutants are truly scarier than the one from video games."


    "Exactly, brother... By the way, how it is the spear going?"


    "It worked fine." says Radu taking a look back to the backseat to see if his spear which consist into a broom stick and with a knife tied to the end of the stick.


    Then, a survivor came to the military jeep, and that survivor it is Ilie, who''s looking at Alin feet. He asked him the basics questions of checking the injury like: "Does it hurt?", "Can you walk?" and "How does it feel?". Which Alin replied that "The leg is still hurting, but less.". After the checking, Ilie is looking at Radu, and he asks him a question.


    "Do you think you can help me at something?"


    "What is it?" asks Radu towards Ilie.


    "Just come with me. I''ll show you there."


    "Alright." says Radu taking his improvised spear and leaving Alin into the jeep, but before he left the jeep, he told Alin: "Be careful."


    "I will." responds Alin.

 From Cluj to Athene - Part 22

    While these two survivors were walking to a red container, Marcus came out of nowhere running from two zombies. Thankfully he bumped into Radu and Ilie, who used their melee weapons to put those two creatures down. Radu stabbed one of the monster''s head with his beloved spear, while Ilie used a machete he found in the arms of a military corpse.


    "Thank you." says Marcus to Radu and Ilie who killed these two creatures without a sweat. "I thought I was a goner."


    "Anytime." says Radu to Marcus. "What you were doing there?"


    "I was searching for supplies and weapons. But then I saw a few zombies coming out of the waters."


    "What? Zombies can swim?" asks Ilie feeling nervous.


    "I don''t know. They were just floating there, and in the next second they managed to climb the docks and jump on me."


    "We''ve got a new zombies type, then?" asks Radu to Ilie.


    "Most likely... Shit!" says Ilie hitting with his toe the red container. "And I thought an island can help us."


    "Keep calm, Ilie." says Radu to him. "The military has technology to protect from zombies. Even from some zombies who can swim."


    "Military? Like those guys earlier who killed poor Cassandra?" asks Ilie feeling angry which make Marcus slowly leaving this scene.


    "Those were probably some who wanted to be a group!" says Radu. "You know, like those from the movies and video games?"


    "...Military has killed a person earlier, and one who is a kid." says Ilie to Radu. "And I do have bad thoughts on this Military thing."


    "So you consider... Leaving us alone?"


    "I... I do not know... One side of me wants to trust the big guys, and others want to go on solo."


    "It is your choice, Ilie. You decide what you do, alright?"


    Radu goes to a container, and there he proceeds to open it, there, he sees a boat. This made him and Ilie very happy. But they also saw there a man, who is just standing there with a half empty whiskey bottle.


    "Hello! How''s it going?" says the man in Greek language.


    "Are you in infected?" asks Radu in English instead of Romanian or Greek language.


    "Wh-What?" asks the man in Greek and not understanding English. "What language is that?"


    "Bite?" he asks Radu by showing his arms.


    Support the author by searching for the original publication of this novel.


    "Bite?... You mean you got a bite?" says the man terrified in Greek. "Get! Away from me!"


    "Stop." says Radu coming close to him. "I am not infected."


    "No!" says the Greek survivor. "You will not infect me!". He proceeds to aim his knife into his neck.


    "NO! WAIT!" says Radu trying to stop him, but it was too late, the man has already stabbed his own neck, and he has fallen into a deep sleep until he will become a zombie.


    Radu stays there, looking at the man corpse, speechless. Ilie is also there, he didn''t believe what he just saw. A man who has killed himself in front of them, and he looked like he was fine. Radu takes some courage and goes to inspect the man body. After a few seconds, Radu sees a bite mark on his left arm. He immediately takes out the knife from that man throat, and he is preparing to stab him when he will become a zombie.


    He waits a few seconds, and at the moment the man came back as a mindless creature, Radu is stabbing the creature in the brain zone, and he leaves the corpse laying on the container. After that, he thanked the corpse for the boat, and he said "Sorry!" that he was not able to save him.


    "With only one boat we might be able to leave this part." says Radu after he helped Ilie carrying the boat to a dock.


    "We?" he asks Ilie to Radu in an evil manner.


    "What are you talking about?"


    "I am sorry." says Ilie before he hit Radu in the head with the pistol, and he looks at him going unconscious only because of a hit. "But I have different plans."


    He goes into the boat, he realizes he has a motor on it, he turns out by using the key who remained on the designated location, and he leaves the gang on that dock while he is making his own way to an island. While he was fleeing from the dock, Marcus and Claudia came to the dock when they have heard the motor sounds. When they saw Radu laying unconscious on the pontoon, they took him out of there and goes to the car.


    "What the hell happened?" asks Alina when she saw Claudia and Marcus carrying Radu to the vehicle where Alin is staying.


    "We had a traitor." says Claudia to Alina.


    "What?"


    "Someone from our team has taken a boat and flees from here!" says Claudia.


    "Who was it?"


    "I don''t know! I wasn''t there!" says Claudia again.


    "I think it was Ilie." says Marcus. "He and Radu had an argument when I was with them. He probably found the boat, and he took it."


    "Radu!" says Alin seeing his brother on the backseats of the vehicle. "What happened to him?! Who did this?!"


    "Alin." says Alina to him. "You have got to calm down."


    "Calm down!" yells Alin who was patrolling earlier, and he found a set of crutches. "My brother might be dead at this moment! And you tell me to calm down!"


    "I... Am ˇ­ not dead." says Radu who talks slowly. "... It is all... Ilie''s fault." and then he goes back to the unconscious state.


    "What?" says Alin who proceeds to shake him up because he thinks that he might awake him. "Brother? Brother?!"


    "Alin." says Anakin putting his left hand on his shoulder. "You have got to let him. He is not dead."


    "What?"


    "Look." he says looking at Radu chests, and he can see it is still "working". "He is not dead. Only unconscious."


    Alin leaves the vehicle, he goes to Marcus and Claudia, and he asks them where is Ilie''s heading. But Alina has quickly stopped him because he has an injured leg and even if he were being able to swim to him, it will be impossible to catch him while he got a motorboat.


    "We should go." says Ana coming to them while she is carrying a box with supplies. "Zombies are coming."


    The survivors who are gathering at the vehicle, almost everyone who remained from this team, sees a bunch of zombies coming to Ana direction. They all proceed to enter in vehicles on this dock. The first car to leave is having Marcus, Alina, Ana and Claudia. The second one is carrying Alin, Radu and Laura. The last car who''s leaving two minutes behind from them is having Klaus and Ho Lee who stayed behind to take a few weapons from the grounds of this dock.


    All of these three cars are following Alina.


    All ten of the reaming survivors are heading to the Athena airports or docks, where they are going to take or an airplane to an island, or a boat to an island.

 From Cluj to Athene - Part 23

    Thirty minutes later, in the ocean, at about one kilometre from the docks, the motorboat who was taken by Ilie it is on its way to a safe distance. The boat it is driven by Ilie who is not feeling well because he back-stabbed his "friends" by stealing a way of getting help.


    While he is driving the boat, Ilie is looking on the ocean, and he sees there countless corpses who were once humans, and now are zombies who were killed by the water or zombies who have mastered the swimming. One of those zombies was "swimming" to Ilie''s boat, but he got his pistol out of the weapon holding from the chest, he aimed his gun at the head of the creature. At first, it was hard to try and hit the creatures because of the way it moves on the water. He moves hysterically which makes the thing even much harder than trying to shoot a zombie runner from a close distance. He shoots three times. The first two shoots didn''t hit the creature head, but the third one has hit the thing, and it make it stop from moving, and it proceeds to slowly drown into the ocean.


    "...Shit." says Ilie after he counts the ammo from the clip of his handgun. He only has eight bullets left for the handgun, and the one from his backpack are for a submachine gun. And he didn''t manage to take a working on.


    While he navigates to the ocean, he sees a few cars driving on a street, from a very far distance. Those cars are probably his "friends" he thought Ilie. He is also hoping that they aren''t noticing him. Thankfully for Ilie, these cars continued to move, and it didn''t stop on the street to look at him, nor they slowed down, they are driving at a high speed.


    He sees a few buildings on fire on a high hill, other buildings close to the street, and he hears an explosion coming from the dock. He looked back, and he sees a crane who is used to carry containers into ships. Ilie got scared at how the building proceed to slowly fall into the ocean. It gave him goosebumps and at first he thought the crane will be falling into the ocean, but it falls on the ship who was there probably to be loaded with containers. The crane has fallen on the ship, and it did cause big damage that would cost a lot if humanity was still alive like three days ago.


    After a few minutes of navigating to this ocean, he manages to see the ship he was aiming to go. When he got close to that ship, he could see a human there, who is waving at him as a sign of requiring "Help!" he thought Ilie, but the sign that human has made it is completely different. Ilie was about to wave back at him, but suddenly, a big explosion came, and it destroyed the ship. And this explosion has also created some difficulties to Ilie such as trying to maintain the boat from not going down. But a big part of the ship, which was a huge metal part from the bottom is flying to Ilie, crushing his boat and him. Nobody would''ve been able to survive that hit, let alone the sharks who were come thanks to Ilie blood draw on the ocean while he was going on the bottom and the explosion.


    Unauthorized usage: this tale is on Amazon without the author''s consent. Report any sightings.


    He got eaten by those sharks, even though he wasn''t alive anymore.


    In a matter of seconds, from Ilie remained only the crushed backpack with food supplies which are now gone and weapons crushed by that big metal part of the ship who just flew into Ilie''s body.


    ***


    Meanwhile, on the roads to the Athene, at the car where Alin and Radu are sitting, Radu proceeds to wake up from the sleep he got from Ilie.


    "Arrgh! My head." says Radu.


    "Are you alright, Radu?" asks Alin the first moment he saw his brother getting up.


    "Yes... I am fine, Only the head hurts a little."


    "No wonder." says the driver of this car, who''s Laura. "The man who hit did a hard swing, and it manages to take the boat."


    "That bastard." says Radu feeling angry. "If I ever will come across his face when I will see him after this mess. I will beat him until he will forget he was in the national team."


    "He was?" asks Claudia.


    "Yeah... I saw him once on TV. He played horribly." says Radu.


    "But at least he was good doctor to Alin."


    "You have got to agree on that one." jokes Alin and this made Claudia laughs a bit, but this made Radu smile.


    "You are alight?" asks Radu to Alin while he is looking at his leg.


    "Probably it starts to cure." says Alin. "Anyway. How much longer we have?"


    "About a few more of a hundred kilometres I think."


    "W-Were are going exactly?" asks Radu feeling thrown away. "To a port, right?"


    "Yes. We are going to take the Port of Piraeus." says Claudia who proceeds to turn on the radio.


    "To everyone who is still on Greece!" says the guy from the Radio broadcast. "Head to the Port of Piraeus! There it is a boat coming at almost every day with transport the people into the designed islands taken by the survivors camp! If you are a man or a woman who doesn''t have a fever at 38 Celsius Grade, doesn''t present light green or yellow skin, and doesn''t have black veins, or red eyes, come to the Port of Piraeus! I repeat this message! To every-"


    Then Claudia closes the radio station, and he says to Radu.


    "Now you do understand where are we going?"

 From Cluj to Athene - Part 24

    On the vehicle where Alina is driving, she tries to turn on the radio, but some frequencies appear, and it makes it worse, so she stops the radio. In the front seat next to her, it is Ana, probably the only person from this group who somehow understands her silent and leader trait.


    "Are you alright?" asks Ana.


    "Yeah... I am fine." she says while she was trying to hide her sad nature because Ilie has betrayed them. "I just cannot believe what Ilie has done. He just... Used us and Boom! He took a boat by himself."


    "I think he will not regret this actions, and he will sooner or later be eaten by zombies." says Ana.


    "Don''t say that." responded Alina. "He might''ve betrayed us, but he was still helpful to us, and he even tried to help Alin as good as he can. And, poor Eliza. He was looking after her until she got... You know. Killed."


    "... I think you might be right. Whatever his reason was to betray us, I hope it would''ve been a good one and not a crappy one."


    "Girls." says who are on the back of the car together with Claudia, he is looking at the gas mark. "We should be refuelling soon because there are about a hundred kilometres, and I am worried we are not going to have enough fuel to go to that Port."


    "Easy to say than done." responds Ana to Marcus request. "How do you think we can found gas on a street which is almost blocked. Besides. It will be a risk with these creatures.". Ana shows one zombie who is looking on the sky, completely naked.


    Alina was close to run that zombie over if she didn''t took a slight right direction to a second band. The other cars are avoiding that zombie who was taking his eyes off the sky and tries to jump on those cars. Then, when the third and the last car passed him, the zombie was trying to walk at a slow peace to them, but he will not even be able to pass those cars.


    "Check that out." says Claudia to Alina when she saw a gas station sign which indicates it is at about 3000 meters.


    "And?" asks Ana. "Do you think we might need gas?"


    "Marcus is an expert in cars." says Claudia. "So you should listen to his advice."


    After Claudia said that, Marcus felt a bit emotional because no girl has ever told to his face about the "expert" thing. Not even his wife, children or his own parents who were always considering him a miserable kid who doesn''t know how to work in a factory, but he knows how a car works.


    Support the creativity of authors by visiting Royal Road for this novel and more.


    "Fine." says Alina. "I guess we can try our luck."


    "Alina?" asks Ana feeling startled by her action.


    "But we just get the gas, and then we leave. Understand?"


    "Of course." says Claudia.


    "We already have enough supplies to make us go to that Port." says Marcus to her.


    "Alight." says Alina. "But we have to see if the other members are going to stop at the gas station."


    "Aren''t you in the front?" asks Claudia. "They might be stopping where are you stopping."


    "I hope so." says Alina who goes pass driving by another indicator who says the next gas station it is at about 2500 meters.


    ***


    On the second car, where Laura, Radu and Alin are sitting, the atmosphere feels heavy and that it is because of Ilie''s betrayal who made Radu unconscious and Alin feeling much more emotionally hurt than physically. Ilie was basically the survivor from their group who knew how medicine is working. And now, Alin it will have to take care by himself, but his brother might be able to save him from an infection, if he would be able to cut Alin leg when the bad time will come.


    "Is your injury getting better?" asks Laura who is the person driving the car and following Alina car.


    "Yes." says Alin to Laura question.


    "Good." says Laura, then she asks Radu. "Are they still on the back?"


    "Yes." says Radu looking back at the car who is following them.


    "Great."


    "Are you sure we will be safe where are we going?" asks Radu.


    "We will see." responds his brother. "The only thing we needed now it is a place to stay safe until everything will be cleared."


    "That''s what we hope." says Radu.


    ***


    On the third car, who is carrying the rest of the survivors, Ho Lee and Klaus, is on the behind of the second car. These survivors are feeling nervous cause of the betrayal it was happening and all the killings they have encountered from the attack of these undead creatures.


    "Hey, Lee." says Klaus who is sitting on the front seat next to Lee, who''s driving the car. "Are you going with us?"


    "No." says Lee to Klaus. "I want to see if I will be able to arrive for my family in China. They might''ve found something who would help them to be safe."


    "I see..."


    "You are going to them?"


    "Yes. It is either them, or on the streets surrounded by the zombies."


    "That''s right."


    They pass with their car on a zombie who is focusing on eating a human corpse. These two survivors weren''t able to see if the corpse was human, or it was a zombie but got killed by either a bullet or stabbed in the head with something sharp like a knife or a screwdriver.


    "Have you ever seen zombies eating each other?" asks Klaus.


    "What?" asks Ho Lee who wasn''t paying attention to Klaus.


    "Have you ever seen zombies eating each other?" says Klaus again, but this time a little louder.


    "Yes. And this is totally weird."


    "What do you mean?"


    "Think about it. If there are zombies who can eat zombies meat. How can nobody have come to the idea to use them at cleaning zombies?"


    "Maybe you are right. But the question will remain. How we can see the difference between zombies and the ones who eat zombies."


    "Probably by research?"


    "Probably."


    Klaus sees that the second car, together with the first car are entering a gas station. They talk a bit about this change of route and decided to head to that gas station. After all, they might be able to find something useful there like gas or better, a radio to help them communicate with the military.

 From Cluj to Athene - Part 25

    Three cars are stopping in front of a gas station who looks totally abandoned. A lot of corpses are on the ground, cars who are blocking the exit of this gas station, and even a truck who has crashed into the gas station building. Ho Lee sees the door of the gas station is missing, and the windows are entirely broken, but he also found a car, parked on the parking lot.


    He walks closer to that car. As soon as he got close enough to look at the window to inspect the interior of the car, he saw there a corpse who got his throat slit with a knife is holding on left hand. Ho Lee sees on the car a map on the seat next to the driver, and this will give them a big help in direction since nowadays, you cannot use phone as a GPS, nor try to ask for directions.


    Lee tries to unlock the door, which he discovered that it was open in the first place. He opens the door, and he quickly takes the map from that seat and closes the car again because the corpse proceed to breath, and it was close to jump at Ho Lee hands. The man take a quick look on the map, and he sees there are a few weird places being marked with a green circle marker. He goes with the map to the other people of the group to show it to them.


    "Alina." says Ho Lee coming with a map at them, and he puts on the car to show the locations marked. "Come and take a look here."


    Alina comes, and she looks at the map Ho Lee brought to them. After a quick look around this map, Alina looks at Ho Lee.


    "Where did you found this map?"


    "It was laying on a car of a zombie." says Ho Lee, and this made Alina feeling unwell, but Ho Lee has quickly showed to her that he wasn''t bitten by that thing. "It is alright. I escaped from that creature at the nick of time."


    "Still. You should be more careful around these things. They proceed to get stronger almost every day with each infection they provoke... There." she points to a marked zone close to the dock. "This must be the zone where the Military is awaiting us or will help us go to an island to settle."


    "You know." says Anakin coming over to those two guys. "I am wondering how come Soldiers haven''t cleaned the entire planet already."


    "They are probably outnumbered, or the military doesn''t have America level f funds. But let''s get focus on our escape, alright." says Alina to Anakin, and she looks at the map. "But how come there are many marked zones here."


    "Maybe they are possible to extract zones?" theorize Ho Lee.


    "Maybe." says Alina without looking at Ho Lee.


    Meanwhile, at the front door where was the gas station supposed to be, Ana and Claudia are walking in there, both equipped with a handgun and a knife in case they are encountering a sneaky zombie. Both of these girls sees the lights are still working on this gas station building, so it will give them a big advantage in looting, but a disadvantage if they get seen by a zombie.


    Ana goes to the desk where was the cashier supposed to stay and scan products then take their money. She sees on the floor a corpse with his head blown up. This scared Ana when she saw the corpse, and made her wondering: "Would I have the same fate if I was there?". Before she could try to say anything to Claudia. Her eyes spotted a key on the hands of that corpse. She goes over the desk, takes the keys, and she took a long look at them.


    This story is posted elsewhere by the author. Help them out by reading the authentic version.


    "What you found?" asks Claudia going to Ana.


    "Some keys." says Ana. "But to where?"


    These girls hear a pounding from their backs. They quickly turned around, aiming their handguns to the walls. Then, both of them are seeing the door who''s hitting from the interior. Claudia looked at Ana, whose Ana looked at the key and nodded her head in approval. Claudia tires to persuade Ana to go to that door to open, and Ana goes there. She got to that door, put the key in the hole where it should be, and it unlocks the door. She opens as quickly as possible, and she aims her handgun to the thing there.


    Her handgun it is aimed at a human person. She is not shaking, like that man who is shaking and with his hands raised up because of the gun aimed at him. The man it is a young man, with a bandage all over his head and his clothes being almost completely ripped.


    "I-I am not infected!" says the man in English language and shaking. "I. Am. Not. Bitten."


    "What''s your bandage for?" asks Ana to the man.


    "I-It is a scar... A man came here and... He stole the truck from here and attacked me. With a metal bar. Here!" he tries to unwrap the bandages, and he showed to them the scars on the hand he got from that metal bar in the head. "Look!"


    Ana and Claudia are looking at the mark the man got on his head from that metal bar. They are not experts not have that much intelligence at the subject of biology or anatomy. Claudia was looking at the man, and she asks him.


    "Are you a doctor?"


    "I was a medic on the front-lines when Yugoslavia was on revolution." responds the man.


    "When was that?" asks Ana.


    "On 1990." says the man.


    "Alright..."


    Ana put her gun down, and she looked at the man. She asked him what is doing here, and the man responds to this question.


    "I was about to go to Greece, with my family. A family vacations. But then. This thing happened and... it damaged me more than that Coronavirus. It killed all my family in that truck, and the man who stole it... Fuck..." he looks at these two girls, and he tries to hold his tears. "I was about to bury them in Serbia, back at my parent''s house. But that son of a bitch, has stolen the truck... And they were still zombies there... I did not have the courage to kill them... I am not able to kill a man. I am a doctor for god'' sake, not a butcher."


    "Hey. Hey!" says Ana to the man trying to calm him down. "Alright? We will try to find your truck, man."


    "No. Let him be."


    "You do realize that we are in a hurry?" asks Claudia to Ana.


    "Where are you guys heading?" asks the man to those two girls after he swiped his tears.


    "To a port." says the woman to the man.


    "Are you planning to head to an uninhabited island?" asks the man which made those two girls surprised. "I wouldn''t do that."


    "Why?"


    "This virus... Might take the entire world in a short amount of time, so even if you try to set a camp in Greenland or Antarctica you will most likely get infected and became a zombie there. But it is your choice."


    "So... You are not thinking of coming with us?"


    "No. I''d rather remain here and stay under this base. I''ve still got food and health kits."


    "Health kits?" asks Ana. "Could you spare some of those health kits? We''ve got a wounded man with us."


    "What happened to him?" asks the man to Ana.


    "He felt from a plane who was going to send us to Athena, but it has crashed into Bulgaria. The man has an injured leg."


    "Oh shit. You''ve come from Bulgaria? All the way here? Must''ve been really hard to travel."


    "Yes." says Claudia. "Could you help us?"


    "Sure. But for this... I would like a weapon. Think as a fair trade. I help your friend... You give me a weapon to protect myself."


    "Sounds a fair deal." says Ana to the man.


    "Ana!" says Claudia. "Are you already trusting him?"


    "Almost." says Ana while looking at the man who is going to see the injured man.

 From Cluj to Athene - Part 26

    The girls are going after the man who is going to try to see what he can do to Alin. Even if the man tries to kill anyone, he would most likely be shot by one of the survivors from here. Ana and Claudia explained to Alin, and the rest of the gang about the man who they were encountering into that gas station interior, and they are observing him putting some stitches to Alin leg.


    "You are truly prepared." says Ho Lee to that man while he was applying a stitch to a part of the leg.


    "I always carry a few health kits. Just in case an accident is happening." says the man doing the treatment to Alin. "This might help your friend bleed less, but it would be better to remain in the car and stay down. Until the leg would be healed completely."


    "Thank you." says Alin to that man. "Thank you very much."


    "I am doing my duty." says the man to Alin.


    ***


    After a while, the man has finished his work. Alin leg got a few stitches who would make a badass scar to impress a woman who loves tough guys. Ana awarded the man with a weapon, a handgun with only seven bullets. The man thanked them, and as a kind man he is, he let them take gas if they needed it, without any extra cost of the trade they made it with those medicines.


    Three hours later, they have a small distance until they arrive to Athena, the capital of Greece. In the car who''s carrying Alin and Radu, the driver, being Laura, is following the first car, while the third one it is at their back. Radu is looking at Alin stitches, and he asks him.


    The narrative has been taken without authorization; if you see it on Amazon, report the incident.


    "Does it hurt?"


    "A little." says Alin to his brother. "Boy... I was starting to lose hope that I will not make it until the Military area."


    "We will make it there." says Laura who heard Alin. "All we have to do it is to follow the path to the Port, and we are there... Hey!" she said that after a long silence pause. "I heard from a friend of yours that you two are fighters. It is true?"


    "Yes." says Alin, then Radu. Almost at the same time.


    "Aha. And you two are doing different type of fights or the same fight style?"


    "We are having our fighting style." says Radu. "I take Martial Arts, and my big brother has taken boxing."


    "Cool... But I am also sorry."


    "For what?"


    "I have done nothing. Only driving."


    "This is still a useful thing." says Radu. "Do you think I and Alin would be able to drive? At our conditions?"


    "By the way, how it is your head?" asks Alin to Radu.


    "Still some dizzy there and out, but good health. I have taken a lot of these hits back then."


    Alin and Radu laughed at this, and Laura is just looking at the road, but then she suddenly stops the car, and she sees the thing it is blocking their way to the Athena. A big wall who contains a few tons of cars, one big plane who is blocking the street and the terrain outside barriers from the highways, and a lot of zombies who are either standing still, or eat corpses meat.


    "God dammit!" yells Anakin at the trucks who are blocking their way.


    "Here we go again." says Claudia feeling already tired. "Another blockage! Why there must a blockage in the highways?!"


    "Um, guys." says Marcus to them. They were expecting a good answer to him since he is a mechanic, but he gives them a big disappointment. "Athena it is at about three kilometres from here, and we have to take this on a walk."


    "No shit, Sherlock." says Claudia feeling irritated, and she sees one zombie coming at them. She is the one who killed the creature by using a metal bar from the street. She ashed the thing head at least six swings, and then she looks at the survivors who are feeling concerned about her. "What?"


    "Look out!" yelled Ana shooting her Sub-machine gun to a few dozens of zombies who are coming from Laura behind.

 From Cluj to Athene - Part 27

    This survivor group has made it into something they did not expect to ever encounter, but yet, they do have encountered in a lot of streets of their road to their safety, a big blockage of cars, trucks and planes who were fallen from the skies. There are zombies all over the roads of this highway, wondering around or stay still and looking at the gray sky who might announce that rain might come at any time.


    Ana it is the first survivor to start the shoots, and she did that because a few zombies were close to jump on her colleague Laura. A full magazine of bullets for a submachine gun has pierced the heads of nine zombies, but there were a few more coming, and the others are pulling the trigger of their ranged weapons. Alin shot three zombies with his handgun, Radu takes down eight zombies with a submachine gun. And Laura, who managed to dodge the bullets of their survivors who were trying to protect her in the first place.


    Laura it is hiding on the left side of a damaged car, she sees the teammates of the group shooting the zombies coming at their direction. Then, Alina throws a weapon to Laura, and she successfully catches the weapon, which is a normal handgun, and she uses it to shoot the zombies who are coming at them. She manages to shoot only three of them, but the one shoot weren''t killed cause the bullets they only hit non-vital organs such as legs and arms.


    "Shit." says Marcus seeing a zombie jumping over the car and landing on his head and proceed to bit his neck. "ARGH!"


    "MARCUS!" yelled Radu shooting the zombie who just jumped almost 3 feet to him. He manages to take the beast down, but he looks at the Marcus bite, and he sees him crying. Then Radu aims his submachine gun at Marcus and without looking at him pleading Mercy, Radu shoots him.


    This shot has made everyone from this group feeling extremely shocked by the fact that someone from their group has decided to kill someone valuable for them. Even though he was a dude who seemed quite weird from the others, he was still a human. A human who just died right in the middle of chaos.


    "Radu!" says Laura looking shocked at Radu. "What have done to him?"


    "He is bitten on the head!" says Radu to Laura. "We cannot risk it!"


    "Guys!" says Alina to them. "I know. I am sad too, but we have to move on, otherwise we will join him. So. RUN!" she proceeds to run ahead, and the other survivors are following her.


    "You have got to be shitting me." say Alin who has a broken leg, but Radu comes and helps him walk faster by carrying him on the back while he uses a handgun to protect him.


    The group of survivors proceeds to run, letting the corpse of Marcus lying on the road, bleeding out in a fast speed. A crawler managed to crawl under cars, and he got closer to Marcus body, he proceeds to eat the corpse of Marcus, and as soon as he was eating it, his missing legs proceeded to reproduce in a fast speed.


    A few moments later, the team made it almost one hundred meters of distance from their cars. Claudia with Ana are climbing on a van, only to see a few zombie corpses coming at them. They proceed to shoot those things with their submachine guns. Down, Radu is letting Alin stay on a car while he is kicking a zombie head of his body, Alina saw Radu doing that move on it, and she praises him.


    This story originates from a different website. Ensure the author gets the support they deserve by reading it there.


    "Nice kick."


    "Yeah... Hah... Thanks." says Radu to her, and he quickly takes a metal bar from the car, and he uses it to smash a crawler head, hen he goes back to his brother, to put down another creature who was coming at them.


    Laura and Anakin are running ahead, carrying their weapons and shooting at the closest zombies they are encountering. Letting their survivors in the back, they are exposed to some big dangers, especially in a scenario where a lot of zombies can jump over cars, or crawl under them.


    "Fuck!" says Laura after she shoots the last bullet to a zombie who cannot die.


    "YEAH!" says Anakin who''s bashing the creature with his pistol instead of shooting it. He put the creature down, then he bashed that metal thing into the monster skull, until it stopped moving. "Put... Almost close..."


    "Get up!" says Alina running with the other survivors to Anakin. "We have to move on."


    Anakin is looking behind to see that a bunch of zombies are coming after them. He took his pistol and he run after their friends. While he was running, he observed a zombie who was jumping at him, but the man managed to dodge the flying attack by jumping in front. That creature has hit a car window-shield, and it died there. Anakin didn''t have time to analyse how did the creature died there because he has to run like his teammates.


    Klaus was close to get bitten by a zombie, but Radu was the one who saved him by shooting the zombie head with a gun. Radu looks at the thing who shoot, and he observed that it has a lot of burn marks all around his decomposed skin. Even though Klaus thanked him for this gesture, Radu was much worried about the creature he killed. Then, Ana, after she managed to climb over a truck to see how much they have to go, she sees something truly horrifying down at almost thirty feet from them, a fire who was just started and burned a lot of zombies who are running around screaming, on corpses who were zombies and decent human beings once, and on some animals who were there for some reason like searching for food, or they got attracted by meat smell.


    "Guys! There is a fire going on there!" says Ana to her colleagues.


    "What should we do?" asks Ho Lee to Alina. "Should we try and leave this highway and use the hills to go there?"


    "There is zombie there, too!" says Ana who sees that on the hills a lot more of zombie corpses are staying still looking at the Sun, or some zombies who are walking to the highway.


    "We have to go straight!" says Alina.


    "W-What ?!" says Claudia. "Are you crazy?!"


    "Yep. Probably." says Alina who is taking the lead and proceed to run ahead while some of her friends are tagging along.


    "You must be kidding me." says Alin and Radu at the same time after they saw the fire in front of them, who''s covering almost the entire highway, letting only a small portion to crawl, but that space wouldn''t let both of them to go together.


    "What are we going to do?" asks Radu to his brother, he looks back and sees a few zombies coming at them.


    "Leave me." says Alin picking up the gun.


    "W-What?!" says Radu who''s not letting his brother from his back.


    "I-I can follow you." says Alin sweating. "I-I can shoot and run."


    Radu was not even thinking of letting his brother go alone and fight the mutants who are coming after them, so he decided to try and go there by himself first, then he will try to see if his brother will come along. Alin aimed his gun at a few of those things who are coming after him, and he proceeds to shoot them. He managed to kill three or four by hitting their head, but there were more and way too hard to kill with only a few more ammo who remained in that handgun magazine.


    "Fuck!" says Alin walking in a faster rhythm to that opening their teammates and his brother were taking it to ignore the fire wall on the cars, trailers and other heavy things who were blocking their entire way.


    Before he was close to go into that gap, a few bullets proceed to go through the fire. Alin knew that those bullets who were launched from the other side are most likely the ones his teammates are using it. He uses this moment to crawl into the small passage as fast as he can in his health situation.


    After a long and exhausting crawl, Alin made it on the other side, and there, Radu is the one who''s greeting him, while the other seven survivors are busy to take the zombies from the back and the ones who are standing on their way to the freedom.

 From Cluj to Athene - Part 28

    This team of nine survivors have managed to made about 600 meters in a matter of about 10 minutes, due to the big number of zombies coming, and the vehicles who are blocking their way and making them to do some risky moves, just like earlier with that passage they have been taking it.


    Ho Lee is loading his last clip of ammo to his assault rifle. He looks over at his teammates and asks if anyone has any more bullets or clips with bullets, but nobody responded to him, so they are all on the same situation as him. It was a terrible move to use fire-guns at this moment instead of using in critical moments, such as now, where a bunch more of zombies proceeded to come here cause of the noise.


    Anakin, Ana and with Klaus proceed to search into a van to see if hey do find something useful there, and there they found something excellent at killing. The owner of this van was most likely working in construction cause this vehicle has almost everything who''s used in any zombie movies. From hammers to chainsaw or drills who are working on batteries, this van has almost everything at melee weapons category. Anakin is taking a big hammer who is weights about thirty kilograms or more. He leaves the van, and he goes to smash a few zombies skulls with that new weapon he just found. Ana is taking two screwdrivers, while Klaus is taking the chainsaw. This thing has two bad things in this type of scenario: it requires fuel, and it is very loud when you turned it on. Even with these warnings, Klaus still took this weapon, even though he has a crossbow at his back, but he doesn''t have enough arrows for this case and the speed to reload in two seconds or faster, even though this would be humanly impossible since a normal human can reload a crossbow in 5 seconds.


    While Claudia is using her gun to put down two zombies, she only managed to put one down. When she was trying to shoot to the other one, she realized that she doesn''t have any ammo. This shocked her, so, as a quick instinct, she uses the submachine gun as a bat and bashes the creature head, but this wasn''t working to cause her force of arms was weak. The creature managed to grab on her arms, it pinned her down, and it was close to eat her neck if it wasn''t for Anakin who used the big hammer to send that zombie head fly at a few meters ahead into another car.


    "Thank you!" says Claudia while she was helping get up by Anakin cos-player. "Where did you find that weapon?"


    "It is on the van." says Anakin pointing at a van with construction equipment where Laura is leaving with drill and one big knife.


    The rest of the survivors proceeds to go, while Claudia and Anakin are going to see what they might be able to get from that van. This was Claudia idea to bring Anakin along because they have to be careful since some guns proceeded to run out of bullets, and there it isn''t any military truck, or something who can provide them the ammunition needed for their guns. Plus they are in Europe, not America where they even allow kids at the age of six to buy a sniper rifle to assassinate the neighbourhood cat.


    While Claudia was searching for a suitable weapon for her, Anakin was using his big hammer to fight three zombies who were coming at them. He killed two of them, but when he was trying to kill the third one, he observed the other was ignoring him, and jumped on a zombie corpse who just got killed by Anakin. Before Anakin could do something, Claudia came and stabbed the creature head with a saw, right in the brain area. It was smooth, and it felt quite hard to take it off since it stayed there fixed as hell. Then, those two proceed to run after their group who still continue to run on the front.


    This content has been unlawfully taken from Royal Road; report any instances of this story if found elsewhere.


    "Why was that zombie eating a zombie corpse?" asks Anakin to Claudia while they are running holding their weapons.


    "How should I know?" asks Claudia. "I am not a scientist."


    "I was just asking. We have seen things like this, but I did not expected to ignore me and focuses on the zombie corpse."


    "He ignored you?" asks Claudia who''s surprised by what Anakin said. But before she would''ve been able to say something a zombie is jumping on her, and pinned her down.


    "FUCK!" yelled Anakin who''s quickly taking the zombie from her, but that thing has managed to bite Anakin arm. And Anakin has done one last effort in defence and that one was to kick the creature from him, and he used the handgun with the reaming three bullets he still had, and shot the creature head, by using those last three bullets.


    "No! No! No!" says Claudia coming over to Anakin who fallen on the ground, and she sees the bite mark on his arm.


    The other survivors came to Anakin, who was staying on the concrete, he is starting to feel dizzy and sweat. Everyone was feeling worried at who would try and kill him, but Anakin has decided to hand the last two handguns clips he has to Alina, and a kitchen knife to Claudia. He looks at Alin and told her.


    "Leave me here!" he tries to take the big hammer with both of his arms. He managed to do that. He gets up by using it as a support, and he tells his teammates. "Go! I will try and keep them back!"


    "We cannot let you!" says Radu who''s holding the injured Alin.


    "Don''t worry! I would be a problem for me. Besides. I had the chance to do something amazing." says Anakin preparing to face six zombies who are coming from behind him. "Force be with all of you, friends!"


    Anakin turned back, and he proceeds to beat the zombies from that highway by using the giant hammer he found on that van. His teammates, who were feeling sad, decided to let the man fighting that wave of zombies by himself. But Claudia, was feeling deeply sorry for Anakin, so she decided to hand her fire-weapons and jumps on Anakin side to fight the upcoming zombies. The rest of the survivors couldn''t do anything, so they let those two fighting the upcoming zombies, who were starting to come from all directions.


    Claudia with Anakin were fighting like crazy by using the construction materials they''ve got. However, Anakin was always telling to Claudia to leave him alone, but she did not listen because she was way too busy to insert the drill into zombie''s head and watch their head spinning as she turned on the thing. When a few litres of blood from zombies came into contact with other zombies, they observed those were eating each other, especially the one who got blood on their clothes.


    "I got it!" says Claudia seeing a few zombies eating each other. "Blood could help us run! Anakin! Did you see that?" she turned to look at Anakin, but she sees Anakin being eaten by a lot of zombies while he was still having the force to use the saw on a few mutants.


    "A-A-A-ANAKIN!" yelled Claudia going with her drill to help Anakin getting out of here, but it was pointless, cause at the moment she managed to take out one zombie, she saw Anakin face, but he found him looking like the rest of those zombies who are now surrounding them.


    Claudia is looking around scared, trembling and feeling hopelessly because nothing would be able to save her by the big amount of zombies who are surrounding her. So, Claudia decided to take out the fork she was having stored in a jacket pocket she is wearing, and it used to stab her own heart. It did a few more times, but it was useless to die by her own hand cause a zombie used his mouth to eat Claudia breasts. She tried to free herself, but it was useless, the zombie cos playing as Anakin jumped on her back, and bite her shoulder. And dies eating by almost seven zombies, including Anakin zombie.


    She looks on the sky, her tears drop from her eyes and then, her eyes shut down, together with her whole body. Claudia has died, surrounded by zombies and a good colleague who helped her to not get bitten, yet she still died.

 From Cluj to Athene - Part 29

    After a while, the last survivors of the group who fled from Romania are encountering a problem, another big problem. A part of plane it is blocking their road to the safety. The only thing that would help them get after this obstacle it is to find the door of this plane, trying to open and leave it. Alina was the one with the idea, so everyone has started to search for the door of this fallen plane who is still burning.


    "I''ve found it!" says Ho Lee to his team. He tries to open the door, but it won''t budge. "Damn it!" he says while he was trying the door with a crowbar he got from Radu. "It won''t budge!"


    "Fuck..." says Klaus seeing a few zombies who are trying to break the plane windows. "We have to find another way!"


    "What?" asks Alina to Klaus. "Why?"


    "Look!" he says Klaus aiming at the plane windows, and everyone is looking at the windows, and Ho Lee was stopping at trying to open the door.


    As soon as Lee saw the zombies who were trying to open the windows, he left the door, and it leaves the plane, in case zombies will manage to push the door of that plane somehow. The team is looking at the windows where a bunch of zombies are hitting the windows with hands, fists and with their heads, but these windows wouldn''t break that easily by these simple hits.


    "What now?" asks Radu to Alina, but she didn''t respond.


    "I have a plan." says Ana after she looked at a few trucks who were close to the plane. "We can try climbing over the plane. And from there we will be trying on foot."


    "Good plan." says Laura about to go first.


    "Wait!" says Radu who''s holding up Alin. "T-There must be another way."


    "Radu." says Alin to his brother. "Let me." he takes out his knife who was stored into a small backpack he is carrying. "I will follow you all.". He proceeded to raise up on his feet, and he did it without any problems, which made everyone shocked by this. "I will follow all of you! Go first, now!"


    The rest of survivors proceeds to climb over the plane by using the vehicles as some kind of ladder. While these survivors were doing these things, Alin was using his knife to kill the zombies and his boxing skill. He managed to put about eight of these creatures down without any problem, even though he got his leg damaged, he was still having the fire inside him which kept him to go on. Soon, Alin proceed to run to those trucks and climb it. He was about to fall the first time, but Radu, who was always on the back of Alin, waiting for him to come next, helped him climb and putting a few zombies down by pushing it or stabbing them with knives.


    After Alin and Radu got to the top of the plane, the rest of these reaming survivors are there, and they are looking at the sky. They see a big black smoke across the city which is Athena. These people are smiling that they are getting closer to their safety, but when they took a look down to see how are things there, the reality has done a harsh hit. Probably thousands of zombies are gathering there, and at the look of it, they might be able to use the vehicles as some kind of bridge to get past this giant wave of zombies.


    ***


    They are running on the vehicles like a child jumping on rocks on a river to reach the other side. Laura is in the front of the group since she is probably one of the most athletic survivors from the group, plus she told a few survivors from that military truck that she used to go to the gym and be a high-schooler member of a gymnastic team. Alina is after Laura, and the other survivors are behind her, trying their hardest to ignore the zombie''s groans, screams and hitting their hands who were trying to grab their legs.


    The narrative has been illicitly obtained; should you discover it on Amazon, report the violation.


    Laura is jumping about two meters from a car to a van. She manages the jumps, and she is looking at her teammates who are after her. She sees one zombie trying to reach her, but it quickly got killed by Klaus who shoot that thing with an arrow. Klaus is behind everyone else, so the shoot was from almost twenty meters far.


    Klaus is running with his crossbow to the vehicle where the rest of the group performed their jump and as soon he got there, he jumped to the van where is the rest of group there. However, as he was about to reach the van, he was close to falling into the zombie''s arms, but he manages to get in the van. He was extremely close to get bitten and have the same fate as his friends.


    "Hah...Hah... That was close." says Klaus exhausted.


    "Ah!" says Laura seeing a zombie who was close to touch her legs, but she manages to free her leg and stomp the hand of that zombie, who was not even reacting when his arm got stomped and cut by Ana who used knife.


    "This creates do not feel any pain." says Ho Lee to the group, and he sees a truck trailer not far away from them. "There would be a good place to rest a bit."


    "No rest." says Alina. "We should keep moving."


    Alina is the first one to jump from the van to another car, who''s a Toyota. And from there, she jumps to a damaged car, who has a zombie driver on the driver seat, and wearing a seat belt. The other people are following Alina''s lead.


    A few moments later, all the survivors from the group who fled from Cluj have made it to that trailer Lee was mentioning earlier, and there, all of them are looking at the indicator who says where they had to move to arrive at Athena. And they also discover that the zombies are starting to became less in this area, which Laura suggests this option.


    "It would be better to walk on the highway."


    "Are you sure?" asks Klaus seeming a bit sceptical. "There aren''t many cars here, but walking may seem a little as exhausting."


    "And what you propose?" asks Alina to Klaus. "Give chances to try and take a car? The chances that we might be getting a working car from here are zero."


    "I know." says Klaus to Alina. "But it is better to risk searching than risking walking to Athena. God knows what we might be encountering there. So it would be better to take a working car from this. Plus we got an injured man with us." he points at Radu who was carrying Alin while he was jumping over cars.


    "D-D-Don''t worr-worry about me." says Radu who''s sweating bullets. "I-I can take this."


    "Radu..." says Alin. "W-We should be stopping this. And try to take a car."


    But before they would be able to say anything else, they suddenly hear a helicopter in the sky. All the survivors are looking on the sky, mesmerized by this thing who they haven''t encountered in such a long time. The entire survivors remaining team tried to shake their hands on the air in order to attract the pilot attention, and it worked, the helicopter proceeds to descend a few meters, and the speaker from the helicopter it is turned on, and the pilot told the survivors in English language.


    "We are not able to get all of you from here! Head to the nearest Port and enter a ship who will leave after two days! I repeat! Head to the nearest Port and enter a ship who will leave after two days!"


    Then, the helicopter gets his door opened, and the survivors thought that they might be rescued for a moment, but the soldier who opened that door, is taking out a rocket launcher, and this made the team almost shit their pants. The entire survivor group jumped from the trailer truck and run from the highway to the Athene, while the soldier are going to bomb this highway infested with zombies and roadblocks.


    As soon as they almost made one hundred meters, an explosion it is happening on the highway, the team turned back, only to see a big black cloud coming out from the highway. The survivors could stay there long because they have to run as fast as they can to the location they have to head. While they are running to the road who''s going to help them arrive in the city, the survivors encountered a few creatures coming after them, but most of them got defeated by survivor''s weapons.

 From Cluj to Athene - Part 30

    Almost one hour later, the team has made it to the centre of Athena, capital of Greece. They are exhausted from all the walking and beating zombies. They are one step closer to the safety, yet it is still so far since the port they wanted to head it is far away from this old and with big value city of Greece.


    Alina, Alin, Radu, Ana, Lee, Klaus and Laura are the only reaming survivors from the big group who were on the airport and on the crash. They were walking so far and had so many deaths in their group, that they made them feeling sad and uneasy.


    The group is walking past a few buildings who were vandalized by this apocalypse. On the road they see a bunch of zombies corpses and skeletons of animals who were eaten by these horrifying creatures. Ana is looking around, and she sees on the road a pistol, she picked it up and handed to Alina who was coming closer to her. While Alina was looking at the clip of this pistol, Ana asked her while she is looking at the bunch of zombies corpse lying around on the streets, building''s roofs and on the interior of buildingsˇ­


    "Do you think the people from that helicopter did that?"


    "Most likely." says Alina to Ana and hands the gun to her. "It is yours."


    "Thanks." says Ana putting the gun in her pants back pocket.


    "Should we rest here?" asks Lee coming to Alina and Ana. "I-I think it is safe here."


    "Yes." says Alina. "We should find a clean building, rest, and we will leave on the next morning." she points at the sky. "The Night is about to come, so we should decide on who will keep the watch?"


    "I''ll do it." says Klaus who''s coming into this conversation with Radu and Alin. "At least let me do it first."


    "Alright." says Alina. "Do you have any complaints?" asks the rest of this survivor group.


    The rest of these survivors replied that they did not have anything against this idea which means they have accepted that Klaus should keep on the watch to this night it is about to come.


    Alina, Ana, Alin, Radu, Lee , Laura and Klaus are entering a building who was once a hotel, and now it is a house who has a lot of zombie corpses lying around on the corridor, blood on the walls and blocked doors who need either a key or they were barricaded from inside.


    If you encounter this story on Amazon, note that it''s taken without permission from the author. Report it.


    Ana it is going to the reception desk and proceed to search for a few keys to the rooms, or a plan of building to help them understand where are the rooms situated and how the capacity it is. Ana finds a few room keys, and she handed to her teammates.


    "Alright, everyone." says Alina to the six remaining survivors. "We are having four room keys, so we must be sleeping two persons on each room, in case something bad is going to happen."


    "Such as?" asks Radu.


    "Probably a zombie coming out here." says Alin to Radu.


    "That." says Alina. "And probably some soldiers like earlier when they took down a member of our team."


    At the moment she said this, everyone was silenced. They have lost some important members from their team on their way here. Eliza, Cassandra, Anakin, Claudia, Ilie and Marcus, all of them... were gone forever and with no turning back to became functional humanoids.


    "I''ll be one who''s staying on the guard on this night." says Klaus to the survivors who fought along one side.


    "And then I will be the next one after four hours." says Alina to the team. "And remember, at the first minute when the sun it is on the sky, we will get into the first vehicle with gas we''ve found, and we get out of here to the Port we have spoken a few more times. Understand?"


    "Yes!" says almost everyone to Alina.


    "Good. Now, Alina and I are going to the room 102."


    Ana raises the key to the room 101 and goes close to Alina side.


    "Radu and Alin are taking room 103." says Alina to Radu and Alin.


    "Sweet." says Radu slapping the hand with Alin.


    "And Klaus with Ho Lee are taking room 102." says Alina to Ho Lee, and then she looks at Klaus.


    "I guess I''ve got the last room." says Laura who''s holding the key of room 203.


    "Yes." says Alina to her.


    "Nice." says Laura and she goes straight to that room, but she takes a kitchen knife from her backpack. "Don''t forget to clean the rooms if you see an infected." says the other survivors.


    Later, everyone from this team is going to their rooms. And Klaus, is sitting on the reception desk, on the chair, and he looks at the working monitors who display the security cameras outside and on the halls of this hotel. He looks at the monitors who show the halls of the first floor, and there he sees Alina, Ana, Radu, Alin and Lee going to their rooms. He then looks at the second floor cameras and there he sees Laura putting one zombie down with the knife she took from the backpack, and she head to the room she took it. He was thinking to go there and help her, but he realizes Laura would be able to take care of herself since she was able to face dozens of zombies since this apocalypse has started.


    Klaus is then looking at other functioning monitors which shows the outside and there he sees only the remains of destruction those creatures let it there. A few damaged cars who were hitting other vehicles, one truck who got through the wall of a Greek restaurant, a few zombie corpses got down and a few bones all around the streets of Athene.

 From Cluj to Athene - Part 31

    On the room where Alin and Radu are going to sleep tonight, Radu tries to move the bed a bit because these two have taken a couple room who has two beds put together. After he moved the beds a bit far from each other, Alin is going to see the bathroom, when he got there, he sees a lot of blood around there, but no sign of corpse or a zombie.


    "What the?" says Alin walking carefully to this small bathroom to inspect the blood there.


    "Whoa." says Radu going along with Alin into this bathroom. "What do you think happened here?"


    "A zombie was most likely entering this room and eat a man or woman."


    "That''s what I think too. Anyway, are you feeling alright?"


    "Yes. It still hurts, but I am getting fine, brother. Besides, this is not the first time I got these injure remember?"


    "Yeah. We''ve had worse fights than this one."


    "It''s crazy, you know? A few days earlier we''re having a Dojo Academy in Romania, and now. We are in Greece, running for a way of transportation to an island."


    "I know right. We never thought this day will ever come, or it will ever be happening in the first place."


    Alin and Radu are barricading the windows of their room because of Alina tip to barricade the windows by using any hard object they are able to find into their rooms. They are using a big table and one TV to block their windows in case a "Climber" might be able to enter this building and eat these two survivors on their sleep.


    After they barricade the windows, they lock the door, got on their beds, and they are preparing for sleep. Radu gets off of his bed to go and turn off the electricity since it was turned on this whole time to help them move the furniture to the window. After that, he gets back to his bed, and starts sleeping.


    Enjoying this book? Seek out the original to ensure the author gets credit.


    ***


    Meanwhile, on the room where Ana and Alina are staying, these two girls are sitting on their beds, doing their inventory on their weapons and supplies they are carrying on their backpacks. Ana is having one revolver, a few packs of biscuits with cacao, and a bottle of two litres who has some fresh water. And Alina, is carrying one revolver and one pistol, two packs of bullets for her revolver, three canned foods, one spoon, a can opener and one flare gun, who only has a single flare. Ana saw that flare gun, and she asks Alina.


    "What is that for?"


    "In case we would''ve been rescued, but as it turns out," she says to Ana, and she makes her hands to put the flare gun back into other backpack together with the other things. "we are going to make our way to the salvation."


    "I see." says Ana who is storing the things from her bed, back to her backpack. "Do you think they are telling the truth?"


    "Who?"


    "The soldiers from the Highway. Do you think they said the truth about the ships ?"


    "It was on the radio and the soldiers from Romania also told us to head to Greece to take an island. Probably they are doing some kind of cheeking to us to earn we will come there and put us on an island."


    "If that would happen, I''d rather hope they will not hire me as a Cashier."


    "You didn''t like that job?"


    "Not the best since I was giving the minimum wage and the boss was always that type of pervert man."


    "Disgusting."


    "I know. But. It is a good thing he died, right? I mean. As soon as the apocalypse it has started, I left the store while I was killing a few of co-workers who we weren''t in the best friends relationships or had any discussion at all. All of us we were afraid of the boss. "


    "I understand." says Alina putting her backpack back on the table. "We should be sleeping now. Tomorrow we will have a long day to the Port."


    "Hey. If when we got to that port, and be to put to our island. Do you think we remain friends?"


    "Of course." says Alina going to turn off the switch. "We will remain friends there and after this apocalypse will disappear."


    Alina turns off the switch, she goes to her bed, gets on it and sleep peacefully after days of terror and running from these creatures called zombies. While Alina was sleeping, Ana was on her bed, she looks on the ceiling and wonders about the things she has done in her daily basis before this disaster came upon billions of human species.

 From Cluj to Athene - Part 32

    Two hours later, everyone from this building which was once a Hotel with happy people it is now a building who shed dozens of litres of blood, corpses of humans, but with six survivors who are sleeping in rooms, and one single survivor, who''s outside this place, with his crossbow prepared for anything he will encounter.


    The survivor, whose name is Klaus, came outside for a smoke. Even though it is apocalypse, Klaus is used to smoke outside instead on an inside of a building like a frat boy. He is not feeling asleep, only sad that he wasn''t able to say goodbye to the dear ones from Germany, and hurt because of Ilie betrayal. He was an important part of the team, and he just flees from them like they were nothing.


    At the time Klaus was about to put out his cigarette he was keeping on a pocket, he sensed someone looking at him. He put his lit cigarette back to his mouth, took the crossbow into his hands and aimed at the direction where he thinks the sound came from. From there, a man who wears a latex suit used in some disturbing videos appear with a "mature girl toy" and walk slowly to that man.


    Klaus is feeling disgusted by this appearance at a late hour. He is aiming his crossbow to that person, and he warned him in English language.


    "If you move one more step I will shoot you!" says in an aggressive tone.


    "You look sexy tonight." says the person stopping and raising his hands. "You want to have ssssome ffffun?"


    Klaus was close to barf when that freak said with a gay voice to him, but he decided to hold it, and continue to aim at that freak.


    "Alright! Stay there, do not do any sound and respond only when I ask, understand?"


    The person only shakes his head. Klaus then, asked the person one of the most crucial question when you meet someone in an apocalypse.


    "Who are you?"


    "I am Rei Harn. A gay stripper from a gay club from London."


    "London? That''s a big distance from here."


    "Oh, well... I was on vacation with my husband who... Who is dead. But he can still be fuckable."


    "Ah, Jesus Christ." mumbles Klaus who is now having an image on his head with that freak violating the zombie. "Listen to me!" says to that man. "I am Klaus from Germany. I came from Romania and I have a team."


    "A team of only boys? How romantic."


    "N-No. You have got to leave us, or else we will make you leave us."


    "Shut up, honey. I am here because you have taken my place. The place I have been fighting for!"


    Unauthorized content usage: if you discover this narrative on Amazon, report the violation.


    "Y-You have killed all of these zombies?" asks Klaus to that man in a latex suit who is still having his arms raised up.


    "Of course not. This was the work of the Army. My husband and I were just spectating, and these bastards. Have. Have taken my husband!" he says feeling sad and about to cry at any moment, then he looks angrily at Klaus. "Now. You are taking my house! The only thing who remains tied to my memory!?"


    Rei was about to take out his pistol to shoot Klaus, but he wasn''t able to be faster than Klaus who shot an arrow who pierced the man in latex suit head, and made him fall on his back to the street with tons of blood and corpses. Klaus was then. Walking closely to that corpse in latex suit, only to retrieve his arrow.


    When he took his arrow back from the head of that crazy dude, his curiosity made him to took the corpse mask off, but when he did that, the latex man became a zombie, and he was close to bite Klaus, if it wasn''t for Laura who came at the perfect time, and shoot that thing head.


    Klaus was breathing heavily as he was tossing the corpse of the latex man on the ground, again. He turned back to Laura, and he thanks her. But then, Laura is aiming her gun to the head of Klaus, and this shocked him.


    "Do not tell anyone, alright?"


    "What?" asks Klaus feeling confused.


    "I am leaving. By myself."


    "W-Why?... Did we do something wrong?"


    "No." says Laura who is still aiming her pistol to the head of Klaus. 2I-I do not feel... I do not feel great."


    Then, Laura shows a bite mark on her left arm by rolling up her sleeve. Klaus it is shocked by this revelation of Laura, and he is looking at her eyes. He observes that her pupils were having colour red, as those of zombies they have seen so far. She is rolling down her sleeve from the blouse, and she asks Klaus.


    "You see?"


    "H-How did it happened?" asks Klaus to her.


    "There was zombie under the bed I was about to sleep. He bit my arm and I couldn''t do anything to prevent this."


    "Bu-But why you should go now? R-Right when we are close to the salvation."


    "Klaus..."


    "What?"


    "Could you please let me leave? I-I do not want to provoke trouble to this group."


    "I-I understand." says Klaus looking down, and then he looks up on her with his eyes closed. "Go. And I am sorry... I wasn''t able to protect you."


    "It is not your fault, Klaus. These actions could happen to everyone." she looks back to the Hotel where the rest of her teammates who are sleeping, she hands the gun to Klaus, and she kisses him on his left cheek on the face. "Goodbye, Klaus."


    "Goodbye, Laura." says Klaus looking at Laura who''s leaving this area by going into the south, unarmed and without any supplies.


    Klaus cries while Laura is walking away from their group. He understands that Laura being bitten by a zombie would mean dead, and she will most likely came back as one in a few more hours, so it is a good decision she left now, than waiting until morning, when she will fully become a zombie.


    After a few more minutes, Klaus is looking at the surrounding corpses. There are so many corpses laying on the street that his mind was started to provoke some kind of hallucinations like there were his buddies corpses and not unknown humanoids who were living in good or bad terms.


    He goes back to the reception desk of the Hotel, he tries to wash the tears who were dropped from his eyes with his hands, and then, when he did that, he looks on the working monitor, only to see a Laura on a security camera walking down the stairs so normal. This walk made Klaus feeling terrified because this woman was a good member of this team, and seeing her going down like that, it feels bad.


    Klaus does himself a favour, and he closes the monitor to that camera who shows Laura leaving the area in a slow rhythm, and he looks at the other monitors while his tears are coming out from his eyes.


    "Why does everyone around me has to die?" he asks himself.

 From Cluj to Athene - Part 33

    After two hours, it was Alin turn to guard this Hotel while everyone was sleeping. Klaus was the first one, and he is heading to the room where Laura was supposed to be sleeping. But before he was about to head to his room, he told Alin what was happening to Laura, and this made Alin feeling sad. He didn''t have much time to interact with Laura after all, but this has made him feeling sad that somebody has died again, and he wasn''t there to see if he can do something.


    A few minutes later, after Klaus got to his room to sleep, Alin is staying on the reception desk, looking at the working monitors to see if someone will come at them. While Alin was looking at a monitor who shows a shop nearby, he sees the lights of that shop being turned up. This has made him abandon the desk and head to that store with a knife hidden on a vest he bought along with it because it is already cold outside.


    He walks on the other side of the street without any inconvenience. When he got closer to the store, he could hear a few people there speaking in Greek language, but Alin couldn''t understand what they are speaking, but considering the raised tone, this doesn''t sound good. Alin stays to lean on the building where the people are fighting over something there. Before he would be about to think about his next move, he heard a groan coming not far from him. Alin sees the zombies is crawling to him, so he quickly took the action to stab the creature head. He successfully did it, and when he did that, he hears some footsteps coming closer.


    Alin is thinking fast, and he enters the next building to that store, who has all the windows broken. After he enters the building, he is hiding into the building dark sides, and he waits for that group of survivors to leave him. While he is hiding into the dark, stays in a crouch position and looks at these two survivors who are inspecting the body of that corpse. They noticed it has a knife on the head, which means Alin didn''t manage to take the knife from that head.


    They are looking around to see if they aren''t close to that hunter who managed to took out that zombie. Alin was able to see those hunters, thanks to the street lights who are still working. He sees the hunters are carrying crowbars and not guns. He also sees these two survivors are wearing hoodies with Pitbull singer logo.


    One of the survivor is looking at the building who has lights on. The survivor points at that building, and the other nods his head. They are heading to that building which is the Hotel of this gang. They cross the street and proceed to head to the front door. Alin is leaving the hideout, and he is following those two survivors. When he passed next to that zombie corpse he killed, he took the knife from the head, clean the knife by using his pants and walks slowly to those two survivors.


    As soon as one of the unknown survivor opened the building main door, they looked around to see how is this place looking. One of them whistles, as the other says something indescribable in Greece for Alin to understand. He immediately gets into the building, without alerting the two survivors, and he is at the back of a survivor who is having on his jeans pocket a pistol. And this gave Alin a plan.


    He immediately put his plan on execution.


    First, he takes the gun, then he takes the guy neck by using his right arm, while on the left one is pointing the gun on the survivor head. The second one turned around, and he is trembling as he sees his comrade being hold hostage, right in front of his eyes. That dude who''s held hostage was trying to free himself, but the grip of Alin was too strong for him.


    "Who are you? And what do you want?" asks Alin in English.


    This tale has been unlawfully lifted from Royal Road. If you spot it on Amazon, please report it.


    "P-Please. Do not shoot." says the survivor who isn''t held hostage by Alin in English. "W-We... um... We were trying to search for a new base, since the Army wiped out most of the zombies from this place."


    "Who are you people?"


    "I-I am Ajax, and my friend who''s held hostage it is Angelino."


    "Get me out, brother." says Angelino in Greek language to his friend who is talking with Alin.


    "I will." says Ajax to his teammate into this apocalypse, and he looks back at Alin. "Listen. We do not want any trouble. If you let us leave we will never come back to this Hotel. Alright?"


    "Sounds good." says Alin pushing the man to Ajax, who''s catching him, and he looks at the gun, he checks the clip, and he notices he doesn''t have any ammo. "You guys sure obeys the laws even on time like this." he hands the gun to Ajax. "You two leave this place, and search for another hideout. Understand?"


    "Y-Yes, sir." says Ajax to Alin.


    As soon as Alin thought the things are going to get normal, Angelino decides to jump close to Alin and try to punch his face, but Alin managed to block the punch of Angelino by using his left arm to grab it and then pushing the man. Alin was trying to talk some sense into that man, but he couldn''t because he takes a book, and he is about to use it on Alin. Ajax was not even trying to stop his friend because he is afraid that something might be going to happen to him.


    But Alin, who knows a lot about combat fights, he managed to do a hard kick on the man liver, who is making him fall into his knees and proceed to vomit the food he was most likely eating it a while ago. Ajax is looking terrified at Alin, and this made him to go to Angelino, took him, and run away with him from this place. Alin was looking at them while they were running, with a serious look on his face which can show that he is truly capable of beating Angelino so hard, he would love to be eaten by zombies.


    "Hey. Are you okay?" asks Radu leaving his room and coming down to see how is brother doing.


    "Yea." says Alin looking at his brother who is dressed in his pyjamas. "you have trouble sleeping?"


    "Yeah... I think I heard some fighting going down here."


    "There was one. Two survivors were trying to raid our beds and took some supplies. But I managed to scare bot of them off."


    "Amazing." says Radu to his brother impressed. "What did you use on them?"


    "That hostage technique, and one of them was trying to hit me back, but I managed to block them and put that one down in a matter of seconds."


    "Cool for a guy with a broken leg."


    Alin is looking at his leg, he looks carefully at him as he was raising his lower part of the pants to see the injury. It doesn''t look that bad, but it made Alin feeling in a good spirit of fighting. Radu looks around him and he asks his brother.


    "So. How many hours until we will leave?"


    "About one and in half." responds Alin looking at the working clock from the right wall which shows the hours all around Eastern Europe.


    "Still can''t believe this is happening. You, I, a few more survivors, are fighting against zombies. I never thought this would ever be real."


    "Same." says Alin feeling sad that it has come to this, even though they are somehow grateful this is happening.


    They are going to a couch into this Hall or Reception. Radu sits there, while Alin is trying to turn on the Plasma TV from the wall. It worked when he turns on, but it shows a live broadcast on Greek language. Both of them haven''t learned Greek at school, or never tried to learn Greek. Alin decides to try and surf through many channels by using the buttons from the TV.


    A few moments later, Alin manages to get hold of a channel who broadcast something in a language they are fully understanding, Romanian. The channel is telling this message.


    "For whoever it is still alive and not infected. Head to the closest Military dropouts on the map, wait there, and head into one of the vehicles who will be transporting the survivors to a safe place. For whoever who doesn''t want to attempt this, we strongly suggest seeking hideout from the big cities before they will be bombed. Hiding in forests and on the countrysides would be pointless since this virus it is spreading rapidly. I repeat, seek the closest Military dropouts from the map, they will help anyone to flee from these infected countries."


    And on the TV is showing a map of the infected cities from Europe. The entire continent of Europe is red, which means these meat eaters have managed to get a hold of the humanity from Europe.

 From Cluj to Athene - Part 34

    "For whoever it is still alive and not infected. Head to the closest Military dropouts on the map, wait there, and head into one of the vehicles who will be transporting the survivors to a safe place. For whoever who doesn''t want to attempt this, I suggest seeking hideout from the big cities before they will be bombed."


    And this last sentence of the message has made both Alin and Radu shocked. On the TV it shows the safe zones where the military is awaiting them. It also shows the location of the ports close to the place where they are heading. Then, it shows a red circle which shows the places where the bombs are going to be thrown. Alin and Radu are looking scared at their country because it shows the province where they were leaving before all of this.


    "T-They are doing it?" asks Radu to his brother.


    Alin confirms only in nodding his head.


    "There has been only three cities in Romania who were bombed at this moment," says the news reporter on the live broadcast. "Bucure?ti, Bra?ov and Constan?a were the cities who got blowned up by almost one hundred bombs. All our prayers are going to the reaming survivors who are able to still live after those bombings, and we are deeply sorry for the survivors who died there, and on the monuments we have destroyed by doing this action." then, the room of where the live broadcast is going on proceed to get some electrical problems for a few seconds, and then it came back, but only when the news reporter screams and runs away from the desk, while a zombie is running after the news reporter. "SOMENOE KILL THOSE THINGS!"


    Then, the broadcast gets blocked, and then, the TV gets closed by Alin, who is left speechless, together with Radu. They are looking at each other, and then both of them are sitting on the couch and look on the lights from the windows of this building.


    ***


    One hour later, Alina and Ana are coming to the first floor, where Radu and Alina are surfing through channels of the TV, again, hoping they will be seeing something similar to the one earlier who got closed because of a zombie who invaded the room. Alina asked Alin why is watching at TV, and they told them the reason why they are doing this, and this made both of them frighted by this bombing information.


    "My gosh." says Ana to all of these people. "We are lucky we managed to escape this situation."


    "Right." responds Alina to Ana. "But we also got another problem. With the fact that anytime a bombing could happen here. And we have to wake everyone up."


    "I''ll go and wake those three." says Alin to girls and his brother.


    Alin is taking the stairs to the upper floors, and he is heading to the rooms where Laura is sleeping. Being used to be an "alarm" in the morning, thanks to his brother who sleeps until 9 or 10 when they were having classes early at 12 or when they were in the first three years of high school.


    He first knocked on Laura''s door. Then, after he got no response, Alin knocked again and this time was calling her to come from the room. And, before he was about to enter the room of her, Klaus opened the door, with his backpack on and awake.


    "Oh, good morning." says Klaus toward Alin. "We are already heading out?"


    "Yeah." says Alin. "It looks like you are already equipped."


    "Just the necessary things I needed it." he says while he was leaving the room he slept on this night.


    "Hey. Where is Laura?" says Alin after he did a look into the room where Laura was supposed to sleep and there he found Klaus.


    "S-She has left early. By herself."


    "Oh. I see." says Alin surprised to Klaus. "She could''ve at least awaited for us."


    "She left right when you were about to take your shift."


    You could be reading stolen content. Head to Royal Road for the genuine story.


    "I understand."says Alin who''s closing the door of this room. "However, did she tell you something else besides of her leaving?"


    "... Nothing." lies Klaus. "She only said "Good luck!" and "We will see there.". Things like that."


    "Aha." says Alin going downstairs to the floor where Lee is still sleeping.


    When Alin got to that floor, he sees Ho Lee leaving his room, holding his backpack and with a new weapon, a sniper rifle. Alin asked Ho Lee where he got that weapon from, which Lee told him.


    "I found it into this room, together with a dead man. He probably used this weapon as a suicide method since all of his brains were blown up in the bathroom and brains components were on the ceiling and walls."


    "I feel sorry for the man." says Alin to Ho Lee. "Did he got a bite on his arm or somewhere else?"


    "I didn''t checked him, but seeing that all the parts of his brain were blown up, this means that he would not be able to transform into one of those creatures from outside."


    "You are probably right. We haven''t seen a zombie reanimate from the dead."


    "You mean that he was killed, then came back to life?" asks Ho Lee who didn''t manage to get what Alin said because his English it isn''t that good.


    Alin only nodded his head, and Ho Lee looked carefully at the body of that man.


    "I hope so." says Ho Lee. "We should leave."


    "Yeah..."


    Alin and Ho Lee are leaving this room, and they are heading downstairs where the others are waiting for them. While they were heading to the first floor via downstairs, they hear a helicopter coming from outside. All of these six survivors are coming outside this building, they are looking on the sky and sees there the same helicopter they were encountering yesterday on the highway.


    "Attention fellow survivors!" says the soldier at the speaker who''s coming from the helicopter who is flying at a low distance. "To anyone listening from this. This city will be soon bombed. In only three hours, nothing will remain from this city. Proceed to the Port of Piraeus to take the last ship who will deliver all of you to one of the islands own by the Army of Greece! We have food, supplies, shelter, weapons, guards and healthcare! I repeat! Head to Port Piraues as soon as anyone alive from here can, before the explosion will be set off!"


    The team of now four males and two women are taking their supplies and proceed to walk out from this building and head to the Port of Piraues. Luckily, Ana managed to find a map at this hotel who shows her the area of this city. She also marked the map with a red mark the area they have to go, and with a green one the fastest road she could find.


    "Watch out!" says Alin aiming his gun at a zombie who is climbing a building, he hit, and it falls on the street. "These things can even climb buildings?"


    "We have encountered a few of them, brother." says Radu to him.


    "Right... But we should be more careful." says Alina to those two. "And do not provoke much noise. God knows how many of these creatures are into this city."


    They are walking in a fast peace and kill any moving zombies on their way by using only their knives or a weapon who couldn''t make this much noise to alert other zombies. But, when they did take the corner of the street, all of them stopped and looked shocked because in front of them, there is a huge wave of zombies who are looking burned and look at the buildings or some who are eating other zombie corpse.


    "Shit." says Ana while all six of them are hiding from these things. "We have to find another road." she looks on the map and let the other survivors look at it. Ana points the position where they are now, thanks to a sign who told them they are at Panton. "If we aren''t able to take a right, I think crossing this street and taking the other right might help us."


    "And if not?" asks Alina to Ana.


    "Then. We will have to make a way. Or use the highway."


    "Ugh. Highways." says Radu. "I hate them."


    "Same here." says Ho Lee to Radu. "But what if we can try to take a working car?"


    "It will be pointless." says Alina. "There are plenty of zombies here, and a car will attract too much noise."


    "But what if we take a car, and then we stop at approximately 100 or 500 meters from the Port? Plus, in the speaker they say that the last ship will be leaving in three hours. I''d rather not risk on this situation."


    "I-I agree with Lee." says Ana to Alina which makes her feeling surprised by this. "Taking a car might the only option we might have to arrive there sooner than walk a long distance through waves of zombies."


    "Really? You want to take a car?" asks Alina to Lee and Ana. "This might be a bad idea."


    "We have to try." says Klaus to these survivors, and he looks back at a van who is having his keys there. "In fact, we might be lucky on this one." he goes to that car, he opens it and takes the keys from there, to show it to his teammates. "Who''s driving?"


    "I will." says Ana raising her hand.


    "Good choice." he says Klaus passing the keys to Ana.


    "Get in." says Ana to his team and all of them are getting into this red van.


    Alina, Alin, Radu and Lee are sitting on the back of the van, who is area used for transportation. There are also plenty of different things such as a couch, boxes with clothes, and other things. This one van was probably owed by a gypsy who was "collecting" different things found here. Klaus is the one staying next to where Ana seats, and he is a submachine gun, he opens up the window of the van, and he is preparing to shoot in case a zombie will jump on them. Ana was telling Klaus to close the window, at first he didn''t want to do that, but after some talk, he closes the window and stay still.

 From Cluj to Athene - Part 35

    Ana pushes with her leg the acceleration pedal and in just a matter of few seconds, the vehicle leaves the parking place, and it leaves this by ramming into dozens of zombies who weren''t able to do anything against this. While Ana was driving through zombies, she heard a shoot, which immediately looks at Klaus, but she sees him that he hasn''t done anything. She then focuses on her road, thinking that the shoot was probably her imagination.


    After the van was close to leave the street, another shoot could be heard, and this time Klaus was the one who heard it, and he looks at Ana.


    "Did you hear that?"


    "Y-Yeah." says Ana continuing to drive this van to a street with dozens of corpses and damaged cars. "It was a shoot right?"


    "At first I thought my imagination was playing dump on me, but it must be real. Someone is still into this city."


    "Should we search for them?"


    "We cannot risk it, you know. Now focus on the road."


    "Okay." says Ana to Klaus feeling a little sad since they weren''t going to save someone from this disaster.


    Ana is driving the van into a street where there are lots of building who are still on fire, human and zombie corpses on the streets of Athena, a few cars who were working perfectly, and one zombie who is crawling out of a store. They were ignoring that creature because right now, their mission it is to go at Port, not slaying every zombie they are encountering.


    After a while of driving, Ana is about to come close to the entrance of this Port. She sees the entrance it is blocked and a man who is wearing soldier uniforms, a helmet and a medico-chirurgical mask, leaves the room who is administrating the entrance, and he is making a sign to the van to stop in front of the barrier. Ana stops the car there, and then, before she would''ve been able to say anything, the man is aiming at the head of Ana with one of those thermometers who were mostly used back then when Coronavirus was a "threat" to this world.


    "What is that for?" asks Ana in English to the soldier who took her temperature, but the soldier only noted the temperature on a notebook, then he goes to check Klaus temperature.


    "I-I am alright?" asks Klaus in English after the soldier was taking his temperature. "We can finally go in?"


    "You two aren''t from here?" asks the man in Greek language to these two survivors. "Do you have more of you in the van?"


    "Huh?" asked Alina. "I''m sorry, but I do not speak Greek."


    "Oh. Wait here." says the soldier in a broken language. "I''ll. Come. Back." and the soldier leaves, running to another soldier, not far from their location.


    The narrative has been taken without permission. Report any sightings.


    Then, Alina is leaving the back of the van, and when she did that, the other three boys are following her steps.


    "Alright." says Alina going to Ana where she is standing on the driver seat. "What is going on?"


    "The soldier has come to check on our temperature," replies Ana opening the window of the car door. "and now he has gone to call someone. Probably to help him translate us."


    "I see." says Alina. "And why did he check your temperature?"


    "No clue." says Ana, and then Klaus says the same thing.


    "Is this disease like coronavirus?" asks Ho Lee.


    "I don''t think so." replies Ana. "If it was this, then we wouldn''t have to face these things."


    "But what if it mutates higher than the last times?"


    "But still, no virus known to the world would be able to do this."


    "Hey!" says the soldier from earlier coming with another one who is holding an assault rifle. "Who are you four? Identify yourself!"


    The second soldier was about to aim at them, but that soldier from earlier stops him by telling something in Greece, then he tells another thing, which he goes closer to Ana, and he asks her in Romanian language.


    "Who are you two?"


    "My name is Ana, and the man it is Klaus." says Ana to that soldier, and he noted those things on the clipboard.


    "Aha. You two have encountered zombies in your way here?"


    "A lot." says Alina.


    "I do not speak with you, ma''am." replies the soldier to Alina, and he turns around to Ana. "Are these four people with you?"


    "Yes."


    "They had the temperature checked?"


    "N-No."


    "Aha. Flavin." says the soldier to the one with a thermometer, and he told him in Greek. "Come and check the temperature on these four people.


    "I understand." says the soldier coming to those four survivors and beginning to check their temperatures.


    While the man was checking the condition of these four survivors, the soldier continues to ask Ana some more questions.


    "So you have encountered a lot. How many types have you seen?"


    "Types?" asks Ana. "There are types of these creatures?"


    "A lot of them. The people have told us they encountered normal type and crawler type."


    "We have seen zombies who can climb buildings, jump buildings and one who eats zombies."


    "What?" asks the soldier who was putting the questions to Lee. "You have encountered Undead ? How do they look like?"


    "They were pale, probably green or red eyes and when they were eating a zombie corpse, they were regenerating."


    "It''s a good thing you six survived." says the soldier after a while of being silent due to that type of zombies. "We''ve only had six reaming seats, and your data about your encountering will be valuable. Now, where are you six coming from?"


    "All of us we are coming from Cluj-Napoca, Romania."


    "You six are coming from Cluj?" asks the soldier surprised. "Impressive."


    The soldier who checked the temperature on the rest of the survivors is telling the details of the other one in Greek. That soldier replies in Greek, and both of them are looking at the six survivors.


    "Your friend over there," points the soldier at Alin, who is speaking to Ana. "Is he bitten?"


    "No." responds Ana. "He got into an accident. On the way here, he got treated. His injury seems to disappear."


    "I see." says the soldier feeling glad it is not a zombie bite. "You can enter the docks. In about one hour the ship will leave this area. You better prepare for the evacuation, understand?"


    "Yes." replies all the six survivors.


    After a few seconds, the van enters this area, and all the six survivors are heading to a room where the personal told them to go. There, they will have to send their belongings to the Army.

 From Cluj to Athene - Part 36

    The time has finally come for our group of six remaining survivors. After a lot of hardships they were going through on the last three days, they managed to arrive at the safe areas, which are known by the Army as Departure points because this place will bring the survivors into a new home where the Army will tell them they will be able to live in peace and without a worry in the world because they are the ones who will go and eradicate every single zombie out there.


    These six survivors are in the front door of a room with Greek letters on the window, which means Deposit Room. The team knows what''s this room, and they are about to let their supplies they gathered so long in order to join and safe world where Military will have them covered. However, there is one member of the group who is feeling uneasy about this decision.


    "Do you think this is a good idea?" asks Ho Lee to his comrades he fought alongside with.


    "What do you mean?" asks Klaus to him, and all of his group members are turning around to him.


    "Well, they are tasking all of our things, and they promise us a new lifestyle. That seems a little sketchy, doesn''t it? I mean, in many zombie movies, the army gets wiped out easily. And in most of them, where the army survives, they are actually evil. What if they are turning up to be like the ones from earlier who shot Cassandra?"


    This made a few survivors from the group speechless. They are feeling frustrated of this soldier''s way of acting.


    "We have to do it." says Alina to Ho Lee. "Otherwise we will have to survive into a city who will be bombed pretty soon."


    "Is even the bombing true?" asks Ho Lee at Alin and Radu because they were the one who managed to see that broadcast on the TV.


    "Yes." says Alin. "They even show a picture of the city Pite?ti reaming after the bombing. Hell, they even took down Vidraru dam to be sure these creatures will never be able to walk."


    "The biggest dam in Romania?" asks Ana surprised. "The zombies there are truly gone now."


    And it is true because Vidraru Dam has stored so much water, that if it will be breaking, there would be the biggest flood Arge? has ever seen since twenty centuries when Romania was still under Communist influence.


    Unauthorized duplication: this narrative has been taken without consent. Report sightings.


    "Are you not trusting them?" asks Radu toward Lee.


    "In my opinion, not much."


    Then, a military woman opens the door, and she told them in English to come into this room and put their things there, then to sign some papers. They entered one by one, and first was Alina.


    ***


    A few minutes later, the team of these six survivors have stored all the items they were gathering on this long road to arrive here, now they will have to head to the ship where they will be transported to one of the islands far from this country. While this group was walking to that ship, a soldier comes to them, and he looks at Lee.


    "Are you Asian?"


    "Y-Yeah." says Ho Lee surprised by this question because he is coming from China.


    "Do you speak Chinese?"


    "Of course I do." says ho Lee in Chinese language which made the soldier and the other members of his gang surprised, but then he replies the same sentence, but in English and this made the soldier feeling good.


    "Alright." says the soldier in English language. "I need you to come with me."


    "For what?"


    "We require a translator to speak with a ship coming from China."


    "Really?"


    "Really if you believe it." says the soldier to Ho Lee who seems astonished by this information. "Now, follow me."


    "Alright, sir."


    Lee and that soldier are heading to a small building, while the other survivors are walking to the ship stairs. While they were climbing the stairs, all of them are taking a look back because of someone horn. It is a military truck, and from there, after it stopped, a lot of other survivors like them are leaving the back side of the truck. They were wondering, who are those guys and why they were brought here instead of running to this location like them. Alina was mostly the one who thought about this.


    So, she decided to try her luck by walking to those people, but then, as soon as she was close to step out of the ladder, one soldier stops her from moving, and he says in Greek language to stop at what she is doing. Alina was trying to tell him in English she wanted to see what is going on, and the man, who understands a bit of English is telling her:


    "Um... Those people," he points at the group of survivors from the truck they were delivered. "T-They are. Going to be... Checked... Alright?"


    "Yeah... But why they were brought here with a car?" asks Alina that soldier in English, and the man is looking at the group of new survivors, and he tells her.


    "Um... They called... Us."


    "You can take them?"


    "I-If they are... on a radius of... um... twenty kilometres."


    Alina seeing the man struggle with his not so good English, she was about to try to talk to other soldier, but the one warned her to not go farther, he even aimed his assault rifle on Alina head. And at this point, Alina turned back and entered the ship.

 From Cluj to Athene - Part 37

    A few moments later, into the ship, Alina, Ana and two other women''s have been put into a room with four bed-bunks, two desks and one working refrigerator with supplies like salami, yogurt and any other food who are kept on the refrigerator. Alina is looking at Ana, and she is asking her.


    "How are you feeling?"


    "Great." says Ana staying on her bed which is next to Alina. "There could''ve been a TV here, or a charger for my phone."


    "You have brought your phone with you?"


    "Yes. Although, it has zero battery. And I also took Cassandra phones after she... got killed..."


    "Oh. I see."


    "Alina. Can I ask you a question?"


    "Sure."


    "Have you ever thought about the possibility of people living after they were infected?"


    "Where did that come from?"


    "I was thought about it. You know, in movies, people are chopping their hands or legs to stop the infection."


    "I haven''t seen many movies about this."


    "No? Anyway, if the things applied to movies are true, do you think this might happen in real life?"


    "Um. I don''t know. Probably."


    "Aha... What if Laura was bitten?"


    "What?" asks Alina not seeing that one coming. "What do you mean bitten?"


    "Think about it. Why isn''t she here? She wished as much as we do to come here. What is the reason she abandoned us at the last moment? And I haven''t seen her on this ship."


    "Neither I have. But you probably got a point." Alina is leaving her bed, and she looks at Ana. "I am heading outside."


    "Okay. Be careful."


    "I will." says Alina before she left the room and took the left then goes straight on the hallway to the door leading to the deck of the ship.


    After almost one minute, Alina opens the hatch and got to the deck area, where a few survivors are staying there, some of them having ripped clothes, crying on the corners for some reasons and there is one kid who sits alone. Alina saw that kid and he goes to him. It looks like a girl, probably at the age of nine, she though Alina at first. The girl is having a lot of bruises on her face and some on the arms of the T-shirt. Alina is looking at the girl, and the girl if scared by Alina presence.


    Stolen content warning: this content belongs on Royal Road. Report any occurrences.


    "Hello?" says Alina in Romanian language, and the girl, is looking relieved at her.


    "Are you speaking Romanian?" asks the little girl in Romanian.


    "Yes." responds Alina. "Where are you coming from?"


    "G-Greece. My parents moved here three weeks ago..."


    "And? Are they here?"


    The little girl cries, and then she looks straight into Alina eyes.


    "They are go-gone. They have left me... L-Left me al-alone. O-On Th-this ship."


    While the little girl was sobbing and crying like a fountain, Alina hugs the small girl, and she tells her that everything will be alright, and she will try to find them. Even though Alina doesn''t know much about this small girl, she can be certain that her parents are already long gone from this world and in their zombie forms.


    Alina is looking around, she sees a soldier standing there still, with a submachine gun on his arms, he goes with the little girl to that man, and he asks him a question in English language.


    "Do you know where are the parents of this little girl?"


    "No." says the soldier in English after a while he analysed the girl. "I have never seen this girl here before. She must''ve been coming from the truck earlier. Go and talk with Cadet Truman. He is the one dealing with survivors and grouping them. He can be found on the accommodation part of the ship." he points at the windows where a few soldiers and sealers are staying there and discussing.


    Alina takes the little girl hand, and she is heading there to see if she can talk to that man called Cadet Truman.


    ***


    Meanwhile, on a room designed for medical emergencies, Alin is having an inspection to his wound at his leg. There are two doctors and a nurse looking at the wound who got recently a few stitches from the man who lives in the Gas Station. The group of medics is feeling curious about the man who was able to do that, but unfortunately, they were speaking Greek and Alin didn''t know Greek at all, and even if he knew some English, the doctors there aren''t able to speak it or understand it. So, Alin was just getting checked by people who aren''t speaking the same language as him.


    About five minutes later, the doctors are calling a translator to them, who''s speaking Romanian which is extremely convenient.  Alin is telling that translator all the things he endured of the following days to come here, from their departure from Cluj Napoca to their arrival at Athena. The doctors were astonished by Alin and his friend''s journey, and one doctor asked the translator a question, and the translator asked Alin in Romanian.


    "Have you encountered any zombie types?"


    "There were a few," says Alin to the translator which he replies to the doctors in Greek. "Some were jumping very high, others were eating other zombies and there were others who were climbing. I mostly saw those while I was in Bulgaria and especially on the highway to Athena."


    The translator say all the things Alin told in Romanian in Greek language and all the doctors doesn''t look that excited since they have probably seen those types of zombies or described by other survivors on this ship.


    "How many people you have lost?" asks the translator. "On this run of yours?"


    "I think there were almost ten on our group. But there were a lot when the plane has crashed in Bulgaria." replies Alin to the translator, which he told to the doctors in Greek.


    Alin sees a doctor noting something on a clipboard, then he decides to ask the translator what they are writing, and the translator told them it is some details they needed it for the time when they will be getting into the islands.


    After a few minutes of Alin giving a few details about him, the doctors are leaving Alin alone, and the translator is also tagging along with those doctors. After they left, Alin is staying on his bed, he is looking at his leg bandaged and cleaned up by those nice doctors. He looks on the small window on his room where he could see the sky starting to turn gray which means the rain is about to come, sooner or later. But Alin has other plan, he wanted to relax so decided to nap, just like other people from this room.

 From Cluj to Athene - Part 38

    On the room where the Captain of this ship and a few soldiers are about to make the final preparations for their leave from this Port, Alina and the little girl are knocking on the door of this ship, and one of the soldiers are opening the door. When they opened the door a soldier is aiming his rifle and asks Alina in English language.


    "Who are you? Identify yourself."


    "My name is Alina, and this little girl needs help." responds Alina to those soldiers. "She couldn''t find her parents on this ship, and one soldier told me to come here and talk with someone named Cadet Truman."


    That soldier is lowering his weapon on the ground, he looks around into this ship, and he calls Cadet Truman to come here. The soldier who''s named Truman came, and he looks at Alina, then at the small girl. He looks at Alina not so interested and asks her.


    "What is the reason you have come here?"


    "I wanted to find out where are the parents of this girl?" asks Alina, and she looks at the little girl who is shy and starts to hide on the back of Alina as soon as Cadet Truman laid his eyes on her.


    "What is the name of this girl?" asks Cadet Truman to Alina.


    Alina is looking at the little girl she is holding her hand, the girl is looking at Alina, then at the Cadet. The little girl is telling the Cadet her name:


    "Catalina... Dobrocea Catalina."


    "Nice to meet you, Catalina." says Cadet Truman to the little girl. "I''ll be looking on it."


    Cadet Truman is going to a computer, he stays there for a bit, types a few letters on there, and checks the tabs. After a few minutes, Cadet Truman is turning around to Catalina and is telling her the news.


    "I''m sorry, but your parents have left this ship."


    "What?" asks Alina in English because Truman it is speaking English to them.


    "They were breaking three important rules established by us: stealing, violence and bad language. We had them thrown away from our ship."


    Alina is looking at the little girl, and she realizes that the girl wasn''t able to understand the whole thing Cadet Truman has said. So, Alina decides to tell her the truth in Romanian language and this has made her feel bad, but relieved for some reasons. She looks at Alina, hugs her and Alina asks her a question:


    "You wanted to go and eat something?"


    "...Yeah." says Catalina feeling a little better.


    Alina is thanking the soldiers, especially Cadet Truman, and all two of them are going to the Cafeteria area to eat. While they were walking Alina is holding Catalina''s hand as this gesture might seem to become something big and special in the future.


    Stolen from its rightful place, this narrative is not meant to be on Amazon; report any sightings.


    ***


    Meanwhile, on a room where Klaus and Ho Lee were sent to stay, these two are taking bunk-beds. Klaus is sleeping on the top, and Ho Lee Fuc is sleeping on the bottom one.


    "Lee." asks Klaus staying on his bed while Lee is on a desk and looks at the newspaper he found in that van.


    "Yeah?" asks Lee putting the newspaper which shows as the main title in English "Is The End?!".


    "Are you going to find a way to go back to your country?"


    "Yes."


    "Can I come along with you?"


    "What for?"


    "I don''t know. I j-just don''t like staying around too much, you know?"


    "I can somehow get it. But, why aren''t you trying to go back to your country?"


    "It is because... The things that happen lately in Germany, might be the reason which caused all of this infection."


    "What do you mean?" asks Lee looking at Klaus who decides to raise from his bed and looks at Lee.


    "Three months ago, before I came to Romania, my city, which was build close to a nuclear generator, had an accident, an accident which resulted into an explosion, doing a lot of casualties."


    "I heard about this one. Is it because of those nuclear people are turning into monsters?"


    "Probably. Because people from that area have started to get a lot of new disease. Mostly of these people died, and others lived without any complications... If that it is true then those who have lived might''ve been immortal to this disease."


    "Yeah... Probably is good said. As now, we do not know much to think about this disease yet."


    Those two are looking at the door, which is suddenly getting opened, and there he enters a soldier who is looking Asiatic, almost like Ho Lee. The man is looking at Ho Lee, and he asks him in Chinese language.


    "Are you coming from China?"


    "Yes." replies Ho Lee in Chinese.


    "Bad news." says the soldier to Ho Lee. "The whole country is already blocked and most of the parts there are infested with zombies. I don''t think the only solution to resolve that problem is to bomb the whole country."


    "What?" asks Ho Lee feeling panicked and trying to take all of this information. "T-They are going to what?"


    "Bomb the whole country." responds the soldier to Ho Lee not showing any emotion. "It is sad, but this is the only reason to achieve freedom for the people there."


    "What if they aren''t able to survive?!" yells Ho Lee getting up from the desk and looking furiously at the soldier.


    "D-Do you have someone there?" asks the soldier while he was shaken by Ho Lee, but then it stops when Klaus intervene to get a grip of Lee aggressive behaviour.


    "M...My whole family is there."


    "Which region?" asks the soldier.


    "Wuhan." says Ho Lee to the soldier, which it made him sad.


    "Sad truth is, that zone was the first nuclear explosion on the zombies. Your family is most likely not even alive there."


    Ho Lee falls on his knees, he is looking down on the floor, tears are dripping out from his eyes. Klaus is trying to ask the soldier what is about because these two were speaking entirely in Chinese, but the man only replies with a sad face before he leaves this room.


    "I''m sorry."


    When the soldier left the room where Lee and Klaus are staying, the tears and sobbing will not be stopped after a few minutes. Klaus was trying to make Ho Lee escaping from this despair feeling, but this worked after Klaus promised him that one day, they will go there and try to find Lee parents, where they will be making a proper burial for them. Lee agreed on this idea of Klaus, and these are shaking their hands and then Lee tells something a bit emotional in English language.


    "You are a good friend."


    "Without you, I wouldn''t even be alive here." replies Klaus to Lee.


    After that, these two decide to leave their room and take a walk to the deck of this ship to see how are the things there.

 From Cluj to Athene - Final Part

    A few moments later, the ship with almost one hundred and fifty survivors plus a few dozens of soldiers, is leaving the Port where it stayed there for a while. This is the last departure, until the whole country will be bombed by the Army of Europe, as the soldiers told the survivors via loudspeakers before departure was about to happen.


    Ana is in the hallway, she stays leaning on the wall, before she was about to check something, she takes a look too around to be sure nobody is watching her. After that, she rises the leg part of her jeans, she looks at the injury she got. It looks like a bite mark, a bite mark made by a zombie. Ana it got the bite mark of a zombie, but it wasn''t from this day, it was from the day they crashed in Bulgaria.


    Ana remembers how she got this bite mark. It was at that moment they were fighting a few zombies on the dark highway. She got bitten while she was killing two of those zombies by herself, but a third one, a crawler to be precise, bite her leg when she wasn''t looking. At the moment that thing was piercing his disgusting teeth on Ana''s leg, it was too late, the creature had already infected her. But Ana managed to make the creature take his mouth from her leg, and stomp his head with her bitten leg. Then, after that, she runs to the truck, where the others were gathering after they saw they couldn''t do anything against these big waves of zombies.


    Back into the present, Ana is covering her leg with the bite, and she goes to the room where the Alina and the other girls are there, and waiting for the time they will be on those islands. For now, nobody has noticed that Ana is infected, not even the ones she travelled for those three harsh days to here.


    Support the author by searching for the original publication of this novel.


    ***


    Six days have passed, and the group of the six remaining survivors are safely located into of those uninhabited islands which were once in Greece hands, now it is the territories of the World Army, the last humanity hope to survive this big crisis.


    On that island, Ana was still keeping her bite secret, and it didn''t even do anything yet. Also, the bite mark vanished after a while and nobody knew that Ana was bitten, or that her body might be the cure. But still with the fact that she could save the entire humanity, Ana will not tell anyone about this because of fear, fear of being used as a human experiment to the higher ups and then tossed into the trash if they kill her.


    Alina is living on that island, in a house with Catalina, the girl she took from the ship and adopted, and with Ana. Both of them are working as guards or cops, patrolling every inch of this island, armed with heavy weapons and prepared for anything.


    Alin got his leg completely healed, and in good state of fighting. Together with Radu, they are forming a new training place for the people who want to train in combat fighting. And this is a huge success for them, even though they are working for free, but they are able to shape the future soldiers who are going to face to those things outside these islands.


    And Klaus with Lee, they decided to join the Army forces and become members of an extraction team. They are going to on their first mission in Maine, France, to clean up the small areas from there to build small radio towers to help to communicate with the Army from Greece and the artificial islands built by the United Nations and help construct a new army station.

 Maine Street - Part 1

    The infection has taken the entire continent of Europe, Asia, Africa, South Africa, and Russia. The entire human population from these areas has either become a zombie, managed to get into a military safe camp, or stays hidden into the infected cities, villages, or undergrounds for the lucky ones.


    Armies were trying to eradicate the zombies at first, but this mission proved to be rather difficult after they learn that this virus can be spread through the air now, and the new mutants proved to become much more dangerous than the ones who are depicted in the social media, shows or video games,


    Some zombies can walk normally, run, jump around, climb the buildings, zombies who are crawling because they are missing legs or their legs are extremely damaged and not able to walk like the other creatures. And there are also the ones who are swimming, the big ones who can throw cars into the humans, or even the ones who are eating zombie flesh to become complete zombies, they started to appear very rarely since the mutations become very powerful to the mutants.


    Now anyone could catch this deadly virus since it is now on air, but it still cannot pass some continents because all of this virus has only got for now Europe, Asia, Russia, the Middle East, Africa, and even a part of Greenland. And passing American continents will be hard and all, plus, the zombies will be not able to swim thousands of miles.


    And with days going by, a lot of zombies mutate into ferocious mutants who can destroy anything on their way. But with these changes, their weakness remains the same as one with a missing leg. A shot into their head, enough to destroy their remaining and functioning brain. This is the only thing that makes humans have hope to become a functioning society.


    A lot of islands and places were taken by the World Army, one big group of soldiers who are ordered to kill Undeads and retake the lost cities blocked by the zombies, or clean the bombed cities. One such place that is sustainable as a good living place is a region named Maine, which is a place coming from the country that was once known as France when people were not on the verge of death every single day.


    Still, to these nine days since infections, nobody managed to find the reason how this virus got born, or who produced it? It might be human. But it can also be an animal such as vampires, rabbits, or even hornets. Still. Whoever created this thing, was not the idea of creating a better place.


    ***


    On the first day of the infection of this virus has started, in Maine, close to the Gorron entrance road. The taxi is passing by the sign who says "Welcome to Gorron", and that man who is sitting on the behind seat is the guy with white skin, shaved beard and cut hair. Green eyes, round face and one small scar on his left cheek since an accident he got at a football game with friends when he was still a child. The man wears a costume, a costume quite expensive for a journalist for a newspaper from France, together with a photo camera, and having one suitcase on his left side filled with clothes and a laptop to help him with his biggest project.


    The man name is Raoul, and today he has come to this city, to find the biggest scope of his life which will help him get back to the France TV News Team and get a lot of fame in French media. While Raoul is waiting for the taxi driver to stop at the hotel where is going to stay for the next days until he will find enough materials for his "biggest" scope, hears the radio telling an important message to the listeners and everyone.


    "Recent abnormal activities have happened today, on a supermarket located on Marseilles. One lady was bitten in the middle of the day, in the store by a man in a hoodie. The people there were trying to stop that, but the man who done that also bite three people before he flees from this scene. The police are already searching for that man who committed such an awful crime on this sunny day. For the lady and the people bitten there, they are already on the Hospital since they were started to feel not good anymore for some reason. Anyway, we are warning the people from Marseilles to be careful on the streets, and if they have any information about that attacker, please contact the nearest police station."


    This narrative has been unlawfully taken from Royal Road. If you see it on Amazon, please report it.


    The man is turning off the radio, and he looks at Raoul when he stops the car into a small parking lot.


    "Is this the place?"


    "Yes." says Raoul to the driver, and he handed to him a few euros. "Thank you."


    Raoul leaves the car, he takes his luggage, and he heads to that hotel. While he is taking the stairs, the taxi leaves the parking lot, heads to the road, and drive straight on the road, searching for a new passenger.


    Raoul enters the hotel he got his room checked in, on there, everything seems normal, a few people are sitting on chairs, others are walking on the halls, and staff members are doing their work, some are delivering the luggage to the rooms of the customers, while others are staying on desks and typing on their computers. Raoul goes to a reception, and he tells him the reason he has come here.


    "Hello! I am here for checking in, please."


    The receptionist is typing something into his computer for about three seconds, he looks at Raoul, and he asks him.


    "Name?"


    "Raoul Gresham." says Raoul to the receptionist.


    "Aha." he says after he typed for three more seconds. "I found your room. You are staying at room 204, floor 2."


    "Yes."


    "Alright." he goes to a board on his back, he takes one pair of keys from there, and he hands it to Raoul. "This is your key. Be careful and enjoy your stay."


    "Thank you." says Raoul to the receptionist, he takes his luggage, and he heads to his room.


    He goes to the stairs since his room it is only on the second floor, plus, some movement wouldn''t hurt on a hotel and vacation, even though Raoul isn''t exactly on vacation. It took him about three minutes to get to the second floor, and when he got there, he walks to the room with the number 204.


    When he got to that room, Raoul opens the room with his key, he pushes the door, then he walks on the room and looks around. He got one nice looking bed, a desk with a chair, one TV, and a sofa. He puts his luggage on the bed, then he puts his camera on the desk, and goes to the door, to close. When he closes the door, he also locked because of instinct, and since he is at one not well-known area by him.


    "I''ve got three more hours," he thought while he was looking at the clock on his phone and is showing 7:54 AM. "Until the meeting with the source. So, I''d rather do something... How about take the breakfast? My stomach is hungry."


    He goes to his luggage, takes a new pair of clothing, he goes to the bathroom to change it. When he opens the bathroom, he wasn''t really that excited, he was just a normal bathroom on a hotel. He enters this room, close the door, change from his clothes he arrives into new ones, after that short time there, he leaves with a new pair of jeans, a new pair of blouses, and a new pair of shoes, he heads to the door. He unlocks it by using the key provided from the staff member earlier.


    When he got on the other side, he closes the door, and heads to the restaurant of this hotel. While he was walking down the hallway, he sees a man walking on a fast peace to his room, while he was hiding his left arm. Raoul saw that man, but he decides to not interfere, he thought it was probably a bruise from a fall or something. That man got at the door of room number 205, he opens the door because he was unlocked, and he closes after that. Raoul is taking the downstairs to the first floor, where is the restaurant located.


    After a few minutes of walking, Raoul arrives at the interior of the restaurant, everything looks normal there, people are sitting on their tables, eating the food who was served by the polite and friendly staff on this sector of this Hotel. Raoul is looking around for an empty table, he sees one, and it''s taking the chance to walk to that table. He got there, takes the chair, sit on the comfy chair close to the table, and he is waiting for the waiter to come at his table and asks for the thing this customer deserves to eat on a fine day.


    "Hello, sir!" says the waiter coming at Raoul table. "What could I get to you?"


    "Hello! I''d like to order one cup of espresso and one omelette."


    "French Omelette, sir?"


    "Of course."


    "That''s it I suppose?"


    "Yes."


    "It will be ready in a few minutes, sir."


    The waiter leaves Raoul table, walks to the kitchen doors and when he entered the kitchen area, Raoul is looking around on this building to see how it is everything there. He sees a girl sitting on a table with a woman, probably her mother. Raoul also sees a man entering this room, while he is having a bandage on his arm and dressed in an expensive suit, he goes to an empty table, sits there and checks the Menu.


    A few moments have passed, and the waiter has come with the dish to Raoul. He hands him the dish on his table, together with the espresso he ordered, and Raoul is handing to the waiter sixteen euros. The omelette only cost twelve euros, while the coffee cost four euros. And those are normal prices because the inflation has done a lot of things to Europe, apparently.

 Maine Street - Part 2

    Raoul is eating his breakfast in peace while the waiter is going to another customer, and is going to the one with the bandage on his hand. When the waiter got close to the man, he observed that his skin is becoming a light green.


    "Are you alright, sir?" asks the waiter to that man.


    "Um. Yeah." says the man feeling a little dizzy. "Probably some sick."


    "Should I call Medics to come to see if you are truly alright?"


    "D-Don''t worry." says the man to the waiter. "Give me a coffee and I will be alright."


    "Alright, sir." says the waiter to that man feeling sceptical about the thing he said earlier.


    The waiter is going to his table while that man is staying on the chair, he puts his head on the table and scratches his right cheek who shows two blue veins.


    In a few minutes, Raoul finished his breakfast and is heading outside this restaurant to the exit of this building. When he got the automatic door, he leaves the building and heads outside, where is heading to a bench, sits there, takes one cigarette from his pocket, and lights it up with the lighter he has stored on the left pocket of his pants.


    After he lights the cigarette from his mouth, he puts the lighter back on his pocket from the pants and enjoys the cigarette while it is looking on the sky where he sees a plane flying at a high altitude. He also sees a woman coming close to him, dressed in an office worker outfit, she wears makeup and a pair of glasses to help her read or to operate on computer, and has her hair is brown colour on bun style.


    "Do you have a lighter?"


    "Sure." says Raoul with his cigarette on his mouth, lighting the cigarette that lady put on her mouth.


    "Thank you." respond the lady leaving Raoul alone on the bench.


    "You''re welcome." says Raoul when that lady left him and heading to the closest bus station.


    Raoul enjoys the cigarette for a few more minutes, until he stomps on it, and threw it on the trash can next to the bench he was sitting. He is heading to the inside of the hotel and goes back to his room to dress up for the job he will be about to pull off in almost one hour with the source.


    Unauthorized use: this story is on Amazon without permission from the author. Report any sightings.


    ***


    One hour later, Raoul leaves the bus he took it, and heads to a building who is having a sign, "Phone Chargers", a shop where people with no phone batteries are coming there, pays about ten to twenty euros to either charge their dying phone, or to buy a battery phone who will keep their mobile device living for one to three weeks, but it is very expensive this thing, plus it might cost higher for newer models. Raoul enters the building, he sees nine tables to the walls, where a few teenagers, young adults or adults are staying there and using their phones while they are charging, or some other customers staying on the line to buy battery for their mobile device.


    A guy sees Raoul, he leaves his table and heads on Raoul direction, leaving his phone together with the Starbucks coffee on that table. He shakes Raoul hand and he is introducing himself.


    "The Name is Pierre Philippe." says the man stopping to shake the man hand. "Are you Raoul, right? The journalist who said he will be coming here?"


    "Yes." responds Raoul to Pierre. "And where did you say the scoop might be located?"


    "Person who wanted to hear what he wanted, am I right?... Alright, but first I have got to let my phone charge. It will take three more minutes."


    "I see." says Raoul to that guy who is walking back to his table and do wait for his phone to get charged.


    Raoul is going outside this store, he stays on the bench there, and waits for the man to finish up his charging to his phone. While he waits for Pierre to finish up his charging, he is opening his phone, and he sees a notification on his phone, it is a message, coming from his brother.


    "Brother, we have some problem at home." that was the message his brother sent to him.


    Raoul didn''t type, and instead he calls on his phone his brother. While he waits for him to pick it up, he sees a police car running down the street, with his sirens turned on. He didn''t care because this is a normal thing on today world.


    "Yeah, brother?" asks his brother from the phone.


    "What is it?" asks Raoul on the phone.


    "Is it Father, big brother. He is at the Hospital. On Saint Malo."


    "What? How? What happened?" asks Raoul shocked by this information. "Is it alright?"


    "I don''t know what happened, he just woke up on this morning, with pain on the head, and high temperature. He has also had a seizure while we were driving him to the Hospital."


    "My God."


    "Brother. You have to come here."


    "I cannot right now. I will try later to come there. I promise."


    "Again, with the work?"


    "...Yes."


    "Brother..."


    "I am sorry, Gregory. You know I need those moneys."


    "I know, I know. But please, be here. Your father needs you here."


    "I''ll be there as soon as I can. I promise."


    "Alright, bye and be careful."


    "Bye, brother." says Gregory who is closing up the call.


    Raoul is looking at the phone astonished. This news to him, it is making him feel sorry because he isn''t there for his Father.

 Maine Street - Part 3

    After a few seconds, Pierre leaves the store and goes to Raoul, where he immediate puts his phone back into his pocket and gets up from that bench. He sees Pierre climbing down the stairs with his coffee on his left hand.


    "Are you ready?" asks Pierre to Raoul.


    "Yes." responds Raoul.


    And now, these two are heading to a car, a Mercedes-Benz type, parked on the street. Raoul said to Pierre it is a nice car, and Pierre thanked him for this remark. Raoul is sitting on the back seat, while Pierre is going on the front seat, which means he is the driver of this car.


    While Pierre is driving to a place, Raoul takes out a small notebook from the pocket of his jacket, together with a pen. And he starts to put some essential questions.


    "So, you said there was an unusual thing happening here?"


    "Yes." responds Pierre while he was driving, and he is noticing that he takes notes from him. "The thing I saw last night, before I was heading home, was a lady who walked on the street, with her clothes ripped."


    "At what time did you see that lady?"


    "I believe it was 22:12. Or much more later than that. I am not good with time, dude."


    "Alright." says Raoul while he is noting the information Pierre is giving to him. "Did you do something when you say the lady?"


    "I approached the car there, stopped there, and when I did, that lady just jumped on the window. Growling and screaming something I did not understand."


    "Really?"


    "Yeah. I believe this lady was probably on drugs or drunk, because when I tried to get off and talked to her, she jumped over my car and used her nails to attack me. She also bites my arm."


    "Really?" asks Raoul curious.


    "Yes. Look here."


    He shows to Raoul his left arm, he sees that it has a small bite mark there. There is also scars on the left arm which means it was coming from the lady nails rather than her bite. Raoul doesn''t know what are those bite and scratches, but he thinks the lady it is drunk, or she consumed drug substances, but he doesn''t know that this problem is deeper and more complex than he thought.


    Love this story? Find the genuine version on the author''s preferred platform and support their work!


    ***


    A few moments later, Raoul and Pierre reached the street where everything was happening. Pierre re-explained the story of how he got bitten by that crazy lady, and he also told how he immediately run into the car and drive to his house to call for the police.


    "And they found her?" asks Raoul while he was noting something on his notebook.


    "No, they didn''t." responds Pierre. "They came here, and they didn''t find any clue here."


    "So. Let me get this straight. You called me from Paris, to come here and cover a story of a drug addict? Do you think I have time for that?" asks Raoul feeling angry.


    "No, no. Um. I know it sounds stupid for a reporter who covers the most important news, but this one might be your ticket to the popularity."


    "Popularity? For what? For seeing a drug addict. Yeah, no, thanks."


    Raoul leaves Pierre while he is still insisting for saying that the story is true and there might be something crazy going on with that lady, but while Pierre was walking to Raoul and tried to convenience him here it is the real deal, Pierre is suddenly coughing, which made Raoul turning back and looking at him. He sees Pierre falling on his knees and coughing like he got hit pretty hard on his stomach by a metal ball.


    "Are you feeling alright?" asks Raoul going closer to Pierre which is coughing harder. Then, the blood came out from his coughing, and Raoul back away and calls the ambulance to come and pick him up.


    While Raoul was calling for the ambulance and speaking with the operator there to come and take care of Pierre and explaining his situation, the man called Pierre stopped from coughing, and he sees the arms. He looks horrified to see them becoming pale in just a matter of seconds, then, he sees blue veins coming out from his arms. He also sees the red one who are becoming darker.


    Raoul turned back to see Pierre how is holding, and when he sees him becoming pale in a matter of seconds, he drops the phone, and he looks shocked at him. Thankfully, Raoul called an ambulance to come and pick him up to the Emergencies and to the nearest Hospital from here.


    "Hey! Hey!" says Raoul to Pierre coming at him, and shaking him up. "Are you alright?"


    "L-Leave. Me." says Pierre to Raoul with a dying voice while his eyes are starting to lose his pupils.


    "What? Why?!"


    "Leave me... You better hide... Now..."


    Raoul backs away from Pierre, very scared by this situation he got himself into. At the moment he gazes at the poor Pierre who is screaming in agonizing and sees his body changing the colour and all, he remembers the same thing it has happened in a movie once he watched with his brother when they were little kids. He remembers that the transformation this man is suffering it is the equivalent of transforming into a zombie or meat eater creature. Raoul decides to run away from that location to somewhere else safe where this thing will not haunt him down.


    While Raoul was running, Pierre in zombie mode is raising from the ground, and he walks to the direction where Raoul fled. He walks into a very slow walk, like a human who got a broken leg, and he tries to show to the crush that he is feeling alright.

 Maine Street - Part 4

    Later this day, Raoul managed to arrive back on his Hotel, by taking a taxi to there, luckily, he wasn''t attacked by any of those creatures, nor he saw the man Pierre who has become a zombie following him. After Raoul paid the taxi driver, he is heading to his room in a fast walking peace. He bumped into a man, but he ignored that man. Even if the gesture he did wasn''t nice, the man was yelling at him to be careful at walking, but Raoul is busy to reach his room and do something.


    When he got into his room, Raoul took the key out from his jeans pocket, and he locks the door, then, he goes to the desk, where he opens the laptop, and he quickly search all around the internet about the people who are raising from the dead. Luckily, he found some essential information about it.


    On a news site, there is an article about how one woman raised from Istanbul while she was run over by a bus and bite the bus driver neck, then, there is another report about a man who killed all the entire people from a cinematography in Belarus. Later he founds much more information about these attacking of the people, but most of the news sites aren''t saying that these people are like zombies, they are saying "dangerous man", "dangerous woman", "Criminal", things like that to not start mass panic. And this went "well" when Coronavirus was still kicking the world.


    Raoul decides to open the e-mail and contact his news team to alert them about the Pierre case. He writes this e-mail hopefully that the team will manage to help the civilians ignore this place or evacuate this province. It took almost five minutes to write a well-written e-mail and with nice description about the infected man who was trying to eat him.


    After he wrote the e-mail to his news team, he takes out the phone, and he calls his brother to see how is the state of his parents. The first try it doesn''t work, he tried the second try, and the third time, his brother responded.


    "Hello, Raoul! Are you fine?"


    "Yes! How is the father?!" he asks scared.


    "I-It is fine. The doctors are checking on him."


    "A-are you outside?!"


    "Yes. Outside his room. Why you sound so agitated?"


    "Brother. Whatever you do. Be fine. I will come there, and be careful at people who are attacking other people." he says in a such a terrified way.


    "Br-Brother? Are you alright? Why are you so scared?"


    "You remember those zombie movies we used to watch at it as kids?"


    "Yes..."


    "Well. I think these movies are coming to be true."


    His brother laughed for a moment, and then he says to him.


    "Are you sure you haven''t slept for three days? Again?"


    "I know it sounds weird and impossible, but one of them was close to attacking me, and if you do not believe me. Then check the news. Alright? I will come as fast as I can there."


    He closes the phone and Raoul proceed to pack everything useful to him. He takes the clothes he needs it, put the laptop in a bag, and he looks all around this room to find something useful to attack zombies. He found on a drawer a screwdriver, which was there for a reason, but it is convenient for Raoul who hasn''t anything to protect himself from these flesh-eating monsters who are soon going to invade the whole planet.


    If you come across this story on Amazon, it''s taken without permission from the author. Report it.


    Raoul leaves the room, and he is not locking up, he walks on the hallway, passes two persons who are occupying with cleaning the Hotel, they looked at him confused and wondered while he is leaving in such a hurry. After he took one turn, Raoul is taking the stairs instead of the elevators to reach the reception.


    When he got at the reception, he is heading to the exit door. One of the staff members stops Raoul, and he asks him why is leaving, which Raoul replies with.


    "I have to go to a Hospital in Saint Molo."


    "That is far from here." says the staff member who is making Raoul feel already irritated that he is talking with him. "Are you taking the bus?"


    "What other choice do I have. Anyway, thanks for hospitality." says Raoul leaving that staff member alone and leaving from that Hotel, where he is looking curios at Raoul.


    ***


    Raoul manages to get at a bus station, he gets into a bus with a ticket to the area where his brother and rest of the family (probably) are at the Hospital where his father is hospitalized. He sits on a sit close to a window, he takes a look outside, and he sees there are nothing unusual, a few people who are sitting on the benches, waiting for their bus or maybe a taxi.


    While Raoul waits for the bus to leave the station, he takes out his phone, thanks to his mobile data, he decides to check the internet to see if they display much more sources about this incident he encountered earlier with the guy named Pierre. There he founds another similar attack on the internet, he also found the incident in Marseille, but this time it displays the attacker. Raoul notices the person is having the similar skin colour, eyes having colour green and his mouth showing blood trails meaning he must''ve bite something and blood was dripping.


    Raoul is feeling nervous about all of this since he was never, ever in his entire life, will be expecting this scenery because even on today''s standards, it seems ridiculous to even think that the world will be truly end by a simple virus. It truly sounds SFˇ­ That''s what also people said about Coronavirus pandemic, and it last long.


    Anyway, in a few minutes, the bus leaves the station and Raoul, sitting with any young adult, because there weren''t any free seats in the entire bus, he is looking at the window, at the people down there who are walking on this evening. Some were spending their time like no care in the world, while others, were walking in a fast rhythm, most likely because of their job, or in Raoul case, either way, today everything will change for everyone in the world.


    While the bus was moving, Raoul takes a quick glimpse at the young adult next to him. He observes the adult is wearing some working clothes, like a suit people are wearing when they are working in business, or they are the bosses of the job. Some people would consider that a man dressed in working clothes will be travelling via their own cars, but this thing wouldn''t be possible since in some countries, and here I refer by the Europe, have "banned" the cars since it caused a lot of air, noises and garbage pollution. The young adult is also carrying a suitcase with him. Raoul notices the man is looking in the front, where the driver of the bus is doing his job.


    "Hey." says the young adult in French language and looking at Raoul. "Are you from this region?"


    "No." says Raoul in French language to the young adult. "I am actually from Reims."


    "Reims? What brought you here?"


    "Work and I am heading to the Hospital at Saint Molo."


    "Ahaˇ­ You do realize this bus will be stopping at a station which is at three minutes from that hospital you are searching?"


    "Yeah. I found it on Moovit." responds Raoul to the young adult showing the app on his phone who is helping him with the buses.


    "Smart technology user." Says the man to Raoul which is putting him in a question.


    Then, total silence, the only thing who is making the silence between those two it is the noises from the bus of a few babies who are crying, teenagers listening to loud music, and one couple kissing so passionately on the back of the bus. After all, Raoul doesn''t mind all of these noises because this is normal


    While the bus was heading to the Saint Molo city, Raoul gets a notification from his brother. It is a message who is telling him.


    "Brother! Come quick!"


    But Raoul did not pick up the phone because of the thing it is happening right now at the bus which is stopping in front of five corpses who are left on the road. The bus drivers stop the car, and he immediately call the police while some people from the front seats are taking photos with their phones. Raoul leaves his seat and goes there, to see what is happening.

 Maine Street - Part 5

    One bus stops from running because of the driver, who sees five people on the road, laying down. The driver is feeling scared to see that, and he tries to dial the authorities, and by that, an ambulance to come and pick them up. While he was trying to call the ambulance, a few passengers are leaving their seat and come there to see what is going on. And from those passengers it is also Raoul, and this incident is making him feeling uneasy.


    While the bus driver was trying to call the ambulance, one of the passengers goes to the bus driver, and he tells him to continue moving. The bus driver did not listen to him. The passenger who demand to see the bus moving is already feeling angry that the bus was not moving, he was about to yell at the bus driver, but another passage, a lady, stops him. The passage doesn''t care what is happening, he just wanted to see the bus moving.


    Raoul looks closely at those corpses there who are highlighted by the bus lights. He sees that one of them moves from those five bodies. Then, a body from that pile raise up on his feet. Raoul could see the body who raised up it is a man, wearing a plain t-shirt, a cap, a pair of pants and having blood all over his clothes. The "man" walks closer to the bus, where one of the passengers, decides to leave the bus and goes to the man there, together with the bus driver, hoping they might be able to help the poor man. But they have made a mistake, because the man catches the bus driver hand, and he bite it.


    The bus driver yelled, and he kicked the "man" in the upper body. The man fell into the other corpses. Then, the bus driver looks at his arm, he sees the mark of the bite which covered almost the entire hand. He sees blood dripping from there, and on the next moment, before someone could help the bus driver, he falls on the concrete.


    A few passengers are leaving the bus to see if they can help the bus driver, but Raoul and three other people remain there. One of the people there is calling the cops, while Raoul is taking photos of this incident, hoping that this article will give him some money in the future. But, when he was about to do a third photo, the bus driver raises from the ground, and he proceed to bite the other passengers who were trying to help the poor man.


    A few passengers were running back to their bus while others were trying to stop the bus driver, but to no avail because in the next seconds those five corpses have also raised from their ground and walk to the people there who would not be able to protect themselves. One of the passengers enters the bus, and he locks all the door of there. The passengers from inside the bus were trying to open it to let the other enters, but the man who closed the bus doors tells them.


    "Look! There are no humans there."


    "What are you talking about?" asks a man in black skin, muscular and wearing business clothes.


    "These are zombies." says Raoul to the people and everyone turns to them.


    "Zombies?" asks a lady scared. "No. No! No. It cannot be real."


    "It is, lady!" says the man who locked the bus. "And now we have to remain here, or else we will all be bitten and risk to become like the bus driver and those five corpses!"


    "But what about the others outside?" asks the man who was sitting next to Raoul. "Some of them will need our help."


    "And what do you suggest?" asks the same man. "Letting them here, might create a mess. And we don''t know how is making those people turn into these things."


    This book was originally published on Royal Road. Check it out there for the real experience.


    Then Raoul, who once had an encounter with Pierre, remembers the time he told him about the lady who scratched him, saw him transforming and run away from him. Raoul then tells them about the encounter with Pierre and the things he told him, even though it wasn''t much, the guy who sit next to him tells Raoul.


    "The scratches andˇ­ bitesˇ­" say Raoul while he takes a look at the people outside who are devoured by a few of those zombies, he feels scared, and trembles out of fear that the reality has now become something like this. "Can transform the humans into those thingsˇ­"


    "What are we going to do?" asks another lady from the bus.


    "Foremost, we have to wait for the authorities." suggest the guy who locked the bus. "And then we will figure it out what we are going to do next."


    "Are you sure this is a good idea?" asks the same lady.


    "It is our only option. What do you want? Risk at running into the forest to the nearest city."


    "You''re right." Says Raoul to the survivor, and he is looking at the lady. "Our only way to survive it is to stay still and wait for the authorities."


    A knock can be heard on the bus doors. Everyone jumps, and they are looking at the door, where a zombie is hitting the door of the bus with his hands. Raoul notices the light of this bus is turn on, and he has an idea. He goes to the bus driver, dodge three survivors who were on his way and the press on a button to turn off the lights of the bus. Then, he looks at the survivors, and he says to them in a whispering manner.


    "Quiet. They might be attracted by noise and light."


    A few people from there listen Raoul order. A girl however, looking scared at the windows where a zombie is eating a girl, she vomits on the bus, scaring everyone, disgusting a few people from there, and making a man hold his mouth. Raoul is going at that women, he asks her if she is alright, which the girl replies to him with a question.


    "Are we going to die?"


    "Noˇ­ We are not going to die." Says Raoul hugging the girl, trying to make her feel better. "We have to wait for the cops to show up, and then we will be safe."


    "Why don''t we drive this bus?" asks a man in the bus.


    "It is risky." says the guy who was sitting next to Raoul. "Don''t you think the other cities have caught this virus too. What do you think would happen if we drive to Paris or Marseille? We will be fucked by a ton of these creatures."


    "Just like in the movies." says a woman that is sitting on the front seat. "We have to remain here and wait for help."


    They stay on the bus. Then, Raoul, trying to lighten the mood and not looking at the zombies who are walking around the bus and eats the bodies of the other passengers who weren''t able to escape, he asks these eight people on the bus their names.


    "My name is Raoul. I-I was a journalist at a newspaper. Nice to meet you all."


    "My name is Tim." says a bald guy with a stuffed beard to the people there. "I am an engineer at a nuclear plantation. Nice to meet you, Raoul! And everyone."


    "My name is Sophia." says the woman from the front seat. "I am a stunt actor. Nice to meet you."


    "Yeah. Umˇ­ My name is ¨¦lan." says the guy who was rushing to close the bus doors. "Iˇ­ I was a school teacher. But nowˇ­ I guess I am a man without a job."


    "We are in the same mess, ¨¦lan." tells Raoul to that man named ¨¦lan.


    "My name is Frankie." says an old woman trembling. "I-I am scared."


    "We all are scared, Frankie." says Tim to Frankie. "But we will all be alright as soon as the authorities are going to show up."


    "Name is Virgil." Says the guy who was sitting on the same seat with Raoul, but he sits on the seat from the other side where Sophia sits. "I was a comic artist, but I think I will be during this post-apocalyptic event."


    "My name is Clara." says the teenager who puked a few moments ago. "I am sorry for the mess I have done. I am a student at Nuclear Engineering University."


    "Good career choice you''ve chosen." says Tim to the girl.


    "Thank you." she replies with a smile at Tim, then she is looking at the seven and eight persons who are sitting on the seats, each other.


    "I am Ludo, and this is my wife Carrie." he says to the man to the survivors there. "W-We are married, andˇ­ We were working as vets."


    "Vets, huh?" says ¨¦lan. "You two could be the only source we''ve got to the closest doctor."


    "We are doctors who are specialized in taking care of animals, not humans." says Clara to ¨¦lan. "But, we will try our best to even take care of humans."

 Maine Street - Part 6

    A few minutes have passed, and these eight survivors are still blocked on the bus. The road is roaming with zombies who are now much bigger since they managed to infect these passengers who fled from the bus and landed on the street. Raoul is looking at the windows, and he sees a female zombie banging her head on the window. Soon, other survivors notice this.


    "What is she doing?" asks ¨¦lan to Clara.


    "How should I know?" asks Clara to ¨¦lan. "These creatures don''t have a behaviour like an animal I know."


    "They are the predator." says Ludo. "And we are the prey."


    "Most likely the opposite." says Sophia to Ludo. She is standing up from her seat. She is heading to the driver seat, there she sees a baseball bat, probably used to hit the rugs to clean them up or for thieves. "If a thing like that." Sophie is pointing with the baseball bat at the zombie who is hitting his head on the window. "Manages to get into the bus. We will have to fight with anything we need."


    "Do you think they can be easily killed?" asks Ludo to Sophie.


    "Maybe she has a point." responds Raoul to Ludo. "What if these things can work like in the movies? A hit into their head and they drop dead for sure this time?"


    "Brain cells." responds Ludo looking at his wife.


    "If the brain of these things it is destroyedˇ­"


    "ˇ­ then they will be drop-dead." continues her husband.


    "But it will be better if we stay here, alright?" says Raoul getting off from his seat. "The best idea would be to wait for authorities."


    "Yes. But if they do not come. What we will do?"


    "They will come here." says Raoul.


    A few moments later, a few sirens are coming closer to the survivors who are staying on their seats and waits for them to come. As soon as the cops showed and left their heavily armoured cars, fire weapons were drawn against those dead bodies. The survivors on the bus are putting their heads down and lay on the bus, because they might be shot by them by blind bullets and confuse them as the zombies from outside.


    While shoots were still dealt outside, a few bullets have hit the windows of the bus. Everyone one staying on the ground, laying on the floor of the bus or hiding between the seats. There was also a bullet who hit Frankie as she was panicking because of all of this commotion. Thankfully, the bullet only hit and cut thirty percentage of her right ear. Ludo risks his life by leaving his place and putting Frankie down to safety. His wife leaves the hideout, and she walks in a crouching movement to her husband, to inspect how hurt is poor Frankie and to help the husband of the injured old lady.


    "Help!" yells Tim from the bus, and leaving his hideout, running to the window, push it down because the window was now able to be torn down, thanks to the billions of bullets who got through the window. He has done this because he was hoping this will be heard and gather the attention of the cops outside. "We are stuck in the bus! We are not infected!" he said a few times as he signals to the officers to cease fire.


    In just a matter of second, a door was broken by a cop who used his assault rifle to break the window of the bus where was the door. He opens the door by sticking his right hand to the opener from the inside, he sees it is blocked and jammed, so, he looks back and calls for help, another officer comes, and he asks the superior why he needs help. He responds to him and he shows the reason. Therefore, the superior and the cop are going to open the door, by using a crowbar to open it. A crowbar found into a damaged car with blood and three zombie bodies on the inside.


    "We''ve got people alive here!" says a cop to the others outside the bus.


    After a few seconds, three more cops dressed in heavy armour, all three of them proceed to take out the people, while the fourth one is inspecting Frankie because of her injury. He tells to his colleagues that he requires a first aid kit, and one cop who is escorting Ludo and Clara outside the bus.


    If you spot this story on Amazon, know that it has been stolen. Report the violation.


    Raoul and Tim are leaving the bus while a policeman escorted them. He told them what is the situation after Tim insisted on telling him what is going on in here.


    "We don''t know what is truly going on. But the higher-ups told us everything has changed, and made us to activate the protocol on zombie apocalypse."


    "Does something like this actually exist?!" exclaims Raoul.


    "Yes. You will be surprised how many protocols does a police station have nowadays." tries to joke the policeman.


    They are walking a few steps to a car, and when they got at the car, the policeman inspects the car to see if there is something there. After some quick lookout, he sees a corpse on the backseat. After the broken windows on this car, you could theorize that there was a monster who managed to crawl from the car and evade into the road. Or it could even be a zombie from outside who managed to grab the poor thing from the car and bite him. The cop didn''t have time to investigate this, so he just drags the corpse from the car with Raoul and Tim help, they are putting him into a pile of zombie corpse where three more corpses and with Virgil and ¨¦lan. They threw the heavy corpse there and continue to grab the other corpse of zombie lying around.


    "What are we going to do with them?" asks Raoul.


    "We are ordered to put them in a pile." says the cop from earlier. "Don''t know why they wanted to do, but I think it is to free the road."


    "Sounds logic to me." says Raoul.


    "We have to do it, after all, the cities are also in danger?"


    "Really?"


    "Yes." Responds the cop after he grabbed a corpse who resembled a woman with half of her body eaten and half of the head cut. "Even the hospitals are in danger of becoming infected."


    "Oh no." says Raoul.


    "What?"


    "I have to go to Saint Malo Hospital. I have a family there."


    "It is too risky now, citizen." responds the policeman to Raoul. "The people there have already blocked the entrance of the hospital as I heard from radio station."


    "But I have to try." says Raoul to the policeman.


    The policeman did not respond, he only looked at him, and he leaves him alone, going to attempt at the other survivors, looking to see how he can help them. Raoul stays there, he doesn''t move, because he is put into a critical decision, and he thinks about the options he has on the hands: stay with the police, or risk his life to find the family who is locked on the hospital.


    Raoul grunts, and he is walking to a police officer, he looks at him with a serious look, while the officer fells weird:


    "Can I leave?"


    "Why would you want to do that?" asks the police officer to Raoul. "The city where we left it is already blocked. It is impossible to go anywhere. Even for us, it was hard to leave that city."


    "I have to find my family." Says Raoul to the police man. "Please, let me take a ride and I will leave."


    The officer is looking around him, he then looks at the closest ride, where it is a zombie body there, killed again with a gunshot from the police officers. The police officer goes to that car, he opens the door, and threw two zombie bodies out of there. As soon as he finished doing his thing, he looks at Raoul and tells him.


    "Where are you heading?"


    "To Saint Malo Hospital." responds Raoul.


    "I understand." says the officer who is handing to Raoul a knife. "Use this knife in case zombies attack you. Using weapons, it will draw the other zombies. Remember, hit their brain zone, this is the only key to stop them once for all."


    "Thank you!" says Raoul happy that someone will help him. "I don''t know how I can thank you."


    "There is one thing." says the officer to Raoul which made him surprised. "I want you to go to the closest radio station, and announce a message."


    "I can do it." says Raoul. "I knew one close to Maine. I might be able to arrive there. But what message?"


    The officer goes to his ear and he whisper him the message, plus he hands him a note with much more detail. After he finished whispering, he looks at the shocked reaction of Raoul.


    "I-I don''t believe it."


    "It is the truth." says the police officer. "I would do it by myself, but this is secret information by I don''t know what kind of army."


    "Is it even possible to do that?"


    "They''ve got the technology. And you should be going. Now."


    Raoul, puts the paper he got from the police officer on his suitcase, he gets on the vehicle he got cleaned by the police officer and he step on the gas since this one is a vehicle who works without a key, only by pressing a button. He drives on a fast speed to the Saint Malo Hospital, hoping he would be able to rescue his family. As soon as the car drive away from the scene, a few police officers and survivors were looking shocked at him, but then, the police officer, looks at his colleagues, and he asks them.


    "Are all immune?"


    "Yes, sir." responds one police officer dressed in heavy armour. "All of them aren''t bitten, and one lady has just suffered an injury."


    "Good." Says the police officer who is apparently the boss. "Load all of them in the cars, and deliver all of them to the evac stations. Move it!"


    The police officers, proceed to escort the civilians to their cars to deliver them to the evac station. Some of them were trying to talk to the officers, but it was useless because they weren''t even saying a word as he puts all the survivors from the bus into their cars.

 Maine Street - Part 7

    A few moments have passed, and Raoul has stopped the vehicle at a distance of three hundred meters from the Saint Malo Hospital. He stopped the vehicle because of a truck blockage who is blocking the entire street to the Saint Malo. Raoul gets off from the vehicle, and he also takes the suitcase with the paper he got, and the knife he got from the police officer. He puts the knife on his belt since he doesn''t have a sheath.


    As he left the car, Raoul he is walking on the streets, where he encounters a bunch of zombie corpses, humans who were killed by gunshots, some police officers who were also put down and killed by those creatures. As he walks in a slow rhythm, he sees all the surrounding stores, with broken windows and on fire. He sees bodies of people on the street, he walks past them, not checking if the bodies wouldn''t be reanimated into zombies or were zombies and got killed.


    When he got to a building, he abruptly stops because of a man who got through the door, panicked and with a zombie kid on his back, bitting his back. Raoul, acting without realization, he takes the knife out from the belt, and he stabs the kid head. This is the first kill of Raoul, but, it would not be the last in a few seconds. After he stabbed the kid into the head, he dragged the kid out of the man, and he threw him into the asphalt.


    "Thank you." Says the man, but before he could say anything else, he falls on the asphalt.


    At this moment, Raoul, realize that the poor man was bitten, he left him there, and he runs to the Hospital, hoping he will be able to see his parents there, alive and protected by the staff there or the justice system.


    When Raoul was still running, he hears an explosion from a few meters ahead, he also sees where the explosion happened. It happened at a building, who was most likely used as one for living, rather than a company or a shop with home. Raoul also sees the building, falling and blocking the road with the material it is not useless at building. But the good thing is, the building has created a "bridge" for zombies to not swarm into the street, but the bad news is that Raoul has to fight against the remaining zombies and find a new way to get there.


    Three zombies, left one building who is still on fire, and at the brick to collapse at any moment. Raoul decides to run from there instead of fighting, so, he goes to his right, and he sees a narrow space between buildings who are still standing. He manages to get through that narrow space, and he walks slowly to it. As he walks, the exit seems close to him.


    In almost two minutes, Raoul escapes from the narrow space, and now, he can see where is the Hospital, it has to run to it, and dodge the waves of zombies who are walking and running to any human. One of these zombies saw Raoul, and he walks to Raoul. As he got closer to him, Raoul, taking his time, he used the knife he has, and he stabs the creature head, on the brain location. When he felt the creature couldn''t move anymore, he pushes the creature down, and lands on the asphalt.


    You could be reading stolen content. Head to the original site for the genuine story.


    Another zombie approach Raoul, and he looks different from the other one. Raoul was about to stab the creature, but then, something unexpectedly happened, the creature, got down to the zombie Raoul killed recently, and eat it. This made Raoul fell weird, but realizing he has no time to think about it, he runs to the Hospital, which is at a few meters from him.


    Raoul got to the entrance of the Hospital, but as he got there, he sees seven zombies eating a few humans'' bodies, probably, since it is hard to determinate if he is human or not some zombie cannibal like Raoul saw earlier because it is at almost ten meters from him. Raoul sees the interior of the building blocked by ambulance cars and windows blocked with planks, table and beds.


    " Are you kidding me?" asks Raoul looking at the fortified Hospital building. "How am I going to get pass that?"


    But, before he could say anything else, he hears on loud gunshot coming from the Hospital, hitting a zombie who was at five meters from Raoul.


    Raoul is looking at the window where the man or the woman shoot the bullet and killed that zombie. Raoul shakes both of his hands to the windows, hoping that someone from there will see him and find a way to let him into the Hospital.


    Immediately, someone from the second floor is opening the window, he gets his head out, and he yells at Raoul.


    "Are you infected?"


    "NO!" yelled Raoul at the person. "I am not infected. I am fine!"


    "Are you sure? You do not act like the creatures outside?"


    "I do not!" yells Raoul, and he looks around him, seeing chaos on the streets and dozens of zombies heading to the Hospital because of the loud gunshot.


    "Head to the back of the Hospital! I will try to open the window for you there!"


    "Thank you!" says Raoul and he heads to the backside of the Hospital.


    As he runs to the back of the Hospital, he encountered five zombies who were eating a few stray dogs from the city. The zombies were focusing on the dogs, rather than Raoul going on silence mode to them and stabbing their heads with is knife. He stabbed the first one without any problem in the centre of his head. Then, the second and the third one was hard because they felt the zombie falling, and they turn to Raoul, but he stabbed their heads in such a speed, even he got impressed by it. Then, the last two are about to jump on him. Raoul kicks a zombie away, and he stabs the head of the fifth zombie. And, he jumped on the fourth one, stabbing the fourth zombie.


    When Raoul got up, he looks at his hands, he breathes heavily as he sees blood on it. He is looking delusional at the hands, and he asks himself.


    "Is that how survival feels on post-apocalyptic?"


    He didn''t have much time to think about it, he runs to the back of the Hospital.


    As soon as Raoul got there, he sees a window getting opened and a man looking around, he sees Raoul, and he signals him to come at him. He also yells "Come here!", not realizing this will attract zombies. Raoul runs to that man which was at about twelve meters distance at least, he grabbed his hand, and he gets into the Hospital. At last, Raoul will be able to rest for a bit.

 Maine Street - Part 8

    When Raoul got into the interior of the Hospital, he helps the man to block the windows by using huge cabinets and tables on the two windows, even though he used only one window. But it''s better to be sure to block any window in any case a zombie will enter and cause chaos.


    As they finished the blockage, the man takes his pistol and he aim at Raoul, which he immediately rises his hands up like a normal person who is hold at a gunpoint, or because it is not the first person who is aiming a gun at Raoul. After all he was a journalist, and these jobs are getting dangerous every day.


    "Who are you?" asks the man pointing his pistol at Raoul.


    "My name is Raoul, sir! I have come here to see if my relatives are fine." Says Raoul in a calm tone.


    "Who are your relatives? What''s their family name?"


    "Gresham."


    "Gresham?" says the man curios. "There is somebody on the floor 4 with that name."


    "Alright. Can you please let me go there? I want to take them out of there."


    "I am afraid we cannot do that." responds the man lowering his weapon. "That floor is filled with zombies, and it is way too dangerous to even try and open the doors. They might be infected already, or worse."


    "I have to try." says Raoul, and he takes his knife out, and he looks serious at it for a moment, then he looks at the man, who is feeling confused. "Let me go there. Please."


    The man, only nod his head and Raoul, thanked him, then he leaves the room, where the man continues to stay, and be sure the zombies will be not breaching through the barricade he made earlier.


    Raoul walks to the reception. He got there, and he sees a few corpses who were once healthy, ill humans and visitors, who were doing their way. There is a corpse which resembled a guard, who is now disfigured and next to him are three zombies, who got killed probably a few moments ago. Raoul crouches and inspect the body of the guard to see if he can find something useful there that it will help him to get to the fourth floor.


    It took him two minutes to find a nightstick, those type of weapons who are sued to beat the intruders or the ones who are not behaving like normal people, now, it is a weapon who can be useful to put a zombie down in case the knife will be stuck on a zombie head or any body parts. He also founds a pistol, but it is tied there, and luckily, the rope that typed the pistol to the guard belt, was easily broke, thanks to the knife Raoul got. He takes the pistol, opens the clips and checks the bullets.


    "Nine bullets," he said to himself. "I better be careful at how I am aiming."


    As he witnessed on the highway, he saw cops, killing the zombies or mutants by shooting into their head. He puts the clip back and goes to the door which is leading to the stairs who will be guiding him to the next floors. His only goal is to go on the fourth floor.


    This tale has been pilfered from Royal Road. If found on Amazon, kindly file a report.


    ***


    Raoul walks upstairs. As he takes the stairs to the floor he desired to be, he came face to face with a zombie, who is burned, and it can still walk. Raoul takes the knife, and when the zombie got at a close distance, he stabbed his head, and when he feels he "died", he pushes him to the stairs, takes the knife and continues to move forward.


    As he got to the first floor, he sees the doors locked to that floor. He looks at the windows of the doors, and he sees only blood on them, making it hard to see what is going on the other side, plus, it is also having nine piles of bodies at the door. Raoul was looking at those bodies with anxiety, but he breathe a sigh of relief because those bodies doesn''t resemble his parents or any member of his family. He continues moving forward.


    He got at the halfway to the first floor, there he sees three zombies'' bodies, who were killed by stabbing, and Raoul knows that because he saw at a bald corpse multiple stabs of a sharp knife on the head. Raoul ignores those bodies and moves forward.


    On the second floor he sees the door being unlocked, and there, he sees only bodies on the halls, and furniture who were thrown there either as a wall, or as a way to crush the undead creatures from eating human meat. He moves forward without stopping, until he reaches the fourth floor.


    Raoul arrives at the fourth floor, and there, he sees the doors unlocked, and a few bodies on the floor, blood everywhere and beds who were used as a barricade, and other beds who crushed zombie bodies. Raoul walks forward to the hallway until he got at the door where his brother sends him a message his parent it''s put to be resting.


    He takes the handle of the door, he takes a deep breath, and he opens the door. As he opened the door, is looking shocked there. His dark nightmares have been gone real. All he sees there are two bodies who resemble his parents who were eaten by a zombie creature. Their bodies are on the floor, and on the bed, is nobody there. Raoul is looking all over this room, and he doesn''t see his brother there.


    "Noˇ­" he says as he looks at the body of his mother who is a zombie, and she start groaning like a zombie he encountered so far. "No. Not you."


    Raoul is holding the knife he used to kill that zombie, his arm is shaking uncontrollably. He looks at the body of his mother who is trying to get up and attacks his son. Raoul closes his eyes, he yells, and he stabbed his mother multiple times while he screamed to disguise the stabbing sounds. He was crying while he stabbed the poor moving corpse who was a woman once and give birth to him, each him how to speak, how to be friendly, how to clean the dishes, how to love and how to show respect.


    The body of Raoul''s mother falls on the floor, and with it, falls the knife, dipped in the blood of the zombie. Raoul is looking at the body of his mother, he cries uncontrollably, and he screams while he beds from his anger. He does this for at least one minute, until he stops, and he says with a sob, not knowing what to say.


    "Sorry, dear motherˇ­ I was notˇ­ I was not here. I was not here to help you."


    He then turns around as he hears someone opening the door, he aims the gun at the thing there, and when he sees the thing there, he feels quite relieved. The person there it is his brother, holding a cane, all with blood and his clothes, all soaked in blood.


    "Brotherˇ­?" asks Raoul.


    Then, the brother of Raoul, not saying anything, he goes at his brother, he hugs him. Raoul, hugs his brother back and both of them are crying for a few moments, for their dead parents and for this reunion. For a moment, they thought they will never be seeing each other.


    A few moments later, they leave the floor, and they head to the rooftops, where the other survivors of this Hospital are and waiting for the helicopters it will take them from there.

 Maine Street - Part 9

    On the rooftop of the Hospital SM, Raoul and his brother, are entering it, and there, they got accompanied by three police officers. These are just aiming the weapons at them, and they ask these two people if they are infected or not. Which both of them responded they are not infected. The officers are letting their weapons down and let these brothers head to safety, or somewhere they can rest while the helicopters will come to take them out. That''s what his brother told him while they were going upstairs to the rooftop.


    "How many are here?" asks Raoul after he looked around him to see a few people (thanks to the huge lamps who were used at construction and installed there to attract the helicopters and help the people there to see their surroundings).


    "About twelve people." says his brother to Raoul as they walk to a bench. "With both of us, that makes 14."


    "I see." responds Raoul to his brother.


    Raoul''s brother takes off his backpack, and he takes out from there a set of pills and other medicine he took from the hospital interior before Raoul showed up. Raoul looks at the stacks of medicine put on the bench, and he asks his brother.


    "What are these for?"


    "For the people who need help." he says to his brother. "I had to go through almost every floor, to search the medicine for a man, who is having an asthma attack."


    "And you find it?"


    "Luckily, yes.", he says to Raoul, showing an inhaler. "This is the only inhaler I found. Hope this will be enough."


    He goes with the inhaler on the left, where a man sits on the hospital bed, where next to him, it is a nurse. Who is bandaging his head. He probably got hit on this attack, but who knows exactly what happened to him. Raoul''s brother gives the inhaler to that hurt man, and he immediately use it. After he took a deep breath, he looks at Raoul''s brother.


    "Thank you very much.", and he looks at the next person, who is Raoul, who decided to tag along with his brother, to see the wounded man. "And who are you?"


    You could be reading stolen content. Head to the original site for the genuine story.


    "I''m Raoul. His brother." says Raoul pointing at his brother.


    "I''m Marcel. Nice to meet you." Says the man to Raoul with a smile. "How did you enter here?"


    "Someone from the first floor helped me enter the building. I have come here with a car."


    "A car? Where is it?"


    "At a few blocks from here. I was not able to get closer because of the roadblocks and all of the zombies around."


    "Zombies? That''s what you call them?" asks Marcel toward Raoul. "We call them "Marcheurs morts". But I think zombies works too."


    "Are you alright?" asks Raoul to Marcel while the nurse almost finished the bandaging.


    "He got hit into the head with a fire extinguisher." responds the nurse to Raoul. "It looks awful, but it is nothing critical." She finishes doing the bandage to Marcel, and she leaves him, going to help other patients in need.


    "Why did you come here?" asks Marcel to Raoul, after his brother left to go to the bench where the medicine is there, he needs to inspect it.


    "I came here to help my brother, and my family. But Iˇ­ I only found him, alive and well."


    "Your brother is not in a bad state." says Marcel to Raoul. "He is superb at beating."


    "Hah. Ironic."


    "Why?"


    "When we were kids," he takes a chair from a few feet from him, he takes it close to Marcel, and he sits on it. "my brother was always a chicken in the face of danger. One time, he even run from the school because his crush was trying to ask him for a pen."


    Marcel let out a laugh as he heard what Raoul told him about his brother. Then, he looks at the city on fire, and he asks Raoul''s a question.


    "Does the things out there look that awful as it is here?"


    "Much worse." says Raoul to Marcel. "I saw thousands of zombies into these streets, and on the parking lot, there are a lot of them. Trying to enter the building."


    They hear a girl screaming from the rooftop, Raoul and with Marcel are turning to the direction where the screaming is coming from, and there they witness a zombie getting on the rooftop. Raoul takes his pistol, and he aims at the creature. He shoots a bullet, and he hit the creature head. As soon as the bullet hit the creature, he falls on his back, which falls from the rooftop, and he lands on the parking lot, where the other zombies are there, trying to barge into the Hospital.


    Raoul brother, witnessing his brother shooting the zombie with only one shoot, heads toward him, impressed, and he asks his brother.


    "Where did you get the gun?"


    "I found it here." says Raoul to his brother.


    "Really?"


    "Yes. It was at a guard corpse, I think."


    "Let that aside!" says Marcel scared. "Have you seen the creature climbing his way out here!?"


    "We have to get out of here!" yelled the same lady who screamed earlier, and she comes at Raoul. "Please, kill those creatures!"

 Maine Street - Part 10

    Raoul is looking at the part of the rooftop where that zombie was climbing it, and there he sees three more zombies coming there. Raoul aims his pistol at these creatures, and he shoots them. He used five bullets, because two weren''t hitting the zombie''s head correctly.


    "Good job." says his brother to Raoul, as he put the gun down.


    "We have to get out of here." says Marcel.


    "But where?" asks the nurse who healed Marcel earlier. "We cannot leave until the helicopter will come back."


    Suddenly, all of the people on the rooftop, are gathering at the place where Raoul was, and they proceed to talk louder and complain. This didn''t make Raoul to understand their requests, and Raoul, decides to stop this yelling and talking by saying a loud.


    "Quiet!... Look. There isn''t safe here! We cannot go back into the building. God knows how the creatures would wake up again. All we have to do is remain here, and keep close watch to the zombies who can climb the buildings and wait for the helicopter to come! If you say a helicopter will come to all of us!"


    "What if will not?" asks a man with a missing left arm into the group.


    "It has to." says the nurse to that patient. "Tim told us via radio he will come back with help in a few hours. We have to remain here and wait."


    Some survivors there nodded, sighed and swear, because they do not have much to do either than hoping the helicopter will come and take them from there. Raoul and with his brother are going to the edge of the rooftop, and there, they look down, as they both looked, they are feeling scared by the number of zombies who are climbing the building.


    On the night, it is hard to see dead eaters or zombies, because of the lack of light outside, but the electricity of this city still remains intact for at least three to seven days. And the light coming out from the interior of the Hospital, helped Raoul and his brother see at least fifteen zombies climbing their way up to the top.


    These two brothers are quickly leaving the edge and warned the survivors there to equip something sharp and beat the upcoming zombies. Three survivors have left their "safe areas", they took something that can resemble a weapon. One of them even took a monitor who was put there for a reason. Raoul passed his brother the knife, and he takes from the ground one metal bar he found it there.


    In a few seconds, three zombies appear on the rooftop, and all of the armed survivors are taking their weapons and push these things to the edge of the rooftop, making them fall from the high altitude, on the area who was once a parking lot and not a place infested with hundreds of zombies. Other zombies were about to approach to the edge, but these five survivors pushed them down pretty easily because these things were only using their hands and feet to climb the building, not to grab the weapon they are holding or dodging the attack. The dude who got the monitor even threw it from the rooftop, and it pushed back four zombies, making them fall from the third floor.


    "Nice throw." praise Raoul to that survivor.


    Unauthorized usage: this tale is on Amazon without the author''s consent. Report any sightings.


    "Thanks." says the survivor dressed in chirurgical uniform and with a bandana on his head.


    After a while, the group of five survivors has killed all fifteen zombie who were trying to get into the rooftop and cause a big mess. The group was congratulating by the people on the rooftop for doing this.


    Thirty minutes later, a helicopter is coming to the Hospital, and everyone, who was sitting and waiting for it to come, they are seeing a new light of hope. The helicopter lands on the helipad, and as soon as he did, all of the survivors present there are running to it, hoping everyone will get at least a seat there.


    In just one minute, all of the seats were occupied, which were only 9 seats available. Unfortunately, Raoul, his brother and two officers are being left out there. The pilot assured them they will send another helicopter which will take them out of there. The helicopter flies from the helipad, letting Raoul together with these three survivors, to endure a few more moments on the rooftop of this Hospital.


    They look at the helicopter, flying away from them, and letting them deal with the zombies who can climb the building or with any kind of creature here.


    "We gotta stay strong here." says one of the officers to the three survivors. "We are low on numbers, but I think we can be able to hold our position against these creatures!"


    "If they will manage to climb the building." says Raoul''s brother to the officer.


    "Don''t worry, kid." says the other officer, who is a man not wearing his helmet like the other officer and an old looking officer. "These creatures were not going to go through this door that easily." he points at the door where Raoul and his brother came through earlier.


    And suddenly, the door gets knocked and pounded by the inside. The survivors are quickly turning to the door, they all look frightened. The officers are preparing their weapons to shoot the creatures, while Raoul and his brother, are not having the pistols and assault rifles these two officers are carrying it, they are preparing their knives and metal pipes. Raoul has his gun, but he has only a few more bullets left, and he decides to keep those bullets for something important and on emergency cases.


    While they are on their positions, prepared for anything, they heard an explosion going from the streets. One of the officers goes to see what is going on there, and as he saw what is happening on the street, he backs away, and he told the other survivors to looks what he stumbles upon. The survivors are looking what is happening on the street, and they are shocked.


    A big airplane is crashing at probably one kilometre from them, destroying some houses on his way, the streets and probably killing thousands of zombies at that location.


    "Oh my God!" yelled an officer starting to be frightened. "Hope someone will be okay!"


    "We cannot do anything for them." says the authoritarian officer, then, he looks at the door who is getting opened and almost falls. He sees five zombies coming to them. "We''ve got DEADS, here!"


    And the survivors are jumping on these creatures. Raoul stabs a zombie with the metal pipe on the neck, he turns the zombie around, and he pushes him a few meters. He didn''t get at the edge of the rooftop, but that push was powerful enough to take the metal pipe out, and made Raoul take it back and then hit the creature head at least six times until it stopped moving.


    Raoul looks at the corpse while he breathes heavily due to the intense effort. He looks at his teammates and he see them putting the zombies who got here. Then, he looks at the door, and he see much more zombies coming at them. He gets the metal pipe, and he run to the other zombies. He screams while he does a powerful swing of the metal pipe, who breaks the jaw of a zombie.


    The other survivors see the upcoming zombies, and they jump to attack. Raoul''s brother was almost bitten in the process on the left hand, but an officer fired the assault rifle to the head of that creature, killing it instantly. The corpse falls on the rooftop, Raoul''s brother looks stunned at it, then the officer, who saved the man, told him.


    "Get it together! Or else you will become one of them!"


    That officer sees a few more zombies showing up from that door, and he shoots with the other those zombies while they are approaching slowly.

 Maine Street - Part 11

    Meanwhile, Raoul has killed the second zombie by making him fall into the knees and sticking the metal pipe into the other creature head. As he has done that, he almost falls, and he looks at the zombie, who is falling on his back, with the metal pipe stuck on the head.


    "Fuckˇ­ This is way brutal than any video game I''ve played."


    "R-Raoulˇ­" says his brother walking slowly to Raoul.


    "What is it?" asks Raoul worried.


    "We-We have to get out of here."


    "What? Why?"


    "It''s not safe." says his brother looking at the officers who are having a hard time to put the creatures down who still keep coming but in groups of three or five zombies. "We have to get out of here, or else we will die."


    "No. The helicopter will come back! We have to remain here and wait for it!"


    "Guys!" says the officer looking at Raoul and his brother. "We have a big problem. And we have to leave this place."


    "But the helicopter, sir?" asks the other officer who shoot the last zombie who came. "We cannot leave now."


    "We have to, Pierre." says the officer to that man. "This or we will become food for these fuckers." he points his assault rifle at the head of the creature, and he shoots it without mercy.


    The other officer, he goes to that door, he closes it, and he uses a bed to block it. Then, seeing it will not be enough, he goes with the second officer, and he carries a desk who was at the rooftop, for some reason.


    This tale has been unlawfully lifted from Royal Road; report any instances of this story if found elsewhere.


    The boss of these officers is going at Raoul and his brother, and he tells them.


    "Look. At the police station. We can communicate with the help. With the helicopter pilot, and we can get a ride from here. But to do that, we have to find a way out of this building."


    "And going into the building it will be dangerous considering the infected mutants there." says Raoul to that officer. "And your people have already locked the way. So What other way we have?"


    "The vents!" says Raoul''s brother, and he points at a vent. "We can break it and use it to go through the hospital."


    "The vents are not working like in the movies, civilian." says the officer named Pierre, he looks at his colleagues, and he shows them a rope they''ve got. "I''ve found a rope here. This one might help us get into the windows of a building and making our way out from the interior."


    "We cannot use it to repel from the rooftop?"  suggest Raoul.


    "Unfortunately, it is not long enough." says the officer, who then goes with the rest of the survivors at the edge of a building, he throws the rope while he holds it, just to show them the rope can only reach the third floor. "You see?"


    "Yes." says Raoul. "But doesn''t these builds have fire escapes or stairs."


    "It does, but those were supposed to be repaired three months ago, and they are very unstable."


    "I seeˇ­ Then our only way?" asks Raoul at the officers.


    "Yes."


    Raoul sighs, and he looks at his brother, who only nods in his agreement. He is feeling very scared because a few seconds ago he was almost killed and became a creature like the ones in the building and outside it. He agrees with the plan and the officers proceed to tie the rope to a something sturdy, like to a close vent to the edge of the rooftop.


    After the rope was tied, the survivors proceed to repel from the building, one by one. The first one to repel was Pierre, who repelled until to the fifth floor, and from there he smashed the window. He then, looked around him, and after he made sure there will be no zombies, he looked up, and he told his teammates in a loud voice.


    "Nobody is here! You can come along!"


    And so, they did. One by one, all of them got safely to the fifth floor.

 Maine Street - Part 12

    Now, the team of five survivors, have decided to leave the rooftop since they were running out of ammo and weapons to protect themselves from the following zombies. The three officers have come to an agreement to go to the closest police station from here, and take fire-weapons from there, to help them protect against these creatures who are still unknown how they appeared on this Earth.


    These five survivors are leaving the room they entered it. It was a room with number 406, a room where once was a man with diarrhoea and another who was having problems with broken legs. Now, they are laying on the floors, on their zombie corpses, killed earlier by the man who helped Raoul get into the building or by Raoul''s brother. As they got on the hall of the Hospital, they encounter there, five zombies who are crawling with them, all of them are having their legs chopped.


    "Kill them!" ordered the officer to the others.


    They quickly jump on these zombies, and they stab their heads with knives and broken glass from the ground. Raoul was the one who stabbed the zombie head with the broken glass, he powerfully stuck the thing between the eyes of the zombie, which it immediately killed it.


    The five survivors are heading to the downstairs, and they take the stairs to the first floor. As they descend downstairs, zombie''s groans could be heard in the halls, and some noises that represent something hitting walls or falling on the cold floors. Raoul and the other thought that a zombie might be hitting his head on the walls, just like a maniac or a man with mental problems from an Asylum with bad reputation.


    They successfully got to the first floor, and from there, they saw the main entrances are blocked with furniture pieces, and even with an ambulance car. But not only doors are the ones blocked, even windows are blocked. As they search for the man there who remain here, as Raoul''s says, they came across some zombies who are still alive. Raoul has taken one of them, and he analysed something quickly about the creature he stabbed with a broken glass in his head. The creature got only his throat cut.


    "Maybe these creatures. If they have their throats cut, they pretend to be deadˇ­ or they fall down unconscious." says Raoul to himself as he leaves the zombie he killed. "Maybe the person who killed it didn''t notice these creatures are having a weak point."


    "Guys!" yelled an officer after a few minutes of searching that man. "Look here!" he points at an open door to an office where a Doctor used it to consult the patients.


    The four survivors are gathering there, and they look at the interior of the room. There, they see something truly macabre there. The man, who helped Raoul, is laying on the floor, with a machete stuck on his forehead, at the place where zombies were killed by the group so far.


    "This manˇ­" says the old officer getting close to the corpse of the man. He takes the machete stuck on his head, and he looks at the man. "You did good. You may rest now."


    They leave the corpse of that poor survivors alone with the stench of other zombies, and they are heading outside this room, to the windows of the room where Raoul says he took it to enter here. They think it will be much safer if they take the same route Raoul took it to enter here, but as they got into that room, they see something shocker than they expect it, twelve zombies who have managed to break through the barricades, and all are either crawling or walking normally to them.


    Did you know this text is from a different site? Read the official version to support the creator.


    As soon as they saw the zombies, they proceed to attack them. The officers proceed to shoot the zombies coming at them, while Raoul and his brother are backing away because they do not have guns at them, and getting close in a room with zombies while people with guns are shooting at them, it is way too dangerous. They thought this would be a successful fight, but one of the things, who is crawling managed to bite the leg of an officer.


    That officer takes out a horrific scream while the zombie was biting the pants of the officer. The man shoots the thing, and he tries to shake it off from his leg, but the thing has managed to grab it tight. When the old officer came to bash the thing head with his gun, he looks worried at his colleague, and he asks him.


    "Is it bad?"


    "I-I don''t know!" yelled the man, and he continues to shoot the last zombie who was crawling and used the zombies laying there as a cover, or as a snake in the jungle to "camouflaged" with the environment.


    "We gotta go!" says Raoul''s brother to the officers who were trying to see the wound of their fellow officer at the leg. He points at the wave of zombies who are coming from their left.


    "Oh, fuck!" says the Leader of the Officer. "Everyone! Move out!"


    All of the five survivors are entering that room they recently killed the infected. Raoul and with an officer are blocking the door with pieces of furniture, and they leave the building by using the windows. All of them got outside, and they only see there a few zombies, not as many as who were in the house.


    "Andrew." says the old officer looking at the officer who got bitten in the leg. "Are you alright?"


    "Bossˇ­" says Andrew to his leader, he looks worried, and he swallows his saliva. "Pleaseˇ­ Leave me here."


    The leader is looking at the other survivors, who are already feeling uneasy. Some of them are felling sad, while Raoul and his brother, are feeling bad for not being able to help the man in this situation.


    "If you wish." says the Leader after he let out a sight.


    "Thanks." says Andrew who is handling his assault rifle, and the bullets he had at him. "Take it. You will need it more than I need it."


    "You are a good man, Andrew." says Pierre feeling depressed, and he tries to not cry.


    "You too, Pierre." says Andrew and he shook hands with him, then he gave him a hug.


    Andrew shook hands with the Leader of the group, and he tells him, "Be careful out there.". Which the boss, only nods. He did not cry, but his face was all written he is feeling broken that another beloved comrade of his office has been killed in this apocalypse.


    Raoul and with his brother have shaken the hands of Andrew.


    After that break up, the four survivors are continuing to move forward, while Andrew is heading to the wall of this Hospital. He lies on the concrete of it. He looks all around him, and he only sees there is the night sky. He sighs as he looks to his left, and he sees three corpses of zombies getting up from the ground. He takes out his pistol, and he checks the ammunition. He only has one bullet left.


    "Shit." he says angrily. He aims his pistol on his forehead, but before he shoots his head, he looks at the direction where his teammates left him to die there. He sees nobody there, which makes Andrew glad, and without any hesitation, he pulls the trigger.


    His corpse is falling on the concrete. His head is having a big hole where the bullet has gone through and killed him instantly. The blood is dripping from that hole and his body stays there for a few moments, before it will become a decomposed body which will be eaten by the creatures named zombies, mutants or whatever name these people gave to them.

 Maine Street - Part 13

    Meanwhile, Pierre, Boss, Raoul and his brother, have left the Hospital area, and as they were about to cross the street, the sound of a gun got heard into this city. The group heard the sound, and they know Andrew chose to kill himself. His Boss thought this will make Andrew to avoid becoming a zombie, because Andrew saw one of his teammates, on a scene, who decided to end himself when he got bitten on his left arm. The team did not decide to go and see what happens, they have to move forward by any means necessary.


    As they crossed the street, these four survivors are running to the cars who are left on the road, some of them working, and others don''t. These four survivors proceed to inspect the cars, to see if anyone from them is working out fine and well. They need a car which will help them to go to the closest police station they can trust. As they found the working car, which is a Mercedes-Benz, the group gets on it quickly. The leader decides to take the driver seat, while his comrades are taking the back and the front seats. The leader proceeds to drive this car from the streets of this bloody Hospital to the closest police station they can rely on.


    The police station they have to go it is located at about a few kilometres from the city, but, there is a problem, the streets are either blocked or filled with cars and corpses. And in most movies, when a car smashes a human corpse it will either block the car, or if they can past it through. The guys decide to take the small street since they can give them an advantage since the highways are always filled in the movies, and Raoul also warned them about the dangers of the highway.


    The entire road to the police station was quiet and everyone was looking nervous outside. They have seen countless zombies on the street, somewhere trying to run at the moving car, others were trying to crawl at it. These survivors have also seen a few zombies climbing huge buildings, like those from earlier. Raoul was looking very terrified at these creatures. He knew these creatures aren''t a joke like in the movies, and they can be extremely hard to defeat them.


    The entire trip took thirty minutes, but it was a waste. When they arrived close to the police station, they discovered there, the entire building, in fire and humans screaming. They see officers on the ground, being eaten by one to five zombies, inmates trying to fight a few zombies, some managing to do that, others failing miserably.


    As these four survivors stayed on their car and looked all around them, the Leader of this group, told them.


    "We have to get out of here!"


    "What?" asks the other officer. "Why, sir?!"


    "We have to!" says the Leader. "This place is in danger. And there is nothing to retrieve back!"


    "And where we will go then?" asks the officer.


    "To Maine!" says the officer. "I got a place there. I even know a radio station who can help us get a helicopter to our location."


    "You sure it will be safe?" asks Raoul to the Leader who already stepped on the gas and leave this location, because some survivors were already running at them. One inmate even was shooting their car, but a zombie jumped on that inmate back and eat his neck.


    "It will be." says the Leader after he takes a turn and drive the car to the road which is indicating that they have a few more kilometres until they arrive at Maine. "This place I''ve got, will be safe. We''ve got water, food, some guns and even gas in case the worst will come. The place is locked up with a tight security. Only I knew the password."


    Help support creative writers by finding and reading their stories on the original site.


    "If you say so." says Raoul''s brother. "But, we will help these people?"


    "There is nothing we can do for them."


    "But- "


    "No. We have to leave them on their own."


    The car continues to drive to the road, which is leading to Maine. While the car is driving on the night sky, Raoul looks on the sky, and he sees a few helicopters leaving the cities. He showed the helicopters to the other survivors, which the Leader tells them.


    "These helicopters are most likely from the Military Group."


    "Military Group?" asks Raoul.


    "I''ll explain to you at the house." he looks at Raoul, and he notices he has a camera in hold at the neck like any journalist or reporter nowadays. "Say, you are a reporter, right?"


    "ˇ­yes." says Raoul looking at the night sky. "Why?"


    "Well. You would to hear what I say. This might be your biggest scope you ever heard or got."


    "What do you mean?"


    "I, as a police officer, was secretly warned by the World Alliance about something like this. I''ve got all the information at that house."


    As he said that, everyone from the car was feeling some Goosebumps. The Leader looked at them thanks to the mirror from the front seats.


    "Boss." says his colleague. "Are you sure it is a good idea to tell them aboutˇ­ Z Scenario?"


    "It is already too late, Andrew." says the Leader who is driving forward. "This thing has already started."


    ***


    A few hours later, the team of four survivors have successfully arrived at the location of the house owned by the Leader of the Police section. This man has his house very deep into the forests of that area, and a lot of securities which is truly remarkable. Sentry turrets who shoot tranquillizer to the intruders, and security cameras with alert system. And now, these cameras are useless because the electricity will be shut down any time, while the turrets will still work because they are powered by the sun.


    The leader parks the car in front of the house, and he leaves the car with the other survivors. All four of them are entering the house. The Leader opens the door of the house by unlocking three locks with key, retina check and saliva check. It was a long process, but the system let them enter the highly protect house. The Leader is the first person entering the house, then it is followed by Andrew and Raoul with his brother are entering the house. Raoul is the one locking the door behind him under the Leader request. After Raoul locked the door, the leader told them.


    "Go in the living room. I will bring some supplies and the information you will need."


    The survivors are going to the room he tells it is the living room, and the Leader he is heading upstairs to give these survivors a piece of information they need it to hear about this incident.


    The survivors are looking all around the room called Living Room. It looks like a nice room. It has a really great couch as Raoul''s brother tested it, and with Raoul. Andrew is looking at the windows, and he puts the curtains on. Then, he goes to turn on the lamps to help them see the surroundings (they could see the other furniture pieces thanks to the light from the hall). Andrew is going to the couch, and he sits there. He drops the pistol he got on the belt to the table, and he looks at the two survivors who came along with him.


    "You two can beat the zombies." he says to them. "But you can shoot weapons?"


    "Yes." says Raoul. "I have done some polygon in my free time at Maine."


    "Oh really?" says Andrew impressed. "It''s good to know." and he looks at Raoul''s brother.


    "No." he responds. "I am not very good at handling fire-weapons."


    "But you can beat the things without a sweat with a bat or anything. And that is great."


    "What do you know about this apocalypse?"


    "Nothing. They just told us that on this day everything will be changed, prepare some guns, and help anyone in need. That''s all the higher ups told us."


    "And that''s what your Boss told you?" he says, and he points at the man who is still upstairs to find the information he will give it to them.


    "Yes. But nowˇ­ I think he will tell us the truth we need to hear."


    A few moments later, the Leader and the Owner of this house, comes at them, with two folders. He puts those two on the table at the close to the couch, and he sits on a chair he took from the desk he used to write rapports to his work or just read a book or two at his desk. He sits close to the table, and he grab the first folder.


    "The Z Virus." says the Owner reading the title of that folder, and he looks at everyone to be sure they are listening to him. He opens the folder, and he proceed to read it to the three survivors from there.

 Maine Street - Part 14

    "The Z Virus." says the Owner reading the title of that folder, and he looks at everyone to be sure they are listening to him. He opens the folder, and he proceed to read it to the three survivors from there.


    This can only be read only when the scenario Z-Virus as we call it will happen. There is the only document that can help you understand the things are going on at this moment.


    Virus name: Z-Virus, most are either called Z-745, other Z-659, but either way, these viruses are the same, but with large mutation.


    The ladder of dangerous:


    First ladder: Z-100 and Z-345 (Zombies who are mostly depicted from mass media, creatures that can infect the humans and eat either human, alive or dead, flesh, sometimes they can eat humans too)


    Characteristics (not totally accurate): Yellowish or Green skin, other types present brown skin which is totally different because these types (as far as this research got) it can eat only zombie meat; others can climb walls by using nothing, and can scream to attract hordes of zombies.


    Ways to kill them: Shoot to the head, blow their head, anything that can destroy the brain of the creature. Do not believe they are dead if you shoot them anything instead that part of the head. Some of them are sneaky!


    Lifespan: undetermined


    Second ladder: Z-455, Z-234, Z-112 and Z-233 (Zombies that can be a pain to destroy or even contained, they eat humans and animal, but some of them, Z-112, doesn''t want to eat them, and instead he only eats their bones)


    Characteristics (not totally accurate): They differ each instance, these types of zombies or creatures are having the same skin colour, but different aspects. Here is a small list of the capabilities these creatures can do.


    Z-455: Creature that is able to smash a car, it poses only huge arms, deadly enough to break almost anything.


    Z-234: Zombies that are able to spit blood which as soon as they do that, they die. This blood can infect the survivors and make them into these creatures, mostly the one from the first ladder.


    Z-112: Can be described as a crawler creature, like the ones from the first ladder who got their legs shoot. They crawl and only eats the humanoid bones if they manage to find.


    Z-233: Creature that his height grows, and it can throw from benches to small cars. The creature is very destructive, but it can be easily killed, like the others.


    Support the creativity of authors by visiting the original site for this novel and more.


    Ways to kill them: Shoot to the head, blow their head, anything that can destroy the brain of the creature. Do not believe they are dead if you shoot them anything instead that part of the head. Some of them are sneaky!


    Lifespan: Undetermined.


    The Leader puts the documents back on the table, and he looks at the three survivors, who are feeling doomed because now they are taken from their "cheerful" and "no worries" life they''ve had. The Leader goes to a small shelf, he takes from there a bottle of beer, and he opens it, he then puts it on the table.


    "You can drink if you want it." says the Leader taking a few glasses from the under table and put it there. "This thing will be over if everything is according to plan."


    "What do you mean?" says Raoul who is feeling anxious.


    "Check the second folder. It contains the plan of this scenario, if everything is going according to the Organization plan."


    "Who is that Organization?" asks Raoul to the Leader.


    "A group who is always hidden. Not even us, from police station, knows about them. They just gave these folders to the ones who are running a few police station and told us to keep them intact. We had to do what they''ve told us. We kept them, and we never talked about them. In my case, the President of France gave it to me, on a night in September." he pours some beer into the glass, and he looks at Raoul who is already looking at that folder. "Soˇ­ Are you guys going to follow the plan or try to do whatever you want?"


    "Do you think this plan would actually work?" asks Raoul to the Leader while his brother is feeling already nervous and Andrew is checking the other folder who was put on the table by "Leader" of this group.


    "Most likely yes." says the Leader, and he takes a small sip from the beer. "And we have to do it, or elseˇ­ You will become one of them."


    "Are there the only zombies they''ve collected so far?" asks Raoul''s brother to the Leader.


    "I think." says the Leader of Raoul''s brother. "The files did not specify if the virus could mutate further. But we will be fine."


    "Are you sure?"


    "Yes."


    "Alrightˇ­ And now. What we will be doing?"


    "Hide it here. We will also try to go to that radio station to try and contact the authorities."


    "Where is that station?" asks Andrew, and he put the file down.


    "A few kilometres from here. I do not know the exact distance, but it will probably take thirty minutes to one hour with car. And since the streets will become much more blocked and filled with creatures roaming around and blocking our wayˇ­ Walking will be the only source of us to travel. And we have to be careful because there might be people who will want our house."


    "In movies they are always coming over and take territories to create their own city or "community" where they have to live." says Raoul.


    "Even if they will be doing that." says the Leader, and he puts the bottle of beer on the table. "We will be turning on the bomb."


    Everyone from the room are looking shocked at the Leader. Then, the man takes out a thing with a button. He shoes to the three survivors. Raoul''s brother was about to rise from his seat and take the thing, but the man quickly left his seat, and he hide it into his library.


    "This is on the emergency cases, when the things will be escalating bad." says the man to the three survivors. "Now. Let''s go to sleep, shall we? It is already getting too late, and tomorrow we will go to that radio station. Alright?"


    The survivors were agreeing with the leader. Raoul and his brother were about to try and talk more with their "Leader", but he did not even try to listen. He goes to shut down the light from the room, and he guided the people to their rooms.


    Raoul and his brother are taking a guest room, which is having two separates beds. Andrew is taking another room, probably also a guest room. And the leader is going to his room.


    As they got to their rooms, everyone tried to sleep, and rest. They are all terrified, but not because of the zombies, but because they are staying under a bomb which can be detonated at by just pressing a button.


    And that''s how the first day of the apocalypse has gone for Raoul.

 Maine Street - Part 15

    On the next day, the team of four survivors waked up, one by one. The first one was the Leader, then was Raoul who woke up thirty minutes later. He didn''t check the clock to see the time, but, by judging the time outside light is about to appear, Raoul can say it is early in the morning, which is right, it is hour six.


    "Good morningˇ­" says the Leader seeing Raoul entering the kitchen, dressed in a T-shirt and a pair of pants he was given by the Owner of the house who put it on the bed for them.


    "Raoul." says Raoul. "I believe we did not properly introduce each other."


    "Raoul, right? And you are right." says the Owner, and he hands him a candy bar he took from the shelf when Raoul entered the room. "My name is Jon."


    "Nice to meet you, Jon. But umˇ­ What do you plant a bomb here?"


    "Wellˇ­ For two reasons." he sat on the chair on his table, and he looks at Raoul who is starting to wrap the candy bar. "The first reason is the DEADS who can come here at any time, and the other oneˇ­ It is personal, alright?"


    "I understand." says Raoul to Jon, and he sits on the other chair, he looks all around the kitchen. "Thanks for helping us and letting to stay here."


    "Don''t worry, about it." says Jon. "You two showed courage and will to fight at the Hospital. You two are truly able to live longer on this new world."


    "You think we will ever be able to come back to the way we were?"


    "Not sure about this. Hope we can. I don''t want to see an infection like this becoming a normal infection like Coronavirus. This disease has destroyed my life."


    "It has destroyed many lives and made a lot of victims, killing them slowly."


    "Looks we both were gone through sad times."


    They look at each other. Both of them are taking a sigh, then they shake their head in approval. Raoul is looking at a wall which displays a few pictures with the owner of this house, with two kids all around him. Raoul thought these kids are his, or probably his grandfather.


    "Those were my son kidsˇ­ They both died long before this apocalypse begun."


    "ˇ­I''m sorry." says Raoul to the owner of the Raoul, and he can feel the loss of someone important from his life because yesterday he experienced the death of his dear parents. "I-I also lost some important people."


    The story has been stolen; if detected on Amazon, report the violation.


    "Parents, right? Your brother has felt angry when he was watching his parents being eaten by these creatures. He took a gun from an officer, and he shoot the things until the clip was empty. This manˇ­ Is lost."


    "How do you know?"


    "Those eyes." he says, and he takes a sip from his mug. "I know those eyes better than anyone. I dealt with a lot of lost men in my life."


    "Good morning!" says Andrew entering the kitchen, and he looks at the owner of this house. "What''s happening?"


    "We were discussing our mission, Andrew." says the Owner to Andrew, the last colleague alive.


    "Good." says Andrew who is heading to the table, he sits on an empty chair. "We should take weapons at us?"


    "Of course. But remember," he looks at the both survivors. "We will not use guns on this mission."


    "Why?" asks Raoul. "Why not?"


    "Because the sound attracts zombies. And it creates that horde." replies Andrew.


    "Correct. Plus, the ammo must be saved for the dangerous cases. We might have enough to hold the radio station, but we have to be quick. We will only go there and take the equipment."


    "But how we can carry a huge equipment?" asks Raoul. "We will only take the essentials?"


    "Yes. And for that, we will take a car from the parking lot. Thankfully, most of the cars in that area are electric or doesn''t need a key to be turned on." he takes a last sip from his mug, and he gets up from the table. "We will leave in thirty minutes. Everyone, prepare for it. Raoul. Go and wake up your brother."


    Raoul only approved the task by nodding his head, and he walks to the room where his Brother is sleeping. When he left the room, the Owner and Andrew are in the kitchen.


    After almost a minute, Raoul enters the room without knocking, and as soon as entered the room, he sees his brother, getting up from the bed, he is wearing only pants. He turned around, and he sees Raoul entering the room.


    "Slept well last night?"


    "ˇ­Not really." says his brother.


    Raoul sits next to his brother, and he looked at him.


    "I got a lot of nightmares with my- our parents. Beingˇ­ Beingˇ­" he is hiding his own cries with his right hand. He lets out a few sobs.


    "Brotherˇ­ I am sorry I was not able to come at the right time." says Raoul hugging his brother, he feels responsible for the things that happened there, even if it wasn''t his fault, technically.


    After thirty minutes, the group of four survivors, all prepared and geared up with weapons like baseball bats, police baston, knives and pistols, they are prepared to walk a few kilometres to the closest radio station. Ulric got two knives and a pistol with 12 ammo. His brother got only a baseball bat. Andrew got a pistol but with 36 ammo which are only two clips with twelve bullets capacity. And the Owner, he got a police baston, a knife and a pistol with ten bullets.


    Before they were about to leave the house, the Owner goes to the door, and he locks it. He puts the defence and security system on. He also turned on the turret system to catch any walkers or zombies or a survivor who cares for this house.


    "This is our base." he said to Raoul''s brother when he asked him why he does that. "We will come back here and rest until the help will arrive."


    After he finished the preparations, the team of four survivors proceed to walk a few kilometres to the closest radio station. The place where they will have to take the things they are carving for the most and are extremely useful into this apocalypse, a radio station that will be able to call help for their evacuation.

 Maine Street - Part 16

    For about an hour, the team of survivors is still walking to a street with damaged cars, and corpse of zombies killed, or ready to be reanimated like in the movies The Walking Dead or series Z Nation. Raoul hit a zombie laying on the road, and as he softly hit it, the thing suddenly started to get up, but it got quickly put down by his brother with a baseball bat. With only three hits hard, he breaks the back of the thing head. The walker body falls on the road.


    "Nice hit." says Raoul to his brother as he pulled off the knife he was about to use on that zombie.


    "Thanks." says Raoul''s brother.


    "You two be careful." says Andrew coming at them. "That zombie and hit noise might attract these dead on us!"


    "Look out!" says the Owner seeing three zombies running at Raoul, his brother and at Andrew.


    They quickly take out their weapons and defend themselves against these runners. Andrew shoots two of them, while Raoul''s brother hit the thing head and made it fall, but then it got up, and Andrew shoot another bullet to that thing.


    "Andrew!" says the Owner of the cabin coming at his colleague. "What the fuck! You should conserve your ammunition!"


    "Sorry." says Andrew putting his pistol back to the shitbag.


    "We have to move forward." says Jon. "We don''t have too much to walk anymore.


    A few minutes later, these people got at a street, with three houses who look abandoned. They see five bodies of humans, all on the road. They also see a few cow''s corpses, all were eaten by these zombies and with their guts and intestines out in the sunlight. Andrew and Jon have decided to check a cow organ. Jon took a gut from it, and he looked at it.


    "These creatures let a weird substance on it." he shows to Raoul the substance he shows it. "Maybe this is the thing that it creates zombies."


    "Are you sure, chief?" asks Andrew.


    "Yes." he said that as he takes a small bottle from his backpack, empty. He takes that gut, which doesn''t measure two centimetres, and he carefully put it into the bottle. He then closed it and let it into his backpack. He then looks at his group, all confused.


    "This thing might help the scientists to find a cure."


    "Is it truly a safe idea?" asks Raoul concerned.


    "Don''t worry about it." says Jon to Raoul. "I will keep it into the basement and use it when the time will come."


    "I understand." says Raoul to Jon.


    They continued to move, and they decide to take a closer look at the surrounding houses. Hoping they can find something valuable from there, that will help them in their cases. As they entered a house, all they saw there, were some horrible smell. Raoul told his teammates.


    "This smell is similar like the ones from the Hospital."


    "There might be bodies there." says Andrew. "Probably still decomposing."


    Reading on this site? This novel is published elsewhere. Support the author by seeking out the original.


    "There is that." says Jon, and he looks at these three survivors who are following him. "I and Andrew are checking the upper floor, you," he points at Raoul''s brother. "And Raoul. Are checking this first floor. If you see movement, you yell our names. Understand?"


    "Yes!" says Raoul and his brother in unison.


    All these four survivors, are already going to their floors, to check how are the things there and search for some helpful supplies this place will offer them.


    Raoul and with his brother are entering the living room, there all they can see it is nothing. They also see a parrot in a cage, dead because of the lack of food or because the owner wanted to see him dead. That parrot it is a Psittacus epitheca''s a parrot species known as Grey parrot, or African gray parrot. A small parrot which is ten inches in height, and probably a few thousand grams in weight. Raoul looks at his brother as both of them look at the parrot.


    "Do you think the animals can catch this virus?"


    "I hope not." responds Raoul to his brother question. "I''d rather not get attacked in the middle of the night by a zombie bear."


    "That''s what I thought. Hope the virus is only happening to humans." he looks at a sofa, and there, he sees a pistol.


    Raoul''s brother takes the pistol from the sofa, and he checks the ammo box of it. It only has three bullets there. Raoul brother takes the pistol, he puts on his belt, and continues searching the first floor with his brother.


    After five minutes, all they have found there, were only a few supplies, such as food, water, wine, beer and candies. They also found weapons (besides the pistol Raoul''s brother found it there) such as three knives and a sword who was hanging on the wall. Raoul''s brother took that sword, and keep it. The sword he took doesn''t resemblance the katana style from Japan, it represents the one from medieval era, which is not as powerful as katana in most zombie movies, but powerful enough to cut a zombie limb since their limbs are getting weaker with the time of infection.


    The survivors are leaving the house they checked, feeling happy they''ve found something useful to help them into this apocalypse. All four of them are leaving the property and entering the next house. Before they would be able to open the door of the small house, who is having only a first floor, Jon hears some growls into the interior of the house as he was about to open the door. he turns back to the three survivors, and he signal them to be careful. They only shook their heads in approval. Jon grabs the handle of the door, and he opens wide.


    In a matter of a few seconds, a zombie runs from the house, to Raoul''s brother, who was quick in action, and he stabbed the creature chest. But this did not stop the creature. The creature was moving his arms fast, and was trying to run over the defender, but Raoul''s brother, he holds the thing with his sword. He holds steady enough until Raoul came and stabbed the creature head with his knife, stopping from running and attacking. His brother retracts the sword from the zombie, and he looks at his brother as he breathes heavily.


    "Thanks."


    "We have to go." says Jon.


    He is the first one entering the building, then Andrew, and later the two brothers are entering the house, all armed with knives and swords. Jon goes to the kitchen and looks for food supplies. Andrew goes to the living room, then Raoul goes to the bedrooms and his brother is following him.


    Raoul enters the first bedroom, and his brother decides to go to the second bedroom. Raoul sees nobody there, not a human, a zombie or anything that moves and bites. He checks under the bed, and there he sees nothing, then, he goes to the furniture. Raoul opens the closet and there he finds clothes put in order. He looked at them, and all of them resemble the one wore by a girl who is most likely small size since most of them got the kids size. Raoul thinks for a minute about the small girl who was having this room, he wonders if they are okay, and it is not the one who they killed earlier. He leaves the room without anything since it did not have anything useful to help in their fight to survive.


    Raoul walks to the other room, there he sees his brother, who is also leaving the other room, he looks at his brother, and he asks him.


    "Did you find anything?"


    "No." responds Raoul. "You?"


    "Nothing."


    "Probably Jon and Andrew would have a bigger luck than us."


    They got in the kitchen and in the living room. The other survivors didn''t have any luck in finding anything. Jon, Andrew, Raoul and his brother are leaving the house, and decides to walk further to the radio station, which is at a few kilometres away.

 Maine Street - Part 17

    Two hours later, the survivor team have got at the radio station. but, they encounter a problem. They see two vans, who are blocking the entrance of the building where the radio station is located, all the windows and the doors are locked, blocked with logs like a barricade. The team of four survivors are hiding in the trees from the forest they took it to get it there, and they are whispering to each other.


    "There are survivors there?" asks Raoul to Jon, who is next to him.


    "Not sure." says Jon, taking a small peak at the radio station, then he looks at Andrew and Raoul''s brother. "We have to make sure they are peaceful and not bad people."


    "Rightˇ­ So, what is the plan, boss?"


    "You," he points at Andrew. "And you," he then points at Raoul''s brother. "You are trying to go at the behind door of the building. It must have a door where the employees are allowed to enter. If it is locked, try to break it through, or use a window."


    "Alright, boss!" says Andrew and he walks behind a few trees. then following by Raoul''s brother.


    "And our plan. Is to go at them." he points at the blocked entrance with vans. He gets his gun prepared, and leaves the hideout.


    Raoul follows Jon orders, and he equips his pistol, and he is slowly walking at the back of Jon. These two survivors are walking forward to those vans. Raoul is feeling nervous because the people inside may not be good people like the one from the bus he encounters yesterday, or like the ones from the Hospital Rooftop. He is pulling the safety from his pistol and aims at the building, as Jon does. They walk slowly, all preparing for shooting anything on sight.


    As they walk closely to the vans, they hear a growl coming from the building. Raoul and Jon are stopping from walking, they aim their weapons and yell.


    "Hello! Is someone there?"


    Nobody responded. Jon looked around carefully, hoping there will not be a trap or anything that would resemble as a survivor trying to kill him. But, there is nothing. Nobody responded, he decides to yell again the same thing. Still, no response. They are slowly walking to the vans and as they got close to the first one, they backed away quickly as a zombie emerged from the ground and jumped past the vans to Jon. He grabbed Jon, pinned him down, and he was about to bite him.


    This narrative has been purloined without the author''s approval. Report any appearances on Amazon.


    Raoul aims his pistol at that creature, and he shoots the head of the zombie who jumps from the vans. The thing falls on the ground, being at close distance to bite Jon face. It then gets thrown to the street by Jon, and he looks scared at the creature.


    "Thank you, Raoul!"


    "What is this thing?" asks Raoul as he looks at the skin who is yellow and red. "This is probably different from the others we have encountered so far."


    "They are evolving." says Jon. "Butˇ­ Look."


    Raoul looks at the building, and he hears from their zombies'' growls and screams. The barricade starts to fall apart slowly. The two survivors are running to the behind of the radio stations, to warn their teammates to back away from there.


    Raoul and Jon got to the back of the building, and what they saw there, made both of them drop their weapons. Seven zombies, are eating the bodies of Andrew and Raoul''s brother. This made Jon angry, and Raoul fall on his knees. Jon gets the gun and shoots the things, making all of them falling on the ground. Jon goes to the bodies of the two survivors who were with them, and they see them, still breathing, and with their stomach opened. Raoul goes at his brother, he cries as his brother screams in pain.


    "Gregoryˇ­" says Raoul as he looks at his brother drawing his last breath. He takes the knife, and he look at his brother.


    "ˇ­ Doˇ­ Do itˇ­ Do it, Raoulˇ­ Pleaseˇ­" says Raoul''s brother, as he coughs two times, and he breathe heavily. "Pleaseˇ­ Don''tˇ­ Don''t dieˇ­"


    "I will not, brotherˇ­" he sobs as he pierced the head of his brother with the knife he found yesterday. He closed his eyes as he was doing that because he doesn''t want to be the face of his brother as he got stabbed.


    He takes the knife, he looks away, and he put it on the ground, next to his body. He takes a big sigh and looks at Jon, who stabbed Andrew head.


    "You did well, comrade." says Jon to Andrew body, and he closed his eyes with the right hand. "You can rest now."


    "Brother Gregoryˇ­" says Raoul to the corpse who was once his brother. "I am sorry I was not there sooner to save youˇ­ I am sorry I was not able to save you from them. I am sorry I was not focussed on important things like family in my past life..." he sobs, and he looks at his lifeless body. "If I could''ve been thereˇ­ Things would''ve been a lot differentˇ­"


    "Now, now." says Jon coming at Raoul and putting his hand on his shoulder. "We have to clean this radio station. And take itˇ­ We will bury them close of my houseˇ­"


    Raoul''s brushes his tears with his left sleeve, he gets up from the ground and goes inside the building with Jon. Both of them come into agreement to use the front door.

 Maine Street - Part 18

    Raoul and Jon are walking past the blockage at the front door, they enter the building, and as they did, they see three zombies who are walking slowly to them. Raoul uses a knife, and he stabbed the first zombie, Jon takes the sword he took it earlier from Raoul''s brother and decapitate the zombie, then he stabbed the second zombie neck, and Raoul comes with the knife, stabbing the creature head. Both of them are looking at each other, they shake their heads and continue to walk, but this time slowly.


    As they walk down the hall, Raoul stops as he hears a growl into the building, Jon also stops. He whispers to Raoul.


    "There is probably one more here."


    "Most likely one or more than one." says Raoul, leaning and walking to the hall to ignore the corpses of humans laying there.


    Raoul comes close to a door, which is having a sign: "Studio Room", and it is opened. Raoul and with Jon are arming themselves with their weapons, they open the doors, and get into the room where they encounter two zombies coming at them in a normal speed.


    Raoul takes out his knife, and he stabs the zombie head, which was a direct hit and a good one. Jon used the back side of his weapon, and he smashes the skull of that creature, then he stabs the creature head with his pocket knife, to be sure the things is truly dead.


    After this whole fight got ended, Raoul and Jon are going to the radio station. They looked all around them, and they see the things there are still on and are working properly. As Raoul looks around this station, and goes to close the door, and block it with a couch, Jon goes to the desk where the radio is put, he turns it on he takes the microphone, he puts his headphones on.


    "H-Hello!" says Jon at the microphone after he made some changes at the station. "Can the Military Evacuation Point hear me? Can one of the evacuation point hear this radio?"


    Silence. Nothing comes back after Jon was saying that message at the frequency where the military evacuation station should be. Both of them are standing in that room, looking at each other, not saying a word. They are waiting. Waiting to see if someone got their reception, and it can respond back to them.


    Two minutes pass as Jon said the earlier message, he takes the microphone and stabilize other frequencies.


    "Hello! Can somebody hear me?... Hello! Does somebody intercept this radio signals?"


    "Hello."


    And that sentence was the one who made Raoul and Jon relieved. This radio is still working.


    "Yes! Can you hear me? Over." says Jon on the radio, and Raoul goes closer to Jon who is looking at the frequencies on the radio.


    "I do hear you, over!" says a voice on the radio, but on a German accent in French language. "Are you one of the missing squads who from Hamburg?"


    Raoul and with Jon are looking at each other. Both of them are confused and have no idea what to say about this. Then, Jon coughs a little, and he talks on the microphone.


    "No. We are two survivors from Maine, France. We have taken a hold of a radio stations, and we are trying to get at a Military Evacuation Point frequency. Are you German Militaries? Over."


    "Yes." responds the man at the message. "We are a squad from Dortmund. Are you infected? Over."


    "No. We are not infected with this virus. Over."


    "Do you have all the information about the creatures you are confronting against, over?"


    "Yes. I am a Chief at Police Section. Over."


    "Good. So, you''ve got the Top-Secret Folders and the equipment you need it." then, a long pause comes. "We will try to communicate with the closest military organization. Until then, give us the location. The exact location. Over."


    "ˇ­ Can I trust your word? Over." asks Jon after a pause of thinking.


    Stolen from Royal Road, this story should be reported if encountered on Amazon.


    "You can. Over."


    "A small cabin in the woods of Maine." says Jon and he looks at Raoul who is smiling and happy. "It is located close to a village. We will drop a flare gun at the moment a helicopter will come. Over."


    "Good." says the person on the other line. "I will try to see what I can do. In the meantime, all I can do for you now is to tell you the location of the supply crate. Over."


    "Supply crate? Over." asks Jon curios.


    "It is a procedure made by the secret government. They will be sending weapons in crates which can be picked by anyone. Use it against zombies, please. Only on zombies. The contents are the following: fire weapons, food, water, armour, shields and a flare gun with three ammo. Over."


    "Thank you very much! Over."


    "You''re welcome, I gotta go now. Over!"


    And the transmission ends which left Jon and Raoul standing there. They high-five, and they start taking the equipment from there and going with it to one of the vans outside.


    It took them at least an hour to move all the essential equipment, beat the zombies who are still moving, putting Andrew and Greg bodies into another van, and filling the van who needed gas from the nearest vehicle. When they have done with the task for filling, Jon goes on the driver seat, while Raoul goes on the other seat. Both of them are locking the doors. Jon turns on the car, and he leaves this area with the van loaded with a radio station, the supplies found on the houses, and some new clothes they''ve found there. The radio is the most important equipment they''ve need at this moment since it is their only key of communication in this world.


    ***


    A few minutes later, Jon and with Raoul van''s got in front of the fences at the property of Jon. They look at the fence, and both of them see it open. Jon got worried, same was with Raoul. They are looking at each other, they prepare their weapons. Raoul takes the pistol he got at it, and Jon gets the assault rifle. Jon starts to accelerate a little in the van.


    As they drive the van, Raoul is looking around him, he sees something on the grass. It looks like a corpse of a human. He tells Jon about the thing he has seen there, Jon saw it too. They look at each other, and Jon, accelerate the vehicle to his house. As he presses on the acceleration, Raoul continues to look at that corpse. He sees a crow landing on the corpse and proceed to hit it with his crow''s beak the dead flesh. Raoul takes his eyes from that thing, and he looks at the front.


    They got close to the house, and as they got there, Jon breathe a sigh of relief because the bodies of those zombies are all dead on the property. And the door is still like the last time they''ve let it there, locked. Jon gets off from his vehicle, and he goes at the nearby automated turret to see how it is the state of it. Raoul goes after him.


    "Does the turret suffer a malfunction?" asks Raoul to Jon as he inspect the turret closely.


    "It is working good." says Jon with a smile on his face. "The government has truly made a good technology. It has just run out of ammo. But I have enough to supply this and the other three for the next months."


    "Sounds good." says Raoul. "Butˇ­" he looks at the corpses all around them of the zombies. there are at least fifty of them on the property. "What are we going to do with them?"


    "We will incinerate them." says Jon getting up, and he goes to the van to open the doors of the backside.


    Raoul follows him.


    "We will need some matches or a lighter. A few papers with wood. Gasoline or Fire blocks." he takes the radio equipment with Raoul, and they move it to the house. They got in the front of the door. "Raoul. Would you mind opening the door?"


    "Sure." says Raoul who opens the door by using the key Jon toss it to him with the next hand. He opens the door in a few seconds, and he opens the door, he takes the other side of that hard radio equipment and move it with Jon to the living room of this house.


    After all the rest of the moving they''ve done, they get on the upper floor and take from there six ammo boxes. Raoul takes three, with Jon also taking three. They are heading outside with the boxes and walk to the turrets. Before reloading the turrets, Jon told him.


    "Remember. You have to put the ammo belt on the turret, and the other side, you let it outside. That''s the whole thing."


    "Okay." responds Raoul who takes the belt of at least three hundred ammo. He takes one side of the belt, he opens the turret cage, and insert it there. As he did that, he let the other side outside, and Jon, press the button to activate the turret.


    "Good." says Jon. "The turret is loaded. Now let''s finish this."


    "But why we have taken much more boxes than we needed it?"


    "Because this turret can consume only one belt of it. The four boxes will be needed at the other two. the rest of them. we will be taking with us."


    "Why?" asks Raoul walking alongside with Jon to the other turrets.


    "As we are heading after our fallenˇ­ friendsˇ­ We will be taking a building somewhere. We will lock it, and we will be keeping it as a backup building. In case the bad things will happen, you know?"


    "Bad things. Like what?"


    As they got close to the second turret, Jon sees an abnormal thing there, he sees a body, who is not looking with a greenish or violet skin like the zombies. Jon turns the corpse around, and he sees the face of a human, who got shot multiple times into the chest. This made Jon shake a bit.


    "Jonˇ­ Who is this man?"


    "It is a gang member. A biker gang member." he points his finger at the jacket with a motorcycle on fire logo. "And these assholes. Are probably after this house."


    "What are we going to do?"


    "We load the turrets." says as he gets to load the second turret. "We activate the electric fence and our EMP services." he finishes loading the second turret, he presses the START button, and he turns around to Raoul. "If they wanted to get it, they have to take it over our dead bodies."

 Maine Street - Part 19

    ***


    Almost at the dark, a van comes at the radio station who was earlier this day raided by a group of four survivors. The van it is exactly the same as the one who was used to block the entrance of the radio building. Jon and Raoul are getting out from there, they are walking to the backside of the building. As they''ve got there, they see the corpse of their friends, all rotted and with flies flying above them.


    Jon is getting his colleague corpse from his feet, he drags him to the van. Raoul grabs his brother by both of his hands and carries him to the van. They walk for a few minutes and as they got into the van, they put these two corpses there, then they put a big blank to hide the corpses and the rotten smell of it.


    They close the van backdoors where their friends'' bodies are hidden, and after that, before they would be able to get back to the van and leave the area, they hear growls of zombies. Both of them are turning to the direction where the growls are coming from, which is on their backs, and see more than ten zombies coming at them. Raoul and Jon are quickly entering the van, Jon goes on the driver seat, and he drives the car to Jon''s house.


    "These things are getting on my nerves." says Raoul looking at the reflecting window to see the zombie groups following them in slow steps.


    "Do not worry. If we get at the house, we will shoot these creatures." says Jon continuing to drive and paying no attention to the creatures following them in slow peace.


    As the van drives away, the creatures continue to walk after them. Some are walking on their two legs, and a few of them are crawling because either they had their legs broken, one of them or they were having broken legs before they have become mutants. From that group of zombies walking to the road, a creature is running on four feet like a dog to the van, he screams and growls like a crazy hobo man who is into drugs that found in the nearest dumpsters.


    ***


    A few hours later, the duo are at their house, they have finished burying their friends'' bodies. Raoul''s brother body is buried next to a tree, while the body of Andrew is buried next to Gregory. When they finished the burial, they are letting a minute of silence to remember the good times they''ve had with them their whole life.


    Support the creativity of authors by visiting Royal Road for this novel and more.


    After a while, Jon goes into the house, installing the radio and make it work. Raoul decides to remain outside for a bit, looking at the grave he digs for his big brother who has suffered a painful death. Being eaten by seven creatures is a worse fate, but not as worse than seeing his own parents, becoming parents and killing them. Raoul takes a sigh he falls on his knees, and he starts to let the tears flown from his eyes, he begins to sob as he looks at the grave, and he yells.


    "I-I am sorry, Gregory! I am so-sorry I was not there."


    He cries and begs for God to end this thing. He does that for at least one hour, until he Jon slams the door from the inside. He has done a loud bag, and as Raoul was looking at the reaction Jon got, which was happy, he seems he got great news.


    "Good news! Somebody might be coming after us!"


    Raoul gets off from the grave of his brother and runs inside the house to hear the good news of Jon he got for him. He enters the house, and runs to the living room, where the equipment put together by Jon is. Raoul looks at Jon, who is sitting on the chair, he puts the headphones on, turns on the volume, and gets the microphone.


    "Hello!" says Jon to the microphone. "Can somebody copy my message, over?"


    "H-H-Hello." it was a voice coming from the radio under some low frequencies. "C-Can you c-co-copy the message? Over!"


    "I cannot hear you clear." says Jon on the radio feeling a little worried. "Over."


    "T-There is aˇ­ There is a blackout in progress on France." says the man from the other side, being much clearer now.


    "What?" says Jon extremely worried. "What blackout? When it will happen?"


    "I-In three days." says the voice. "The blackout will be happening in three days. Please, whatever you do, do not- "it suddenly cuts the signal.


    "Hello." says Jon worried on the microphone connected at the radio. "Hello! Do you copy me? Over! Hello! Can you hear me? Over!"


    They look at the radio for a few moments. Raoul and Jon are already feeling overwhelmed and scared by the fact the electricity from France it will be cut out in a few days. Jon stops the radio signal, and he gets off from his chair, and talks to Raoul.


    "Luckily we have a generator. But it only works on gas. And I do not have enough gas to make it working for a few weeks or days. We will be needing some gas."


    "Where we can take it?" asks Raoul.


    "There are a few gas stations close here. We will be taking at the next day the van and drive there, where we will be taking the necessary gas for the generator. until then, we should rest."


    "We need gas only for electricity?"


    "Not only for that. To electric fence. Alarm system and the radio." he showed him the radio which is installed complete.


    They are leaving the room, and gets outside where they are going to do check to see if the turrets are on, the electric fence works properly and turn on the alarm system. After this checking, they are going into the house, they close and lock the door behind them, and they go to their rooms. Sleeping because today was a busy and a sad day to live.

 Maine Street - Part 20

    On the next day, at what it seems to be nine o''clock, the two survivors are leaving the house, all armed for their mission. Today they are going to go into the closest city they are at, to Gorron. The city is at least five kilometres as Jon told him as they got into the van they used yesterday to move supplies, radio and their friends'' bodies.


    Jon drives the car straight ahead, and as it got close to the gates. Raoul leaves the car and walk to the gates. As he got there, he opens the gates wide for the car to leave the area. He pushed the gates wide enough to let the car go and don''t suffer a scratch. As the van, who was driven by Jon, left the property, he closes the gates and goes after it. He quickly enters the van, and when he got in, Jon drives the car forward, with Raoul on the other side.


    "We must be careful, now." says Jon as he makes a turn to the main street that connects his cabin and Gorron. "The cities are most likely filled with creatures like these. And we also must be careful around humans."


    "Yes." responds Raoul. "In most apocalyptic movies or series, a human can be considered a more dangerous harm than zombies."


    "Yeahˇ­ We must be careful whom we trust on this world right now."


    The drive was taking about ten minutes. They could''ve got earlier, but there was some blockage there and there, who were needed to be moved away and off the road to help them continue. But it was worth it, because they got at the closest gas station, where they see a big tank of fuel.


    "Whoa, mama!" says Jon overwhelmed by the tank of gas who is hidden into the back of the building. "Cannot believe someone would let something like this here."


    "Do you think it is a trap, sir?" asks Raoul concerned, and he looks everywhere.


    "Beats me." he looks around him as he prepares his assault rifle. "Nothing gets easier."


    After they looked around them, and shoots warning shots into the air to attract human''s attention, they concluded that nothing has happened. Raoul goes to the windows of the gas station, and he looks at it. He can barely see something inside the gas station, but as he looked closely, he sees the shelves of the store almost empty. Jon is going to the door of the gas station, which is entirely open and with a lot of blood on the floor.


    "Should we search it?" suggest Raoul to Jon.


    "No. We got enough home." says Jon to Raoul, and he looks around him. "There are probably people who need it much more than us."


    If you find this story on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen. Please report the infringement.


    They leave the gas station, and goes on the back to see the state of the gas tank which was once carried on the France highways with a Volvo or a Man truck. Jon goes at the tank, he inspects the contains of it by climbing the stairs to the top and open the top. As he looked inside the truck, he sees fuel, but as he looked at it, he feels disappointed. He puts the bottle back, and he leaves the trailer.


    "Bad news!" says Jon going at Raoul. "The gas is not the good type."


    "How do you know?" asks Raoul.


    "We need petrol. Not airplane gas."  he says as he gets back with Raoul into the van.


    "Airplane fuel? What the heck is it doing there?"


    "No idea." says Jon driving the car from this gas station and heading to the next one. "But I hope we will be finding something good on our way here."


    ***


    Twenty minutes later, they stopped at the third gas station they have encountered so far. The last one was empty with gas, but full of zombies. Jon and Raoul managed to get away from them at the last moment. In this gas station, things are looking the same as the last one, but with fewer zombies, only six.


    Raoul stabs the heads of three zombies with his brother sword, while Jon smacks the heads of these creatures with his police bat he got on the life while he was still a police officer and not a survivor into an apocalypse world. This beating was finished quickly. When they killed the last zombie, they leave the area, get back into the van, to the same seats and drives away from there, heading to the next gas station, hoping they will be seeing something lucky here.


    "We do not have any luck today." says Raoul to Jon.


    "Don''t give up, man." says Jon driving the van straight ahead and passed by three zombies'' corpses. "This is like hunting. If you haven''t taken all the places to search, the hunt would be happy, and you will be starving. And dieˇ­ You understand it, right?"


    "Kind of." responds Raoul.


    "Heh." he smiles as he looks at the window-shield, and he see a truck trailer blocking their way. "This is it."


    "What do you mean?"


    "We have to turn around and search elsewhere. There is no way we can move a trailer like that without a truck, or a big vehicle around us."


    "You''re right." responds Raoul.


    The van turns around and Jon drives forward to the street, he takes a left turn and as he continues to drive, the two group of survivors see three zombies running after a human. Raoul looks worried at that human who is getting very far from their location. He runs as fast as he could from those zombies.


    "Should we help him?"


    "ˇ­Yeah." responds Jon, and he steps with his van on the gas pedal to those zombies.


    He drives forward without any hesitation, running these zombies over with the van found yesterday. Jon makes only one of those three zombies flies an over the van, smash the head of one of them, and gets a zombie body pinned down and with his ligaments broken. The survivors jump away from the van as he drives ahead, and he stops at three meters from him.


    "Thank you!" yelled the survivor signalling the "Okay" hand gesture.


    The van continues to drive forward, as the survivor runs to the closest building. As he got into that building, he smashes the door with his feet. When the door got down, the survivor enters the building. The van driven by Jon continued to move forward, not paying attention to that survivor, dressed with hoodie, jeans and a chirurgical mask.

 Maine Street - Part 21

    ***


    In the building where the survivor entered and checks the surrounding, he observes a zombie body of a kid running at him. The survivor falls on his knees, he looks broken at the body of that kid, and with tears on his eyes, he says broken.


    "My sonˇ­ My beautiful sonˇ­ Why?"


    The zombie of the kid runs forward to the survivor, snarling and growling. The survivor grabs the body of that kid, and as he grabs it, he let him bite and eat the neck, being the only part who it is not hidden by the clothing of this strange person. As the survivor continues to get slowly eaten by the zombie which looks like a kid in his 10s or younger than 9.


    "Why?" continues to say the man as the kid bite a human skin from his neck and eat it. "Why Nora let you outside? Why I haven''t been here earlier?"


    The survivors take his mask off, and it is revealed the survivor it is not a man, it is a woman because of her facial expression which correspond with one of a woman rather than a man, or a young man, a soy boy or a generation Z kid who watches TikTok on a daily basis and hates being a man.


    The woman falls on her knees and the kid zombie try to pin her down. After a few tries, the kid pins the woman down and eats her without any mercy. As she drew her last breath, she looks on the ceiling, and she sees a fly there, who is doing his zigzag''s every fly species are doing to annoy humans.


    "Eat me, son. Eat meee~!" said the woman with her last breath as her own kid continues to devour the neck.


    ***


    A few minutes later, the gang leaves the fourth gas station they''ve found as they drove into this city. All they have found there were only two bikes, which Jon take it.


    "These bikes will be useful for the time when the van will stop working."


    "Right." says Raoul. "In most zombie movies and series, people are trusting the cars too much because of condition they give, but bikes can make our worry about gas be gone."


    Stolen from Royal Road, this story should be reported if encountered on Amazon.


    "That''s right." says Jon putting his bike on the backside of the van, and he helps Raoul put his bike there. "With these, we will be able to do anything. Even France Tour if we are luck the zombies are getting less in numbers."


    "I hope so." says Raoul to Jon.


    They close the van backdoors. Raoul and Jon go into the van, they got at their seats and their vehicle leaves this area.


    ***


    On the fifth gas station on this area, and the last one, they''ve got a bit of luck as Jon checked the interior of the shop which was extremely in a bad state like shelves on the floor, food supplies thrown and stepped, corpses of three zombies who were killed probably yesterday, and the cashier desk who was used as a barricade, down on the floor and with cash register opened. But as Jon checked the manager office, and Raoul looked around the gas station, Jon got lucky because he saw there are five bottles with a capacity of five litters. All having the fuel they needed for the generator. Jon takes four bottles, and he leaves the room with it and runs to his van.


    "Raoul!" says Jon as he leaves the store with four bottles of fuel.


    Raoul comes from the parking lot as he was checking the three cars from there to Raoul''s van. As he got closer and saw the bottle of fuel, he asks Jon.


    "Where did you get them?"


    "They were laying in the manager desk." responds Jon at Raoul question. "There are two more there. Would you go and get them?"


    "Okay." says Raoul and he goes to the gas station.


    "Don''t worry. The shop is empty with zombies." yells Jon as Raoul stopped for a few seconds in front of the store.


    Raoul enters the building which was once a gas station used by people who are driving vehicles, trucker, delivery men or any human being who has a car and needed a refuel, or a pack of cigarettes at three o''clock. He walks to the opened door at a room. As he walks to the room, he is wide open the door, and from there, he sees the two big bottles with fuel. He takes it and leaves the building, then he heads to the van. As he got close to it, he stores the gas into the backside, and get into the front side of the van, where Jon is at driving seat as always and press on the gas pedal.


    "Is it enough?"


    "Yesˇ­ To last for a few days. Is it enough." says Jon sceptical as he drives the van to the street and straight ahead to his cabin.


    As the van continues to move, Raoul looks at the window, he sees a group of zombies leaving the building and looking at them. As the van moved past by them, the zombies start to follow them, some were walking, others were running.


    "Um. Jon."


    "I saw them." says Jon looking at the small window. "These bastards think they can follow us to our home? Well. We have to do a change of plans."


    "What?"


    "We will do a something called a roadblock."


    The van takes a turn to a street that connects to a city known as Mayenne. The zombies, who are walking in a slow peace, are determined to follow the van and blindly fall into a trap.

 Maine Street - Part 22

    As the van continues to drive to the street, hordes of zombies from the streets are hearing the van motor and are following him. One after another corpse of mutants rises from the grounds, some with dirty clothes, others with missing limbs, and a few more unlucky creatures are crawling. The van driver ignores the creatures who are following his van found yesterday in a supply mission.


    "What are we doing?" asks Raoul to Jon as he drives forward and run over a zombie who was rising from the street.


    "We will lead them to a city, and from there we will try to find a way to escape them." says Jon driving and being careful on the road. He dodges a zombie who was close to get hit. "Mayenne is a big city. And they have a loudspeaker. That loudspeaker is so loud, that sometimes I even hear from my cabin. We will get at that building, turn on the loudspeaker and create a big enough noise to alert the zombies at that location."


    "That''s the plan?"


    "That''s our only plan." responds Jon, and he dodges three zombies who were on the left side and close to grab the van. "These creatures should not exit."


    "Same feeling."


    The van continues to run on the road, and the horde of zombies becomes much bigger. Raoul took a look behind him, and he sees at least dozens or even much more than fifty zombies after them. He looks at other directions, and he spots a zombie at a few meters from them, who is on the top of a camping vehicle, and he screams. Jon spots the thing, and he quickly hand the gun to Raoul. It is a Desert Eagle who was on this van for some reason.


    "Can you shoot that thing with this pistol?"


    "I can try." says Raoul as he opens the window of his seat, and he aims his pistol outside the van.


    He aims at the zombie of that camping vehicle. This is a hard challenge for Raoul because the vehicle is moving, the target is far from them, and also, this pistol has only five bullets in the magazine. This thing was told by Jon as Raoul shoot the first shot and missed it.


    Raoul shoots a second shot, and this one hits the window of that camping vehicle. He sighs and feels already nervous. He aims again at the creature, he holds his breath, he looks at the creature, and he pulls the trigger. The third bullet hit the belly of that zombie who is still screaming.


    The author''s content has been appropriated; report any instances of this story on Amazon.


    "Dammit!" yelled Raoul.


    "Hit the head!" yelled Jon as he continues to drive the van.


    "Slow the van, man!"


    "There is no way!" replies Jon. "We slow down, we get eaten by these creatures."


    "Fuck this world!"


    Raoul aims again, he holds his breath longer, then, as he keeps the pistol steady and aimed at the creature head, he shoots, and the bullet flies to the zombie''s head. The bullet hits the head of that screaming zombie, he penetrates the skull of the zombie, and the bullet flies on the other side. As the zombie got killed, he falls on his back to the grass.


    "Yes!" yells Raoul as he proceeds to close the window and puts the gun under his seat.


    "Nice shot." praise Jon to Raoul. "You made a good shot there. And now, let''s advance forward." he says as he steps harder on the acceleration pedal.


    "Speed limits prepare to be ignored!" says Raoul as the van drives faster and passed by zombies who were trying to catch them, or jump after them.


    ***


    It took almost six minutes, but they managed to get to the building Jon is driving. They stop in front of a small container which was made as a house by a guy who cannot afford a house with one floor, or at least a normal house since houses prices have been explosive last years.


    Raoul and Jon are leaving the van, Jon goes to the door container, he opens it easily because it is not locked and as he opens it. They enter the small house, and search for the microphone connected to the loudspeaker. Raoul finds quickly and he handed to Jon.


    "What are we going to do?" asks Raoul to Jon.


    "We have to play a music which will attract any zombies." says Jon connecting his phone to the loudspeaker device. "And this device connects seven loudspeakers around all of the city."


    "But why did they build it for?"


    "No idea. But it was surely important." responds Jon as he presses the touch screen to a playlist at a YouTube offline service, he maximizes the volume, and connects all the loudspeakers at the device. "Now. We have to run."


    They leave the container room, they quickly get into the van, Jon steps on the gas pedal, and Raoul takes the assault rifle Jon handed to him. He opens the window, and he shoots the nearest zombies who are coming from them. Jon tries to turn on the car, but it will take something. Raoul shoots the nearest zombies with the assault rifle, and he does a good job, he killed six of them by emptying half of the magazine. He continues to shoot for a few seconds until the van turns on and Jon get them out of here.


    The van runs forward, he crashes a few zombies, and as they got to a clean street with no zombies, the loudspeaker''s music could be heard louder and clear on the street. The song that is playing on the radio it is "Cotton Eye Jon".


    "Cannot believe Rednex saves our asses from zombie apocalypse." says Raoul as he looks behind, and he sees a few zombies walking to the nearest loudspeakers.


    "Cool thing this phone was still working." says Jon driving the van at the exit of the town, then he takes a different route because of the risks that some zombies might be still be there.

 Maine Street - Part 23

    A few moments later, the van with Raoul and Jon, arrives at the cabin owned by Jon. They park the van in front of the cabin and starts to unload it. Raoul takes the bikes from the van, while Jon takes the fuel bottles and goes with them inside the house. Raoul stores the bikes on the backside of the cabin.


    As Raoul got there, he noticed a zombie corpse, laying on the big grass, he looked at that thing, who is looking a bit different from the other ones. Raoul noticed this thing has a mushroom that has been grown into his head, but this mushroom doesn''t resemble the ones he has seen in his high school biology class. He was curious about it, and he wanted to touch it, but his instincts told them not to. Raoul put the bikes on the back, and he goes inside the house, where Jon, comes to him, and he tells him.


    "The soldiers! I have spoken with them."


    "And?" says Raoul feeling overjoyed.


    "They cannot help us." says Jon feeling sad as he delivered the news. "They say it will take at least one week until their evacuation will be ready. They didn''t tell me why, but they said they can at least drop something for us."


    "And?" says Raoul after a few seconds of silence.


    "I did not request them anything. But they mentioned an air drop that will be dropped close to Mayenne."


    "Ohˇ­" says Raoul feeling bad because they have infected that city with much more zombies that it previously was.


    Jon turns around he goes into the kitchen, while Raoul is going on in his bedroom.


    ***


    Two days later, the state of the two survivors at the cabin doesn''t look exactly good, but it is worse on Jon case who has started to cough a lot more than he usually does when he smokes a cigarette or two in the morning. Raoul was trying to help the old man by giving him a few medicine pills, but he refuses to take any of it, and stating: "This is an ordinary smoker cough. I will be fine.".


    You could be reading stolen content. Head to the original site for the genuine story.


    Yesterday, they did nothing, they only stood on the house, waiting for the days to end and trying to contact someone on the radio. They have also read a few books from the bookshelves in the living room Jon has acquired from bookshops, libraries who were about to be demolished and other sources. They also left the house and look around their surroundings. Raoul showed to Jon the corpse with a mushroom, and Jon, who was not curious he said.


    "We''d better not touch it." says Jon, and he took a shovel, which destroyed the mushroom, who then released some stinky smell into the air as Raoul described it to Jon, while they were carrying the corpse of that zombie and threw him over the fence.


    On this morning, after they took the breakfast, Jon was going to the radio and tried several times to make a contact with military or with somebody close. But this didn''t work as Jon tried for three hours, so he decided to leave it alone and go somewhere in the house to lose time. He goes to the living room, where he reads a book he never had the time to do it.


    But as he read the book, he started to feel a little dizzy. It was not even finishing the second page, and he puts the book on the table, and gets up from his chair, heading outside from this room, to the hallway. When Jon got there, he spotted Raoul walking, and he looked at him.


    "Hey. I am not feeling too good."


    "What''s wrong?" says Raoul running closer to Jon, and holding his shoulders. He looked carefully at him. "You look pale."


    "M-Maybe I am tired."


    "You need some sleep."


    "B-But the blackout."


    "Don''t worry. I am able to open the generator and power up the electric fences and lighting. Now we have to move you to your room and let you rest, man. You deserve some sleep."


    Raoul escorted Jon to his room, where he helped him to get on his bed, put the blanket on him, and shut off the lights from the room. When he finished all of this, he was about to leave the room, then, Jon stopped him.


    "Raoul. Can you put a knife next to my bed?"


    "Huh?" asks Raoul turning back to Jon, feeling uneasy. "Why would you need the knife for?"


    "To make sure I am safe."


    "From what? No zombies will be able to get here with the electric fences on, turrets and me."


    "Butˇ­"


    "Don''t worry." says Raoul getting closer to the old man. "As long as I am here, you are going to be fine. We got it much better than the people outside. And believe that."


    "I-I think you are right."


    "Cool. Now. Good night."


    "Good night." he says to Raoul as he was opening the door leaving the door, closing behind him, and locking up.


    When Raoul left the room, Jon was looking at the ceiling of his room. he raised his right hand, and looked at the light from outside the window, and he sees some blue veins on his arm, showing much clearer than what is normal to be.

 Maine Street - Part 24

    ***


    Raoul is going outside the house, he looks all around him. He notices a zombie crawling to his direction. He realizes the zombie is far from him, and he also noticed the turrets are down, due to ammo shortage. Earlier they were used to kill a few dozens of zombies who were trying to breach the walls and get into the cabin. Raoul takes his knife from the belt, he walks close to the creature for a few seconds, and at the moment he got close to it, he stabbed the creature head without any mercy. As he took the knife back from the head of the mutant, he cleans it up by using a dirty towel, and he puts it back to his belt.


    "Oh, dear." he says looking at the fences who have been put down by these creatures earlier. "This would be tough."


    He goes back inside the house, and as he got in, he hears Jon calling him. Raoul quickly runs to Jon room, where, he opens the door, and he looks at the bed. When Raoul opened the door wide, he sees Jon on his feet, with his skin having the same colour as the mutants, Jon looks at Raoul, and he tells him.


    "How?"


    "N-No idea." he says shocked. "D-Did you got bitten?"


    "No." he says as he looked at his hands. "I was not bitten by any of these creaturesˇ­ Then how?"


    "Sir!" says Raoul shaking to him. "What happens to you?"


    "Iˇ­I think I am transforming into one of them." he says, and after that he coughs so hard, that he falls on his back to the floor.


    Raoul runs to Jon, and as he got close to Jon, he tries to make him consciousness as he grabs his face, and proceed to beat his cheeks in order to keep him alive. Jon continued to open his eyes, as he begins to breathe heavily.


    "Raoul." says Jon. "The fence has fallen, the turrets are down, and the ammunitionˇ­ is still here." he said the last part feeling angry. "I don''t think you can stay here foreverˇ­ Lots of people will come and get this cabin for themselves or familyˇ­ Orˇ­"


    He raises his left hand who is shaking and points at a drawer from his room. He looked at the drawer and he tell Raoul.


    "There is the bomb trigger. Press the button and in about a minute, this place will explode. It is your call."


    "Sir!" says Raoul to him almost in tears.


    "I was not informed by the fact this virus can infect even people who are not bitten." he says sounding depressed. "Whoever made this virus. Hope he will be a zombie and be killed slowly." he looks at Raoul as he shakes and holds his crying and sobs. "You have to take anything you can when the time will comeˇ­ Try to contact the radio, the soldiers, and give your locationˇ­ I have written the location on a note, I-it is under the desk."


    "I got it." says Raoul holding his knife.


    "Don''t worry about me, Raoul." says Jon to him. "If I have to go, at least, I was able to face this crisis and see how dangerous it is." he laughs, and he proceed to cough for three times, which he started to throw some small blood on the jeans Raoul is still wearing since the spread of this virus. "You''d better take some new jeans."


    "I willˇ­" he wipes his tears coming down with his left arm.


    "Y-You remember the location I told you, right?"


    "Yes." responds Raoul.


    "Good. This one it belonged to my nephewˇ­ I wonder if he made it alive this farˇ­ Anyway. I would like to ask you something?"


    This book''s true home is on another platform. Check it out there for the real experience.


    "Anything sir."


    "Can you please burry me next to the corpses?"


    "O-Of course I will."


    "Greatˇ­"


    Jon started to shake uncontrollably, he coughs so hard that you can say he got the worst grade of pneumonia and as he was coughing, blood flew from his mouth and landed either on Raoul''s clothes or on the floors. Jon''s body stops from all of that shaking in about three minutes, then Raoul, he starts stabbing Jon''s head three times to be sure he would be dead, and after that, he falls on the floor, close to Jon''s corpse.


    Raoul continues to cry and sobs as he is looking on the window outside, where he sees the skies being accompanied by gray clouds which advertise a bad weather with raining and thunders. He decides to get up after a few moments, then, he takes a blanket from the bed where Jon was trying to sleep earlier. He used the blanket to cover the man body, and he carries it on his arms with a sad look on Raoul''s face.


    The moment he got to the "cemetery" of his fallen friends, Raoul put the body of Jon on the ground, he leaves hi, only to go to the cabin and take from there a shovel. When he found the shovel into the garage of the dead owner, Raoul goes there and starts to dig a three feet deep hole to make Jon be buried, like what a man used to be before all of this.


    It took Raoul an hour to dig the grave, and when he finished it, he drops the corpse of Jon into it, and he buries with the sand he took to create the grave. He was sobbing and crying as he was doing that. He managed to finish this burial, and he stays at the grave for a few moments, before the raining come, which was in almost one hour.


    Raoul came back into the cabin which now belongs to him, and he heads to the living room, where the radio is still working. He sits on the chair, he puts the headphones and calibrates the transmission and everything else to make it work. It took a few tries, but he managed to get someone.


    "Mayday! Mayday!" says the person from the other side of the radio, which made Raoul to jump from his seat. "Can somebody hear me?" says the person in a stressful voice.


    "Yes!" responds Raoul as he activates the microphone. "Can you state yourself? Over."


    "What?" asks the person. "I do not hear you good. Who are you?"


    "I am a survivor in Maine, France. Who are you? Over."


    "I am a teenager on Poland." responds the person on the other side of the radio. "Can you contact the military?"


    "I am afraid I can''t. I also tried, but all they have told me is to wait for an outpost, and take supplies they are throwing to us. Over."


    "Really?" he said the teenager triggered. "These people are arming us instead of save us?"


    "How are the thing there? Are there zombies? Over."


    "There are thousands of zombies on the city!" says the teenager. "Some are even able to climb the buildings! I need help, please!"


    "Alright, alright." says Raoul on the radio. "Don''t panic. Be calm and breath slowly. Alright? Over."


    "Okayˇ­Okayˇ­"


    Raoul could hear the kid over the other station breathing slowly, and shaking it. He then, looked at the radio station for a moment, and he asks him.


    "What are your soundings like? Over."


    "I am in my apartment. Floor Three." he stopped for a moment because he heard a noise there. Raoul also heard the noise. "Oh no! There are probably the dead''s!"


    "Kid! You know how to kill them if they are zombies?"


    "No."


    "You have to stab their heads with a sharp object. Over."


    "Like an umbrella."


    "It has that sharp thing at the end? Over."


    "Yes."


    "Good. Stab the heads between the eyes."


    "That would work?"


    "One hundred percentage. Over."


    "C-Can you tell me what is the difference between zombies, please?"


    "ˇ­Zombies are having a greenish, blueish or darkish colour. Over."


    "Thanks."


    "Good luck, kid. Over."


    "Wait! Can you contact an outpost for me, please!"


    "I will try kid. But you have to send me your location. I might be able to call for help, but I cannot guarantee it will come. I am in Maine, and I face the same problems as you, but you are having a family, while I am by myself. Over."


    "I understandˇ­ I will try to contact you later."


    A noise like breaking is heard from the Raoul station, and the kid screaming is heard. Raoul almost jumped from the seat because this noise scared him. He takes the microphone, and he try to message the kid again.


    "Kid. Kid! Kid! Are you there?"


    He tries for about three more times the same sentence, but, when he was about to close the radio. A miracle happened.


    "I. Iˇ­ I did it." he responds the teenager breathing heavily from Poland. "I managed to kill three zombies..."


    "Good job, kid! Over."


    "Um, sirˇ­ I am living in Krak¨®w, Poland. On an apartment complex." says the kid on the station who is slowly making his breathing be normal.


    "I got it." responds Raoul writing the name of the town on a piece of paper, and the apartment complex on it. "I will try to contact you again later, until then, be safe and lock the door. And remember. Zombies can be killed in the head. Over."


    "Goodbye, sir!"


    Raoul ends the transmission with the kid, and he tries again to connect with the radio station from the military. It took a few minutes, but he finally made a contact with one, and this one speaks French, unlike the broken English he speaks the teenager from Poland.

 Maine Street - Part 25

    "Hello! Who am I speaking with? Over."


    "Hello!" responds Raoul on the radio feeling happy. "My name is Raoul! I am living in Maine and I would like to request help. Over."


    "You request an extraction?" asks the man on the other side of the radio. "At which Maine part? Over."


    "Close to Mayenne at a cabin in the forest. Over."


    "I am afraid we cannot do that right now. Over."


    "What? What is the reason you are not helping people into this mess?!" asks Raoul on the radio feeling angry. "People are dying, and the military is not doing anything to prevent this?!... What is even your mission?"


    "ˇ­ You say your name is Raoul, right? Well, Raoul. The reason is easy to say. We are protecting the ports, docks and the airports who are still working. The military is also displaying soldiers on areas over the world to help them destroy this virus and save anyone we can. We will be displaying a squad at your location to help you leave. Over."


    Raoul didn''t know what to say. He was not anticipating this message from the man. But before he could say anything, Raoul looked at the radio for a moment, and he sighs. He grabs the microphone, and he try to speak with the soldier again.


    "I would like to inform you about this virus. Over."


    "What information do you have? Over." reply the man on the radio.


    "Can the virus infect the people who were not bitten? Over."


    "It has already started? Did you find a weird looking mushroom on a zombie corpse?" asks the soldier feeling uneasy. "I repeat. Have you touched the mushroom from the zombie? Over."


    "No. I did not touch it." replies Raoul on the radio. "The mushroom killed a guy. Friend of me. He transformed quickly into a zombie. Over."


    "Did the man was old? Over."


    "Yes. Over." replies Raoul.


    "He got high fever? And he started to cough blood? Shake uncontrollably? Over."


    If you encounter this tale on Amazon, note that it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it.


    "Yes. I did not check his temperature though." says Raoul. "But do you already have information about this? Over."


    "We do have the information about Mushrooms Z, but we did not anticipate wit will raise at this moment. We strongly suggest you to check your temperature daily and keep a record of it. If the temperature is higher than 38, you are in danger. Do you copy that? Over."


    "Roger that. Over." says Raoul feeling a bit uneasy.


    "We have got your location, and we will try to send a squad there. In the meantime, please wait until then. Over."


    "Can I trust you?"


    "You can trust us, civilian." responds the soldier. "We are professional who were highly trained from these things. And we would do anything to save everyone and keep the human species alive and well. Over."


    "I caught another radio transmission. But in Poland. Over."


    "What kind of radio are you using it? Over."


    "Just one I have found in a radio station in Maine. I don''t know the rand, but the station it is working in good condition. Over."


    "So, you are living in Maine and got a contact with people from Poland? Which city? Over."


    "I believe it was Krak¨®w." says Raoul. "Over."


    "Sir! I think you are in possession of the most valuable thing we needed. This radio station might be powerful enough to transmit contact with North America. Don''t you get it?" says the man from the other side sounding extremely happy. "You might be the saviour of this world."


    Raoul stood there, he didn''t know what to say anymore because he didn''t believe he is at a possession of a powerful radio station. He was about to respond the message, but suddenly, the blackout has hit him, and stopped the electricity from the entire area, then in a few seconds, the entire Europe got in blackout.


    When this happened, Raoul get off from his seat, he dropped the headphones, and he runs to the room Jon told him the generator it is located. He got at the generator, and at the moment he got close to it, he took the bottles of gas close to it, and he pours them into the generator. It took him about five minutes to pour all of the gas there, and then, he starts the generator by pressing the button. And in just a flinch, the lights from the basement works (he used his flashlight to help him pour the gas into the generator).


    Raoul gets out of there, and he runs back to the radio station, whereas he got there, someone was talking to him.


    "Raoul. Raoul! Are you there? Over." says the familiar voice from earlier.


    "I am here, sir. Over." responds Raoul taking the microphone and his headphones.


    "Good." responds the man on the other side. "I was afraid the radio would have stopped for a moment."


    "The radio is still working." says Raoul fast. "I got a blackout, but I still got the gas for it to make it work for a few more days. Over."


    "I see." says the person on the other side. "I guess we should stop the conversation for now. I got orders to do. But we won''t forget to send a squad to your location. Over."


    "Roger that. Goodbye. Over."


    Raoul turns off the radio, and he gets up from his seat. He goes to the window outside, and he looks at the fence who is still down. He looks at it for a few more minutes until he decides to leave the home and try to fix it by himself.

 Maine Street - Part 26

    On the seven day since the infection has spread around most of the world and transformed a lot of human population into creatures with thirst for human flesh and without any purpose in life. For now, a blackout happened on the entire Europe, and soldiers trained for this type of things have started to clean a few parts of the city, establishing outpost for survivors. But these things have not yet happened on France.


    Raoul, the only person left at the cabin who was once Jon''s property, has finished the fence building, and he also used some cars he found on the street to use it as a blockage. Raoul used a tow truck he found two days ago, close to a river. With this tow truck he managed to create an impressive wall with the vehicle.


    Raoul stood in the front of the vehicle walls, he looked at the road and at the trees, he sees a few zombies approaching his location. These zombies were most likely attracted by the sounds of the car Raoul made it to create this impressive blockage against zombies. He takes the sword of his brother, together with a knife, and he waits for the zombies to approach him.


    A few zombies are running to Raoul at a jogger speed level. Raoul was creped by this, because it is the first time when he sees zombies running this fast on his direction. Raoul prepares his sword, and one of the zombies running got close enough, Raoul stabs the head of the creature with the knife, then he uses the katana to cut the neck of the zombie. With just one swing he performed an impressive cut, that detached the head from the corpse. While the corpse falls, Raoul swings his sword like a baseball bat, and he made the zombie head flies into the head of another zombie, knocking him down.


    "Headshot!" says Raoul to the fallen zombie.


    Another zombie who was running approaches Raoul, he uses the katana to cut the head vertically. When he successfully cut that zombie and retracted the katana, he kicks his torso, to made him fall on his back.


    He sees three more zombies running at him. Raoul stabs the first zombie with the knife, then he takes it back, he takes two steps back from the others two, and he quickly cut the right leg of a zombie to knock him into the ground. He then stabs the other creature on the head three times, he pushes on the other corpse, and when the corpse got closer, to Raoul''s feet, he stabs the head of that zombie with his brother katana. After he did a stab that killed the creature for good, he sees the small wave of slow zombies coming at him. As Raoul''s breathes heavily, he looked at the five corpses of running creatures he killed earlier with so much style, he decides to turn on the sentries and goes back inside, to wash the blood of these creatures and clean himself up.


    As the sentries got up and running, they decimated the wave of zombies that were attracted by Raoul''s tow truck earlier to create these cars'' blockage. The wave of zombie who were a threat at the beginning became small and insignificant in the face of turrets who cannot be broken by them.


    Raoul gets inside the house, he walks to down the hallway, then he opens the door where the bathroom is. He enters the room, go to the shower, he turns him on, and he sees the hot water is running efficiently thanks to the boiler at the basement. He tests the water, then he proceeds to take his clothes off and go into the shower to have a bath like any normal person who killed five zombies with a sword and a knife.


    ***


    After almost an hour, Raoul, clean and fresh, leaves the house, and he looks at all of the body piles the sentries have done it. He counts the pile, and he came to a number of forty zombie corpses, plus those five fast runners. Raoul looks at the sentries, and he sees them, rotating around like every time they are activated, and no danger is around them such as unknown humans or zombies. Raoul is taking the remote out, and he turns off the turrets, then, when he did that, he hears a whistle coming from somewhere.


    Help support creative writers by finding and reading their stories on the original site.


    Raoul turns to the direction where the whistle came from. As he did that, he took the pistol out and aimed at the person where the whistle come from. That person raises his hands and leave the forest. The Whistler is actually a man, most likely in his 30s, he wears biker clothes, a helmet with a Mohawk and has a shotgun on his back. The man looks at Raoul, and he tells him in French language (the language these characters are speaking):


    "Don''t shoot, please!" says the biker. "I have come here with peaceful intention!"


    "State your name!" says Raoul to that biker, he doesn''t let his guard down.


    "My name is Doc." says the man in biker clothes. "And I would like to make a trade."


    "What trade?"


    "How much for that tow truck?" he points at the tow truck Raoul used earlier to tow the cars to create this massive blockage to stop the zombies.


    "ˇ­What are you offering?"


    "A shotgun, sir." responds the biker with his raised arms. "Twelve shells."


    "You can take the tow truck for free." says Raoul not letting his guard down.


    "For real?" asks the biker confused. "Why?"


    "Because I have finished my thing. But why you need it?"


    "I need to create a blockage like this."


    "Where? Where are you doing it?" asks Raoul still pointing his gun at the biker.


    "Seven kilometres from here, in the entrance of Gorron." says the biker without any sign of lie.


    "Aren''t there waves of zombies already?"


    "Yes. But the leader has a plan to exterminate them in that city and make it free of these things."


    "It might be a futile thing, but I let you do whatever you do with the two truck, under one condition."


    "Sure. Say it and we will do it."


    "You never come back here again, understand?"


    "Yes!" says the biker with honest.


    "Good." says Raoul putting his gun down. "Go ahead."


    He takes the tow truck keys from his pants pocket, and he threw them next to the biker feet. When the keys landed there, the biker took it and run into the two truck, he then gets on the car, and he leaves it. After he left the place, Raoul goes inside, and he proceeds to pack the essential things. Why he does that? Raoul knows the guy was laying.


    Jon, when he was alive, told Raoul about a savage gang biker on this area, who were always ended in jail or with fines. And Raoul also noticed the guy was on drugs because of his state he was in, and the way he was shaking not like a shy or nervous person, more like a cocaine, meth or marijuana addict. Being reporter, gave Raoul some advantages to notice the behaviour of a person.


    He doesn''t know what that biker will do with the tow truck, but Raoul has bigger issues than to find out these bikers'' purpose, he needs to pack everything and leave this place.


    First thing he is packing it is the radio station he and Jon took it from that radio station. He takes it piece by piece and put it into the van he used to take it. It took him almost one hour to do this operation, but when he finished it, he gets to pack the next things, which are three assault rifles and six boxes of ammunition for those guns. He puts these boxes together with the radio station. Then, he goes inside the house and searches for the tablet. After he found the tablet he opens it, and checks the security cameras of this place (yes, this cabin also has security cameras, three to be exact, one in the hallway, one in the living room and one outside the house). He puts the tablet safe into his backpack and takes the detonator of the bomb planted under the cabin.


    Before he was about to leave, he took a look at the bed where Jon died, and he tells him.


    "This is if the things escalate worse. I hope you understand it."


    Raoul leaves the house with his backpack, sword in his sheath and with the knife on. He gets into the van, he turns on the car and as he was about to leave this cabin back, he presses the remote which controls the sentries, he powers them on. After he saw all three turrets are raised, activated and rotate, he steps on the gas and drive away from this place, to the building where Jon told him before he died.

 Maine Street - Part 27

    Meanwhile, in Gorron, at a Bar who is in a bad state as the others buildings around it, the tow truck, driven by Doc, stops next to three motorcycles. The man leaves the tow truck, and he head inside the building. When he got close to the door, he hears a lot of yelling and party music there such as heavy metal. Doc opens the door, and when he got inside, all he sees there are twenty bikers, all partying up on the apocalypse.


    Three bikers are using a corpse of a human as a boxing bag to test their hits and kicks. They laugh as they hit the corpse of a police officer (he wears the uniform of an officer) and spits on him in disgust. Two bikers are rapping a zombie corpse who was once a hooker of this city. The other nine bikers are staying at the table, drunk and wasted, consuming a lot of beer which would have cost thousands of euros, but they''ve got for free. There are some other bikers who are enjoying the music at the jukebox who is still working as new.


    When Doc has entered the bar, a man sees him, one close to the jukebox, he stops it and yells at him with a smile.


    "Doc! Have you good news?"


    "I have, man!" says Doc with a smile. "There is only one bastard at that sweet cabin!" he says as he looked at everyone. "The house got sentries on, but they can be easily taken down, right Ozzie?" he says looking at a biker at a table who is having at his table a sniper rifle.


    "You bet, Doc! I can shoot these things even from Paris if I could!" says the man named Ozzie to doc who is making him happy.


    "We will go when the night comes." says Doc to his people. "Ozzie destroy the turrets, we barge in, kill the man, and get that cabin all by ourselves! Ya hear the plan?"


    "Yes, Doc!" yells most of the bikers, the ones who weren''t completely wasted of the drink.


    Doc walks to the bartender, who is looking at him, and he asks him as he always does,


    "What would the Leader of "Pirates on the Wheels" want to order?"


    "The usual, Jeremy." says Doc with a smile to the bartender who owns this place and is one of the members of this gang.


    These bikers continued to party until the night arrived. And they will be going to that cabin, thinking that they would take it without sweating a blood.


    ***


    At the location of a small building, a van stops in front of the garage door. From that van leaves Raoul, with his backpack on, and with his guns equipped. He looks around him with the gun equipped to shoot anything on the sight, such as walkers or even humans, if it will be the case. He walks cautions to the garage door, and as he got closer there, he takes the key from his pants pocket, and opens the door of the garage. Then, he raises the door of that building and as he raised up enough to stay still, he gets back into the van and drives the car into the garage. After he did that, he quickly takes a look around him, and he closes the garage door behind him.


    Raoul sees the entire garage being in darkness. So, he starts searching for the switcher of this place. Thanks to his mobile phone, who is still working, he searches around the garage for a switch.


    Support the creativity of authors by visiting Royal Road for this novel and more.


    After a few seconds, Raoul find the switch, he turns on the lights and the room lights instantly, revealing the interior of this small garage. Raoul sees a sofa on this garage, he also sees a few bikes there, a few cabins, and he sees a door at the left wall. Raoul goes to that door, he opens it, and as soon as he did that, the room light automatically and there it is shown a generator, and a few shelves with different boxes. He checks the boxes there and all the things he found there were either old clothes, junk, documents, toys of the kids and other things who were probably important to Jon.


    Raoul leaves the room when he finished his search. He doesn''t want to feel bad for searching into the things of a man who died a few days ago. As he got back to the garage, Raoul goes to the bikes, he looks at them, and he finds out they are the same as the ones he took it with Jon at their first scavenging. This man has most likely taken them here while Raoul was not cautious. This man was full of surprises when he was still alive.


    He goes to the back of the van, he opens the doors, and he take the supplies from there, plus the radio station. After he got the radio out, Raoul goes to a free table from this garage, he installs the thing there, as Jon taught him for the first time when they were installing the radio.


    Raoul did the installation in almost an hour, and when he finished it, he turns it on, and as he did that, he got a message from someone he did not expect. It was the same kid from Poland.


    "Mister! Mister. Can you hear me?"


    "Yes." responds Raoul taking the headphone on and the microphone. "I can hear you loud and clear. Over."


    "Oh my God! It works!" says the kid relieved. "Mom! Father! The man is back on the radio!" he says the kid running from the radio, but Raoul could somehow hear the kid screaming probably in the hallway to his parents. "The man that saved me is at radio!"


    "Hey! Hey!" says a female voice unknown to Raoul, in Polish language. "Thank you for saving, our precious boy!"


    "Huh? Can you speak English?" asks Raoul. "Over."


    "Arthur." says the woman on the other side of the radio.


    "Sir!" says the boy in English voice. "My mother thanked you for saving me."


    "ˇ­ but I did nothing."


    "You taught me how to fight against these zombies. And you gave me hope."


    "Yeah. I have talked to military, kid."


    "Seriously?" yelled the kid on the radio, and this made Raoul to almost fall from his seat.


    "Ah." says Raoul to the radio touching his head in a sign of pain. "I contacted them, andˇ­ they say the rescue might be coming. I have also got information about their outposts."


    "Outposts?" says the kid quickly. "Like safe zones?"


    "Yes." responds Raoul. "They told me most of them are either at airports, docks and ports, kid. Over."


    "Awesome." says the kid, then he takes a small break to translate the conversation he had with Raoul on the radio. "My father, asks me about these zombies. How are things in your area?"


    "Not looking too good. Zombie have started to grow mushrooms."


    "Mushrooms?" asks the kid. "Some kind of like orangish or greenish."


    "Yes. Wait. Did they also grow on Poland?"


    "I have seen these things on zombies, sir."


    "Do not UNDER any circumstances touch them! Do you copy, do not under any circumstances touch the mushrooms! Over."


    "What? Why?" asks the kid feeling a bit nervous.


    "They can infect anybody in contact with it. Especially old people. A friend of mine got infected by that thing. died and reanimated as a zombie."


    "Oh, dear." says the kid feeling scared. "Thank you so much for the information! If we can do anything to help you."


    Raoul looks around him, and then, after he was thinking for a moment, he says to the kid.


    "Are your parents fine? Over."


    "Yes, sir." says the kid on the radio.


    "Good." says Raoul at the radio. "You must be strong into this new world, kid."


    "Yeahˇ­"


    "Well. I have to leave, kid. Goodbye."


    "Goodbye, sir!"


    "Goodbye!" says the parents of the kid in Polish language, and Raoul took it as a goodbye.


    He closes the radio, and he looks at it, he wipes his tears falling from the eyes. Raoul thinks about his parents, how he was unable to reach and save them, or his brother from these zombies. He feels very sad for not helping his own parents when the time was coming. "If it wasn''t for that information", he thought to himself. "Maybe I could''ve had a chance to meet themˇ­ one last time."

 Maine street - Part 28

    When the night has come in Maine, the cabin, where once belonged to Jon and Raoul, the atmosphere there is quiet, only the turret moving around sounds can be heard. The lights of the cabin are turned on, well, at least in a room, to let the impression Raoul is still there.


    On the gates of the house, the group of bikers from the town, are coming with their motorbikes there. The gang has their lights of the motorbikes turned on, and they are seventy motorbikes, together with a van. The man on the lead of it is Doc, the biker who meet Raoul earlier and is actually the leader of this biker gang. He looks with a smug face at the fence, and he looks at the turrets, who were put down by the bullets of his trustworthy sniper.


    "Thank you, man!" says Doc to his man who is close to the gang and used his sniper rifle to put down the three turrets. "Now! Let''s barge into our new home!"


    The bikers are driving forward with their bikes, putting the fence down, dodging the cars towed by Raoul today to form some sort of barricade, and hitting the crawling zombies with the motorbike''s wheels or, in case of a biker, he kicks his head, making it fly a few meters to a car window, breaking it and landing on the front seat of the car. The zombie head was still groaning and screeching like nothing happened.


    These bikers are parking their vehicles in front of the house, and they barge into the house with Doc leading them. Not even two seconds, and a biker, decides to open his pants and urinate on the walls of the cabin, others are heading to a room to get drunk with the beer they brought with them, but Doc, he takes his shotgun and goes to the room with the light being turned on. He prepares his gun, and he walks slowly to that room, by himself because the other bikers are busy getting drunk, eat food, urinate on the walls or burning books from the living room.


    When Doc got close to the room with the light turned on, he tries to take a peak from the door, but he couldn''t see much, only the light and a body who is standing on the window. Doc smiles, he represses his shotgun and he barge in the room, he didn''t even hesitate, he was about to shoot, but as he did that, he notices a cut board there of a man advertising a book. The man looks confused at the cut board, then, before he could do something, he hears yelling coming from the living room. He goes there, and as he got there, one of his bikers found a security camera in the living room.


    Stolen story; please report.


    "This asshole had security cameras at him!" says the biker with an English accent. "Ha! This asshole is dead, right?"


    "That''s what I saw." says Doc to the gang. "I saw the man burying the old man when I was searching for supplies. Anyway, the man most likely fled from here!"


    "Ohˇ­" says a man from this biker gang. "So, the man was smart to leave us alone."


    "Yeah. But something doesn''t feel right."


    "Doc!" says Jeremy coming at him, with a bottle of his favourite beer. "Let the fucker alone, and enjoy this bottle of beer I found in the basement. It is amazing, Doc!"


    Doc takes the offer from Jeremy, and as he was about to use a bottle opener to open this drink, a big explosion got this cabin, the explosion must''ve been the bomb hidden under the cabin. Every member of this biker gang was in the cabin at the time when this explosion happened. Every single member is gone, reduced to skeletons, later being burned to death and turned to ash.


    The entire cabin exploded at such a fast speed and loud, that even Raoul, who is on the roof of the building he is hiding in town, has heard and saw it. He stays there, looking at the fireworks from a few kilometres from him location. He couldn''t hear the screaming of the people there who were trying to leave, but before they would be able to leave, a few zombies, the fast types, are running to the explosion. It''s a shame Raoul doesn''t have any binoculars to see a few gang members being eaten by the corpses, but he at least, saw some crazy fireworks. He still feels bad he has to bomb the cabin Jon built for him to live a quiet life.


    "Jon, Andrew and Brother. Hope you do not hate me for doing this."


    He stays there for a few minutes, looking at the big fire this cabin alone could''ve made. After the fire was still going, Raoul gets off the roof, he goes into the interior of the garage, he closes the big door behind him, he goes to his bed, and he falls asleep really fast.

 Maine Street - Part 29

    On the next day, at an artificial island, a helicopter is about to depart from his helipad with three soldiers, and one pilot, all armed with enough weapons to clean even Mayenne. The pilot is about to leave, but, there is a soldier who is coming at them, a soldier in his 30s with a cigarette on his mouth, an LMG carrying on one hand, a hat like Dads are using at fishing, with a small blonde beard, muscular physique and a machete on his back. That soldier is wearing a dog tag that is written Michael, and he is one of the best soldiers this island got.


    "Where are we going this time?" says Michael in English with a German accent as he walks closer to the helicopter, and toss his cigarette on the asphalt.


    "We are heading to the city from France." says a soldier armed with protective gear. "Mayenne to be precise."


    "You serious." says Michael almost laughing. "Why?"


    "We got signal that someone got a radio station that can communicate in almost every Europe." responds a skinny soldier with an AK-47. "And the man managed to communicate with one from Poland."


    "You serious?" asks Michael.


    "Very serious."


    "Mehˇ­ But I can shoot, motherfuckers?"


    "Sure, you can." responds the soldier he first talks with Michael.


    "Awesome." responds Michael closing the helicopter door behind him.


    As the door got closed, the helicopter has started to fly high in the sky and away from the artificial island. As he flies away from the platform, three people, an old man, a young fat man and a guy with long hair, are escorted to a tent where they will be inspected to see if they are carrying the virus or not. These three survivors are looking worse, with dirty clothes, backpacks on, and very tired for travelling so much here by themselves.


    ***


    A few hours later, on the garage where Raoul still stays and signals for the rescue using the radio. He tried to contact the soldiers again for at least six times but to no avail, it didn''t work out well. " They are probably busy right now." says Raoul to himself. He decides to search for random signals, and he finds one.


    " Hello! Can someone hear me?" says a lady voice in Italian language.


    "Yes! I hear you!" responds Raoul in English to make the listener understand he is talking English. "Over."


    "Are your military by any chance?" asks the woman feeling relieved.


    "Unfortunately, no." responds Raoul. "I am currently on France, Maine. I am waiting for rescue. Over."


    "Maine, France?! I am right now in Milano, Italy! There are things who are eating people alive."


    "Like that''s something new."


    "What?" asks the woman confused. "No listen! these things have appeared yesterday morning."


    "ˇ­ Excuse me? Did you say yesterday? Over."


    "Yes. That''s what I say." responds the female on the radio. "These monsters are like the ones from the movies, but hey cannot die easily."


    "Look. these things have appeared here a long time. At least in region are almost ten days since this infection. How it has spread slowly over there? Maybe the mountains orˇ­ Are you alright? Over."


    This book was originally published on Royal Road. Check it out there for the real experience.


    "I am blocked into a Bar with five more people. Listen! Call for help or something! Police, Military, FBI! Please! Do it now!" yell the lady at the radio.


    "Okay, okay." responds Raoul. "I will try now to see if I can call someone from there. Transmission ends!"


    Before he was about to close the transmission, he looked at the note of the number of the transmission was to speak with that woman. He copied the address which will be a good thing into the future. He closes the transmission, and he try to call the military base, this time he managed to call one, but not the one who are on their way to save him.


    "Can somebody hear me! Can somebody hear me, now! Over!" says Raoul in English language.


    "Say it, citizen! Over." responds someone from the other side sounding like a strong man. "State your name and location of rescue!"


    "It is Milano, Italy. At a Bar, close to a highway, I think. Sorry I just made a contact with the place a minute ago. I on the other hand, I am on Maine, France. Over."


    "Interesting." says the man. "We can sure trust you?"


    "Yes! Can you make a contact with them if I give you their address of contact? Over."


    "We can. State it." says the man on the other side of the radio.


    Raoul proceed to say slowly the address, while the soldier from the other side types the address, slowly and carefully.


    When they finished it, the soldier told Raoul to close the station for a moment because he will call him later. They close the transmission while Raoul waits for them to call him back.


    After a few minutes, the soldier from earlier calls Raoul, who was getting bored enough to a paper plane and threw it on the room.


    "You are right, citizen! We will send a squad there. In the meantime, do you need help?"


    "Not now." says Raoul on the other side. "I''ve probably got a squad who is coming after me. Soon enough. They told me a few days ago they are sending their man in Mayenne to clean the Z''s and establish an outpost. Over."


    "The Delta Island is coming after you? Over."


    "I don''t know their name, but probably yes. Over."


    "These people are closer to you. Good luck and hope you can send another radio call but at a close distance from us."


    "What''s your area? Over."


    "It''s close to Greece. Over."


    "Understand. Transmission out!"


    "Take care there! Out!"


    They are both are closing the radio at the same time.


    ***


    On the helicopter, the soldiers who are heading to Mayenne are about to enter France area. As the helicopters flies at a normal altitude, the soldiers are preparing their miniguns to start the cleaning operation even though they have almost one more hour to come to them, but a soldier decides to shoot the zombies now, thinking it would be a great time, and that one is Michael.


    He prepares his sniper rifle, he looks on the visor down at a ship, and he sees there are some zombies roaming all around it. An abandoned ship with zombies it is considered a trap to them, but if a human is there. May God give him mercy. Michael shoots the first shoot, who penetrated the skull of a zombie at the dock, but, when he falls one zombie jumps on him, and he beat him. But Michael doesn''t seem too surprised.


    "Undeads are walking over there." says Michael to the teammates, where one of them takes his vision googles and looks there.


    "There is one." says the man with vision googles. "But it is a shame he is eating a zombie. Knock him down." he takes the gadget off.


    "Sure." says Michael shooting the second shoot who hits the undead head. "Three." he shoots the third zombie who is walking on the ship. "Four." he shoots the fourth one, but the bullet goes from the fourth and to another zombie head. "ˇ­Five."


    "You''re good, shooter." says the soldier with a machine gun attached to the helicopter.


    "I know damn well, man!" says Michael shooting a sixth zombie who was climbing the ship containers. "Crawlers."


    Michael continues to kill zombies. He kills almost ten zombies. Almost because the tenth one was still moving when he got shoot on his neck. The helicopter moves away from that ship, and continues to fly further to the destination called Mayenne.


    "It was a good practice." says Michael. "Hope the zombies there would be a challenge."


    "Hope so, too." says the soldier at the machine gun.


    "We are going to be there in almost two hours." says the pilot. "Remember the mission, we have to take the man with the radio. His source of communication is extremely valuable."


    "Yes, we know." says Michael. "But if he dies it will not be our fault."


    "Michael." says the co-pilot.


    "Just saying." says Michael raising his hands like a guilty person.


    The helicopter continues to fly straight to Mayenne with the soldiers prepared for anything.


    "Prepare to contact the source." says the pilot to the co-pilot.


    "I''m on it." says co-pilot turning on the radio and taking the microphone in his hands with a pair of headphones.

 Maine Street - Part 30

    Raoul stands on the rooftop of the building he started to live since the cabin was taken by the bikers and bombed by the C4''s planted under thanks to Jon who did that before this apocalypse hit, he looks at the streets, and he sees zombies of bikers from that cabin, roaming into the streets and not noticing Raoul on the rooftop. He decides to look on the sky to see if the helicopter will come to help him get out from here.


    He stays on the rooftop for a few more minutes until he sees a zombie walking toward him. Raoul gets off the roof by sliding it, he lands on the grass, and he goes back inside the garage, while the zombie was trying to reach with one mission arm. Raoul did not kill the thing, he only kicked the creature stomach, making it fall on his back on the street. Then, he enters the garage and heads to the radio who started working.


    "Hello!" says the person on the other side. "Here is Co-Pilot Milton! Member of Operation Attack at Mayenne! Are you there civilian Raoul? Over."


    "Yes! I am here close to Mayenne!" says Raoul after he put the headphones on and turned the microphone on to talk with the co-pilot. "At a garage. With the radio still intact and armed with weapons and supplies. Over."


    "Good to hear." says the same co-pilot. "At this moment we will try to clean Mayenne in the meantime, please be patient and wait for our signal on the radio. Over."


    "Roger that. Over."


    Then, they stopped communicating on the radio. Before Raoul was about to turn off the radio, he gets another message, but from someone he did not expect to send him.


    "H-Hey! The man I talked! Are you there?" says the female from Italy sounding distressed.


    "Yes! I am here." says Raoul putting the microphone back in function. "What is the problem? You sound worry. Over."


    "Thank goodness. We need help!"


    "What sort of help?"


    "A-A man of our group starts to feel awful. His skin got the other colour, and he starts losing a few teeth."


    "Oh no. Does he have a bite on his body? I repeat: Does he have a bite on his body? Over."


    "I-I found three bites." says the woman feeling scared."


    "Oh, God." says Raoul on the radio. "Iˇ­ I have bad news! Your friend is infected! And all you can do now is to dispose him. Kill his brain. Over."


    "W-What?... No. It has to live."


    "It cannot live." assures Raoul on the radio. "I have seen people turning like him. And it is awfulˇ­ you have to kill him. Now."


    The girl did not respond. Raoul feels insecure, so he tries to contact the woman on the radio.


    "Can you hear me now? Are you still there?"


    "ˇ­I am doing it." says the woman in a sad voice at the radio, then she closes the radio.


    Raoul takes his headphones off, and he looks at the radio. He did not know this will be the last conversation he would have with the woman from Italy. He looks on the improved bed, where a backpack with supplies, two assault rifles and a machete are laying there. Raoul thought of taking the bike to get to the zone where military wait for him, since the van started to run short of fuel.


    ***


    The first helicopter, the one who carries Michael and three soldiers, are approaching the Mayenne, the city where the first attack on the sky will start. The soldiers are on their positions. Michael and with another one is taking machine guns and are looking on the city, who is filled with thousands of meat-eating creatures.


    "There are so many down there." says Co-pilot frightening.


    "Not as many as they were in London." says Michael to the co-pilot with a smile. "These bastards won''t be able to face a machine gun."


    "Here it is Squad V." says a somone on the radio of communication at the helicopter. "We have already entered the France. We are on our way to Mayenne. Estimated time, at least one hour and half. Over."


    The author''s tale has been misappropriated; report any instances of this story on Amazon.


    "I got the message Squad V. We will meet at the checkpoint. Over." says the Co-pilot on the radio.


    "Roger that. Good luck, hunting! Over." says the pilot or co-pilot of Squad V.


    The co-pilot closes the radio, and he looks at Michael and the soldier with bandana, who are about to fire their machine guns at the city with zombies. He looks at his co-pilot who continues to fly this helicopter.


    "We start the fire?"


    "Not yet." says the pilot who is starting to decrease the altitude of the helicopter a bit. "Waitˇ­ Waitˇ­ Wait a few more secondsˇ­"


    The helicopter decreased enough altitude to help machine gunners do their job. When they got at the good altitude, where some zombies started to look at the sky, the pilot yelled at his machine gunners.


    "FIRE!"


    "Fire!" says Michael pulling the trigger of the machine gun and aiming at any zombie in sight. "Wahoo!" he yelled as he kills at least twenty zombies in about a minute via headshots. "This is awesome!"


    "Michael!" says the other gunner who is killing less zombies. "Be calm, man! They are still humans!"


    "Who gives a fuck?!" yells Michael shooting three climbers who were trying to climb a house roof. "Once they have become dead. They cannot feel pain." he shoots six zombies running on the street to a house with light turn on. "Seems someone is there."


    Michael points at the house with a light turned on, but before the other gunner would come to see it, they see the door of the building getting opened and a huge zombie leaving the building. He is almost 2 and half meters tall, both arms are muscular enough to rip a truck cabin bare hand and wears ripped clothes. The huge zombie looks at the helicopter, start roaring towards it and running into the next building. The gunner, pilot and co-pilot were terrified at the sight of that thing, while Michael was.


    "New zombies." he says with a smile. "I like new zombies."


    "What is that thing?" asks the co-pilot looking at the building where the huge zombie just entered.


    "It is a Class F." says the other gunner to the co-pilot. "Don''t know if he is a Thrower, Pusher, Puncher or Smasher."


    "What is the difference?" says Michael shooting with the machine gun about ten zombies on the street who are looking at the building. "Leave it alone, okay? We have business to attend on the streets."


    "Yes." says the other gunner, preparing his machine gun and shoots on sight the zombies on the street, the climbing ones, the ones who are next to windows and the cars where some of them are locked.


    As they shoot and the helicopter continued to navigate on the city, the co-pilot sees an open garage door, he looked at it and he sees a zombie running from there into the street. While the zombie was still running to the area where Michael is shooting zombie, that one fast runner got shoot into the head by Michael. The co-pilot looked down there, and all he can see are bodies of zombies, humans who were eaten alive, cars blocking the street and building on the brick of collapse.


    "How many we''ve got?" asks Michael as he waits for the machine gun to cool down since it got sued to much by this soldier.


    "A few more." says the pilot looking down. "We might have luck here to establish the outpost."


    "If we can kill that thing from Class F." says the other gunner.


    "You haven''t killed it?!" asks the co-pilot scared.


    "It is impossible." says the gunner. "This thing has entered the building and we don''t know how to take this thing out. Maybe the Dr. Jinn can do an examination of him, and discover why these things starts mutating."


    "No, thanks." says Michael getting off from his seat and goes at the pilot. "Shoot the buildings with the rockets."


    "But they will attract the zombie from all of this region." says the pilot to Michael.


    "I don''t care even if they attract the one from Asia." says Michael. "I don''t want to see that thing jumping on our helicopter and bringing us down. You hear me?!"


    "Yes, sir!" says the pilot feeling stressed out, he turns the helicopter around to the building where the big creature hide and he shoot three rockets to the big house.


    The building which had about three floors is falling down so fast and producing a lot of damage on the streets. Burring the corpses of zombies who got killed or the ones who are still alive. The soldiers are looking at the zone where the building fallen, wondering if the thing there has been buried underneath the whole thing.


    Unlucky for them, the huge monsters get up from the bricks, rocks and logs, and he looks really pissed at the helicopter. He screamed at them, then he grabs a big chunk of cement and he throws at the helicopter. The pilot managed to fly the helicopter into a direction to dodge the big rock. Then, Michael takes the gun machine of other gunner and he tries to shoot the thing, but the zombie proceeds to run again on the city this time he got into the garage.


    "That''s a Thrower." says co-pilot looking at the boulder who lands on the roof of another building, smashing a zombie who is standing there and looking at the helicopter.


    "This son of a bitch is pissing me off!" says Michael who shoots the machine gun at that garage where the creature hides. "Die already!"


    He sees the creature running from the garage, holding a crate and it throws the crate at the helicopter. The helicopter got hit by the box, who hit the area where the pilot is. The hit was so hard, it almost breaks the glass and the crate itself. The soldiers have even found out the thing inside that crate it is four propane gas tanks. And thankfully, the propane tanks did that explode close to them, it explodes when they hit the ground.


    The huge creature continues to flee into the city, at a safe place from the soldiers in the helicopter.


    Michael continued to use the minigun to shoot the creature, while the soldiers are looking at him, concerned. They did nothing, only watch at the Michael who over heat the machine gun of the other gunner. He looked down and he tells the pilot.


    "Have you ever seen a thing like this?"


    "Only in reports at Serbia and Macedonia!" say the pilot to Michael. "This thing is hard to kill. Not even a tank can face a thing like this."


    "Oh, man!" says Michael with a smile. "If I kill this thing. This outpost will be mine."


    "But commander." tries to say the co-pilot.


    "Tell him to haunt a thing like this and we can negotiate."

 Maine Street - Part 31

    Meanwhile, at the garage where Raoul still stays safe there by himself, he opens the radio station, and he tries to contact the military. As he did all of the things Jon showed him when he was still alive, the transmission works.


    "Tell him to haunt a thing like this, and we can negotiate." says a voice in the helicopter coming far away.


    "Hey! Is this the Operation Attack at Mayenne, over!" says Raoul on the microphone.


    "Yes." says the voice from the radio, which resemblance the co-pilot. "Here is Milton, again! What is your status? Over."


    "The thing is looking good here." says Raoul on the radio. "How is the thing there. Over."


    "Classified information. The mutants here have taken the Mayenne. And we don''t know how many of them are there."


    "Probably thousands or more than this." says Michael who shoots his machine gun to other zombies. "Tell the man to wait until we clean this city from a giant zombie!"


    "Giant zombie?" asks Raoul shocked.


    "Michael!" yelled the co-pilot at the soldier. "Now you have heard the thing."


    "Yes. but what is this thing exactly?"


    "A huge zombie. Two meters or taller and very aggressive."


    "Never saw or heard one." replies Raoul. "All of these infected are slow or running."


    "Great. We have taken the most difficult city from Maine." says the co-pilot sounding pissed.


    "Are you going to be fine?"


    "We are in a helicopter." says the co-pilot. "We are totally fine, if the thing will be not knocking us down with a block of- Oh God!"


    Then, the transmission suddenly ends and Raoul looks distressed at the radio. He takes the microphone and yells at it.


    "Hello! Hello! Operation Attack to Mayenne, do you copy?!"


    No response after almost ten seconds. He tries again.


    "Operation Attack to Mayenne, do you copy?!"


    ***


    A case of literary theft: this tale is not rightfully on Amazon; if you see it, report the violation.


    A few moments earlier, before the tragedy, Michael saw the huge thing jumping from the wall of two floors building, and landing on the roof of a building. Michael proceed to shoot the thing with the machine gun, but it has no effect on it, and he didn''t shoot the head, all of the body. The creatures smash the roof of the building and goes down there.


    "This piece of shit is getting on my nerves!" says Michael looking at the house where the creature has gone in.


    The co-pilot closes the transmission, and he look at the building where the thing has gone in. He looks at the pilot who only lower them down a bit, but as he did that, the creature jumped back on the roof and this time he got a big boiler on his hands. The pilot freaked at this, and he tries to raise them up, but it was too late because the creature has thrown the boiler at the helicopter, which hit it pretty hard to make it lose control and fall on the close forest.


    As the helicopter was descending fast from the skies, Michael grabbed to the handle and struggle to hold it tight. The other gunner wasn''t so lucky since he falls from the helicopter and landed on the streets, where a few crawlers were still kicking alive. The gunner was not even alive when he hit the asphalt since he falls from almost one thousand meters altitude.


    The pilot was trying to stabilize the helicopter, but it was no use, the helicopter was still going down. While Milton, was also trying to do something, but it didn''t work for him. Michael continued to hold tight, and he yelled at their pilots.


    "HOLD TIGHT!"


    Then, as the helicopter got close to the ground, the pilots and Michael are preparing for their impact which was a painful one. This impact has killed the pilot who got impaled by a tree brunch the helicopter destroyed, and it also got another tree branch that hit on the head. The co-pilot got also stabbed with a tree branch but on his neck. While Michael, survived the attacks of the branches, but as the helicopter landed, he suffered a luxation of the hands he was holding the handler and his body landed on a bunch of rocks.


    After a few minutes of unisons, Michael wakes up, and he realize it is stuck on the helicopter. He also fell the pain of both of his hands who are on his back and crashed between the anti-bite armour he wears and the spick rocks of the river he crashed. Michael tries to move his hands, but he cannot do it. All he can do is scream and look on the sun (he got trapped on the helicopter but the side where the other gunner was on his position with the doors open).


    "Help! Help me and I give you chocolate!" he yelled out of desperation, and he looks at his pilots and co-pilots who are laying dead on their seats. "Sorry, guys!"


    As Michael looks on the sky, he sees some dark smoke leaving the helicopter, he looked all around it, and he didn''t say anything that resemble a fire, so this give him a conclusion the fire might be coming out from the other part of the helicopter.


    "Pleaseˇ­ God." he says as he was thinking that he might be burning alive here.


    ***


    Raoul leaves the garage with a bike. He closes the garage door behind him, and he look up on the sky, he sees the dark on the sky, and before he was about to pedal into that direction, he observes a vehicle on the road, with a door opened and with a zombie in there. Raoul was thinking to take the car, but as he sees the zombie there, he decides not to. He continues to pedal, but after five minutes, he turns around, put the bike down, walk to that car, he uses the knife he got on his belt to stab the zombie head, open the front door, get the dead thing from there, gets to the driver seat, he turns on the car with the key in contact, and he drives with the car to the area where the incident happened.


    "Hang in there, squad! I am coming for you all!" says Raoul going with the car at the street that is leading to the forest zone.

 Maine Street - Part 32

    Michael is still struggling with escaping from the helicopter. He tried to move his hands, but he cannot move them since he landed with his back with heavy armour and on spiky rocks of the river. He also observes smoke coming out of it, which is a bad sign that it can either be on fire and explode at any time, or a small fire. He tries to scream for help, but he thought nobody would hear it, but he doesn''t know the help is on his way, and the help it is Raoul.


    "God damn it, apocalypse!" says Michael.


    He hears a screaming coming from the co-pilot seat. He looks there, and he sees something which made him feel sad. The man who was earlier alive and talked with Raoul has become a zombie now. Thankfully for Michael, the zombie is not able to move since it is stuck with the tree breach at the neck on the seat.


    "Sorry, man." says Michael at the zombie body who is trying to move, growls and move his arms fast. "If I would be able to move. I would''ve shot the head, or picked with something sharp from here."


    He continues to look at the sky, at the white smoke who is coming from the outside of the plane. Michael laughs as he looked at the smoke.


    "I remember the time when my little cousin and I saw a Cyanide and Happiness clip about some kind of smoke signal. We got on the backyard, and we did this thing. We tried so hard to do the boobs part, it took us almost the entire day to do it, and we still haven''t done it to this dayˇ­" he sighs. "Hope not all my family are dead. Just like yours, mate."


    The zombie continues to growls and screech, moving his arms in all of the directions.


    "Help...HELP!"


    ***


    The car driven by Raoul continues to run on the road like the wind. Raoul dodges a few zombies on the road who were either Crawler types, Undead types or normal types of zombies. Raoul doesn''t know all the differences between zombies, he just knows that every zombie might have a special ability which will make him different. Thanks to Jon documents who were led by the Organization, and Raoul managing to save them before he got away from the cabin and read them on the garage, helped him a lot to identify some small difference between zombies. But even the documents weren''t much of the use because they have some information about them, but the nature of this Z virus, is truly terrifying and hard to explain even for an expert in microbiology, disease, and medicine.


    He drives forward, looking at the smoke which is getting closer to his field of view. Raoul breathes heavily and he tells himself.


    "Come on, Raoul. You have to help them!"


    He looks on his left, at the left seat, where the guns are put there. He looks back on the road, and he dodges a car that was on the right way of the street. The car that was left there, was smoking and had a zombie on the boot who was knocking it and trying to get out.


    "Poor thing." says Raoul after he saw the boot moving a little on the window as he drives away with the car he found.


    After a few minutes of driving, Raoul got at the helicopter, he steps on the stop of the car, takes the assault rifle, together with a knife, gets out of the car and runs at the helicopter. As he runs straight ahead, Raoul could hear screaming of "Help!" coming from there. But he also witnesses six zombies coming to his direction, six normal looking zombies.


    Raoul stopped from walking, he takes the assault rifle, and he shoots all of the six zombies coming from the same direction at a slow speed. He shoots their head and the torso. He emptied the entire magazine of the assault rifle just to kill six zombies. He throws the empty magazine on the back, and he loads the next one. Then, he runs back to the helicopter.


    If you come across this story on Amazon, it''s taken without permission from the author. Report it.


    He got closer to it, and he sees the bad state it is. He looks up, and he sees the doors opened where the scream continued to be heard. Raoul also notices smoke coming from the helicopter, so he quickly threw the weapon on the ground, jump on the helicopter doors, and he looks down.


    "Thank God!" says Michael looking up at Raoul. "Thought I would never see help. Or human here."


    "Are you one of the soldiers who were sent to Mayenne?" asks Raoul in English.


    "Yes. I am Soldier Michael, chief of this operation, which you can see, it is on a bad state." he says with a smile.


    "Are you really joking at a time like this?" asks Raoul confused. "Can you move?"


    "Both of my arms were sandwiched by my armour and these spikey rocks." says Michael with sarcasm. "Yeah. I am fine."


    "Okayˇ­" he says rotating his eyes. "Thank goodness I have experience with people like these." he whispered this as he jumps on the helicopter, close to Michael body. And he sees a zombie moving on the co-pilot seat.


    "That poor thing, got killed by a tree branch and transformed quickly." says Michael feeling bad, and he looks at Raoul who approaches the zombie, and stabs his head, the centre where the brain is located. "Good stab, mate." says Michael. "Now can you help me? There is another helicopter that might take us."


    "Really?" asks Raoul going closer to the Michael body.


    "First." says Michael to Raoul who was close to lift him up. "Take this cursed armour off me."


    "Sure." says Raoul, who takes the torso armour from the soldier that covers his entire torso, neck, arms, and private areas. "God what is this armour?"


    "Cement and weed." says Michael to Raoul who stopped for a moment to take the belt out, then Michael told him with a serious expression. "These bastards fall down when they bite this thing, especially the weed or meth part."


    "Kayˇ­" says Raoul proceeding to take out all six belts from the front, and he turns Michael around, heard his screaming and took out the armour fast, then throw it at a few meters from them.


    "Good." says Michael in a hurt voice. "Damn these arms."


    "Are they bad injured?"


    "I cannot move them. You need to help me." says Michael.


    "Okay." responds Raoul, taking Michael body, and throwing him over his shoulders. "Arrgh! Man, you''re heavy."


    "If I was a woman I would''ve kicked your groin." says Michael in an irritated and painful voice as the damage to both of his hands continues to inflict into his body. "Move!"


    Raoul manages to climb the up part of the helicopter with difficulty, but when he got there, he runs with Michael over his shoulders to the car he took it to come here. Raoul ran with him at that car, in a fast peace, and as he got closer to the vehicle, an explosion was happening on his back. The helicopter exploded.


    "Man!" says Michael looking at the explosion. "The Z''s are most likely coming here."


    "You think so?" asks Raoul opening the back doors and putting Michael body there.


    He runs on the front seat, driver seat, turns on the car, and he steps on the gas, going back to his garage, where the radio would be able to help them communicate with the next squad who is going to come at them.


    "Where are we going?"  asks Michael sitting on the back of the car with his hands on the body, soaking in blood of the cuts I have.


    "To heal you, and call for help." says Raoul driving the car on the same road he took it earlier to come here. "The radio station is there, and we can use it to call for help or your squad if you say they are going to come into this direction.


    "No. I have to warn them." says Michael. "Arrgh!" he tried to move his arms, but it hurt him terrible by doing that. "That place is a No Zone."


    "What do you mean?"


    "There is a Class F over there."


    "Class F?"


    "A big zombie, civilian. That creature was able to throw a block of cement at my helicopter."


    "Jesus!" says Raoul terrified, he continues to drive. "Then. The plan is to see if they can find a way to land in Gorron? It would be hard, man since the streets are roaming with zombies and filled with climbers'' type of zombies."


    "Oh." says Michael curios. "You do know the types of zombies we are fighting against. But let me assure you, there are things worse than the one I have encountered today."


    "How so?"


    "You will see. Arrgh!"


    "Does it hurt?"


    "A lot."


    Raoul steps on the gas, making the car drive much faster to the road that ties Gorron and Mayenne.

 Maine Street - Part 33

    Later this day, at the garage of Raoul, Michael, sits on the bed where Raoul has slept since he got this garage, he looks at his bandaged arms, he feels useless, and he tells Raoul.


    "You must be good with injures. Are you a Doctor?"


    "No." responds Raoul, disconnecting the radio from the table and carrying him to the van who is inside the garage. "Iˇ­ I was a journalist."


    "Really? At what newspaper?"


    "Here in France. You are probably not familiar with it."


    "Fair point." says Michael to Raoul who is putting the radio on the back of the van. "What is the plan?"


    "We will get there." says Raoul. "Stay safe, and wait for the helicopter you''ve told me it will come. If it comes."


    "Don''t worry." says Michael. "That Squad got a Hella of a pilot and a good squad shooter. While I was having moderate soldiers in terms of shooting."


    "I see." says Raoul. "We would most likely hide somewhere and waits for them to clean the streets. Also, what is that thing you told me?"


    "You mean the zombie from Class F? Is a monster."


    "Yesˇ­ Are there many of types I am not aware of?"


    "Trust me, mate. Not even I saw all zombies. Only heard rumours about creatures who are worse than the one I have encountered so far. A rumour is spread about healing zombies in Holland who can be killed, but they can regenerate their limbs if the mind is still intact."


    "No way." says Raoul shocked. "A zombie who is able to generate his head?"


    "Don''t know how he does it, but I hope these types won''t be able to regenerate their heads. It also sounds weird since most of the zombies I have encountered can only be killed for good with a shoot on their head."


    "Yes. Not even decapitation work sometimes." responds Raoul sitting next to Michael. "Other types of creatures?"


    "I will tell you at base." he raises from the bed. "We must go, before the squad will leave without us."


    Raoul and Michael are getting into the van parked at the garage. The van contains one of the most essential things Raoul has, a radio, together with a pack of fire weapons, three machetes, explosives, armour anti-bites stored by Jon, three flare guns and one jerrycan which can be sued either to fuel the vehicle or create a fire to attract creatures.


    Raoul sits on the driver seat, while Michael sits on the other seat. Raoul closes the door at Michael side since he was not able to close it with his hands (he got opened as the vehicle was there), and Raoul turns on the van, press the gas pedal and leave this garage. As the van did a right turn, roil continued to drive, without closing the door of the garage, which would let any single zombie enter or a survivor scavenging the place which still has enough supplies, and food since Raoul didn''t load food into the van because of radio size and the other essential things mentioned earlier.


    The van continues to drive thanks to Raoul, who is looking at the road like a decent driver in a zombie apocalypse. Michael on the other hand, he sits tight, and he looks at the windows, seeing corpses of humans and zombies who were probably having a hard time. Michael sees a zombie on the road, who is eating a dog, and he doesn''t seem shocked or scared, he feels sad for the poor dog.


    If you spot this tale on Amazon, know that it has been stolen. Report the violation.


    The van takes a turn at the street that is leading into the Mayenne, and he did, a zombie, who is leaving a building, sees the van, and he proceed to run after the van. Raoul sees the zombie running after him, and he doesn''t care about it. Michael saw the zombie, and he looks at Raoul.


    "We let him run after us?"


    "He will most likely lose us." says Raoul to Michael.


    "Hope you''re right." responds Michael feeling useless because of the arms being broken.


    ***


    Later, as the night came, Raoul and with Michael, arrive at the Mayenne, but as they got there, Raoul parks the vehicle somewhere safe with no zombies. Raoul stops the car, and he leaves the vehicle, then, he helps Michael leave the car because of his condition. When they left the car, Raoul goes to the back of the van, he gets his assault rifle. Michael stood there, with both of his arms being crossed on bandages, almost like a person from an asylum put on that known vest.


    "Are you going to fight all of the zombies?"


    "No." responds Raoul. "The plan is to get into a building. Stay safe and wait for the team of soldiers to come."


    They suddenly look on the direction where a snarl was heard. Raoul aims his assault rifle with the flashlight at that direction, and he sees a zombie walking to them. Raoul takes the machete from the van, and as the zombie was walking closer to him, he sliced the creature head, at the exact area where the brain is still working. The creature falls on the concrete, and blood proceed to flow from the body of the dead creature who was able to move awhile ago.


    "We have to move." says Raoul putting the machete on the belt, a fire flame he puts on the left sacculus, five clip sizes of the assault rifle at the sacculus on the left shoulder and holding the assault rifle on both of his hands.


    He moves to the door of a building with three floors. Raoul opens the door slowly, and he goes first, then Michael follows him, not carrying a weapon or anything useful to protect him. Raoul and Michael are moving slowly without a sound, and Raoul illuminating the way with the flashlight at the assault rifle. He knows that shooting a gun would attract the zombies from this city and outside, and he knows the light would attract it too, but he has no choice because they are doing this mission at a time when the Sun settled down almost an hour ago, and electricity got cut loose anywhere.


    Raoul and Michael got on the hallways of the building, Raoul put the flashlight on a corpse who is standing on their way, Michael observes the corpse is mission his right hand. He asks Raoul to poke the creature with the stock of the gun, and he did it. He was scared, but it felt a relief when he saw the corpse not moving or twitching at his gesture, and he also discovers a shot of a gun on the head, which means he most likely took his life, or he got shoot a while ago. Raoul and Michael continue to move forward, to the safety.


    They got on the second floor, and as they got there, Raoul hears some zombie screaming into an apartment, he looks at Michael who only told him to leave it alone, and so he did. They move forward, ignoring that zombie scream and the hits on the door.


    Finally, Raoul and Michael arrived at the third floor, and there, they sit on a flat, where Raoul decides to put the torch in the middle of the single room being supported by a few books found there, to help him adjust to the location and help Michael to sit somewhere and rest until the help will arrive.


    "Are you alright?" asks Raoul looking at Michael who is starting to sweat.


    "Yeah. Maybe I am feeling tired." says Michael to Raoul sweating. "Hope the rescue will come and see us. I would like to take three days off and sleep into my beautiful tent."


    "You guys are having tents?"


    "The solders are getting it, while survivors, researchers, families, and other kind of people are taking the trailers or cars." says Michael.


    "Doesn''t this seem kind of unfair? I mean, you are getting out there, helping people while," he says and se walks and sits on the couch, next to Michael. "you are getting out there and fight zombies."


    "I got used to it, besides, it isn''t that hard." says Michael to Raoul assuring him he is fine with the things he got at the base.


    "Yeah. Well, if I ever get there alive. I would most likely stay somewhere and help the Army as much as I can."


    "You are already helping us, mate."


    "Really?"


    "Yes."


    Before this conversation would continue, they hear a helicopter outside.

 Maine Street - Part 34

    Raoul goes to the window, then Michael follows him. Both of them are looking at the helicopter that is flying on the night sky, and with the lights turned on. Michael tells Raoul to take the vision googles from the left pocket of his pants, Raoul takes the goggles and sue it to look at the helicopter. He sees it perfectly good because these google are even having night mode vision.


    On the helicopter where the Squad V is flying, there is a pilot, three gunners who are at the machine guns, one sniper, and one co-pilot who is looking around the city for any sign of the survivors with the huge light this helicopter has it. The co-pilot only sees zombies on the streets, and car crashes with fire.


    Raoul gives the googles to Michael, who didn''t catch it perfectly, he opens the window, takes off the flare gun, and aims at the sky, then, he immediately shoots it. and as he did it, the helicopter light starts to aim at them, making both Michael and Raoul put his eyes on the hands because of the powerful light. Then they took the arms off, and adjust to the light.


    "Michael?" says a soldier on the microphone at the helicopter. "Are you there?"


    "Yes!" yells Michael at the window, as Raoul gave him some space. "I am here with the survivor I was takes to take him."


    "Is he infected?" asks the soldier on the megaphone.


    "No!" yells Michael.


    "Are you infected?" asks the soldier after he took a quick look at the Michael thanks to the light.


    "I am only injured at both hands."


    "But you do not have the Z symptoms?"


    "No, sir!"


    Then, all of a sudden, a loud scream can be heard into the city. The helicopter starts to drive at a higher altitude, while the gunners are shooting on the streets, because the zombies have started to move on the city. The co-pilot is moving the light on any direction and any street to show all of the zombies there.


    "Raoul." says Michael turning to him. "We have to hold our ground. This area is still not safe yet."


    "I understand." says Raoul, and he takes his assault rifle, and aims it at the door in case a zombie will be barging in.


    "Can you tie a knife to my shoes?" asks Michael to Raoul.


    "Um. Sure." says Raoul who did not expect this request from anyone.


    He takes a small knife from the floor, and he ties on the Michael left shoe, with duct tape he found on a table in this room. After he made this, Michael thanked Raoul, then, he raises the left leg and waits for the zombies to come to the room.


    "You can fight like this?"


    "Kid. You have no idea how much training I''ve got in the past six years against this apocalypse scenario." says Michael to Raoul with a smirk. "I ain''t going to die due to a monster who cannot think rationally or like an enemy soldier."


    A case of content theft: this narrative is not rightfully on Amazon; if you spot it, report the violation.


    As they stood at the room, all prepared for defence, Raoul and Michael hears groaning and beating sounds coming from the door. They were probably alerted by the helicopter sounds from earlier when they approached the window of the house, or by the flashlight of the room, and also, the fact that this room is still having "working light", and outside is night.


    "These soldiers are having the control outside!" states Michael to Raoul.


    "Hope these creatures aren''t as dangerous as the one you''ve met and told me." says Raoul aiming with the assault rifle at the door of the building.


    The door continued to be hit by the zombies outside. It got hit a bunch of times that the door was starting to cut loose and could break at any time. Michael puts the feet down with the knife, both of his arms tied, and looking at the door. He wanted to say something, but he decides to remain precautions and prepared for anything that is going to come out of there.


    The door break loses a few minutes later after the beating of the zombies, Raoul starts shooting the door and killing a lot of zombies, but not all of them. Michael jumps close to a zombie, he stood his ground, raises his left leg and with a roundhouse kick he has done to a deformed zombie, stabs the head of the thing, He takes his leg from there, and he kicks the jaw of a zombie with the knife leg. Raoul throws the clip on the floor, uses a new one to reload the assault rifle, and he starts spraying the zombies who are coming into the room.


    A few moments later, Raoul and Michael, have killed the rest of the upcoming zombies who were coming into the apartment they are staying. Raoul unloads the clip of the assault rifle, he throws it to the ground, and he put the other one, then he cocks it, and prepares to shoot another zombie. Michael, however, he asks Raoul to take off the knife from the shoe, which Raoul does it. He puts the gun down, helps Michael take off the duct tape from the knife at the show and as he did that, he puts the knife back, and throw the duct tape on the floor.


    "Now what?"


    "We wait." responds Michael heading at the window and looking on the helicopter which continues to shoot the waves of zombies on the streets.


    "Do you think we would be able to go outside now?" says Raoul looking at the helicopter who is flying around the city, gunners and sniper shooting the creatures without mercy.


    "Not yet." responds Michael again. "We have to be sureˇ­ I''ve got a feeling that bastard who put me down is hiding on this city."


    "You sure it wasn''t killed by the squad?"


    "Nah. That bastard is hard to kill. Not even rockets were able to scratch his giant arms." Michael asks Raoul to hold the vision googles for him to look at the city and at the zombies outside.


    Raoul also turned the night vision to help Michael see clearly the things outside. He looked on all directions for about a minute and half, then, he says to Raoul to take the vision googles and look at the castle on front of them at three houses distance. Raoul takes the googles, he looks at that direction, and there he encounters the huge zombie which made the helicopter of Michael crash at the river.


    "Shitˇ­" says Raoul scared taking off the night vision googles as he saw the huge creature screaming at the helicopter.


    ***


    The helicopter of Squad V, have caught the vision of the zombie from Class F, and they are already firing upon the creature. The three machine gunners are shooting the giant zombie, which is making him yell at them for a few seconds, and run back into the castle at the safety. The sniper took a shoot of his trusty long-range weapon, and that shoot has hit the creature head, which make it to lose balance and slide from the roof of the castle and fall almost eight meters into the street.


    "Is it dead?" asks the co-pilot putting the helicopter light on the corpse of the creature with giant hands from Class F.


    The creature raises from the ground like nothing happened, and at this moment, not even when the creature was about to raise on his back, the gunners are angrily shooting the creature. Pinning it down and killing ruthlessly. One of the gunners even laughed as he was emptying the entire stock he got to the corpse of the zombie from Class F.


    "We got the creature!" says the co-pilot to the pilot. He takes a look with the light on the building where the soldier and Raoul are situated. "We should take them out of here. Seems safe."


    "Alright." says the pilot starting to descend from the sky.

 Maine Street - Final Part

    Raoul and with Michael have seen the creature from Class F being killed by the helicopter of Squad V. They felt relieved the creature got put down for good, so, they decide to leave the building. Raoul takes the flashlight put in the middle of the room, get the backpack, assault rifle, and he leaves the house with Michael, following behind him.


    "We must be careful." says Michael to Raoul. "Dead''s and Undead can be still here."


    They left the room, head downstairs and proceed to descend to the exit of the house. While they descend the stairs, they have encountered zombies, but Raoul killed them once again with shoots on their heads or with a knife if they were on the steps and were showing signs to raise up on their feet.


    In a few minutes, Raoul and with Michael left the house, close the door behind them, and they are running at the van. Raoul opens the backdoors of the van, and from there, he checks to see if the radio is still there. Thankfully, it is still there, together with the other supplies.


    He did this check because he was afraid something bad would''ve happened to it, like if zombies who are able to think do exist at this moment. And Undeads are somehow still humans, but a small part of them is still humanoid.


    Raoul takes a flare gun from the back of the van, closes the van, and he looks on the night sky where the helicopter of the Squad V continues to be seen flying. Raoul was about to shoot the flare gun on the sky to show their position, but then, Michael saw something and yelled at Raoul.


    "Raoul!"


    "W-What?" asks Raoul letting the flare gun lower, and looking confused at Michael, who is pointing at the next building.


    "Look!" points at a street where something runs on their direction.


    Raoul looked at the direction, and he saw something horrible. It was another giant thing. He couldn''t see if it was the same as the one earlier, but his dark appearance on the street and the noise he makes as he crushes cars was making Raoul to come to the conclusion that the thing is like the one Squad V fought.


    He looks at the flare gun for a second, he aims it on the direction where the creature runs, and he shoots the only flare at the zombie. The flare hit the zombie, which has made him burn for a few seconds. The huge zombie yelled as the fire caught his humans'' clothes, and his whole body could be visible on the night. Raoul and Michael saw the thing being a zombie, just like the one from earlier, with huge arms and normal body, but this one has blue skin, rather than green or yellowish skin.


    Before Michael could''ve said anything, Squad V yelled at the megaphone for them.


    "DUCK!"


    And Raoul with Michael, are getting into the van, as the helicopter with the gunners proceed to shoot all of the ammo they still had to kill the thing on fire.


    This was an operation which took not even ten minutes to be done, and when it was done, Raoul and Michael, left the van, and looked at the helicopter who is staying on a low altitude level, and all of the available soldiers from there descending via ropes to take the equipment, Michael and Raoul to their Military base.


    Unauthorized duplication: this narrative has been taken without consent. Report sightings.


    Raoul only looked at the helicopter with tears.


    He has gone through a lot of adventures and hard things to get there. He has encountered countless creatures in his first ten days, people who were close to him and thought him the necessary things. He has lost valuable people, but this did not stop him from going further into this journey.


    As all the three soldiers got on the terrain, at a close distance to Raoul and Michael, two of them are taking Michael, and tying him in the rope with the third soldier. Then, when it got ready, the third soldier raises back into the helicopter thanks to the co-pilot who is activating the reversal rope mechanism at the third soldiers. The other two soldiers are heading at the van, opened it up and looked at the radio station with their flashlights.


    "The radio is in good condition?" asks a soldier with English accent at Raoul.


    "Yes, sir!" responds Raoul on English language.


    "Awesome. Good job at keeping it worked. And you did a phenomenal job on shooting that thing." he points at the Class F zombie corpse at a few meters from them.


    "It was nothing." says Raoul.


    "Anyway." says the other soldier taking a piece from the back of the van. "We need to move fast. This place is not yet cleaned up."


    Raoul has jumped to help the soldiers taking the radio piece by piece, and loading them into the helicopter by using an elevator of goods (a thing created a few more years ago by an owner of a helicopter factory), then, as the elevator was ascending back, Raoul and with soldiers are taking the ropes and being transported back to the helicopter.


    When they''ve got into the helicopter, Raoul stood on the passenger''s seat, next to Michael who is inspected by the third soldier. The third one looks at Raoul with admiration, and he says to him.


    "You have done an amazing job preserving him alive."


    "I was just doing my duty." replies Raoul. "After all, all humans should be united on this apocalypse, right?"


    "Yesˇ­" replies the soldier not feeling the same as Raoul. "We will be getting this man at the examination, and you will be put under some tests to be sure you are not infected, or show symptoms."


    "I understand." responds Raoul to the third soldier, looking at the window that shows the helicopter flying higher from the city. "Hope where I am going it will be safer than here."


    "You have no idea." says the second soldier to Raoul.


    The helicopter starts flying high in the sky, into the North direction, letting the ashes and corpses of zombies from Mayenne back.


    ***


    A few days have passed, Raoul is living on the Artificial Island of the Organization known as the name of Haga Four Islands, on the Main Island because he works on the Military communication and general communication with three more people. He is working on his radio station, trying to find any survivors on the nearby zones and helping the Military with information.


    When Raoul has finished a quick communication with a survivor in Belgium, he hears footsteps approaching from his back, he looks back, and he sees Michael, all healed up, and equipped to go on the battlefields. Raoul takes the headphones off from his head, and he looks at his friend.


    "You are fine?"


    "Yes." responds Michael happy. "My arms have been healed up nicely thanks to the medication these people have give to me. Now I am able to go on the missions."


    "Where are you heading?"


    "To the new base. On Mayenne."


    "Good luck out there." says Raoul to Michael.


    "Good luck on your, job!" responds Michael shaking the hand of Raoul, then he leaves the building and Raoul with an assault file on his hand and a backpack.


    Raoul gets back to his business, he puts on the radio headphones, and he sees a signal of contact at an area far away from his island. Raoul accepts the contact, and before he could say anything, the contact was the first one to talk, but in a foreign language, something like Russian language.


    "I can control themˇ­" said the contact on Russian language. Then he closes the transmission before Raoul could say something.

 Vikings Way - Part 1

    Three weeks after the first spread of Z virus have passed. Europe is still dealing with this illness while most of Asia, Australia, Russian and Africa countries have fallen into the dead corpse''s hands. But, there is still hope that make the most survivors have faith.


    Armies of soldiers, specially trained for this kind of events and worse, have managed to save at least 20 percentage of the population as the report of saved victims continues to rise. At this moment, there are only three artificial islands, built by the Organization who owns the Army, is holding a total of 753 people only from Europe. Other 234 from Asia, 45 from Australia, 78 from Russia, and 99 from Africa.


    Right now, this virus has not yet attacked America nor South America.


    Soldiers were trying to communicate with the continents but no avail was possible. They still wonder why they do not want to communicate at this very moment and help them in aid to stop the spreading of this dangerous virus.


    There are rumours who say that country is responsible for this mess, while others suggest they know about this virus, and they decide to cut any line of contact. But whatever the reason may be, it is still unknown, even after three weeks since the dead''s have risen from their graves and start attacking every single human alive.


    The reason why these creatures have appeared varies on the continents. In Eastern Europe it has been reported the Danube river was poisoned, or a new bacterium was found. Others suggest a new species of mosquitos and fungus have appeared on Europe and Africa, others say a space bacterium has spread all around eastern Asia. But, whatever the reason might be, the opportunity of multiple viruses it is extremely possible. And the culprit? It is still a mystery.


    The author''s tale has been misappropriated; report any instances of this story on Amazon.


    ***


    On the Haga Four Artificial Islands, an old man, who is on the Military Island, is leaving the Hangar, equipped with an Ak-47, and a grenade launcher on his back, with a big back and armour that will prevent the bites and masks to help him breathe the toxic areas of Europe. This old man is called Gerald, and two weeks ago was on a mission with other two survivors to find this artificial island, which they found it, and now, they are living happy and help in any way they can.


    "Hey, Gerald!" says a man with long hair coming at him with a backpack and an assault rifle on his side.


    "Hey, Ronald." responds Gerald waving his hand, and then they shook the hands as they got at a close distance.


    "How was it?" asks Ronald to Gerald.


    "I still got it." says Gerald with a smile.


    "You should''ve seen the faces of those survivors," says a soldier coming closer to these two in an English language with a French accent. "He blew out the entire street at Marseille."


    "It was only one grenade." says Gerald to Ronald and the soldiers. "Those bastards didn''t see it coming."


    "So, it was a success?" asks Ronald, which makes both of these soldiers feels sad.


    "It was not a success." replies Gerald. "We have lost people there, but we have killed enough zombies to make the city less dangerous. We have also found three survivors who were later turning into zombies due to the air virus."


    "Damnˇ­ It''s crazy how this virus evolved in only three weeks." says the soldier. "But enough chit-chat, we have to report this to our commander in chief."


    "You''re right." says Gerald who is going with the soldier alone to the building where the commander in chief is staying and managing the current state of the area this island got it. "Oh, Ronald!" he stopped, and he looks at Ronald. "Good luck on your first mission!"


    These two soldiers are walking to that tent, while Ronald, is looking at his assault rifle, he makes a cross with his right hand. Ronald is looking at the airplane who is about to send him into his very first mission, to Samara, Sweden. A place where the first outpost of Sweden has been placed, and it needed defenders for a few weeks, and Ronald volunteer to do it.

 Vikings Way - Part 2

    Meanwhile, on Uppsala, Sweden, at a house in a small village, a group of five survivors are searching in a big house something useful, which will help them to survive longer. Things like gas masks (if they have luck, but all of them are immune to this air virus thanks to their immune system), ammo for weapons, melee weapons, clothes, or food.


    On the group of these five survivors, there is a bald man with moustache and with an axe on his back, this man is most likely the one who is leading the group. That man wears a bulletproof vest he found it one week ago at a scrapyard close to Uppsala, with a pair of clothes he hasn''t changed them a while ago. The bald man smashes the skull of a zombie who was running at them with a hammer he carries. He smashed the head with only one hit.


    "Damn zombies!" says the bald man looking at the corpse of the zombie he recently killed. "Waitˇ­" he crouches to it, and he looks at his green liquid coming out of the mouth. "What is this?"


    "What happened, Sigurd?" asks a female survivor with ponytail hairstyle, blonde, bulletproof vest and long trousers. She sees the corpse of that zombie. "Are you okay?"


    "Yes." says Sigurd to the female survivor, raising to his feet, he takes a last peek at the zombie. "The green liquid might be a mutation or something. Have you found anything, Ebba?"


    "Not yet." says Ebba. "This house is empty."


    "As I expected." says Sigurd. "We won''t have the chance to find anything here."


    "I still cannot comprehend that three weeks have passed since this infection has started."


    "Yesˇ­"


    "Sigurd!" says a man with a moustache, blonde hair, a yellow jacket opened that shows a shirt with "Iron Maiden" band logo, and a pair of green jeans. "We found keys of a car." he waves his hand to show the keys he just found.


    "Good job, Artur."


    Sigurd walks to Artur, which hands him the keys, and he leaves the house with the five people.


    The other two survivors are coming last from the house they were searching for loot, but unfortunately, nothing is there, and these three weeks have most likely attracted much more attention to lotters on this area, rather than the closest cities from this village.


    One of the survivors wears a backpack with military camo, got a hat with an "IKEA" logo. That survivor has a blonde moustache, wears a blouse and with a pair of treeing pants. The survivor who is about one meters and sixty centimetres, and has a crowbar on his right hand is Roy.


    If you discover this narrative on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen. Please report the violation.


    The other survivor is a woman who has almost the same facial textures as Ebba, but he wears different clothes than her sister (yes, they are relative). The woman survivor name who carries a golf club name is Edla, and she is frightening to this whole situation since she is always shaking every single day she wakes up.


    "Edla." says Ebba. "Are you alright?"


    "I am scared." says Edla.


    "I am." says Ebba trying to encourage her sister. "But we have to be strong. Otherwise, we will end up like them." she points her bat to a corpse of a zombie who was killed a while ago. "We have to be strong on this world, sister."


    "I-I know." says Edla continuing to shake.


    Ebba hugs her sister, and she tells her encouraging sentences, like: "Everything will be alright.", "We will get through this.", and "This is just a small stop.". Then, she lets her sister ago, which decided to stop from shaking, for her sister good.


    The survivors are arriving at the street to the small village. Roy sees a few zombies coming at them, he and with Sigurd are taking their close combat weapons. Roy smashes the head of a zombie with the crowbar, and Sigurd uses his axe to decapitate the weak zombie running at them. The third zombie gets killed by Roy with the crowbar, almost decapitating the zombie. But the zombie was still moving, and Roy smashes the crowbar much harder, making the zombie fall on the floor. And smashes his head with the crowbar again, until the zombie stopped from flinching.


    "Good job." says Sigurd to Roy, looking at him killing the two zombies.


    The other three zombies approach from the opposite direction of where the two zombies came. Sigurd and with Artur are charging at them. Artur took the Pistol with a Silencer on, and he shoots the two zombies heads. He kills both of them without a sweat, and Roy hits the head three times of the zombie at the street. Killing it again.


    The survivors see a few more zombies, and crawlers approaching to them. They decided to search for the car instead of fighting the deads. Sigurd, Artur and with Edla search for the car, while Ebba and Roy are fighting a few zombies, Undeads and crawlers.


    Ebba put one zombie down, then she smashes the skull of a decomposed one, killing it instantly, and she smashes the other zombie coming from her left, she puts him down, then she retreats from the zombies who were at close distance. Roy smashes the skull of a zombie with his crowbar, his crowbar is stuck on the head, and he tries his hardest to take it down. As he managed to take it, the crowbar "flies" from his shoulders and hit the head of a zombie from the back. He takes the crowbar, and he looks behind, seeing the corpse of the zombie falling.


    "Jeezˇ­" he says to that zombie.


    Roy turns around, and sees a few more zombies approaching, he leaves them alone and run to the direction where the three survivors are searching for the car. Edla and with Roy are running to the gang, who have managed to find the car that is matching with the key Artur found and handed to Sigurd. It was the one next to the house they were searching.


    All of the survivors from there are getting into the Tesla car. Artur it is at the driver seat, Sigurd is next to Artur, and the other three survivors are on the back seats of the car. The car leaves the garage. It goes in reverse a few meters until it get on the street, running over two walks and killing them because of the wheels'' strength who were able to crush their skulls like a banana punched by a human. Artur makes the car go at the normal type, and it runs from the street, avoiding zombies, abandoned cars and humans corpses who were shot in the brains.

 Vikings Way - Part 3

    ***


    Later this day, the group of five survivors, stops in front of a blockage at the Uppsala town. The people are leaving the car, and they are taking a look at the immense blockage with consist into roadblock, a few cars, corpses of zombies, alive zombies, and a helicopter at about sixty meters, that crashed there. Sigurd looks around him, and he sees another way to get into the city, a path that leads to the city.


    "We are going on foot there." says Sigurd pointing at the path.


    "You sure it is a good idea?" asks Ebba.


    "It is our choice." replies Sigurd. "Take everything, and we will move over there."


    The group of survivors is taking their supplies from the car they took it earlier. Then, Artur looks at the barricade, and he curses at the person who put it there.


    Soon, the group of survivors continues to move forward until they get to the city of Uppsala, which is at approximately one kilometre from the place they have left the car behind. Sigurd is leading the back, while Roy and Arthur are behind. Ebba and Edla are behind the boys. They are precautions as they walk on this path because you never know when a zombie would ever jump from a tree and pin down a human.


    A few moments later, the group of survivors arrived at the street of the Uppsala city, but as they looked at on the streets, they see there something they never expected to see it in their lives.


    In front of them, there is a group of two people dressed as Vikings, all of them slashing countless zombies with big axes, big swords, pinning them down with their shields, and one of them, he just took a crossbow, pulled the trigger, and in this process, he penetrates the skull of the two zombies. Making their heads fly and hit with the arrow a tree, where the heads of those decapitated zombies remained stuck there.


    "Sister Charlotta!" says the man dressed as a Viking after he took down two zombies by only one shoot. "I just killed two zombies by one shot."


    "Awesome!" says sister Charlotta after she cuts the zombie torso horizontally. "Your aim is getting better."


    The Vikings continued to kill the zombies, not knowing the gang of five people are witnessing them doing a big massacre. They never expected to encounter people like them, fighting against the deads, and dressed as Vikings. The team is feeling confused if they are or not a threat, but they will soon find out, after the female Vikings, who just took a zombie with detached mouth (she detached it by cutting the mouth), she took the decomposed corpse, break it in half with bare hands, and sees the people who are hiding under a damaged car.


    "Charly!" says the Viking woman tossing the corpse into an Undead, who instantly forgets the Vikings and eats one side of the decomposed zombie corpse. She looks at them like a warrior. "We found survivors of the plague!"


    "Plague?" asks Roy to Sigurd, but he did not speak.


    "Really?" says Charly after he killed the last zombie from this area by just smashing his hammer onto the head.


    He goes close to Charlotta, who walks to the group of five survivors, who just stay there, unable to say a word. All of them are speechless by their brute force, their armour, the scars and their physical appearance which would even intimidate a beginner an intermediate at body building or an average gypsy from Romania village who took a lot of steroids in order to inherit the house and a girl from the street.


    "Are you not infected with the plague of God of Death?" asks Charly at the survivors.


    "N-No. We are not." responds Artur to the Vikings, thinking they are meaning the plague by this virus.


    Unauthorized duplication: this tale has been taken without consent. Report sightings.


    "You have got the death bites?" asks Charlotta.


    "No. We are not bitten." says Sigurd to the two Vikings who are losing their grip on their weapons.


    The Vikings turns around and walks.


    "Come with us. We have to rest." says Charly as he walks with the female Viking to a building.


    The five survivors, are following them. And Sigurd with Roy, having their fire weapons prepared in case these people are going to kidnap them, or send to a cannibal tribe, or use them as a sacrifice, or something like that.


    ***


    The group of five survivors plus two Vikings, are getting into a building, which was once an office, but now it is a ruined architectural structure. The survivors are looking around the building, they walk on the hallway, and the things they see are the same, corpses of zombies and disaster. The Vikings are stopping in front of a door, and the male Viking is opening the door, then he looks at the survivors and told them.


    "Come. It is safe from the Death souls."


    "O-Okay." responds Sigurd being the first to enter the room, then, the other four survivors are following him, one by one.


    After the survivors got in the room, the Vikings are coming as well in the room.


    As they entered the room, survivors notice another door, an opened one, and it shows stairs which are leading much down. Sigurd decided to ask him the question.


    "Where are you taking us?"


    "To our leader, King Thorfin." responds the female Viking taking the lead and the Male one following him.


    Survivors, not having any choice, they decide to follow them. Sigurd is taking the lead, while the other are behind him, some scared by this, other not showing a single fear.


    They descend the stairs for a while now. As they continued to walk much more down, they encounter some creepy things on the walls, as well as the ceiling. At the wall, the survivors see a head of a zombie that is still groaning and screaming. Edla was about to fall, but she catches her sister in the shoulder.


    "Be calm, sister. They will not do anything to us." says Ebba to Edla. "Okay?"


    "Okay." responds Edla feeling a little better after that zombie head scared her.


    The survivors and Vikings are walking down the stairs, until they got at a massive steel door. As the Vikings got close to that door, they do knock on the door, they looked at it, wait for a few more seconds, then someone opens the door. It is another man that is dressed as a Viking. A huge man, with long brown hair, Viking helmet, bear fur as clothes and with a smell that would make even homeless people put their hands at the nose, but considering today''s world situation is acceptable.


    "What is it Charly and Charlotte? And who are those people?" asks the Viking looking at the six survivors.


    "These are people we have seen on the streets." says Charlotta. "They are immune to those dead souls."


    "Are you sure?" asks the Viking.


    "We are not bitten." says Artur to those Vikings, but they ignore him.


    "ˇ­Mhmˇ­ Okay. What do you two want?"


    "We want to keep here." says Charly.


    "Not possible." says Sigurd to the Vikings, who is making them feel surprised. "We are trying to go to the nearest evacuation point possible."


    "Evacuation point?" asks the Viking at the metal door. "What is this Evacuation you call it?"


    "It is a point where theˇ­ umˇ­ Some other people are going to take us." says Sigurd remembering these people are not thinking like him, and they think this is still the old time when Vikings were on the power on these Scandinavian lands, and not zombies.


    "What people?" asks Charlotte.


    "Umˇ­  They are. Rich... And-"


    "You six are slaves?" asks the Viking. "In this case, all I can do for you is to go to your location." he looks at Charly and Charlotte. "You two should escort them out of this city. understand?"


    "But-" tries to say Charly.


    "No." says the Viking and closes the door.


    The Male Viking turns around to the survivors, and he looks at them, a bit irritated. He was about to take his sword, but Charlotta stops him. She takes a look at the survivors.


    "Why didn''t you six mentioned you are slaves? We could''ve helped you get to your destination."


    "Really?" asks Ebba to the Vikings. "That would mean so much to us."


    "But with a cost." says Charlotte.


    This sentence made the survivor feel a bit shocked. Now they have to find a way to repay them if they are escorting them to an evacuation point, not far from Uppsala.


    "W-What do you want?" asks Sigurd.


    "Just one thing." says Charlotta. "We want to see that Evacuation point you have mentioned earlier."


    "Just that?" asks Sigurd feeling relieved.


    "Yes. We want se with our own eyes the place that we have heard the rumours it contains incompressible power which will perish every single dead creature on his way. We want to get that power to make the sick people around us feel better."


    "I-It can be arranged." says Sigurd.


    Charlotta only bows her head a little, then the survivors and the two Viking are going back to the surface, where they will be resuming their running to the evacuation point. Only Sigurd and Ebba know it''s location.

 Vikings Way - Part 4

    ***


    Two days ago, in a warehouse at least twenty-four kilometres from Uppsala, a group of twenty survivors are living there in bad conditions. Some are hungry or thirsty, others have gone mad, and someone has decided to just leave the warehouse with only a broom bat.


    "Where are you going?" asks a female survivor at the male survivor who was opening the small door of the warehouse where employed once used it to enter the building, or take a small cigarette break.


    "I have to leave." responds the survivor. "I want to see how is my family doing."


    "Butˇ­ Why alone?"


    "I have to." he responded to that survivor.


    The man opens the door, he looks outside and encounters twelve zombies at three meters from the door, he takes the broom bat, and sighs.


    "Close the door."


    "B-But." tries to say the female survivors.


    "Close the door, now!"


    The female survivor, couldn''t close the door, she did not have the strength to do it. But luckily, Sigurd came, he sees the survivor outside, hitting a zombie with the broom bat. Sigurd closes the door, he locked it up, and he looks at the small window, where the survivors tires to fight the twelve zombies, but fails and dies. A jumper jumped from the building roof, he pinned him down and eats him alive.


    Then, the zombies nearby get alerted and walk or run to the corpse of the human who has become delicates for zombies. Sigurd and with the woman are looking horrified at the small window there. They cannot do anything now.


    The woman survivor was trying to grab the door handle, but Sigurd stops her, and yells at her.


    "No! It is too dangerous! Leave him there."


    "Bu-But! But he is a human!" says the woman to Sigurd as he holds her hand, sobbing and crying.


    "You have to leave him, Ebba! The man is dead." says Sigurd to the survivor who is actually Ebba. "We couldn''t do anything to help him. It was his decision to try and escape this death trap."


    Ebba continues to cry and sob. Sigurd grabs her, she hugs her and tells her to calm down.


    "Just one more day." says Sigurd. "Tomorrow the military squad will come and take us."


    We probably did not mention, but Sigurd, at the warehouse, has a walkie-talkie, the only source of communication that helped them to get communication with someone from the Military zone.


    ***


    If you stumble upon this narrative on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen from Royal Road. Please report it.


    The group of seven people, have left the building where they have entered it and tried to go down there, but now, they have to continue their journey to the Evacuation point, which is not very far from this city. But before they were about to walk further, the Viking male, Charly, decided to ask Sigurd a question.


    "Are you truly slaves?"


    "Umˇ­ Y-Yeah." says Sigurd to Charly to make his lie continue to run into his mind. "We are slaves, a-and we got to send from o-our port to go to the other side."


    "Aha. And why aren''t you dressed as one?"


    "Umˇ­"


    "You two are not slave. You are trying to go to an evacuation point." responds Charlotta.


    "What?" asks Artur and Ebba.


    "How did you know it?" asks Sigurd.


    "Please. We may be dressed as Vikings, but we are not entirely lost to our current events." says Charlotta. "We can help you, and in return, you can help us get to a place. Sounds a fair deal to all of us."


    "How you can help us?" asks Roy feeling scared.


    "We can help you get through the cities. And give you good routes. There are bad people in almost every city from here. Vikings and even psychopaths."


    "What''s the difference?" whispered Roy, and thankfully, the Vikings did not hear the man.


    "Sounds a good deal." says Sigurd. "But first, can you tie the ties of me and my people."


    "Sure. As long as you can behave." says Charly going first to Artur and cutting the ties at his hands.


    Then, the Vikings brothers are cutting the ties to the other people, and they continue on their journey to an evacuation point, which located in Vaksala, a city not far from where they are right now, probably at two more kilometres from here if they are walking.


    The survivors walk for a few more meters, until they came across a zombie who is nailed to a cross on the road. That zombie it is still alive, naked, and groans as the survivors stopped and looked at it. Charly decided to take out his dagger and stab the creature head, then he tells the zombie.


    " You are now sent into a better world."


    "That man sure was cursed." says Roy to Sigurd.


    Sigurd only nodded his head in agreement. They continue to walk further to the next city where the evacuation should be.


    The survivors are passing a smashed car into a building wall, then they walk forward, into the pile of cars on the street where some of them are damaged, others were on fire, a few turned upside down, and Sigurd have found a motorbike wheel stuck on a zombie corpse chest. He looked at it, and tried to recreate the events in his mind, but he was not able to do it.


    "You people have ever seen an accident like this?" asks Charlotta getting into the car roof, and looking jumping on the other.


    "No." responds Ebba following Charlotta. "We were stuck on a warehouse for a long time, and then, we decided to evacuate it."


    "How many were there?"


    "We were a lot at first. But some decided to flee, kill themselves or find some people."


    "I see." says Charlotta getting on the asphalt after she walked on the car roof. "The people were staying have splitting up all around Sweden. In order to take down all of the evil spirts as we call it."


    "You do like doing that?" asks Ebba to Charlotta which is still not taking well the fact that these two people are dressed as Vikings, and they are doing this role-play.


    "It makes us feel much more fun this way to me and my twin brother." she looks at Charly who decapitates a zombie that was jumping from a building roof to him, with such a precision and brute strength.


    After Charly decapitates the thing, he observes the thing still groaning, so he takes the sword he used to cut the head of that jumping zombie, and he stabs the creature, at the zone where zombies would be "turned off". Then, Artur, is telling to Charly.


    "You are strong, man."


    "Thanksˇ­" says Charly feeling a bit weird by the fact someone made a compliment about him.


    Charlotta looks at his brother, she reveals a small smirk and tells to herself, not being heard by anyone as the five survivors are walking to the head corpse.


    "You are still the shy boy I grew up with."


    Charlotta continues to walk forward, as the other survivors are following her, leaving the jumping zombie corpse on the street, and the other corpses who were killed either a while ago or a few weeks after the first infection.

 Vikings Way - Part 5

    ***


    Later, the survivors managed to get in Vaksala city, but unfortunately, a shock made them to drop their mouths. The place which was supposed to be an outpost, has now become abandoned, extremely damaged, bullets on the streets, zombie corpses on the streets either pierced by bullets, without n head, or with limbs cut. Roy sees on the street a teddy bear, he takes it from there, he looks around it, and he sees stained with blood, zombie blood which is a green substance, but has the same components as blood.


    "What is that?" asks Edla coming closer to Roy, being scared and looks around worried.


    "Zombie blood, I think." says Roy to Edla, and he cleans the blood using the clothes of the zombie corpse he took the blood. "We should be careful around here, alright?"


    He raises up and continues to walk forward, following Sigurd and the Vikings, who are inspecting a military vehicle damaged and with corpses all around it. The Vikings looks at the vehicle interior, there they see one soldier with a shotgun barrel on his mouth. Charlotte observes the soldier having a bullet hole on his head, and he is wondering how he got killed.


    Ebba observes at the window of a building, which is still intact, a zombie, looking at the TV that displays a blue screen. She is looking at it for a few seconds, before she decides to leave it slowly, not causing too much noise to alert him. The woman manages to avoid making noise for that zombie, by walking slowly to a truck trailer, that is opened and is checked by Artur and Sigurd.


    "There are some useful things here." says Artur checking the contents of a box. "Ammo, bulletproof vests andˇ­ Alcohol!" he says after he witness a box with beer behind the box he was checking for a second. "Ah, zero alcohol." he puts a bottle down feeling disappointed.


    "Better than nothing, right?" asks Sigurd.


    "Yeahˇ­" he says continuing to check the boxes. He takes another one, and checks a metallic box, which contains a few missiles. "My God!"


    "Holy shit!" says Sigurd coming closer and looking at the six rockets at the metallic box.


    "Missiles?" asks Ebba coming closer to the metallic crate. "How on Earth were the soldiers thinking of using them?"


    "Don''t know." says Artur deciding to close the box and leave it alone. "We should let it here. It is too dangerous to carry it, especially while we are still on the run."


    Artur takes from the crate an Assault rifle, with three clips that contains at least fort-five bullets of the assault rifle''s type, he puts them on his backpack, and he looks at his two teammates.


    Unauthorized content usage: if you discover this narrative on Amazon, report the violation.


    "We will need them later."


    "Why you say that?" asks Ebba, and she looks at Sigurd who takes a shotgun from the crate, and two boxes of shells.


    "We have to make a change of plans, Ebba." says Sigurd looking at the woman.


    ***


    Meanwhile, at almost fifty meters away from the truck trailer, Roy sees a Bar, a Gay Bar most likely, with green and purple lights, lighting the interior of the building. Roy looks at the window of the Bar, and there he sees only one man, dancing on no music with bottles on his hands and almost naked. Roy feels creeped out by this, because he has never seen someone dancing in real life, right in the middle of the apocalypse.


    "Is that man high or something?" wondered Roy looking at the window, as he sees only little details there, as the man continues to dance without music.


    Roy decides to step away from there, but as he was walking from there, he hears a groan from behind. He turns around, and witness a zombie running at him, with arms prepared to grab him and open mouth, to bite his human skin. Roy was quick to pull out his knife, and tripping the zombie by kicking his left leg as he approached closely to him. The zombie corpse falls on the street, and Roy quickly stabbed the thing head with the knife he pulled it out. He killed the thing by only one hit, stabbing the part where it shuts down the zombies forever.


    "Hello~!" said someone from Roy back.


    Roy turns around, but before he would be able to do something, he feels a pain on his chest, he looked at it, horrified because he got impaled by a sharp thing used for women satisfaction. Roy is looking horrified at the man who is having his eyes red, not because he is a zombie, but mostly because he is on drugs. That man licks his lips, he approaches his head closer to Roy, and he kisses him seductively.


    "You smell good~. Want to have some fun, boy?"


    Roy, with his last breath, he stabs the homosexual man left hand, and this made him scream in pain. He let Roy fall on the road, and he looks at arm scared. He takes the knife from his head, and he stomps on Roy head until he would give out his last breath on this Earth. He was screaming for "Help!" as the crazy man continued to stomp on him. And thankfully, Charly came at the behind of that homosexual guy beating Roy to death and still impaled by that sharp object.


    "You shithead!" yelled Charly stabbing the homosexual guy on drug''s chest with his sword he slayed hundreds of zombies. "What the fuck are you doing?"


    "H-H-Harderˇ­ Daddyˇ­" said the man to Charly, which makes him question his action for a moment as he took the sword from the Homosexual psychopath.


    Charly, as he has taken the sword from the attacker chest, he sued it again, only to cut the man heads vertically, prevented him to become a zombie. Then, he pushes the body of that crazy man away, looking at the Roy corpse, he observes the weapon he got stabbed with, he feels guilty of not being able to protect him from a death like this. He takes the thing from Roy corpse, throws it away, and with a tear in his right eye, he looks at Roy''s body, drawing his last breath.


    "F-F-Finish meˇ­" tries to say Roy to Charly as he struggles to breathe.


    Charly, knowing what he has to do, he takes the dagger. And before he was about to stab the poor death man skull, he asks him.


    "Any last request?"


    "Helpˇ­ Help my teamˇ­ Help my people ge-getting to safetyˇ­ Please, Charly."


    "Very well." says Charly to poor Roy before he stabbed his head, and left the corpse alone, heading to the group and breaking the news about Roy sudden death.

 Vikings Way - Part 6

    ***


    A few years ago, back to the time when world was still "safe" from zombies and only filled with viruses not so deathly and contagious, in an apartment building at Uppsala region. A man, that resembles Charly from the present time in the apocalyptic time, he leaves his room, looking all dirty, and feeling crap. He left his room because someone was knocking on his door, and that person who knocked his door it is the guy who resembles Roy from the present time.


    "Hello! Your order is here." says Roy handing Charly a package with Glovo sign.


    "What package? I didn''t order anything." responds Charly.


    "Someone ordered something at this address." says Roy handing the box to Charly, who is just taking it. "It costs nothing by the way." And he leaves the perimeter by going at the stairs.


    "Okayˇ­" responds Charly surprised by this unexpected situation.


    Charly enters his apartment, he closes the door behind him and goes with the box on his living room, decorated in a Viking style, having a Viking sword and shield attached to the left wall, a Viking helmet on the coffee table, and a portrait of Vikings fighting Anglo-Saxon''s on the wall next to the bookshelf, all with different novels, history books and comic books. Charly puts the box on the coffee table, and he opens it up, he checks it.


    As he opened the box, he notices a picture in there, him and his twin sister, dressed as Vikings at a History Convention. They have the same costumes as they had at the present of this apocalypse. Charly looks at the picture with a smile, and he found there a note, on the box.


    He takes the note with his left hand, as with the right he holds the picture, and read the note loud: "For my sweet brother. From Charlotta.". He sighs happily as he looks at the picture, and he says with a smile: "This sisterˇ­". Charly puts the picture on the coffee table, next to the Viking''s helmet on the coffee table.


    ***


    Later, everybody, from the group of the five survivors and two Vikings cosplayers, they are gathering around the body of Roy, with no sign of life and killed before he was about to transform into one of those creatures. Artur looks sad at the body of Roy. Sigurd is feeling guilty of not being able to protect this man, while Edla is hugging her sister, Ebba, and cries on her shoulders, mourning the death of someone close to her. And the Vikings are sad, they do not cry since they never meet the guy named Roy, and they don''t show much emotion on the battlefields, nor in moments like these.


    Sigurd takes a blanket from an SUV interior, where there are corpses of burned people. as he took a blanket from there, he puts on the body of Roy, and he tells to the body of their dead comrade that died such a pitiful death.


    "We will never forget you, Roy. Rest in peace, good man. We will never forget the things you have done to me at warehouse."


    "I-I will never forget the dayˇ­" says Edla leaving her sister, and looking with tears in her eyes at the covered body of Roy. "The day you have t-taken medicine fo-for me." she continues to cry, she almost fell on the road, but her sister grabs her.


    This tale has been unlawfully obtained from Royal Road. If you discover it on Amazon, kindly report it.


    "We should head into a building." says Ebba to her people, and walking as she holds her sister close to the closest building and who could look safe, a raided supermarket, but still standing.


    After everyone from there told their words to the corpse of Roy, they move along to the store where Edla and Ebba entered. As they entered that abandoned store, something will be changing their plans.


    ***


    Meanwhile, on a city, not far from the Dock''s area, a helicopter, who is flying at a high altitude, it is loaded with soldiers, all armed to their teeth with machine guns, grenade launchers and sniper rifles. On the squad of the twelve soldiers, there is Ronald, the survivors who a few weeks ago fought in Haga against waves of zombies, together with other three survivors.


    Ronald, even though he was assigned first as a mechanic, he volunteered to go into this mission, mainly because the bodies of soldiers started to go down, and the islands started to become to cram. The population of the Haga Artificial Island it is now three hundred forty-nine people, and only sixty-three from those people are soldiers and volunteers.


    "Nice view." says Ronald looking down as the helicopter passes a factory that is in ruin and collapsed a while ago.


    "It sure is." responds the soldier next to him looking at the clouds and the sky. "Listen, Ronald. This is your first mission, right? You should be cool and not lose focus."


    "Don''t worry about me. I was on the run for at least three to four days in the Netherlands." says Ronald as he loads his sniper rifle. He takes a look at his General, a huge soldier, wearing a gas mask, giving him the "OK" sign. Ronald leaves his seat, and he walks slowly and closely to an open window of the helicopter.


    "Do it." says a soldier with beard and camouflage cap.


    "If you kill nine, I give you a beer." say the same soldier who was next to Ronald.


    "Okay." responds Ronald looking at the visor of the sniper rifle and checking the zombies from the rooftops of the big buildings, as the helicopter proceed to low the altitude.


    Ronald shoots the first shot of the sniper rifle, killing a zombie of a building rooftop, who was looking at the helicopter and wave his hands. The body of that zombie falls from there and lands on the street, crashing into a zombie that was a Crawler type.


    "Two." says Ronald reloading the sniper rifle with a bullet from his vest pocket.


    He shots a second shot, killing a zombie who was at the window and looking at the helicopter. It just stands there, looked at it and took the shot. Then, when he got shot into the head, it falls on his back, on the floor.


    "Three."


    Ronald shoots another bullet, into a zombie from the next floor of the same building where he shoots the third one. He killed the creature via a neck shot. Sniper bullets are able to kill zombies if you shoot the neck, jaw or one of the eyes. He loads the sniper rifle quick, and shoot a fourth bullet in a second, to a zombie that was climbing the building, and looked at him falling as he loads the fifth bullet.


    "Five."


    Ronald kills a sixth zombie, who was slowly walking on another building rooftop. The corpse of that creature falls with the face on the concrete. Then, a zombie was looking at the corpse, and was about to go at it and eat it, but Ronald was quick and put a bullet on that "Undead" zombie type in the head.


    "Seven." says Ronald, and makes some soldiers there impressed by Ronald accuracy of shooting.


    He loads a seven bullet fast, and he looks around for the two zombies, and he found them, he notices two of the zombies walking cluelessly on the rooftop, and Ronald was only waited for the moment he will launch a shoot which will ricochet the head of the two zombies. And the moment came in a few seconds, and he pulled the trigger, launching the sniper rifle bullet, that filed at a high speed and killed two zombies by only one hit.


    The soldiers were clapping and congratulate Ronald for killing two zombies by only one hit of a single bullet. The soldier however, felt a little sad he has to share a beer from his crate who is becoming smaller each day. But he has done it because a bet is a bet. Plus, the General was a witness at this bet.


    The helicopter started to fly low, until he got at a good altitude where it will be landing at a small football terrain, where a lot of zombies and soldiers have got killed in this carnage. and there, it will be installed the new outpost of Sweden.

 Vikings Way - Part 7

    ***


    In a building, which used to be a normal supermarket, at a room where employers used to work, some survivors are there, Artur, Ebba, Edla and Charly, while Sigurd and Charlotte are searching on what used to be an apartment complex, and now it is a post-apocalyptic ruin.


    Sigurd searches on the hallway of the ground floor, while Charlotte enters the second apartment since the one it is looked and has a lot of banging hits at the door and growls specifics to the zombies. Charlotte, opens the door quickly, and as she did that, she looks at what used to be a living room, a crawler zombie, coming straight to her. Charlotte takes the sword, and stabs the creature head, killing it immediately and without any mercy. She continues to walk in the room, ignoring the other corpses of the zombies on the floor.


    Charlotte arrives at what used to be the kitchen of this apartment, she notices on the table a map of Sweden, there it is shown with a red marker, the road from this city, Vaksala, to Vato, a city not too far from here, where the Port it is located. Charlotte takes the map, and she hides it under her Viking coat, then she leaves the apartment.


    "Have you found something there?" asks Sigurd to Charlotte after he took out the spiky part of the hammer from the zombie head.


    "Just a map." she says to Sigurd, and she hands the map to him. "Here."


    Sigurd takes the map, and looks at it. Then, after a few moments of analysing, he looks at Charlotte.


    "This map might be useful to us. Good find."


    "Don''t mention it." says Charlotta going at the third door, and opening directly.


    As she opened the door, Charlotte looks at the interior of this apartment. She did not encounter any zombie creature through her scavenging. But, she did not find anything useful. No weapons, no food, no water, no gas, nothing.


    She was about to go to the fourth room to scavenge the interior, then, these two people hear some noises outside. Something that resembles a car, or like a jeep. Charlotte goes to the window of the hallways, and she looks at the street where the noise it is coming from. Sigurd joins her, and both of them sees a bus driver, stopping at the bus station indicator.


    Charlotte decides to take out her sword and goes outside, wanting to know, what does that bus driver does in this apocalypse.


    Ensure your favorite authors get the support they deserve. Read this novel on Royal Road.


    After a few seconds, Charlotte got outside, walks a bit to the bus where it is stopped at an ex-bus station. She was about to take her weapon, but she notices the doors of the big bus being opened, all three of them. But, she saw something truly terrifying there, that made her draw her sword from the sheath at a fast peace, and stab the first zombie out of twelve coming out of the bus.


    After she killed the zombie from the bus, another three are walking to her, and Charlotte has to step back from the bus, at about five meters distance, and before she could''ve done anything else, the doors of the bus gets closed, and the bus leaves this station.


    Charlotte continues to fight the three zombies, but Sigurd came and kill one of those creatures, by stabbing the head of I, and pushing on the street. Then, Charlotte kills the two zombies by decapitating all two of them, with a single sword hit.


    After all of this, Charlotte looks at the bus, driving far away from them, without stopping, and running over a few corpses who were once categorized as normal Homo sapiens species. She looks at her sword, seeing it all with blood, she takes off a cloth from a zombie corpse, and washes the blood from it.


    Sigurd comes close to Charlotte, he looks at the corpses she has slaughtered and looks at her cleaning the sword from the blood of those creatures.


    "These things never stop coming." says Charlotte looking at her sword after she has just cleaned it up.


    "Are you okay?" asks Sigurd looking at Charlotte turning around and putting her sword to support.


    "We should keep scavenging." she says going back into the same building, and Sigurd, walks after her, feeling uneasy about this survivor actions.


    After a while, Sigurd and Charlotte enters an abandoned room from the underground of an apartment. Upon entering this building, they do notice a smell that attack their nose and make them almost puke. It is the same smell that haunts them after all of these years since the start of this awful event in human history, it is the smell of corpses, human corpses. These survivors, are not able to see what is there, until Sigurd has the idea to use the flashlight he found on the first floor.


    With the help of the electrical device that generates artificial light, the two people are seeing a few corpses of rats and humans on the floor. Some of these corpses, mostly the ones resembling the rats due to their bone''s system, are in state of decayed, while others are with flesh but with insects all around their bodies, insides and on the holes of their bodies. Sigurd and Charlotte are ignoring these corpses, and look around this room, hoping to find something useful, and they do found something, a radio from the 2000s.


    Sigurd takes that radio, he looks at it, and before he would try to figure out how to turn, Charlotte grabs the radio, takes from Sigurd, and checks the back of this thing. She notices the device doesn''t have any batteries.


    "This radio works on batteries." says Charlotte. "It will be hard to find them since they haven''t been fractured three years ago."


    "Wait." says Sigurd looking at the back of the radio Charlotte handed to him. He notices this radio requires two big batteries to work. "I have an idea."


    Sigurd leaves this room with corpses decaying and horrible stench. Charlotte, after she stabbed the head of an awake crawler zombie type in this basement, she goes after Sigurd. As she left the building, she observes Sigurd heading to the building where her brother is and the friends of this man.

 Vikings Way - Part 8

    A few moments later, Sigurd and Charlotte, after they entered the building they have left in order to scavenge after something useful for their journey. Sigurd puts the radio on a cashier desk, while the survivors of this group and the Vikings, are gathering around to Sigurd who takes out the batteries from his flashlight, and puts both of them into the radio device.


    Miraculously, the red button of the radio starts to light up, which means it is turned on, and it is working. The team erupts in smiles and cheering, mostly Edla and Artur, thinking they will be able to signal for help. The radio it is on, and it can "capture" the attention of the Military and get help.


    "Hello!" says a person on the radio, in English with a Dutch accent. "Can someone get my cal on the radio? Over."


    "ˇ­Hel-Hello." says Sigurd on the radio after he looked around him, hoping somebody will be taking the radio, but nobody did this job. "We are a group of survivors, trapped in Vaksala. Please, send help! Over."


    Unauthorized use: this story is on Amazon without permission from the author. Report any sightings.


    "Is someone there? Oh, God!. I cannot believe this technology from the years of nineteens is still working fine as yesterday. Oh, umˇ­ We are the army. A patrol in Samara, requested to eliminate the threats of this place. Are you all fine? Over."


    "Yes, we are fine." responds Sigurd on the radio. "There is absolutely no way to send a helicopter after us?"


    "Not risking with sending an advanced vehicle, only picking up a handful of people." says the Soldier. "Get to Samara, and you will be staying fine. Sorry, but I gotta go away. Over." he closes the call.


    And with this, their transmission is over, and this is their last conversation on the radio.


    Sigurd turns off the radio. He looks at his team members.


    "We must go to Samara." say Sigurd to the people. "This is our only hope of surviving, understand?"


    "Yes!" replies the people of that group, and the Vikings.


    They equip their backpacks with supplies and weapons they were scavenging the apartment. The group of six people, leave the store, walk on the road that leads to the exit of this town, Skolsta. They take a road with lots of crashed cars, corpses of humans, animals and zombies, crashed helicopters and some military vehicles being destroyed by something powerful such a zombie from Class F.

 Vikings Way - Part 9

    ***


    A few kilometres far from Vaksala, in Vato, the group of soldiers who left from Haga, are having a fight to take the potential area to create an outpost for the military where they will be getting the people who are stuck into Sweden and are facing millions of zombies for a few weeks. The soldiers have killed at least two hundred zombies in five minutes since they have first landed. Three soldiers were going to the abandoned working machine guns who were installed there by the National Army of Sweden, two more are on the buildings, serving as snipers, while Ronald and with four more soldiers, are on the streets, shooting, decapitating all of the slow, fast, crawling, Class F zombies coming at them.


    On the streets, the soldiers and with Ronald using three vans and a military truck as a wall to protect them from zombies. Ronald uses the same weapons as the other soldiers, an assault rifle with at least clips that contains a total of three hundred bullets for assault rifle guns. He decimated at least three dozen of zombies, by blowing their heads from a distance with the special gun from the Organization. When he needed to reload, he would throw the empty clip at the zombies, which has a bomb installed on it to explode in ten seconds after the clip was emptied. He takes another clip, loaded on the gun, and shoot the next zombies. The clip he threw at a pack of zombies, explodes and destroys at least six of them. It wasn''t a big explosion, but an efficient one.


    The snipers are on the building, where they are aiming for the dangerous zombies, such as those from Class F. One of the two snipers have managed to land a perfect shot to a zombie who was about to throw a big vehicle at the squads of five soldiers who are on the streets. The snipers are not only killing the zombies from Class F, they are even aiming for climbers and jumpers.


    A sniper manages to shoot a jumper who was about to jump from a rooftop of a three-floor building to the squad on the streets. He shoots the head of that creature, and looks at him, falling losing his grip from the rooftop, and falling on the streets, impaling on the spiky fence the building had.


    "Good thing he was a zombie." says the soldier in Dutch language as he loads another clip on his sniper rifle.


    "I got him." says the second sniper in Dutch language, aiming his sniper rifle, pulling the trigger, blowing the head of a second jumper who was jumping from a truck trailer. He killed the thing while he was on the mid-air, and lands with the face on the windshield of the van who is used as a blockage wall.


    "Awesome!" says the first sniper to the second, who did a mid-air shot to that zombie. "This is the fifth shoot this week, man! You are in good shape."


    "Thanks." says the second sniper, continuing to look around for dangers and shooting any zombie.


    After a few seconds, the squad with the machine guns (located at least sixty meters distance from the squad with assault rifles, on one single military tower), are loading the empty heavy guns, and are spreading thousands of bullets to the big waves of zombies on the street, the ones who are climbing the towers, and to the ones jumping around. There are only three soldiers there, and only two machine guns. Only two of these soldiers are using machine guns, while the third soldier, uses an AK-47.


    That soldier is Russian and looks like an ordinary Russian from any apocalypse movie and novels, but, there is a thing that differentiate him from those people, he is a mad lad with his left eye blind. Even though he is having a handicap, this does not stop him to kill at least twenty zombies using the entire clip of this AK-47.


    After he finished the clip, he quickly took it out, throw down, lands on a zombie with a big mouth, swallow the thing, and not even three seconds later, his whole body explodes. A few Undeads are leaving the group, and jump on that puddle with zombie organs, eating everything from there.


    The group continues to fight furiously this big swarm of zombies for more than three minutes.


    After three minutes, the group of zombies is taking a breath of relief and fall on their knees due to the fast and intense actions they have taken to decimate the great number of these creatures. A few seconds later, the soldiers, proceed to create a big blockage as fast as possible, in case another wave of zombies could show up.


    Stolen from Royal Road, this story should be reported if encountered on Amazon.


    It took them almost an entire hour, but they did it, they made a full blockage against dead living creatures that possess an enormous danger for any human. The soldiers have used at least six cars, one truck and four abandoned military trucks, that were in a critical state, not being able to operate on long distance (it was a problem moving them a few meters to the proposed blockage with a tow truck they found on this area).


    The soldiers managed to create a wall of abandoned, also with wrecked vehicles, and now, they have to set weapons to combat the incoming waves of zombies. Luckily, this part of the setup it will be the easiest since in this area there are still weapons that can operate and working traps like for example, holes with pikes, landmines and sentry turrets with zombie heat recognizer.


    Ronald is going with a soldier in the interior of what used to be a Medical Clinic, searching for medicine, or any other useful supplies in case one of the soldiers will be getting sick. The soldier who is tagging along with Ronald is the sniper who made a mid-air shot to that zombie. The soldier nickname is "GRAT". Why is he called that? Nobody knows.


    "Look." says GRAT finding in a shelf a few syringes who are preserved in a good state.


    Ronald, come closer to the soldier, he takes one of the syringes. He notices them being kept into the usual plastic bag syringes are stored in. Ronald looks at the inscriptions on the plastic bag. All of them are in Swedish language, and he doesn''t fully know it. He didn''t have time to learn Swedish in the past, and not in his first mission.


    The first mission was about saving a comrade who was stuck in a ship close to the port they have taken. This mission was a failure because of someone who damaged the ship system and made it explode and sink into the ocean. If this thing wasn''t bad enough, that ship had a toxic content, which has now probably infested the entire water source of the planet. Only God knows what will happen to the people who are drinking this water infested with highly radioactive solutions.


    "Ronald." says GRAT to Ronald while he looks at the syringe. "Are these good?"


    "Don''t know, GRAT." says Ronald taking a hand of syringes in plastic bags, and put them into his backpack. "The doctors will decide if these are good enough to store the possible cure." he proceeds to take any syringe from that shelf, which was at least thirty.


    GRAT continues to search this building, while Ronald proceed to take any medicine from the shelves, lockers and tables. GRAT walks a few more steps, until he gets at a door, locked and with blood on it. He notices a pistol on the floor, in the hand of a dead which was used to be a female assistant. The sniper takes the gun from her hand, he checks the clip of this pistol. He sees only three bullets perfect to a pistol. He puts the pistol to his belt, and walks to the door.


    He tries to open the door, but it is locked from the interior, and unfortunately, this door doesn''t possess a window. It a plain door made by sturdy wood that would be hard to break empty-handed. He looked at it, and decides to leave this zone, and continues his searching around this place.


    After Ronald finished taking everything of value, he heads outside, and walks to the street, where some soldiers established a tent where they will be sleeping for the night. He enters the tent, and puts the backpack with medicine, syringes in plastic bags and other supplies he found there on the table where the leader of this squad, talked earlier with the Sigurd group on the radio. The squad leader looks at the contents of the backpack, and at Ronald after he finished it inspecting it.


    "Good find."


    "Thanks, sir." says Ronald in a neutral state.


    "For a volunteer, you are not too bad." says the squad leader closing the backpack. "Made a bunch of kills in the helicopter, you did a lot on the streets on fighting the swarm and creating a defence system. And finding medicine. You are a good man."


    The squad leader sits on a normal chair, he takes from his back pocket from the torso a pack of five cigars, takes one from there, he puts it on his mouth, and handed the pack to Ronald in an offering manner. Ronald refuse to smoke, and the squad leader, is okay with the decision.


    "Why are you insisting on coming here?" says the Squad Leader lighting his cigar with the lighter he has at the beginning of this nightmare.


    "What are you talking about, sir?" asks Ronald.


    "You were assigned at first with repairing cars, and now. You want to come here as a volunteer. Don''t you have someone at the Island to protect and stay with it the entire day? A woman or a child?"


    "No. I am all alone, now." says Ronald.


    "Hmmˇ­" he takes a smoke from the cigar, and threw in the air. "What is the reason you are coming here?"


    "I want to help. On the island, I feel useless. There are good mechanics and drivers there who can do a better job than me there. Here. I am useful to you and the soldiers." responds Ronald sitting on the chair next to the squad leader. "I feel relieved to be out of that base. Just the thought of staying safe somewhere, while much more unlucky people are suffering hardships of this thing."


    "Aha."


    "Captain!" says a soldier entering the tent. "A wave of zombies is coming from the North-East. We must prepare for defence."


    In just a few seconds, the Squad Leader, lights off the cigarette by using the table, rise up from the chair, and walks out of the tent. Ronald and with that soldiers are following the Squad Leader to the location where there was reported a wave of zombies coming.

 Vikings Way - Part 10

    ***


    A few moments later, on a street, where a bunch of houses who once lived nice, talented and carefree people, our group of four survivors and two Vikings are walking on slow steps, because of zombies who are laying on the ground, breathing and functioning like any other zombie. This type it will be later classified by the Organization and the Government as a Camper, belonging to the Class D from Deadly.


    Charlotte was about to step on a skull of a zombie with her boots sheep leather, but she quickly stopped her foot in mid-air, took the dagger, and slowly stabbed that zombie head. Killing it again, and not giving the creature a chance to counter-attack this fast attack. Her brother, looks on the ground, and notices a zombie who was moving his fingers, and he immediately draw his sword, cutting the thing head in a horizontal way to the brain.


    "What are these things?" asks Sigurd looking at a zombie who is on the window shield of a car, he notices it is breathing due to the slow movement characteristic to breathing.


    "These zombies are able to attack when you touch them." says Charly walking slowly to that zombie Sigurd pointed at and stabbing the head of the creature, offing him again. "If you touch them, they will jump on you, and later on anyone else around that person. They are fast and tricky." he looks at the four survivors who are all looking around them, feeling nervous. "You have never encountered these types of creatures?"


    "N-N-No." says Edla with courage, and hiding behind her sister.


    "We should head somewhere safe." says Charlotte to the group looking at the skies, who are announcing a rain coming. "Rain is coming."


    "I agree to Charlotte." responds Ebba rising her hand, and looking at her group. "The rain will probably attract zombies on the street."


    "Most likely." says Artur. "I have seen zombies heading out of the houses, and running like wild animals around the streets. It was something I never thought I was experiencing."


    Unauthorized usage: this tale is on Amazon without the author''s consent. Report any sightings.


    "To add." says Charly walking a few feet to an upside down car, killing another Camper zombie who was hidden inside the vehicle. He sued his sword to cut the head and brain in two pieces. "Zombie like this are mostly outside. A rain will wake all of them up, run hysterically around, and, for a good chance, they will be dying due to effort, rather than killing every single zombie."


    Most of the members of the group and Vikings, are going to the closest house they can find. They enter the house with only one floor, with red roof, and three kids in zombie corpses, having their bellies eaten and faces deformed. Charlotte was the first to get at the door. She decides to knock on the door, hoping somebody is inside this place. But no response.


    Charlotte grabs the handle, opens the door wide, and she enters first, followed by Sigurd, Artur, Ebba, Edla and Charly. Charly is the one closing the door behind him, and using a big dresser from the hallway to block the only door this house possesses. He does that, while the survivors and Charlotte are exploring the interior of this building.


    ***


    Meanwhile, at the base the soldiers from Haga Artificial Island have come and retake it from these awful creatures, they are hiding in the nearest and with big space building they can find, because of the rain that is going on at the moment. Ronald is also in that building, looking at the rain falling from the sky, hitting the ground and awakening some corpses who they thought were dead, but are Campers zombie type.


    "What are these things?" asks Ronald looking at the creatures from the interior, on the window.


    "Don''t know." replies the soldier next to him. "It would be better to leave them alone. Or else, we might be their meal."


    The soldier leaves Ronald looking at the window, going to his squad mates, who are using a portable radio to contact the next squad of soldiers, who are on their way to this base, becoming much stronger in numbers and defence. As one of the soldiers, was talking with the squad on the radio, a thunder strikes the skies. Everyone was looking at the sky, where the lighting was travelling at a lightning speed, that was barely able to be seen with the naked eye. Ronald also notices the creatures outside, who were moving frenetically everywhere, are now falling on the ground, and stopped moving.


    "They stopped." said Ronald, but nobody heard him because the soldiers are busy with communication troubles.

 Vikings Way - Part 11

    ***


    At the house where the group of four people and the two Vikings are resting for the moment, three Campers zombies were running straight to the door. Of course, with their weak bodies in terms of strength and defence, the damage these creatures-with-no-head are doing it is to zero. Charly, who managed to put a dresser and a desk at the door, he looks at the window for a moment.


    He wonders how are these creatures still alive after they fully throw their bodies at the door. Logically, if a zombie would be doing that, they would be having broken limbs, but here, in a world full of zombies, psychopaths and dangers, does logic still stands? Or has been gone since this event?


    Charlotte came to Charly and she tells him.


    "You did a good thing with the barricade, brother Charly." says while she looks at the furniture her brother used to block the door from inside.


    "Thank you, sister Charlotte." says Charly turning around to her twin sister. "We should be safe until the rain would stop, or when a lightning strike will commence and stop these demons."


    "What is your call?"


    "I would rather wait, then risking my life. Especially when these creatures can be easy to break, but they are fast enough to bite you in a blink of the eye." he looks back outside to the window. "What have we done to deserve this, sister?"


    "We have done nothing, brother. It is the way our Gods from Valhalla decided to do." says Charlotte.


    "Hey, people!" says Artur coming to the two brothers on the hallway. "We have found something, in the backyard. Come and check it out!"


    The man runs from the hallway, leading the way to the two Vikings.


    The three people are walking three rooms, until they got at the kitchen, where the other three survivors are there, and are looking at the thing Artur told them. The Vikings are looking at the window, and they are feeling happy because the thing there, it is their gateways from here. Outside, the thing that has smashed the fences, and a dog house, it''s a prison bus having a lot of iron around it and having the door open wide.


    "We should take it." suggest Sigurd to the Vikings.


    The twin brothers are looking at each other like they are telepathically talking, look back at Sigurd, and both of them are nodding in agreement. And that is how they got their vehicle who helped them drive to their destination.


    If you come across this story on Amazon, it''s taken without permission from the author. Report it.


    The people on the house are looking outside, and at the running zombies on the rain, screaming like wild animals when they met their enemies from the same species, and threatens to take their habitat and female companion, or other kind of zombies, most likely Undeads, eating the corpses of their same species who have died a long time ago, maybe recently killed on this accident. Artur notices a zombie jumping on a three and eating a black raven bird. The only thing these survivors can do at the moment is wait until the rain will be finishing its pouring. When will this event happen, they will be able to get into that vehicle, then drive the remaining fifty to sixty kilometres they still have to the military base.


    Not much time has passed, and the skies have stopped pouring water. The people are looking outside, and see a few of the zombies, who are looking like Campers, slowly laying down on the ground, and stop from moving. They also see only five normal looking zombies, walking or standing still around the back of the house.


    Sigurd leaves the group, he goes into the living room, he takes from there his trusty hammer he carries since this apocalypse has started. Artur takes the crowbar Roy used to fight the hordes of zombies they have encountered. Ebba takes her pistol, she loads it with enough ammo to shoot some zombies from outside. Edla doesn''t take any weapon because she doesn''t want to hurt herself. But thanks to her sister, Edla takes a kitchen knife from the kitchen. And the Vikings, are taking their swords and backpacks. Charly, took his shield. After they all got their weapons, they get their backpacks with supplies and walk to the door leading to the back of the house they stayed for at least three hours.


    "Remember. No fire weapons." he looks at Ebba. "Don''t use it. Unless we are in danger."


    "Okay." says Ebba putting the pistol to her belt, and takes a pocket knife.


    "Good." says Sigurd looking at everybody. "we want this quiet and fast. Ready?"


    "Yeah!" says most of the survivors of this group.


    "Let''s move it!" says Sigurd breaking the door, and runs to the closest zombie.


    Sigurd lands a good shot with his hammer on the zombie head, breaking the skull with two hits, and the brain with three hits.


    The Vikings are killing the remaining four zombies with their swords, letting Artur, Ebba and Edla going to the prison bus, entering the vehicle and trying to turn up the engine. Artur did this thing, while Edla goes to the backseat with the sister. Ebba let her sister there, all frightened and shaking with the knife on her dirty hands she hasn''t washed in an eternity.


    After two minutes of trying to turn on the motor of the vehicle, Artur hears the sound of a working engine, and he feels like a kid who has figured out how to turn on the Wi-Fi their parents turned off intentionally. The man opens the door and yells at his teammates to get into the bus, which they immediately did after they looked around the house and area, to be sure there is not a zombie coming to them due to the vehicle engine noise.


    The moment all of the people have got into the bus, Artur goes to the driver seat, and drives the bus out of this place, smiling and listening to the DVD Player (yes, they still exist) at some great and inspirational music of the Sabaton band. The bus gets on the road, and drives forward, running over zombies on the streets, crashing and moving the cars out of the street.


    After one minute, the bus leaves Skolsta, and heads to Samara, the place they will be free, and it is getting closer by each hour they continue on travelling.

 Vikings Way - Part 12

    ***


    After six minutes at the time rain has stopped from pouring, military people from Samara, leaves the building they''ve used as a shelter. All of the present soldiers are outside, checking the unusual corpse of zombies they have not encountered. This thing it is new for them because this type of zombie it is not met on the apocalypse manual that was offered by the Organization to big military bases around the world who then distribute them to the intelligent, trusty and strongest bosses from police stations.


    Ronald is also there, walking to the street, while he carries on both of his arms an assault rifle, a whole clip filled with thirty-five bullets to kill the creatures. He walks slowly and always precautions because he know these zombies can be sneaky and very tricky to kill.


    Ronald had a rough journey to get to one of the artificial islands, him and with Gerald, the old man, and with another survivor known by the name of Mike, a worker at the supply zone of the island. These three went through a hard time on Holland, but with time and strength they managed to overcome this and live more days safely.


    Anyway, Ronald sees a building resembling a store who used to sell clothes when everything was labelled as normal by them. Ronald observes a few corpses, lying around in the interior of the store. He saw the corpses by entering the store tanks to the huge broken window. He turns on the flashlight, and looks around the dark corners of the store.


    He doesn''t see much there, only corpses that resemble zombies and humans, who were too destroyed to become hosts of this virus and be reanimating as monsters called by most people "zombies", or "normal zombies". Ronald observes a lot of the corpses down flinching when the light was put on them, stating that some monsters are still alive.


    Ronald doesn''t think further, he takes a knife and stabs all of the zombies who were slightly reacting to the light. He has to do as he was instructed on the island after he signed up as a reserve soldier.


    After about three minutes of searching that store, he came across a locked door that is shows a sign with "Only Shop Personal Allowed". Ronald looks around him, and he sees a zombie, wearing clothes that can be depicted as uniform for this shop. he checks the corpse pockets, and luckily, he found a set of keys.


    After he opened the door, Ronald step into the room, and over there, he sees three corpses who once used to be workers, he found all three of them, hanged on the ceiling. One of the corpses was still a zombie, and he is aggressively moving around, trying to free himself from this trap. Raoul, sees on the floor a handgun, he takes it, and points at the monster who still moves. He immediately shoots it.


    "Rest in peace. Whoever you are." says Ronald and he leaves this room, not searching further because he doesn''t see anything worth of taking from there.


    Ronald leaves the store, and he walks forward to a small group of three soldiers, who are making a pile of zombie corpses, who will be later poured some gasoline and burned because this seems to be the only reasonable solution to completely clean up this zombie mess. Ronald drags a corpse of what it looks to be a little girl, and without any remorse, he throws it into the pile of dead monsters.


    Unauthorized duplication: this tale has been taken without consent. Report sightings.


    He takes another nearby corpse, this one looking for what used to be a frail old man, who got shot in the head by a bullet. A sniper bullet to be more precise. Probably he got killed by one of his soldiers. He puts that corpse there, and before he was about to leave, he hears that corpse of the frail old man taking out a slow sound of "Waugh!". Ronald turned around, took his pistol and shot that corpse into the head. Killing it for the third time, probably.


    "What happened?" asks a soldier coming to Ronald.


    "That bastard was not completely dead." says Ronald to the fellow soldiers. "It was not killed correctly."


    "Really?" asks the soldier, he looks carefully at the corpse of the old man who got shot, and sees there are two bullet holes on the head of his. "How it can be possible?"


    "You are new to this stuff on killing zombiesˇ­ Some of these cannot be killed by a simple bullet to the head. Some of them started to regenerate their organs when shot and can attack, walk or jump again with no trouble."


    "And the only solution would always remain to burn the nearby corpse." says another soldier joining the conversation after he dragged a corpse of a fat female zombie and throw it to the pile. "Now, less talking, more workin''. The night will come soon."


    Ronald continues to drag the corpses of nearby zombies onto that pile. that one soldier stays still, and he looks at the pile of the corpses, saying it out loud.


    "What have we done to deserve this?"


    But nobody answered it. All of the soldiers there are focused on making the temporary base stable, working and function on one hundred percentage.


    ***


    After almost one hour of driving, the survivors in the bus are still on the road, rolling at a normal speed and avoiding blockages like wrecked cars or zombies on police spikes or any other big thing that can damage the vehicle. In the bus, Artur is the one driving it, while the remaining survivors, Ebba, Edla, Sigurd, Charly and Charlotte are sitting on the passenger seats, all looking at the window, at the disasters on the road.


    "How much we''ve got?" asks Charly to Sigurd who is holding a map.


    "We haveˇ­" says Sigurd looking at the map Charlotte handed to him. "About three more kilometres or more until we arrive to Almunge."


    "Sigurd!" says Artur at the wheel. "We are going to run short on gas."


    "What?" asks Edla scared. "Already?"


    "I am afraid so." says Artur. "I thought this gas would help us get to samara, but the driver of this thing poured the other type of gas."


    "Damn it." says Sigurd, and he looks at the window. "Stop here, Artur! We will have to take the walk."


    "What?" asks Edla.


    "Good choice." says Charly grabbing his sword.


    "I was starting to get bored." says Charlotte to Sigurd.


    Both of these survivors are leaving their seats, and are heading to the exit/entrance door of this small bus. not even three seconds when Artur stopped the bus, Charly and Charlotte are leaving the bus, they see their six zombies, eating a corpse. The twins are jumping on the zombies, killing it all six of them in five seconds by decapitating and smacking their heads with their weapons.


    "These people are crazy." says Artur to Sigurd.


    "Yes. But they are valuable to us." responds Artur leaving the bus, carrying his machete and a handgun.


    The other survivors are carrying melee weapons, such as knives, pipe, and Ebba carries a stick used by police tied with a knife. Her sister, Edla, made it for her after she found the police stick on the bus and tied it with the knife by suing a usual duct tape.


    After all of the survivors left the bus, Sigurd gathers all of them in one place and talks to them about the next strategy.


    "By the map we had, it shows we are getting closer to Samara. We will be there very soon. And now, we have to search for another vehicle. It doesn''t matter what kind of car we found, we need one that would help all of us get to Samara. Okay?"


    "Okay!" says a few survivors.


    "Sure." responds Charly, while Charlotte only shook her head in approval. "But we had to move fast. The night will come any time, and on the dark we have a big disadvantage to these lurking creatures."


    "Yes." says Sigurd.


    Then, all of the survivors are walking on the road, searching for any type of working car who would help them get further to their safety.

 Vikings Way - Part 13

    The night is about to approach on Sweden, and these nights are going to trouble for the humans to survive because zombies on the night, are creatures capable of anything. On the base at Samara, Ronald and with a few other soldiers are postponed at stations of protecting. Ronald stays at one tower with another soldier, who wears a military jacket with the label of "Chris McGarish". The soldier is a fat man with muscles, long beard and short black hair. The man wears a pair of glasses to help him see, and has on his back a machete.


    "The night is about to come." says Chris preparing his sniper rifle he has on the left hand. "You are ready?"


    "Yeap." responds Ronald finishing the preparations of the machine gun he took from a chopper and installed on the tower. He looks over at a damaged machine gun, which is on the other side, and on the floor of there is what used to be a soldier, but with the legs missing. "What was able to kill that soldier?"


    "Anything if you ask me." says Chris looking at the gates who were recently repaired and have their electric fence prepared. "Zombies have evolved so much, it makes me wonder if the man who did that is still alive."


    "What would you to do to him if you find out he is alive?"


    "I would literally skin him alive, throw salt at him, and fed to the zombies." says Chris in a normal voice. This did not scare Ronald.


    "I would crucify him in a big group of zombies." says Ronald.


    "Ey. That sounds boring." says Chris honestly.


    Then, before Ronald could say something, they hear a roar, not far from their location. Chris immediately takes the sniper rifle, he looks through the scope and looks around him. After a few seconds, he stops from moving, and looks through the scope at a building, at probably about four hundred meters from their location.


    "Dude. We''ve got a big one."


    "What?" asks Ronald to Chris. "What type is it?"


    "I don''t know. But I am not taking my chances." says Chris letting the sniper rifle a bit down, loading with a bullet, and aiming at the same place where he saw the creature. "Imma headshot that motherfucker."


    He aims the sniper rifle at the direction and place where the thing''s it is. Chris aims properly at the head of the creature, and with the night about to approach on the next almost one hour later, he notices this thing has a metal thing on his head. But without thinking much, Chris takes a shot.


    The story has been illicitly taken; should you find it on Amazon, report the infringement.


    The bullet flies at a high speed from the watchtower, travelling about a hundred of meters from them. The bullet hits the thing head, but surprisingly, the metal thing from that huge zombie protected from the bullet. The bullet hit the thing from the head, and it flies to the opposite direction, hitting the wall of a building. The huge thing yelled after three seconds to process what was happening.


    "What the fuck?" asks Chris looking worried at the scope of his sniper rifle.


    "What is it?" asks Ronaldo a bit worried.


    "That thing did not die." say Chris. "He has a helmet or something hard on his head."


    "What?... but how?"


    "I don''t know. But I have a hunch this man was police and somehow became a deadly zombie class."


    Chris loads another bullet on his trusty sniper rifle. He shoots the bullet at the same direction and same place. It has the same result, hitting the metal part, and ricocheting to the wall, but this time it hit a window and a zombie who was inside that building. Chris would never know he did an impressive kill with that shoot.


    That huge zombie leaves the place, and he runs to the watchtower where Chris and Ronald are staying. While that zombie continues to run at a speed of at least 8 km/h, following by three other zombies who are at a speed of 2 km/h, Ronald takes the machine gun and prepares to shoot the things coming here.


    "They are getting closer." says Ronald grabbing the machine gun and aiming at the huge zombie with a helmet on his head, coming closer and closer to the watchtower. "When you are ready."


    "Now." says Chris after five seconds when he loads a new bullet to his sniper rifle, and aims at the left leg of the creature. "You take the small ones. While I take the big one."


    "Got it." responds Ronald.


    Chris shoots the third bullet. Flying at a high speed, the bullet hits the left knee of the huge zombie, who, upon hitting, falls on the ground with hole body on his front. Quickly, Chris loads another bullet and shoots the thing again, this he hits the neck of the creature, back side to be more precise. When the thing got shoot, it did not move any more, it stays still at the same place, making Chris feel a little confused.


    Ronald on the other hand, he puts the machine gun to his use, and he mutilates the upcoming small wave of zombies who are running to their watchtower and base. He killed the three zombies, plus other twenty coming here.


    A few minutes later, a confused soldier come to the watchtower of these two people, and he asks them almost out of breath and with an Ak-47 in his left hand.


    "What happened?"


    "We had uninvited guests." responds Chris on a joke. "We had to shoot them down because they were uninvited."


    "Good thing they were smallˇ­" says the soldier looking at the small zombies on the road which Ronald killed it with the machine gun he possesses.


    "Look at the other one." says Chris to the soldier, and he hands him the sniper rifle to see the huge zombie at one hundred or so meters away from the base. He smiles at the kill he did, like a father when he sees his son winning his first salary at the Son''s dream job.


    "Holy shit." says the soldier letting the sniper rifle slowly down to Chris arms. "We have to inform the higher ups about this." And he runs from the watchtower to the base where the Boss of this squad sits and plans the defend and tries to make communications with the group of survivors coming here.

 Vikings Way - Part 14

    ***


    Meanwhile, at almost fifty kilometres from the Base of the Army Squad had made a big camp for survivors who are coming at them and deliver to their safety, a small group of survivors is walking on the road blocked with cars and military vehicle for a car to be in a good shape and sustain six people. Sigurd is checking the interior of a Chevrolet car and notices at the key place a disappointment. The key is broken and in the car is a zombie, driver seat, tied with three safety belts.


    Sigurd leaves the car and searches for another one. Charly and Charlotte are joining Sigurd, who is looking at a pickup truck, who it seems has every single window and window shield broken.


    "Found something good?" asks Charly to Sigurd who is looking disappointed at the pickup truck.


    "Nothing." says Sigurd almost spooked by the twin''s sudden appearances. "Have you saw something good to work?" he looks at them.


    "Nothing." says Charlotte. "There is nothing like a carriage here working."


    "Hey, um. Are you two still role-playing as Vikings?" asks Sigurd.


    "Sometimes." says Charlotte in her normal voice. "It helps us ease the mind and make us feel more focused on killing these zombies as you call it, or as we call it, lost souls."


    "Lost souls." says Charly seeing four zombies approaching their direction.


    Charly and Charlotte did not think much of this. They take their weapons and slain these foul beasts. Charlotte used her big axe to cut a zombie in half horizontally, while Charly cuts the head off a zombie, and stabs the other zombie that was coming at him. The stab was so strong, the longsword pierced the head of the beast, and detaches from the body. Charlotte sees the last zombie walking to her, and like always, without much pressure, she decapitates the thing with her gigantic head, and stomps the head with her big boots.


    "We should hurry up." says Sigurd to the twins who are clearing their weapons.


    Charlotte cleans the blade of the axe with something that resembles a towel, while Charly, only takes the head of that zombie off from his precious longsword. The twins observe Sigurd is walking to the other members of this small group of survivors.


    "No luck, huh?" asks Artur to Sigurd.


    "No." says Sigurd.


    This story has been stolen from Royal Road. If you read it on Amazon, please report it


    "Same to us." says Artur disappointed. "All of these cars from here are unable to start. Almost all of them are with dead batteries, damaged, or with damaged wheels."


    "What should we do. sister?" asks Edla looking around and holding the baseball bat she always carries with a strong grip.


    "I don''t know." says Ebba to Edla. "But we will arrive at the location. One way or another."


    "Dead souls!" says Charlotte seeing a few zombies coming from the left side, all walking at a fast speed.


    The team of six people sees the zombies coming. Instead of attacking, they run away from the wave, to the nearest house they can find and hide in there until the things will calm down. The survivors couldn''t face the hundreds of these creatures because of the fact there are cars who might have an alarm system that can be turned on even if you touch the car by mistake. One touch of that car and the zombies will be alerted and march at the source of the noise.


    The six people have stopped in front of a building that resembled a store. a small store where drivers who were coming on vacation, or for truckers who wanted to grab something to munch on their car with wheels and trailer.


    The people enter the building. At first glance, nobody is there, which is good. But they couldn''t stay still because they have to block the windows and the doors with something sturdy and hard to break. And so, the survivors have started to take almost every furniture piece and tries to block the doors. While Edla and Ebba, are covering windows with tape and Playboy magazines. They finish this security measure at a fast speed. And they successfully did not attract any zombie to their location.


    "We are safe." says Sigurd looking at the door blocked y furniture piece and the windows being covered with female nude photos.


    "Such a disgrace." says Charly on his Viking role seeing the windows filled with nude females photos.


    "I agree, brother Charly." says Charlotte, also dealing disgusted by these photos.


    The other survivors did not comment on this, they just stay somewhere and waits for the time when the wave of zombies will be reduced to a minimum number to make them escape, or even to zero. But Sigurd thought this would not work, so he looks at the interior of the place, and he notices the store being complete empty and resembling a store in a zombie apocalypse.


    Ebba, stays next to her sister, she looks worried at the floor, while she holds the baseball bat in her hands. Before she could say something, she hears something breaking. She turned to that direction, she observes Charly breaking a locked shelf with his sword, takes from there a few boxes that contains medicine.


    "Anyone needs some paracetamol?" asks Charly holding at least twenty small boxes with medicine. He looks at a few more of these boxes. "Nurofen? Aspirins? Pregnancy pills? Pregnancy tests? Anything?"


    "Nah. We are good." says Artur to Charly.


    "No, thanks." says Edla.


    "Yeah. We are fineˇ­" lies Ebba.


    "Okay." responds Charly. "Suits yourself then." he puts them into his backpack.


    Charlotte approaches her twin brother.


    "These will come in handy at our base, sister."


    "Great thinking." says Charlotte. "We always run low on medicine because of the injuries we get from duel."


    "You guys fight each other there?" asks Sigurd after he bring a plastic chair from the backside of the store.


    The whole group of survivors sits in a circle, enjoying this lockdown which will be not last too long. They have to stay hidden because of the zombies waves that has come.

 Vikings Way - Part 15

    All of them are forming a circle as they sit either on chairs, on furniture, or as Artur, on the floor, with his legs crossing in a meditation pose. Charly, he looks at the people, and he decides it is the moment to tell them about his and Charlotte lifestyle at the base where they lived role-playing as Vikings.


    "The thing "Duel" is known as a fight between a Viking and another Viking. We mostly do that because of sportsmanship, or because of the rivalry."


    "One time we hosted because of a fight between a made marriage. Two guys fighting over a girl. It was brutal, but I at least won the bet." says Charlotte to the people from the circle. "The bet consisted into three cooked pigs."


    "The best meal we''ve had since the beginning from the apocalypse." says Charly to the people.


    "You guys really enjoy this life?" asks Sigurd feeling a bit worried of the twins.


    "Yes." says Charly and Charlotte at the same time.


    "How?" asks Edla. "You two really like to fight zombies with a smile? They are also people."


    "They were." corrects Charly. "Now they are lost souls. We have the mission to send them back to Valhalla."


    "You people might call it role-play." says Charlotte. "Or game. Or any other thing. But we call it pause from this thing."


    "Sure." says Artur. "I get what you say it here. This apocalypse is really making us forget what was real life before all of this. Back then, we thought our lives would be bad. But in reality, the life we''ve had was actually great compared to the one we have now."


    "Back then I was a security guard." says Sigurd. "I had action and lots of stress. But it was nothing compared to this one."


    "Back then I was a zoologist." says Edla to the group.


    "Cool." says Charlotte to Edla. "I also dreamed to be a zoologist, but I and with my brother have decided to remain in the family business as History Teachers at High school."


    Nobody seems surprised by this information. They believe this thing without any hesitation. The fact that these two used to be teachers at high school at the history subject is a great thing that can help them on a situation like this in terms of fighting and surviving.


    "We used to deal with students who were not behaving accordingly to the class." says Charlotte. "One time I had a student who had a boner the whole class while he was doing eye contact to me as he presented his project."


    Everyone, besides Charly, grossed out by the thing Charlotte casually dropped to this conversation.


    This narrative has been unlawfully taken from Royal Road. If you see it on Amazon, please report it.


    "Don''t you lie." says Charly to the Sigurd and Artur. "We all had moments like these when we were young."


    "Right." says Artur feeling a bit ashamed to admit, but Charly is right, every man has gone through this in the school life or anywhere else.


    "Was that kid having a crush on you?" asks Edla feeling curious about this.


    "I don''t think so." say Charlotte. "That student was in a relationship with the head of the class. Hope they are fine now."


    "They sure are fine." says Charly to his twin sister trying to make her feel better. "That kid is smart as Hell. He probably is right now outside this country, navigating the seas with a small boat with the Head of the class of your school."


    "You two were in different schools?" asks Artur.


    "Oh, yes." says Charlotte. "We worked in different high school. They were not far from each other, so we would occasionally see each other on our breaks at the Park or at the nearest coffee shop."


    "These were the hard days." says Charly. "Teaching ignorant people about the history, and filling papers until at the eleven night."


    "At least the paid was good."


    "That''s true." say Charly to his sister.


    "I-I have to go to the toilet." says Ebba leaving her seat, and going to the door that leads to the bathroom.


    "Hey, sis." says Edla about to raise from her seat.


    "Don''t worry, sister. I can handle this." says Ebba with a smile.


    After a few seconds, Ebba goes at the bathroom stalls, letting Edla remain in the circle of friends and discussing the things they have done in the past. As the people discuss about their past lives and not checking on the shelves, Ebba snatches a pregnancy test and a simple box cutter that was put on the shelf.


    Ebba walks a few steps to the bathroom stalls, all by herself. To get there, she walks through the break room, where the two co-workers of the store used to take a twenty-minute break at every one to two hours of work, drink coffee, do small talk or just relax on their phones or at their computers. As Ebba entered the staff breaking room, she observes there a body of what used to be a human, the body seems to be killed, but by himself because of the cuts at the wrists with the box cutter he holds on the other hand. Ebba also notices the corpse has a hole on the head, at the zone where is the brain placed.


    She looks at the pregnancy test, and thought to herself.


    "Should I really do this? I meanˇ­ I know raising a baby into this world is bad news on movies and books, butˇ­ Can the Military actually help us deliver a baby in this situation?" she takes a look at the box cutter she holds, then she looks at the corpse of that man.


    Then with her eyes, she notices a small paper note on the floor, next to the left leg of that corpse who is sitting on the couch. Ebba puts the pregnancy test and the boxcutter to the desk of where are two computers placed and covered on blood who has become already hard to clean it up. She bends over to that note, took, and proceed to read the Swedish note.


    "I am sorry, Carla. I was not able to resist the sixth day without you. The lost of you and my unborn child was too much for me. I cannot live without you two. Today I will be killing myself. And nothing can stop me."


    Ebba flips the page to the other side, and on that page is a small photo with a woman that looks really beautiful. A normal Swedish woman in her 30s with long blonde hair, green eyes and a face that could make even a photo-model feeling upset of natural beauty.


    As the girl looked at the photography, and at the corpse, she realized the thing she was about to do earlier. So Ebba, decides to put the note on the couch, and says a faint "Thank you" to the corpse of the murdered human who was either the co-worker of this business or the Boss. Ebba goes back to the circle of her friends, letting the boxcutter and the pregnancy test in that room.

 Vikings Way - Part 16

    ***


    After a while, on the Base, a few soldiers and Ronald are setting up the tents for the camping. They have orders to set out camps, rather than sleeping in empty rooms of the abandoned complex, building, apartments or anything that resembles a bed to sleep on the night. Ronald has done his tent for him and the other five teammates, including Chris.


    The moment Ronald finished up his tent, the commander comes to him, he inspects the tent, says good things about Ronald, and he orders him to come to the communication office, because somebody wanted to talk with him. Ronald is obeying the order, and goes with the commander to the tent, where a radio station waits for him.


    Ronald arrives at the radio station installed temporarily on a tent destined for communications and strategy plans for the expanding, defence or scouting of the neighbourhood areas. As Ronald got at that tent, a few members of the squad, together with a few more soldiers from the squad are staying at the radio, waiting for Ronald. He looked worried at everyone, and asks them.


    "What''s going on here?"


    "We have a survivor case that is speaking Deutschland." says the commander.


    "Wait. Aren''t you all speaking Deutschland?"


    "Yes. But the person wants to talk with you."


    "A person?" asks Ronald reluctant. "Who is it?"


    "It says it is someone from somewhere named Haga region. It is a female, who was asking for you or someone named Gerald or Mike."


    "A female, huh?"


    Ronald goes to the radio station, he sits at the empty chair, puts the headphones on, and takes the microphone closer to is face. He proceed to talks with the person from the other side.


    "Hello! I am Ronald." says Ronald at the radio. "Who are you?"


    "Ronald!" says the female from the other side, feeling relieved. "Thank God! So you''ve made it."


    Love this novel? Read it on Royal Road to ensure the author gets credit.


    "Who am I speaking with?"


    "With Chloe." says the woman on the radio sounding tired.


    "Umˇ­"


    "We have stayed at the building at the beginning of the apocalypse. I have heard from a foot soldier you and the other two people have made it to an army base camp."


    "Yes. It was a hard and long road, but the gang and I made it. But, how did you survive this long?" asks Ronald.


    "I have stayed hidden into the rural areas outside the Holland." responds Chloe at the radio. "We were nine people, but now, it is only me."


    "God. I am sorryˇ­ How can we help you?"


    "I wanted to confirm if the place you''ve got is truly true."


    "But how you know about us? We haven''t talked since the third day of our stay at the building, where you and other four people have gone on the scout mission and supplying. But as you know, we did not get back. We got blocked on the city for five days, then we decided to remain on the rural areas for the next following days, until yesterday when I met a soldier named Garen."


    "Garen?" asks a squad member amazed. "Garen T?"


    "Yes." says Chloe at the radio. "The man told me about this base of yours, and told me to go to the dock area where I should signal one of the boats that are on the ocean and patrols for potential survivors."


    "Good. Then you are set."


    "But. Are you there? I mean at the base?"


    "No." says Ronald and looks at the commander, who just says by gesture to "Continue" the conversation. "I am in Sweden with a squad."


    "Sweden? Why?"


    "It''s confidential. But don''t worry, Gerald and Mike are still at the base you are going to live. Gerald is working as Instructor to Soldiers, and Mike as a Shop Supplier and in Management."


    "Wow. These two have already got assigned to work."


    "It''s a base that starts to grow faster and large, Last time there were almost two hundred survivors at the base. Now. I am not sure how many are now."


    "I understand." says Chloe, and after a while. "Guess, we will see other time at the base."


    "Yeah. Goodbye."


    "Goodbye. Good luck!" says Chloe who ends the radio transmission.


    Ronald takes off the headphones, and moves the microphone away. He looks at the members of the squad, who have heard all of the conversation. Some of them are trying to hide their grin, others were starting rumours that Ronald feels something for Chloe. Then, Ronald decides to drop the bombshell.


    "Chloe and I used to be in a two days relationship."


    "What?" asks a few soldiers.


    "You two only hooked for two days?" asks Chris, who was also there, surprised by this.


    "Yes." says as he raises from his seat. "Now if you''ll excuse me, I would like to go to my tent and sleep. Tomorrow, the things will be starting to get to real work."


    Ronald leaves the tent of communication, letting the squamates doing their works at the radio stations. He walks a few steps to his tent, and as he arrived there, he goes on his bed. He tries to sleep, but he cannot shake the images of him and the girl Chloe, living on the same room, having sex at the Ronald''s room and consuming wine.

 Vikings Way - Part 17

    ***


    On the next day, at a very far distance from the base, at a small pharmacy store, our group of six survivors left the place. All of them had a hard time sleeping on a place that was surrounded a few hours ago by zombies who were either walking, running, crawling, or jumping around on this area. The survivors sees a few corpses of zombies, laying on the ground, left with any sign of moving.


    "These things must''ve been eaten by Undeads." says Artur looking at a body of a walker, with his chest cut open and missing organs. "Poor fella. His kidney got stolen."


    "Do you think it was good?" asks Charly approaching Artur.


    "If we were in modern world that was almost a month ago, we would get enough money to pay the rent at any apartment for almost a year." says Artur.


    "Guys." says Sigurd approaching the two survivor who were inspecting the corpse of what was once a moving zombie. "We are thinking of going on foot to the base of military."


    "Really?" asks Artur.


    "How much it will take us?" asks Charly to Sigurd.


    "About a day if we are moving now." responds Sigurd to Charly. "The things must''ve been headed to that direction." he points to the East. "If we get lucky, we will reach there when they will eliminate the entire horde."


    "If?"


    "Hope they will." say Sigurd.


    Charly and Sigurd are walking to the other four survivors who are inspecting the corpse of somebody who was fresh infected. Upon looking at the corpse, they realize the corpse is dressed in a Swedish Army Uniform and is having a backpack. Charly decides to stab the head of that creature as a precaution measure, and then he turns him over, takes the backpack and search his contents.


    Charly takes from there what is seems like to be a radio station, or a walkie-talkie. He handed to Sigurd, who tries to turn it on, but with no result. He turns the station around and checks his back where is the batteries stored. He sees there are no batteries.


    "Fuck." says Sigurd, and he hands the station back to Charly. "Thought we might have a chance to contact them and announce them of our arrival."


    "Guys." says Charly after he stops looking at the backpack. Takes from there what looks like a C4 type bomb.


    "My God." says Ebba at that bomb.


    "What the hell was that man doing with this?" asks Artur.


    "Hope he was not a suicide bomber." says Ebba.


    Sigurd carefully takes the bomb from Charly hands, and he looks at the timer. He sees the bomb it is turned off. A thing that is making all six of them takes a breath of relief. Sigurd decides to put the bomb on his backpack. A few of his teammates are looking scared, then Sigurd told them.


    "This might be needed."


    "Also, this." says Charly hands a remote to Sigurd. A looking remote who is used to detonate bombs from far distance rather than putting them on timer.


    "Cool." says Sigurd taking that remote.


    After he finished checking the backpack, Charly put it down, and rises to his feet. He did not have luck to find any batteries to help them make the walkie-talkie station work. Also, he did not fin food, water or any bullets there. But a bomb is considered to be a good find if they will encounter a Class F zombie.


    Unlawfully taken from Royal Road, this story should be reported if seen on Amazon.


    After a few seconds, the six survivors are walking further to the base direction. They have to walk at least a day, which is almost ten to twenty kilometres. This can take even more than a day because of the dangers and if they encounter a zombie on the road, taking the fact that zombies in the hordes, tend to break the group, and remain on one place or hiding in some houses.


    The group decides to walk in the forests zone in order to avoid the zombies who are staying still and walking on the roads who used to be filled with moving cars rather than unmoving cars or turned upside cars. As the group is walking in the forest, and not even one hundred steps, they hear a "Gragh! Guargh!" noises made by zombies. All of the six are looking everywhere to see who is producing the noise, then, Artur sees it, but at a place they never thought it will be.


    "Up there." he points at a zombie who is stuck on a tree branches at a distance of 5 meters from ground. "Looks like a skydiver got unlucky."


    "Way too unlucky." says Charlotte. "If he falls, he will become a Crawler."


    "True." says Artur.


    "Should we try to end his suffering?" asks Charly to the group.


    "No." says Sigurd. "WE cannot risk being heard by the others. We have to move quiet and not attract too much attention."


    The survivors decide to leave the zombie stuck on the tree, continuing to let free the specific sounds a zombie makes. That zombies tries to move, but he is stuck there. His arms are almost about to fall because they are cut by tree branches, and his legs are totally broken given by the state they are bend in a direction leg should not be.


    The people walk a few meters, and they observe a crashed truck with a transportation service logo. The survivors look around the truck and observes there is nothing surrounding the truck, like a zombie or a corpse of a zombie. After they saw nothing is there, Charly and Charlotte go to the truck cabin, they opened it by raising the door and look around it.


    "Check this out." says Charly to the other gang members.


    "What?" asks Sigurd approaching the truck, and he sees a lot of supplies in the truck.


    The supplies this truck was carrying consists into mostly food packed in bags. Sigurd goes into the truck, he search the truck and observes a few boxes that carries chips like Lay''s, Chio, and many other food like biscuits, water bottles, alcohol drinks and many more.


    "How can a treasure like this be unattended?" asks Sigurd.


    "I don''t know." says Charly. "But we are taking this to our home." he looks at his twin sister, who agrees by shaking her head in approval.


    "This food can be useful to the army." says Sigurd.


    "The Army are packed with food and anything else." says Charly. "This food is much more valuable to my camp."


    "And how are you going to transport over there?" asks Sigurd curios.


    "By asking the army for a spare truck." says Charly.


    "ˇ­ Guess you can take it." says Sigurd leaving the truck to Charly. He finds out it will be useless to argue with him, especially how valuable source he and his sister are to this four team of survivors.


    Charly closes the door of the truck, and he talks with his sister while the other continues to walk further to the army base.


    "Can you stay here and protect the truck?"


    "Why me?" asks her sister.


    "Don''t worry, we will be coming back with a spare truck. We take these, and we are out of here."


    "Why can''t we leave it here and come back with a truck together?"


    "It''s too dangerous. WE might risk it to get stolen by somebody else." he looks around, then he takes off from under clothes a gun. "Here." he hands the gun to Charlotte.


    "But how?" asks Charlotte, not believing her brother had a pistol.


    "I''ve found it on the pharmacy we were staying overnight. I checked and is having six bullets."


    Charlotte takes the pistol, she looks on the ammo compartments, then after she put it back. She looks on his brother eyes and says.


    "You promise you will come back?"


    "I promise." says her brother, who takes a dagger, he makes a small cut on his big thumb. "Blood promise?"


    Charlotte takes the brother dagger, she also made a small incision on her big thumb. Then, when both of their small cuts are broken, they press the thumb and say.


    "I promise I will be coming back with a working truck." says Charly to Charlotte.


    "And I promise I will protect its contents." say Charlotte to Charly.


    After they made this promise, these two are temporarily breaking their roads. charlotte stays hidden o the trees and bushes to watch the truck not being raided and stolen by a local group, while Charly goes on walking with the other people to the army base.


    When Charly came back to the group, Ebba asks him.


    "Where is your sister?"


    "She decided to stay behind and protect the truck." say Charly.


    "I see." responds Sigurd. "Hope she will be safe."


    "Don''t worry. She can handle this mere task." says Charly taking the lead. "We have to move."


    The other group of survivors is following Charly.

 Vikings Way - Part 18

    ***


    On the small base at Samara, the soldiers are on their positions, preparing the weapons for the upcoming horde of zombies who are at almost five kilometres from their base, they got this information from a helicopter who was flying by that direction. This helicopter got sent by the Headquarters from one of the artificial islands near Holland for a resupply mission that consisted into ammunition, defensive gear and food.


    "What a coincidence, friend, right?" asks Chris mounting a new machine gun on a new zone, at the sixth floor of a building who once was used as one of these where workers get into in and manage the life on an app from App Store or play store.


    "Sure is." says Ronald taking from a box a grenade launcher, walks about six meters, and he mounts it on a barricade made by desks. He used all of the furniture pieces they could find to made said "barricades" to support their heavy guns.


    In order to mount the grenade launcher, Ronald has to do it by using a gear made specially for this who will attach the thing to anything. It has the same mechanism as a regular machine guns from video games shooters, but it is more effective to hold a grenade launcher with ten grenades stored at maximum.


    And to make it efficient when reloading will come, Ronald puts next to him three things that look like cylinder flutes, but for grenade launchers.


    After he has done this, Ronald is looking down, observing the area where the attack will start. Down there he sees a few soldiers who are working their hardest to make an efficient wall by using guns, other soldiers are putting the wired fences they got from the soldiers who owned the base first plus the three crates who were sent by the higher ups from the Haga Headquarters. He also sees a few soldiers mounting mortars from the interior of the base, mounts guns to base walls and some were already taking their positions.


    The base has about almost ninety soldiers, all ready to annihilate the entire horde who is coming at a relatively normal speed to their base.


    "We are going to demolish them." says Ronald looking down with a smile.


    "Demolish?" asks Chris who just finished mounting his machine gun. "More likely bloodbath."


    "Finished?"


    "Yep. you?"


    "Yes."


    "Alright. So. We have to wait."


    And wait so they did for the next hour.


    ***


    ***


    A few minutes later, on the road to the base, the small group of survivors is walking on the street, all of them slashing every zombie who was about to rise up from their slumber. Even sister of Ebba, Edla. Even though she didn''t do more than hitting the head of a zombie with a golf club, but it did not kill it, only put him down, only to raise up later, and be killed by her skilled sister.


    "Guys." says Artur after he stabbed the head of a zombie with a knife, and he hears an explosion from a distance. "Did you hear that?"


    "Of course, yes." says Charly running to him. "We have to run." he looks everywhere and sees all of the zombies raising up, and some group of zombies who were hiding at a big distance coming up and walk towards where the explosion come from.


    All of the survivors see the zombies rising up. All of the zombies are walking towards the explosion, and the rest of the four group, not hearing the explosion, they run towards where the source of explosion was coming for. Artur and Charly on the other hand, they ran with the rest of their groups to the explosion.


    This tale has been pilfered from Royal Road. If found on Amazon, kindly file a report.


    After three minutes of intense running, the group gathers at the place near the explosion, and there, they see something they make all of them terrified, In front of them is a zombie who measures about two meters tall, he has big arms, and he is holding the corpse of a dead human. It can be seen he is human because he doesn''t have skin colour some other zombies are having, like grey, green, black-grey or greenish.


    That enormous monstrosity, is turning his back to the survivors who got close to him, and he roars in their direction. That roar was loud enough to even make a few zombies who were near him, to fall down, shake uncontrollably and almost make their heads explode. The survivors were all putting their arms on their ears, and running away from that enormous zombie. The huge thing decides to throw that body to the direction where the survivors are running.


    Fortunately, the corpse did not hit any survivors. He splashed on the impact of a building, making all of his organs and bones flies across the area, landing either on the ground, or on car wreckages or in a corpse. The group is running into a building with a metallic door, upon arriving there, Artur, Sigurd and Charly are closing it, and block it with any heavy furniture piece they found. They know this will not hold the huge creature, but it can hold the small zombies.


    All three of them are carrying a metallic table, weighting almost one hundred kilograms. They put the table there, and after that, they put a stove and a freezer used to store meat products and ice. Ebba realizes this building used to be either something used for food making or just a room of a house, who is somehow still standing.


    After blocking the door, the group realizes the other side of this building is having a gigantic hole, which all of them are quickly felling the need to slap their heads, but seeing they have no time, they run through the hole, and on a straight direction, trying to avoid the monstrous size zombie who is slowly walking to their direction.


    The survivors are running without looking back, all holding their fire weapons if a zombie would get too close to them. All of the survivors, besides Edla, who still holds her golf club, and feeling frightened.


    As the group was running, something strange has happened, but they will notice that only when they are going to arrive at the base. The group was running ahead, not noticing one of their members of the group got tackled and pinned by a zombie. That member of the group is Edla, who is attacked by a zombie by the Jumper type. Her sister was much more focused on running to their destination, and not looking back to her sister who was using her golf club to stop the zombie from trying to dig his head into her chest and eat the organs.


    The woman was doing her best, and she manages to push the zombie aside with her golf club. She quickly gets on her feet, and smashes the thing''s head with the golf club. With only one head, the creature did not die. But the second, was strong enough to put the Jumper down.


    Edla breathes heavily, and she is looking proud at the achieved she just made. She killed her first Jumper. She cries happily tears and was about to turn around to her group, but before she could do anything, a gigantic hand grabs her head, making her freeze, and crying sad tears.


    Behind her, there lays the gigantic creature with big hands, who holds her head like a human holding a rotten tomato who is about to squash it. The zombie then, with a strong impulse, he squashes the head of Edla, who was about to yell the name of her sister. The grip was so strong, the base skull turned into dust, and the brain of her tuned into liquid.


    The body of Edla falls on the ground, and the thing takes it on the other hand. He then throws the body of the killed girl to the direction where the team of now four survivors were running. The body flies at a high speed, passing the group, and landing at about one hundred meters distance into the street, on a car wreckage.


    "The thing has just thrown something at us!" says Artur running with the group, and not stopping a bit from running.


    Sigurd took a look back, and he saw the huge zombie, sitting on his ass, and licking the hand where lays the head of Edla. Then, he looks at his group, and realizes Edla is not there. But he did not tell the group this, he only told them.


    "Keep running. We are getting there!"


    The group continues to run for the following minutes, until they get at an intersection, which they are taking the left turn, and there they can see from far, a gigantic wall, made by car wreckages and any other hard objects.


    "It''s there!" yells Artur to his friends. "We are almost there!"


    The group continues to run from the waves of zombies who are approaching them at a fast and also slow speed. But from that swarm of the zombie, there wasn''t the gigantic zombie from earlier, because that gigantic one, he is enjoying the head of the young female survivor who just got killed so brutally.

 Vikings Way - Part 19

    On the rebuild base made the Squad of soldiersˇ­ The defence plan they have made last night is going well for now because they have been supplied with enough ammo to take down hundreds of zombies. On a normal building, who used to be a complex where people with money and jobs used to live, a soldier by the name tag Chris uses a sniper rifle to make chains kills.


    "I got a triple shoot." says the soldier reloading his sniper rifle with an explosive bullet. "These bullets are amazing, Ronald."


    "Sure, they are!" responds Ronald, who is using grenade launchers who are attached to the windows. He shoots a grenade from a high distance, and he hits a group of zombies who were running to the walls of the bases. The grenade lands on the group of zombies, and it makes them transform into a pile of blood and organs.


    Soldiers from the base are pouring all of their ammo on the group of zombies who are running or walking to their base they have stayed and protect it with their lives since they came here and retake it. One of the soldiers at the front gates, he runs out of ammo for his machine gun, so he decides to take out a pipe bomb. He turns it on and throws it to the group of zombies.


    "Pipe bomb!" yelled the soldier after he throw the pipe bomb at about six meters distance.


    The pipe bomb lands inside a vehicle. As the pipe bomb flies, with the "Bing" noises he was making, a few zombies, being creature that are not able to think, they follow the sounds of the pie bomb, who just entered a car, that contains three gas cans, all filled with gas. Car that was not conveniently put there, and not checked since the day the new squad of soldiers has come here.


    A few two digits numbers of zombies are near the car, trying to get in it and "take" the noise of that pipe bomb who proceeds to run faster and become more irritating. The "Bing and beep" continued for about five second, until an explosion happened. It was an explosion who destroyed the two-digit number of creatures, and made a big fire due to the three gas cans inside the car.


    "Wow!" says the soldier seeing the big fire from the car, and a lot of zombies being killed and burning up. "Wait we have gas in there?" asks another soldier, who is reloading his machine gun.


    "Had." says the other soldier, who is blasting the machine gun he is holding on his hands, shooting all the fast zombies by destroying their heads, and pining them down by mutilating their legs or hands.


    Stolen from its original source, this story is not meant to be on Amazon; report any sightings.


    After about forty seconds, the machine gun of this soldier runs out of ammo. He swears and proceed to reload this fast killing machine as fast as he could by adding a new clip that contains now at least two hundred bullets. The last clip had only one hundred.


    "Man, look!" says a soldier stopping the one wielding the machine gun, he points at a group of four people who are running to their base. "Are those humans?"


    "Don''t know." says the soldier, and he hands a pair of binoculars to the soldier who saw the people heading to their base.


    The man looks through binoculars, at the direction where the four survivors are coming. He looks at them for about ten seconds. He saw the group is having a female and three males. And that group is the one who were almost two days ago in Uppsala.


    "There are survivors coming!" yells the soldier who is running to the commander to announce this, letting his comrade shoot the zombies who are running to the base direction, and he also ordered him, before he left, to keep the survivors as safe as possible.


    Ronald is with Chris, on the building we have mentioned earlier, he shoots three grenades from the grenade launcher to a big horde of zombies. The grenades lands on that horde, making all of the zombies from there explodes and lay on the ground. Then, before he was about to shoot another grenade to the remaining zombies from that horde, he gets a message from the commanders via the headphones he wears.


    "We have Code 45. Code 45. Survivors are in the horde of the zombies. I repeat. Survivors in the horde of the zombies who are approaching our base! Protect them! I repeat! Protect the survivors from that horde!"


    Ronald is taking a look at Chris, who is looking through the scope of his sniper rifle, and he tells Ronald.


    "I see the survivors, mate. They are four."


    "Are they infected?" asks Ronald.


    "Cannot tell from this distance. But if they are or not, our duty is to protect any civilian. Even in these hard-trying times."


    As Ronald was about to shoot a grenade into a horde of zombies who are turning around to the survivors, a flare flies into the sky, and it lands in top of a building that used to be a business of a man who used to repair cars before this apocalypse started. The flare did not attract the zombies, who are focused on trying to breach inside the fortress recreated by the soldiers of this squad.


    Ronald sees the group of four survivors are running toward the building where the flare is located, and they are running there, while some zombies are following them. Chris decides to spare a few of the bullets to the group, by killing five of those twenty zombies who are following the gang. He kills all five of them via headshot by using five bullets per. zombie.


    "Hope they can handle the trouble." says Chris looking at the direction where the four survivors were running.


    "If what they say it is true, and they made this far by themselves, they will be fine." responds Ronald who decides to switch to the machine gun, to eliminate the last dozens of zombies from that horde.

 Vikings Way - Part 20

    ***


    The four people enters the building it was guided by the flare, launched by one of the soldiers from inside the base. After they got inside the building, Charly and with Sigurd, are quickly locking the door, by moving a golf cart who was there.


    "How luck this person was having this." says Charly to Artur, whom smile in response.


    "Where is Edla?" asks Ebba, her sister, looking around scared and sweating bullets.


    "Edla?" asks Artur surprised. "She was with us a moment ago."


    "Didn''t she?" says Charly, looking scared at Ebba, but then, Sigurd say something which turns everyone attention to him.


    "Edla died. She died most likely by a zombie who was jumping to us."


    "A jumperˇ­" says Ebba furiously and sad. "Fuckˇ­" she starts to cry.


    "That jumper, was close to take me." say Sigurd feeling a bit ashamed. "But that monster, took Edla."


    "My sisterˇ­" mourns Ebba. "My sister! My mother! My father! They have all been taken by them! By Jumpers!" she cries and tires to hold her mucus inside the nose. She falls on her knees and continues to cry. Sigurd goes to Ebba, trying to confront her and make her feel somehow better.


    "Guys." says Charly looking at the window and sees about fifteen zombies walking to them. "Dead souls are coming."


    "Let the military people handle them." propose Artur to Charly, but he sees that nobody else cares about this.


    "I will go." say Charly taking his sword. "I don''t expect all of you to stop me."


    "Sure." says Artur non-clamantly. "Go for it."


    "Aren''t you going to help me?"


    "Kid. I am tired of this, okay? I have been running, avoiding death countless times and very hungry. The save is very close to us. And I don''t risk going there, getting myself killed while the salvation is at a few steps ahead."


    Charly did not say anything in response to Artur. He knew this old man is crazy or dumb most of the time, but what he said was logical for him and the three remaining members of the group. Besides, Charly these people have been trough Hell and Back in order to get here. Unlike him and his twin sister, who are enjoying this time of humanity.


    "Guess, I will go on myself."


    "Be careful." says Sigurd to Charly.


    Love this story? Find the genuine version on the author''s preferred platform and support their work!


    "I will." responds Charly heading to the back exit.


    "Bring the corpse of my sister if you can!" yells Ebba to Charly as he runs to the back of the building, to take the back exit.


    The moment Charly left the construction who will fall at any moment, he runs to the front of the store, holding his sword in both of his hands, prepared to slash a few zombies heads.


    ***


    Seven minutes later, a small group of soldiers, all dressed in heavy armour and carrying heavy weapons, are marching at the building where the four survivors are hiding. The soldiers are going there, prepared to face one of those fifteen left zombies. But, when they took the turn and prepared to fire their weapons in a straight line, they see a strange man there, holding a sword that has zombie blood on the blade part. That man with long hair and beard, he has slain all of the zombies who were walking and running to him and his teammates.


    "Are you alright?" asks a soldier, giving a sign of shaking because of fear when he looks at Charly. It can be sensed the other soldiers are also surprised by a man that wears a Viking armour on these strange and deadly times of humanity.


    "I am fine." responds Charly in his natal language, who is making a few soldiers, who are mainly speaking English feeling a reductant.


    "Do you speak English?" asks a soldier to the man wearing Viking''s costume.


    "Yes. I do." speaks Charly into a broken English accent to the soldiers who are from Great Britain, Holland and any other countries from Europe sphere. "Are you the squad who contacted my other friends?"


    "Who are your friends?" asks a soldier in black to Charly.


    "They are hiding in this building."


    "How many are there?" asks the same soldier who is stepping two steps ahead to Charly, showing that he is the leader of this small unit.


    "They areˇ­ three." says Charly after a while, counting the remaining survivors, and excluding the other woman survivor who got killed a few moments ago by a creature from Class F. "We''ve lost one survivor due to an enormous creature, and we have another protecting something valuable for the community I add with that person I live in."


    "Are the people inside infected?"


    "No."


    "Does your team have any smokers? Or people with pneumonia problems?"


    "I don''t think so. I am with them for at least three days."


    "We will have some questions for you later." says the soldier to Charly with a smile to show he is friendly. "Now let''s head from this place before another wave of zombies might show up."


    Charly and with the other soldiers from this small unit, are entering the building. Upon arriving in the interior of this place who''s in ruin and has a few decayed zombie corpses around, and expired food around, the soldiers see in the room the three survivors: Artur, Ebba, and Sigurd.


    "Thank God." says Artur seeing the soldiers coming at them, he was about to hug them, until a soldier put out a metallic objective and is aimed to the head of Artur.


    The metallic objective that soldier is at the civilian, it is a simple technological thermometer who was used at the beginning of the years 2020 when a Pandemic was taken big action on the world.


    "36.9 Celsius." reports the soldier to the Leader of the unit, who is the black man.


    "36.8 Celsius." says another soldier after a short time when he took the temperature of Ebba.


    "37.0 Celsius." says another soldier almost at the same time as the second soldier who stated the temperature.


    After the quick check, up was finished. The survivors and the military unit, are running to the base as fast they can because another wave of these things are approaching the base. This time, on a fast rate than the first one. When survivors have taken the corner, they can see the base of the squad, who is still standing, but down to this road, there are lots of zombies corpses who once were humans.


    The soldiers and survivors did not pay any intention to these things, because their only goal is to get as soon as they can inside the base and prepare for the next defensive.

 Vikings Way - Part 21

    ***


    Meanwhile, on the road that a survivor member of the group who has fled to the base, stays inside the truck it got crashed and contains tons of supplies such as food, clothing and melee weapons. Charlotte is the team member who is keeping this truck secured because she and her twin brother are going to use for their Viking''s Base they live in.


    Now, their base it wasn''t the one where King Thorfin lives with other small group, their base is almost at the border with Denmark, at almost twenty kilometres away from Uppsala. Their base consists into houses that are looking exactly like those depicted in Viking''s history, Mythology and Morse fiction. About fifty-nine people dressed as Vikings live there, but after these almost three days, Charlotta thinks the people from the base have either decided to leave and search for food or have been killed by one of these things the modern humans are calling them "zombies".


    The Viking Woman feels bad for her tribe. They are probably started to grow worried because they are missing for almost three days. The woman can recount that she tells his tribe Leader they will go on an expedition to King Thorfin to acquire some resources for their tribe. But, when they met Sigurd, Ebba, Edla, Artur and Roy, these two decided to use them to get at that base and get some supplies in exchange, or at least, a functional truck in exchange.


    On the road there are trucks, but most of them are busted like missing a wheel or two, with their motor gone and one of them have five decayed corpses that smells terrible, but with a truck that doesn''t possess any problem, except it needs electrical charge. Having electrical based cars in the Apocalypse is a bad thing because when the electricity has run out of cities, procuring energy will be useless. Even if you try solar energy, it will take a bigger threat because most of the time, it is raining here in Sweden since the beginning of this disaster. Even now, the clouds in the sky are looking grey.


    Charlotta, who is staying in the car, is looking on the windshield on the street. All she sees there are a few corpses, who slowly proceeding to move. Charlotta doesn''t even want to leave the car and risks of attacking the creature. And that is because of the raining that could come at any moment.


    She and group have noticed these zombies are having a weird behaviour when the rain is going on. When they were hiding in that house back in that zone where they took a bus, they saw a group of zombies moving frenetically, yelling and then falling on the ground. They also saw a few things emerging from the ground, back to their feet when the raining stopped and when they were about to leave.


    Charlotta is looking straight up at a zombie corpse, resembling a bald obese man whose wearing a costume, and has his torso tore up. The thing rises up, and he is walking to his left, not knowing that a survivor is hiding in a broken truck, waiting for his brother to come back with help, or a spare truck to take the supplies. Charlotta looks at that zombie, and she laughs at it. That zombie it does reminds her of the Principal of the High school she was working a few years ago. That Principle has fired her because of a rich student who wanted to sexually assault her and do some incrimination photos on them.


    A single photo was taken which the rich student sneaked inside the house of the teacher, putting paint on his face and looking like scars and blood. He laid next to her bed, and made photo of him in the bed of her teacher, looking like a violated victim. And this did not help that Charlotta was sleeping and was smiling.


    It wouldn''t have helped even if she had tried to do a lawsuit, the things would have still gone wrong for her because the Principal, the moment he saw the photo on social media and saw it explodes and creating a lot of controversy on their school, he fired her without any hesitation. And when this happened, she decided to delete her social media, and start a new life with a new identity as a writer specialized in Morse mythology.


    You might be reading a stolen copy. Visit Royal Road for the authentic version.


    But when her brother found out about this, he hired a private investigator to do some research on the family of that kid, and it turns out, they found more shocking information than the fact the kid was ruining Charlotta life. The private investigator, has found this family is making money illegally, as a resource they use human trafficking. The Investigator, together with a few cops, they''ve found in Sweden about twenty humans, all females at the age of 20s, being locked in a warehouse, and feed only bread and water. All of the women''s in that place were dressed in revealing clothes, revealing that they were probably used as hookers by the family.


    The news has hit the press and the entire family, got arrested and sentenced to at least fifty years in Prison, while the teenager who was supposed to be arrested at the minor prison for about two years, he was found out in a canal, dead, holding a knife on his right hand, while the other is having his veins cut.


    Charlotta felt better when she heard the news, but she felt bad when the news of the teenager who got her fired, was found out killed in the canal. She never thought the family of that kid was doing such an atrocious thing, or the fact that this kid, has made one of the women there pregnant (it was revealed in a news article that one of the women''s who were trapped in the warehouse, was pregnant with the child of the teenager who just killed himself in the canal).


    Back to the present, Charlotte sees how a few rain drops are falling on the ground, and she looks at it. The girl remains in the truck cabin, and she enjoys this rain, who will rise all of the zombies up to their legs, walk around like chicken with no heads and falls back to their slumber.


    "Oh, brother Charly. Hope you are safe." says Charlotta as she looks outside and spots a zombie rising from the ground, slowly.


    ***


    In the meantime, on the base who once was destroyed by zombies, and now become functional again, the soldiers, all positioned on strategic points are preparing their arsenals for another encounter to one of these monsters who are marching to their base. This time however, one of the soldiers, spots something with his binoculars that is making him shiver in fear.


    "My God!" says the soldier to one of the group of other three soldiers positioned on the front gate with their four mounted machine guns. "Eddie. Look. A Class F." he hands the binoculars to the soldier named Eddie, who is an afro-white with a red neck moustache.


    "Sweet Jesus." say Eddie almost piss his pants when he saw through the binoculars the huge creature who is considered in the manual as a zombie, but in reality, this thing doesn''t look like a zombie, except the fact he does eat meat, and people alive. "Alert the snipers."


    "On it." says the soldier walking a few meters to the table where Chris and Ronald, were taking a small break.


    Ronald and with his friend, Chris, are drinking some tea and enjoying a fine croissant. As they were taking their break from the fight earlier, a thing comes to them, and tells them they have to cancel their break. They are required to be on their positions because they need their sniper rifle support to annihilate the beast coming to their base.


    "A class F, you say?" asks Chris after he drink his mint tea. He looks at Ronald. "Didn''t we killed one of these things a long time ago?"


    "Yeah. I think it was yesterday." says Ronald to Chris.


    "Do you think it is the same, or another creature?"


    "Probably another, because the last one had no way to come back to life. All of the zombies, who are shoot in the head, die for good."


    "Bravo." says Chris feeling proud of Ronald to remember this, but Ronald know this information since that time he and two of his friends were running almost on the entire Holland.


    "So who''s going to do it?" asks Chris to Ronald, ignoring the fact the messenger he is growing worried of this casual conversation these two are having.


    "Should I do it?"


    "If you insist." he drinks his tea, and he tells him. "You kill him by only five bullets, and I will personally search for a Playboy magazine."


    "You sir, got a deal." says Ronald sounding happy because it has been a really long time since he hasn''t read a Playboy magazine, especially since back in the real world, they cost almost double the value of today, after a platform that let you post nudes and porn got banned in 216 countries.


    Ronald rises from his table, leaving his hot tea alone, that wasn''t even drink yet at the table. He walks a few steps to his sniper rifle he used to took down a few creatures this morning, before the others were coming here. He takes the sniper rifle on his right hand, goes to the small table who was over the gun, takes from there five bullets, and goes back to his position. As he walks in a fast rhythm, he can hear the bullets flying to the sky.


    The second horde is coming.

 Vikings Way - Part 22

    ***


    "What''s that?" asks Edla hearing the sounds of hundreds of bullets flying to the heads of the zombies outside the base.


    "Don''t worry about it, ma''am." says a soldier in his 20s. "the Second horde is coming. We can take care of this."


    That soldier in his 20s he was put on duty to keep an eye on the survivors who have fled here. All of them are inside a tent, and are waiting for a commander who is now at the bathroom. When he will come here, he will ask the survivors some basics questions, and then he will fill an application for requesting a helicopter to get here, and fly the survivors away from here, to the nearest boat on Sweden that is promising them, it will deliver to the nearest artificial island can keep them safe until this whole apocalypse will be over.


    " Are you sure your squad or unit can take them?" asks Artur to the soldier, then he raises his arms up. "I am not saying you guys are failing. After all, you have very good arsenal on your hands."


    "And that is not everything, old man." says the soldier trying to sound stronger. "We also have helicopters, tanks, submarines, ships, and anti-crafters on our display."


    "Awesome." say Artur impressed. "But how did you guys afford this?"


    "Afforded?" asks soldier. "Most of this was given by the Governments when this thing would happen."


    "They knew this was going to happen?" asks Sigurd shocked.


    "It was a probability, sir." says the soldier. "But, we have handed it great."


    "Great?" asks Sigurd getting up from his seat angry. "Millions of people have died due to these zombies. Maybe billions, and you are telling me, you have handed the things efficiently? I saw dozens of my people, from the other side of Sweden, being killed by the monsters outside, killing themselves and killed by other humans."


    "Sir. I require for you to calm down."


    "Calm down?!" asks Sigurd being angry, making Artur, Edla and Charly., feeling bad because of the breakdown Sigurd is experiencing. "You calm down! You people have let this secret hidden, and you did not try to tell the civilians? And what was the cost? Millions of people have died because of you! You army people have let this happen."


    "Get a hold of yourself." says Artur approaching Sigurd.


    The man was about to smack the poor old man by the name of Artur, but thankfully, he dodged the hit by leaning about three centimetres. He looks t Artur, and at his people he run so hard on the last three days. The Leader of this group is confused by his behaviour. He takes a deep breath and he tells Artur.


    "I am sorry. I-I-I don''t what happened to me."


    "Apologize taken." says Artur happy that Sigurd has started to get a hold for yourself. "You should be happy we managed to make it this far."


    Sigurd did not even want to talk further about this. He sits in a chair, quietly and waiting for the commander to come back to the tent. The soldier was not even fazed by this which shows this soldier has made countless interactions with these kinds of people in almost a month since the started of the first infection.


    A soldier enters the tent, that person is wearing clothes that show the man is the commander of the army. This commander is an old man, having a normal looking assault rifle type of gun tied to his back like in video games of shooter.


    "Hello, survivors!" says the commander. "Welcome to the base of Squad Haga ¨C 72! I am Commander Nigel, and I am the Leader of this Unit."


    "Hello, Commander Nigel!" says Charly to the man in chief, who is looking curiously at him. "Can I ask for a favour?"


    "Sure thing. I mean, all of you wanted to leave this place, right?"


    "Not all." says Charly, which makes the commander and the soldier looking in disbelief.


    "W-What do you mean?" asks the Commander to Charly. "What is your name?"


    "My name is Charly. Only Charly." says the Viking man. "I come here to take a functioning truck to help my group of people that are situated on the other side of Sweden, close to the border of Norway in fact."


    The author''s narrative has been misappropriated; report any instances of this story on Amazon.


    "Borders don''t even exist nowadays, kid." says the commander Nigel to Charly. "So, what is your group of people like?"


    "We are normal humans, that always wanted to leave this quotidian and boring life we''ve had and have now. All we wanted is to play a fun role, just like I do, as a Viking, who is having the task of resupplying the village I live with my sister."


    "You have a sister?" asks the commander. "Where is she?"


    "She is keeping the truck with supplies safe."


    "What is her distance?"


    "I think almost three kilometres from here." intervene Artur, which makes the Commander anger by this old man who jumped to the question he was asking Charly.


    Carly nods his head to confirm the answer of the old man.


    "Okayˇ­ Listen here. We cannot send you a truck. Because we do not have one at the moment. But, we are thinking to expand the base. After this whole attack is going to be finished."


    "And when it will be?"


    "In about ten or fifteen minutes." responds the soldier to Charly. "If it is as dangerous as the first wave."


    "Good. Thenˇ­ Would you mind if I go and make it end sooner?"


    The survivors and the Commander with the soldier did expect this answer from Charly, who is drawing his sword from the sheath. after a few seconds of no response, Charly decides to leave the tent and go outside, to fetch some heads of the zombies. Artur decides to leave his seat and go at Charly, asking him a question.


    "Why are you going to kill the zombies? Military can handle them?"


    "I am bored." replies Charly looking in the man eyes, showing he is serious about this.


    Artur couldn''t do anything. He let the man alone, go to the gates where the soldiers are fighting their hardest and wasting precious ammos on the big horde of zombies. Charly only have on his arms a sword, and a riot shield he found on the grounds as he was walking to the stairs of the walls.


    "Should we try and help him?" asks a soldier to Sigurd.


    "No. Let him do it." says Sigurd looking back at Charly, who is taking the stairs to get near the soldiers. "This man. Has showed in the three days to us that he is a super human. He and his twin sister. Are an unstoppable duo in their weird world they live in."


    ***


    On the walls of this fortress established by the squad who came here almost three days ago, several of soldiers are taking their hands-on weapons and are firing at the zombies heads. All of the soldiers over there are using fire weapons, rather than crossbows, bows or anything that can be considered a melee attacks, because on this wave that is having maybe thousands of zombies, attacking from distance is strictly advised.


    When Charly arrived on the walls, none of the soldiers mind his presence because all of them are busy by killing the zombies who are down there, and ravaging the small cars who were put in the formation of a barricade. He looks down, and notices hundreds of zombies, or as Charly and Charlotta are calling them "dead souls" are looking at the soldiers, with their dead eyes. As these creatures are marching in slow and fast peace, they proceed to die, tens by tens due to the bullets they get hit with.


    Charly is looking around this fortress, and he sees on the wall, a shotgun, that was put there and with the safety off. Charly grabs the shotgun, and he inspects. This a double barrel shotgun, which an amazing weapon in low distance. In movies, video games and comics, a weapon like this, can literally blow the person''s body.


    "You there!" says a soldier coming over to Charly. "What are you doing here?"


    "I want to help." says Charly to that soldier, who is examining his body, finding confusing the costume Charly is wearing.


    "Whatever. Just help us clear this zombie horde!"


    "Right on." says Charly going to the nearest empty machine gun.


    When Charly found a machine gun, another soldier came by, to tell him this is his machine gun and left it empty because he was running low in ammo. But Charly, saw the person, took the big ammo box, put it on the machine gun, and he blazes all the bullets to the zombies heads. This made the soldier next to him impressed by his skill of headshot. the soldier is looking at Charly.


    "Who are you?"


    "I need ammo here!" says Charly instead of telling his name to that sodleir, who decided to obey the orders and bring to this man wearing Viking clothes another bo of ammo for machine guns.


    After Charly got the box of ammo, he puts it to the machine gun, and starts to throw all of the bullets from there into the monsters that are approaching this place. He sees the waves of creatures are starting to slowly fade away from here. Charly also sees a zombie from class F. And the other soldiers are spotting it, who is marching slowly to their base, and he is at somewhere at 150 meters.


    "We got a class F!" yells a soldier to another three soldiers, who are going on a big weapon crate, one of them opening up with a crowbar. "Bring the RPG!"


    The soldiers have successfully opened the crate that was standing there, and kept for moments like these. One of the three soldiers, takes the rocket launcher, he inserts the rocket that was handed by a colleague of his, and he is shooting that rocket, after about nine seconds of aiming, toward the Class F monster.


    The rocket flew very fast. Charly sees the rocket, flying toward the creature, who gets hit to his head, and that hit, made a big explosion, which destroyed the other near creatures of the Class F. It killed five zombies plus one Class F. And the soldiers, with Charly, don''t know the creature that just got murdered was in fact, the one who murdered the poor girl earlier.


    "This technology." says Charly playing his role. "Is awesome!"


    The soldier next to Charly, was questioning, whether or not to follow the orders of this said "civilian", but on a apocalypse, would a civilian be considered a civilian?


    After a few moments, the squad of soldiers who were on duty to defend the base, has finished their jobs. They destroyed the second and last wave who could''ve killed all of the base, if it wasn''t for their extremely heavy and in number arsenal they''ve got their hands on.

 Vikings Way - Part 23

    The weird looking person that is wearing Viking clothes, is outside the base, he and with other six soldiers are looking at the corpses of zombies they''ve just murdered a while ago. They all need to make sure these things will not raise from the ground, and surprise them later. Charly is the only who is using a sword to pierce the heads of the creatures that were not shot on the head, while the soldiers are using knives or machetes. A form of that squad of soldiers is also Ronald.


    "That dude sure is weird." says a soldier next to Ronald.


    "Huh?" asks Ronald who was busy to stab the head of a child zombie, he looks at that soldier, who''s pointing with a head movement to Charly.


    "That dude is weird, man. It is a good to let him in?"


    "Probably." says Ronald looking at the man wearing Viking clothes.


    They saw him how he stabbed the head of a zombie woman without any hesitation. They''ve also seen him stopping on the head of a baby zombie without any remorse. A thing that some soldiers would not do it because this is something sinister and will invade their dreams or provoke them insomnia.


    "You!" says another soldier to Ronald, who was looking at Charly up till now. "Don''t stay like that! Come. We have to kill these creatures for good!"


    "Yes, sir!" says Ronald to that soldier.


    These people continue to stab the heads of the zombies who weren''t killed for good for the next hour. It was hard, but they have to do it, otherwise, they would be attacked again when this will happen.


    Charly walks toward the creature that is classified as the Class F, the huge monsters who got easy blown up by a rocket, he notices the thing is having both of his legs destroyed, but the head and the arms are still intact. Charly decides to put a complete end to this zombie. He takes the helmet that was protecting his head, and he tries to do a stab to the head of the zombie. He notices the sword cannot pierce the head by one move, so he tries again, again, and again. After thirteen stabs, the sword gets through the zombie head, touching the brain of this creature as Charly could feel he gets through the squishy part of the brain.


    "It was already dead." says a soldier approaching Charly.


    "I wanted to make sure he stays dead for good." says Charly taking his sword out from the head of that creature.


    Charly continues his job he has taken by himself.


    ***


    Meanwhile, on the commander tent, three soldiers and the Commander of this squad, are standing on their tables, and are interrogating the survivors who have come here. First, they decide to interrogate Artur since it is the oldest person from this group.


    "Name?" asks Commander to Artur as he takes his pen out and a piece of paper.


    "Artur." says the old man, not stating his family name.


    "Occupation in the past?"


    "Tow truck driver." responds Artur looking around in curiosity.


    "Family members alive?"


    "All gone." he says after a while.


    "Past home?"


    "G?teborg."


    "You''ve come all the way here with your team?"


    The author''s content has been appropriated; report any instances of this story on Amazon.


    "No. I was on vacation at Karlstad before all of this happened. I meet the two members of my team in a warehouse, and we stayed there for a few days."


    "I see." says the Commander noting some things.


    "After that, we decided to leave the warehouse away after hordes of zombies have covered the city and news of aerial strikes are coming all the way from there to Uppsala. We''ve fled to Vattern for a few days, after that, we''ve run to Uppsala, and there we meet the Viking who is outside and his sister."


    "I heard he has relatives." says Commander noting this information on the paper. "Anyway, how many members were you before on the warehouse?"


    "I think we were almost thirty. Most of them have probably died or fled this country with another squad from the military. Or are on their own. I don''t know exactly, we were only five people when we left the warehouse, and from those five, only three of the initial group have survived. But when we meet these people, I mean the Viking guy and his sister, we decided to go here, at Samara."


    "What are the names of the other survivors?"


    "First names?" asks Artur, and after he got an approval from the Commander he says to him. "Edla and Sigurd."


    "And names of fallen people from the group? If it is possible."


    "Royˇ­ and Ebba."


    "Okay. I have all the information I need it. After two days, you and your team are going to be escorted via a helicopter to the nearest artificial island built by the Organization. As soon as you get there, you will be assigned a house where you will live with the other two friends of yours and assigned a job." he looks at Artur. "You might be a valuable asset as a tow truck here in the Army if you have experience. How many years if I am not rude?"


    "Twenty."


    "Twenty years'' experience? You sure will be a valuable asset as a scavenger or as a blocker."


    "Blocker?"


    "We use the broken vehicles to create walls where we can stop or slow the zombies down. The job of Blocker is a tough one, but he is one of the most important parts of a soldier squad. For now, we have three people assigned as Blocker and I say, they are doing a good job."


    "Is this a pay for this job?"


    "Only a house and three meals a day with one litter of tap water. Don''t be too greedy. We have a lot of people on these islands run by the Organization who are keeping folks like you alive and well."


    "I understand but what is the name of the Organization?"


    "Honestly, I don''t know. They have thousands of different names, but we decided to call it Organization in general. These are the people who prepared the gear, the islands and guides against an apocalypse event like this." says the Commander to the Artur. "Now. You should go and rest. And don''t worry about safety. We can handle it from here."


    Artur leaves the tent of the commander. The moment Artur left the ten, Edla enters the tent, while outside stands Sigurd, waiting for his order. When Artur was about to go and rest on his tent, Sigurd comes over him.


    "How was it?" asks Sigurd curios at Artur who doesn''t seem concerned or nervous.


    "Honestlyˇ­" says Sigurd looking at Artur. "I will love living in one of their islands."


    "How so?"


    "They give food, water and a house to all three of us."


    "That''s great!" says Sigurd happy. "But, what about Charly?"


    "Charly?" asks Artur concerned and he is looking at the gate. "He will most likely remain here. Leaving only the three of us to enjoy the house. And they''ve also assigned a job to me."


    "What job?"


    "They think I might be a great addition as a tow truck driver to their army squads to create blockages by using these cars." he points at the dozens of the cars that are outside the walls of this base. "This will definitely work." he says looking at a damaged truck, that is near the walls of the base, where two soldiers made their bed in the cabin. "By using that truck, we can make almost an unstoppable gate to normal zombies."


    "But not for a Class F." says a soldier leaving the tent and who overheard the conversation of Artur. "You have seen how dangerous are those things."


    "Yes, partner." says Artur acting as a friend of the soldier. "We''ve run from one of these."


    "But with a cost." says Sigurd to himself, almost making himself feel down.


    After a few minutes, Edla come out of the tent, she feels happy about all of this, and she looks at the walls of this base. Then, Sigurd follows the procedure and enters the tent, she goes over to Artur.


    "How was it?" asks Artur to Edla.


    "Great." says Edla. "I will be joining the military."


    "Military." says the soldier who did not leave the tent exterior zone. "Welcome!"


    "Appreciate it." says Edla.


    "Be careful, because the training will be hell for the next two weeks. We even got volunteers who only came here to help us move things, but some of them ended up helping us. Here it is a man that used to be a carjacker, now he killed a lot of zombies with grenades launchers and machine guns. I think his name was Ronald and was coming from Holland."


    "Holland?" asks Edla. "This far?"


    "He is a member of Artificial Island Haga. And you three are going to be assigned to an artificial island built not very far from Gotland."


    "Gotland?"


    "Yes. We are going to use the island as a new base. Probably the first big base where we can create a friendlier environment for the survivors."

 Vikings Way - Part 24

    After a few minutes of talking about their plans to moving, Artur notices Charly coming from the outside, with his blade all bloody. The soldier, when he looked at the man wearing traditional Viking clothes, he felt goose bumps. He saw no fear in the man eyes. He looks over to the people who were with him in this journey, he sees all of them without any fear or retaliation, like they know him for ages and not only three days.


    When Sigurd left the tent, he is looking at Charly. Sigurd opens the tent door for him and he tells him he can go and talk to the commander in order to request something. Before Artur could''ve entered the tent, the soldier stopped him, and tells him to let the weapons outside. Listening to the orders, Charly lets the blade he always uses, the dagger, and a pistol to the soldier and he enters the tent.


    "What is with this dude?" asks the soldier surprised to the three people.


    "He''s on his own world. Don''t mind him." says Sigurd to the soldier.


    Inside the tent, Charly is prepared to face the man in charge to this squad and asks him a favour. The favour is going to be beneficial to Charly community on the other side of Sweden, at the borders of Norway. And to be sure this deal will be done, he is preparing at least fifty percentage cuts from the cargo to the Army Squad.


    "Hello, sir!" says Charly in English to be sure the Commander in front of him does speak English.


    "Hello!" says the Commander in Sweden language. "Don''t worry about language. I am Sweden, just like you."


    "Great." says Charly on Swedish language. "I come here to make an offer."


    "What offer are we speaking?" asks the commander to Charly who sit on the seat were Sigurd, Edla and Artur sit earlier.


    "It is about one truck that is crashed at a few kilometres from here. It is kept safe by my sister and it contains probably a few thousands of kilograms worth of supplies such as food, clothing and things that can be used as a close combat weapons." he looks at the other three soldiers, who are near the commander, they are listening to this offer Charly states. "I understand your people need resources so I am making this deal. I offer fifty percentage of the supplies inside the damaged truck in exchange for a working truck with gas."


    "Fifty percentage, you say?" asks the commander interested in this deal. "How about twenty?"


    "Sir." says a soldier to the commander.


    "It is a precaution measure, Soldier Abraham." says the Commander. "We need supplies in the worst-case scenarios where we will be lost communication with the Artificial Islands. If it happens like last time when some of our communication device became useless for a few weeks." he looks at Charly and he asks him. "Twenty? You in?"


    "Make it eighty. I have people in my community that need supplies."


    "You have a community?" says the Commander sounding interested in this information. "You are many over there?"


    "Yes. We are a community that decided to dress as Vikings and try to disconnect from this world. Most of us are acting as Vikings to play our role, or we just dress as them and stay together, protecting our world."


    "There were people from the group of yours that want to come to Military areas?"


    "No, sir. Most of them decided to throw away this idea and do their thing, until everything comes back to normal."


    The author''s tale has been misappropriated; report any instances of this story on Amazon.


    The commander is looking at Charly, he doesn''t believe there are people in this world who decides to rely on themselves, rather to rely on the technology. But this is also not so surprising for the commander, he knew there are people who would rather ignore military help and defend themselves with anything they got on their hands against these brain-dead creatures. He looks at Charly, and after he sighed he tells him.


    "Fine. Eighteen percent remains. And a working truck." he looks at the soldier who was talking earlier. "Soldier Abraham!"


    "Yes, sir!" says Soldier Abraham doing a salute to the commander.


    "Go and get a working truck to this base. Immediately!"


    "Sir! Yes, sir!" say Soldier Abraham, leaving this tent.


    Before Charly could have left his seat, he looks at the Commander and says to him.


    "Good luck! May Odin be with you!" as he does a salute to him in the Viking style to show respect, and he leaves the tent, following the Soldier Abraham.


    "That person is insane." says a soldier next to the Commander.


    "He is not." says the commander. "He is living on a different world from us."


    The commander raises up from his seat, he walks outside the tent, and he goes for a walk around the base, checking to see the status of this palace at their soldiers and survivors. But he decides to abandon his plan because outside there were some raindrops falling from the sky, and this indicates one of the weird scenarios were zombies rises up from the ground, are running around, and then are falling "dead" on the grounds.


    ***


    The plan of taking a truck has to be stopped for Charly because the raindrops have started to drop at a faster rate and heavier indicating a possible rainstorm approaching to this zone. Earlier there was a rain, but a small one, most likely insignificant and impossible to make the zombies raises from their ground and walk around. Charly remains on a tent, were a few soldiers have gathered around him, and from those soldiers is also Ronald with Charlie, all of them wanted to hear a story from him and the other three survivors.


    "ˇ­And we faced at least hundreds of zombies." says Charly telling the eleven gathered soldiers with cups of water, drinks and food near a lamp. "But me and with other seven Vikings, my kind of people, have killed the heads of all of those zombies."


    "Wowˇ­" said a soldier amazed by the adventure Charly has gone through. "You and only the seven people have killed all zombies from Uppsala?"


    "Not everyone." says Charly taking a drink from the cup of tea it was served by him. "You see, even if you kill all zombies by the heads, they still are going to get up. So, we tried to burn them. It worked as you can see. But, we only used it once."


    "Why?" asks Ronald to Charly.


    "Burning something on a huge scale requires resources, and we didn''t want to expend this fire to take over all of the city. Plus, we could''ve by mistake kill some unlucky survivors."


    Charly is looking at his teammates, who have also listened to his story on how he, Charlotta and other five Vikings have killed hundreds of zombies only using axes, swords and hammers. This is the second time they listen to this story because the first time it was told to them when they were trapped in that building, and blocked by some hordes of zombies who were heading to this base.


    "Where did you get the sword?" asks a soldier to Charly, seeing the sword of the Viking leaning to the wall next to the body of that man.


    "I''ve crafted myself." says Charly. "It took me almost four days to made it, but the moment I made by tenth blade in my life, I decided to keep it for myself."


    "You are making swords?"


    "Also, maces, shields. knives and many more weapons."


    "You could also make weapons for us?" asks Ronald raising his hand and looks at Charly.


    "Probably. I mean. I can try, but materials for swords are hard to be found. Maybe someone from the group of yours can speak with a commander or boss, or whatever you call it. To make a trade with us. I will give you weapons in exchange for food and clothing. If you''d can."


    "How about two crates medium size of food." says Ronald.


    "How much is that?"


    "About thirty kilograms of food each."


    "I am interested." says Charly toward Ronald. "What''s your name?"


    "Ronald."


    "Ey, Ronald. When you are interested to get some good crafted weapons, come over near the border of Norway. And bring food or whatever we might consider great addition to us."


    Then, the commander enters the big tent where every single soldier has entered it. He is soaked in rain and is feeling tired. He goes over to the table were some food is placed for the people of this base. He takes from there a few apples and leave the tent, heading to one of the empty buildings that are used as a house. The commander did not even try to speak to the soldiers when they saluted him or stated their status on the base to him. This behaviour was normal for the soldiers. The commander is always like that before the sunset comes.

 Vikings Way - Part 25

    ***


    Meanwhile, at the place where Charlotta is placed by her brother to protect the valuable cargo, she observes the corpses of zombies, who were moving on a fast speed and running like chickens without heads. Charlotta saw how some zombies were screaming into the sky as the raindrops were falling, and she saw some undead zombie type, feasting on the zombies, and becoming full zombies. She knows these zombie types, she also knows their behaviour when it is raining.


    A few of the dozens of the zombies, have remained on their feet when the rain stopped, and this number of zombies was very dangerous for Charlotta because if a zombie smells her, this will be game over for her. And if she would try to attack them from the truck, this will end badly for the special cargo and she will be trapped. So, her only logical solution it is to abandon the cargo and try to make them follow her into a trap. But what trap?


    After she looks at her surrounding, she sees only a road with damaged cars, a few abandoned buildings that are still standing, and a small dense forest where it will be dangerous for anyone to venture in. Charlotta doesn''t have many options to chose from. In fact, she would be safer if she would run from the truck, and hide at a building until her brother will come back with a working truck.


    Charlotta takes her sword in the left hand, while with the right hand, she opens the door of the truck, slower and carefully to not make any noise. After the door was opened wide enough, she leaves her seat, and she closes the door, slowly and careful as she was opening it. But, when she closes it, a small creak was heard, and this, have alerted at least six zombies near the truck, who are already walking on normal speed toward Charlotta.


    The Viking woman, seeing the zombies approaching her, she runs away from the truck, into the nearest building, that looks like a factory. Charlotta runs for almost one hundred meters, and when she gets near the fence, she climbs it up and jumps on the property. When she landed, she notices three zombies who were at fifteen meters from her, feasting on a corpse of a poor cat. Charlotta, uses her left hand and cuts the head of a zombie, then she stabs the second zombie in the head before he turned his head to Charlotta, and the third one, got decapitated like the first one. Charlotta switches the sword to the right hand, and she goes to the door of the backside of the factory, that is having the text written "Employees only!" in English, stating this factory was an international factory built for immigrants (a thing that is happening in the future and not in current years on Sweden).


    Charlotta tried to open the door, but it is locked. So, to make her escape, she goes to the front door. She takes the right side, not wanting to risk it with the cat that may be going to become a zombie animal (zombies animal are frequent, but cases are extremely rare because zombies are eating more animals than humans who are still alive). The moment she got on the front side of the building, she encounters another three zombies, and she kills all three of them with three swings of her sword. Looking at the front entrance, she observes the building having the entrance destroyed by a semi-truck who rammed into the front building, leaving a gigantic hole for anyone to enter.


    "ˇ­crap." says Charlotta to herself looking at the semi-truck, she then has an idea. "Please, Odin! Let this vehicle has enough battery!"


    This tale has been pilfered from Royal Road. If found on Amazon, kindly file a report.


    Charlotta goes over to the semi-truck.


    She was about to open the front door of the cabin, but she stops after she sees inside the cabin a zombie who was smashing his face on the window. This scare Charlotta so bad, she dropped on the floor, covered in blood and guts. She looks around her, and sees on the floor countless corpses, all of them butchered and killed in the head either by a gunshot or by a stabbing. None of the corpses were decapitated.


    The girl is looking at the semi-truck, she sees how the zombie inside the truck is smashing his face on the window and with his hands. That thing continues to smash his head into the wall, not realizing this will be killing him. Charlotta let him do this, rather than waste her energy to kill this creature. She has much more urgent business to do, and that includes five zombies who are coming over to the factory.


    Charlotta decides to engage in a combat fighting by using her only weapon, her beloved sword. She manages to decapitate three zombies in the fight, and stab the last two heads, right on the place where a stabbing like this would stop their brain functioning for good. After she does the killing, she hears the window of the semi-truck break, and the shattered pieces fallen on the floor. But with the break of the window, the alarm of the semi-truck has happened, and Charlotta needed to run to the upper floors, and hide into one of the rooms over there.


    Going upstairs was easy for her, because there weren''t any zombies to make her run difficult. She managed to get on the first floor of the building, and upon getting there, she observes a room that is labelled with a white etiquette as storage room. The woman enters that room, but upon entering the room, she can smell the horrible stank of decayed corpses. The woman immediately left that room, fearing there are zombies who would get up on their feet and attack the poor Viking cosplayer.


    She searches for another room, but she got unlucky for three times because one was locked, and other two were having zombies who were about to get up to their feet and turn around toward her scent.


    Charlotta runs to the hallway, wondering if she will ever find any way to hide away from the creatures on the ground floor and the first floor who are getting up. When she thought the fate would let her die, she sees an open door that is having a label written "Boss''s Office". Charlotta enters the room, and there, all she sees is a corpse of a soldier who killed himself long ago. Charlotta inspects the body on the floor - after she locked the door by using a table she pushed ¨C where she found three smoking grenades and a flare to alert helicopters or aeroplanes, also a revolver, with only eight bullets.


    Now, Charlotta doesn''t know a smoking grenade is a useful weapon on this apocalypse because a weapon like this can make the zombies stop from moving and stand still for the next five to twenty minutes, making them ignoring their human target or any target that triggered their senses of attacking. Hence, she decided to toss the smoking grenades away and keep the flare because this would be more useful when the night will come.


    And the revolver she found, it only has five bullets in the magazine. Charlotta checked the storage room of the bullets the gun provided. She continues to search the body of the corpse, but she doesn''t find any bullets in his pockets or on the backpack tossed on the floor. The backpack was completely empty.


    Charlotta raises to her feet, she goes over to the window. She is surprised to see she is in the view of the damaged truck she abandoned a few moments ago. The girl also feels scared when she sees about a hundred of zombies heading toward the factory, and trying to break the fence she jumped over a few seconds ago. The girl looks on the sky, and she can see the sun about to go down.


    "Charlyˇ­ Please be quickˇ­" she tells to herself to calm down as she looks down the window to the big horde of zombies coming.

 Vikings Way - Part 26

    ***


    A few minutes later, on the base located at about six kilometres, Charly and with two more soldiers are searching for a working truck into the area they cleaned up a few moments ago by the huge numbers of zombies. While they are walking, they see a lot of zombie corpses, who are definitely dead, and a few corpses of animal that are on the state of decayed.


    "Be on the move." says a soldier to Charly, who stopped for a bit and looked down on a kid corpse that was once a zombie.


    Charly shook his head to remove this image of the dead kid from his mind, and carried on into his walk.


    The group of two soldiers and with Charly, are looking were they are stepping because it might make a zombie wake up from his slumber, and grab their feet. These soldiers are trained to do this task and cautions, while Charly, on the other hand, wearing shoes that are made out of metal and with bear fur, he didn''t care about getting a bite from one of these creatures.


    After about ten minutes, Charly and the soldiers sees a truck, parked into an open garage. They look at the garage built by bricks, noticing, the thing is still standing near another three garages. Zombies are seen walking down the alleyway in their direction, about seven to count. Charly and the soldiers, are taking out their melee weapons. When the zombie saw the people, they weren''t walking no more, they proceed to run toward the survivors.


    "We have runners." says a soldier with his hunting knife prepared. "Stab their heads with the knife. Don''t use weapon. We cannot risk on attracting ore zombies toward our location."


    "Yes, sir!" says a soldier taking his hunter knife.


    The seven zombies were later killed by the three humans. Charly managed to stab three zombies heads, and decapitate one of them at close distance to him. They were close to touch his face and skin because these things were faster than any other zombies he encountered so far. The two soldiers, were also trying their best, and managed to kill the remaining three zombies with some small knives compared to the one Charly is holding in his hands.


    The three survivors, not wanting to waste more time on this, they quickly run to the garage. Upon arriving to the door, a zombie jumped from under the truck, pinning a survivor, and biting his neck. The soldier took his knife and he stabs the Jumper head, and after that, he looks at his teammate, his whole neck and face, all covered in blood.


    "Raheemˇ­" says the soldier to his friend who will become a zombie soon. "I''m sorry."


    The alive soldier, takes out the knife, stabs the head of his comrade who died in the hands of a Jumper zombie. He stays like that for a few seconds, until his comrade ha died and with no way to come back to hunt him. The man raises to his feet, and he looks at the truck, then to Charly.


    "Is it working?" asks the soldier.


    Charly goes inside the truck, he sees a key laying on the floor. he takes it, and insert it to the engine. After he turned on the engine, he can hear the sweet sound of a motor working. The man looks at the soldier happy, but then, he sees him doing the "Okay!" sign and he leaves him, running back to his base, carrying the dog tag of his dead friend to bring the bad news to his squad.


    This story has been taken without authorization. Report any sightings.


    After the man left, Charly, looks on the direction the base was supposed to be, and he tells it to the people over there, even if they cannot hear it.


    "Stay strong! You are the ones who will bring humanity back to their tracks."


    After this small speech, he goes to the location he has last seen his twin sister, Charlotta. He prays to God, and hopes that she is alright.


    ***


    About twenty minutes later, Charly spare truck takes a turn and arrives to the place where is the other truck that got in a horrible crash. He stops the truck, he and the other soldier notices hundreds of zombies going to the building where the alarm of that vehicle continues to run even after almost twenty-five minutes since activation. The alarm was so loud, it attracted even zombies who were near the base or close to the borders of the other city.


    "What''s happening?" ask the remaining soldier looking scared at the building.


    "Charlotta." says Charly seeing his twin sibling breaking the window of a first floor, and waving a flame to Charly direction. "She is there." says Charly with a smirk. "Clever girl."


    Charly leaves the truck, and he tells the man, who also leaves the truck.


    "We have to load the truck. As fast as we can."


    "Yes!" says the soldier and he help Charly loading a few crates from that truck cabin into the spare truck.


    This operation was going on a fast peace. Charly has taken as many crates and did as many of the roads he can, but he barely put at least twenty crates in the truck, while the soldier, trained for years in this scenario and put on a much harsher background, he barely helped Charly to put nine crates into the truck of Charly and Charlotta.


    After Charly saw almost thirty crates in the vehicle, he looks at the soldier and he says to him.


    "Thank you for help. Now get on the truck!"


    "Huh?" asks the soldier confused.


    "We have to help Charlotta." responds Charly going fast into the truck, he gets on the driver seat, and without hesitation, the man changes into reverse and goes reverse for about one hundred meters to the gates of the factory where Charlotta is hiding.


    The cabin of this spare truck is big enough to help Charlotta jump from the first floor and lands on it. And as Charly approached the fence, he did not notice a zombie who saw him and run to him. But, before that zombie would try to get to the door, a bullet goes through the head of the zombie, killing it instantly. The person who fired the bullet was that soldier who helped Charly come here. The soldier used a normal assault rifle type of gun to kill a normal and fast zombie type.


    That gunshot was loud enough to make some near zombies come after the noise, just like chicken when they see expired food thrown to their feet or on their areas. The soldier, decides to run from there, and waste his precious clips with about thirty or so bullets on slow and fast zombies. the man is running on the direction where his base is located.


    The spare truck Charly is driving, it breaks the fences of the factory. Then the truck hits the wall of the factory. Upon hitting the wall, his sister, without warning his brother, she jumps from the window, and falls on the cabin. Charly heard someone hard landing on the cabin of the truck, and without thinking, he goes forward, and presses the acceleration pedal until it hits the ground. The truck leaves the place, letting the slow zombies walk after them, and letting the jumpers try to jump after this truck.


    "Good job, brother!" praises Charlotta her twin brother.


    "You have also done an amazing job!" yells Charly taking his head off the truck cabin, and looking up to his sister who is holding as hard as she can. "We will stop until we will leave the city, until then, admire the view."


    "I have." says Charlotta looking back at the factory getting further and further away from their view.


    As the spare truck departs away from the abandoned factory, Charlotta looks on the other side, to the road that connects to the forest sides. They have to take these roads because going on the highway is a trap, especially for them carrying about twenty-nine creates worth of food, and letting the rest of thirty crates on that place. Charlotta observes down the road, a few corpses of zombies who were killed a while ago by them, raising back to the ground. She was confused at first, but she saw a few zombies who weren''t cut deep enough to their heads.


    "Home." says Charlotta looking at the sunset. "Here we come!"


    "Aye!" yells Charly who heard his sister saying that line and he looks on the road he is driving, and trying to avoid the zombies on their way.

 Vikings Way - Final Part

    ***


    Two days later, back on the base rebuilt by the squad from Haga, a helicopter lands to a helipad made by them for this type of vehicle. The helicopter that has landed on the helipad is a type that was used back into the time when America was having wars in Afghanistan, but this one had a few more upgrade to this, like a few more windows made especially for machine gunners and snipers, and a few more seats to keep the rescued survivors.


    At that helipad, three soldiers, together with Sigurd, Edla and Artur, are coming, all carrying nothing to them. Not even a backpack with a supply, a weapon or any spare clothes. These three survivors are wearing the same clothes they wore since they have come to these safe places.


    The soldiers are entering the helicopter first, then after that comes the survivors, taking the backseats where the other three soldiers are sitting and are carrying the supplies and some weapons. These soldiers are holding something these three people never thought they would see in today''s standards of the apocalypse, working smartphone.


    One of the soldiers is looking at the three survivors surprise and he tells them.


    "Unfortunately, these things are useless at this time. We can only communicate with the nearest bases. And that base we can communicate with is the one we will be deporting you three."


    "I see." says Edla to that soldier. "How long it will take?"


    "About three hours." says the soldier next to the other one who told her about the smartphone.


    "Great." says Edla and she looks at Artur.


    "Are you excited?" asks Artur.


    "Yes. You?"


    "Kind of. I just want a place where I can sleep for the next three days. And hoping this was a nightmare."


    "Ain''t we all wished this was only a nightmare." says a soldier looking sad at the window.


    "ˇ­ Sorry." says Artur to that soldier.


    After three minutes, the pilots of the helicopter are walking into their seats, they turn on the engine of the place and are about to rise in altitude without the consent of their passengers. As the helicopter was taking altitude, the passengers and soldiers are buckling their seats and looking at the ground. They see the ground getting smaller and smaller with almost every five seconds. They can barely see the soldiers moving barrels with gasoline and woods to burn the bodies from the streets near the base they''ve worked at for the next days to sustain.


    When the helicopter got a good altitude to fly, it flies on the fastest speed he can toward the base built near Gotland, an island that was known by more people to be a part of the Baltic Sea, presenting an area of three thousand eighty-three point seven kilometres square in area, having a length of one hundred seventy-six kilometres and a width of fifty-two kilometres. It also has some Norse mythology facts, and that is this island was populated by two servants of Thor, Roskva and Pjalfi.


    On the base, Ronald is looking up to the helicopter, he waves at it for a few seconds, then he goes back to his duty as a soldier to burn the corpses of the fallen zombies and the soldiers who have died in the defence they were putting last night.


    The narrative has been taken without permission. Report any sightings.


    Last night a battle has struck the base, but it was a hard one because it took them when the designed watch tower was having the first symptoms of air infections. He became a zombie due to the air virus that affects mostly the smokers or the people that presents medical problems won their respiratory system. And this attack has killed at least three soldiers who weren''t such a big asset to this squad, but they were still humans.


    ***


    A few minutes later, on the city Vato, the helicopter that transports the six people, is flying closely to the buildings. This was a concerning sign for the co-pilot, who is looking at his pilot who is directing the helicopter.


    "Sir!" asks the co-pilot seeing the pilot breathing heavily. "Are you alright?"


    The pilot did not respond, he was only heavily breathing like he was having some sort of heart attack or a grave sign of pneumonia. The co-pilot tries to say again, but then, a soldier, from the back seats, screams to the pilots.


    "Fly higher! Class F on sights!"


    The soldier spotted a class F zombie that has managed to get on the roof of a building and is throwing title roofs to the helicopter. Of course, the title roofs he was throwing was not even doing a scratch to the helicopter, nor more of them could hit the helicopter, but still, Class F is still a threat not to be ignored.


    The pilot did not respond to this call, he continued to fly to a lower and lower altitude. The co-pilot got scared, and decide to go to the pilot, who was not even looking at him, he only looks on the window, breathing as hard as he can. Then, the co-pilot touches the neck of the pilot, he turns him around, and he sees the pilot, eyes, about to become dead, just like these monsters. The co-pilot, takes down the safety belt from the pilot, he opens the door and throws the body of the pilot, making everyone from that helicopter scared and almost having a heart attack.


    "Everything is alrightˇ­" says the co-pilot taking the pilot seats and looking down to the original pilot body, falling from about three meters altitude into the streets of hordes of zombies. "The pilot was close to become a zombie. But we managed to-"


    Then, all of a sudden, a car fly toward them. The car was thrown by a Class F from the ground. And that car, hits the helicopter so hard, it almost makes it explode mid-air, but somehow, it destroys only the control part, letting the backside of the helicopter intact. Now, the helicopter is crashing toward the grounds. as the helicopter is falling down on high speed, the soldiers and the three survivors are breaching for the impact.


    After the fall, the three survivors are leaving the back side of the helicopter, one by one. First was Sigurd, who was having only his left arm dislocated, Artur who suffered a few head injuries and Edla, who got a severe case of left leg with bones destroyed. Sigurd takes Edla on his back, and Artur, sees the bodies of the soldiers, all three of them, who are dead on the impact.


    The crash can be described as one where the seats of the three survivors are where the helicopter has crashed, and the seats of the soldiers, are about twenty to thirty steps away from the helicopter, in the north-east direction. Their seats have somehow detached from the helicopter in mid-air crashed into an empty truck with an empty trailer. Now these people haven''t crashed far from their salvation, they crashed on the dockside, where one ship is still there.


    The three survivors, without thinking about the dead soldiers and their co-pilot, who goes missing, they run to the dock, to get on the remaining ship there. When they got inside the ship, that was at somewhere at least five hundred meters from the crash site, they see nobody in the ship. Artur goes to the wheel of the ship, while Sigurd escorts Edla to an empty room where he would treat her wound.


    Right when Artur was about o leave, he observes the co-pilot, running to them, holding his right arm, and bleeding so much blood from his body. The old man lets the co-pilot inside the ship, and before you know it, they sail away from this nightmare of the world, to the survivor''s new home. Now, Artur was put on the wheel by himself because he is the only one from this group who is having experience is navigating into the sea.


    And from this day on, the three survivors have never been seen on their homeland.

 Blood Tribe - Part 1

    Six hours after the first infections, on Ibadan, a city from Nigeria, Africa, things are in chaos, like in some parts of Europe and Asia where the infection of this virus has made a lot of causalities in such short time. Human corpses laying on the street of a city who once was filled with people doing their everyday life, and surviving as they can in this poor country. Creatures known by the term of "zombies", walking on the soil of this Earth and eating dead corpses or humans who were trying to flee from this city.


    The entire city of Ibadan is in chaos. Police of this city were trying their hardest to put a stop to this chaos, but the attempts were unsuccessful, because most of these groups were not prepared for this chaos. Even though the secret Organization handed them the plans for this chaos, most of the people on justiciary system were not having enough funds to make this arrangement.


    For now, this city is burning, and filled with walking corpses who once were humans with souls and brains.


    ***


    On a small building who once were people from Africa and outside of Africa worked together to combat the disease around the world, or normally known as a centre used to research on viruses and find cures, a group of scientists is hiding in fear in a room, for about six hours, since this pandemic has started in Africa region. The building is known by the term ACEGID, full name being African Center of Excellence for Genomics of Infectious Diseases.


    The room is filled with human corpses, all decapitated, who were on a stage to become like the creatures from Europe and Asia, walking creatures who are hungry for human meat. Lot of blood is seen in the room, fresh blood, which indicates the corpse there were recently beheaded by the group of scientists, who are staying in one place, shaking and holding wooden bats, pencils, chairs and one of the people from the small group is holding an incision knife who is used to make incisions in surgery operations.


    The group of people are numbered by four researchers, two of them are foreigners from a region of England, while the other two are from Africa. One of the female researcher is holding a chair to protect herself. She looks worried at a corpse who seems he cannot be moves since he got his entire skull destroyed by a hard object. The female researcher, holding the chair, wears a lab coat with a card displays her name. "Tina" is the name. Only Tina.


    "Tina." says the other female researcher on English, worried on her friend who just now smashed the head of a zombie who were crawling to them. "Are you okay?"


    "Y-Yes." says Tina breathing heavy and letting down the chair.


    "Check the window." says a researcher of Nigerian language to his male researcher friend.


    The researcher does as the other person asked him to do, and he walks to the window, where he takes off the curtains they used to cover from the light. The person looks down, then he backs off in terror after he saw the state of the outside.


    "Ja." says his male researcher friend. "What happened?"


    "S-See for yourself." says the researcher in terror, shaking uncontrollably and falling on the floor, on his back.


    A survivor from the group, the foreigner from England, walks at the window. He takes a glimpse over there, and looks scared at the abomination it is happening outside. Not even in his wildest dreams he would be seeing a terror like this. People, that looks like the corpses who are like in this building, are tearing up apart poor people who were trying to escape from this area.


    If you spot this story on Amazon, know that it has been stolen. Report the violation.


    Two other researchers are coming closer to the window, the ones who were not looking, but now they feel the urge to go and looks at the disaster it is happening on this moment outside their secure workplace.


    A person, that looks like a zombie from the movies, growls at a pack of people who are having the same behaviour as him. That person then, turns around three hundred sixty degrees, and sees a small child, who is looking shocked. The researchers don''t know the kid is looking in shocked at what used to be his big brother, and the other pack are his parents, all transformed into a state called zombies.


    Of course, the researchers know about this infection who will soon rampage the Asia and Europe, but they never know it will spread this fast. And make any civilian near the explosion turns into a mindless meat eating monsters in just a matter of seconds.


    The kid is then jumped by the other zombie, who just straight up jumped from the third floor. That zombie crushed the poor kid, and eats his whole face. While the body of the zombie who was looking at him, growls, and runs at him. But not to save him. That zombie grabs the weak legs of the kid, and munches into it.


    The screaming of "help!" and "Stop it, Nana!" couldn''t do anything other than alert the other mindless creatures, who are walking to the body of the kid, to hop[in they will have a chance to eat a part of his body.


    "Jesus." says the female researcher in English looking at the window.


    "What is this?" asks the second African researcher to the lady that is next to him, in English language.


    "I think it was one of the viruses that we were conducting research on it for the next three weeks. Bu-But. How do they escape from here?"


    She looks at all three researchers, who are all shake their shoulders. None of them know how a virus, that was kept so secure be thrown into the world and provoke chaos.


    Before can anyone say anything else, a thing nobody has expected it happened. The two African researcher, were the ones who were very close to the window. The female researcher, by the name of Tina (as it is written on her lab coat), was next to the desk, with her other friend researcher, Ana (as it is written on her pink lab coat). These two girls sees two zombies, who are breaking the window, grab the next of the two researchers males simultaneously, and drags them off the window, from the fifth floor.


    The girls couldn''t do anything to save them., all they could do was to scream after them. It was too late for Tina, who was the fast one, to catch one of the researchers, who was taken from them in the span of five seconds. Tian looks down the broken window, and sees the corpses of the two researchers, their colleagues, who are now eaten by the zombies outside. Ana joins her, and the moment she saw the scenery, she left, vomit and cry at the same time.


    Tina leaves the window, shaking, and on the verge of fainting. The girl falls on a chair, and she sits there for the next few minutes, until she faints. Her friend researcher, Ana is still on the floor, she looks sad, cries and shakes uncontrollably. The fact that she lost a man who loved her in the next five seconds, makes her wanted to jump after him. But, she knows she cannot do that. Her will doesn''t make her wanted to commit the unthinkable.


    Tina decides to rise up, and she goes over to her friend researcher, tries to wake her up, but it is to no use. She knows, since childhood, Ana was always easily scared and she would faint anytime when she sees blood for about one to three hours.


    Tina looks around her, she sees her ex-colleagues, all decapitated by one of the male researchers, who were dragged out of the window and thrown in the streets. She cannot believe a thing like this is actually happening, especially on a time when the things have started to become more peaceful in terms of global politics. A third world war was just avoided, but now, this thing they are facing now, she believes it might be worse than a world war where humans were fighting against humans. Now, this will be something where humans will team and try to find a way to stop this apocalypse.


    "How did this happened?" says Tina looking as she cries at the corpse of an old researcher, who is still having his head attached, but a hole on his head. "It was you, Mr. Grace?... You always say you wanted to change the world. Is this your undoing?"


    Then, Tina hears a growling, coming out of the door who is locked and blocked with desks and chairs.


    "Hallway" says Tina looking terrified. "How many are there?" she takes a look at Ana. "We stay here. We stay here. Until we will find a way to escape."

 Blood Tribe - Part 2

    ***


    A few hours later, a big explosion noise that was so strong, it awakes Tina, who slept for a while. The girl, seeing all of this wasn''t a dream, and by that it means the dead corpses of her co-workers on the floor. The girl goes over the window, checks the window and she see a truck with a few survivors Africans, who have stopped in front of this zone, especially in the parking lot of the building, not because it wouldn''t matter, but because the driver wanted to be a little respectable towards the zombies.


    From that small truck, three survivors are getting off from there, all armed with guns and machetes. Tina observes the people are looking at the doors, and before you know it, they shoot the creatures at the door, who were somehow still trying to break in, not realizing there are countless broken windows only here. All the two survivors are running inside the building.


    Tina leaves from the window, she is afraid of what will happen to her if the survivors would be turning out to be smugglers. She is having all sorts of dreadful imagination dreams that would happen to her if she would be held captured by them. The girl is afraid of this, but, she will later realize these people are not the normal traffickers of Africa, they are her and her friend salvation.


    After almost a minute, a knock is heard on the door. That knock was loud enough to even wake up her friend, Ana, who was fading into unconsciousness because of the blood phobia she possesses since childhood. Ana had this phobia because of a bad memory about her poor baby dog who died in a tragic accident caused by her own Father who was backing up from the garage and ran over his poor body while he was sleeping. Such a tragic event, but this would not compare to what is happening today. The people who knock on the door, are saying to the other side.


    "Is there anyone?" he asks in Nigerian, language that thankfully, only Tina knows to speak it fluently.


    "Yes." responds Tina in Nigerian. "We are here. Alive."


    "Are you infected?" asks the same voice.


    "No." says Tina approaching the door, and was about to take out the furniture she used it to lock the door from the other side. "Who are you?"


    "We are a group of survivors who got sent here by the Military to retrieve a few documents." says the same person. "They do not tell us which ones, but they are probably referring to the things outside. Now, would you open the door, please?"


    "How can I be sure I trust you?" asks Tina in Nigerian.


    "Look. We are not here to do any harm to you. We have come here with a mission. And you are probably the only key. Now, hurry up an open the door! This place would collapse anytime!"


    If you stumble upon this narrative on Amazon, it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it.


    The woman, still not being sure about this, she decides to open the door to let the survivors coming in. The moment the two survivors come into the room, they looked around, having axes and baseball bats in their arms, rather than guns or anything that can help them kill zombies from distance.


    "What are your names?" asks Tina to the two Africans.


    "My name is Malcom!" responds the survivor wielding a firefighter axe. "And the guy over here is Ga."


    "Hello!" says the survivor by the name of Ga to Tina.


    Both of these survivors are a bit surprised to see the woman here wasn''t African just like them. They were one hundred percentage certain that the remaining people in this room are by chance the same nationality as them due to the fact they speak a fluent Nigerian. Anyway, the guy by the name of Malcom, asks Tina another question, after he told her about the other two survivors, Zeny and Romy who are in the jeep outside.


    "Where are the documents about this virus?"


    "Virus?" asks Tina concerned, then she says to him. "You mean Z Project?"


    "Whatever the name is, I need that document for the military." says Malcom, and he shows to the woman a dog tag from Military of Africa. "Now you believe me?"


    "Y-Yes."


    "Then let''s move." says Malcom seeing Ana taking a brown laptop from her desk and handing it to Malcom. "What is this?"


    "All the important files are in there. All containing the Z Project." she goes over to another desk, where she takes a pipe in her hands. "I am coming with you."


    "Of course." says Malcom to Tina, then he sees Ana, who is still sleeping. "What about her?"


    "She fainted."


    "Then wake her up. We have to go, now!"


    Malcom and Ga, hearing the footsteps and specific growls of zombies, they left the Tina over there to wake up the other researcher. They kill the zombies from the hallway by bashing their heads with their melee weapons. Tina goes over to Ana, she moves her, she slaps her face slow, and tells her to "Wake up!".


    Thankfully, Ana wakes up, and she sees Tina, who tells her they have to go because the rescue has come for them. Ana gets up from her seat, and she goes together with Tina and the other two survivors downstairs. As they descend the stairs, they face about three zombies who were trying to go to them, but Malcom and Ga, were putting them down to their misery by hitting their heads with their weapons.


    As they got to the ground floor, all the four people are running toward the jeep where the other two survivors, also Africans wearing soldier armours, unlike Malcom and Ga who are wearing t-shirts with dog tags and camo cargo pants, looking more like mercenaries than soldiers. The other two survivors, are taking zombies down by using their guns, which are AK''s.


    "We gotta move!" says Zeny to Rony.


    "Just a second!" says Rony after he bashed the head of a zombie with a hammer, and he runs to the jeep.


    Rony goes to the driver seats, while Zeny, decides to go to the mounted machine gun on the backside of the military jeep. The jeep can be described as one that presents five seats, plus a big truck that is specific to those jeeps made by the company Chevrolet and where Americans from rural zones are using it to farm or to delivery. Anyway, the jeep has a machine gun mounted on the backside, where are also five boxes with ammo for the jeep.


    The driver backs the jeep from the parking spot until he can turn around. After the driver made a successfully turned, he drives ahead to the nearest stop where Malcom explained to the two researchers in the car there is a plane waiting for them. He also told them that plane is in Lagos and are waiting for them. While the jeep continues to move ahead, the gunner on the backside of the jeep, is killing every zombie that is in proximity with the jeep.

 Blood Tribe - Part 3

    ***


    Later this day, at the Lagos Airport, also known by the full name by the locals as Murtala Muhammed International Airport, is a big airport that was built around Second world War by the man by the name of Murtala Muhammed, who was known as the fourth military ruler of Nigeria. This airport was back in the day owned by Federal Airports Authority of Nigeria (FAAN) and it was public, now it is filled with corpses, creatures like zombies and the entire airport is on fire.


    The jeep who carried about six people are stopping in front of the airport gates, who are completely broken. The driver of the vehicle, together with the other survivors are looking in shock at the barrier who was easily shattered by the invasion of the zombies that had taken place. Malcom, looks around, and instead of saying something, he accelerates and enters the area of the airport, driving on the airplane lanes. This could have been illegal to cross, but now, the apocalypse has started and everything is in ruin, the things don''t matter anymore, even killing someone would never put you in jail.


    The jeep is going fast speed until he arrives at a hangar, and there, the people are getting off the car, and they see over there a plane, that can still work. Malcom is running to the plane with Remy, while the others are back, near the jeep, worried about the two people.


    Malcom was about to open the plane door, but then, he hears a growling noise from his left. The man turns around, he bashes the thing head with the axe was holding on the other head, hitting the head pretty hard, and making him not move nor twitch anymore. After he has done the lethal hit, he tries to open the plane door but he notices it is locked.


    "Dammit!"


    "What''s the matter?" asks Remy toward Malcom.


    "This thing''s locked." says Malcom pissed off. "And like hijacking a plane is not like a car."


    "Dammit." says Remy. "So. are we leaving it like that?"


    "None of us are having a pilot license." says Malcom, he looks at the planes and airplane lanes. "Plus, this place is a total mess. The soldiers from this place have most likely gone away from here." he looks at the building that was used to control the aeroplanes communications and their road, he sees it on fire. He looks over the building where people are coming in there to take their plane tickets to travel around the world or stay in here with hours or even days for a plane to take them across the continent. "The whole place is on fire. And I don''t think we have any communication to the military, besides their second option."


    This story is posted elsewhere by the author. Help them out by reading the authentic version.


    "So, are you going to take the second option?" asks Remy scared. "You wanted to travel all the way toˇ­ the dock?"


    "There is no other choice."


    "How about the port?" asks Tina coming over to the two males who are speaking Nigerian. "ˇ­heard a port must be here nearby. Maybe we can take our chances."


    "Should we go there?" asks Remy toward Malcom, who seems to be the leader of this group. "I mean, the port must a better idea than going all the way to the other side of Africa."


    "Other side?" asks Tina toward Malcom. "What do you mean?"


    "You know there is an island by the name of Kinshina. Ever heard of it?"


    "No." reply Tina.


    "It is very far from here. At about thousands of kilometres from here. Probably the safest way to arrive there would be by boat. And I think Lagos International Port would be our solution. Now where is it?"


    "Heard of it." replies Tina because that question was addressed to her and not to Remy. "Do you think there would be a ship?"


    "Only one way to find out." replies Malcom who is going to the jeep, then Remy and Tina are following him to the jeep.


    As the people are walking toward the jeep, they see a few dozens of zombies approaching the hangar gates. They get quickly in the jeep, and Malcom, going back to the driver seat, he steps on the gas. He let Zeny, who is at the mounted machine gun do his thing, and by his thing is to kill the zombies who are coming after them. The madman killed about hundreds of zombies with the machine gun as the jeep was driving off from the Airport while was trying to avoid blockages and a helicopter who was close to crash on them. Thankfully, that helicopter crashed missed them by almost two hundred meters and it did not explode on the impact, it explodes after three seconds, killing the potential survivors of that helicopter.


    "Poor peopleˇ­" says Ana looking at the window in English looking at the crashed helicopter.


    "Ana." says Tina in English toward Ana, concerned to her behaviour. "Are you alright?"


    "I am." replies Ana to Tina. "By the way, where are we going?"


    "To Lagos Port Complex." replies Ana to Tina, then he tells in Nigerian to the passenger their new destination, which even Zeny, who was busy looking around for the zombies approaching and reloading the machine gun.


    "How far is that?" asks the passenger, Ga, to Malcom.


    "About twenty kilometres." replies Malcom driving the jeep and avoiding any blockage consists of a zombie, stingers or a few birded wires who got destroyed by the hordes of these monsters.


    "It''ll be an hour, sir."


    "We have to risk it!" says Malcom to Ga. "Our choice."


    The man sees a blockage that is blocking the entire road, so he takes a turn and drives a said "shortcut" that will make them late by at least one minute. As the journey was going by, the group only saw hordes of zombies eating human corpses, running around, standing still, climbing the buildings or resting on the ground. They''ve also encountered destruction, humans who were running away and were trying to fight zombies by they failed miserably. Like a teenager who was trying to kill a zombie with a normal brick, but five jumped on him and ate him alive. Ana saw this and was about to faint again.


    "Be strong." said Tina at that moment.


    "I will." replies Ana trying to act strong, but Tian can feel her whole body shaking.


    "Why did this happened?" asks Tina to herself looking at the building they are passing by who is on fire and is falling down.

 Blood Tribe - Part 4

    Later this day, about almost an hour of difficulty in riding on the disaster roads of Nigerian, and trying to escape from hundreds of zombies who were running toward them, the group of six survivors have made it to the Dock, but to their demise, upon arriving to the entrance, all of them are looking in shock, as they see the entire entrance destroyed, countless corpses lying around either killed by bullets, fire or straight up cut their limbs.


    "Noˇ­ No. No. No." says Malcom running to the dock worried and on the verge of crying.


    He enters the dock property, and upon arriving there, he sees the last ship, that left the dock about twenty minutes ago. He sees how t goes far away from the land toward South America. Malcom looks at the ships around this place, and they see all of them, besides that one who is still leaving, on fire and sinking into the ocean.


    "My God." says Tina. "No."


    "He left." says Remy in Nigerian, and he looks at Malcom. "Should we try to alert them?"


    "It will not work." says Ga instead of Malcom who is looking distressed at the ship heading away from here. "That ship is already gone. It cannot go back."


    "And why not?" asks Remy to Ga wondering.


    "It''s because turning a ship around is not like a car. You cannot just move the steering wheel, and expect the shit done."


    "Um. Guys." says Ana looking a bit worried at the ship, in English. "That thing is on fire."


    The group is looking at the ship who just left, now they see the ship is on fire and they can hear the screams from about six kilometres away from them. The group also see how some people are jumping out of the ship or are taking boats by themselves. The group of six members are looking scared at the ship and also a little bit relieved because this thing would have most certainly needed their lives if they had found a way to get there earlier.


    The group remains there for a few more minutes, until they are kicked back to reality when they hear zombie''s specific growl approaching to them. The survivors, seeing a hundred of zombies approaching them, they run to heir jeep, where Malcom, who is taking the driver seat again, he steps on the gas and he drives his group out of there. As the jeep departs from the Port, Zeny and with Ga, are shooting the zombies. Zeny uses like always the mounted machine-gun, while Ga, got a hold of an assault rifle with six magazines on a couple of corpses laying on the port''s bloody floor. The group also took a few weapons from there, since they need firepower for their journey.


    "Change of plans!" says Malcom who drives the car away from port and goes to the highway. "We are going to Kinshina island."


    "Where''s that?" asks a survivor, Remy, to Malcom. "In Japan?"


    "No." replies Malcom to Remy who is on the backside with the female researchers. "It''s an island too far away from here. Kept in security by the Organization!"


    "Organization?" asks Tina. "What''s that?"


    "I''ll explain later! Right now, we have to get out of here!"


    Malcom drives the jeep into a road, and avoids any zombie on the road by either taking the one with concrete or on the desert specific sand Africa continent possess. As Malcom drives the jeep, Zeny and with Ga are doing their job by killing the zombies who are closely approaching their jeep. While Ana and Tina are looking around the windows, afraid of even thinking of staying in a military jeep with tons of armour.


    You might be reading a stolen copy. Visit Royal Road for the authentic version.


    After a few hundred meters of driving and dodging cars on fire, corpses and humans running around and screaming on their top of their lungs for help when the jeep was passing by the traffic. The jeep driver, seeing an immense blockage on the run, he turns around, and he goes another direction, but then, someone jumps on the jeep, and that person who jumped is a human who is covered in third degree burns and with his clothes almost gone, only a pair of trousers who are barely standing. The man who jumped on the windshield and falls on the ground. The jeep stops right after he was close to run over the head of the man.


    "Stop!" yelled that man in Nigerian who was about to be ran over. "Help me!"


    The driver of the jeep, Malcom, manage to ignore the man, but the man was persistent and he decided to jump to the jeep again, but the jeep did not stop. The man was running over the jeep. He was so focused that he did not notice the zombie who run after him, and the other one who tackled the man out of nowhere. Tina looked behind to the backside of the window to the poor man who is getting eaten alive by zombies. She can hear his agonizing scramming after he is eaten by the two zombies.


    Around of them, there are several of human groups who are running for their lives, others are getting eaten as they tried to run away, or one, who decided to jump right into three zombies to be eaten. The people in the car, are all shocked by this. so shocked, that Ga and Zeny have decided to cease fire and let these horrifying creatures do their thing.


    After about ten minutes of driving, the car stops in front of a blockage. That blockage was so big, not even Zeny, who is on the topside of the machine gun, couldn''t see the end of this blockage. It was like one of those blockages from zombie movies, but instead of American classic style cars, the cars there are totally taken from Europe or Asia via a second-hand app or by literally driving or flying over to the continent and buying the car.


    The survivors are all looking at each other, ignoring the people outside who are running from there, fighting the zombies or straight up getting eaten by creatures who were once human, and all these people inside the jeep, know what they have to do. They cannot remain here or drive this jeep further because blockages like this can happen all the time. And it''s also the fact he think was having only fifty litters of gas available, it was not even enough to help them get to Chad.


    Ana looks over to Tina.


    "What are we going to do?"


    "We have to walk." says Malcom taking from the backside, where Tina, Remy and Ana are, getting an assault rifle. The man checks his ammo magazine, and he looks over for a second, then he looks at his group. "Our only chance of getting out of here is by foot."


    "Are you serious?" asks Zeny from the top of the jeep.


    "Do you think I am joking!" yells Malcom to Zeny. "Now do a good thing and empty the machine gun ammunition on the things over the road!"


    "Great." says Zeny to feeling great about this, and he proceeds to shoot all the thousands of bullets from the machine gun to the zombies who are close and far away from the car. He is not upset because he has to empty the machine gun, the real reason is they have to go by walking to the base and the distance to that island is about thousands of kilometres, which is more than five to eight days of walking.


    The people in the jeep are taking weapons on their hands. Ana was the only person who kept her pipeline, and that is not because of a strategy to produce less noise. The girl is afraid of guns because of a childhood trauma. Tina takes on her arms a revolver and about sixteen bullets from the jeep. Remy arms himself with a machete and a pistol, while the two people from the fronts seats are arming themselves with assault rifles and small shotguns such as double barrel shotgun that Ga is having into his backpack.


    The group waits for the moment when Zeny will say he ran out of bullets. Which wasn''t long, because after three seconds when all got equipment with weapons, the man said from the top of the jeep.


    "No ammo!"


    "Go!" says Malcom to his group, and they leave the car as fast as they can, letting Zeny, jumping from that seat and running after Malcom, without any weapon on his hand.

 Blood Tribe - Part 5

    In the road that connects Benin City to Onitsha, a group of six survivors, four male Africans and two British girls are trapped on a huge blockage and they have to take it to foot to their next destination. The blockage is so big, that not even a truck would be able to move all the abomination these drivers made. And it is worse than the group though it will be because on this blockage, there are dozens of zombies and humans who are trying to escape and run away.


    Malcom leads the group of the five people on the road. As they continue to run on the road, they encounter all such of zombies from those who are crawling, walking and running to them. But, they have guns who can help them kill the target from the distance. But a gun on this type of apocalypse scenario, where zombies can be "controlled" by noise it is not such a good idea. Especially on this scenario.


    "There are too many!" says Zeny shooting a zombie with his gun from about one hundred meters who was climbing an abandoned semi-truck. "We have to keep ammo!"


    "Right!" says Malcom who quickly switch to his machete.


    The man, as he switched to his trusty machete, he easily cuts the head of an upcoming runner zombie who was close to tackle the man. That cut was so clean and so fast, it made everyone mesmerized by this. The zombie stumbles on the asphalt and hits the part of his body near a car tire, while the head falls on the ground, who is still moving.


    "He''s still alive?" asks Tina looking terrified at the moving head of that zombie.


    "The thing cannot die until we are destroying the brain." says Ana looking at the creature, then closing the eyes after Malcom stumbled on it with his boots.


    After this event, the group continue to walk further, jumping over cars who are blocking their way, dodging the ones with alarms, and killing all the zombies who are on their way with knives, machetes and axe. Even Ana made a kill of a zombie, by hitting the head of the creature pretty hard when he was following her on a slow speed. But after she has done a hit, Tina comes over, and stabs the creature forehead, making the entire cognitive motion of the thing to stop reacting forever.


    "Thanks." says Ana to Tina, feeling scared.


    "We have to go!" says Ana to Tina. "Snap out of it!"


    Ensure your favorite authors get the support they deserve. Read this novel on the original website.


    "I-I will." says Ana and follows her friend from childhood.


    The group continues to march forward, until, they observe the zone where the blockage is ending. The group is looking hopeful at the barricade that is approximately two meters away from them. Now, seeing the blockage is getting wider and wider, the group proceed to run toward the end, stabbing every zombie on their way, or pushing them down.


    After this run, the group got to the end, where there were about tens of barricades and the signs having word of "Quarantine!", "Keep out!", "Danger zone!" in Nigerian written all over it. Some cars were there, but most of them are empty and looted. Cars like ambulances, Police truck and even a helicopter that is still on fire, meaning a terrible accident has happened.


    On the street, the group spotted about hundreds of corpses resembling humans that are wearing formal, casual and non-formal clothes, and there were other who were wearing uniforms. Ana sees a few corpses of soldiers, who are having a big bullet wound on their head, especially on the forehead.


    "It is terrible." says Ana in Nigerian.


    "It is." responds Malcom feeling awful looking at the soldiers who were once members of their team or colleagues from the army training program. "My Go." says in English, then he speaks in Nigerian. "This event is worse than Covid."


    "It is." says Zeny looking at all the vehicles, then he hears a few zombies coming closer to them. "We have to run, now!"


    The man by the name of Zeny warns everybody about the upcoming zombies, where they take on their guns and start shooting the things. Unlike Ana who is going inside a car because she spotted a pair of keys in the contact engine. When she got in the car, she saw a zombie toddler on the backseat, growling and trying to reach Ana, but it cannot since it is tied too well to that seat.


    Ana, leaves the car with the baby still in zombie form and goes to search for the another one. She sees a bus that crashed and from there, leaves a woman with her arm cut. She was still human, a white woman speaking a foreign language and demanding help from anybody. Ana was at the distance of about twenty meters from her, she was running after her, but a zombie fled from the bus window and pins the poor woman down, then he eats her alive.


    The zombie bites the neck of that woman who is still screaming, then he bites the face of her, killing it her instantly. Then, the zombie proceeds to eat the woman slowly, while Ana is looking at her corpse being eaten. Then, the poor woman backs away, and goes to her group after the whole shooting has stopped.


    "We are good." says Malcom to his group in Nigerian. "Let''s go, people!"


    Then, the whole group starts to walk further on the street, killing every zombie that is approaching them with their machetes, axes and bats. Ana on the other hand, she is hiding behind the people and is looking freaked out at the things running to her, and at the corpses laying on the streets and ground. she is creeped by all of this, and she feels like she wouldn''t be able to handle this new reality of this anymore.

 Blood Tribe - Part 6

    ***


    After thirty minutes of walking, the team of six people have arrived at the entrance of Agbor, but when they got over there, they observed something strange. They see corpses all around the place, but no zombies walking around like on the street on the Benin City and on the Lagos. This is making Malcom feel nauseous.


    The man looks around, and then he spots a few houses on fire, but no noises indicating a screaming from a humanoid species nor a dead human that has gain consciousness to walk and the taste of human organs and brains. The people of the group, decides to walk further on the street until they get at an indicator that say the following thing: "Safehouse in Onitsha, distance seventy-four kilometres".


    "What does it say?" asks Ana to Tina who is as tired as her.


    "Safehouse in Onitsha," says Tina feeling the spark of hope coming. "seventy-four kilometres ahead."


    "We are going to be safe?"


    "Hopefully."


    The group of the survivors are going on the road that will lead them to the safehouse. To reach it there, they have to walk about 75 kilometres, which will take almost the entire day, but thankfully, their luck is on their side because Ramy spots with his eye a jeep, who has crashed recently. The team, seeing the jeep is at about two hundred meters from them, they are all deciding to go over there and see if they can take it.


    Arriving at the jeep, a zombie jumps from the car, close to tackle Ga, but Malcom was fast and he does a powerful swing with his trusty machete on that zombie head, which it almost slices it up open. That cut was made right to the zone where the skull is containing the brain and the functions that is helping the whole human body move. The zombies fall on the ground.


    "Thank you." says Ga to Malcom in Nigerian.


    The group checks the interior of the jeep. Luckily, there wasn''t any zombie in there, only a few blood stains on the jeep, two swords and three knives on the backseats. Zeny takes those knives and swords, and insert them into the trunk of the jeep. After he put them in the trunk, he gets inside the car, on the second row of the backseat.


    On the second row stays Ana, Tina and Zeny, while on the first row is just Ga, and on the other one is Ramy with Malcom. Malcom is the one driving the jeep, while Ramy remains on the passenger seat. As Malcom drives the jeep (who was having the key in the contact engine) to the safe zone, on the backseat second row, Zeny decides to start a conversation with the two people in his English that is consider by the locals of Nigeria implacable.


    Unauthorized use: this story is on Amazon without permission from the author. Report any sightings.


    "Are you two alright?"


    "We are." says Tina to Zeny.


    "Good." says Zeny. "My name is Zeny."


    "My name is Tina."


    "I-I am Ana." says Ana in English to Zeny.


    "Nice to meet both of you." says Zeny with a smile on his face. "The other people are Ga, Ramy and Malcom."


    "Hello." says Ga on their front, and he turns around his body to speak with the girls and his colleague. "You two are Americans?"


    "No." says Tina to Ga. "We are from Great Britain."


    "Thought you were some kind of people from America."


    "America?" asks Ana, then she looks at Ga. "Have you people contacted the United States?"


    "Is useless." says Ga to Ana, making her hopes of being rescued by Americans shattered into a million of pieces. "We tried a few hours ago to contact them, but no signal and no available communication." he opens his smartphone and he shows the girls that he cannot do anything on it that includes checking the internet or mass-media.


    "See? The whole network down."


    "I-I see." says Ana feeling sad. "B-But what we can do?"


    "All we can is follow their orders." replies Tina to Ana, and she slowly touches her hand. "Everything will be alright."


    "Yesˇ­" says Ana not feeling like everything will be alright and she slowly backs her hand away from Tina.


    Zeny saw this and he was thinking: "Are these two good friends of lesbians?", but then, Malcom distracts everyone from their thing, when he turns on the radio that is stating an important message.


    "Z Virus has attacked all of the Africa continent!" says an English voice. "This virus has also covered Europe, Asia and Australia into Red blood. Which means, sooner o'' later, North America or South America will have to face the army of undead creatures. Until then, proceed to the cities classified as safehouses where soldiers will be picking you all up and deliver it to safety. Nigeria''s posses only one safe zone, and that safe zone is going to be kept under watch by the Europe military and Asia military." then a brief a cut has happened to the conversation. "ˇ­ come to Benin to get a temporarily safehouse where a helicopter sooner or later will deliver the damaged people to the-"then the signal cuts.


    The radio signal was put down due to the electric crisis the people in Nigeria and all over the world are facing now? No, it is because their jeep got stopped by a spear who has somehow pierced the windshield and stabbed the stomach of Malcom. That attack sacred all for the passengers, and made Malcom lose control to the jeep which was in full speed, it crashes toward a car. And all of the people inside that jeep have jumped into an unconscious state and from their seats, making only Malcom, who was stabbed on the driver seat, slowly fading to death.


    Then, three Africans, all wearing some kind of plants to hide their "male organism''s jewellery" and all holding a spear in their hands, they are slowly walking toward the jeep with a mischievous smile. When these people have reached the jeep, it is revealed by the light these weird looking men''s are actually members of a tribe due to the weird tattoos they are having and speaking in an incoherent language.

 Blood Tribe - Part 7

    After a while, Ana slowly opens her eyes, revealing they''re all inside a tent, all six put on different places and tied up to their hands. The girl looks around, trying to adjust her eyes to the darkness this place offer. It doesn''t present any electrical lighting devices, it is just mostly dark. The girl smells the inside of the tent, and it smells horrifying. She cannot see what doesn''t smell so bad because outside it is already nighttime.


    "Tina." says Ana looking around scared. "Tina!"


    Ana couldn''t see where her good friend is, nor can hear her response. She looks around all scared of what might happen to her. She starts to accelerate her breath and calls Tina again.


    "Tina! Tina! Tina!"


    But no response coming from her friend. This makes Ana feel scared to what is going to happen to her, or to Tina. She already thinks of the worst things that will happen to her. Ana decides to calm herself down, by slowly breathing and thinking more of positive things.


    She tries to remember what was happened last time she was conscious, but all the things she can remember is the jeep crash, but she doesn''t know how long it was that. She tries to remember more things. She remembers the moment Malcom got killed by a spear who has stabbed the chest, but she doesn''t remember who shot it, but what is certain is, the person who stabbed their leader, has probably kidnapped all of them. But for what reason exactly?


    Before she could for more memories about the attacks that have happened, somebody enters the tent of the girl. That somebody is not a zombie, the one who have entered the tent is a naked old man, wearing the same weird jewellery the killer of Malcom wore earlier. Ana couldn''t distinguish the age of that man, but one thing is certain, the man come to her tent do not greet her in a human way. She realizes she is a great danger when that old man approached her, and violently starts taking her clothes off and yelling in an unknown language to her.


    The man wasn''t speaking Nigerian, nor any African language. The things he yields to Ana, as he slowly and violently striped her clothes away, were things that could be understandable by the people living in a tribe. The man, after he stripped the girl lower parts, which are pants and underwear, with a mischievous grin, he goes with his mouth on the lower parts to perform an action calledˇ­ rape.


    Ana tried to hit the man, and stop him from doing this, but the man was too strong. She tried everything by she couldn''t do anything to stop the man from impregnating her.


    ***


    In another tent, Tina, the other British researcher who got in the crash, wakes up on a similar tent Ana has woken up, the woman looks worried around it. Since this tent has a small torch put in the middle, Tina can use it to see her surroundings. The light of the torch was brighter enough to distinguish she is trapped in a tent, by herself. Nobody is there. Nobody except her.


    Tian tries to remember the last thing it happened before she got into the horrible crash. But nothing besides the impact into the SUV with the jeep and the moment Malcom was stabbed by a flying spear thrown by someone the whole gang did not see, even though it was flying on the windshield direction of the jeep.


    After a few moments, Tina hears someone screaming. She notices the screaming resembles the one of a girl. Then, she grows more horrified when she can recognize the screaming is coming from Ana, a childhood friend of her. Tina tries to leave the tent, but she is having her whole body tied up in some normal looking rope. The same rope Ana is tied up to the other tent where an old man is going to relieve onto her.


    "Ana!" yells Tina as she struggles to leave the pole of the tent she is tied up.


    Unauthorized tale usage: if you spot this story on Amazon, report the violation.


    After a few moments of trying to leave the pole, someone barge into the tent of her, and that someone is the same man who has raped the poor girl by the name of Ana. That same man, is going to do the same thing he has done to Ana. Tina tires to free herself, but she was not able to. But, when the man got to closer to her, Tina is kicking the groin of that man. The kick did not make the old man go down, it only made him angrier. She tried to kick him multiple times. Hitting him every time.


    The old man yells something, and two members of the tribe, younger than the man, are barging into the tent, and are holding Tina''s arms and legs for the leader of the tribe to commit rape on her whole body and impregnate her.


    The whole thing lasted about five minutes. When this ended, the tribe leader, puts his clothes back, that were retaken from the Ana tent by one of the tribes members who was holding Tina. After the man got dressed up, he yells at his tribe''s people something non-understandable to Tina, who''s speaking an impeccable Nigerian. Then, all of them leave the tent, letting Tina''s crying alone in the dark, and sobbing.


    She is having all of her clothes ripped apart, almost naked, and violated. Tina is looking around the tent, and she observes there is a small knife near the torch, but to her feet is about five meters from her. Tina tries to reach it, but she couldn''t reach it. After a while, Tina gives up on trying to reach the knife, after a tribe member come into the tent to retrieve the knife. But after he took the knife, he sees Tina is moving, so he leaves her alone, ignoring her calling for help in Nigerian language.


    The tribe member leaves the tent with the knife letting Tina screams in vain. When the tribe member has left the tent of Tina, he is walking to another tent, where the corpse of Malcom is stored together with the other five corpses. Upon arriving into that tent of his tribe, he sees the corpses of white and black skin colour people, all who were human once who were having a lovable or a miserable life.


    The tribe member looks around the corpses, and he sees how one of the corpses is having a different colour of the skin. He looks careful at the corpse who presents a black colour and with a green combination. The tribe member never saw a corpse like this. He approaches the torch closer to the corpse, to look it on his body as he notices the corpse is slowly breathing.


    Then, the corpse, opens his white eyes that presents no life, he growls to the tribe member, who is backing away scared shitless. The man says something to the corpse who is slowly rising to his feet. The man looks at the corpse, wondering what does he want, as he continues to raise to his feet. The moment he raised up, he looks on his right, and observes the corpse of Malcom.


    That zombie, seeing the cut on the Malcom body, he decides to ignore the sacred tribesman alive, and go for the Malcom who was still breathing and fighting to survive. Malcom, opens his eyes, and the first thing he sees, it is the zombie who is biting the face of his as powerful as he can. Malcom screams as loud as he can while the zombie takes out the nose of the man, and eats it whole.


    Other tribesmen''s emerges into the tent, and seeing the zombie eating the man they''ve killed it earlier, captured the other members of the team. A tribesman is going into the zombie, and when he was touching him, the zombie turned around, and he eats the neck of the tribesman. The tribesman tried to push him back, and yell at him. But the zombie pushes him down to the ground, pinning him, and continues to eat from his neck. He does about three bites, then another tribesman comes, and he hits the head of the zombie with his mace. The hit was hard enough to open the skull of the zombie and kill him.


    Five tribesmen are in that tent, with six more to come and see what is going on here. One of the tribesmen is going over to the body of Malcom, he looks at the body, and sees the liver bitten. That cannibal decides to take the liver and eats it. Then, he looks at the other tribesman and tells them something indistinguishable to normal humans. But the thing he says was probably something like "It tastes good", or "It tastes fine", or something related to that because the other tribesman is approaching the body of Malcom, and proceed to eat the organs from the body of Malcom.


    As they continued to eat the Malcom body, the man, who was still alive, sees this. He tries to say something, but then, he draws his last breath and he dies for good, while eleven tribesmen are eating his intestines, heart, stomach and everything else they can find. The tribesman remains in that tent until they finished eating the organs. Even the person who got bitten was eating the organs like he has no care in the world.


    After they finished this, all of the tribesman are leaving the tent, and are going to their tents to sleep because at this moment is nighttime. But not all of them are going to sleep, two of these tribesmen''s are going to keep guard on the tents where the girls are sleeping, and one of them is keeping guard on a tent where the Ga, Ramy and Zany are hold as prisoners such as the two British researchers.

 Blood Tribe - Part 8

    On the tent where the three males are tied up, the smell of blood and tainted meat is surrounding the entire tent. Ga is the first person who wakes up from the slumber he was having, he looks confused at his surroundings. The man observes a few decaying corpses in that tent, who are almost alive.


    The man sees how a corpse he is acting like a zombie. He looks horrified at it, not knowing what to say. For one, he feels grateful that thing is almost dead, while on the other hand, he feels like a monster to let this thing be alive since they are still alive but they are not able to come back to their senses (that''s what all the guides of this apocalypse in whole Africa are having written, while other guides presents different things to the biology and anatomy these things do possess). That one corpse, tries to reach Ga, but he is at about two meters distance from him, tied up and his whole legs cut off.


    Ga doesn''t say anything, not a screaming and not anything. He looks at his friends, who are all having a concussion. Their heads look like they got hit by hard wooden maces. But not deep enough to send the victim to God hands or cause any critical injuries, just bleeding on the head.


    "Where are we?" asks Zeny who wakes up and looks scared at Ga.


    "Don''t know." says Ga. "Last thing I remembered was the accidentˇ­Malcomˇ­ God dammit!"


    Zeny realize what does Ga meant by this. He too, has seen how his leader was stabbed on his chest by a wooden spear who was thrown from a far distance through a strong windshield, and managed to kill the leader. But these people don''t know their leader was transformed into a zombie.


    When Ramy got woken up from his slumber, he looks around and observes the corpses in this tent, who are trying to reach them, but all of the corpses down are either tied up, or are having all their limbs cut from the main body.


    "Where are we?" asks Ramy looking around.


    "This is probably one of the cannibal tribes we have been warned off from Military," responds Ga looking sad at those corpses. "these are probably one of the cannibal ones who are kept in safe by our "authorities". I feel sorry for the girls. If they are still alive."


    "We have to get out of here." says Ramy who tries to struggle for a few seconds but he cannot get out.


    "We cannot." says Ga looking at the door tent. "If the memory serves right, our deputy chefs warned us in these cannibal tribes might be around one hundred members or fewer than that. Some may be natives, or others are people who try to disconnect from the real world. Or something like that."


    "So, we are forced to remain here?" asks Zeny frustrated.


    This tale has been unlawfully lifted from Royal Road. If you spot it on Amazon, please report it.


    "No." responds Ga, he looks at the door tent. "We will wait for the right moment, then we will make our escape."


    ***


    On the next day, a few people that belongs to that tribe who earlier have captured five people, (well, six, if we are including the dead guy by the name of Malcom) are going off from their camp. Around six tribesmen have left the tribe to go hunting, while the other dozen remain in the camp and managing their establishment.


    The dozens of people remained on the camp can be described by the appearances to be either middle-aged men''s, old people or young people in their 20s. They can be taken down by the three soldiers working on the service of Africa Army if they were put in a cage, but when they are tied and woundedˇ­ Their chances of success may go down, but not exactly to zero.


    One of the tribe people, an old man, is walking slowly to a corpse as he is holding on both of his hands a wooden bowl that contains water and a rose in it. That old man, after he approached the body close enough, he says something that cannot be understandable by anyone who spoke Nigerian or any other language. This tribe have their own language and their own tradition.


    As the old man continues to speak incoherent, he is putting a few rose petals on the forehead of the human corpse, that has been bitten in the chest by what it looks like to be around six human mouths. The people in this tribe don''t know everything about the zombies, nor they realized last night, they fought a zombie. These people are thinking these entities are seen as lost souls or souls that are demanding revenge, or most likely for them, souls that need to possess a body to gain their vengeance. Their way of thinking may be fascinating for people outside the real world, but for modern people, who have been feed up by zombie''s genre in literature, movies, TV shows etc., are seeing different.


    After the man finished his ritual and throwing the petals to the person body, he looks carefully at the corpse. The old man sees the corpse trying to breathe for a few seconds. Then, in about a minute, the corpse starts to breathe slow. They, he opens up his white eyes. Those white eyes that have lost their colour and life. His skin becoming a green type. Then, that person raises up.


    The old man, in disbelief, he backs away, then, he smiles and he looks on the eyes of the zombie. He yells at him something that cannot be understandable, but it can be interpreted as something that like "God has granted life!". But before he can praise the Lord these tribes believe in, the zombie, after he got up on his legs by himself, approaches the poor old man, and tackles him.


    That zombie pinned the old man down, and without any hesitation, he tears the old man face apart. One bite it took to tear the left skinny check of the old man. A second bite it took to take the lips of that man. And a third bite it took to make the zombie come closer to the cranial box of the old man. Then, the zombie proceeds to make a fist, and it smashes the cranial box to pieces, destroying the last "shield" of the brain.


    The old man dies, as the zombie took his brain and munches on it like it is a goodnight snack after twelve shift hours for a person who works in China industry. The zombie is eating the brain of the old man, not a care to see a young tribesman person charging at him with a spear, and stabbing the back of the thing.


    Seeing the stab on the backside did nothing, the tribesman retrieves his spear, letting the zombie enough time to drop the brain, raise on his feet turn his body around, and look dead in the eyes of the young tribesman. That young tribe member is scared. Scared to face a creature that little no knowledge it is in the tribe culture. That young member of the tribe, holds his spear in a defensive position and waits for the zombie to come closer to him.

 Blood Tribe - Part 9

    ***


    Benin City, a city that is located on the southern side of Nigeria, possessing a number of populations that has been before yesterday on approximative number of about one million or so people, and surface of about one thousand two hundred four kilometres square. This city is also known to possess Benin Airport, where a safe zone has been established a small unit of the African Army regiment. The people in that regiment are numbered to be around twenty-four personnel, who are busy with handling the survivors who have come here, hoping to achieve a chance of survival.


    And on that place, a small group of foreign soldiers from America and from the Middle East have been sent here to pilot the dozens of aeroplanes for the usage of transporting the survivors to one of their safest artificial islands built by their Organization for this pandemic that has started to get their wings up like in Europe and Asia. On the group of foreigners soldiers, there is an African, who they''ve bought along to help them in speaking with the people from this country.


    The Nigerian who is with that team is going by the name of Mohammed Al. Is actually a Muslim from Egypt who worked as an airplane pilot on a commercial flight agency. He worked for about ten years on Wiz Air, now, he is unemployed because of this infection. Mohammed is a six feet one man, an experienced pilot, and the only person who can speak six languages in this small group of ten foreign soldiers. This man can speak Italian, Egyptian, Nigerian, Chinese, Greek and English like it is his own language.


    "Sir!" says a Nigerian soldier to the group of foreign soldiers who were about to embark on a military truck and head to Ibadan. "We need your pilot."


    "What did he say?" asks the leader of the group, an American in his fifties to Mohammed in English.


    "He says he needs me."


    "Asks him for what?" asks the commander of that small team feeling a bit irritated.


    "What for?" asks Mohammed to the Nigerian soldier.


    "Our pilot, Samil, has gone crazy, man. He shoots himself with a shotgun in the bathroom."


    "What?" asks Mohammed scared. "He was infected?"


    "We checked his body. And it had only one bite on the chest. The size of a toddler to be precise, sir!"


    "Shitˇ­" says Mohammed, then he observes the commander of the army is looking at him. He wants to know what does that soldier demands from him.


    Mohammed proceed to tell his commander what the Nigerian soldier wants from him. after he translated the demand to his commander, the man, not being too happy out this, he sighed and he tells him in English.


    "Go. Do what you have to do. We can handle from here."


    "Really?" asks Mohamed feeling a bit unsure.


    "Yes. Don''t worry. We are trained specialists for this kind of situation. Go and do your duty while we are doing ours to exterminate Ibadan. That is an order!"


    "Yes, sir! Yes!" says Mohammed who is leaving the military truck, he says their goodbyes to the other soldiers, and says to them in English. "Good luck! Be careful out there!"


    Mohammed is going with that Nigerian soldiers, both empty-handed, to a plane that is already filled with about one hundred people from Nigeria and dozens coming from other regions such as Chad, South Africa and even Sudan. Mohammed is going to the pilot seat, while that Nigerian soldier is going onto the co-pilot seat.


    The military truck, loaded with heavy weapons and eleven experienced soldiers is leaving the airport gates, driving past the Africans who are trying to the military truck and begging for help. The soldiers are looking at the Africans, they wave at them and says the phrase "Everything is going to be alright!" as they leave the zone. The civilians are still screaming for help from them and demanding the access to the safe zone. But there were some who decided to remain silent, and wait fin the line for their turn.


    Did you know this text is from a different site? Read the official version to support the creator.


    "Next!" yells a Nigerian soldier after he let a man who presents no bite advance further into the zone.


    The next person that comes in line is woman, who is looking like a person who was a while ago on drugs with alcohol. The soldier, before he was about to do the normal checkout, he observes how the eyes of that women are turning a bright white and was about to go on zombie mode. That soldier, quickly aim the AK''s to the woman face, and kills her in an instant on the forehead.


    Some of the people in that line are looking terrified at the woman who just got shot, while others are growing nervous because the pile of corpses on the grass is getting higher and higher as the soldiers, who got demanded to take the killed corpses and throw them into a pile.


    "Next." says the same soldier to the next person not minding the fact that he just killed the fifteen-person today.


    ***


    Seeing the stab on the backside did nothing, the tribesman retrieves his spear, letting the zombie enough time to drop the brain, raise on his feet turn his body around, and look dead in the eyes of the young tribesman. That young tribe member is scared. Scared to face a creature that little no knowledge it is in the tribe culture. That young member of the tribe, holds his spear in a defensive position and waits for the zombie to come closer to him.


    When it got closer, the young tribesman, stabs the neck of the creature, and this did stop him from advancing, but it did not turn off the brain. The young tribesman yells for "Help!" in that incoherent language. He continues to hold the spear to the neck of that zombie for the net minute, when a tribesman appears, and he hacks off the neck of that zombie with a knife made by the teeth of an elephant.


    Even with his head cut off, the thing continues to growl like a zombie that he is. The two members of the tribe, are looking terrified at this thing. Then, the same person ho saved this young man, he uses his elephant tooth to stab the head of this creature, stopping from moving it. He then, looks exhausted at the corpse of the old man, who is starting to get back. The two tribe members thought this is a God sign, but before they could smile, they hear the old man saying the same growl that the last zombie did earlier.


    The two members of this tribe are leaving the tent, and are running to the other tent, to advise their chief about this thing that just happened on this tent. Their Leader is on this tent, but... with a twist.


    Arriving upon their Chief tent, they found him in there. Standing to his back to the tent entrance, holding in his left hand an axe made by stone, and a dagger knife made by elephant tooth. On the ground, lays three human bodies of zombies, who are all finished. All three of them having multiple stabs in the head and on the backside of their skull. One of these corpses, is also having his head entirely cut off from its body, but it continues to move. The Chief, feeling the presence of his tribe members, he orders them to leave this tent, and take something from a tent. The two members are obeying the order, and are running to the tent where are the weapons stored.


    These the tribesman have taken two swords made by elephant tooth, three daggers, two bows and a set of arrows made by pointy rocks that cannot even kill a zebra from this tundra. With arrows like that, they would not even be able to hurt a lizard, even if they could try. They leave the tent, and are walking on a fast pace to where the leader waits for them, in the middle of this camp.


    Soon after they got to their leader, they hear a growl, coming from the tent here the old man and that corpse were. They look on that corpse, and they see the old members of this tribe, leaving the end, with his mouth having blood from the corpse he just ate recently. He looks skinner as he as before, and with his limbs about to fall on any given moment.


    The chief, not wanting to risk it, he takes the sword the young tribesman has taken and uses it to stabs the head of the old man, and then he beheads him. These attacks were a quick one, and it made the two-tribesman shiver in fear at the force their Chief possess. They look mesmerized at the body of the old man, and they wonder if he is still alive or is dead, but before they could get to their thoughts'' solution, the Chief is walking to the tent where are female hostages held.


    The moment he entered the tent of the two female hostages, the Chief, goes near them with the sword. These women are still hurt by the things they were done to both of them last night. Tina, demanded mercy from the Chief who was approaching them slowly with the elephant tooth sword, swinging near the pole of their, and cutting off the ropes they were hold at. He first cut the rope of Tina, then goes to the other girl, Ana.


    When they got free, the Chief, leaves their tent and goes to the other tent, where he will try to free the males hostages. The girls do not know what is going on right now, but both are looking confused to each other. They proceed to leave the tent, and slowly walk to the campfire, where the other two tribesmen are telling them in their own language to come to them and in gesture that can help the girls understand their intentions.

 Blood Tribe - Part 10

    On the tent where the three survivors are tied up and locked into this weird smell, Chief of the tribe, enters it, and sees all the three people slowly waking up from their hard sleep. Ga notices the Chief who decided to take a sneak peek inside this tent, then he sees him staring to get inside the tent, holding on his hand the sword it was made by using an elephant tooth.


    "Who are you?" asks Ramy in Nigerian, hoping to get some explanation from the Chief of his tribe.


    The Chief of this tribe, goes near Ga. He looks closer on its neck, he then, checks the rest of its body. After he did this quick check, he goes to the Zeny, where he does the quick check like he did on Ga. After this, comes Ramy, who remained still, and hold his strength to fight. He knows it would be futile to provoke this man at this moment, especially since it is locked up good, and in this tent there are a few dead corpses who were killed way before the infection has started in Africa.


    The Chief, not responding to the questions he is asked by Ramy, Zeny and Ga, he is going to one of the corpses from this tent. He takes a corpse who is having probably one meter and half. He drags him out of this tent, and walks to where the two girls have been escorted by three other tribesmen who remained here to protect this tribe who is starting to run down on its population from obvious reasons.


    The chief throws down a human corpse to the feet of the two girls, who are being held on the arms of the three tribesmen. The Chief, tells something to its tribesmen and it is not decipherable to the two girls. One of the three males from this tribe, is approaching the corpse, he takes a dagger and cuts the neck of the corpse. He was cutting like in salami or like in cheese. After he made the cut, he takes the head off from his shoulder.


    The two girls are sweating and are shaking as they saw the tribesman cutting the neck of that human corpse. Tina could already feel her stomach wanted to throw all of the food she has eaten since the beginning of this apocalypse has started. Ana could have fallen to its knees, but she is held strong by a tribesman who is looking angrily at her. He did not say it to her to stop shaking, but by his looking, Tina understand this man wanted her to stop shaking and remain on her feet.


    The tribe member, holds the head of the corpse on its two hands, and he shows it as a tribute to its chief. The Chief of this tribe, takes a small dagger from a second tribesman who is holding Tina, he uses the dagger to take out the right eye from that corps, then he swallows it whole, from the dagger. An image who was making Ana barf, then vomit. The tribesmen are ignoring this, meaning this is not the first time an event like this has happened.


    The Chief looks at the girls, then, before he could take another eye from the head of this corpse head, he hears a growl coming from a tent. The three tribesmen are looking at the tent. From that tent are emerging six zombies, were tied up to ropes, fried and with clothes almost burned up. The Chief yells to its tribesmen to go at it and kill them.


    All three tribesmen leave the Chief and the two girls who are tied to their hands. They jump on the corpses with their improvised swords and proceed to attack the zombies. But their attacks fail, and all three tribesmen are getting jumped by the is zombies. Not even one of them got killed in the head or decapitated. These three men have only stabbed the torso and legs, not head, neck or even eye.


    The Chief, looking scared, he goes to his tent, leaving the two girls be their food for zombies. Tina looks around, she hears screaming coming from the tent where the three boys are locked up, she runs to that direction with Ana, who is still trying to hold her together after the things she just saw with the head.


    Royal Road is the home of this novel. Visit there to read the original and support the author.


    "Help! Help!" yells Zeny from the tent who is being held.


    Tina and Ana are coming into the tent, there they see the three people locked up, tied to their feet and to their arms to poles like pigs who are going to be killed. Tina sees a small dagger from the tent at the tent, she tries to grab it with her mouth and she throws it to the back of the hands of Ga, who catches it and manages to cut the rope from the pole. After Ga managed to free his hands, he uses the knife to cut the ropes to his legs, then he goes to help the two teammates of him to free themselves, and the girls by cutting ropes who are keeping their hands.


    " Good. We are free." says Ramy in Nigerian to his friends. "Now let''s move from here."


    "Right back at you." says Zeny going after Ramy, leaving the tent.


    "What happened outside?" asks Ga in his broken English to Tina because Ana is scared to see all of those corpses there and leaves the tent, where the two soldiers are going to loot this tribe who is falling apart.


    "T-They were trying to feed us a corpse." says Tina scared by relating what just happened moments ago. "and nowˇ­ They have all diedˇ­ Everything happened so fast. First corpses came back and ate three tribesmen, then the Chief ran back to his tent, and heard yelling from there. Probably another zombie ate him."


    "Godˇ­ It is a miracle." says Ga looking around. "We managed to get saved by these lunatics. So, we better not waste this change by talking and use it to get to the Airport."


    He leaves the tent, then comes Tina, who remained there to look at the corpses of zombies there. She wonders what happened to Malcom, but she does know that he died in the car crash. She did not spot the body of Malcom, but she did see a small knife from the sand. She takes it, and there she found on the blade of this pocket knife, that is used by Spies or by any assassin, the letter M graved with black permanent marker. Tina takes the knife, thinking this belong to Malcom, she decides to keep it hidden on her clothes. The scientist woman leaves the tent.


    Outside, she sees how Ramy and Zeny are killing zombies by suing the elephant tooth swords from this tribe. They managed to provoke more damage than what could the actual tribesmen would do it. These two slashed all the six zombies, including the three tribesmen who were about to become zombies, by stabbing their heads with the swords.


    "We should keep those, man." says Ramy to Zeny in Nigerian.


    "You''re asking?" jokes Zeny to Ramy in Nigerian.


    Ga leaves another tent, by carrying a few guns, two AK''s and two-barrel shotgun on his back, together with a backpack that contains all the necessary ammos to make these weapons work on killing the monsters from distance.


    "The tent over there has an impressive collection of guns and ammunition. Meaning this tribe has captured more people like us in the past." says to Ramy and Zeny in Nigerian, who are already heading to that tent to take the remaining ammunition from there. "Do not take too much. We have a lot to walk to the airport."


    "We will walk?" asks Tina in Nigerian to Ga.


    "Yes." says Ga turning around to Tin, speaking in his broken English. "Our mission is-is to deliver you two to the destination. We will even walk a hundred of kilometres to the nearest airport if we would have to. Now you twoˇ­ Go and get some weapons as well. We have a long way to go."


    Tina goes there to grab the weapons from that tent, grabbing what she could carry and would seem important. Ana, who did not speak Nigerian nor could understand their conversation, remained frozen in that place, then she goes after Tina, who is walking to that tent.


    "What did he say?" asks Ana coming in the tent with Tina who is taking a look at a pistol with a suppressor.


    "To grab the weapons, we could carry." says Tina to Ana in English, not looking at her. "And walk to the airport."


    "To Zeindar?"


    "Zinder." corrects Tina. "But first, we have to know where we are at the moment."


    Tina takes a look at Ana, and she cans see her fear, as she is looking at an assault rifle. She almost forgot this girl was a victim in a school shooting in America many years ago. Tina, takes the handgun, with a few rounds of ammo, and leaves with Ana to the tent, who did not take anything from that tent. They walk to where the three soldiers are standing to kill the Chief of the tribe who has reincarnated as a zombie.


    "Is he dead?" asks Tina seeing the bullet holes on the head of the zombie.


    "He is." says Ga looking angry at the Chief, then he heads to the North. "Let''s go."


    "To where?" asks Ramy.


    "To airport. Where else?" says Ga not stopping from walking into that direction.


    "Are you sure this the good direction?" asks Ramy again, but Ga did not respond to the question.

 Blood Tribe - Part 11

    ***


    After an hour of walking, the summer heat is taking a tool into the group of five people who just escaped from a cannibal tribe. They are already on the verge of collapsing because they did not drink any water, nor they eat anything there. And what they could''ve eaten? They are in an apocalypse where deads are eating human flesh, cannibalism is not a solution to this problem.


    As they walk further, they see a shack. The group of five people, not wanting to talk about this, they decide to go inside it. With hopes up for finding some valuable food who would help them live another day of walking. They get closer and closer to that shack, and they observe a few more shacks like this one. They arrived at a village.


    Entering a small village, they proceed to go inside the first shack, and search for supplies. In the interior of that shack they did not find anything such as water or food, only broken things such as palates, bed, chairs and a decapitated torso of a child''s body. Ana was about to faint when she saw that body, but Tina caught her and told her to be stronger and keep it together.


    Ga goes outside the first shack, he spots a second one, and enters it. Upon opening the door of that shack, he sees on the floor three bodies of people who were all eaten by zombies. Ga, decides to stab the heads of these three bodies, stopping hem from turning into zombies, if it would''ve been possible in the first place since these bodies looks like they were killed yesterday, rather than a few minutes ago on the same day. Ga searches the place and finds a two-litter bottle of water with water in it. He takes the bottle, opens it up and drinks about two hundred millimetres from it without a stop.


    You could be reading stolen content. Head to Royal Road for the genuine story.


    Ga leaves the said shack and goes to his members who are walking to another shack, all prepared in case something from these shacks will arse and attack them. Ga hands the bottle to the girls, Tina drinks first, about one hundred millilitres, then she hands it to Ana, who drinks almost three hundred millilitres. The other two soldiers, did not drink the water. They told their new leader to keep it in case of extreme emergency.


    The group searches six more shacks and there they found only a backpack with food in it. Food that can go to waste in a few days if it is not consumed immediately or kept safe in a refrigerator. The said backpack is on Ga backside.


    They continue the walking by taking the street. All five are walking in the middle of the street who is connecting this village with the other villages and a few cities. The group continues to walk for a few more minutes until they arrive at an indicator who shows the name of the city and the exact number of kilometres remained to get there.


    "Kazaure." says Ga in Nigerian language. "Three more kilometres."


    "Kazaure isn''t in Nigeria?" asks Ramy.


    "It is." says Tina in Nigerian language. "We did not left Nigeria."


    "Looks like it." says Ga feeling sad. "We have to move fast. And for that we have to find a car. A working car. Any car, as long as it helps us get to our destination."


    "One time I was in this city." says the second soldier. "I knew a small car repair shop. It should have at least one fixed car. If not, we can search this en tire city and would find something working."


    "Hope you are right." says Ga.


    The group proceed to move further to the said city where they will search for a working vehicle to help them get to the airport.

 Blood Tribe - Part 12

    ***


    An hour later, the five survivors have arrived at the entry of Kazaure. They see there a big blockage of 4-door cars, jeeps, trucks and trailers, motorcycles and corpses of zombies, that creates an enormous barrier between some high buildings who have been built by high American corporations because they needed money to gain and lost at the same time. The five people, look at that blockade, wondering if it would be a good idea to go inside this town and it would be worth it to search for a working car.


    Ga hears a specific sound a zombie made when he gets, a growl followed by hard sniffing. The man quickly takes one of the melee weapons he is carrying from that tribe, and he hits the head of that thing pretty hard enough to kill it, bring him back to either Hell or Heaven. Ga looks around, sees a few more corpses raising from the ground, and he looks on his team in English.


    "We have to get inside."


    "What?" asks Ramy in Nigerian.


    Tina and Ana are going inside that town, followed by Zeny. They are walking inside a building, by letting Zeny breaking the door with his leg. The three people are immediately followed by Ramy and Ga. On the first room, which the hallway, they see five zombies, turning around to them and walking towards them. Ga, Ramy and Zeny have immediately jumped on them, and whacked their head off with by using their melee weapons. Ga takes the lead, he goes forward, opens the door to another room, and in there sees only one zombie, he goes at him, breaking the head of the zombie with a deadly move of a knife. He looks at his people he is guiding, and he tells them to move forward in English.


    Coming into the third room, the group sees five zombies eating a human corpse. The group decide to jump on them and break their heads with their weapons they are carrying. After this action, they look at the human corpse in shock. That corpse continues to breathe, even though his whole stomach and legs are teared off. The human body is looking at Ga, and he tries to say something, but all he can do is only wheeze and grunts. Ga, decides to take the knife and stabs the head of the human corpse in such a fast manner.


    "We have to move forward." says Ga to his team, going ahead to the room that is having the door label as "Exit" and with windows broken.


    The group arrives outside, they look around on the street, and notices a lot of corpses who were zombies and humans corpses laying on the streets of Kazaure. They also see a lot of fir-weapons, meaning this place was probably protected by military, but they probably fell down. Or there were mercenaries who tried to rob this place, but they got ran down by zombies. But whatever the reason was for these weapons t be lost here, the group of five survivors are taking these weapons.


    "Look at this place." say Ga in Nigerian language. "Once this place had good people. Now is a ghost town in street corpses."


    "Indeedˇ­" says Ramy.


    Ana, seeing a body of a zombie, with his head smashed, all of his brain scattered on the street and with eyeballs near hi mouth, she threw up on the street, making everyone turn around, looking scared at Ana. Tina catches Ana who was about to fall on her knees, she tells her everything will be okay, and motivate her to continue to walk ahead because they will have more distance to cover.


    The five survivors hear a few zombies rising from the street, and they quickly run to the direction Ga is running, which was the one who ran ahead of them. They are running to a building who once used to be a small bar, they see the place is not locked or barricaded. The first person who goes inside is Ga, who is holding in his hand an assault rifle, aiming around, checking for any alive survivors. After he saw nobody is there, he tells him teammates to go inside this place and lock the door with tables.


    When everyone got inside, all five people are going to the nearest empty tables, and they are pushing them to the door, blocking the only door to this place that is leading to the streets of Kazaure. They did use five tables to block the door. The windows, they decide it would not be a task to do since they are located high enough to their height they are having.


    This book was originally published on Royal Road. Check it out there for the real experience.


    "We should rest for a while." suggest Ga, who is sitting on the chair near the counter.


    Ga puts his weapon on the counter and he looks at the four people, who are all taking their seats. Zeny and Ramy are sitting on a table near each other, Tina and Ana are sitting on an empty table near the one of Ga.


    "How are you?" asks Ga toward Ana in English.


    "F-Fineˇ­" says Ana shaking and feeling nervous.


    "You do not look fine." says Ga.


    "She is afraid." says Tina sounding angry. "Like all of us."


    "I am sorry, ma''am. I did not want to sound mean to her." apologize Ga. "We have to get on that airport."


    "That would be our only and remaining solution?" asks Tina.


    "Yes." says Ga.


    "Those fuckersˇ­" says Ramy to Zeny. "If they hadn''t captured we would already be there by now."


    "Hope they are getting the punishment they deserve." mumbles Zeny to Ramy.


    The group of five people are hearing a knock on the door. They all are sitting in silence and looking afraid at the door. Ga is putting his right hand on the assault rifle. Then a bang noise is heard kicking the door, like a head hitting the said door. The team, decides to slowly head on the other side of the bar, on the back room where it is looking like to be the storage room where all of the beverages like beer, juices and snacks are stored.


    Getting to that room, they see an opened door that is leading outside this room. This was probably one of those rooms where the employers are using it to either load the new transport of beverages and either go outside and take a small smoke break. They go outside, and then they proceed to run to the other building. But before they would be about to open, they hear a smash from the window near the door, they all look at that window, and see a zombie who is hitting his hands and head on that window, carving for human flesh.


    The five people are leaving that place behind, running to another building, but before they would be able to enter it, they see the door getting kicked, and from that door emerges a huge person wearing heavy armour like "SWAT" person from a riot police in the USA would wear. But it is possible for such a thing to be in Africa? Probably a tourist or something like that decided to come in here and do a prank to be made into the YouTube to gain useless clout. The group sees that person is looking at them. Ga hears a growl coming from that person, and terrified, he says to his group of survivors.


    "Run."


    Ga, Ramy, Zany, Tina and Ana are running to another direction, dodging zombies who were coming after them, zombies who are crawling to them, climbers who were close to land on one of the survivors, and they even managed to outplay a jumper zombie type who gone through a window from the first floor of a building. They ran like this for a few minutes, not looking back, and dodging every attack they''ve encountered successfully. They managed to survive, despite all of the zombies who were walking to them normally, crawling to them, or even jumping to them.


    The group manages to get inside the place Ramy recommended to his team. Inside this car service, they found a few cars. The group entered the building without locking the door behind them, which is a big mistake because they need time to search for the keys of one of the three cars in this place who are looking to be in a good working condition.


    "We need the keys." says Ramy to Ga as he was trying to go at a car. "These vehicles are the type who cannot be carjacked."


    "Are you kidding me?" says Ga sounding pissed.


    "We''ll search for the keys." says Tina in Nigerian language to the people, and she takes the hand of Ana. "You three are keeping the horde off."


    "How?" asks Ramy in Nigerian.


    "Follow me." says Ga to Ramy and he goes outside where Zeny is and he is shooting the zombies by suing his assault rifle he has from that camp of cannibals.


    The trio is going outside, shooting all of the zombies who are approaching them with their fire weapons, not letting any of them walk again. While these three soldiers are doing this, Ana and Tina are searching inside this car workshop a working car key for one of these vehicles. They do manage to find a car key for a car in two minutes.


    The two girls are going to one of those cars and check which car the key correspond to. After two tries, they found the car. The car is a 4-door model. The girls are going outside, where they tell the two soldiers they have found the car to their safety. The soldiers, killing the last zombies, they quickly go inside the car workshop, close the door behind them, and go to that 4-door car model.


    After all of them get inside that car, Ramy, who is on the driver seat, he takes off from this car workshop, goes through the garage door, who was opened halfway, and accelerates toward the other side of the city, who thankfully was not blocked like that entrance from this town. And now, the group of survivors is on their way to Zinder airport, where, hopefully, a plane is waiting for them.

 Blood Tribe - Part 13

    At night, at Zinder Airport entrance, a car stops at the gates of this airport. The car that has stopped there is having a lot of human blood and small damages on the aspect of it. The driver, gets off the car, looking in disbelief at the gates of Zinder Airport, at the pile of burned corpses who are still burning now, and thousands of human bodies near the airport gates.


    "No. No. No. It can''t be." says Ga in Nigerian looking terrified at the gates who were once unbreakable, now they are breakable.


    "Is this the airport?" asks Tina getting off the car toward Ga in Nigerian.


    "ˇ­Yes." says Ga shaking. "I-I-It fell."


    "How was possible?" asks Ramy leaving the car and coming closer to Ga. "This place was having hard security and all of the devices they needed. Even a zombie army we''ve seen in Kazaure wouldn''t be able to get near the fence."


    Ga is going inside the perimeter, as he walks forward, he steps on a pistol. Ga takes that pistol, he checks the magazine of it, sees it has six bullets, he puts the magazine back, and put on his left side of pants pocket. He turns around to Ramy and Zeny.


    "Take the weapons with you."


    "What are we going to do now?" asks Ramy.


    "We will search for any communication device. Anything that can help us get a human touch."


    The five survivors, are leaving the car that have helped them get this far. In the perimeter of the airport, the five people are going toward one of the three tents this airport was having in this area. As they walked toward that tent, the ugly smell of corpses around their feet could go inside their nostrils, and gave them the puke sensation. Ana was one of the persons from this small group who did throws up, but in small quantity. Thankfully, none of the corpses from their raised. These five people observed all of these bodies have been killed again by headshots and amputations from the head.


    The group enters the said tent, and inside they see a table with documents and a said bed, made by two crates, one large wood plank, with a blanket and a pillow. The soldiers are checking the file at that table using the flashlight Zeny is holding to help Ga read these papers. Tina took a look at the files from there, while Ana was looking outside, scared and terrified by the look of this post-apocalyptic place.


    "What is this?" asks Ramy to Ga in Nigerian. Ga holds the paper and look at it.


    "It is a classified information." says Ga to Ramy in Nigerian. "About the last two plane who have left."


    "And they did?"


    Enjoying this book? Seek out the original to ensure the author gets credit.


    "They most likely did." says Ga letting the paper down to the table, then he picks another one, who it seems to be written by hand, unlike the other one. "This says the zombies are at this moment only three types. Jumping, crawling and normal."


    "They are variants?" asks Tina in Nigerian to Ga.


    "Yes." responds Ga in Nigerian. "We were informed by this by the higher ups."


    "Higher ups? Government?" asks Tina.


    "You could say that." says Ramy to Tina instead of Ga who continues to search the that desk and inside of it for any valuable documents that can help them with their situation.


    After a five-minute search, Ga and with his people leave the tent, without any information or clue about where these planes are flying and if they are going to come back. Even if they would come back, it would be a risk since this place has a lot of zombie corpses who will definitely be coming back to their feet at any moment.


    The people are going inside of one of the small hangars of this place. Walking toward the hangar, they see hear birds flying on the nightfall. This sound almost made the group stopped and skip a beat because they thought the sound of the birds would wake the zombies up, but it did not. Not any of these things have been rising up.


    The moment the group comes to the said hangar, they hear the sound of a machine coming from there. The entire group, takes on their arms their fire weapons and walks toward that hangar door. They do not want to risk it and have a case like that one with the cannibal tribe where they weren''t enough cautions and ended up with a minus member. Arriving at the hangar door, Ga makes sign to the soldiers and to the two researchers to go toward the other side of the door. In case things would turn south, they will have to jump on a surprised attack and take whatever is there.


    The four people do as they were told, all sitting on the other side of the hangar metallic door for aeroplanes who are getting inside to be repaired of for quick checking out. Ga, seeing his people are sitting at a cover distance, he decides to do his thing. The man knocks on the door two times.


    "Open up!" he says in Nigerian. "I heard a noise coming from there."


    "Noise?" asks the person inside that hangar in Nigerian, which by the way, sounds more like an Egyptian accent rather than a person from Nigeria. "Are you zombie? Y-You''ve been infected?"


    "No. I am not infected." says Ga to that person from inside the hangar. "Now let me enter before it will be too late."


    "State your name and job/" says the person from that hangar.


    "You''ve got to be kidding meˇ­" says Ga to himself, then he coughs to regulate his voice. "Name is Ga. And I am a soldier who got assigned with a task by the higher ups."


    "Soldier? Are you by a chance a member of the operation Alfa-68?"


    "Yes." says Ga. "I am the co-leader of this mission."


    "S-So, you''ve done it?"


    Ga did not believe what he hears. This person does know their mission, group name, and the operation purpose they''ve done, which means this would be an easier task than he thought it would be.


    "We have two researchers." says Ga.


    "Those are the main objective of Mission Alpha-68." says the person sounding inside in a joy.


    The door from the hangar proceeds to arise up, enough to reveal the interior of this hangar, and a small airplane that can transport six people including a pilot at maximum. As the door continues to rise up, Ga can see the face of the person, his clothes, all ripped either by an attack or by a horrible accident. Ga sees the individual body shape, which it is looking to be in a shape. And when the hangar door raised up enough, Ga could see the face of their pilot. The man in front of Ga''s is the same person who got in a fly toward one of the safe zones outside the continent.


    "Welcome back." says Capitan Muhammed to Ga, and shakes the hand of his, without making Ga caution about this.

 Blood Tribe - Part 14

    ***


    Later, around fifteen minutes later, at the same hangar the group of survivors has met the only one pilot alive on Zinder airport, all have gathered around to each other, sitting either on the car''s chair with their feet outside, on plastic chairs or on an empty barrel that contained fuel for planes.


    "How did you all got here?" asks Captain Muhammed sitting on the plastic chair after he takes a look at the hangar door who is getting kicked or hit by the zombies outside who have finally found the source of the noise, which is a generator that is charging this new type of plane made by military, an electric plane that works with electricity from generator, but for a limited time.


    "It''s a long story." says Ga in English to the pilot who asked this question in English.


    "We''ve got time for this." says the pilot looking at the plane. "This beauty has about twenty more minutes to charge."


    "And when it does, we can fly?" asks Ana to pilot.


    "Only for a limited time." says Muhammed feeling sad. "We can fly to another airport, and from there we might have to search for another plane, or worse, go by foot to the safe zone."


    "How far is this safe zone, you say?" asks Zany to the pilot.


    "I don''t knowˇ­ Probably further than Africa. On the ocean."


    "On the ocean?" asks Tina. "That far?"


    "The Organization built artificial islands far away from the continents. It is not my fault for this. But it is worth it. I fled there three times and can say for sure. That place. It is one hundred percentage guarded. Food and water supply that can last years. Enough place for anyone to rest. And enough medicine for anyone to survive with any terminal illness."


    "What about zombies?" asks Ana.


    "Zombies can''t swim." says Ramy to Ana in Nigerian.


    "For now." says the pilot, who do understand Nigerian, making everyone from the group look at him surprised, besides Ana who is the single person who doesn''t speak Nigerian.


    This story has been taken without authorization. Report any sightings.


    Now the rest of the conversation is going to be in Nigerian language, which will make Ana not understand what is going on, but it will be later explained by Tina when they are going to fly.


    "For now?" asks Ga.


    "I have seen thingsˇ­ Zombie that doesn''t look like from anything we''ve seen or heardˇ­ Zombie that can climb buildings, light posts, you name it, they can climb. Zombies who can jump. I have seen even a zombie who was set in fire, and he could still move towards humans."


    "They cannot die from fire?" asks Tina in English.


    "They do not." says Muhammed in Nigerian. "These things don''t stop even if you cut their legs or hands. A single shot in the head should do the trick. But, not every zombie can die from that."


    "What do you mean?"


    "I have seen. Or probably imagined. I don''t know for sure what is even real or fantasy at the moment. But I saw a zombie. A zombie who just ate from another zombie, and heˇ­ He then turned toward me, and ran. He ran to my direction screaming: "Human!". But a friend of mine. Managed to shut him off. With a bullet. In the head."


    Nobody from the group did not speak about this experience the pilot had it. They''ve seen a few types of zombie, but one who eats a zombie and starts running toward the person. That is something they''ve never thought they would hear it. Tina translates this experience to Ana, which it made her feel uncomfortable and fear of what is going to happen.


    "So. How about you?" says the pilot looking at the group. "How did all of you got here?"


    "We were sent to take researchers." says Ga in Nigerian. "But we''ve found only two. Tina and Ana. The two girls were in the room, surrounded by zombies who were about to turn. After we rescued them, we were about to go to the first route. But we''ve missed the boat."


    "And so, you all got here?" asks the pilot to Ga.


    "That is the first part. Then. We managed to come to Niger, but there we got caught and taken by some weird tribe. A cannibal tribe, who killed our main leader, and put all of us in a tent."


    "ˇ­No way."


    "And then. We managed to escape. But the things we''ve seen there. we better not spoke it againˇ­ After the escape, we arrived in Kazaure, where we took a car. And we got here. That is the story."


    "So, you all gone through some serious shit like me. You are not alone here."


    The banging at the hangar door is getting louder and louder. The people are starting to grow worried. Ga looks at Muhammed and asks him.


    "How are we going to deal with the zombies?"


    "You have weapons." says Muhammed.


    "But not enough ammo." says Ga back to Muhammed.


    "Not enough? Your luck here it''s we have a few crates with ammo in hangar." he says raising from the barrel and he shows them the crates that contains all types of weapons and ammo necessary to eradicate zombies even from, a single city.


    Looking at the crates of the weapons laying in there, Ga, Ramy and Zany are looking a bit excited at them. Ramy takes a minigun on his arms, and he looks at his teammates.


    "Ready for the party?"

 Blood Tribe - Part 15

    ***


    The door of the hangar gets wide open, enough to let the plane leave at the moment he will charge up. When that hangar door got opened wide enough, Zeny, Ga and Ramy, armed with heavy weapons on both of their hands, they look at the wave of zombies coming to them at a slow speed. The three soldiers start blasting these creatures with all of their weapons.


    The pilot, Tina and Ana are on the plane, waiting for the time when it will be on function and ready for departure to their new destination. As the plane continues to charge, they look outside, witnessing the strength of three elite soldiers who are capable of this fight.


    Two minutes later, Ga shoots his entire magazine of an assault rifle to a wave of zombies, then, seeing he has no more clips at him, he throws the assault rifle to a zombie, destroying the head with only one hit. Ga goes to the crates, where he takes from there a submachine gun and goes to help his teammates who are not struggling to kill these creatures with their heavy weapons.


    "We are almost done with them." says Ramy in Nigerian shooting his minigun and killing countless zombies.


    "Kill them all!" yells Zany to the teammates as he shoots his last bullets from the heavy machine gun he is carrying.


    And in a few minutes of shooting, reloading, changing weapons, and slashing zombies who were crawling with machetes, the line was clean enough to let the plane leave the hangar. After it left the hangar, the three soldiers get inside the plane, where they sit on the seats behind Ana and Tina. Then, at this very moment, the five people, staying the plane, are looking at the windows, at the remaining zombies who are running after the plane, who just take off from this airfield.


    "We made it." says Ramy happy to the people. "We fucking made it!"


    "Not yet, boy." says Ga feeling uneasy. "First step is done."


    "First step?"


    "Let''s just hope the bases are actually still holding up to this day."


    The survivors are looking back, on the ground where the zombies continue to go after them, not stopping not even a millimetre from their running.


    ***


    After a while, the plane who left Zinder airport, is approaching the lanes of an airport located somewhere in Ethiopia. The airline is not overrun by infected monsters like those from Nigeria and Niger, rather by people who are wearing heavy armour, with a weird symbol on their armour, holding heavy weapons to even smaller ones like handguns or knives. They are all dragging corpses of zombies into piles and burning them with gasoline or whatever they can find. One of them uses a flamethrower to do this job.


    "Who are you?" says a voice from the plane radio where the pilot and five survivors are in.


    Stolen novel; please report.


    "We are survivors f-from Zinder Airport, sir." says the pilot direct to the person speaking. "Do we have permission to land, sir?"


    "Are you infected?" asks the person from the radio.


    "Negative, sir." says the pilot after a few seconds when everyone from this electric plane confirmed they are safe.


    "All of you?"


    "Yes. Not infected with the virus."


    "Permission to land on the lane 2." says the voice giving the pilot and the survivor a sigh of relief. "After landing, please head to the nearest tent for checking in."


    "Is it necessary?" asks the pilot.


    "Is it."


    And from there, the conversation stopped between the pilot and the person from the other side who seems to either be a commander or a general from the army because of the authoring voice he was speaking it. It may also be a soldier, but that doesn''t matter at the moment for the team, what it matters is for them to get the access they need to be put on safety and deliver the package, consisting of Ana and Tina.


    When the plane has landed, survivors did not even have a moment to register their new scenery because dozens of soldiers approaches the plane, aiming their weapons to them, and yelling at them to get out off the plane in order and follow them to the nearby tent for analysing. They all obey the order, doing what they have to do in order to gain their access to safety in this world where danger is now everywhere.


    The five survivors are escorted by five soldiers to the tent. They were also stripped by their weapons by the same soldiers, even if the three of them are from military, they do not want to take their chances on this post-apocalyptic world. Especially with people who are more armed than them, and could take out a horde as big as New York with no problem.


    Arriving at the said tent, the five people and with the pilot, are put in front of six doctors, who each is going at them, handing a small recipient for to their mouth. All of them demand the same thing to the survivors.


    "Spit it."


    And all the survivors have spit a drop of saliva in those recipients.


    Then, the doctors are putting the recipients on the table, or one of them puts inside his pocket. Then, they take out their thermometer looking like a gun, and scan the temperature of the body of the survivors. After they saw they are alright, they proceed to analyse all the recipients on the microscope for a few seconds, then, one of the doctors, probably the leader, says to the survivors.


    "You are all in good health. You are lucky."


    "What do you mean lucky?" asks Ga to the doctors.


    "It means nobody from your team is infected. Due to the nature of this virus, we do not know if he is either going through saliva, blood or even on air. Some people from other countries reported that they got infected, even if they weren''t bitten."


    "It may also be the water." says Tian in Nigerian.


    "Yes." says the same researcher looking at Tina. "And you are? You do not look African."


    "I am Tina. One of the researchers who worked on African Center of Excellence for Genomics of Infectious Diseases." she then looks at Ana, who did not speak, she is still frighten by all of this. "And this is Ana. My other researcher who worked on the same station."


    "Two researchers. Alive and well. Fascinating." says the Doctor looking impressed. "You four would be so kind to leave this tent?"


    "Yes, sir." says Ga, leaving the tent, making Ramy, Zeny and the pilot leave after him.


    When they left the tent, one of the soldiers comes to them, and he orders them.


    "Since you three are soldiers, we would need your help to clean the airport building. It still has a lot of corpses in there. With a risk to be reanimated."


    "Reanimated?" asks Ramy. "They do come back?"


    "I am afraid, yes. Even if you would shoot their heads, they have slim chances to come back. The only option is setting the said corpses on fire. Follow me." he guides the three soldiers to a building which was used for people standing in there to guide the planes or wait for their commercial flight to another country.


    The pilot, however, decides to go to the hangar, which is at approximately fifty meters from the tent, and where a plane is loaded with gas.

 Blood Tribe - Final Part

    ***


    Meanwhile, on the camp where the remaining of the tribe remains, dozens of corpses are in that place, all of them having bite marks and limbs torn apart from them. Even if there are lifeless corpses, there is one individual infected, who is eating a human hand who looks like it was recently torn apart from its body.


    As the infected is eating the hand of the lifeless corpse, he doesn''t notice a bird that is flying toward a corpse, and proceeds to eat the remaining from it. The corpse the bird is eating is resembling to one of the tribe members who got bitten by a zombie if we can look at the bite marks from its upper body and some part of the skin torn apart from the zombies.


    After a few seconds, the zombie finishes eating the meat remaining on the arm, he turned around, and he looks at the corpse that is getting picked by the bird. As the zombie continues to walk in the sunlight, the stabbing marks on the head can become visible. He was not only stabbed on the head with a pointy weapon, the body also shows a gunshot wound, on the neck.


    The infected body walks to the corpse. Bird sensing someone walking to them, it flies away from the corpse. The zombie crouches near the body, and he proceeds to eat the corpse of the tribe members who is resembling the body of the tribe chef. As the zombie eats the corpse, he doesn''t notice another zombie leaving the tent, and that being the individual who was eating a while ago, Malcom. Now, this individual is missing a few muscles, his bones are showing, and his face skin is torn apart from its face.


    Malcom''s body walks to the corpse who is eaten by the first zombie. He is also munching from the tribe chef zombie body on the other side of the corpse. As they eat from the corpse, the other corpses proceed to rise, slow and hard.


    This book was originally published on Royal Road. Check it out there for the real experience.


    ***


    After a while, on the airport, a normal small plane, loaded with only five people who were having on the normal world the job of researchers on Human Disease, and with other useful supplies such as medicine, food or weapons, is about to fly to an island. The island the plane is flying is located on the Indiana Ocean. A perfect island for this scenario.


    "Are you alright?" asks Tina looking at Ana who is looking worried on the plane window.


    "Yeahˇ­ I am fine." says Ana who has started to calm down after the run she was having a few hours ago with other people. "I am just worried."


    "About what?"


    "About this place. Do you think it will be safe?"


    "It will be." says Tina looking at the window, and seeing Ga, Zeny and Ramy who are looking at the plane, and are waving to Ana and Tina. "With these three boys. This place will hold up pretty good."


    Tina and Ana are waving back to the three boys who have helped from the first day to escape from Nigeria. They feel bad that Malcom did not make it to see how this airport turned out to be. If it weren''t for those savages, they would have all been on the Airport, eating a last good meal and going to say location Camp Lemonnier.


    As the plane turned out the engine, the pilot, who is Muhammed, tells its passengers to fasten their seatbelt and not move from this plane. He does the last preparations before he can take off, and when we''re ready, he makes the plane flies from the third airfield to the destination of these researchers where they will help the scientists study for a cure for this post-apocalyptic world.


    "I kinda miss them already." says Ramy in Nigerian to his friends who are looking at the plane taking off.


    "Yeah. Me too." says Ga looking at the plane, then he feels sad: "Wished Malcom was still alive and he could have seen this."


    "We all miss him." says Ramy to Ga. "But what it matters is to move on. Even if he is gone forever, he will not become a zombie like these zombies."


    "Yeahˇ­" says Ga feeling sad. "Hope they will be safe." he says the line looking at the plane as he proceeds to disappear in the sky.

 Last Song - Part 1

    In the morning of Summer in Mumbai, India, at a house, one man, dressed in a costume, he leaves his house in a hurry. That person is running to his workplace, and he is late a good amount of thirty minutes. The man, as he runs to his first job, he is not concerned enough to see a person laying on the street, looking like a person who is on the verge of dying. Of course, he couldn''t care about him because the aspect of him, he looks like a hobo.


    The person, runs on the sidewalk, ignoring and dodging cyclists, runners and even animals. He even hit a person as he was running, he did apologize in a hurry to the person, but he did not look at it. And it was a good thing because if he had looked at it, he would be terrified to see a person with his face ripped off and with a greenish skin on his body.


    A random stranger, a man who was selling street food for a moment, observes this individual that looks sick, he approaches him, and he tries to say something, but that things turns around to the person, starts to growl, then it screams, and bites man neck''s.


    The food seller screams for help, and the people start coming over to help him, but it is a grave mistake. When the zombie got the mouth from this man neck''s, he turns to the first helper and bites his neck. Another person took the zombie from the man''s neck, and he tells him to stop this. A few more people come to this scene, holding this aggressive person and trying to help the two people who got bitten.


    "What is going on here?" asks a policeman coming over.


    "This person is crazy." says one of the three people who are restraining this greenish person who continues to growl and bite the people who bitten earlier.


    "Call an ambulance!" says the policeman to a woman who showed up here, and she does as she is told.


    "Hey, buddy!" says the same cop to that zombie. "What are you doing?!"


    The zombie did not say anything, it only growls and yelled as he is looking at the policeman. The cops observe this person''s eyes are not right. His eyes look red. Not that red type a person who is consuming drugs would have it. They do not have any iris nor life in them, they are completely red like the blood from its mouth after he has bitten two innocent people.


    "What is this?" asks the cop looking at the eyes of the zombie and seeing something green leaving its eyes.


    Everything has started to happen so fast.


    If you stumble upon this narrative on Amazon, it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it.


    Another scream is heard from close. Everyone is turning to that person who just screamed. It is the female who called the cops, she saw someone jumping from a window from the third floor, and it falls on his head on the concrete. His entire body splashed a lot of blood into the people who were unfortunately close there. Only six people were splashed with blood, that presented a weird blackish red colour than a normal colour depicted in mass media.


    The six people splashed with people, have all fallen on the ground. The people close to this scene are gathering to them, to see if they could help them. One of them approaches one of the infected, who was a little human kid who was walking toward school if we are looking at his small backpack. As that person tries to shake the kid, the kid opens his eye wide enough, to let the individual see the red from its eyes. And without a warning, the kid zombie bites the lips of that person, and with force he tears them from the innocent face and proceed to swallow them.


    After the kid became a zombie, the rest of five people become a zombie, and all are rising on their feet, and jump on the people who have gathered in there. Then, the other two people who were infected become zombies and starts to attack everyone nearby. They all manage to get a bite from a person close to them. The food seller bites the left arm of a woman who tried to help him. And that random stranger manages to bite a man in his 20s who was close to him to offer first aid.


    "What is going on?" asks the cops scared, looking at all the zombies eating the innocent people in front of him.


    He is too scared to do anything, so he takes the radio and he calls for backup. After he did this, he sees how one of the people who restrained the first zombie, gets bitten on the arm, and he yells out in pain, then that person, seeing how everyone has turned to be from a bite or blood, he manages to take the gun from the police officer. The cop did not expect this, he looks shocked at that person, who has taken the gun from his pocket, and he aims at his head.


    And he did the unthinkable. That man killed himself in front of the cop and the crowd of terrified people. The cop, only stands still, shaken by all of this, and he looks terrified at the zombies. The first zombie manages to overcome the two holders and he jumps on the cop, pinning him down and biting his chest. The cop yelled and screamed for help. But everyone, is running from there, scared to what''s going to happen.


    Not many remain there, only the zombies and the nine corpses who were later going to turn into zombies. One of these strangers were trying to fight a zombie, but it got pounded by a zombie. Even if the person died, he was brave enough to face a zombie with a spoon from a close food stall.


    Later, when the reinforcement came, all they saw there were only blood, and corpses, laying on the street, most having their entire torso torn apart, intestines outside their body, faces tear apart and one person had his eyes taken to these zombies. The reinforcing considered of nine cops, all armed with guns, looking scared at the things that just happened on this street. One of these cops, is telling the scared people.


    "Remember that manual?"


    "Yes." says a cop near the cop who asked this cop.


    "Do you thinkˇ­?"


    "N-No doubt." says another cop swallowing his saliva. "It started."

 Last Song - Part 2

    ***


    Later, on the entrance of the building, the same person who was running late, manages to arrive to its location. This building is known in this city by its population by the name of "Sound and Vision India Mumbai" a popular record store where more than a dozen of people are walking out as a people with their songs made. As the person who is late enters the building, he is greeted by the security guard who is telling to everyone who is entering the business.


    "Good day!"


    "Good day, sir!" says the person who knows this security guard very well because he lives on the same apartment, he is the one who recommended this location to start his career as a recorder.


    The man arrives at the room where his first task of the day awaits. Thankfully, he may be his first job, but he knows to handle this type of technology. As I said, it is his first job, in Mumbai, and he comes from New Delhi who worked as a sound engineer for about six years.


    "Good morning! Sorry, I am late." respond the person looking at his Boss and at the singers who were about to record their new song.


    "You should have been here thirty minutes ago." says the Boss feeling irritated by this behaviour, he looks straight at this man eyes. "What happened?"


    "I had an accident." lies the man.


    "What accident?"


    "At my house. The door got stuck. And I had to call the landlord to help me. It was hard, but I managed to leave it."


    "Aha. Alrightˇ­" says the Boss who sounds not interested in this lying. "Now. We have to resume the recording. Hope you can handle this system."


    The person sits on the free chair, next to his boss. He knows how he can handle a system like this. He worked on this one for the last six years on his last job. He knows every button, plug, and every setting on this thing. Before the Boss would press the power on to the button, he hears a knock on the door. He looks around confused, then he tells the person, after he paused the four people from the recording booth, next to him.


    If you stumble upon this narrative on Amazon, it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it.


    "Open the door and asks what he wants."


    "Alright." responds the person next to Boss, who is walking to that door, and he opened the door.


    As he opened the door, from their fall three zombies on the poor man, eating him. He screamed for help and cried. But the two people from there, are looking extremely terrified and cannot move. As a zombie finished the munching of the ear of the person, he looks at the Boss, rises up and walks to him.


    The four people from the recording booth are screaming, and are running around terrified. There are two girls in there, and two boys, all are looking terrified at how the zombies are eating the last two people who were alive. The Boss and the new guy have fallen to the hands of the zombies. They tried to fight them off with punches, but to no avail, they were overcome by these mutants with green skin.


    A male from that recording booth, goes to the door, he locks it by using the key who was in there, and he hides under the glass to not be seen by the zombies from there. He looks at the three other people, who are all terrified and pissed themselves.


    "Come here." whispered the person to his trio, who are following him and are hiding under the big glass.


    "What''s happening?" asks a girl to the person who ordered them to hide under the glass.


    "It''s happening." says the same person a little thrilled by all of this. "Never thought a day like this would come. Especially right now."


    "What is this?"


    "Remember when I told you about a virus who infected all of the Western Europe and transformed all of the people from there."


    "Yeah? When it was that?"


    "Two weeks agoˇ­" he says as he takes a glimpse to the zombies who are munching the three corpses. "Now. They have come here."


    "Are you sure, Kataro?" asks the girl to the person who told them to hide under the glass.


    "I am sure, Babi." replies Kataro to the girl. "We have to stay here. Hidden until they will leave this. After that, we will have to leave this place. One way or another."


    "How do you know all of this?" asks another male voice.


    "Well, Jayo." says Kataro to him. "I have a cousin who works in Holland, and told me everything about this virus."


    They hear a growl from the other side, and they decide to not check it, because it sounds like the one of a zombie from movies. So instead, they remain hidden under the glass, and wait for the right moment. All of them are shaking, sweating and holding the urge to cry or scream.

 Last Song - Part 3

    ***


    Thirty minutes later, at Juhu Police station, the two policeman who have left their co-worker to fend to the dangers of that street, are entering the station, and are locking the doors. One of the cops, the bald one with sunglasses, is the one who locked the door by using the door keys, then, he runs with his partner, the man with moustache and long hair, to the upper floor. Arriving at the first floor, he notices that nobody is there.


    In fact, nobody is here. Everyone has gone to the street to help the civilians on these weird attacks for them. And this is bad for the two policemen because they are the only ones from this station who knows the dangers of this virus and how it can be prevented. Well. There is some from these who watches and play video games about zombies, but these things, are not like the ones from video games.


    "Is someone here?" asks the first policeman in Indian.


    "Hey! Come here! On the office!" yells the second cop, louder than the first cop, to see if anyone is still here.


    After this, it comes silence. The two cops are all looking at each other, they are in deep problems now. But, they still have to do what they had to come all the way to here.


    They go to the first policeman desk, which it reveals to be a normal desk, with a picture of the first cop in his younger years with an old man, probably his father, and a name plate that it spells his name, Morgan Graham. So, the bald policeman is Morgan.


    The second cop goes to his small desk, where it is a lot of papers like on the first and the rest of the desks, a small laptop, and a name plate that it spells the name, Jayce Robertson. And the policeman with moustache and long hair name is Jayce.


    Morgan takes from one of the drawers from its desk a big manual, he puts it to his desk and he opens it. Jayce takes from the desk one radio station he had hidden under the papers from the drawers to not be recognized by his co-workers. They are not bullying, but they do have a bit ofˇ­ racism in them. After all, India doesn''t have a good history with English people. But these two aren''t from England, nor from America, they are Canadian. Wellˇ­ Half-Canadian, half-Indians, but that doesn''t matter at the moment.


    As Morgan has taken the big book, and proceed to search the pages he found the frequencies to make the calling to Organization by using this walkie-talkie they have made it for these types of disaster that are following. These types of devices can be used even without batteries because they are working on solar power since all of these are having on the tops side a solar panel thing used to capture the solar power and make it to function the walkie-talkie radio transmitter.


    As Jayce did the frequencies, before they could say anything, a voice from the radio says, surprising them both. The following conversation is on English.


    "Hello! Who am I speaking with?"


    "Morgan Graham." says the policeman by the name of Morgan after he take the walkie-talkie from Jayce. "And with a friend of mine, Jayce Robertson."


    "State your country you are located." said the voice from the walkie-talkie.


    "India."


    "India?"


    "Yes."


    "That''s strange." says the voice. "This is the first contact we have taken from India that reported a virus."


    "What do you mean?" asks Jayce over the radio.


    "Is that your associate?" asks the voice from the walkie-talkie.


    "Yes."


    The genuine version of this novel can be found on another site. Support the author by reading it there.


    "Aha. To answer your questionˇ­ Jayce, you said? Well. We had a lot of contacts from the South and central of Asia, but yet, this is the first contact we''ve ever received from India. The entire Europe and Africa have been already taken by this virus spreading and our Organization is doing everything they can to contain and neutralize all of the threats of this virus."


    "It has already begun here in Mumbai. We saw a street filled with zombies, eating humans."


    "Zombies? Like what types?" asks the voice.


    "We don''t know." says Morgan after ten seconds of thinking. "They were the ones likes from those apocalyptic movies."


    "So normal type. Good thing."


    Morgan and Jayce are looking each other surprised when he said "Good thing.". They wonder if the zombies outside of India are more dangerous than these they''ve seen so far. If so, they are in trouble.


    "I''ll have to be honest with you." says the voice from the device. "We already send a big ship into your direction to take, plus nine boats to help at gathering people. You have three days at maximum to gather as many of the people as you can."


    "What if we cannot do it?" asks Morgan.


    "Then you will be in the range of aerial strike." he said with a chilly voice after a few seconds. "We already found your location. And we are sending a helicopter to that location to clear it out and create a small evac base. A temporary one. It will disappear after the aerial strike will take place."


    "Wait, wait, wait. You say you are going to throw rockets into Mumbai?"


    "Not only Mumbai. Only on the high populated India."


    "This is insane!"


    "It is our only option. We cannot let this virus spread further. we have to minimize the dangers of this unknown virus. Now, do as you have been ordered. and helicopter with an armed squad should come to Juhu Beach at any moment. Conversation over."


    And he closes the call.


    The two policeman are standing there, freezes by this situation, looking at each other, shocked to hear their hometown will be destroyed by rockets in order to minimize the spreading of this virus. It sure sounds bad and inhumane, but it might be their only solution to minimize the damages this virus would do to a country whose population is more than a billion and half.


    Jayce is looking at the guide, on a page that describes how will this airstrike go and what will happen. It states that "the moment the airstrike will hit, if it will be successful, there will be no requirements to use nukes. But if it is and minimize the population of zombies/infected cases, the said city will be used to make a base which will be controlled by the army of the Organization.".


    "So, all we had to do is escort people to Juhu Beach?" asks Jayce to Morgan.


    "Looks like it." he says, then he looks shocked. "We have about twenty-four hours at disposal until the military helicopter arrives. Better use that time to take our family members to safety."


    "But where we will stay?" asks Jayce putting the guide on his desk. "We cannot bring them here, can we?"


    "We can try here." responds Morgan. "We are close to the beach and we have supplies to last us until they will come. We have guns and ammunition stored on the Armoury room."


    "I also have a shotgun at my house." states Jayce, making Morgan feel worried. "Just in case."


    "I am not going to question this, but good use now."


    "So. We will go different directions and help our family? Or we will go together?"


    "I say we go together. We don''t want to risk it losing each other."


    "Good call."


    Jayce is going to the Chief office where from there, he takes a pair of keys who were stored on the key wall, and goes with Morgan to the armoury room. As they arrived there, and opened the door, they are looking mesmerized at the weapons who are stored in them. Handguns, assault rifles, sniper rifles and vests to protect them from bullets. the boys are taking whatever weapons they desire. Jayce has taken an assault rifle, while Morgan has taken a handgun that looks like one of the desert Eagle from a Counter strike game. Both are taking a bullet-proof vest, just in case.


    "My family first." says Jayce.


    "What?" asks Morgan.


    "My family first."


    "No, mine."


    "Why yours?"


    "I have a mother and my little sister."


    "Yeah, well, I have a dog and a girlfriend."


    Morgan is looking disappointed at Jayce, who is making him weight the choice they have to do. Then, he sighs and tells Morgan.


    "I guess she can protect herself. Let''s go to yours, first."


    Morgan only shook his head in approval. These two walks from the police station, and after they did, first they lock the doors and leave to Morgan''s family. The moment they left the police station, they already see a zombie on the street walking toward them.


    "Shit." says Jayce looking at that zombie with a pity.


    Morgan aims his gun at the zombie, and the moment he was about to pull the trigger, he decides they take the weapon, turn it upside down and use it as a bat to bash the skull of that dead person. He smashes the head for five times, until it no longer moves.


    "Why didn''t you shoot?" asks Jayce.


    "Forgot what The walking Dead taught us?" asks Morgan.


    "That villains can have a second chance?"


    "No. Zombies. are attracted to noise."


    "Ah, yes." says Jayce.


    Morgan and Jayce are walking the next five minutes to Morgan''s house, where his mother and two sisters are probably scared and locked in the house.

 Last Song - Part 4

    Meanwhile, at the" Sound and Vision Mumbai India" building, the group of four singers are still locked in the studio by themselves, but this time, they managed to fend the zombies off from the room thanks to a stranger who entered the building, saw the three zombies eating from the bodies of human and he ran away from there screaming. The noise has made the zombies leave the corpses and walk after the person who has run away. One of the four singers have seen the person running, and after he did that, he leaves his hide and locks the door to the hallway.


    "God dammit." says a male singer looking at the bodies who were devoured. "We should throw them."


    "Yeah." says the other male looking at the Indian with long blonde hair. "You are right, Kataro."


    The person is opening the door again, he with Kataro are taking the corpses from the recording room and they are throwing them on the hallway. Together with the remaining of their bodies, such as intestines, livers, hearts etc., which it did make the girls puke afterwards, then alter it makes the two boys shake and puke. After they stop their vomit, with their remaining, they are locking the door of the recording room, and are staying in there, hungry, sick and weak. The smell of the vomit made all of them feel nauseous.


    "What did you tell earlier about this thing?" asks Jayo to Kataro.


    "The virus?" asks Kataro.


    "Yes. You said your cousin knows about this virus. Who is he?"


    "Heˇ­ He worked on an institute specialized on viruses or something like this. All he told me about this virus is to not trust any bitten person, with greenish or blueish skin, and always have a weapon at me, and where to hit them to kill it for good. You remember my cousin Raj? He is the one who told me and my family about the virus."


    Unauthorized duplication: this tale has been taken without consent. Report sightings.


    "Family." says a woman singer from this room. "My family!" she screams and starts going through a breakdown, falling on the floor, the other girl singer comes to her friend to comfort her.


    "And he told you how we can defeat this virus?" asks Jayo to Kataro.


    "Yes. All we did is to hit the head. Somewhere where the brain lays." replies Kataro to Jayo as he looks around, and walks on the room to search for something pointy. "We need something like a knife or something."


    "Bad thing we do not have guns." says Jayo.


    "Even with guns it will be dangerous." replies Kataro. "Noises will attract zombies. Just like what happened earlier."


    "Poor person." says Jayo. "Hope he managed to flee this building."


    "Found it." says Kataro finding a pen. "This would work."


    "Are you going John Wick mode on zombies?"


    "No." responds Kataro to Jayo, not minding the two girls crying and starting to help each other calm down in this situation because both of them are thinking about their dear ones and what is happening to them. "We can use to send a message to the-"


    Then, a ringtone of a phone starts ringing. This makes Kataro drop the pen and going to the table where the said phone was put there. He takes the phone and responds, not knowing the phone owner is one of the girls, who by now have stopped from crying when the phone has ringing.


    "Hello?" asks Kataro on the phone.


    "Who is this?" asks a male voice over the phone, after Kataro put it on speaker. "Is this Babi?"


    "Yes." says Babi crying from the distance, going toward Kataro and snatches the phone. "Where are you? Are you safe?"


    "I am safe." replies the male voice. "More importantly, have you been bitten?"


    "N-No!" says Babi crying of happiness. "H-Have you?"


    "I am safe. We are coming over to you. Where are you?" asks the male voice.


    "We are at "Sound and Vision India Mumbai"." replies a voice from distance, from Jayo. "We need help, there are a ton of zombies on the building."


    "We are doing what we can. We will be there in a minute, dear. Stay strong!"


    "Y-You too."


    "I love you!"


    "I love you!" she says back to the person from the phone, then she closes the call.


    "Who was it?" asks Kataro to Babi.


    "My fianc¨¦. Jayce." she says to her friends from the band. "He is coming over."

 Last Song - Part 5

    ***


    Three minutes later, in front of a normal building, two people dressed as policeman, holding fire weapons, Jayce is holding his assault rifle he took it from the armoury room from the police station and the second cop holds his handgun. Both of them have killed some cops on their way with their weapons, but it was a grave mistake because some zombies were attracted by the noise.


    The two-policeman managed to escape from the upcoming horde of the zombies by using their guns. Their kill count was not big, they only killed three zombies, which is a low count in most of the zombie apocalypse fiction works.


    Arriving in front of the building, the two people are looking around, and observe the door of this place is on the ground, it was literally teared apart from its place. And near the door lays a human who look like a kid, but he has been bitten on the cheek and on the torso, the kid is about to transform into one of those things.


    Morgan and Jayce are looking at the kid zombie, they feel sad for seeing him into a state like this. And the worse fact is, this kid is neighbour of Morgan. And Morgan, he takes a deep breath, he approaches the kid zombie, and smashes the head of the kid with the handgun hard part. He had to do it eight times until the skull cracked, and the thing stopped moving. When he finished, he sees brain parts of the inside of the skull, leaking from there. He almost throws up, but he holds it, and swallowed it.


    Morgan looks at the door, shaking and feeling anxious. Questions starts floating around his mind: "Are they alive?", "They are safe?", "They have been bitten?". Jayce approaches Morgan, he shakes him a bit, and he goes with Morgan inside of the house to check if the family of Morgan is still alive and can hold it. When they have entered the house, Morgan and Joyce sees the mother of Morgan and one of his sister running from a zombie.


    "Morgan!" yells her little sister to his bigger brother.


    "Anya!" says Morgan to her sister and her mother. "Mom!"


    Jayce, he aims his assault rifle, he jabbed from that Armoury room, to the head of the zombie who is going after the two civilians. He shoots two bullets, which both are going through the skulls of the zombie. Making that thing fall on the floor and remain unmoved from good. The civilians are running to the hands of Morgan, to be embraced by him. They hug each other for a good one minute, crying and sobbing, mostly the mother and the sister.


    "I am sorry, Mom!" says Morgan. "I am sorry I wasn''t here at the good moment."


    "Morganˇ­ I am thankful you are still alive." says her mother who couldn''t stop from crying and hugging his child.


    "Um." says Jayce looking at the entrance of this place. "Sorry to stop this moment, but we have zombies coming here."


    The story has been taken without consent; if you see it on Amazon, report the incident.


    From the outside emerges inside of this house two zombies, who were probably attracted by the loud sound of the bullets from the assault rifle type gun that Jayce is holding. Morgan sees the zombies approaching, and he tells her mother to come with them in the room, and wait until the things outside will start to become less in numbers.


    While Morgan is escorting her mother and her sister back to their house, Jayce sees on the floor what it looks like to be dagger. Very convenient. He takes the dagger, puts the assault rifle to his back, he holds the dagger he just found in his right hand and lunches into the two zombies. He stabs the head of the first zombie, where the brain lays, and on the second zombie, he stabs the same zone, twice, because the first stab wasn''t deep enough to reach the brain.


    After Jayce killed these zombies, he goes to the door, where he closes it, and he locks it by pushing a big coffee table who was on this hallway. Seeing this is not enough, he searches for more furniture, eventually he found two chairs and one table. He puts them in an order which it will be a tough challenge for the zombies to break inside of this house.


    Looking at the window, Jayce observes the creatures start rising from the floor, either walking to a direction without any idea, bashing their heads into the fence, or just walking a few feet, then falling on the street. Jayce he questions himself: "How can we escape from this?". The man looks at the zombies, he counts all of them. It gives him number fourteen. He looks at the surroundings outside, to see if he can find something useful to help him come after his girlfriend. He sees something, a small car, one of those motorcycles used in transport by Eastern Asians and who are popular on Free Fire. But this won''t be enough, nor suitable to take only the two of them. Especially since there are four people over there, but Jayce doesn''t know that. He spots a good vehicle, but this one has slammed in a building wall, near their location, and smoke starts to rise from where is the hood.


    "Shitˇ­" says Jayce leaving the window and he walks where Morgan and her mother with Anya have gone. "Hope Morgan has an idea what to do."


    Arriving at the floor where the house of Morgan''s family lived, he sees Morgan, who is dashing out of this place, he looks at Jayce who was going upstairs. seeing his colleague run downstairs he asks him.


    "Where are you going?"


    "College of Commerce and Economics." says Morgan who stopped from going downstairs. "My sister, Elena, is on the college."


    "What?" asks Jayce. "Alone?"


    "Yes." says Morgan. "I need you to watch my mother and my sister until I will come."


    For the people who are unfamiliar with the zone, the college of where Elena is currently locked is situated Valikunthlal Mehta Rd., and the street all four of them are is Indravadan Orza Rd., which is having a length of approximately one to two kilometres from each other. And to arrive there, Morgan decided to take a random vehicle from the backside of the building. Thankfully, one of the corpses, had a car key in his pocket as Morgan has investigated a corpse on the upper floor.


    "Here." says Jayce handing the assault rifle to Morgan. "You''ll need it more than I."


    "Are you sure you can handle them?" asks Morgan to Jayce after he takes the assault rifle.


    "I have this." he responds showing the dagger he just found. "I can handle them."


    "Alright. Good luck."


    "Same to you, dude!" says Jayce going upstairs to protect and take care of the two females from that room, while Morgan is going on the backside of the building. He opens that door of the backside, he goes to the parking lot, searches the car that the key he just found can match, and when he found it, jumps on the first seat and drives with the car from the busy street with the zombies.

 Last Song - Part 6

    ***


    At the interior of the place named "Sound and Vision India Mumbai", on the recording room. The four singers are still locked inside of the recording room by themselves. They all are sitting either on chairs and on empty table, not knowing what to do. They have managed to get a call with Jayce, fianc¨¦ of Bibi, earlier thanks to a phone.


    They have tried several times to call somebody to come and help them, but most of them weren''t responding to the call, which it gives them worry feelings like: "They died? Have they been infected by this virus?".


    But a single contact they got, that being Jayce, was enough to raise their hopes of survival. And he also told them over the phone to wait there, because they will come after them.


    Bibi told his friends about Jayce and his job. They are relieved that man is working as a policeman, which means he will most likely come inside of this place with guns and will give them a big advantage over these brain-dead creatures.


    "I am hungry." says Tarya, the second girl from the group of four people, in a sad tone, who has started to calm down.


    "Me too." says Jayo to Tarya.


    "This place probably has a room with food." says Kataro looking at the door of this room.


    "But who do you think who''ll go there?" asks Jayo.


    "I''ll do it." says Kataro raising from the chair he was sitting.


    "I''ll come with you." says Bibi to Kataro.


    "Good." says Kataro about to open the door, he looks at Bibi. "Are you alright?"


    "Yes. I am fine." she says after she stopped shaking and calmed herself down.


    "You two." says Kataro to Jayo and Tarya. "Stay here. And be on watch if anything bad will happen. Lock the door after we leave this room, and when you hear my voice, you open the door. Understand?"


    "Yes." says Jayo raising from the table who is sitting Tarya. "Be careful."


    "I will." responds Kataro to Jayo.


    "You too, Bibi." says Tarya to Bibi.


    Kataro and with Tarya leave the recording room slowly. They observe there aren''t any creature on the hallway, nor any corpse of a human in there. Probably the two people who have died has been reincarnated as zombies and are already walking elsewhere. The two survivors are seeing on the floor glass shards from the windows. Kataro looks around and he sees a curtain. Then a takes the curtain, rip a small part of it, and uses that part to cover the base part of the window glass sharp.


    "This can work." says Kataro on low voice.


    "Are you sure this will be enough?" asks Bibi to Kataro, who got an idea what he will do with this improvised weapon.


    "Is like in video games, Bibi. You stab the heads of these creatures and they do not come back. Simple." says Kataro.


    The two people are walking on the hallway, slow, and cautions about any danger. They control their breath to not panic and attract any of these creatures. They manage to walk a few steps, until they get at an opened door. The two of them, are looking at each other, and are nodding in agreement to inspect the room. Kataro enters the room first, holding the improvised knife in the left hand, and looking cautions at the room. Upon seeing what this room looks, they observe it is looking like a desk room. And there lays a zombie who is eating the body of what it looks to be one of the owners of this place. Bibi, seeing this, was about to scream, but Kataro, approaches her, and he told her via sign to not say anything. The girl, nods and she leave the room to let Kataro do this thing. The man walks on a slow peace, on duck, prepared to stab the head of this creature. As he got closer to the creature, and saw it turning around, the man doesn''t hesitate. With a powerful wing, he stabs the glass sharp on the neck of the creature.


    A case of content theft: this narrative is not rightfully on Amazon; if you spot it, report the violation.


    The creature remains unmoved for a few seconds, growling and trying to touch Kataro. The man, seeing the creature about to touch him, he kicks his chest, makes the thing fall on the floor, then he backs away scared, as the creatures continues to move toward him, now it crawls to him. Kataro backs away fast, until he gets near a wall, and there he sees what it looks like to be a sword. A real sword. The owner probably decided to buy as a decoration.


    Kataro takes that sword from the wall, he takes out the sheath and he go to the crawling zombie. He quickly stabs the back of the head of the creature with the sword. He retrieves the sword from the head of that creature, and looks at him. He looks at the creature, and the thing he did not realize is that, this creature, was one of the new workers from earlier. Today should be his first day of a new life, but not like this.


    "Kataroˇ­" says Bibi to the man who looks at the zombie corpse. "Are you alright?"


    "I-I killed himˇ­ I killed a human." says Kataro looking astonished by the thing he did.


    "H-He is not a human anymore." says Bibi trying to encourage Kataro. "And you know that."


    "Y-yeahˇ­" says Kataro deciding to keep some information to himself, rather to show to Bibi.


    Before he was about to leave this place, he sees the corpse who was eaten starting to crawl a meter and about to rise. Kataro immediately approaches the corpse of that thing, and stabs the head of his. He looked at the corpse with pity.


    "I am sorry. But this is the only thing I can do."


    Bibi and Kataro are leaving this room, and continues their search for food supplies. The two are going downstairs, to the ground floor, where there should be a small breaking room for the workers to have a nice small cup of coffee, or some food to eat on their small breaks. Arriving at the ground floor, the two observers at the entrance and on the road dozens of zombies who are walking in random directions, eating corpses of humans and animals.


    Three of the zombies are eating a cow which is a scared animal in India. This image is making Bibi and Kataro feel a weird sensation. But they decide to ignore this, and continue their searching for food supplies for them and the other two friends.


    "Are we going to be safe?" asks Bibi to Kataro.


    "Why do you ask that?" asks Kataro. "You know, your fianc¨¦ is going to come over here. He will save us. We have to remain here." he looks on the streets thanks to a window and sees the zombies walking toward a building after an explosion was heard. "We have to be careful."


    "We are not helping them?" asks Bibi to Kataro because both of them heard the explosion who came from that building near them.


    "it Is too risky." says Kataro. "There are dozens of zombies out there, and we don''t want to risk it." he goes to a door, and there he opens it.


    "B-But. What if they really need help?" asks Bibi.


    "We cannot do it, Bibi." replies Kataro who starts to feel a bit pissed about this girl. "And we don''t know if there are even people. What if it was just a normal explosion produced by a lighten stove or something? You want to risk your life out there. If you want, you can do it by yourself."


    "I-I understand." says Bibi.


    The room they just entered is the break room. That room contains a fridge that stores water, drinks, and iced coffee for hot summer, like this now. There are also shelves with snacks, and some hidden beer by one of their workers. And Kataro is one of those workers.


    "Is still here." says after he found his secret stash of alcohol hidden in a shelf.


    "What?" asks Bibi looking at Kataro, then she sees the stash of alcohol hidden. "Really? Right now?"


    "What?" asks Kataro. "Can''t a man enjoy alcohol?"


    "Not on this time." respond Bibi opening the fridge and find there a few food supplies. "Help me carry these to the recording room."


    "Got a lot of food here." says Kataro on the fridge.


    "Today we should''ve celebrated the day of our new workerˇ­"


    "Ohˇ­ Poor kid."


    They put the on the table all of the food from the fridge, check what it is edible and it can last for long time. They look for something to help them carry all of those things, they found a few bags, and decide to use it. They put all of the goods from the fridge and shelves on these bags, then they go outside of the room.


    Going on the hallway, the two people sees a zombie, who is entering this place, he looks on their direction, he stares at them for a while. The two are looking at the zombie non-existent life eyes, they stay there, still, not knowing what to do. Then, that zombie, decides to turn away from them, and goes outside. After the thing left, both of them are looking strange at each other, and they wonder at the same time in their mind: "Did that just happened?".


    Kataro and Bibi continue to walk upstairs to the recording room slowly, hoping a zombie from outside will not come here. As they are climbing the stairs, the two people did not see anything weird, rather than blood on the hallway and the closed door of the office where they murdered one of the owners and the new guy of this place. They arrive at the recording room, they enter the place, and there they see, Jayo being on top of Tarya, both being in the middle of the intercourse. Seeing the two people who have just risked their lives just now for food, the two love birds are looking awkward at them. Then, Kataro said something.


    "Really? Right now?"


    "Sorry, sorry, sorry." says Tarya leaving the top of Jayo, who was almost about to pull his pants off, but he pulls it on.


    Then, the atmosphere of this place became awkward for a while.

 Last Song - Part 7

    A car is going through the busy roads of India, all blocked by zombies and wreckages made by this apocalypse. That is driven by none other than Morgan who has taken courage to drive where his sister is hiding, in college. He tried to contact her a bunch of times through his phone, but it did not work, now his only hope is she is alive and managed to hide from these monsters.


    The car stops in front of a blockage of a bunch of cars who is next to the college he was driving. The man looks around and sees zombies approaching him in a slow walking manner. The man unbuckles his seatbelt, he takes out the assault rifle with the handgun and he runs out of this car. Leaving the car, he already sees a zombie who is approaching him. The man hits the zombie hard with the back of the assault rifle. A hit hard enough to make the thing fall, but not die.


    After he did that hit, he runs to the college doors who are swarmed with zombies. Morgan stops after a few steps, he puts the handgun on his belt, make a quick check on the assault file to see how much ammo he got. The clip is full, so it has about thirty-five bullets. Puts the clip back to the weapon, and starts to shoot zombies.


    He kills three of them by three shoots. All to the head. After this, the man shots a few more to make the entrance of the college more accessible to him. And when he was done with it, he goes inside the college, but he finds the doors destroyed since they were al glasses door. The man goes inside of this place, and walk to a random classroom. He opens the door of that classroom, there is only disaster and things left by students who were leaving in a hurry from this place.


    Morgan goes to the next classroom. Over there is the same as on the fist classroom, only disaster and no humans, no corpses and no zombies.


    Morgan checks the third classroom and there he sees a student, who is staying on the corner of the classroom, frightened and holding a screwdriver on his hand. This male student is wearing the characteristic uniform of this college, with a set of gloves made of latex, a pair of glasses and the turban people would wear in religion sign, who is called pagri. The male, seeing the policeman with a gun, he looks at him with hope.


    "Thank you!" he says the boy happy, and he steps from the corner.


    "Are you fine?" asks Morgan.


    "Yes. I am." says the student letting down the screwdriver.


    "Great. Then you can help me search this place."


    "What?"


    "Yeah." says Morgan, and he looks on the hallway where a zombie is running to him, and Morgan, he shoots his assault rifle to that thing, making it fall on the floor.


    The sound of his gun, not only is attracting zombies, but it also made two people leave the classroom. Two of these people are wearing the teacher uniform any university professor of an India college would wear and their pagri hats, having different colour from student with screwdriver. Both of these men are holding cricket bats. They see Morgan and are going at him.


    "Have you come to save us?" asks one of the terrified teachers to Morgan.


    "I have come to take my sister. Elena Graham."


    "Yeah. I know her." says the second teacher. "She-She ran to the third floor with a group."


    "Then we''ll go there." says Morgan to the three people.


    Morgan goes ahead of them, holding this assault rifle on both of his hands. He walks a few steps toward where the set of stairs is. The other three people are following the policeman, and together are a few zombies who are coming after them.


    Arriving on where the stairs are, the man sees there a pile of students who have been transformed to zombies, and all are alive but they cannot get up. He then looks at the stairs and he see that the upper floor side of the stairs has been destroyed. That big pile of corpses probably consists of about fifty zombies, who are desperately trying to get up, but they can''t do it. Morgan is feeling a bit grateful that these things have not managed to get to the upper floor, not until one of the teachers said.


    "There are other stairs to the upper floors."


    Morgan goes after the teacher who decided to take the lead. They all are running, and dodging every attack of a zombie who is trying to catches them or jump on them. He manged to do a hit with his back of the assault rifle in a zombie face. The hit was so hard, the creature falls on the floor. They arrive on the other side of the college, and there they see the stairs having dozens of zombies. Morgan decides to take out his assault rifle and starts to shoot the zombies. He kills all of them, but it came with a cost. Not most of them died from the gunshots to the head.


    The tale has been illicitly lifted; should you spot it on Amazon, report the violation.


    Morgan kills all of the dozen zombies form the stairs and they start moving fast to the upper floor. All of them are running on the stairs. Teachers decide to take the lead since Morgan has started to ran out of ammo. He told them he emptied the entire assault rifle on these zombies. All four of them have managed to flank and hit zombies to the stairs from the upper floors and get to the third floor, where it is said Elena is supposed to be.


    Morgan walks on the hallway, he sees a few zombies on the hallway. Morgan starts yelling.


    "Elena! Elena! Elena!"


    Zombies are approaching the group on a slow walking pace. The teacher are risking their lives, they jump on these creatures with their cricket bats and beat their head until they put them down. They also stomp on two zombies, until they would not move anymore. The student with screwdriver doesn''t do anything, he only stands back, holding the screwdriver on both of his hands, shaking uncontrollably and looking scared at the teachers and Morgan at killing the corpses of students and teachers who used to walk these hallways.


    About thirty seconds later, from a classroom, a student leaves the class and runs to the group of people who are fighting zombies, and to Morgan. That student who left the classroom is the sister of Morgan, Elena, and she is chased by a zombie.


    "Help me, brother!" yells Elena to Morgan.


    "Elena!" yells Morgan aiming his pistol to the head of the zombie, and he pulled the trigger.


    The bullet fly by Elena''s ear, it almost takes it, and it lands on the zombie head. Between his eyes. That bullet hit so hard it manages to fly by the head of that zombie and hit another incoming zombie, but it hit the neck. Even if it would hit the neck of a zombie, a creature like this would not die this easily. It needs a clean shot in the head.


    Elena hugs Morgan, cries and thanks him for coming to save him. Morgan hugs Elena back and she tells her.


    "I am here, Elenaˇ­ Let''s go homeˇ­" says Morgan toward Elena.


    "Y-yeah." says Elena to Morgan, and she gives him space for him to create a path for them to escape from this place.


    Morgan walks back from the direction where he came from. as he is walking toward that direction, the group of students and the teachers are following him. They all manage to dodge every attack zombie and push them back, from the stairs where they would fall and trip the other zombies who were trying to reach them. It took them about a minute to leave from this place, thanks to the corpses of the people laying on the hallways and being eaten by the ones who reanimated into zombies.


    Outside of the University, Morgan is looking around for the car he took it and used to come here. He sees the car is not there, and also sees on the streets the car got stolen.


    "No. No. No. They stole the car!"


    "Fuckˇ­" says the student with the screwdriver scared. "W-W-We are going to die?"


    "We are not!" says Morgan back to the student.


    Morgan takes a small look at the group who is following him. From that group there is Elena, that unknow student and only one teacher, which means the other didn''t manage to escape and have became food for zombies. Morgan cannot do anything to redeem himself, and it is not his fault, everything went so fast after he acquired his sister from that place.


    "Now what?" asks the teacher scared. "What are we going to do?"


    "I have a shelter." says Morgan. "We will stay in here for a while. Until the military will come."


    "Military?" asks the teacher.


    "You called them?" asks Elena surprised by this fact.


    "Yeah. I did. It''s complicated. I will explain at the house."


    "The house is at about two kilometres distance from University." responds Elena. "Are we going to remain safe in here."


    "We have to." says Morgan. "Now let''s move on!" and he walks out of the street to the sidewalk toward the direction where his house it is.


    The group of four people are walking on the sidewalk, all armed with their weapon. The unknown student still holds the screwdriver hard enough to not let go, Morgan holds his fire weapon together with a knife, the teacher found a small hammer on the sidewalk and decides to use it. And for Elena, she is not holding any weapon, she is to scared to even think of hurting a zombie.


    The group walks for about a hundred meters and they see a zombie who is falling from the rooftop, with head first on the road. At the fall, his head splashed on a small radius, and the rest of his body, broke all of the limbs. The group saw this. Elena throw up, while the unknown student was peeing his pants.


    "What''s this?"


    "A suicide." says Morgan on a chilling voice, and continues to walk, paying no more attention to that poor soul who just threw himself from the rooftop head on.


    They walk two hundred more meters, and they see the car of Morgan, but in a devastating state. It crashed into a building. And in that car were three people all are dead and bleeding heavily. Morgan is looking at those corpses from the car, he looks on his knife, and walks toward the wreckage.


    "Brother. No!" says Elena scared.


    "I will be okay." says Morgan to her sister.


    Arriving close to the wrecked car Morgan has stolen from the house he is sheltering her other important people, Morgan observes on the back of the vehicle there is only a backpack. A big red backpack. By a big size who is usually used for camping and other kinds of activities. He looks at the corpse who is near the backpack, and Morgan, decides to stab the head of that corpse, before it would be turning into a zombie. After he stabbed the head, he takes the backpack and leaves the car.


    "Got it." says Morgan to the group ash he checks the backpack, and observes there only food supplies. "We got food."


    "Are they okay?" asks the teacher.


    "They are already dead to begin with." respond Morgan to the teacher. He puts his backpack on, and he walks ahead. "We have to continue moving."


    The group did not say anything, they agreed to Morgan''s plan to continue walking ahead.

 Last song - Part 8

    ***


    In the house, where Jayce and two survivors are staying, things are not going so well, because the zombies are starting to be more and more on the streets. From a hundred and half zombies an hour ago, now there are around four hundred or somewhere around that number, either walking on straight direction, hitting the walls and the doors with their palms, punches and heads. Some of them are also crawling due to their legs who are broken from either falling or some nasty accidents that happened a while ago.


    Jayce is looking on the window, at the zombies on the streets, and wondering how the military would be able to help them on this apocalypse. He looks at a specific zombie, who is crawling on the dusty streets. That zombie is wearing a police uniform and is having a gun tied on his left hand. That zombie is someone close to Jayce and Morgan.


    "What is it?" asks the mother of Morgan to Jayce, and she looks on the window at the crowd of zombies.


    "I know a person from the group of those zombies." says Jayce feeling tearful. "The man over there." he points at the zombie crawling with a gun tied to his hand. "This person used to be a very close colleague to me and Morgan. He. He was also a person who was informed about all of this thanks to the guide."


    "H-He''s Antoine?"


    "Yes." says Jayce. "Poor boy. He was always good to us, but he always wanted to be alone and by himself."


    "Poor manˇ­" says Morgan''s mother tearful. "Why is this happening to us. What have we done to anger the Buddha?"


    "We don''t know." says Jayce. "But I think Gods and Buddha don''t exist anymore."


    Mother of Morgan wanted to say something about this, but the sister of Morgan, little sister, Anya, is going to the two people, and she tells them to come over to see the sky. The two people are rushing on the other side of the house, to the window of the kitchen room. They look on the sky, and they see a plane, falling from the sky.


    "No. No. No." says Mom''s Morgan terrified.


    Stolen from Royal Road, this story should be reported if encountered on Amazon.


    "S-Shit." says Jayce trembling like the other three people as they look at the plane who is falling toward where the ocean is.


    The three people couldn''t do anything to prevent this. All they can do at this very moment is to look at the falling plane, as it hits the ocean, hoping somebody from there will escape alive from there. Even if they would survive the falling, the plane is also on fire. And it exploded after it landed on the ocean, but the three people couldn''t see the explosion because they are at about a kilometre from the nearest beach, but they could hear the sound of the explosion. And it was a big one. So big and loud it made the zombies from the zone of this house turn around, and walk toward the sound.


    After five minutes, the street had fewer zombies on, about fifty of zombies who were crawling, or were standing still and moving slowly at the sunlight who is about to go down. The three people, seeing the zombies starting to evacuate these streets, and the other ones, they feel thankful for that. And this makes Jayce have an idea on how to control these creatures.


    "Does Morgan have a Bluetooth speaker?"


    "Speaker?" asks Morgan''s mother not knowing what that is.


    "I have one." says Anya to Jayce. "What you need it for, Uncle Jayce?"


    "I need it for helping somebody I know. Could you give it for me, for a few minutes? Please."


    "Yes." says Anya and she walks to her room to retrieve the speaker Jayce was talking about. she came back with it. "But it doesn''t have enough battery, Uncle Jayce. And the power is out."


    "Thank you." says Jayce. "I will be leaving later. When Morgan will come back."


    "Look." says Mother Morgan looking at the window. "He is here!"


    Jayce, Anya and Morgan''s Mom are looking at the window. They see Morgan''s and his group of people appearing on the zone. all five of them, are running toward the house, as they are chased by five zombies who walking slow. Jayce observes the zombies Morgan is running from, and he quickly goes to the main door to unlock it.


    Arriving at the main door, he opens it up, and kills any near zombie from the door. He sees Morgan running to the house, and they quickly enter the house. All of them. The teacher, the unknown student, Elena and Morgan. And Jayce, well, he tells Morgan when he walked into the house.


    "I am going after my fianc¨¦."


    "Take this." says Morgan passing his pistol. "You''ll need it more than me."


    "Thanks." says Jayce.


    Then Anya comes, she passes him the Bluetooth speaker.


    "The password is BibiJayo34." says Anya to Jayce. "Good luck, uncle Jayce."


    "Thank you, Anya!" says Jayce to Anya, then he looks at Morgan. "Take care, I will be here soon."


    "Good luck!" says Morgan seeing his best friend running from the house with a pistol and a Bluetooth speaker on the other hand.


    "Where is Uncle Jayce going?" asks Elena.


    "To get more people." says Morgan closing and locking the door from the crawling zombies who are starting to get closer and closer to their house.

 Last song - Part 9

    Meanwhile, in the building where the four people are locked up, in the recording room, things are looking a little tense between the members of this band. And not because they are locked in the same room and cannot leave like earlier, no, it''s because of the scene the two survivors, Kataro and Bibi, saw Tarya and Jayo almost making out on the recording room. It wouldn''t have been, if those weren''t doing it while these two were risking their lives!


    "Soˇ­" says Kataro looking at the hallway, by opening the door and sees five corpses crawling toward them. Kataro closes the door. "There are five zombies on the hallway."


    "Are they walking?" asks Bibi.


    "No. Crawling."


    "So. We can take them." says Jayo to Kataro.


    "Chill, chill. We cannot risk with those deads. We don''t know if they are completely harmless. Plus the night is approaching."


    "And we cannot even turn the lightbulb." says Bibi to Kataro, who started to feel better, beside Tarya who is feeling ashamed, guilty and scared to what is going to happen to her, and how her band will treat her from now. "Turning it up, will probably alert the things."


    "What if the things are attracted by the smell?" asks Jayo.


    This question has put Kataro, Bibi and Tarya on silence. All were thinking about the thing Jayo has said to them. This was probably one of the remark they never thought of it. "What if the things are attracted by the smell?". So. They can avoid them if they are covering themselves in zombie smell, like in The Walking Dead?


    "You say we can cover ourselves in their organs?" asks Kataro to Jayo.


    "Ew!" says Tarya and Bib at the same, both knowing this means disgusting.


    "I don''t know if it''ll work, but we can try?" asks Jayo.


    "Hell no!" says Bibi. "This cannot work!" she looks at Kataro. "I''ve seen on the office a zombie munching on the body of one of the owners. These things will attack even their own kind when the time will come." she looks at Jayo. "We''d rather have to wait for rescue."


    "And if it will come!" says Jayo.


    "Jayce has to come!" says Bibi to the group. "Maybe now is fighting against the zombies outside."


    ***


    In the meantime, at a distance of three kilometres distance, of the recording building, Jayce is on the streets, he is running from a horde of zombies, while he is holding a submachine gun, he just found on the streets, near a person who it looked like a criminal. Jayce used all of the remaining ammunition of the submachine gun on a few zombies that were running after. Still, even if he had killed five running zombies, more and more zombies have started to follow Jayce, since the sound of submachine gun has attracted a big horde numbering probably more than two hundred.


    "Shit! Shit! Shit! Shit!" says Jayce as he is running at full speed from the horde of zombies that are walking and running toward him.


    Jayce is running inside a building, that was wide open, and with thirteen corpses on the floor of the building that is looking like a clothing store. Jayce, when he entered that store, he runs inside of the room that is labelled with a sign of "Only authorized personnel allowed", and closes the door of the room. Then, he looks around of this room, and observes few furniture pieces who are good to use it as a blockage. Jayce moves the furniture to the door and blocks it by using only three-piece furniture, one desk, and two chairs.


    Jayce observes on this room is a widow who is wide open, and outside there is only one zombie, who is crawling toward a tree, where a cat is stuck on the tree. The zombie tries to reach the cat, but it would be impossible to do it due to the fact the three is almost seven feet tall. Jayce feels kinda bad of the cat, but he cannot do anything, he has to escape from there. Inside of the store there are sounds of zombie growl, footsteps and munching on the corpses of this store.


    Support the creativity of authors by visiting the original site for this novel and more.


    The man jumps out of the room from the window, he lands on his feet, because the window is at one meter from the ground. The crawling zombie turns around to Jayce, and before he would growl, Jayce was fast enough to take out his knife, and stabs the head of that zombie. After he killed the dead person, he leaves the thing alone and runs from this zone, to the street.


    The man gets on the street, and he sees a bike on the street. Jayce is thankful for this. He goes toward that bike, and before he could get on it, he hears a man yelling "Help!". Jayce looks from the source of the noise, he sees the man is stuck on the rooftop of a three-story building. That man looks like to be an Indian, dressed in normal clothes, and having on his hands an axe, all bloody and with some parts that can resemble the brain of a human. Jayce couldn''t see the brain parts from this distance, but seeing it all bloody, he knows this must be a used to kill a zombie.


    "Are you alright? Have you been bitten?" asks Jayce to that person as a yell.


    "I am fine. You?" asks the person.


    "Fine!" says Jayce. "You need help?"


    "Yes!" says the person. "I am stuck on the rooftop. And inside of this house area few zombies. Help me please! I will give you anything."


    "I don''t want anything!" says Jayce going to the door, and opening it up.


    The door reveals five zombies. All five of them see Jayce and are walking toward him. The man is looking shocked at these creatures. He did not expect to see zombies, as kids, who are trying to attack him. Jayce, seeing no way of this, he swallows his saliva and starts mercifully killing the zombies in kids bodies. He knows this is the only way to save these innocent souls in dead bodies.


    Jayce kills one of the bodies by suing his knife. He stabbed the head part, between the eyes. He kicks the second zombie in the stomach, sending it on the floor, near the feet of the third zombie. He pushes a fourth zombie to the window of the house. And he is quickly stabbing they had of the third zombie. He turns around fast enough to lay a hard stab on the fourth zombie head. He stabs the second zombie who was close to get up on his feet. After he stabbed the head, takes the knife and uses it to stab the head of the fifth zombie who almost grabbed his left hand. After he killed the last zombie he throws it on the floor, moves a few steps away from the pile of corpses, and lean on the wall, to get his breathing back.


    "Shitˇ­" he says as he is rapid breathing. "Shitˇ­ Shitˇ­ Crapˇ­ Crapˇ­"


    The man looks guilty at the five bodies. He never thought that he would be killing five bodies of children without any remorse. But he did it. He doesn''t feel proud of this, he feels guilty because he did an unimaginable thing. The man, after he stayed there to regain his breathing, he continues upstairs to where the survivor with the shovel waits for him.


    As he got upstairs, he sees the man, charging at him with the shovel. He yells as he is running toward Jayce. He never realized this man was going to kill him. Jayce quickly throws the knife to that man. The knife hits the left leg of the man, who was at about five steps away from him, a move that makes the man stumbles with the shovel. The knife gets deeper into the leg of the man, as he fell on the floor and drops the shovel to the feet of Jayce.


    "Argh! AH! AHHHAAAHAH!" yells the man, turning around, and trying to take out the knife from its leg. "Fuck you!" he says in Indian language to Jayce.


    "Were you trying to kill me?" asks Jayce taking the shovel and holding it to the head of the man. He points the shovel to head of the man, going to stab the head of the man. "Why you were trying to kill me?"


    "I need supplies." says the man. "For myself."


    "What are with those kids there?" asks Jayce.


    "I used them." says the man smiling. "Fucking hooligans. Trying to always rob me before this. I wanted to use them as a shield to catch you and steal your supplies."


    "You psycho." says Jayce angry. "You infected them?"


    "Didn''t need to do it. I locked them in a room with one of the kids infected. After five hours. All were infected."


    Jayce did not respond to this. He used the shovel. He stabs the head of the man with the pointy shovel. Then, he takes the knife, and to be sure he will turn into a zombie again, he puts the neck off the man, and throws the head to a nearby trash can. After he did this, he goes to the rooftop of the building, to see how much he has until he will arrive at the destination.


    Managing to get on the rooftop, and getting to the highest point, he looks at his surroundings. He observes how fire is taking the city of Mumbai, he sees people on other building who are at the rooftop and looking around this zone. Notices, at two blocks away, how a woman jumps from the third floor and lands on the streets, breaking her legs. He also looks at the poor women who are screaming of pain, and how it''s getting torn apart from a group of six zombies. The man looks at the building were the woman jumped on, and sees there how another person follows her example, from the same place. He jumps and lands on the same spot. also eating by the zombies.

 Last song - Part 10

    "This is Hellˇ­" says Jayce to himself.


    The man continues to look around, and notices so many terrors on the streets of Mumbai, who once were calm and very kind to their habitants and tourists. The man spots the building he is heading to. The one where her fianc¨¦ is locked in, together with her band members. Jayce proceeds to get out of the rooftop and from the house, taking only its knife, letting the shovel on the rooftop, near the corpse of a dead human who was probably the owner of this place, or someone who lived in there.


    Leaving the house, Jayce continues to walk on the streets. He holds his knife like an assassin from the Fantasy novels or video games. The man walks on the street, being careful of everything that is moving suspiciously. He is not even walking six meters from the house, he observes a zombie jumping down from the window of the ground floor, and running straight to him. He manages to hold the zombie with his left hand, and with the other hand, he stabs the head of the zombie. Four times to be exact. He let the body slam on the road, and continues his walking, ignoring the screaming of the human coming from the house where that zombie jumped from the window.


    ***


    If you discover this narrative on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen. Please report the violation.


    ***


    A few minutes later, in front of the building where the musical band of four people are saying, Jayce arrives there, and he sees how the door is locked. The man looks to the locked door, he knew this will be a hard task to do. Jayce also sees how some zombies are walking to him, probably by smelling his scent. Jayce, observes a smartphone on the ground. He quickly takes it, and starts to contact her fianc¨¦ through the phone as he is dodging the zombies.


    "Hey!" says Jayce after Bibi picked the phone. "Are you inside the building?"


    "Yes." says Bibi screaming on the phone. "Are you alright?"


    "Yes. Butˇ­ Can you open the door?"


    "I am coming!" says Bibi running down the stairs of the building without closing the phone.


    Jayce throws the phone to the head of a zombie. Surpassingly, the phone hit has managed to make the zombie fall on the back of the street. Jayce takes the knife, then stabs the first zombie he sees. After he has done this he drops the zombie to the ground, and two zombies, instead of zooming after Jayce, they jump on the fallen zombie, and eats his remaining parts.


    "The fuck?" says Jayce confused as he sees the two zombies munching on another zombie.


    But before he could do anything, he hears the door opening and the screams of Bibi, telling him to come inside. Jayce turns around, and runs inside of the place, he closes and locks the door, then hugs Bibi.


    "Thank you!" says Jayce almost tearing. "Thank God''s you are still alive!"


    "Yeah, yeahˇ­" says Bibi relieved her future husband is safe and managed to get here by himself.

 Last song - Part 11

    ***


    Meanwhile, at a few hundreds of kilometres from India, on the ocean, on an aircraft that it belongs to British Army, is approaching India. On that ship there are hundreds of soldiers who are dressed in unusual heavy uniforms, and with a logo that says "Organization". It has no special name, nothing, it is just written "Organization". a simple name to make humans remember the easy times before this virus has struck the world.


    At a part of the aircraft, on the field where jets are taking off, a few pilots are about to get inside of their jets, and help the personnel on their mission to evacuate Mumbai from the terror. And one of those pilots who are about to go is one known soldier who has helped a person from France, who is now a reliable source for communication and signal. The man name is Michael, and he is still recovering from the accident that happened few days ago in Maine, France.


    "You wanted to go?" asks a female jet pilot to Michael as he was about to board a jet.


    "No." says Michael looking on the jet. And he throws a pack of cigarettes on the driver seat. "It''s a birthday gift for Ryan."


    "You know jet drivers can''t smoke." says the female jet pilot.


    "Yes. Maybe when he will finish the mission." responds Michael walking away from the plane and towards the woman on a close distance.


    "You are going in?"


    "Hell yeah." says Michael in a British accent. "I got tired on this long medical vacation."


    The story has been taken without consent; if you see it on Amazon, report the incident.


    "How are you?"


    "Good. The leg started to heal. Together with the arm."


    "You can still hold an assault rifle?"


    "Without worries. I am going to take the minigun of the helicopter."


    "Like you always do." says the female pilot. "And what is your mission?"


    "Clear the zombies from a zone and establish a safe zone. Don''t know the streets. Never been to India before in my life."


    "You know the population of it is almost three billion."


    "Yeahˇ­" says Michael. "Hope most of them aren''t like those from Europe. Man. They got too dangerous even for us."


    A soldier approaches Michael, he is wearing a green bandana on his head, holds a sniper rifle and a wear a pair of red sunglasses.


    "Michael. We are living in five minutes."


    "OK, Sergeant Yorick." says Michael to his Sergeant.


    "Bella." says Sergeant Yorick to the female pilot. "Be careful. Heard there are survivors in that zone. Be careful to not kill too many."


    "I will, Sir!" says Bella.


    The soldier is walking toward the helicopter, together with Michael, while Bella is walking toward a jet plane that is at five meters away from the one where Michael tossed the pack of cigarettes. As the two soldiers are approaching the helicopter, they observe a few more soldiers coming in there, all armed and with their uniforms.


    "Raoul is a really good man on radio." praise Sergeant Yorick to Michael. "He helped another group localize an abandoned group in Moldova."


    "Really?" asks Michael. "Who was the group?"


    "Some nobody. Their leader was one named Gerald. Their mission was to find and escort twenty people who were stuck on a village. Not an easy mission, but the man himself had killed more than fifty zombies. That''s what some of his comrades said."


    "And? He saved all of them?"


    "Only ten people of that group survived."


    "That many? Means they are skilled."


    "Hopefully."


    The two soldiers get on the helicopter and wait for the time when it will take off. As they wait for it to take off, Michael sees how a few fast speed boats, leaving the aircraft, are heading toward the beach of Mumbai. He knows the boats are going to be used to save the people who are stuck on that city. He hopes there will not be many people to rescue. They started to run out of spaces on their island.

 Last song - Part 12

    ***


    Meanwhile, in a building which is at a few thousand of meters from the beach, Jayce is entering the recording room of that building, where another three survivors are waiting for the man to come. After he came into the room, Kataro is looking at Bibi.


    "He is him?"


    "Yes." she replies to Kataro.


    "Thank you." says Jayce hugging his fianc¨¦ after he let him inside of the building, and saw she''s alright and in a good shape. "Thanks Heavens you are not bitten."


    "Y-You are okay?" asks Bibi on Jayce arms after she saw his clothes covered in blood.


    "Yes. I am fine."


    "What''s with the blood? Who''s that?" asks Tarya feeling sick as she sees blood on Jayce.


    "I''d rather not talk about this. Messed up shit on the street."


    "I saw it." says Bibi to Jayce.


    "Have you been bitten?" asks Jayce to Bibi.


    Bibi only shook her head in disapproval meaning she hasn''t been bitten by one of these creatures who are luring on the streets or inside of the house.


    "Anyone from here was bit by a zombie?" asks Jayce to the other three musicians.


    All of them said "No." to Jayce, and this made Jayce feel better to know not anyone from here it''s not bitten. Then, the man remembers a thing from the manual of the zombie. He leaves Bibi alone, and he looks at the other three people.


    "Do you people smoke?"


    "Why are you asking that?" asks Kataro.


    "T-There is a thing. About this virus. It can transform even the person unbitten or dead into a zombie if they have a weak respiratory system. Smokers as seen as one of the most vulnerable "victims" of this disease. So, again. Do any people of you smoke?"


    "I was." says Jayo tossing the pack of cigars into the nearest trash can.


    "That will not be enough." says Jayce feeling bad. "Gods have mercy on your soul."


    This sentence is making Jayo shake a bit.


    "Are you sure this virus can infect people with weak respiratory system?" asks Tarya to Jayce.


    Taken from Royal Road, this narrative should be reported if found on Amazon.


    "I am sure. That stated the manual that was given to us. At the moment, the manual is in hands of Morgan, a good friend of mine."


    "Morgan has survived?" asks Bibi surprised and happy by this information.


    "Yes. He is now at his house. He is keeping safe a group of survivors. Didn''t count them because the moment he showed up, I left the house and ran here. But at the looks of it, it will be wise to stay overnight." he says as he is looking at the sky and he sees the Sun going down, then he checks his watch, and notices it is already 6:54 P.M.


    "Can you communicate with this Morgan?" asks Kataro, our phones have died and communication is lost.


    "I have a walkie-talkie." says Jayce showing the walkie-talkie station to the group of four people. "I can talk with Morgan through this. And I should-"


    "Jayce! Jayce!" says the voice from the walkie-talkie, coming from Morgan. "Jayce. Do you copy? Over."


    "Here, Jayce. I got your message, friend. Over." replies Jayce on the walkie-talkie by pressing the button to talk to it, and releasing it after he finished speaking.


    "You made it?"


    "Yes." says Jayce to Morgan. "I found all four of the survivors, and a hell of a swarm of zombies here. Are you fine?"


    "Yes. all of us is fine. Over."


    "Good to hear. Over."


    "I got a message from the Army, Jayce. They are on their way here. Over."


    "Glad to hear it." says Jayce having a big smirk on his face. "They are going to rescue us? Have you given the coordinates? Over."


    "That''s the problem. They are going to only free the city. Which I think it would be to kill the zombies. Over."


    At the hearing of this, Jayce and the four people have looked at each other, stunned by this statement.


    "Are you joking?"


    "I am not." says Morgan who sounds sad as Jayce and other members. "They''ve sent me message to seek shelter somewhere safe and not be on the road. Probably killing the zombie on the streets to make free space for them to move on foot and stabilize a camp for survivors."


    "B-But they''ve said they will come to the beach."


    "Change of plans, probably. I am as unsure as you are, Jayce. I wish they can give us a reason why they are telling us to keep shelter instead of being rescued."


    "Hope they will give us an explanation after they finish the mission. Over."


    "I hope so. Over." says Morgan.


    "Stay safe. We''ll talk later." says Jayce.


    "Same to you, my friend. Over." and closes the transmission.


    Jayce is putting the walkie-talkie on the trousers pocket, he looks at his group of four people, who are feeling scared of what is going to happen. The cop is telling them that everything will be okay.


    "How can everything be okay if the authorities will not help us!?" asks Tarya.


    "We will survive." says Jayce to the group. "Listen. I have been prepared by this type of apocalypse. Sort of. And I was told what kind of zombies I am facing. Even you kinda know what type you are facing, that is because of the zombies movies. You know what I''m talking about?"


    "Yes, we do." replies Jayo. "Last of Us from HBO. The walking Dead Franchise."


    "Shaun of the Dead." says Kataro.


    "iZombie." says Bibi remembering a night where she watched a horror movie with Jayce.


    "See. Without those, all of us we would have died. Now, what we need to do now is to stay put and wait for the morning to go outside. Because going outside is deadly. We stay here, and we rest for the night."


    Jayce looks around the studio, he sees this room doesn''t have much furniture for them to use to sit, lay back and take a night sleep, so he decides to leave the recording room to go and carry some furniture pieces. He carries it with Kataro and Jayo. The three dudes have carried in the room one couch and two chairs.


    When they finished it, Jayce locks the recording room and stays in there until the morning will arise and with it will come a new day for survivors.

 Last song - Part 13

    ***


    At the ship located from more than a hundred kilometres from India, on the room where the captain and a few other soldiers are put on their positions and are doing their duties, a soldier, dressed in a uniform is walking in the room, he looks around, and then, when he sees who is he searching for he goes to the man dressed as a General, who is sitting on a chair and drinks coffee.


    "I delivered the message, sir!" says the soldier doing a salute.


    "Good." says the General taking a sip from his mug with black coffee. "You can go and d your thing now."


    The soldiers leaves the General alone, who is taking his coffee as he looks at the pilots of this ship doing their thing.


    "Why we aren''t taking any survivors?" asks the man on the ship wheel, which it looks to be the captain.


    "Why are you asking that?" asks the General, the man on the chair with a long black hair, a green beret and a long beard.


    "I want to know why we are not taking them in."


    "How to be subtleˇ­" he says the General, then he thinks for a few seconds, and he responds for to Captain question. "Because they are occupying our areas. Is one. The other is food shortage, a thing the Organization did not anticipate. And a third option, is people weakness."


    "Weakness?" asks the Captain.


    "We do not accept weak men and women anymore. We wanted strong and capable people. So, I''ve had the idea to not let the choppers help the survivors. Unless they can handle it by themselves."


    "You people from Organization are sane?"


    "Has everything been sane to you last times. Viruses. War. And now apocalypse, each day we are getting stricken by worse and worse scenario imaginable to humans, captain Boris."


    "Is captain Born." corrects the captain to the general. "And I admit. Before this, things were bad, but not as bad as thisˇ­ And you will just let your men not save the people."


    Unauthorized duplication: this narrative has been taken without consent. Report sightings.


    "Organization orders. We''ll save only the worthy ones."


    Then, the General raises from its chair and goes outside of the room. as he got outside, the Captain Boris is feeling mad on this General behaviour. All he does is smoking, drinking and ordering people to clean the city instead of helping the people who need a hand. The things he has said to him doesn''t make sense because the Organization has built around hundreds, maybe more than two thousand hundred islands around the world, but the Organization wanted to save only the healthy ones and ones who can fight. Two months ago, the same Organization has said to the selected ones they will save everyone, including even the non-healthies people of the world, but now, they want to save only people who can fight.


    After a few minutes, the general comes back, holding a tablet in his hand, and he is looking at the tablet. He goes on its chair, looks on the tablet, read the classified documents who were said to him by the superiors of the Organization.


    "They liberated Helenski." says the General in a loud voice to the people on this room. "Fifty soldiers have been sent to take control of two kilometres square area in Helenski. Only three have died. The soldiers have also been helped by one hundred survivors from nearby. Together they''ve killed around five thousand zombies classified as Class E, nine Class F, and two Class D."


    "Will they establish a camp in there?" asks Captain Boris.


    "They will." says the General to the Captain of the ship. "Their orders are to make a camp and secure the capital. At any cost."


    "Helenski is in Finland, sir?"


    "Yes." says the General, then he continues to talk. "The team of fifty only managed to capture the airport of Helenski, a store nearby and a few residential builds who were still standing after the airstrike fromˇ­ Three weeks ago."


    "Is it me or the airstrike has become useless?"


    "Why are you saying that? Without the airstrike, we would have more zombies to deal with it. But I admit, some countries of the world have taken it to the next level, like China, who just nuked most of urban areas, and all the big people of that country fled from there, but not many managed to survive. Like the leader and his officials, who have been killed the moment they got to North Korea by an F Class who threw a car to their helicopter."


    "Seriously?" asks a person from the room laughing at the image of Chinese leader being killed by a car in a helicopter, especially in North Korea where cars are almost non-existent. "A leader of a country that is having a high budget got killed by a car thrown by Class F?"


    "Yes, dude." says General to that person.


    The group continues to talk about incident like these that happened in the world and got registered on the database of the Organization, while Captain Bolt is focusing on his job to move the ship to a secure and safe area near India.

 Last song - Part 14

    ***


    In the helicopter, on the one where Michael is in it, he shoots a few dozens of the zombies on the street by using the machine guns. He does this because it would be futile to use a sniper rifle, especially when the helicopter is at a low altitude, as low as this one where they can almost touch certain rooftops of buildings from Mumbai. The soldiers in that helicopter continue to shoot the zombie, and says the following message in English to the people who are still alive. "For anyone alive! Proceed to Pythagoras Island. An island located west direction from Indian Ocean. It has foods, shelter and equipment to help you protect yourself against zombies."


    The helicopter passes by a certain building that is focussing on recording songs from artists and sell it to the public for money. They passed the building entitled by the name of "Sound and Vision India Mumbai". The place where our five survivors are looking at the helicopter and they have taken the message he was spreading. The group of five survivors are trying to wave at the helicopter to catch its attention, but on the night, and the helicopter having its lights turned off, things weren''t so easy for them.


    "They will not take us?" asks Tarya.


    "They''ll not." respond Jayo upset by this thing.


    "They expect we can walk by ourselves to their artificial islands." says Jayce to the group.


    "And how we will do that? We go now?"


    "No." says Jayce to the group. "We will try in the morning. Maybe we''ll get some help or an available boat for us. Who knows."


    Morgan takes a final look outside to see a few jets who are flying on a high speed on the sky, together with a few helicopters who are most likely used to clear the hordes of the zombies from the sky. Then, he draws the curtains of the window, he tells the group to rest because tomorrow will be a big day for them. And they all start sleeping wherever they manage to squeeze in.


    ***


    Tomorrow morning, on the building "Music and Sound" the group of five survivors, two females and three males are packing up some things. Kataro has got himself a knife, together with Jayo. Tarya only carries a backpack with supplies they would need it, supplies such as food, med kits and a few spare clothes for them, they''ve found in the studio. Bibi is carrying a backpack with supplies and she is using a kitchen knife to defend herself from these creatures. And Jayce, is using a handgun he came here with and a sawn-off shotgun he found on the rooftop of the place. Last night, a helicopter dropped a small crate with only a gun, food and medicine for them. And it was thanks to Jayce who was waving to the helicopter.


    Enjoying this book? Seek out the original to ensure the author gets credit.


    "That guy should''ve thrown more than a gun, food and medicine." says Jayo feeling pissed.


    "This is enough." says Jayce holding the sawn-off shooting, loading it with two of the twenty shells he received. "Twenty bulletsˇ­ These are enough."


    "Enough?"


    "We aren''t going there to kill all of them, Jayo." says Kataro to Jayo.


    "We ain''t. Our objective is to get out of here and get ourselves to the beach. Like what I''ve discussed with Morgan." he looks at fianc¨¦. "Have you prepared the shuffle?"


    "Yes, babe." says Bibi to Jayce showing her phone a playlist.


    "Alright. Be ready to turned it on." says Jayce to Bibi, and he looks at Kataro and Jayo. "You two have connected the speakers on Bluetooth."


    "Sure." says Jayo. "Connected all the loudspeakers near the building, and a Bluetooth music box that I''ve thrown in the morning on the tree. This will may attract zombie to the three."


    "Hopefully." says Jayce. "Turn the music on."


    Bibi plays the playlist. The first song it plays is the first song of the band. When that song played, the group, armed with weapons and ready to run, they break the door, kill two zombies from the hallway, and leave the place. After leaving the structure, the group of five people starts running to the beach. They did not want to take a car to avoid the multitude risks of having one in this scenario. The group is led by Jayce and Tarya being on the back, scared of these things but not willing to die in their hands.


    The group runs on the sidewalk, because the streets were filled with animal and human corpses, cars and construction materials who have fallen from structures. Jayce shoots one zombie who was on the rooftop and about to jump on them. He shoots its legs, making the thing lose its balance and fall from the third floor on its head, shattering in pieces. Jayce killed the thing by using his pistol.


    "Must be careful around jumpers. They are tricky." says Jayce to the group and continues to run on a marathon level.


    The group walks ahead, hitting zombies on their way, or dodging them like Tarya does it. Jayce kills a few of these zombies on their run to the nearest Beach, while the other four members are hitting the creatures or pushing them back. It seemed like the music did attract some zombies, but not all of them. Thanks to the speakers with a loud volume, the group managed to avoid mass population. They could''ve avoided all of them, but this would have been impossible because zombies can also sense human meat thanks to evolution of the past months.

 Last song - Part 15

    ***


    Meanwhile, in a building, Morgan, and with other five survivors have left the house they''ve stayed for a whole night, all heading toward the nearest beach by taking the car Morgan has "took it" last night on a sneak. The man drives the car because, believe it or not, he is the only person from that group who is having a driver license. But what kind of person would need a driver license in a zombie apocalypse?


    Morgan dodges a few zombies there and there, smashes in a few corpses who were raising up to their feet and running over at least six zombies. Those six were most likely not the brightest ones, but probably not even the stupidest. Anyway, the ride was a wild one for them, but they thankfully managed to get to the nearest Beach on this city. And arriving at there, they got surprised to see a military boat in there, who is checking the survivors who have arrived in there with the same reason as the group, to get to safety.


    A soldier observer the car stopping in front of the beach, letting his comrades handles the giant group of probably twenty survivors who are checked to see if they are infected. The soldier, waits for the leader of this small group, Morgan, to leave the car. When he did, the soldier points his thermometer to him, he approaches the man, close enough with that thing to the forehead of Morgan, and waits until the beeping is heard, which it takes a second to happen.


    "36,9." says the soldier looking at the thermometer, then he looks at Morgan. "Are you a smoker?"


    "No." replies Morgan to the soldier.


    "Have you been bitten by one of these?"


    "No, sir." says Morgan thinking the soldier asked about the zombies.


    "Wait. You were one of those you signalled us?" asks the soldier.


    "Yes. I am Morgan Graham."


    "And where is your other partner? Jayce Robertson, I believed it was his name."


    "Is safe. He comes with another group." says Morgan to the soldier.


    "Good." says the soldier. "You and your group should go inside the shack." he says pointing at a small container house at a few steps from them. "Another boat will come and take you in."


    "Why we cannot go in that one?" asks the teacher from the car sounding scared by this.


    "Sir! This is the protocol." says the soldier to the teacher, he takes the thermometer to check the temperature of the teacher. He approaches him close, checks the temperature on the forehead.


    After the beep sound came, the soldier is looking at the screen, makes the soldier looks at the teacher, feeling sad for the man. The soldier takes his pistol, he aims at the forehead of the teacher, and he pulls the trigger to the man. Killing it instantly. Morgan stood there scared, he looked at the soldier and he angrily asks him.


    Unauthorized duplication: this narrative has been taken without consent. Report sightings.


    "Why?!"


    "He had 38." says the soldier to the man. The soldier checks the skin of the teacher and sees the man was starting to develop greenish skin. He turns to Morgan and says to him, as he got closer to the soldier to see the state of the dead member of his group.


    The people in the car are looking scared. They do not know the man in their car was infected and they could also be infected. The student and Elena start checking their temperature and their skins. Thankfully, they do not possess the signs of the teacher from earlier. The soldier proceeds to open the door and checks the temperature of Morgan''s'' mother, she sat on the back seat near the left door of the car where the body of the teacher laid.


    "37,1." says the soldier, and checks the skin colour. It is normal. "You can go in the container." he helps the old lady leaves the car, then checks the temperature of Elena. "37,0." he says to her, then he hands her to Morgan. "Are these your relatives?"


    "Yes." says Morgan to the soldier.


    "You can go ahead." he says to them and remain to check the unknown student and the sister of Elena.


    "She is also with us." says Elena pointing at Anya for the soldier who was checking her temperature.


    "36,9." says the soldier to Anya. "Go on. You are safe."


    Anya walks toward Morgan, Elena and their mother. They hug each other and wait for the student to be checked. The student however, when he got his temperature checked and reveal if he is infected, he tells the soldier the following.


    "Can I become a volunteer to help you, guys?"


    "You have to complete a form in another container. I will guide you there."


    The soldier is going with the student to another tent, leaving Morgan, Anya, Elena and their Mom walking to the container by themselves. As they walk to that container, the girls are trembling, and Morgan can feel this trembling because of Anya, Elena and her Mom, who are holding on him on strong grasps. He tells them that everything will be okay as they are walking toward the container.


    Entering the said container, the four people will notice there is a small group of six survivors, all Indian nationality, and three soldiers who are staying in there, unarmed with fire weapons, only machetes, they are staying near the walls of the container, and talking with some of the survivors. The soldier looks to be Indian and they wear a strange uniform, a uniform that is spelling an English word: "Organization".


    "Have you people been checked?" asks a soldier stopping the three people from entering the container.


    "Yes. We have been checked." says Morgan.


    "Who checked you?"


    "It was a soldier, but he has gone with a survivor at another container to enlist him on the volunteer or something."


    "I am sorry, but I cannot let you inside after the soldier who checked you give me the report."


    "Can''t you do it?" asks Elena.


    "With all due respect, if you four were checked I need to wait for the report of that soldier. Now, I order you four to remain outside and wait until the soldier you said it checked you will come back to report."


    "Okay." says Morgan to that soldier.


    And the four member of Graham family waited outside for the solider to come back and give the report to them. As they''ve stayed outside, the group notices the body of the teacher rising up on its feet, but it is immediately shoot in the head by a sniper positioned on a rooftop of a crane. The shot hit the head, and made the body lose its balance, and almost fall on the ocean. It remained with its head on the edge of the beach.


    "Poor thing." said the mother of Morgan shaking as she saw the body of the teacher getting shot.


    They''ve had another teacher, but this one sneaked on them in the morning and left the house with the assault rifle and forty bullets, a filled magazine of the gun. The man left them while all were about to wake up. He did not leave a note nor talked with anybody last night because he was acting a little weird. The group is wondering if the teacher managed to survive on the night, or got the misfortune to become zombie food.

 Last song - Final Part

    ***


    At a distance of a one thousand meters from the nearest beach point of evacuation centre, a group of five survivors, the musicians and the policeman, are running from a horde of zombies. Apparently, they have run into a horde who by mistake a member of the group, that being Kataro who pulled the trigger of the pistol and killed a zombie on the head who was close to jump on them. The group runs as fast as they can while Morgan and Kataro wastes some bullets on the zombies.


    "Run! Run! Run!" are the words of the group who are talking together as they shoot and run to the zombies who are chasing them.


    The group have also seen some zombies who were rising on their feet who were on their way, and they were hitting them hard to make them fall or kill them. Kataro did killed one crawler who almost grabbed its feet. The bullet got through the skull of the thing, and it put him on rest for good. Kataro threw the pistol down and runs as fast as the group who is also starting to run out of ammo.


    The five people encountered a lot of zombies who were on their road but they overcome the masses with ease, and managed to arrive at the evacuation station where Morgan and other group of survivors were waiting for them. And the horde it got taken care by the soldiers and volunteers of the evacuation station. They''ve used their high-quality guns to kill most of these creatures.


    When they''ve got in the evacuation station, they were going through the same tests as the other group of Morgan. Jayce, when he reunited with Morgan he shakes hands like true friends and he tells him.


    "We made it."


    "We sure did." says Morgan proud of Jayce who has helped her fianc¨¦ escape from the hell of that recording room.


    The two friends, together with a few more survivors are looking at the first boat who is taking about ninety survivors away from this place and transporting them into a safer place. On a habituated island that can help them survive in better condition to sustain the chances of humans life. As the boat continued to depart from the beach, a helicopter can be heard in the sky. They are looking at the helicopter who is flying off from this island. In that helicopter is Michael, who is looking through a sniper rifle scope at the group of survivors Morgan and Jayce have rescued.


    If you discover this narrative on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen. Please report the violation.


    "Looks like they''ve made it." says Michael to his comrades from the helicopter as he is looking at the sniper rifle.


    "The ones from last night?" asks a soldier staying on the seat, feeling exhausted as he manoeuvrer the minigun of the helicopter to eliminate the masses of zombies.


    "Yes. They are good. We should keep them as soldiers."


    "If they accept the position of course." says another soldier.


    "If not well throw them to an inhibited island like the rest of them." says Michael, and he is looking through the scope at the boat who they''ve flown by. "Is he heading to one of the islands?"


    "Yes." says a soldier looking at the boat.


    "Damn. These might not survive for the longest in there." says Michael and decides to no look at the scope of his rifle. He walks to a free seat and he looks on the sky, waiting for the moment the helicopter will arrive at the ship carrier.


    On the beach the group of the survivors are embarking on another boat, who will deliver them to an island. As they were walking toward the boat, explosion noises could be heard inside of the city. All the survivors looked back to their beloved city, only to be destroyed by the jets who are launching bombs on the high structure construction, on small ones on every meter of the city, demolishing everything it has been built in there for generations. The survivors are looking back at the home it used to belong to them, all they are feeling sad and speechless as they are looking at the jets who are demolishing all of their hard work they''ve done to this beautiful city with culture.


    "Jayceˇ­" says Bibi to her fianc¨¦, as she is looking at the explosions of the city who is starting to be on fire.


    "Yes?" asks Jayce who is baffled at the jets.


    "There will be no way back there, right?"


    "Definitely not." says Jayce.


    When the boat got filled with the remaining survivors, it leaves s the beach and lets dozens of soldiers and survivors remain on the camp and wait orders from the higher ups to check the status of the city if it still has zombies on the streets who are still crawling and if it is certain to rebuild a small operation base in India. If the city it will turn out to be still infected, the other choice would be to use nuclear bombs.


    On the boat, the band of musicians is looking at their beloved home, who has now been ruined, Tarya is the only one crying from the band while others are holding their tears and thinking about memories of their birthplace. They never thought a day like this will come, when they will see their city ruined by creatures lurking from the earth.

 Priest of Death - Part 1

    A few days have passed since the first infection in Eastern Europe, and things have gone horribly wronger than the Organization could have expected it. And by horribly wrong we mean the evolution of Z viruses known by many as zombies, walkers, infected etc. Their evolution was not predicted by the Organization, and the way of their behaviour.


    They found out zombies, who were Undead type, who could still have the capacity of human thinking. They could understand humans, talk back to them, and still has the way to differentiate zombies from humans. But still, this type of Undeads has come with a twisted disadvantage and advantage. These types of viruses corrupt people minds.


    For now, only three cases of these Undeads have been reported in the artificial islands, and one of them is the same pink-haired girl who ran from Cluj with a bunch of people. That girl is Ana-Maria, and she is the only one who could somehow control her composure with this virus and still gain the capacity to use their powers on Organization missions. The other two have been evaded the artificial islands, and are on the run in Africa


    ***


    At a normal looking airfield on one of the artificial islands, a squad of people dressed in hard uniform that can depict the one of the Organization who couldn''t match the ones of the riot equipment used in the USA to chill the rioters and looters. A soldier who is wearing this type of uniform usually has a helmet to protect from bite, blood and acidic vomit or blood which is corrosive, a hard armour that protects the upper body that is the equivalent of three Kevlar vests, arms made of metal to protect from bites, legs covered with metal wires, and shoes which are mostly used in mountain climbing. All the soldiers of that squad have taken their helmets off and are heading to a tent where they have been called for a meeting.


    From that squad there is Alina, Lee and Klaus, three survivors who were in the group who ran away from Cluj to get here, on what it looked like to be a habituated island from Greece, now it is a big camp of the survivors in Eastern Europe. These three went through Hell a few days ago, survived a plane crash in Sophia, then run on the entire Bulgaria, Macedonia, and Greece highways, and managed to overcome hordes of zombies with their good combat and luck. They have lost peopleˇ­ Good people who could have been a good addition to this community.


    The group of eleven soldiers, are arriving at the tent where they have been summoned. From there, emerges a man, dressed like a Greek Army General, holding a clipboard with a file. The General looks at the soldiers, who did their salute, salutes them back, and he tells a soldier, who is the commander of this unit, he tells the person in charge to choose six people who will go into Serbia, and the rest will stay here, where they will be sent later in Algeria to evacuate a group of people who have been trapped in a warehouse for two weeks.


    This tale has been unlawfully lifted without the author''s consent. Report any appearances on Amazon.


    The commander looks at the clipboard that is stating the details of the mission, he then looks at his squad and rolls the names.


    "Kay, Zaka, Pumba, Alina, Lee and Klaus. The names I have been called are going with me in Serbia. We have to clean a village that we could use as a headquarters for a small base." he looks at the clipboard again. "Is anyone from here familiar with Serbia? From the group of six people I''ve called?"


    "I am." says Klaus raising his hand, then walks in front. "I had relatives in there. I used to go in my childhood on holidays."


    "Good." says the Commander happy, then he orders the remaining troops to leave. "You know to read the signs?"


    "Yes." says Klaus. "But most are in English nowadays."


    After this, he orders the six people to pack their things and be prepared to leave.


    ***


    Two days ago, middle of night, in Serbia, on a city called on the map as Sirogojno, at a small church from a near village, where corpses lay on the ground, decapitated or crucified, there are four people, who are tied to their hands on their back, standing on a podium where more than twenty villagers are looking at them, holding torches and pitchforks in front of the punished people.


    The four people on the podium are four males, all survivors who were trying to come to a city by the name of Uzice, where it is believed to be an evacuation point of Serbia Army, and there are people who are kept safe by dozens of trained professionals with guns and from Military. It is just like one of those bases from Sweden we discovered in Part 4, but this one, might be better in terms of security and population.


    The four males, are looking terrified at the couple of people who are looking at them angry and holding the torches. They all are trying to move or escape from these restrained, or weaken them, but it is no use to break this metallic rope who was used to restrain them.


    These four people got into this, only because they''ve entered the church and demanded help for another person, who unfortunately died as they got in there. He got bitten by a zombie in the neck, and the moment it turned, he got killed by one of the persons from this group. It was too dark for the survivors to see who has done this thing.


    The four people are named Goran, Zoran, Dragan and Milan if we have to take the name tags from their "Kaufland" vests they are wearing. This might tell that these people have been working in Kaufland, a hypermarket known in Eastern and West of Europe, and from those days, they decided to keep their vests on. Goran is the guy with a horrible scar on his right side of the mouth. Dragan is the short one bandaged on his left hand from a bullet who hit his hand a week ago. Zoran is the person with tore jeans and long blonde hair. And Milan is the bald man who looks like to be in his 40s by the facial traits a person at that age would possess by now.


    As people yelled at the executed things like "Sinners!", "Zombies!", "Devils!" and many more, there comes a person. The man who was walking the stairs of the podium is dressed as an Orthodox priest, walks on a slow step to the podium, holding a golden cane and a bible in the other hand. The Priest tells its audience to stop yelling, and he proceed to speak with them.

 Priest of Death - Part 2

    "We have gathered today to decide the fate of these sinners. Who they''ve dared to bring one of the infected to our village. Their friend has been killed and has been sent to Kingdom of Heaven, where He will help his poor soul purify and forgive all of the sins he has committed." he walks to the right side of the podium, where he puts the Bible down, on a table, and continues to monologue. "Our village, have been through a lot of the sins Satan has unleashed upon us. This Devil has made our close people transform into devilsˇ­ Devils who have ruined our lives. Transformed our lives into terror. And for what? For what they''ve done this blasphemy to God?"


    "To punish us!" says the crowd of people who are not infected nor bitten.


    "Yes. These things are coming from God. From Himˇ­ They come here. To punish us. And to give us a second chance of remaking." says the priest sounding not normal. He turns around to the four people, who are tied from toes to hands on their pole. He walks toward Milan. "You must be the leader of this small group of sinners?"


    "We. We are not sinners!" says Milan to the Priest.


    "Yes, you are." says the priest in a scary tone. "You people have spread this disease of God.".


    The priest reveals to Milan a bite mark of a zombie who is hidden under his black robe. The bite is big enough to belong to a zombie who that is on the adult state. By looking at the bite mark, he can see this bite is probably weeks old because of the texture he is having and becoming a little darker. This makes Milan to look terrified at the priest as he is looking questionable and scared at the bite mark.


    "God has chosen me to deliver the cured ones to Kingdom of Heaven!" says the priest hiding the bite mark. "I am immune to this plague!"


    He leaves Milan alone, letting him look in terror at the priest who is walking toward the person named Dragan. The priest only looks at the bandages of the Dragan from his hand. He looks at Dragan, who is telling the priest.


    "I am not infected! I am not a zombie!"


    "Zombie?" asks Priest. "That''s what you call the Sinners? Zombies? Walkers? Dead-eaters? These are still people. Butˇ­ They are plagued by God." respond the priest who is touching the bandaged hand of Dragan.


    The story has been stolen; if detected on Amazon, report the violation.


    "Ahh!" screams Dragan as he got his hand touched where the bullet hit him.


    "Hmˇ­" says the Priest who has uncovered the wound from the bandages. He looks disappointed at Dragan. "You are hurtˇ­ Hurt by a weapon from the Devil himself."


    He covers the wound of Dragan by using the same bandages and he walks toward the podium. There, he looks at its people who are all staying in silence. That group numbers about seventeen people if they count the people who are holding torches. The big crowd demands at the same time.


    "Death to the Sinners!"


    "Kill the Sinners!"


    The priest only raised his hand in sign of silence to the crowd, he takes a look at the four people who are tied to the poles. All are looking terrified at the Priest. The priest turns around to the crowd of people, and he speaks to them.


    "Burn the Sinners!"


    The crowd has erupted into screams of joy. The four people, hearing the word from the priest, they all have looked scared and terrified by this statement. He did say that. He did command these people to burn them. The priest leaves the podium, with his Bible, and his cane. The globe he put in the hands of a small child. as he departs from the podium, three males are setting the podium on fire by using their torches and gasoline of them is keeping for these types of executions.


    When the podium was burning, the four survivors, are looking in disbelief at the crowd of people who are looking with joy at them, as they are struggling to free themselves from this bad thing it will come upon them. They all are trying to form themselves by moving their hands and muscles to make the rope lose its strength.


    Lucky for Dragan, who was not tied back when the Priest was checking his bandage, he manages to free his hands very easily. He proceeds to free his tied legs, and after he freed himself. He runs to Milan to free him. Dragan manages to free him in almost ten seconds. After this, both of them are freeing the reaming two prisoners of this "punishment".


    When they managed to free from the tied poles, they ran from the podium who is burning. when the four survivors have left the podium, the crowd of seventeen people are running to them, all yelling the words: "Sinners!", "Devils!", "Satan!". One of them, was even shooting them, but he missed from twenty meters to the ear of Milan.


    "Run!" yells Goran to the three people who were confused at the crowd of people.


    The four people are running from this church. Managing to dodge bullets from the angry crowd and outrun some of these people who were running after them. The four survivors have all been through zombies hordes and mad people these past three weeks since the first infection has started in Serbia. But this, will probably be their end to this journey if they do not manage to get to the army headquarters.

 Priest of Death - Part 3

    In a random house, an empty one, the group of four survivors, have managed to get inside and hide in there. Dragan, Milan, Goran and Zoran are all fine, not bitten by any of the rising creatures or hit by a bullet of the angry villagers. The gang is looking confused and desolation to these villagers who were willingly to kill them because they brought their sick friend, who they did not help and let him turn into one of the zombies.


    "Shit, shit, shit, shit." says Zoran looking at his friends in whisper. "W-Why is this happening to us?"


    "I don''t know." says Dragan to Zoran taking a peek on the window to scout the villagers who have started a lookout team on the entire village. "These people are controlled by that human." he feels pain to his hand he got touched hard by the Priest. "That son of a bitchˇ­" he says looking at his arm.


    "That thing is not human." says Milan shaking, staying on the chair and looking on the floor scared shitless. "T-The thingˇ­ The thing is a zombie."


    "Milan?" asks Zoran approaching Milan. "Are you alright?"


    "N-No. I saw the Priest bite mark. It is of a zombie. I am sure of it, guys!"


    "That Priest is a zombie? Then how he can talk and move?!"


    "I don''t know!" says Milan trembling. "H-H-He is going to kill us."


    "The man will not kill us!" says Zoran grabbing Milan by its shoulder and looks straight to his eyes. "He can''t catch us! Alright? That thing will not find us and he will not kill us!"


    They remain in silent, looking at each other, nobody knows what to do at this moment. They are staying in this house, hidden and waiting for the moment they will be able to escape the village. But, before a minute could pass since all of them have retaken their position, they hear a screaming coming from outside, it belongs to an old woman.


    This content has been misappropriated from Royal Road; report any instances of this story if found elsewhere.


    Dragan is looking at the window of house. He looks to the direction where the screaming was coming from, but he couldn''t see much because outside is night, and the screaming came from a house who is at about one hundred meters from them. Dragan looks at the house and observes how a few villagers, from the scouting group are running to see what is happening. He cannot see clearly who have entered the house, but he turns around to his people and tells them.


    "Okay. I think we can escape now. While everyone is focused on their thing."


    "What happened?" asks Milan to Dragan.


    "Someone must''ve died or gave birth. I don''t know. There is an old woman who is screaming for villagers to come inside of her house." Dragan takes from a table what it looks like to be a bad at touching, but at seeing, he is not sure because of the dark and this house has no light source. "Shit. We have to find some useful weapons. Otherwise we are screwed."


    The other survivors couldn''t find anything as useful as what Dragan has found. But they''ve still had their small knives from store, hidden in their vests, that were used to cut packages with supplies to be arranged in the shop. The group of four people, are leaving slowly and silently the house, then they are walking on a silent position, like crone to hide themselves on the high weed in the garden of the house. The survivors are looking on the sky, notice the clouds are looking a bit grey in the dark, which means a rain will inevitably come at any given moment.


    The group is walking slowly toward in a garden owned by a farmer. as they are walking, they are very careful to not step on the crops of this garden. They continue walking until they arrive at a small pond where there is a man. A man on his thirty, sleeping on the pond with a bottle of beer in his left hand. The man snores like a chainsaw, making the survivors almost have a heart attack when they saw him.


    Upon seeing the man, the four people came to conclusion to leave this drunk bag at the pond and continue their sneaky walking outside of the village. While they were walking the sleeping, man was muttering in his sleep a girly name and snored.


    Leaving the pond, the group, seeing there isn''t anyone near them, they are going on the street and they run to a house which it looks like it is abandoned, due to the fact it is not lightened by a candle in the interior. The four people, are entering on the front door, then they walk inside the house to the other side of the three-room village. They are leaving on the other side, and run into the forest, to the one where they came from earlier. Now the group, is walking toward the street, to see if they are lucky to find a vehicle on the street. Or at least something with wheels.

 Priest of Death - Part 4

    ***


    Meanwhile, on a random house, in the village of Sirogojno, the priest is coming inside of the house, where many other villagers have gathered in a room, to look at what is going on and see if they can do something to the situation they are facing. In the house have gathered around twelve villagers, all by different ages and sex, but all sharing the same religion. To the bed on the main room rests the body of a woman, who is holding her newborn baby in blankets. She just gave birth to a baby, who is not looking in a good health.


    The people gathered around the bed, rumours started spreading about the health of the baby and of the mother of it. And before you know it, the baby started to exhale the sound a zombie would make, that hissing and groaning who cannot be mistaken by anything else.


    "Is it a zombie?" asks a village who looks like to be in his mid-thirty.


    "Yesˇ­" says another village holding the knife, and looking at the mother who is starting to push the baby on slow rhythm from her.


    Then, someone enters the room, that person who''ve entered it is Sava. The same priest who have tried to kill the four people who entered their village in front of the villagers. The priest walks from the crowd gathered around the bed, he approaches the female who is holding the body of the baby who is exhaling furious sizzling and moving its hands. The priest, as he approached the baby, he grabs it slowly from her mother body, and hold in its hands.


    "I am sorry what happened to your small childˇ­" says the priest sounding heart-breaking. "I''ve had a son, who has also died in my hands. But it was long ago." he says this thinking this will help the mother pain feel less awful, but this looks like it did not help too much. "Our souls have been cursed by Satan. This is not your fault." he said the last sentence looking at the mother. "This is the work of the Devil himself."


    "W-What are you going to do to my son?" asks the man who seems it is the father of his son.


    "What it should be done." says the Priest who is holding the baby up high.


    And all of a sudden, the Priest puts the baby on the table. He lets it move uncontrollably, trying to grab the Priest who is not even far at him. The Priest knows a zombie cannot bite him, but he never thought a zombie baby will try to grab on him and eat him. Sava is taking the knife of a villager, and before he was about to do the unthinkable, he looks at the father of the child who is starting to tremble.


    "Ped." says the priest to the man. "I have to do this. In the name of God."


    "Don''t spout that bullshit!" says the man angry, getting up and about to jump on him.


    "Pedria." says a woman from the group. who looks to be a relative of him.


    "No. This priest is a monster! I am the only one who saw his weird behaviour? Are you all blind?... Do not touch my baby!"


    If you stumble upon this tale on Amazon, it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it.


    "He needs to be sent to a better place."


    "N-No. H-He is fine. It can be cured. We need medicine."


    "It cannot be." says Sava to the man, who is looking helpless in this situation. "And you know it better than this."


    The man is looking at Sava, and was about to walk a step forward, but it gets grabbed by a villager before he was about to jump on him. The man tires to free himself, but another village comes fast to catch the other arm and hold him strong. While he is getting hold together in a place, and the villagers try to hold him down, Sava does his thing. He uses the knife to stab the heart of the baby.


    After the stab was done, blood was dripping from its wound. Sava takes a bit of blood from there, and makes a cross on the forehead of the baby, who is still moving and sizzling at Sava, moving its hands and feet frenetically. When it made the cross, Sava says a few words to the baby, indistinguishable words even for any speaking Serbian person because he said it in mutter. Then, he stabs the forehead of the child, the place where the blood cross was made. The baby stopped moving.


    "It is done." says Sava.


    "You monster!" yells the father of the child. "Bring me back the child, you monster!"


    "You cannot bring a soul back to what it is." says the Priest to the man, who is getting angrier. He glances at the bed of the mother, who is starting to breathe heavily.


    Sava is a bit concerned by the way the mother of the dead child is breathing. He approaches the mother, looks at her body, and observes a small bite on the left hand, on the wrist level. When he saw the bite mark, the priest is looking sadden at the father, who is starting to cry, and sobs.


    "Elena! Elena!" yells the holding man at the boy of his wife who is turning into a zombie, slowly.


    "God want your soul to be together with the child of yours." says Sava saddened by this.


    The man holds the hand on the bite mark, he looks at the woman, who is turning her head to him, she breathes heavy, then she says to the priest in a whisper tone, only for him to hear it.


    "I-I am okayˇ­"


    "Yes, dearˇ­" says the Priest taking the knife, and impaling on the heart of the woman, who is grasping for air, then the priest quickly stabs the head of the woman, to stops her to become a zombie. "There, thereˇ­ You will rest your soul into Kingdom of Heaven."


    Sava raises up, and as we were about to turn around, he sees the husband of the woman collapse on its knees. The villagers are starting to leave him alone. The man doesn''t have any strength left to do anything, only to speak, so the man is looking at the priest, hopeless and says to him.


    "Leave my homeˇ­ Leave my home, you monster."


    Sava obeys the request, and he leaves the house, together with the other villagers, leaving the man named Ped alone in his house, grieving the death of her wife and newborn child. As he was crying and sobbing near the bed of his wife, in his mind, a thought comes to him. "Kill the Priest. Kill the Priest. Kill the Priest by any chance you''ve got.". The man remains on the bed, crying and reminiscing every memory he had with his dead wife.


    When the villagers left the house, they continued the searching of the fugitive people. All the villagers are wondering where they would go. Sava, is looking at his fingernails, he has a blood spot on it, blood from the body it doesn''t belong to him. He licks the blood from the fingernail, then, he looks on the direction of a forest net to his village. Tells the people who were waiting for its order.


    "In the forest." says Sava in a few seconds.


    The people start to run to the said forest, about six of villagers, all holding some weapon categorized as melee types by video games enjoyers. All the six are running, while Sava is walking in a slower pace after them, holding a bloody cross on his right hand, he let it outside. Sava, as he walks toward the forest, he can sense where the four fugitives are. Sava have used the blood of Dragan wound to check where he was running. Earlier he pressed the wound of Dragan hard enough to free some blood from it.

 Priest of Death - Part 5

    ***


    At a distance of three kilometres away from the village, somewhere in North, the group of four survivors reached a street. There are a lot of wrecked cars, corpses of zombies decaying and a few zombies walking slowly around them. Dragan, is holding his hurt hand, and cringes as the pain is going through its mind.


    "Are you okay?" asks Milan to Dragan.


    "I am fine." says Dragan to Milan, and to everyone else. "I am fine."


    "We should rest." says Goran.


    "No." says Dragan. "We need to get to Uzice. The Evac is right there. All we need is to find some wheels and we can get there faster."


    "Wheels?" asks Zoran looking at the street. "Hope we''ll have luck today."


    Zoran and Goran proceed to walk on the street and search for any working car on the street, or any type of vehicle in there. Dragan holds his pain feeling away from its mind, and joins the searching with Zoran and Goran. Milan is going to the first car, he looks inside of the window and sees in the car an axe. The man opens the car door and grabs the axe, then he takes it from there.


    "Found something?" asks Dragan looking to the direction of Milan.


    Dragan cannot see Milan has grabbed an axe because of the night, and the low luminosity of the wrecked cars who are still having some power on. Milan goes closer to Dragan, he shows him the axe and goes to help the other two comrades search for a working car.


    Goran checks the interior of a small truck, he opened the door of the back, and observes on the back there are is a zombie. Goran was about to take its knife from the vest, but he observes the zombie who was only looking at him, and turned back to the dark. Goran, was about to kill an Undead zombie. He closes the backside of the truck and continues searching.


    "Thank you."


    That word came from the truck. It was something so low on volume he thought this was coming from its mind, and not from the truck. He did not take its time to think about this, he continues their searching. He approaches a car with four seats, he observes in the interior of the car there is a corpse of an old man. His torso is tore open to the skin, revealing bitten organs and missing heart. Goran only sees a bit of the corpse, to all because of the darkness outside, but by the smell it irradiates from the car, he can deduce the thing there is dead for good with no chance of coming back as a zombie.


    Unauthorized duplication: this tale has been taken without consent. Report sightings.


    "Guys." says Milan to their people as a shout. "We''ve found a car."


    The other three members are running to where was Milan calling them. The three people are running to that direction it was coming from, which it was pretty close for them. Milan has found a car, a working one, but it has trouble, it is turned upside down. The rest of the group are discussing a bit about this, deciding if they should try their luck to turn the thing around, and use it to help them reach at Uzice.


    They decide to try their luck of turning around the car. But they don''t have any luck with this technique of theirs. The group continues to searching for another working car, or any vehicle.


    After a while of searching, the group finds a working car, from the distance of about two hundred meters from the last cars. The four survivors, upon fining the car, they were about to get in it, but they are all surprised when they opened the door to trigger a really loud alarm. The one who opened the door was Goran, and he tells them to enters as fast as possible in it.


    The four people are gathering inside of the car, Goran jumps on the drier seat, Zoran next to Goran, Dragan and Milan are going on the backside of the car. As Goran turned the car engine one, he backs away from there, and drives ahead to the road who will take them to Uzice. As the car contains to drives and dodges the wreckage on its way, Dragan is feeling a little sick by all of this. He almost threw up in the car.


    "Dragan. You aright?" asks Milan, worried about Dragan.


    "Yes. I am fine." responds Dragan, who is feeling not fine.


    The car leaves the road, and drives further to where Uzice supposed to be. As the car continues to drive further, zombies are starting to follow the group of survivor, because of the car alarm and the loud engine motor. And from the forest emerges the priest Sava, and his six villagers who are looking mad at the car who have left.


    "They have gone." says a villager angry. "We should go after them." he addressed to Sava.


    "And that''s what we will do." says Sava to the villagers. "Get your cars. We are going after them."


    "But where they are going?" asks another villager. "We don''t know where they are heading?"


    "We know Vasyli." says Sava to the villager.


    Sava remains silent for a second. He closes its eyes, then, he opened them, he says to the group of six people.


    "Uzice."


    "Alright." says a few villagers, going back to their village to get their cars and prepare their arsenal to hunt down the four survivors who have entered their village.


    When the most members of the small group have gone, Sava remains in the place, he looks for a moment to the street, to a few zombies who are walking after the car of the four survivors. He can see the exact number of zombies which is thirty-five. He looks back, and decides to leave this place to prepare his arsenal for the next journey.


    "We have to stop them." says Sava to himself.

 Priest of Death - Part 6

    After a while, from a distance of three kilometres from Uzice, the team of four people stops in front of a blockage composed by hundreds of cars, trucks, and even a destroyed plane, which from there, they have to abandon their car and go on foot toward Uzice. Dragan is the first person to get out of the car, then comes Milan, Goran and Zoran. All four are looking at the blockage, feeling sick of the events that are happening to them every day since the beginning of this apocalypse.


    "Now what?" asks Goran to Milan.


    "Guess we have to walk." says Milan to its people, he looks at Dragan. "Can you walk?"


    "Yes." says Dragan to Milan. He can feel the wound of the bullet hurting much more. He did manage to find some cloth and use it as a kind of bandage to cover the hurt area of the hand, but this is not enough without any strong painkillers.


    "Look." says Zoran pointing at the fallen plane, who is now just like every vehicle from here, damaged and with no use.


    The plane in front of them is a Boeing model, only its front half is on the blocked street. The other part must''ve been somewhere far from here because it is not on this background. The group wonders if any of the people from that plane did survive, or all of them have died, including the pilot. Milan is wondering about another thing.


    "How could''ve the plane have crashed? Zombies cannot fly, right?"


    "Don''t jinx it, Milan." says Goran to Milan. "Now, let''s get away from here. I can already sense some undead nearby."


    The people continue to walk on foot toward the Uzice. They leave the car on the street because it will be no use to take it on the street with the wrecked cars and vehicles. They can''t turn around because they would be risking of having a contact with that Priest who earlier was trying to murder them in front of people.


    The group walks about a hundred meters. They found on a car a small pistol. Goran takes the pistol, he looks at it, and checks its magazine, sees there are only five bullets left.


    "Five bullets." says Zoran loading the magazine of the pistol back to its place.


    "You can use a gun?" asks Dragan to Zoran.


    "Yes. I''ve used to go on the shooting range as a kid with my father." says Zoran. "Never thought this will be handy on these times."


    "You have to be careful." says Dragan to Zoran. "Five bullets are important to us in the worst-case scenario, plus loud sound can attract zombies. So, remember, use it with precaution."


    "I know, Dragan." says Zoran feeling a little annoyed by Dragan.


    The group continues to walk further.


    At the mark of two hundred and half meters, they encounter a zombie who is eating a dead dog. The group decides to kill it. Goran uses his cutting box knife and stabs the head of the creature. After it got stabbed, Goran retrieve its knife, and stabs the creature a second time to be sure he won''t move further. He starts breathing heavy from this attack, and feels a little weird because this survivor rarely kills a zombie.


    The tale has been taken without authorization; if you see it on Amazon, report the incident.


    "Are you good?" asks Goran to Zoran.


    "Yes." says Zoran, and he looks at the body, he observes something on the street. He takes it from the street, and holds on its hand. It''s a card, an identity card. So, Zoran decides to let the identity card on the pocket of the zombies, and backs away from it.


    "Let''s move." says Milan to the group, taking the lead.


    They walk more than eight hundred meters on the street, and they reach the crashing plane. The group observes on the street something, luggage''s. The four people are quickly dispatching and are searching in the luggage for something useful. After three minutes of searching the group have found the following: a flashlight, an axe, three handguns, a map and a first aid kit. The group continues to walk on the street toward the city of Uzice.


    After five minutes, they see on a small sign a word written in Serbian, which translates the following: "Evacuation Zone! Two kilometres ahead.". The group is feeling hopeful about this, so they continue to walk further.


    Ten minutes pass, and they see another sign which states they are approaching the evacuation zone, which is at a kilometre ahead. And they continue to walk, but as they continue to walk further, they see about is zombies who are sitting on their arse and look at the wreckage of cars like a melancholic person. The group is quickly going on action and they kill the zombies using their axe and cutting box knives.


    "Why there aren''t as many zombies as used to be on the other streets?" asks Milan. "It seems strange to me."


    "That must mean the evacuation zone is close." says Dragan. "These must''ve been loose zombies."


    The group continues their walking toward Uzice, they are getting close to the city.


    After another ten minutes, the group of four people arrive in front of the gates of Uzice, but as they''ve arrived there, their hope has been shattered in a million pieces, like a glass who has fallen from a rooftop. In front of this city, there is a wrecked wall, and hundreds of corpses of zombies, military people and civilians. They see the destruction these creatures have unleashed, but they cannot comprehend the way a few messy zombies who can walk or run can do such thing, especially on a place like this who was heavily armed with personnel and tanks.


    Zoran is looking at a watch tower nearby them, he sees the structure is on the brink of collapsing on the street, he sees the light of the watch tower being destroyed and a machine gun on there. Dragan sees on the streets military personnel, all wear uniforms, with the name of "Organization", most of them holding high quality guns and melee weapons, yet they''ve been killed by zombies who weren''t a big deal to the group of four people. They wonder, what kind of creature could provoke such damage to this high fortified city.


    "Godˇ­ What happened here?" asks Dragan shocked by all of this.


    "I-It was supposed to stand." says Zoran losing all of the hope of being rescued.


    "W-hat monster did this?" asks Milan to the group. "This is not any work of an ordinary zombie we''ve encountered so far."


    "Whatever it is." says Dragan. "We have to be careful. They may be here more zombies than outside."


    Dragan walks inside of the city.


    "We''re going in?" asks Milan to Dragan.


    "We have to." says Dragan. "We may have the luck to contact any military personnel to come to our rescue."


    "You think so?"


    "I feel it." says Dragan. "We may be lucky, who knows if any device of this fortified city can still work."


    "Hope you are right." says Zoran.


    Zoran and Goran walked after Dragan, and Milan remains on its position for a second, then after a quick thinking, he goes after the other three people, searching for any working radio station in these wreckages. The moment they''ve entered the city, they know there will be no turning back, but they all decided to risk it, hoping they could be able to contact any military personnel.

 Priest of Death - Part 7

    ***


    In the present, on one of the artificial islands, located at approximately at four hundred kilometres away from Greece, on the airfield, the six soldiers, together with two pilots are embarking in a plane, that are transporting them to Serbia. Their mission, is to clean it by the zombies, and establish a small base in there. And by "cleaning it" means reduction to zero.


    "Alina." says Lee to Alina, which is a close person to him from the time when she and other people were running from Cluj Napoca, Romania, to Greece. "Wait up."


    "What''s up?" asks Alina to Lee, stopping from walking further toward the plane who will transport the soldiers takes with cleaning to Serbia.


    "We have to talk."


    "Can''t this wait?"


    "No. It''s about Ana."


    "What about her?" asks Alina curios by this question.


    "She can do it? She can control the virus?"


    "It''s too soon to say." says Alina to Lee after a few seconds of thinking. "The doctors told me she will need a few more days isolated in a dark room. If she is able to overcome the urge of the virus, she can live."


    "If not sheˇ­" says Lee feeling a bit scared to say it in front of Alina.


    "She will be killed." says Alina to Lee, who has taken some courage to say this.


    This tale has been unlawfully lifted without the author''s consent. Report any appearances on Amazon.


    Alina and Lee continue to walk to the plane. Upon entering in there, they see every other soldier have taken their seat and armoury. On the military plane are about twenty seats, but on this mission have been sent only Kay, Zaka, Pumba, Alina, Lee and Klaus, plus other five new volunteers who wanted to do some help to this base. Alina and Lee are taking seats close to Klaus, who is other friend of the two survivors who were running from Cluj.


    "You people ready?" asks Klaus to Alina and Lee who are buckling their seats.


    "Yes." says Lee. "You dude. Are you alright?"


    "Fine. You?"


    "Yeap."


    "Goodˇ­" Klaus is looking at Alina. "Is Ana going to be okay?"


    "Yes." says Alina hoping it will happen.


    "Niceˇ­" he says as he is looking at the crates of weapons who are transported into the plane. Crates with ammunition needed to clean the city of Serbia, which was not revealed yet to the group of eleven people.


    "Where will be dropping us?" asks Alina to Klaus.


    "He told me about a city. Didn''t catches the name quite right because the commander had some gibberish accent as he was saying the name, but I believe it starts with letter "U" and ends with "e". But he told me in advance it is a city who once was an evacuation point, and they wanted it clean, to later be reused as an evacuation point. Again."


    "What happened last time?" asks Lee to Klaus. "He didn''t tell you?"


    "Yes, he did. He told me about a group of zombies classes F who have managed to enter the city, break the walls with cars and dropped watchtowers by themselves. They were throwing those cars to the base. He did not specify the distance, but it was far enough to not be spotted by the watchtowers."


    "Damnˇ­ Class F. We never encountered that in our run, right?"


    "No. We did not." says Alina thankful of this. "But have you killed one?"


    "No." says Klaus. "But I heard from other soldiers they die like the others. A headshot."


    After the crates were loaded, the commander of the squad walks into the plane, he looks at his people, he tells them to be prepared because they will leave in a minute. Then, he walks ahead, and sit on the empty seat, near the four crates of high calibre and advanced weapons. The commander also puts his seatbelt, and waits for the plane to leave.


    After a few minutes, the large military plane, have left the airfield, heading to a city of Serbia. His exact name, still unknown to the squad.

 Priest of Death - Part 8

    ***


    Back to the night when the group of four survivors have arrived in Uzice, a lost city who once was a promising evacuation point, and a base for the locals to live safely. One of the person from the group, Milan, is leading his group into an abandoned building.


    Upon entering the building, the four people are looking around, seeing destruction on the interior, and some written words on the walls with black paint, words such as: "Nobody is safe!", "Place is dead!", "Do not trust Military!", words like that. There was even a letter on a wall near the exit door, the letter was written by a woman who was expressing her regrets of coming here rather than risking her chances of going to Croatia''s Dock.


    "Let''s go upstairs." says Dragan to his people. "We have to rest."


    "Okay." says Zoran. "But what we will do later?"


    "Probably going away from here or try to communicate with military." says Goran.


    The four people agree to rest in this house. Dragan, Goran, Zoran and Milan are walking upstairs to the second floor, arriving in there, they see on the hall corpses of zombies, all dead, shoot on the head, head smashed into pieces, decapitated or stabbed. They ignore the corpses, walking on them, and searching any available apartment that will not have the awful smell of decaying corpses. On the six apartments, they''ve only found one room who wasn''t touch by any zombie, but it was in disaster. It looked like a room of a cabin where students would rent it for their New Year Eve''s.


    The four people couldn''t complain about this. They entered the apartment, locked the door after them, and goes to any suitable place for them top sleep. Dragan goes to a couch who is situated on a living room. Milan and Goran are heading to a bedroom both taking the same bed, and Zoran, decides to stay on the living room, with Dragan, he sits on a chair and keeps his guard for the night.


    As Zoran stayed on the chair, he is looking at the window, and sees darkness. The cold night summer who would be suitable for anyone to walk on the streets. Zoran gets out of the chair slowly, to not wake Dragan from its sleep, he looks at the window, down to the street to see what is happening there. He cannot see much due to the darkness, but he can sense the destruction on the streets as he sees figures of zombies walking in a slow pace. He is wondering whom creature could be able to do such destruction to a secured place like this and causes mass of people to leave a place like this.


    Zoran decides to stay looking at the window for a while before he will be going to sleep. He looked at the figures of the zombies outside, wondering if these things can ever go back to normal if everything will come back to the way it was. He is thinking about his girlfriend, who once had the bad luck to be bitten by a zombie, a child zombie, from the kindergarten she was working at that time. This happened while Zoran and his four group of co-workers were fighting off zombies in Kaufland. Tear drops out from its eyes when images of his dear girlfriend came to its mind. He was about to ask the big question that day, but the Life threw everything and made Zoran miserable.


    Unauthorized use: this story is on Amazon without permission from the author. Report any sightings.


    After a few minutes, when Zoran was about to go to bed, he sees something at the windows, on the streets. It looks like to be flashlights, and a group of people walking onto the streets. Zoran looks carefully at the group of people, and he sees they are in big numbers. He thinks these people have come to rescue them, so he takes a pistol (he doesn''t want to take its chances) and he leaves the apartment, leaving his friends alone, letting them have a good sleep while Zoran is going outside.


    Arriving outside, after he slowly opened the door, he looks on the street, and observes the group of people who are walking on the street, who have passed the resting place. Zoran is not calling after them, he hides on a wreckage car, spying on them hoping these are good people.


    "Are they close?" asks a person from the group, sounding like a middle-aged man.


    "Yes." says a person whose voice sounds similar to Zoran.


    The moment Zoran heard the voice, he is wondering who would be, then the following sentence has made him aware of who is the person coming in here with a group like this.


    "Sinners are in this city. But I cannot say for certain where."


    "OH, no." says Zoran to himself after he heard the voice of Sava. He looks at the group once again, and looks away, then checks the magazine of the pistol he has taken. He sees it has only eight bullets in it. He decides to take its chances.


    "If I die." he says to himself shaking its hand on the pistol. "At least I helped my friends made it alive and safe."


    Zoran raises from his hideout, and pulls the trigger of the pistol. He shoots the first bullet of a 9 mm gun, who hit the neck of a villager from the group. After it hit the neck, the villager falls on the ground, the five people of the group turned around to the direction of Zoran, they aim their weapons to him and pulls their trigger. Zoran manages to dodge the shots of the villagers, and shoots six bullets as he hides his body behind the wrecked car. He hears how two bullets have hit two people due to their screaming.


    When the gunshot of the assault rifles has stopped, Zoran takes deep breath, leaves its hideout and was about to pull a trigger, but then, a zombie jumps on him from the dark. That zombie pins Zoran, and he was about to eat him, but Zoran managed to aim his pistol to the head of the creature, pushing it far enough for him to pull the trigger and kill the zombie.


    Before he could take a breath, Zoran, gets shot in the head, five times, by the villagers who still have some bullets left into their assault rifles magazines. When Zoran has fallen to the ground, images of her girlfriend, family, friends and parents have been flashing it before its eyes. He then succumbed to a deep sleep.


    When Zoran died, Sava, the priest, approaches Zoran, he takes a small part of its blood from the holes the bullets have left. He licks the blood of Zoran from his palm, then he looks at the apartment where the three survivors are hiding.


    "They are there." says Sava pointing its hand to the apartment where the remaining three survivors are sleeping.

 Priest of Death - Part 9

    Thanks to the gunshots outside of the apartment, the three fugitives, have wakened from their slumber, took their weapons and leave the apartment. Dragan has seen only Goran and Milan leaving the rooms, and his dark thoughts came to its head. He knows Zoran he is most likely outside, fetching off the people there. The trio is leaving the apartment, and as they were climbing down the stairs, they hear the doors getting opened. The trio stops from descending, and they ascend to last floor, hiding from the people who are coming after them. How they knew they are a group of people and not only Zoran? Footsteps at the staircase. The sound of four people ascending the stairs at the building.


    The trio gets to the last floor, they are going inside in an empty and unlocked room, they enter it, locks the room with furniture from the room, look around, and head to the room where there is situates a long metallic ladder attached to the walls who are having the purpose to help the people who are stuck on the top floors while the building is on fire. Milan opens the windows and he takes the ladder first.


    "Follow me." says Milan in whispering tone.


    Milan descends the ladder, after him comes Dragan, who manages to catch the ladder and descend successfully even if he is injured, and comes Goran, who was waiting for Dragan to get to the first-floor level. After he got on the ladder, he manages with hardship to close the window, to fool the group of people to think they are hiding in the apartment room.


    After all the three people got outside they start to run from there, as fast as they can, and without being detected. They left the place empty-handed, leaving with only their handguns they''ve found earlier in on their run. The trio runs for two hundred meters, into a small garage, there they close the metallic door and stayed in there, relaxed for a bit.


    "Zoran." says Goran feeling sad. "Fuckˇ­"


    "Shh." says Milan to Goran. "We have to be quiet."


    "I know." says Goran in a whispering tone. "But these monstersˇ­ I am going to kill them all."


    "Don''t!" says Dragan to Goran. "H-How did they find us?"


    "That dammed priest." says Milan angry. "He will kill us all. For what? For asking their help?"


    "They are all monsters." agrees Goran to Milan. "W-What they have done to Zoran?"


    "I don''t know." says Milan. "But I hope he is alive."


    "Shh~" says Dragan to his two friends after he heard some footsteps, he tells them in a low voice. "Quiet."


    The genuine version of this novel can be found on another site. Support the author by reading it there.


    The trio could hear footsteps coming from outside, slowly walking toward the garage door. As the footsteps were getting closer to the garage, the three people are holding up their breath, waiting and hoping they will not be spotted. But this could not be guaranteed, because a knock on the garage door almost made the four people have a heart attack.


    "I know you three are in there." says Sava from the other side. "Get out and we can discuss your save. You can still be cleansed."


    "Cleansed by what?" asks Milan to the garage door.


    "By whom? By the Devil of course. One of you are cursed."


    "And who is it?"


    "It''s you." says Sava to the garage door. "Now. In the name of God, Please leave and let me do the thing. And then, I will offer you, the cured ones, shelter."


    "Shelter?!" says Dragan. "You tried to kill us."


    "That was because you''ve brought your infected friend to My People. And I could not permit that."


    "Our friend was not infected!"


    "I wasn''t talking about your dead friend. I am talking about yours alive."


    "Who is it, then? Tell us!" says Dragan.


    "I tell you, it is you."


    "You? You mean me?" asks Dragan.


    "Yes." says Sava in a clam voice. "Now. Please leave this building, and we will escort your infected friend to safety, where we will send him to the Kingdom of Heaven."


    "No." says Milan to all three of us. "We will not come with you. Now leave us alone!"


    "I am afraid I cannot do that." says Sava. "You two know already too much. You need to come with me."


    "What?"


    "You know how We live. How We sleep. How We work. I cannot let you two do as you wish." says Sava. "Now, I am sad by this, but I have no choice. I have to exterminate all three of you if you do not obey my command."


    Outside, Sava looks at his three villagers who are taking their weapons and are approaching the garage door, the three are about to open it, then, they hear an explosion, coming not far from there. Sava and its villagers are looking at the direction the sound of the explosion was coming from, and they see a plane who is falling from the sky and lands from a distance of six hundred meters away from them up North. They''ve seen the plane falling because it was on fire and the explosion was so loud, it couldn''t have been unnoticed.


    "Sava." says a villager to the Priest looking at the plane, after it landed and exploded upon landing. "Should we do it?"


    "Armid. You deal with them." say Sava to a villager, you remain here. "I and with you two," he looks at the two villagers. "will check to see if there are any survivors."


    "Okay." says the two villagers and they run to where the plane crashed with their handguns and pitchforks.


    As the small group of villagers is walking toward the plane. Sava, the Undead Priest, is having a huge smirk on its face as they walk toward the plane crash site with the two villagers. He is having plans upon there.


    The other villager, Armid he remains at the garage''s door, he looks at the door, he looks at its shotgun he is holding. The man walks to the garage door, he opens it, and before he could aim his shotgun to them, Dragan and Goran tackle the villager. Goran takes the shotgun from the villager hand, while Dragan is dealing with Armid. He punches its face with the unbroken hand a few times, then Milan comes, who knocks the villager out by hitting him with a plank after Dragan finished. He applied a plank to its face on a fast speed and enough strength to almost broke the solid plank.


    "He''s unconscious?" asks Goran holding the shotgun and aiming at the body of villager.


    "Yes." says Milan who checked if the villager is truly unconscious.


    "Good. Let''s run from there." says Dragan taking the lead, then it is followed by the other two survivors.

 Priest of Death - Part 10

    Dragan, Milan and Goran, are running on the streets of Uzice, they managed to overcome some zombies who were chasing them. These creatures must''ve rise from their sleep due to the explosion noise coming from the falling plane and the gunshots from earlier. The three people, getting into the streets, they stop on a corner of the street, standing there, shocked, looking at a zombie who is eating from a corpse.


    The zombie turned around to the three survivors. That zombie is wearing a Kaufland vest, is having greenish skin, five bullet marks on its head and darkish blood coming out from its head. The zombie who is walking slowly to the survivors is Zoran, who has been killed by the villagers.


    Goran, he takes a step ahead, holds a pipe from the ground, grasping it tight on its two hands, he prepares himself to commit a heavy hit on the fellow dead friend. When the zombie got close, Goran hit the head of the thing hard enough to make it almost lost its balance. Then he hit it a second time, which it didn''t do much. A third hit was launched, and this one did manage to make the zombie fall on its back. Goran continues to hit Zoran the zombie a several times until it doesn''t move anymore. after he did that, he and his friends, are mourning his dead friend for a while, then having no choice, they continue on walking further.


    "Poor manˇ­" says Milan sadden by the fact he lost another friend.


    "These assholes are going to pay!" says Goran to his friends after they continue to walk and push zombies from their way. He only pushed one who was coming to them in a slow walk, and let Milan push the creature into a sewer hole, where it falls onto his arse.


    "They will pay." says Dragan to Goran, being on his left. "But right now, we have to find a way to contact the Army."


    "But how?" asks Goran to Dragan, who stopped from walking. "This place is a dead city. There is no way there is a working communication to Army."


    "We have to try." say Dragan to Goran. "If not, we will have to continue running until we will eventually escape from city."


    "We should''ve remained in the forest." says Goran to Dragan.


    "Not now." says Dragan a bit angry by this. "This is not the time, okay, Goran?"


    "What happened, happened, Goran." says Milan to the two guys. "It was none of us fault. We were hungry and desperate at that time. And we had to find help any way possible."


    A few zombies are showing up to the survivors, whom they all decide to leave this conversation for another time, to focus on their running from these zombies and finding a viable source of communication with the Army named "Organization".


    ***


    At the plane site crash, someone is leaving the burning flame, a man who has managed to survive the crash, but with a cost. His skin has been burned, together with a part of its clothes and hair. The man left the plane, screaming for help, and walking around in a dizzy state. The man could not see much due to the darkness outside, nor the huge flame of the plane could help the person see its surroundings.


    The person falls on the grass, and it''s screaming of pain, because upon falling, left leg long bone has been broken due to the weight and the injury. When he falls, he was trying to get up, but it was pointless, the only thing the man can do was to scream for help and accept the fate he will be burned. But at least, its body won''t become a zombie.


    "Hello." says a voice.


    Upon hearing the sentence, the man looked around, shocked to hear a human voice on this place. He responded.


    "I am hereˇ­ I am hereˇ­"


    He couldn''t say much because he was coughing blood due to internal bleeding and injuries all over its sin. Every time when he was trying to talk, its chest would hurt and its tongue would hurt even bad. And he was saying that sentence in a wheezing tone, not in a tone that could be heard from a few hundred meters.


    But thankfully, the priest, Sava, has approached the corpse of the man. The burning man is looking at Sava, with hope. But before he could do something, Sava, grabbed the head of the injured person, and he twisted it, until the sound of the breaking bone was heard. after he has done this, he starts eating the body of the survivor of the plane crash. As he was eating the body, the villagers were laying on the ground, not to relax or admire the night. They''ve been bitten, their face ripped apart by Sava.


    Stolen novel; please report.


    The Undead Priest, has showed its true fangs, and now, he is thirsty of meat and blood.


    After he ate the face of a human from the plane crash, as he was munching on its skin he looks back to the city, he smells the air, then, he looks back at the plane crash, he smells the fire from a ten meters distance, and says on a creepy tone.


    "Only one on Fireˇ­ Fireˇ­ This world has no good fireˇ­"


    And the Undead Priest, walks back to the town, holding an assault rifle in its hands, with a smirk on his green-dark face. He walks toward the city as he was speaking with himself.


    "They should dieˇ­Yes. They know everythingˇ­ They know my nature. My food stocks. My way of making these humans believe I am their saviourˇ­ I am using themˇ­ Using them to remain who I am, and to not become a zombie, just like othersˇ­"


    The Undead continues to walk toward the city, where the trio is searching for any reliable electric signal to help them communicate with the said Army and require some help to extract them from this dangerous place.


    ***


    After a while, the trio enters a tent, located on the other side of Uzice, where there was supposed to be a second gate of this fortified base. On the tent, they see most of the things turned upside down or destroyed. The good thing was the fact this tent offered a flashlight, which was on the ground, and Milan almost broke it with its left foot. He takes the flashlight, turned it on and aim around the tent to help him, Dragan and Goran to see the things more clearly in this darkness.


    "Look." says Milan aiming the flashlight to a crate, where there is written in English language the word "Ammo".


    Goran checks the box, but after he opened it, he looks disappointment. The crate is empty, not even a small bullet of a handgun has been left in there. He saw it with the help of Milan''s flashlight.


    "Nothing." says Goran to his people, and he looks around. "There is nothing here."


    "Absolutely nothing." says Milan checking its surroundings with the flashlight.


    "Look." says Dragan, who was walking and crashed into a table. He takes from there a piece of paper. "Milan."


    Milan aims its flashlight to Dragan, who is holding the piece of paper by the size of A4, having something important written in there. The text is written in English language, which is an inconvenient for them, because none of them knows any English to translate the following documents.


    "Zoran knew English." says Goran.


    "These fuckersˇ­" says Dragan thinking about the villagers who have killed their best friend.


    The trio puts the paper away, and continue checking the tent. They do not know the document they''ve looked at contains the short report of the "Undead zombies". On that report it states the undead can gain sentience and control of the undead, but under some restrictions. The report also suggests the reason the base got destroyed, which means it was written in a hurry by a researcher and remained in there, along with more other classified documents.


    The trio continues to search this tent for a working device to help them communicate with the Army. Dragan and Milan looked everywhere on the tent, but then, when Goran decided to leave and search outside, he stumbles on an army zombie corpse, who is dead of course, due to multiple shots in the head, and his chest ripped apart by zombies. Goran calls Milan to come outside, which he did, and tells him to aim the light to the corpse. Milan does as he is ordered, the three people, sees a walkie-talkie on the hands of the soldier.


    Dragan takes the station carefully from the corpse. He did in a quick and silent manner. After that, he turns the station on.


    "H-H-Helloˇ­" says Dragan to the station, not knowing to say.


    "Yes. Hello." says someone from the other side, in a monotone voice.


    The trio were all happy about this, they were almost screaming of joy, but they realize a loud yell could have awakened the zombies from their slumber.


    "We need help." says Dragan to the walkie-talkie. "We are trapped inside Uzice and a zombie is after us."


    "Uzice?" asks the person surprised. "You said Uzice?"


    "Yes."


    "Serbia?" asks the person after two seconds.


    "Yes, sir."


    "Damn." says the person on the other side in disbelief. "That city still stands?"


    "Barely. Almost all of the buildings have fallen, corpses on the entire city and a plane has fallen. But we are not coming from that plane. And we need help, we are attacked by a zombie."


    "A single zombie?" asks the person almost laughing. "Which zombie type?"


    "We don''t know." says Milan to the walkie-talkie. "But that thing is like a human, but can talk and run."


    "Talk and walk?... Is he undead?"


    "We don''t know. We were running from that thing because he was trying to kill us."


    "Oh man." says sounding worried. "I will send a squad over there as soon as possible. in the meantime, please keep yourself safe from that kind of mutants."


    "Is he dangerous?"


    "More dangerous if he is an undead who can talk." says the person on the other side sounding scared. "I will be in touch with you later and tell you the squad, until then, please remain in Uzice."


    Then, the soldier closes the call, and let the three survivors on their own, to figure out what they can do to the Priest zombie who is coming for them. All they can do now is to search for a safe place in this city, and hope the Priest wouldn''t catch them.

 Priest of Death - Part 11

    20 days since the first infection in Serbia have passedˇ­ And things weren''t looking so good on Sirogojno, a village situated in Serbia, known by locals to have a great museum and a priest who helped ever Christmas Eve the small kids who were in local Orphanages either from its village or from another town.


    At this day, the priest, Sava, was on his church, his ordinary orthodox church from the village where he was doing its everyday work. He was talking with an old lady, hearing her things who were on her soul. Saying it to her everything will be forgiven in the God''s eyes and she will be forgiven. The old lady confessed to the priest that she has beat her husband to death, after he bite her arm and tried to tear its flesh apart. The old woman also told the priest it took more than a push from the ledge of the house, because even if the husband had fall on its head, he was still moving, growling and attacked her like nothing had happened.


    "And what happened after that?" asked the Priest to the old lady.


    "I pushed him again from the ledge. B-But this timeˇ­ He raised up and run after Gretchen." says the old lay distraught.


    "Oh noˇ­ And? He was arrested?"


    "W-Worseˇ­ He was killed."


    "Killed?"


    "By a cop. H-he shoot him in the head. And told us to be safe from these kinds of monsters. Heˇ­ He left after that."


    "Dear Godˇ­"


    Then, the old lady, as she was wiping her tears, she started to cough in a loud tone. She coughed so hard the woman threw blood from her mouth. She then, fell from the confession onto the floor, and starts having a seizure. Sava, the Priest, quickly left its spot, and came to help the old lady, but when he approached her, the old lady eyes started to turn white, and pigments of green appeared on her skin.


    "Are you sick, Olga?"


    "I-I-I am, Savaˇ­ Pleaseˇ­ Call theˇ­ Call the doctors." says the old lady.


    Sava quickly took its phone, and calls the emergency number. But it was pointless, because they weren''t responding to the call. Sava tried to call them several times, but every time, the same thing happened, they did not pick it up. nobody picked it up.


    He tried to save the old lady, but after a few minutes f trying to keep her alive on words, the woman draws her last breath. Sava, remained on that point, crouched near the body of the old lady who confessed earlier her husband weird behaviour. When the old lady drew her final breath, Sava raised on its feet, he prays to her, hoping she would reach the Kingdom of Heaven.


    When he was about to finish his prey, he hears a growling sound coming from the old lady, he looked at her, flabbergasted by the fact the old lady was once out of breath, now she has risen up from slumber. He looked shocked by this, but his shocked has transformed to fear when the old lady skin pigments become more in number, and greener, and she lunges to the Priest. Sava has tried to hold the lady back, but it did not work, she managed to get a bite on the neck of Sava, which made him scream and elect violence. He pushed the lady from him, and he runs to its praying room, there, he managed to lock the door with a sturdy furniture, all the three doors and remain isolated in there.


    If you come across this story on Amazon, it''s taken without permission from the author. Report it.


    The man looked on the bite mark with a small window glass handle who was in this room, let probably by him to arrange his long brown bear it has grown since he was in high school, second year of Theology. Sava remains in that room, looking at the window, where he sees the old lady running from the church after three teenagers who were cycling near the church. Thankfully, the three teenagers did outrun the old lady. But Sava did not see enough because the boys and the monster have left its field of vision from the window.


    Sava as he was about to leave, he trips over, and falls on the floor, hitting its head on a table and falling unconscious. The body of the priest remains laying on their room for about five hours, and when he wakes up, he wouldn''t wake up as a normal zombie from movies or TV shows, he would wake up as an Undead.


    On the next day, Sava zombie was still in this room, locked from outside, standing still, looking at a picture of Jesus Christ on a cross, saying some miserable words as he continues to look at the portrait. The zombie remained in that position, looking at the saints, while outside, the outbreak has started its process and has claimed the life of quarter of this village population. There weren''t any people on this day who weren''t trying to enter the church, because all of them were preoccupied to outrun the deads, or to fight them off, but there were little numbers who were fighting the deads, while most of them were focusing on outrunning them.


    On the next day, the body of the priest, is seen in the same room, standing like yesterday, staring at same portrait of Jesus Christ in a cross, and muttering some intelligible words to himself. He continues to stand in the same position for the entire day, until at night, he finally let out a word. A word who could be heard and understood by humans.


    "God."


    On the same night, the creature, who was still undead, looked on the portrait, he blinked every three minutes, which is a new thing because it never did this type of thing before. It was staring at the portrait, for three days straight. Ignoring the destruction outside, buildings on fire and people running around because of the zombies who have taken control of the village.


    On the fourth day, the zombie stands still looking at the portrait of Jesus Christ, this time, the thing was looking at it, and mutters some kind of prayer to himself. But he says the prayer with doing anything religious related, he just stands on its legs, looking at he portray, white eyes wide open and slowly moving to the left and to the right. He does this for about three more hours, until a door inside of the church gets opened.


    When the door got opened, three people are swarming inside of the church, as they are chased by five zombies, including the woman who infected and transformed Sava four days ago. The three people, when they''ve entered the place, unarmed, they were looking desperate anywhere to save themselves from these monsters. They tried to hold them back by suing some chairs they''ve found in church, threw some candles holders at them, and one even tried a portrait to a zombie, but it destroyed the portrait upon the impact of zombie''s head. While chaos was emerging in the church, on the room where Sava is locked, the Undead zombie stopped from muttering, turned around, and walks to the locked door, then, when he reached there, he scratches the furniture object he sued to lock himself in. But as you can guess, this did not help Sava escape from the locked room.


    The three people have fought the five zombies, but the odds were against them. All three males, were eaten alive by the zombies, who were pinning them down, one by one, and eat their insides out. The zombies were not even killed on this confrontation. and even if they could, this church did not offer any strong material to help the three survivors knock these things from moving.


    When the noise stopped, Sava turned around, walk to the portrait of Jesus Christ, and continues to mutter to himself a praying as he is looking at the portrait. He continues to do these things for two more days, when everything will change for the remaining population of the village and for the Undead Sava, who will jump on the next phase of Undead creatures. A phase that not many Undeads have managed to achieve it.

 Priest of Death - Part 12

    ***


    Two days later, on the same church, in the same locked room blocked by the furniture, on the same spot, the same Undead priest, utters its prey, to the portrait of Jesus Christ on the cross, standing still and not moving a muscle from its place. He is praying for an in a somewhat understandable speaking form to be understood by a human.


    After about two hours, someone enters the church, had someone is a human, who upon entering the place, he looks around the place, scared and holding a cane. The person is a female, in her forty''s and she is covered in blood. It looks like blood zombie rather than human zombie. The woman, is entering the church, she looks around terrified at the sight of corpses in there who were left by the zombies from two days ago. As the woman continues to walk in the church, she hears something. A prey coming from the room of the priest.


    "Hey. Is someone here?" asks the woman scared.


    Nobody responded to the question, but the prey continued to be heard in the church on a low volume. The woman stands on her position for thirty more seconds before she takes courage and walks toward the doors of the priest room. As she got close to the door, she tries to enter the room, but doors are stuck by the furniture. She checks all three doors and all are having an obstacle on their way.


    "Is someone in there?" continues to ask the woman when she hears the praying going on.


    Then, the woman knocks on the door, and this knock has made the creature stop praying, and make him turn around. Sava''s body, who is possessed by an Undead, he walks toward the door on slow steps, and as he arrived in there, he pushes through the furniture of that is blocking its way. But it will not be possible, because the big shelves are blocking the entire doors.


    "Hey. You need help?"


    The thing did not respond to this question. He continued to beat the furniture hoping this would resolve the problem he is facing. The woman tries to do something, so she walks toward a second door, she manages to push the door hard enough to slowly move the furniture piece from the way. It was moved a little, but this little did make something great.


    The Undead hears the furniture of the second door moving, so he walks there, and he walks toward that door. He looks at how the furniture continues to move little by little, while the woman grows tired of pushing the door.


    It takes about two minutes, but she managed to move the furniture and fall on the Undead Priest. The thing, upon the moment furniture has fallen on him, he yelled in pain like a human and growled like a zombie. The unknown woman, opening the door, he sees the furniture falling on a zombie, and she immediately gets scared by the appearance of the zombie. She turns around, and runs away from the church, letting the Undead deal with the shelf who is on top of him.


    After about then minutes, the thing manages to shake the big shelf with a lot of books and other items used by orthodox churches when Sunday or any holiday comes. He moves it to his left, and the thing can finally breathe a sigh of relief.


    "Yˇ­Yes." says the Undead Sava looking on the ceiling, at the Gods who are painted centuries ago.


    The Undead raises from the ground, he walks out of this room, toward the another, he sees in their corpses of humans, who have been eaten all of their organs, including brains, eyeballs and intestines, everything. The thing approaches a human body, he touches its forehead, and looks at it, sadden to see a dead body with no way of coming back.


    A case of theft: this story is not rightfully on Amazon; if you spot it, report the violation.


    "I-I am sorry." says the thing to the three bodies who were eaten two days ago by zombies.


    He raises to its feet, and walks outside of the church.


    He hasn''t left his church for about six days, almost a week, he stayed in the church, praying to God and blocked in his room, without any food or water. Only praying to God, was his last salvation and thing to pass this time, locked in a room with remaining of his last humanity, until a random woman came to free the poor undead body of Sava.


    Outside, Sava is looking at his surroundings. He can see like a human the destruction provoked by the mass panic, bodies of people who once visited the church to get guidance from the God, or go on orthodox holidays to feel like they have made their part of Christianity, and he also sees how a fighter jet travels the sky near the village, drops a few bombs who are landing on the village.


    Upon the impact of those bombs, big black clouds emerge into the houses who were once lived by free, happy, and with aspirations people. There were humans still not infected inside of those houses, but now, most of them haven''t probably managed to survive for long.


    There were about five bombs from that fighter jet who have hit the village as Sava was counting it. The Undead Priest is looking at the destruction left by the planes with sadness. He can still reminiscent the memories of the villagers who were good people, came to church regularly and helped each other in need.


    The Undead Priest remains on his place for a while, until he hears a screaming.


    "Sava!" says a male voice, coming from the left side of Sava, at about twenty feet from him.


    Sava, turns around to that direction, looking confused at that person. When he looked at the male person who just called him, he can remember his name, and some memories he had with that person.


    "Toma?"


    "Sava." says Toma approaching slowly to Sava. He is wounded on the left arm, and wears some ripped shirt from an attack of a few zombies who were trying to eat his organs.


    Sava is looking at Toma, who is slowly approaching him, holding on his right arm an axe. He can feel the person is holding the axe with a strong grasp, and he can feel it''s a homicidal aura all around him. Things who is making Sava aware of this, he goes a few steps away, and he tells Toma.


    "Don''t kill me. I am not infected!"


    "You liar!" says Toma angrily, slowly approaching Sava. "Then why are you green?"


    Sava did not notice upon now that he is having a different skin colour due to the zombie virus he has been infected in these past days.


    He remained on his position, letting Toma advance slowly. He is thinking on how he can attack Toma or how he can convince him it is a zombie like the ones who have now infected this planet who once was having all kinds of people.


    But, when Toma was at five feet distance from Sava to almost kill him, a zombie shows at the doorsteps of the church. There were three zombies who have showed up from inside of the church, meaning the three bodies from earlier, even if they were having most of the organs eaten, they can still become zombies. Those things, as they left the church, they look toward Toma, and they walk toward him. Toma, seeing three zombies coming after him, he turned around quickly and ran from there.


    "Stop! Stop! Stop!" says Sava to the zombies who are running after Toma.


    But the things did not stop.


    "Stop! Stop! Stop!"


    The zombies were still chasing Toma.


    "In the name of God! I command you to stop!" yells Sava to these things, angrily pointing his hands at those zombies.


    And under the strange circumstances, the things have stopped from moving, they suddenly stopped chasing the human. When these things have stopped, Toma was still running from there, not looking back, to see the Undead Priest, who have saved him from certain zombie transformation and earlier tried to murder Sava for being a different zombie who can still be human.


    Sava stands on the ground, he is looking at his hands, his blue and green arms, wondering how he did that. He is looking scared on his hands, muttering to himself.


    "W-What was that? I-I can control these?"

 Priest of Death - Part 13

    ***


    Back to the present, on the military plane that is heading to Serbia, the military personnel are getting ready for their deployment after hours of flying on this military plane. On this plane, Alina, Lee and Klaus, and the other soldiers are prepared for deployment. All of them have taken their weapons for their mission.


    As Klaus was taking from a crate an assault rifle type, a man walks toward him, is Lee, comes close to him, holding down his crossbow from the time he fought his escape from Romania, Bulgaria and Greece, and on the other hand, he has five arrows.


    "Are you okay?" asks Lee to Klaus.


    "Yesˇ­" says Klaus. "I wonderˇ­ About the undead."


    "What about it?"


    "You wonderˇ­ Can they come back to normalˇ­? Like Ana?"


    "The same thing I asked myself the first time I have seen one in Tunisia." he says to Klaus.


    A few weeks ago, Lee was on a training mission, just like other seventy volunteers, to test their skills to see if they are worth it to become soldiers who will be rewarded to remain on their selected artificial islands with homes and job. Thankfully, on that training mission, only sixty-six people have made it, other four people have been killed by zombies. And on that mission, Lee has spotted an undead who can talk and act like a human. But that undead, was one of the most dangerous things Lee has ever meet, and he managed to escape its attack at the last moment.


    Royal Road is the home of this novel. Visit there to read the original and support the author.


    "After I saw Derek (the undead zombie who almost managed to kill Lee). I started to wonder if we are actually the good guys or the bad guys."


    "To be honest. for me, it doesn''t matter." says Klaus to Lee. "As long as I am doing my job, I don''t care. All I want is to have my family safe."


    Klaus has found two of its family members alive in Dortmund, his hometown, the two members are his big brother, Tudor, and middle sister, Ezra. He rescued them in a shelter where other nine survivors have locked themselves in a meat factory, and managed to survive two hordes of zombies who have invaded the said factory. From thirty only nine managed to survive two weeks inside of that factory.


    The two are looking toward their commander, who is using his whistle to get attention from its soldiers.


    "Listen up, people!"


    Every soldier looks to the General of this mission, or commander as you would like to call it. All of the soldier, with weapons on their hands, safety on and equipped with additional mags in case they will run low on bullets to kill these meat-eating monsters. When everyone got quiet, Commander spoke to them.


    "Soon we will land in Serbia. And there we will start our mission of recapturing a lost headquarters. I want all of you, the moment we will land, leave the plane, be together, and advance in group in slowly, killing ever dangerous zombie that is coming toward us." he is looking at his men. "We don''t know what kind o things are there, how dangerous and how powerful compared to what you and I have seen so far. So, again, all of you, be careful. Remember, a shot in the head can kill everything."


    The plane proceeds to land on an abandoned zone near the highway of Uzice, Serbia, where a plane has crashed a few days ago due to some malfunctions as it seemed. The moment the military plane has landed, the group of dozens and more soldiers are leaving the plane and proceed to advance toward the city.


    "Here they come!" yells the Commander to his men as he sees hundreds of zombies running toward their direction.


    The soldiers prepare their armaments and fire upon the command it was given by Commander.

 Priest of Death - Part 14

    Twenty-one hours ago, in Uzice, Serbia, on the abandoned outpost, the three survivors, Dragan, Milan and Goran, have finished their talking with the rescuers from the island, and now, they are barricading the room, and arm themselves with anything sharp enough to be a weapon. At the discussion, the one person who was talking to them, has told them a squad will be coming to make the extraction and establish a new outpost, but he also said it will take a few hours until the said squad will arrive. About twenty or so hours.


    Milan and Goran are on the ground floor, blocking the main door by pushing furniture from the other apartments. They pushed a large, two desks and an even a big round table from a kitchen to be sure the main door wouldn''t be open by the things outside called zombies, or by that Priest who is still hunting them down.


    "We''ve finished." says Milan to Goran after they moved the table to the door to use it a blockage.


    Both of them are admiring the blockage they''ve made, and after about a minute of looking at the blockage, the two people are going upstairs, to the room where Dragan is situated, checking on the streets via window to see if there will be some kind of meat-eating creature outside of the streets. Outside, the sun is about to be raising from its slumber, illumining the wrecked abandoned outpost.


    The two survivors have entered the room where Dragan is looking on the window. Goran tells Dragan.


    "We''ve blocked the main entrance."


    "Good." says Dragan turning around to his mates. "Outside zombies have started to raise."


    He let Milan and Goran look at the window, to see the zombies raising from the street and start walking on the street, or just standing up and looking at the Sun. Milan observes a corpse of zombie who cannot get up due to its legs who have been severely cut from its body, the thing is looking skinny like a human who hasn''t eaten for two weeks, on the brick of dying.


    "That thing is dying." says Milan to the zombie on the street.


    The other two people are looking at the zombie that was pointed by Milan.


    "It''s crazy how some zombies could die to starvation." says Dragan to the three people. "But I don''t get how others can survive fine without any nutrients."


    This content has been unlawfully taken from Royal Road; report any instances of this story if found elsewhere.


    "Maybe it depends on their virus?" asks Goran.


    "Or infected." says Milan.


    "I feel bad for this one." says Dragan. "Probably he had a good life here. A wife and a kid, maybe."


    "Unlike us." says Goran in a joke. "


    "Yeahˇ­" says Milan.


    Then, the group spotted on the window, a zombie, who is climbing a building to the other side of the street. The group quickly realize this place is infested with Climbers, so they immediately back away from the window, and starts covering the window to not be spotted by these annoying infected. One time they''ve dealt with this, and Milan almost died if it wasn''t for Zoran who severed the hands of the thing.


    "That was a close one." says Milan to his people after they''ve covered the window.


    "Yesˇ­" says Dragan looking back on the covered window. "These things are getting worse, and worse each day."


    "Agreed."


    The three people are going to another apartment, checking to see if they could find anything useful to help them survive longer. As they checked the living room of the apartment, Goran finds a mobile phone, he tries to turn on, but its hope vanishes as he observes the device shows the sign of not battery. He puts the phone back on the table and continues its searching''s with his friends.


    Dragan enters a kitchen room, in there he sees a map of Uzice city, he looks on it, and sees a lot of red circles and green circles on the map. On the red circles it is written words like "Infected", "Risk of dying", "Gone", while on the red is written only one word, "Safe". On the map there were about five green circles, and the zone of Uzice, where the three people are, indicates the green mark. Dragan sees a piece of paper on the table, that piece of paper states only islands names, about twenty of them. Some of the names of these islands were hard for the three people to read it or even try to pinpoint it on the map because these three were having bad marks on Geography back when they were in school.


    "Found something?" asks Goran coming in the kitchen where Dragan is.


    "Only a map with safe places." says Dragan to Goran looking on the map. He sees a red marker near the left edge of the table, he takes it and scribbles the word "Safe" from a green one, and writes "Dead". Then, he puts the marker on the map, and leaves the map. Continues its searching on the shelves with Goran.


    "Canned food." says Goran to Dragan after he found a box of canned food that contains pork meat. He opens the box, and from there he takes a small can that has pork meat in there. "I used to hate to arrange these things."


    "Me too." says Dragan. "But we used to buy them when we were on low on College."


    "Yeahˇ­ Bad thing none of us managed to graduate from it."


    "Whatever happens, happens." says Dragan. "That''s a way my Father used to told me when he found out I quit college."


    "Mine almost disowned me." says Goran putting the item back, he takes the box from there and moves it to the table, where he let it there, and continues to search the apartment for useful stuff to extend their survival time.

 Priest of Death - Part 15

    ***


    Meanwhile, on the streets, at a distance of one kilometre away, an Undead Priest is walking on the street, where five zombies are following him. He and the zombies are walking on a slow pace rather than a fast one. The Undead Priest, Sava, is having his black robe covered in blood marks from the villagers he was last night leading them in this city to chase four people who have entered their home with their "devilish virus", as Sava use to say when he encounters an infected.


    Sava observes a corpse of zombie, who is crawling toward where he stands. The zombie crawling to Sava is having his left leg cut from its body, his clothes are having stains of blood. His face is having a missing eye, jaw dropped, and his white skin face is having burn marks by four degree. Face is all messed up by probably being burned in a fire most likely.


    "You have gone through difficult timesˇ­" says Sava looking at the zombie who is slowly crawling to him. "You seem you are not afraid of me."


    The zombie was growling lowly, barely able to be heard by Sava, who is looking at him with pity. He then, decides to approach the thing, grab its head, look at the face, looking on its face, he observes a hole from the skull to its brain. Sava decides to poke the brain as hard as he can, without any hesitation, until the thing has stopped from moving. When it stopped from moving and growling, the thing has officially died, put it to its misery as some survivors are saying when they kill a zombie who once was a human like them.


    Sava leaves the corpse of the zombie where it stays, and continue moving forward on the street, looking around at all of the zombies who are staying still, hitting the doors with their hands and feet, while others are munching on dead corpses who once were zombies, or humans who weren''t able to become zombie due to their head being destroyed or brain hit hard enough to not allow them to transform into meat eating creatures.


    "Humansˇ­" says Sava sniffing the air. "There are humans on hereˇ­ Somewhere."


    He looks on his right hand, full of blood. He tries to concentrate, but he cannot get the exact location, nor where the injured human is hiding. All he can feel are the memories of the villagers he slaughtered on the plane crash or the one who was earlier killed for its own good. In order to see the visions of what others sees, Sava has to touch the blood of that person. It will get difficult to see the person point of view if all of its hand is full of blood of other "victims".


    After a few minutes of walking, Sava observes a climber zombie, climbing the walls of a seven-floor building complex that used to be home of citizens who were either having a life with job, or a life on parent''s money, college students, or worse, incels who are into weird stuffed animal costume in love with western media. The zombie who is climbing the building by using his weird green substance coming from its body that can acts like some kind of glue. A few researchers from Military bases of the Organization has come in contact with this type of zombies, at first they realized this green material is acting like a glue to anything it touches, but further tests need to be done.


    This tale has been pilfered from Royal Road. If found on Amazon, kindly file a report.


    "Wish I can do that." says Sava feeling sad that he wasn''t born with this type of power.


    As the climber zombie was close to arrive at the sixth floor, he stopped, look on the window, he bashed his head hard enough to break the window. He did that three times, and be managed to break the window, only to enters the building and disappear inside of it.


    "Humans?" wonders Sava looking at the window who was just broken a few seconds ago.


    He decides to check the building where the Climber entered. Not the one on the other street where the three fugitives are hiding. Sava can feel human smell, but he cannot pinpoint its exact location, so he decides to follow a climber type zombie who just entered a building for no reason.


    The three people, from the other apartment, are looking on the window, from floor two, seeing Sava entering the said complex apartment. He opens the door like no care in the world, and enters the place. As these three people have observed Sava going inside of another place, they start to sweat because they know this crazy undead is after them, and his other villagers are still here. But the gang doesn''t know the villagers have been killed by Sava hungry.


    "He''s here!" says Goran scared to his gang, leaving the window and walking a few steps away from the window.


    "What are we going to do?" asks Milan scared as Goran.


    "Don''t panic yet." says Dragan.


    "Do you have a plan?" asks Milan.


    "Yes." says Dragan. "All we need is weapons. If he is a human he can die by a shot in the brain. If he is a zombie, he can die by a shot in the brain, correct?"


    "So. We are going to shoot him?"


    "If he will leave the building." says Dragan.


    "With these many zombies?" asks Milan reminding Dragan there are zombies outside. "Hundreds are probably outside. walking and crawling. Even if you would shoot from a 9 mm with a silencer, they would still walk around to find the noise source."


    "That is the only way." says Dragan. "What do you want to do? Go outside and try to negotiate with that psychopath? He''ll try to kill us again, just like last time."


    Milan did say anything.


    Goran however, starts to check every cabinet, every shelf, every box of this room, to see if he can find a gun.


    Dragan and Milan decide to go on another apartment room''s to search for weapons. They do have weapons and everything else, but these weapons they possess are running low on ammunition, plus their weapons are on short range, so they will keep them when a horde would manage to get inside or Sava would find a way. They decide to keep their weapons under a bed in case Sava would manage to get inside.

 Priest of Death - Part 16

    After a few minutes of searching, they did not find anything like along range weapon, and they''ve searched two floors of this complex. All three, seeing they did not find any suitable weapon, they decide to risk it with their pistols and submachine gun they still find workable. All three are taking their weapons, they are going near the wall and are waiting for the moment Undead Priest will appear.


    On the other side of the street, in the apartment complex, Sava is walking inside of an apartment. When he entered the apartment, he sees a zombie child walking toward him. The zombie child looks like to be seven years old. He dodges Sava, and continues to walk away from the Priest. Sava noticed this small zombie walking away, and he did not interact with this thing, he let it go further and continue looking around this place.


    Sava walks further in the room. Looks around this messy place, wondering what happened here. He looks on the window, where it got broken by the limber zombie type. Sava looks around the place to see if the zombie is inside here. He found it after two minutes of searching, in the bathroom eating the head of a woman, while the rest of the body of the woman is laying on the bathtub. He notices how the corpse of the woman is having her hand wrists cut by a razor blade, the tub having blood dark red spots and her clothes on. Sava also notices a letter near the bathtub on Hungarian language. Unfortunately, Sava knowing only Serbian and English, he cannot translate what does the small letter in black ink is saying.


    "I am sorry." says Sava approaching the body of the woman, ignoring the Climber zombie type eating the face of the suicidal woman. "Your sins will be forgiving." he looks at the zombie who is eating the woman head. He approaches the zombie, dips his two fingers into the brain of the suicidal woman, and as he felt blood on his two fingers, he makes a cross on her head that is eaten by the Climber zombie.


    After this, he raises up, prays for the woman to go into Kingdom of Heaven, and leaves the woman body alone on the Climber type zombie to be eaten. He knows this is bad, leaving the woman alone with that zombie, but "at least her soul was send into the Heaven" is what Sava thinks as he does one of these things.


    When he left the bathroom, he closes the door after him, and starts to walk outside for this place. But he stops when he did the second step, he sensed something. A smell. A human smell. He looks on the direction where the human smell comes from. He takes his assault rifle, which was tied to his back with the belt, and slowly approaches the window. Then, when he got close enough, he looks through the metallic visor and observes on the building to the next street the head of Dragan, Milan and Goran, looking around for their target.


    "Got you." he says after he aims the head of Dragan, and pulls the trigger.


    Thankfully, the bullet did not hit Dragan, it hit the window frame. But this bullet sound, has made the three people jump from the windows and run from the apartment window, then outside of the apartment room. Now they know they are under attack and about to be killed by that psychopathic priest at any moment.


    "Shit." says Dragan. "That bastard found us!"


    "He almost killed you!" says Goran scared.


    Ensure your favorite authors get the support they deserve. Read this novel on Royal Road.


    "Yeah." says Dragan taking a peak at the window frame it got hit by the bullet from Sava gun. "I got lucky there."


    "Now what are we going to do?" asks Milan feeling scared.


    "We are staying here. Hiding far from windows."


    "But what if he will get inside?"


    "It won''t. The front doors are sturdy enough to hold the zombies outside." says Dragan and he walks to another apartment. "We''ll be staying here." he enters the apartment, then he gets followed by his two friends. "And we will hide in here. If we are all in a room, we have a chance to kill him."


    "Sounds good." says Milan.


    Now the gang, has entered an empty apartment, one who was left in a hurry because everything inside of this place is a mess. The clothes from the drawers are on the floor, couch has been ripped and knife scratches, a dog head is on the floor, and three corpses are laying on the only bedroom this apartment offer. Dragan decides to hide under the bed in the bedroom, while the other two survivors are hiding in living room. Goran will hide under the couch, while Milan, seeing he has nowhere to hide in the living room, will stay in the room it is supposed to be the kitchen, leaning to the wall near the door. Why is this supposed to be kitchen? Because it presents only one chicken appliance, a microwave, meaning the owner of this apartment was a university student or a person working for minimum wage.


    Outside, Sava leaves the apartment, he walks toward the one from across the street. Zombies on the street, start turning around to Sava, they look at him, with their mouth opened, jaw dropped (literally) or without opening their mouth. They are walking toward him, and follow him as he is getting across the street, and takes the three steps of the entrance. Getting on the front door, Sava pushes the door, but sees the thing won''t binge. He also tries to pull, but no chance. This is a door model who is only opening by pushing.


    Sava lets the zombies push the door, while he is searching the surroundings of this place to see if he can find an alternative to break in. He goes on the backside of the building, but there is no door, nor any accessible window, because all the windows on the first floors were locked with planks and furniture. He also tries to search for a door, but there is no door on the backside, nor on the other side. but as he was about to walk to the front door, he observes a window on the basement. At this moment, Sava jumps on the window leading to the basement.


    He lands on his foot in there, but upon landing he notices this place is dark. The priest looks on his surrounding, but he can barely see anything because this place is not lightening by any lightbulb, and he cannot find a source to turn on the light. He walks on the dark, with his left arm raised in front of him top be sure it will not trip onto something or hit a wall or plank. He managed to get to the door leading to upstairs which are connected to grand floors. He pulls the door and walk upstairs.


    Sava walks careful on the stairs because these are barely illuminated by the lights outside. He almost trip on a step, but managed to hold himself strong to not fall over. he also managed to dodge a head of a zombie who was there for some unknown reason. After about twenty steps, he gets to the ground floor safe. Arriving there, he walks toward the front door which was on the right side when he came on the surface. Getting there he starts moving a piece of furniture, the small table which was the structure to hold he''s remaining blockage at the main door.


    Sava, seeing the zombies couldn''t get inside the place he continues to move furniture from the place. It takes him a few more minutes for this, but it was worth it because the zombies have been swarming the place like a shop from America who is having Black Friday offers. After this, Sava let the zombies walk or run on the upstairs toward the survivors hiding in this building while he remains on the ground floor, waiting for them to either come down here thinking Sava is with the zombies, or waits for them in case one of them would be dumb enough to jump from the last floor to the three trees who are near this apartment complex.

 Priest of Death - Part 17

    ***


    After a while, the three survivors, located on the sixth floor now, they heard zombies incoming toward them, so all three are getting ready to welcome them with their guns. Dragan, Milan and Goran are all using three kitchen tables as some sort of barricade to protect themselves from the zombies. Dragan is having on a single arm a handgun with seven bullets because his hand is starting to hurt more as he is using it. Milan is holding an assault rifle aiming at the stairs where the zombies should appear. Goran is having on his hand the only submachine who is still working.


    " If the weapons break or run out of ammo, we run. Understand?" says Dragan to his two friends.


    "Yes." responds the two friends of Dragan.


    At the entrance of the hallway, first zombies are appearing, only three zombies who are looking like males wearing some weird looking torn clothes and all three without any pants. Dragan shoots four bullets at these things, three of them hitting the heads where the brain is located, while one bullet got the ear of a zombie who was on the back of the other three. That zombie gets immediately shot by Milan who managed to shoot ten bullets to hit two zombies on the head, killing them.


    Zombies continues to come and come, and the trio starts shooting their weapons toward their heads. But this fun did not last long because they ran out of ammo and run from that place. When the ammo end, Milan abandoned his weapon, while Dragan and Goran are leaving with their weapons. The three survivors are feeling relieved they have managed to kill a few zombies and having an advantage on their run because of the table that are acting as a blockage to slow the zombies.


    The group is running toward the last floor, taking the other side of the stairs because this structure is designed to have two sets of stairs, one on the left side of the building, and other on the right side. On the eight floors, the three people see there is a little furniture laying on the hallway, they decide to use two of these big pieces, a desk and a bed, to block the side o the stairs they have taken. When they looked on the other side, they noticed it is also locked with furniture, and this made all of them feel relieved because of this.


    "Thank God." says Dragan.


    Then, the group decide to run to the rooftop, where there is supposed to be some kind of fire escape stairs. But, when they found the door to the rooftop, they observe it is locked with a lock. This is making their task of escaping much more difficult.


    "Shit." says Goran. "We need a key to unlock it."


    "Or not." says Dragan looking on his right side, and there he notices the fire escape is at a window. "Follow me." he runs inside of the room, followed by Goran and Milan.


    Inside of this apartment they''ve entered, there is only a room, a bedroom, and there, they found in the bed the corpse of a woman, who was eaten by zombies as the survivors have seen the opened rib cage of the poor woman. Goran has observed anything else, a revolver, in the hand of the woman. Dragan and Milan are trying to break the window, while Goran is quickly looking at the weapon. He opens the bullet part of the gun, checks the bullets and counts it. "There are only four." he says to himself. Goran starts looking for anything in this room, while Milan and Dragan are busy to break the unopened window.


    After a minute, when Dragan and Milan have unlocked the window, by throwing a small coffee table into it, they are opening the window wider for them to escape through it. They are climbing the ladder to fire escape one by one. As they are climbing the ladder, zombie growls and yell could be heard coming on the last floor.


    When all have managed to get on the ground thanks to the fire escape, they all run from this apartment and from the wave of zombies who haven''t managed to squeeze in the apartment yet. While they are running from the wave of dozens of zombies, the gang doesn''t notice Sava, who is leaving the apartment, with an angry reaction. He aims its finger on the group who is having one hundred meters advance.


    If you discover this tale on Amazon, be aware that it has been unlawfully taken from Royal Road. Please report it.


    "Get them!" yells Sava.


    And the zombies from this area are following the order of Sava. Walking, running, jumping or crawling after the three survivors who are thinking to flee this place.


    After about five minutes of running for their lives, the group enters a small building, where there, they quickly dodge another three zombies who were close to get them. They continue to run from that small store, and on the left turn. The three survivors, being out of ammo, and outnumbered 1 to 40, their only logical choice at the moment is to run and avoid these dead creatures.


    They soon arrive in front of a military truck who is blocking their way. Milan sees a few weapons in the cabin, and he quickly goes there to see if any of the weapons from there can work. Surpassingly, he found a machine gun, which he grabs it and starts to shoot to the upcoming wave of zombies.


    "Come to me sons of bitches!" yells Milan, ignoring Dragan and Goran who are getting on the military truck, and search for a suitable weapon to kill these infected mutants.


    "Wow." says Dragan taking a grenade launcher and five grenades from a crate. He loads the grenade launcher, and aims to a wave of zombies. "Thank you for video games." and he shoots a grenade to a wave of zombies, blowing them up in a second, making their bodies into a pile of burn meat and bones.


    "Let some for me." says Goran taking a rifle and starts to shoot the wave of zombies who are on the top of the buildings, about to jump on the survivors. He pulls the trigger once and kills a zombie from three hundred meters. The thing falls from the rooftop and landed on its head to a car, smashing the car and his whole body.


    Goran continues to shoot the things from the top floor, Dragan shoots the four grenades to the zombie waves, and Milan continues to kill the things with the machine gun. The wave of zombies is put down in about five minutes. About a hundred or more than this have been killed.


    When this was over, and the gang took a pause, they leave the military truck, loaded with weapons and walk out of there, going to see if all of the things they''ve killed have been successfully neutralized. They check their bodies like shots in the head, torso, and legs. Goran was checking the pockets of some zombies who were having a rich person aspect. He did find a Rolex on one and he immediately put it on his hand. As Milan ventured further from the two teammates, he observes a few more zombies approaching their location, of slow walking type.


    "Got attracted to the noise." says Milan aiming his machine gun to those creatures. He recently loaded with more ammunition.


    He was about to pull the trigger, then, he observes on the machine-gun visor, how a car is sent on the air, toward him. Milan, seeing a two-ton vehicle flying towards him, he dodges the thing, which was close to hitting him. And by dodging, he rolled to his right, taking cover on a military barrier. The thrown vehicle lands on the ground, then it rolls for a few meters, hitting Goran as he was looking for a wallet in a dead corpse, injuring him severely.


    Goran got hit by that car, put to the ground, while the car continues to roll for a few more times until it hits the walls of a complex building who is about to collapse any given time.


    The two people, have seen the car how it finds a friend of their, and they quickly walk toward him to see if the dude is alive. Dragan and Milan are close to him, they look at the man who is barely breathing, has it''s entire to face a mess, a few bones from its torso leaving the interior of its body, blood coming out all over the place, and eyes almost leaving the sockets. The two people were shocked to see one of their dear friends, being killed like that.


    "Goran, noˇ­" says Dragan on the verge of crying.


    "Help me." says Goran wheezing for air and coughing blood. "Help me!"


    Milan, seeing his friend has no way out or to be rescued on these conditions, he decide to aim his machine gun to Goran''s head. He closes its eyes, like Dragan did. Milan says "Sorry, friend." and he pulls the trigger once. He did see how the bullet got through the head of Goran, and how the person they knew for long has been killed like in a second.


    Dragan, after he saw the dead face of his friend, with a bullet on his head, he could not contain it anymore, and he screamed in madness. Milan however, he takes a deep breath, turns around, he screams of madness like Dragan, and shoots the zombies who are coming toward him. A wave of more than fifty zombies are coming, together with two other zombies that are considered Class F, a dangerous class who is able to use objects in combat to their advantages.


    The two people did not have time to mourn their good friend, they continue to sue the weapons to defend themselves from this upcoming wave of dead creatures. Dragan continues to launch grenades on a fast speed, enough to destroy their bodies. Milan continues to shoot the remaining ammunition from the machine gun into the wave of the upcoming zombies. They fight and fight until the upcoming wave of zombies has been decimated. All but the two F classes who are still walking toward them.

 Priest of Death - Part 18

    "What the fuck?!" yells Milan seeing the two zombies from Calls F approaching them on slow speed, and roaring.


    "How are we going to defeat them?!" asks Dragan seeing the creatures who are almost two meters and fifty centimetres in height, muscles all over their bodies, especially on the left arm who were mostly used to throw the car to their friend.


    Dragan quickly loads the last grenade from the military truck into the launcher. He aims to the thing head and quickly pulls the trigger of the weapon. The grenade flies from there on a high speed, hitting the head of the creature in about four seconds. The explosion was strong enough to send the creature flying a few feet away from the other thing. Upon landing in a car, and smashing upon impact, the creature head wasn''t there anymore. It has successfully been blowned away by a single grenade.


    "You did it!" say Milan happily, he sees the other class F zombie approaching. "Now kill this one!"


    "I ran out." says Dragan to Milan, who is looking shocked at him.


    "What?" yells Milan in disbelief.


    The class F zombie roars, and he is grabbing a car near him. The two people, seeing the creature grabbing the vehicle, they immediately run from this area, to a nearby opened building, who was probably used as a store to sell antiques taking the fact it has antiques on the window who haven''t been touched by a human or a zombie in a while. Inside of this place, the two people are looking at the car who is flying on the air, it hits the wall of the building that was also hit earlier by another car. This hit was strong enough to make this building collapse. It collapsed because it was on the verge of collapsing because of the explosions it was happened when this place was overrun by zombies due to jet fighters.


    Milan and Dragan being afraid this place may come next to falling, they run from there, on the backside of the building, where it was wide opened and there was a zombie who was coming after them. Milan kills the thing by shooting three bullets with his machine gun. After this, they run from toward another military truck who has crashed in another truck. Signs show it has crushed a while ago, probably before this abandoned city was made an outpost on this world.


    Dragan checks the military truck, and luckily, he did find a weapon. But the unfortunate case was that the weapon Dragan has taken into his possession now it is a handgun. He looks on its magazine for a moment, and finds there are only seven bullets left. Dragan looks on the truck in a hurry to see if he can find another useful thing. He did find one lucky thing, on a body of a soldier zombie, a pipe bomb. Dragan, as he was approaching the body close enough, he observed the body started twitching, and by impulse, he aimed its pistol to the head of the creature, pulled the trigger and shoots the bullet through the head of it. After the creature has died, Dragan takes the pipe bomb and leaves the truck.


    "Found something." says Dragan showing Milan the pipe bomb.


    "What is this?" asks Milan curios by this.


    "This is supposed to be a pipe bomb." says Dragan. "I know this weapon from a video game I played in my childhood. If it works like in that game we should be happy."


    From the building they''ve just left earlier, the same zombie from Class F is leaving the place, and he screams to Milan and Dragan, who are at a distance of twenty feet from him. As they saw the creature, Milan immediately starts shooting its machine gun to the creature, while Dragan he is turning on the pipe bomb and throws it toward the thing.


    This narrative has been purloined without the author''s approval. Report any appearances on Amazon.


    As pipe bomb was flying toward the creature, a "beep" sound was coming out of the device. The sound was strong enough to make a few zombies who were after the two survivors turn their heads to the source of the beeping and follow it. The two survivors have seen about twenty zombies turning around, walking or running toward the source of the noise.


    "It-It''s working." says Dragan amazed by this.


    "Now what?" asks Milan to Dragan.


    Then, when the pipe bomb was at the feet of zombie from Class F, the bomb has exploded. This explosion was strong enough to kill the creature legs and other body limbs, and also send flying a few zombies in the air.


    But, when the smoke from explosion has been cleared enough, the two survivors sees the thing from Class F was still alive even though it was incapacitated and couldn''t do anything. There were some other zombies, who were also incapacitate by this explosion, but some were crawling toward the survivors rather than staying still and ding those annoying zombie noises as they were looking with their dead eyes at the two people.


    "It worked." says Dragan sounding glad.


    "Nice." says Milan happy to see the threat was neutralized this easily. He aims the machine gun to the remaining ten zombies, he starts blasting the machine gun to the creatures who are falling down, one by one.


    After all the things have been killed, Dragan and Milan, seeing there aren''t any threat coming to them, they decide to take a breather, lay near the military truck near them, and look tired at the zombies they''ve killed.


    "We made it." says Milan breathing heavily. "We made it, dude. We are sa-"


    Then, a zombie under the military truck, who was crawling in there, he jumps on the left arm of Milan, and he bite on it. When Milan was bitten, he jumps from that place, and he shoots the thing under the military truck with the machine gun. He shoots all the seventeen bullets remaining into the creature. Dragan has also raised from there, and looks terrified at the creature who was hiding in there, and attacked them.


    "Noˇ­" says Milan terrified as he sees the bite mark let by the thing, and the blood coming down from its hand. "Noˇ­ Noˇ­ Noˇ­ Noˇ­"


    "Milan?" asks Dragan worried about his friend, he sees the bite mark, and starts to feel scared about this. "Are you okay?"


    "Dragan." says Milan after a few moments of silence on looking on his hand, he sounds depressed. "Pleaseˇ­" he holds his tears. "Do it."


    Dragan, scared to do the ultimate gesture, he aims the pistol he has found in the military truck, he aims at the head of Milan. He holds the pistol on the same position for a while because he could not do it. He has to do it, but he could not make himself do it. Milan however, he closes its eyes, let his tears flow from its eyes, and accepts the reality that he has to be killed.


    Dragan remained hesitant because he could not make himself to do the unthinkable. Dragan knows this is the right thing to help its friend not transform into one of those creatures who are now inhibiting the world and are causing the human population to go extinct.


    "I can''t do it." says Dragan moving its pistol from the target, going a few steps back and crying. "I cannot do it man."


    "Give me the gun." says Milan to Dragan. He raises his hand to Milan. "Please. Let me do it if you can''t."


    Dragan, being hesitant at first, but seeing how Milan insisted on this, he gives the gun to Milan, who is aiming it to its head like a kid who is doing the gun symbol from its hand to the head. Before he was about to pull the trigger to its own head, with tears on his eyes, he tells Dragan.


    "Good luck, my friend! Please make it further than us."


    "I-I-I will." says Dragan sobbing, and seeing his own friend who is closing his eyes. "Goodbye friend."


    "Goodbye." says Milan sobbing.


    And when Milan has pulled the trigger of the handgun. By some cases, the gun did not work. He looks shock on it, then he continues to pull the trigger two times, but the handgun still did not work. Then, he checks the clip of the gun, and observes there are bullets, but the gun itself, it is damaged. He is looking scared at Dragan.


    "Dudeˇ­" says Dragan shocked by this revelation that the handgun he was founding it is malfunctioned.


    As they were looking at the gun, they did not notice, someone steps out from the antiques store, holding a cross all in zombie blood and a bible in the other hand. The Death Priest is here, and he is looking saddened by these two warriors who were looking terrified at him.

 Priest of Death - Part 19

    ***


    Meanwhile, in the present day, the group of soldiers has made it inside the abandoned outpost in Uzice. It was a bit harsh, but they made it, all in one piece, without any causalities. The group of soldiers is walking down the road, with their lights on their assault weapons, looking on every direction to be sure a zombie would not jump on them. The group of soldiers has been lucky so far on this case.


    "Look." says Alin pointing to his soldier, on the corpse of a person.


    The corpse of the person he is lighting with the flash of its lighter from the weapon is the one of Zoran. They notice the bullet wounds, and the weird blood drawn on its body. Most of the soldiers were looking at the corpse of the human feeling confused on why there is a blood drawing and why he got shot because it didn''t present any wound of a zombie on its body.


    "What do you think?" asks a soldier to the commander.


    "No idea." says the commander of the squad. "I''ve never seen something like this." he is looking at Alina.


    "No idea either." respond Alina to the question of the commander. "We haven''t seen something like this until now."


    The group remains there for a bit more, after that they continue to move further on inspecting the abandoned outpost.


    The squad continues to advance in group.


    ***


    Dragan and Milan are looking terrified at the creature who is walking toward them, with a bible on the right hand and a cross on the left hand made by iron. The Undead Priest is looking at the two people without any remorse or an angry reaction, he is walking slowly to them, relaxed like he will not be murdered by the two people.


    "You two need help."


    "The only one needing help is you, psycho!" yells Milan to the priest, holding the wounded hand with the fine one.


    Sava is looking at Milan, especially on its left arm who is supposed to be the wounded one.


    "My son." he says to Milan feeling the saddening of its reality. "You are wounded." he walks a step closer.


    Dragan is aiming the pistol to Sava, he looks at him angrily.


    "Stay away from us!" says Dragan to Undead Priest Sava.


    "You too." says Sava to Dragan sounding more saddened by this. "You two are infected!"


    "We are not!" says Milan to Sava.


    Then, Dragan remembers critical information about Sava. His group of villagers who were coming with him.


    "Where are your people?" asks Dragan. "What have you done to them?"


    "They are fine." says Sava to the two survivors. Of course, this is a lie. "They are in their village."


    Sava takes one more step, and Dragan continues to aim at the Priest with the handgun he found on the military truck. He knows the weapon is malfunctioned, but he believes this bluff may win some time to find a solution to escape from this Priest.


    "Stay away from us, Devil!" yells Dragan pointing its gun to Sava who continues to move three more steps further. "Leave us alone!"


    "My dear children." says Sava with calm. "Please. Follow my and the guidance of the Lord himself. I will guide you to the Kingdom of Heave where your poisoned souls will rest." he takes one more step, approaching the close distance of the handgun.


    The narrative has been taken without permission. Report any sightings.


    Dragan pulls the trigger, and the bullet has left the gun on high speed. The gun bullet hit the priest ear, it destroyed the priest left ear, sending it a few steps away from Sava. But the priest, did not care about this, he continued to move further, slower, holding the grudge to kill these two people with his cold and bloody hands. The priest did not feel the pain of the bullet penetrating and destroying the left ear.


    The two survivors are looking terrified at the priest who continues to step closer to them. They do not believe what they are seeing.


    Dragan shoots two more bullets, bullets who hit the face of the Priest, but these bullets were not enough to stop the Priest from going forward. The Undead Priest did felt the pain of these bullets who were destroying its facial structure, making him look more like a zombie than an undead human.


    When the priest got to much closer to Dragan, Milan takes the knife from Dragan, he jumps on the Undead Priest, he stabs the head of Sava. The stab wound was enough to make Sava yell of pain, and stop from moving forward to attack Dragan. The priest grab Milan by the collar and he spits blood on the face of the man. That blood it was spit was enough to make Milan back down, puts hands on its face, and screams out of pain.


    "Milan!" yells Dragan to Milan who is covering its face with his hands.


    "It burns! It burns!" screams Milan as he is covering its face in this toxic and acidic blood it was spitting on the face.


    "Monster!" yells Dragan shooting two more bullets into Sava face.


    The bullets did hit the head of Sava, and these two bullets, have made two holes on the forehead of Sava. But, even if the bullets have made Sava stopped, and fall on its knees, the priest maintains its balance, and hit Dragan in the face with the bloody cross as he was screaming the words "Blasphemy!", "Insolent child!" and "Devil!". Sava has hit Dragan in the face with the cross for about six times, then he got pushed away by Milan, who pushed Sava body away from Dragan.


    "Are you okay, friend?" asks Milan having a look at Dragan.


    Dragan face it looks messed up, a purple eye, nosebleed, a tooth fallen from its mouth and a red mark on the right cheek. When Milan saw this, he is turning around to Sava, angry and ready to kill this undead. Milan it is not looking as good as Dragan himself, the man has whole face burned by that blood liquid who was thrown to his face earlier. Milan, still having the knife of Dragan on the hand, he goes for another attack.


    Sava, who just managed to get up, sees Milan approaching, and he prepares himself to attack Milan with the cross from its hand. Milan does the first attack, a stab on the head, but Sava manages to doge it on the last second, and after he was about to launch a hit on the head with the cross, Milan dodges the attack, and he stabs the chest of Sava. This hit did nothing, it did not even made Sava react.


    Milan, seeing he is now unarmed, he looks around and sees the gun of Dragan is near him, but before he was about to grab it, he suddenly stops from moving, and falls on the ground.


    "Milan!" says Dragan seeing his best friend falling on the ground.


    "To late." says Sava with a smile on its face, he takes the knife from its body, and throws it three feet away from here on the north direction. "Your friend could not help you now. He is now going to become a Devil. Like the others of these creatures." he approaches Dragan, and he loos at him angrily. "Now. Would you accept the Lord word and surrender your life? You are in danger to become one of them."


    "I am not bitten!" says Dragan to Sava who is close to him, he is aiming its cross to Dragan in a way to not dare to raise up from the ground. "Now. You better listen to my command. You are infected. You are infected by the blood of Satan! You have been bitten by the zombies."


    "I am not!" says Dragan, holding his ground.


    "You dare to not believe the word of God!" says Sava angrily.


    Then, the body of Milan raise up, he is quickly running to the knife direction, he takes it, and jumps on Sava, stabbing the head four times. As he was stabbing he was holding the priest into a hard grip, stabbing it without nay mercy and fast. After the forth stab, Sava has fallen on the ground. And with him the bloody cross, who was considered the murder weapon to transform Milan into a human eater.


    "M-M-Milanˇ­?" asks Dragan to his friend, who is now starting to eat the body of Sava.


    Dragan knows his friend is now going to become a full zombie. He saw this once, about three days ago, when he observed an undead type of zombie eating a zombie and going after them on a running speed. He backs down quick, enough to make himself rise up, turns around and run to hide from the zombie. But as he was running the distance of about five steps, he trips over, and falls on the ground, hitting its head pretty hard on a wrecked car, and falling unconscious.


    As his body was falling unconscious, Milan, now being the complete zombie form, turns around to Dragan body, who is started to bleed out from its mouth. He stars walking toward the body, he pierces the chest of Dragan body with the knife on its hand, still hold in strong grasps, and starts eating the intestines of his friend, who is now dead, and became a corpse just like his friends.

 Priest of Death - Final Part

    ***


    In the present, on the nighttime, the military squad did arrive at the zone where two zombie F class were killed on this day. The squad only saw a zombie from Class F, who has its head blown to bits by a grenade.


    "Sir." says a soldier to his commander. "Do you think it died recently?"


    "Looks like it." says the commander intrigued by this. "The signs show it died today."


    "Sir." says Alina coming to the commander. "I found a body. It looks like it got crashed by something."


    "And?"


    "It''s looking fresh. Untouched by any zombie."


    "Impossible." says the commander. "The body should have been eaten. How it has been untouched?"


    "That is the thing. It has some unknown blood on it. some kind of blue blood on the face."


    "Blue blood?" asks the commander then he takes a bit of time to think. "Contain that specimen. Maybe the scientist will try to see what is making that corpse avoidable by zombies if it wasn''t eaten by them."


    "Yes, sir!" says Alina, going with another two soldiers to seal and contain the body of Goran, who was recently killed by a flying car.


    If you encounter this tale on Amazon, note that it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it.


    Commander is walking inside the antique shop. as soon as he steps in, he turns on the flashlight from his flashlight, and observes the floor is having blue spots of blood. He is following the steps.


    Commander leaves the antiques shop, on the back door, where he sees the body of a zombie from Class F. The commander walks a few more steps to the bodies of other dead bodies. He sees how the corpse of Milan was shoot in the head on the forehead, and has some weird drawn of blue blood on the forehead. The second body with an opened stomach with intestines out a chewed, it has the same drawing as the other bodies they found, but this one presents a weird thing upon further inspection. The body of Dragan looks like the mouth was cut open by a knife, his tongue was taken by force, and a bullet hole from a handgun is on the forehead of Goran, where it is drawn the cross on blue blood.


    "What is this?" asks the commander feeling little creeped by this. "Who has done this?"


    Upon looking further, he notices a tray of blood, that is going for a few steps then it suddenly stops. this blue blood path is leading to the direction of south, where the thing has been going.


    "Is this what I think it is?" asks the commander himself, swallowing his saliva, and feeling a little nervous.


    Soon, his squad arrives at this scene, and they proceed to contain the two bodies, put them safe, and then they are starting to make a small camp into a complex apartment. Tomorrow, they''ll start their work to renovate this abandoned outpost and raise a new one.


    ***


    At a few kilometres, on a highway leading to Sirogojno, a human, wearing a black priest robe is walking on the highway, holding the crucifix cross of Jesus, all covered in the blue blood, and on the other hand a bible with red blood. The corpse that is walking on the highway is Sava, the Undead Priest, who is looking like to be fine, and stopped bleeding. His zones where it was stabbed, shoot and beaten by the survivors he was chasing have all been healed.


    "God knows the way. God knows the people. God knows all." he mutters to himself as he keeps walking further on the highway, to where its village is waiting for his arrival, and be led again by this Undead person.

 Valley of Flood - Part 1

    "Help!" screams a lady from the street, as she is leaving the wreckage, with bruises and blood dripping from her forehead. "Help us!"


    As the woman, dressed in her usual blue uniform that is using on her job at Doctor Oetker factory, managed to crawl from the microbus. She looked around horrified, to see humans running from the streets, abandoning their cars, their loved ones, or any humans who needed help as he was hurt or dead on the streets. The girl sees how a thing wakes up from the street, it looks in her eyes and starts slowly walking toward her.


    As the terrified woman looks at the thing coming to her, another person manages to crawl from the microbus, a male. The man looks to be in as bad a shape as the woman, with bruises on its face, and an injured eye. The man sees the woman and yells.


    "Help! Help me!"


    The woman turns around to that man, she runs to him, and helps him get out of the microbus. She pulls the man out from there with both of her hands, and as he gets outside of the wrecked vehicle, the man looks at its feet and sees how damaged its legs are, then it screams of pain as he was trying to move its own legs.


    "Hey!" screams another person coming out from a small restaurant near the place where the wreckage has happened. "Over here!" he says to the lady to come in there.


    "Help me!" yells the lady holding the injured man who is still screaming of pain because of his injured legs.


    A person comes from that small restaurant, sees the thing walking toward the lady, and he immediately goes over to that thing instead of the lady. The said person, a male, in his twenties, is hitting that person with a wrench he was holding into his left hand. He hit the thing''s head so hard, it made the thing fall on the ground, and stopped moving for a few seconds.


    "What the fuck?!" yells the lady as she has seen the thing get hit on the head, it falls on the ground. "You killed him?!"


    "It was either him or you." says the person coming over to the lady, and he helps her carry the wounded man to the restaurant like a big sack of potatoes.


    As the two people are carrying the barely alive corpse to that small restaurant, another person yells for help as he manages to get out of the microbus where the other lady and the injured man were in. Another man, this one dressed in military clothes, leaves the restaurant, comes over to the microbus and helps the person leave it.


    The military person is a male, probably in his thirties, has on the backside a rifle, that is tied to its left shoulder with a rope. The man helps the person get out of the microbus, who is a teenager, a woman, dressed in some expensive clothes, having a small backpack, meaning she was either going to high school, or was thinking it would be funny to skip classes today with her friends.


    "Are you injured?" asks the military person.


    "No." replies the teenager to the military. "There are still people in there."


    "I will handle it." says the military person. "Now. Go into the restaurant, and stay there until help arrives. Understand?"


    "Yes!" says the teenager and she run to the restaurant where the other three people have gone.


    The person dressed in a military uniform, starts to break the windows of the microbus with the handle of the rifle. After he broke five windows, he looks on the inside of this microbus and sees there is another person who is crawling from there. The man helps that person, who is a man, probably the same age as the military personnel. After he managed to get out from the wreckage, he checked himself, looking to see if he had any wounds or bites on his body.


    Ensure your favorite authors get the support they deserve. Read this novel on the original website.


    "You are not bitten."


    "No, sir." says the person.


    "Go into the restaurant. The vehicle will come to take us from here."


    "Understand!" says the person and he run to the restaurant.


    The military personnel remain there for a few seconds, then he raises up, looks around as he is holding his rifle in his hands to see if a thing will not come after him. He observes how some corpses are rising on their feet, and he quickly starts to shoot the first bullet of this rifle at a zombie near. It destroyed the brain and the head, making the corpse fall on the ground, which makes the other zombie nearby come after him.


    The soldier runs inside the restaurant, where two people from there, two males, are moving a big table to block the main door, then with another person help they carry a second table, putting on the top of the first one, and back away from the door. A woman proceeds to use the curtains to block the zombie view of the place.


    "I think we are safe." says the person dressed as a soldier, holding his rifle in his hands.


    "Hopefullyˇ­" says one of the men who have used the tables to block the doors.


    "What are these things?!" asks a distressed old lady sitting at a table with a male that looks like to be in his 30s and also distressed as the old person.


    "These things are zombies." says the person dressed as a soldier to the nine people in that restaurant. He looks at them, sees how some of them are looking at him in a way. He observes some of them are not believing the story, while others do believe his story. Even if this apocalypse has happened weeks ago, for this region, this is the first such a virus hits them.


    "These are real?" asks the injured person who is on the tale where a female is tending his leg wounds.


    "Yes." says the soldier to the people at the restaurant.


    "And how do we defend against these things?" asks the same old lady, feeling more distressed. This also points that this person knows about zombies.


    "By shooting their head." says the person in his 30s who is looking to be his son the more a person would stare at him and observe the similarities between the two on the exterior. "Right?"


    "Yes." says the soldier to that person. "You killed one of those?"


    "I-I did." says the person. "I-I don''t know if I killed him, actually. But I pushed him on the stairs. Hopefully it breaks his bones and his head while he was falling."


    "Alright. You people have to remember. A shot into the head on these things means certain death to them. You wither shoot them with a bullet, hit them with a sword, a big and sturdy club enough to break their heads, or anything else to break their entire heads into pieces." he looks at the eight survivors, and one wounded person. He looks curios at the wounded person, he walks toward the said person.


    The injured person is having its wounded leg bandaged. He looks at the person who treat his wound, the lady, proceed to feel a little nervous in front of the soldier. The soldier did not say anything, instead he takes the bandages off from the injured person to see what kind of wound he possess on the left leg. When he saw the wound, the soldier backs away in terror and he looks straight on the eyes of the person, who is starting to feel scared.


    "Please, no." says the injured person on the verge of crying. "Don''tˇ­ Pleaseˇ­"


    The soldier takes his gun, he aims his pistol to the head of the injured person, and pulls the trigger quick enough to make the other react as late to stop this murder. After the soldier pulled the trigger, everyone from the room are reacting in shock. The old woman almost collapsed, but there was her son who helped her stand up. Then there was also the woman who helped the injured person, who was looking in shock how this soldier killed the person that was treated by her.


    "Why did you do that?" asks a person angrily to the soldier.


    "It was infected." says the soldier aiming his gun to the wound on the leg of the corpse. "That is a zombie bite. You get bitten, you transform into a zombie. Like these things outside." he puts his pistol away, and takes the rifle it was left to where is the blockage made, and he loads it. "You die. You transform into zombies. You inhale weird mushroom spores from outside. You die. You get into contact with a zombie blood. You get infected." he looks on the windows, sees a bunch of zombies approaching the restaurant these eight survivors are hiding and staying still for a military evacuation. "There are coming a lot more than I was expecting, to be fair." He cocks his rifle with enough bullets.


    "We are going to fight them?!" asks one person from this restaurant.


    "No." says the soldier. "There are more than we can take it. We have to run from here."


    "And leave the body here?!" asks the old lady to the soldier.


    "This the only way, ma''am. It is now us or them."

 Valley of Flood - Part 2

    The soldier (Petre) walks to the backside door. All of the survivors, not having a choice, they are taking something they can use as a weapon, and follow the soldier outside.


    The teenager (Andra) takes from a table a kitchen knife, all soaked in blood, probably from a zombie kill or something much worse. The teenager girl cleans the sharp side of the knife by using a towel that was on the table, near the corpse of the injured person who turned out he was bitten by a zombie. after she cleaned the blade, she goes after the old woman and her son.


    The old lady hasn''t taken any weapon, she is looking around terrified, staying near her son (Gancea), who is holding the said wrench he used earlier to smack a zombie into the head.


    A woman (Mihaela) goes after the four people, holding a frying pan from the stove. She really feels like she would be in great trouble if she would come across a zombie, but this was the first thing that saw as she was following the group. She was the one who helped the injured person.


    A man (Ron), probably in his 40s, an Englishman, who was helping together with the man to move the furniture at the main door to make the access inaccessible. This Englishman with orange hair and beard is having on his hands a machete that is soaked in blood, meaning this person had a few encounters with things like these and he knows what he has to do in order to live another day.


    Another person (Daniel), one of the men who stayed on this restaurant, is carrying a baseball bat, that is having blood spots all around it.


    The last person is unarmed, but he is as scared as the old lady from this restaurant.


    Arriving at the backside of the restaurant, the soldier opens the door of the restaurant, and upon opening it, he walks out from there and he shoots the first zombie that is running toward his group. He made a clean headshot, then he continues to shoot the other zombies who are coming close to him. The rest of the survivors are leaving the restaurant and are making cover to the soldier, and by doing this, they hit the zombies on their heads hard enough to put these monsters on human skins on the ground. Not killing them hard enough, but enough to give them a few seconds of advance.


    The soldier looks back to his survivor group he is protecting, he tells them to follow him, and they are doing as they are told to do.


    ***


    A few moments later, the group from the restaurant have passed the small trailer on the road that is usually there to count the passenger on the microbuses that are entering Curtea de Arge?. When they got at that small trailer, they''ve observed a corpse inside. One of the people from the group knows who is this corpse.


    You might be reading a pirated copy. Look for the official release to support the author.


    "This is Mirel." says the person with the bloody baseball bat. "Poor man."


    "We can cry later." says the soldier reloading his assault rifle, to shoot another clip to the upcoming zombies. "We have to move forward group!"


    "Yes, sir!" says most of the people from this group.


    All the members are following the soldier who is the only one who can use a gun. The group is feeling all scared a terrified by the shootings, the zombies that are coming after them. even though the apocalypse has hit the world a long time ago, most of the people haven''t adapted to this new lifestyle.


    A zombie, who is on the top of the building of El Greco supermarket, is looking at the group of people that are following the soldier. That zombie is not a normal one, is a class F, one of the most dangerous zombies that exist at this moment in the entire Europe. How come a zombie class F with a humongous left arm got into the rooftop of a building is unknown, but a certain thing is sure. This class F holds on the huge left arm a half-eaten corpse of a human, who is about to turn into a zombie. This class F zombie is throwing at full speed the corpse toward a group member. He launches that zombie corpse like a baseball ball, it lands on the backside of the old lady.


    "MOM!" yells the person seeing her mother being pinned down by a zombie who just got thrown here.


    "Class F!" yells the soldier aiming his assault rifle to that creature, and proceed to shoot fourteen times the creatures.


    All of the shoots have hit the creature''s head, successfully killing that dangerous evolved zombie. The zombie falls on the rooftop of the building, and remain in there, all by himself, together with two more zombie corpses without any head, and a katana sword on the rooftop.


    "Mom. Get up!" says the son of her old lady who got hit by a flying zombie.


    The old lady di not respond to the request of his son. He tries to get her up, but the old lady couldn''t move. It is on an unconscious state. The son tries to move his mother, but before he could do that, he hears a growl coming from the zombie it was thrown to the old lady.


    "No!" yells the son to that zombie.


    A male survivor runs close to the zombie, he stabs the head of the zombie with his pocket knife, then he moves over the zombie body from the old lady. The survivor who have done that is the Englishman with the machete. Seems like this person is armed with more than one weapon. After he moved the zombie corpse from the old lady, he notices something that is making him scared and worry. The old lady has a few of her ribs and bones piercing outside of her skin.


    "Fuckˇ­" says the British man in English.


    "No. No. No. No. No." says the man after he sees the state her mother is in.


    All of the members of the group have stopped from their advancement, they look at the old lady state. Then, the soldier, sees a car near them, he goes over there, opens the door, checks the car to see if it is empty, and runs over to the group who have gathered around the old lady to see what they can do. The soldier tells the people to help him move the old lady body toward the car to rest her body in there, lock in there, put someone on guard to her boy and wait here until they will come back.

 Valley of Flood - Part 3

    The person who volunteered to remain close to the old lady is the one who has tried to save the person who got killed by the soldier. The soldier, and other three people have taken the body of the old lady, moved it carefully to the car, and after they managed to put her on the backside of the car. When they did this, the soldier proceeds to advance without the woman and the son of the old lady, who remain here, hoping his mother will survive this awful incident she has faced.


    "Can you do something?" asks the son of the old lady to the woman.


    "I see what I can do." says the woman, and she notices a group of zombies coming toward them. "Can you deal with them?"


    The son of the old lady, is taking the wrench on his right hand. He looks at them angrily. And he turns around to the car, he notices on the front seat of the car, on the driver seat, small screwdriver, a one that is shaped in a star form. He takes the screwdriver on the hand. As he is looking at the screwdriver, he is thinking about a way of fighting he sawed once in a video game about a zombie apocalypse, almost the same as this scenario.


    The son turns around to the zombies who are coming to them, he hold the screwdriver on the left hand since he is a leftist. He decided to use the wrench on the right hand. He stays on guard, and waits until a zombie comes closer to his reach. After one got close, the man kicks the zombie leg at the perfect time, then, when the zombie has fallen on the ground, he stabs the head with the screwdriver. When he stabbed it, he pulls the screwdriver, then he kicks the second coming zombie, but this one gets a wrench hit on the head. It was a hit so hard, the skull has broken into pieces and it reveals the brain. But the hit did not kill the second zombie, so the man stabs the creature brain with the screwdriver, to kill it completely.


    Two more zombies show up, waling toward the man, who is feeling tired already after he killed two zombies. He immediately goes to a zombie, hit the head hard enough with the wrench it made the thing stumble and fall on the ground, then he uses the screwdriver to stab the fourth zombie left eye. The stab it hit a vein to the brain, an important vein that can run this corpse to life. He retakes the screwdriver, then he kicks the zombie hard on the stomach it sends him a few meters on the ground, with the body laying on his back on the road.


    A fifth zombie is coming toward the man. The dude steps back a little to take small breath of air to unleash another stab attack. After he takes six steps back, he waits for the fifth zombie to approach. When he got close to the man, the attack gets unleashed. The man stabs the left eye of the fifth zombie, retake the screwdriver and use it on the sixth zombie, but the stab was not enough because the thing kept moving, so the man holds the thing back with the screwdriver, stuck on the right eye of the zombie, then he hits the creature head hard enough with the wrench that it made it fall on the ground, losing its cognitive function of moving.


    He breathes heavily as he looks at the zombies who are approaching this fighter and the car where the woman is trying to save the life of the mother of the person who has just killed six zombies in three minutes. Five zombies are walking on a slow rhythm toward the fighter.


    The man, instead of backing away, he has a look at the car, where the woman is treating the wounds of his mother, then he looks back at the zombies. He takes a deep breath and lets out a scream as he is dashing forward to the five zombies.


    The man stabs the first creature in the head with the screwdriver, he smashes the head of the second zombie with the wrench, then he kicks the third zombie on the stomach before he makes a retreat. when the fourth zombie has got close enough, he stabs the thing head with the screwdriver, then he kicks the thing into the stomach, sending it about eight steps back, and uses the wrench to smash the head of the fifth zombie. He looks at the third zombie, who is raising on his feet, and he quickly goes to him, manages to make a clean and hard hit on the head of the creature and uses the wrench to hit the screwdriver, who goes deeper into the fourth zombie brain, making the thing fall on the knees, and with the head on the road.


    A case of literary theft: this tale is not rightfully on Amazon; if you see it, report the violation.


    The fighter, goes toward the car to see how are things holding up, after he has managed to kill the zombies who were close to the car. He observes his mother is still hurt badly, but he observes the woman is doing her best to help the mother of the man who has just killed eleven normal zombies with only a screwdriver and a wrench.


    "How is she?" asks the person to the lady.


    "She''s in critical condition." says the woman looking worried to the lady, and she has a look at the man, he observes is having a few blood spots on his shirt. "Are you okay?"


    "Yes. I am good. I haven''t been bitten." says the man to the lady, and he is looking worried on her mother. "Tell me. There is no way of surviving this?"


    The woman did not respond to the question. So the man, whisper to the woman.


    "Go. I will handle this."


    "Huh?" asks the woman who did not quite get what the man has said to her.


    "I have to deal it by myself." says the man, on the verge of crying. "Go after them."


    "I cannot leave you." says the woman.


    "ˇ­Alright." says the man knowing that it will be pointless to deal further with this woman. He accepts to let her be here to watch the person about to kill his own mother.


    He knows this is the only way to stop the zombie transformation of a person.


    After a few seconds, he notices the veins are starting to turn purple and green, and the skin of the lady turning slowly into a green colour. The old lady is slowly opening the eyes, and she says to the son.


    "Ganceaˇ­ Ganceaˇ­ I am sorry."


    "Mom!" says Gancea, the son who has fought the zombies earlier on the verge of crying. "Mom. I am sorry."


    "ˇ­ B-B-Be strong my boyˇ­ Be strongerˇ­"


    "I-I will, Mom!"


    "Iˇ­ I love you." says the old lady.


    "I love you too, Mom!"


    The woman, is crying and starts sobbing. she takes her eyes away from the image of her son who is taking the knife from a seat net to the old lady, and use it to stab the head of the person who almost transformed into a zombie. after he has done this, Gancea, started to shed a tear, then he takes the knife, plus the wrench, who is handing to the lady, then he takes the hand of the person who was trying to heal the mother of Gancea, and runs after the direction of where the group have gone.


    "This may be not a good time, but my name is Mihaela." says the woman running together with Gancea.


    "Nice to meet you. I am Gancea." responds Gancea running on the main road.


    The two are running on the road, both holding each other hands, and avoiding every zombie that is trying to come in contact with them. As they continue to run from these things, toward of where the group has running, they observe some movements in the Ereea clothing factory.


    A person is fending off a zombie with a log, but it is pointless because that zombie jumps on the person, pin the person down and eats his entire face. The two people are looking scared at that zombie, and they continue to run to where the group is supposed to be at the moment.


    After they run more than a hundred meters, the two people arrive in front of a company named "Hidro Arges", where the other four people have managed to enter it. The British person let the two people enter the place, then he covers the main door with furniture to not let the zombie invade this safe zone. Inside in there, all the six people are staying there, and waiting for the rescue to come.


    "They''ll come in about thirty minutes." says the soldier to the two people. "I have given their coordinates."


    "We are safe?" asks Mihaela.


    "For now." says the soldier to the lady, he looks at Gancea, and asks him as he is feeling concerned. "Are you bitten or scratched?"


    "No." says Gancea to the soldier, and he looks at his clothes. "Is there a changing room and some clothes of my size here?"


    "Follow me." says the soldier to Gancea, and he escorts him to a changing room in this place to strip the clothes soaked in blood that could put in the risk to infect him.

 Valley of Flood - Part 4

    Five minutes later, in Hydroelectrical company, the soldier is working on the door and windows barricades, making them be more sturdy and tough to be broken by these creatures. Inside this place, there are other survivors, who are taking a breather from the run they''ve had earlier. Five people are inside a room that looks like a cafeteria while other two of them are helping the soldier on the barricades.


    In the Cafeteria room, the obese man, with a wrench, who has lost his mother moments ago, is on a table, dressed in new clothes that are looking like a suit of the workers of this place. He is looking at the table, on a map of Curtea de Arges.


    "What are you doing there?" asks a man walking closer to the map.


    "I am looking to possible safe zones. See if there is an escape from this city." says the man to the other person.


    "Listen. I am sorry." says the man sounding honest. "I am sorry for your loss."


    "ˇ­It''s alright." says the man in a whisper.


    "My name is Petre."


    "Gancea."


    "Nice to meet you."


    Petre is raising his hand to Gancea as a way to shake their hands. Gancea, looking at the hand of Petre for a second, he decides to shake it, then continues to look on the map.


    "So. You''ve found something?"


    "Some exits." responds Gancea looking a bit worried. "But I am not sure whether they will be safe. Who knows what is happening on the nearby villages?"


    "You were from here?"


    "No." responds Gancea. "I was from Bucharest when this thing started. Ended here because of a bus who ran out of gas near Vidraru. Plan was to get to a nearby safe zone in the forest. But the tunnels got blocked by avalanches and hordes of zombie, so my mom and I ended in Arefu for a while, until we have found the microbus who promised to deliver us to a safe zone extraction. And we ended here"


    "Damnˇ­" says the person named Petre, who is sitting on the table, on the other side, who has listened to the whole monologue. "My case was a bit different. I was in Oesti the whole weeks when the apocalypse started. Then I saw the microbus and taken it."


    If you come across this story on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen from Royal Road. Please report it.


    "We weren''t so far from each other." says Gancea to Petre.


    "Yeah. I''ve mostly stayed inside of the house. All by myself."


    "Same as me. But in someone else''s house."


    Then, someone else appears at the table, that person is the woman who stayed behind to help Gancea''s mother, the nurse lady.


    "Hey. Are you good?" asks the woman to Gancea, feeling a little worried.


    "Yes." says Gancea to the woman. "Hey. I forgot to say my thanks. For staying behind. And giving me hope."


    "I-I am sorry." says the woman. "I did try my best, butˇ­ umˇ­"


    "Yesˇ­" sighs Gancea.


    "So, Mihaela." says Petre to the woman. "Found something in the kitchen?"


    "Nothing." responds Mihaela. "The whole place was raided a while ago." she looks at Gancea, at the map. "You trying to find a way out?"


    "You can say that." says Gancea to the nurse. "Hey. Name is Gancea."


    "Mihaela. Nice to meet you." she looks on the map, and then points with her finger to the zone where is written Valea Ia?ului. "This is where the soldier will transport us."


    "But what he is waiting for?" asks Petre.


    "For his reinforcements." says Mihaela to Petre. "Says there are more squads in city alone. He tries to contact them to give its location, but it seems some couldn''t pick up the signal."


    Out of nowhere, the three people hear a helicopter sound, the sound of an engine to a close altitude on a city. The three people, plus the two other unknowns are going toward the windows are situated, all are looking outside, but they don''t see the helicopter nor any kind of airplane flying on a close altitude. Then, the soldier comes to the room, yells to the people there.


    "We have to go. Now."


    "Where to?" asks Gancea and the English man, who apparently was at the table speaking with the teenager at the table.


    "We are going to King Michael I High school. there is a group of survivors who have barricaded themselves since day one." responds the soldier to the group. "Has any of you attended that place?"


    "I do." says the female teenager raising her hand to the soldier.


    "What''s your name?" asks the soldier to the female teenager.


    "Andra, sir."


    "Well, Andra." says the soldier. "You''ll come with me. The rest stay here. I''ve arranged for a microbus to pick all of you and deliver to Valea Ia?ului outpost."


    "Is that place safe?" asks Mihaela. "Because I''ve heard on the radio it got overrun."


    "It did. But now the situation has been stabilized. It''s safe to stay in there." he heads outside of the room with Andra, who is holding a knife she found in this room.


    As the two are waling toward the main door, the soldier is asking her.


    "Have you killed any zombies?"


    "I did." says Andra. "about twenty."


    "Not bad." says the soldier trying to hide his smirk. "Learnt from zombie mass media?"


    "Yes."


    Arriving at the door, who wasn''t exactly barricaded like the windows and other doors, the soldier and another unknown person are moving the objects away, moved one big table and a big couch. After this, the two people are leaving the place, see a military truck parked at an about fifteen meters from there, they walk in fast speed to that truck, get on the back where other twelve soldiers are there. When the two people got in the truck, the vehicle leaves the safe zone and goes deeper in this royal city of Romania.

 Valley of Flood - Part 5

    As the military truck rumbled towards its destination, the soldiers and the teenager couldn''t help but feel a sense of dread wash over them. The once bustling boulevard, filled with people living their lives, was now a desolate wasteland. The streets were littered with corpses, bushes were trampled and destroyed, and the houses that once stood tall were now nothing more than ruins. Bullet holes riddled the walls of some buildings, while others had been completely destroyed by fire. The devastation of this apocalypse was evident in the buildings that still stood, some of which were engulfed in flames and others that were barely standing. It was a haunting sight, one that would stay with them forever.


    The entire boulevard of where the high school is located is in ruin, just like the rest of this royal city.


    The military truck stops in front of the entrance, the entrance of where the students were using it, the entrance with big green walls that looked more like a prison, rather than a normal school. The driver is looking at the gates, he observes the main door is locked and barricaded with a car. He also notices the door was taken from its place and laying on the grass at three meters away. He looks at the building second floor, there he didn''t see anything, other than some broken windows, a zombie walking clueless on the rooftop and a few seagulls who are still in this city.


    "How we go in?" asks the soldier from the passenger seat to the driver.


    "We have to climb the walls." says the driver. "Otherwise we can try the teacher entrance. Is on the parking lot. But''s probably locked too."


    "Alright." responds the soldier who gets out of the seat and the military truck.


    After the soldier got out of the car, he walks toward the green gates, and tries to push them. He pushed it slowly and at full strength, the gate from the left side opened wide, but not enough to help the military truck enter the place. So, the soldier takes a look inside this perimeter to see the layout. He also observes the car who is blocking the people entrance blocks the other part of the gate who was not able to move. But he notices the left side of the gate is wide enough to help the squad enter the place and escort the survivor from this building.


    The soldier observes how a person leaves the main high school building, he runs from the door, while three zombies are running after him. The runner is a teenager, probably the same age as the teenager from military truck, and it''s holding his left hand while it is bleeding. The teenager did not even manage to say "Help!" he immediately got killed by a bullet who has gone through the head. The corpse of the high schooler falls on the road. And when it did, the zombies are jumping on him, are stabbing its torso and grabbing the organs from the poor high schooler who wouldn''t have managed to live enough due to the bite.


    "What have you done?" asks a soldier coming to the soldier who killed that teenager.


    "It was bitten. We couldn''t risk it, man." responds the soldier holding his pistol, smoking from the bullet that delivered to the poor boy skull.


    "Help us!" says a person from the second-floor building, who is waving its hands to the group of soldiers who are slowly enter the perimeter together with the teenage girl. "We need help!"


    "We''re coming!" yells the driver to that person at second story building.


    The driver turns to his squad, has a look at all of the soldiers. The entire squad, including the teenager are armed with assault rifles, shotguns, pistols and submachine guns weapons. None of them are carrying any melee weapon because they wanted to eradicate the entire zone of zombies from this area for their second objective.


    "We will be splitting in two squads. First squad will check the other buildings of his area, the other six and the teenage girl will come to the main building, help us escort the people stuck inside and eliminate zombies from that place." the soldier looks at the teenage girl. "What is your name?"


    "Andra. Andra Erdevici."


    "You''re Romanian?" asks a soldier with a heavy Romanian accent.


    "Only half." responds Andra. "Immigrant from Croatia."


    "I see." says that soldier.


    The soldier who drove the military truck is making the teams. He puts himself, and other six soldiers and Andra on the mission of going in the main building to rescue the survivors trapped in the second floor. And let the rest of the squad dealing with the zombies on the area.


    This story has been stolen from Royal Road. If you read it on Amazon, please report it


    The soldiers are all equipped in heavy armour that is zombie biting prof, but Andra is not having any type of this equipment, all she wears is a worn-out training suit used for sporting activity either in gym or outside in the parks to do a small jog around the place. The squad with Andra are already going into the building, and they are walking fast to the second entrance of the place, not the first where that teenager got killed earlier.


    When they arrived at the second door, they noticed the door was closed, but when they opened it, it was opened. The door was not even locked, s thing that can explain how this building got invaded by zombies. They enter the place one by one, holding their guns and prepared to pull the trigger at any moment a zombie comes running at them.


    "Jesus." says a soldier after he sees a zombie corpse of an old lady. "I remember this person. She was my Chemistry teacher."


    "Was a good teacher?" asks another soldier.


    "Gave me a lot of work because I was skipping some of her classes to hang out with my friends. Feel bad to see her like this."


    The soldier notices the forehead of that corpse is having three bullet holes. He breathes a sigh of relief, knowing this corpse would not reanimate again and try to eat them.


    Andra is looking at the side where there are supposed to be teachers stairs. She observes the door from there is unlocked, but there are five zombies who are on the teacher''s hallway, looking on the opposite direction from them.


    The other side entrance to other floors is blocked by a pile of desk that serves as a blockade at the first door, they also notice how the windows at the door frame are broken and having blood stains on them, meaning a zombie was killed in there, or in worst case scenario a man was beaten to death.


    "This way." says Andra to the squad of soldiers, showing them the second entrance to the floors of high school main building.


    The squad of soldiers is going to the second entrance to the other floors, upon arriving at that door, a soldier seeing the five zombies, takes aim and uses his submachine gun on those five zombies, emptying half of the thirty-five bullets magazine. After he shoots those zombies, fifty more zombies rise from the floor, leaves rooms from the teacher lounge main entrance, jumps through the windows, and one even breaks from the toilet room that was blocked by a small desk.


    "Grigore." says a soldier to the one who used the submachine gun. "If we survive I''ll kill you!"


    The squad of soldiers is starting to fire their weapons and advance upstairs to the second floor where the survivors should be located. They all run upstairs, with their guns on the hands, killing any zombie that are coming after them. Andra has managed to kill a zombie who was close to touch her. She shot the head of that zombie with a pistol she was handed earlier by the soldier while they were on their way here.


    On the first floor, the squad of soldiers notices the blockage made of desks, chairs and two doors are blocking the zombies that are trapped on the first floor. They are trying to reach the soldiers with their arms, but couldn''t. The soldiers are looking impressed at the blockage for a few seconds, then they continue running to the second floor, killing three zombies who were at the stairs and walking toward the soldiers. All three of them get killed and thrown off from the stairs like a rag doll landing either on the first floor, the ground floor, or on another zombies.


    At the second floor, the survivors see the blockage is being opened by five people that are dressed in school uniforms, all bloody from zombies blood, smelling bad due to lack of showers, and tired. The squad enters the hall of the second floor, then they start helping the five survivors seal the blockage by moving the furniture and arranging in some kind of blockage.


    The soldiers are looking at the hall, they see there a lot of sleeping bags, on there, crates with supplies, weapons near walls, door taken out of their hinges to make blockages, blood on the walls, crates with clothes, a few improvised clothing dryers with cables all around the hallway and a refrigerator that doesn''t work, but used it to store some kind of supplies in there. On the hallway are twenty-three survivors, that are looking at the soldiers with sigh of relief. All of them are in a bad state looking, some bandaged to their hands due to some injuries, others are lucky enough to not have any kind of scars on them.


    "We are The Organization." says the soldier who drive and lead the squad to the second floor. "Our mission is to save humanity from these attacks, escort them to safe zones, provide help to those needed and offer a chance for a peaceful life to people like you."


    The soldier looks at the survivors, who are all cheering for them coming here and helping them out to escape from this camp they make. The soldiers proceed to inspect every survivor, checking their temperature, looking at people''s injuries and asking them questions to see if they can move along with them to safe zone. While the soldiers from The Organization are doing their job, Andra is asking a soldier who just checked the supplies crate.


    "Why it''s it called The Organization?"


    "It has many names, young lady." responds a soldier with a gypsy accent who looked through a crate with clothes. "But popularly is called "The Organization" by the whole world nowadays."


    "The entire world is infected?"


    "Don''t know. But hopefully not."


    "Andra?" asks a survivor coming to Andra, looking surprised at the girl who came with the squad.


    The survivor who came to see Andra is a high schooler, probably the same age as Andra, a boy with long brown hair and a moustache who is difficult to see by the naked eye. A scar on the left cheek, probably from a brawl. Green eyes and worn-out clothes, all soaked in blood.


    "Victor?" asks Andra surprised.


    "You know him?" asks the soldier to Andra.


    "He''s umˇ­ A friend."


    "A boyfriend?" asks the soldier to Victor.


    "Ex-boyfriend."


    "Ohˇ­ Well. okay." says the soldier and continues to search through the crates all around this hallway, while his colleagues are doing their checking on the survivors of this place.


    Andra and Victor, now being alone, they decide to talk a bit on a near the blockage, far from the ears of other people.

 Valley of Flood - Part 6

    As the sun beat down on the high school grounds, Petre and his squad of soldiers made their way towards the gym building. They had to be cautious, as they had no idea what they would find inside. As they approached the door, they saw that it was already open. Inside, they found a gruesome sight - five corpses of teenagers, all eaten by zombies. The soldiers quickly scanned the area, making sure it was safe enough to use as a temporary safe zone.


    As they entered the basketball court, they were met with a pile of bodies - both human and zombie. It was clear that these corpses had been there for a while. The soldiers ignored them and continued to search the area. They found a few firearms, but they were all broken and useless.


    After a few more minutes of searching, the soldiers left the building empty-handed and headed towards the next one. As they walked, they noticed a group of zombies trying to break into the building they were heading towards. Petre knew what had to be done.


    Stolen from Royal Road, this story should be reported if encountered on Amazon.


    "Go to the military truck and bring the C-4''s," he ordered.


    The soldiers were surprised by his request, but they knew better than to question their leader. They quickly retrieved the explosives and brought them back to Petre.


    "We''re going to blow up this building?" one soldier asked.


    "Yes," Petre replied. "It''s for the better."


    The soldiers planted the C-4''s around the building and prepared to detonate them. Petre knew that they had to kill every single zombie in the area, and this was the only way to do it.


    As they finished planting the explosives, Petre looked around the area. He noticed that the library and cafeteria were on the brink of collapse, and a helicopter had crashed into the rooftop. The stairs were littered with corpses of all ages.


    "Let''s do this," Petre said, as he gave the signal to detonate the explosives.


    The explosion was deafening, and the building crumbled to the ground. Petre and his soldiers had done what they had to do - they had eliminated the threat and made the area safe once again.

 Valley of Flood - Part 7

    ***


    "How did you survive this long?" asks Victor to Andra.


    The two classmates are sitting in their old classroom, not on their usual seats, they both sit on chairs, near each other, face to face, nothing to make a blockage, like some kind of interrogation room without the normal table that is used it there to create some kind of way to relax both the interrogator and the suspect.


    "I''ve stayed in my house. You?" asks Andra looking at Victor.


    "I was stupid." says Victor to Andra. "I''ve left my house at the usual 7 AM, hour I am was always going to school. And with no way out of this place, and trapped with other people, all I could do is remain here, with these people."


    "How many were in there at beginning?"


    "Eighty or more than that. At first, we were all on the three floors, but somebody, being a threat to us, he opened the doors, and let these ferocious creatures in the place. These things ate most of the good people from here. But we managed to fight back these things, but we could not be able to retake the other floors, only the second floor remain to us until you guys have showed up."


    "Never ever thought a day like this would come." says Andra after she looked in silent to a blood stain on the wall. "We''ll be back here. In the place we both used to hate."


    "Maybe you because I saw it as an escape from my abusive family." responds Viktor. "I don''t love my family for a bit."


    "How can you say that?" asks Andra feeling a bit mad to Victor''s behaviour.


    "They were all bad people." responds Victor.


    The clock of this room continues to work, meaning its batteries did not stop or ran out of juice.


    "Why do you think they were bad?"


    "Exams. Disappointment of ending here on this crap high school. Being the bigger brother, and always being ignored by everybody, except youˇ­Until the day we broke up."


    "Look. I am-"


    "Not your fault." responds Victor to Andra. "I am not used to being close to peopleˇ­ I will probably never be."


    "Look, Victor. I don''t understand what is going on through your head." says Andra to Victor. "But I assure you, I am not going to leave you. Alright? I will stay close to you. Now, wherever you want to go, I''ll go."


    "You promise?" asks Victor looking hopefully at Andra, wondering if his ex-girlfriend is actually telling the truth and not some kind of lie to make him feel better for a while.


    "I promise." responds Andra looking at Victor eyes. "I promise I will not leave you."


    "And I promise I will protect and watch after you when you''ll be in trouble."


    The two are staring at each other for a few seconds, then, a soldier comes into this room, he sees Andra, and he tells her. The soldier is the same one who drove the vehicle here, on this area to rescue the people who were trapped in here.


    "Andra. Gotta help us on something."


    If you come across this story on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen from Royal Road. Please report it.


    "Sure." says Andra leaving her seat and walking toward the soldier. "What is it?"


    "Now. We want you to help us."


    "At what?"


    "Do you know where is the principal office?"


    "Yes. It''s near the teacher lounge. What do we need from there?"


    "We also got a signal of help coming from there. There wasn''t only one."


    "So you say someone was trapped in the Principal office."


    "By that someone if you consider the risk it may be an undead."


    "An Undead? What is that?" asks Victor who joined into this conversation.


    "Mind your business, citizen."


    "He has the right to know, sir." says Andra to the soldier, in an authority voice. "What is an Undead, by the way?"


    "It is complicated. But if we manage to extract one alive, we may be close to a craft a cure to these things."


    Andra and Victor are looking at each other surprised by this information. They never thought there may be chances for a cure to be made in the first place, especially when there are zombies who can throw bodies of humans, run, climb, jump three meters high and ones who can crawl. Both are starting to look hopefully, but then, Victor remembers something.


    "I know where is that place. But going down will be a risk. The entire place is filled with zombies last time I saw. He may not be there anymore."


    "We got the signal yesterday." says the soldier. "If it is a gamble, we''ll take it. We need as many people as we can get."


    "What if they are evil?" asks Andra.


    "Evil? What is this? A TV shows made for people who enjoy horror stuff?"


    "What if they break a rule?"


    "They''ll be arrested. That is all."


    "But if they continue to do bad stuff until they''ll be freed?"


    "Arrested." says the soldier. "For more time."


    The thing he said is a lie. If a survivor broke a rule made by The Organization, he''ll pe put on trial and if it is guilty as a punishment he may get arrested in a container for more than a week with only bread and water. And the worst punishment to a survivor, would not be the exiled part, that would be infection with zombie virus and used as a lab rats by researchers in search of a cure.


    The soldier leaves the room with Andra and Victor, they walk to the group of other soldiers who are about to go to Principal office to check if there is truly a signal from someone stuck in there. They do not even change a word, the leader squad, is kicking the door that was used earlier by the squad to get here, when it was kicked, a few zombies are stumbling down the stairs, and others are tripping on other zombies. Then, the squad proceeds to open fire on the zombies with their fire weapons and advance slowly toward the ground floor, killing every single zombie that are on the stairs.


    As the squad is descending the stairs, an explosion is heard outside, the squad of soldier are almost falling from the stairs due to shockwave it caused and the shaking. The squad is continuing to descend the stairs, killing and pushing any zombie from the stairs. Andra and Victor are on the back of the prepared squad wearing heavy armour with heavy weapons while they are using handguns to kill the zombies.


    In a few minutes they managed to get on ground floor, they proceed to walk on the hall of teacher lounge, killing any zombie who are raising or are coming in the hallway. Andra and Victor have been killing three zombies. Well, only Andra have killed three zombies because Victor has missed all of his shoots.


    " We are here." says Victor to the squad of soldiers who were checking the teacher lounge.


    "Is it locked?" asks a soldier who has entered the cashier room to check if there was a zombie in there.


    "No." says Victor who has opened the door and it is unlocked. "It is opened."


    Victor opens the Principal office door wide enough to let the soldiers observes how is the interior of this room to see what is going on. In the interior of this desk room is nothing but a big mess like the plays was robbed. A soldier enters the room, with his weapons prepared, checks the interior and notices how in this room there is a few corpse''s people that are looking like teachers and the two principals of this school. That was something Victor has confirmed to the squad of the people in heavy armour.


    Upon inspecting and searching this place, plus the secretary room, they''ve found radio station, underneath the desk. The soldier who found it, is testing the device to see if it is working, and he does that by calling the squad outside of their perimeter. The radio station is working because the squad from outside hears the soldiers telling them the part of their mission is complete. After a small checking the squad carries on their mission to clean this place, and escort the survivors outside where another military truck will arrive to take the survivors and deliver them to a base in Valea Ia?ului.


    The truck will come later this day, and will arrive somewhere on the night at the community in that remote village.

 Valley of Flood - Part 8

    Meanwhile, on the hydroelectric company in Curtea de Arge?, where the other members of the group have run from Doctor Oetker, are now about to embark on a military truck who has come to take them and escort the group into the remote community of Valea Ia?ului. The survivors who have gone inside the truck are Gancea, Mihaela, Ron and Daniel.


    All of them, including the soldiers, having time to know each other names, something they like and sharing their background before and after this virus has hit the whole world, reshaping the entire world onto something different.


    The military truck arrives at the four-way road where is an abandoned furniture making factory, a restaurant that gone bankrupt due to some stupid mistakes, two stores that were used by construction workers as a stop to have their morning coffee, and a few other houses where humans were living. The military truck takes the road that leads to Valea Ia?ului, not the one leading to centre of the city, or the other one leading to Valea Danului, another village where humans used to live.


    In military tuck cabin, the soldiers and the survivors are all sitting on the bench, waiting for the truck to arrive at the said community. The man by the name of Daniel, is looking through the opening of the cabin, he sees how the man-made buildings are starting to get far each second from his view, how other appears and disappear as the truck continues to move on without a stop. Daniel is looking around at the cabin, he meets eyes with a soldier.


    "Is the place safe?" asks Daniel.


    "It is." responds the soldier looking at Daniel. "It has walls, watchtowers, food, houses for you to share, doctors, anything you need it to live safe nowadays." the soldier is looking at the opening cabin, he sees a few zombies who were passing by, and are running after truck. "These thingsˇ­ are evolving."


    "I know." says Daniel. "It gets harder and harder to live each passing day."


    "But with our help." says the soldier who is rising from seat with a Desert Eagle type handgun seen in most first-person shooter games, aiming his gun to the upcoming zombies. The man shoots the gun five times. Kills all five of the zombies who were after the truck. "You." he looks at Daniel then at the rest of the group of survivors. "All of you, will be safe from dying to these Undeads."


    The military truck continues to take head the road leading to Valea Ia?ului, leaving Curtea de Arge? behind, while it is still in ruin. The few people on the military truck cabin are looking back on the city they used to live in their entire life. Some of them still cannot believe this is happening.


    Reading on this site? This novel is published elsewhere. Support the author by seeking out the original.


    After a few minutes, a soldier that is on the cabin is trying to contact someone on the radio by using his own station. He is trying to contact his people from the community, but it seems the station doesn''t work.


    "Hey. Can someone hear me? Over." says the soldier to the station as he continues to try to talk. "We are on our way to the community. We have acquired a group of survivors from Hidro Arge?. All in good shape. Over."


    But nobody picks up the station. the soldier decides to try two more times to talk with someone from there, then he gave up because of his colleague who persuade him to stop calling them. The soldier thinks people from that community are probably busier than them. And he gave up contacting the people from the community.


    When the military truck was at nine kilometres away from Valea Ia?ului, it suddenly stopped. It stopped because this truck wheels have hit something sharp which made the truck lose control and drive off the road, hitting a tree and stopping in the said tree. Thankfully, nobody died in that crash. The driver and the passenger from front were having their seatbelt on and did not hit their heads to the wheel or the board. And the passengers from the back have braced to the impact. Not any of them from there being injured.


    "Anyone alright?" asks a soldier from the back, looking at the group of survivors and his colleagues.


    "Yes." says a soldier. "We are fine."


    "We are okay." says Gancea looking at every survivor, who has managed to braced for the impact and fallen from their seats. "What happened?"


    A soldier looks outside, and before he could say something, the said soldier gets shot in the head from outside, and falls on the floor of the cabin. Every single soldier, seeing their comrade dead, they grab their guns, and they start to fire blindly bullets outside. Where a few screams of pain are heard and screaming of joy from the outsiders. A survivor, Daniel, has taken a pistol from the ground, and as a courageous fool he jumps off from the truck, going to kill the attackers.


    When the man got outside of the truck, the first thing he sees is a man who is aiming his shotgun to him, but when he pulled the trigger, the shotgun did not fire any shoot. The person looked shocked at the gun, and he looks more shocked at Daniel who is pointing the handgun to the attacker.


    In just a second, Daniel pulled the trigger of the handgun. The bullet flies from the gun, and hit the attacker throat zone. The attacker falls on the ground with the shotgun in its left hand, laying on the ground.


    Before Daniel could do anything else, he sees on the left side three people who were aiming their handguns at him, and they were about to shoot the man.


    Daniel was quick to jump out of the range of those attackers. He made a leap of faith on his left, hiding on the other side of the military truck, using the big wheels as a blockage from the bullets.


    One soldier jumps from the front passenger''s seat, and he joins Daniel side, he then asks him.


    "What''s happening?"


    "These people are attacking us." says Daniel looking scared through small opening to see these three attackers slowly advancing and firing their guns at military truck. "They are coming close."


    "Take this!" yells the soldier leaving the hideout with his assault rifle he had on his back, and he shoots the attackers.

 Valley of Flood - Part 9

    The soldier did hit the three attackers, but one of the attackers has managed to throw a bullet shot from his gun into the poor soldier face. Hitting his right eye. The soldier lost its balance and falls on his back into the street.


    "No!" screamed Daniel seeing the soldier fallen.


    The man jumps at him, he drags the corpse to safety, but as he drags him, the shoots still continue, meaning this shoot-out is far from over, and there are many more of these burglars.


    "Eric!" yells a soldier who left the cabin and saw the body of the passenger.


    The said soldier uses his handgun he used earlier to kill the zombies, and kills two of these burglars who were hitting in the woods. The other soldiers are leaving their truck cabin, run to cover and start to shoot their fire weapons toward the group of people who are attacking them.


    "Who are these people?!" asks a soldier who is using the big rock as a cover from bullets with a colleague.


    "Whoever they are." says a soldier shooting blindly his weapon. "They are dead meat if I catch them."


    One bullet hits the rock and it ricochets, hitting the tree of where the truck crashed. The people that are using the rock as a shield are looking at the military truck where one soldier is leaving the truck, he aims and starts shooting blindly where the group of attackers has to shoot as he is running toward the rock, but when he was close to reach its comrades, a bad thing happens.


    That soldier gets shoot in the left leg, making the person trip and falling on the ground. Thankfully, he is caught by his comrades and dragged to protection by his colleagues.


    "Are you good?" asks a soldier to that injured soldier.


    "I am fine, Stephan." says the soldier.


    The soldier named Stephan is the soldier who is wearing sunglasses, a helmet, military uniform having that weird symbol of "The Organization" on the right shoulder, a small beard, green boots. The other soldiers are having helmets just like Stephan, but they look different from like their built, stature and way of talking.


    "These fuckers got my leg." says the soldier looking at his wounded leg.


    A soldier has a closer look at the leg, he observes the bullet is still in there, meaning this is a tough job for them to try and do it. The only solution being to transport this person to the community, where their surgeons and doctors could save this precious man life.


    But first, they have to fight these attackers.


    "What do you want, assholes?!" yells Daniel, who is hiding on the opposite side of the attackers from military truck.


    "We want money, beer, Rakaia and women!" yells an attacker.


    "You sick! You are killing people!" yells a soldier from that rock to the attackers.


    "Zombies are people, too!" yells another voice of the attackers. "They are good if you know how to use them."


    "At what?" yells Daniel.


    "At se, of course." says an attacker.


    The attackers start to advance slowly to the military truck. As they advance, Daniel could see on the small opening of the military truck cabin, that was made by a bullet hole, how there is a group of six attackers, not three, meaning there are a lot more than he thought. The soldier next to Daniel look at the bullet hole, sees the group of attackers walking close to them, and he decides to go on action.


    Support the author by searching for the original publication of this novel.


    The soldier raises from his hideout, and he runs from the opposite side, having its handgun prepared. The soldier has an idea, and wanted to apply by himself. After the person left his hideout, he aims his pistol to the attackers, shoot three bullets, and sprints faster toward a wrecked car that was on the road. The three bullets shot have killed an attacker, but did not hit the head.


    "Mateo!" yells an attacker.


    "Leave it!" says another attacker angrily. "Go after that man!"


    Two attackers are going after the soldier, not even slow and aiming at him, they are just running to him with their handguns, who are almost emptied by the shoots they''ve taken earlier. The other three attackers are going to the military truck.


    When that soldier has reached the wrecked car, he quickly threw the empty clip of the handgun, and put one prepared that was kept under his military bulletproof vest. After he loaded the handgun, he left his safe position, aimed his gun to the two attackers who were at seven meters away from him, and killed them of them without any mercy.


    That soldier runs toward the military truck, but it wasn''t the need to because the last three attackers were killed by the soldier who left their hideout, and also by Daniel, suing their handguns and assault rifles they were having at their hands.


    "What happened?" asks Gancea leaving the hideout, scared shitless of what has happened outside.


    The survivors are slowly, terrified and shaken to the military truck, they look around and see a lot of human corpses laying on the grounds. When all of the people from military truck got out, they look around them. There are only nine humans standing, two injured and two dead. Beside the soldier injured, there was an injured person from the cabin, that got hit on the right arm by the parts of the shotgun bullet. That person injured is Ron, the Englishman.


    "I am injured." says Ron in English. "Help me, please!"


    "Come here." says Mihaela helping Ron walk toward the rock where the other injured person lays, the soldier with the leg. "I can help you both."


    The survivors are looking frightened around, they don''t know what to do, or what to do at this moment. But the soldier, are quickly taking the radio station from the cabin, and are trying to contact the community to send a truck to take them from here, and escort them to safety. But the station is picked on by the community.


    "Why they don''t respond?" asks Stephan holding the station.


    "Try to call the other squad." says the soldier with the handgun. "The ones from King Michael High School."


    "Hope they''ll pick up." says Stephan stabilizing the frequencies to contact the other squad.


    As Stephan continues to stabilize the connection with the other squad and talk to them, the remaining soldiers and survivors are looking around, staying on guard because they may be attacked again. They definitely understand there are probably much more people here that are with these attackers, so they must be on guard and ready to kill at any moment.


    "Who are these people?" asks Daniel to the soldier who was with him.


    "Probably a group of lunatics that''s for sure." says the soldier to Daniel.


    Then, out of nowhere a person appears on the road, and that person is running to the group holding a spear. He is yelling as he is running toward Mihaela, but a soldier was quick to shoot his weapon to the head of the attacker who fall on its face to the cold autumn asphalt.


    Nobody said anything, they all look scared at the person who was close to kill their valuable possession on this stop. Mihaela was terrified to see the corpse, so she tries to look away, and continues on treating the two injured persons.


    As Mihaela is trying to take out the bolts of shotgun shells from Ron, the squad is looking on the sky and observes the sun is closing down.


    "Alright, everyone." says the driver soldier. "We still have about one hour or so left of sunlight. So, we have to choose, we either wait for the squad to come, or we split up and go to the community to get help."


    The survivors, all gathered to near the big rock who served as a shield to the soldiers from attacker are discussing the choices.


    Most of them realize the best decision may be splitting up, so they let the soldier who came with the idea of splinting up walking with Gancea and Daniel to the community, and come back with help. They cannot take the military truck because one of the bullets shot by the attackers, have hit the gas chamber of the vehicle, making a huge leak on the road and these improvised spikes have destroyed the wheels.


    The group that is leaving is carrying with them three assault rifles as a protection. They''ve left the protein bars and water supplies on the other group in need. Then, they tell the group to clean the road, stay on guard and make a campfire to stay warm until they''ll come back.

 Valley of Flood - Part 10

    ***


    A few minutes later, the group that stayed behind are waiting for the military trucks to arrive. Those who remained behind are the survivors from Curtea de Arge?, Mihaela and Ron, and four other soldiers. Mihaela finished treating the injured people, those being a soldier and Ron.


    "Thank you." says Ron in broken Romanian language. "You did good."


    "Thanks." responds Mihaela in Romanian language.


    Ron is looking at the road the three people have taken to travel to the community.


    "Do you think they''ll come back?" asks Ron in English language.


    "I hope so." responds Mihaela, who knows a bit of English thanks to Netflix shows she used to watch in college days.


    "Yeahˇ­ Hope the community is really nice and welcomed to us."


    "They will." says Mihaela to Ron.


    A soldier, who was dragging corpses of the attacker with another soldiers, put them in a pile, then stabbed their heads to cancel the zombie transformation of those who weren''t hit in the head with bullets, is walking toward where Mihaela and Ron are. The soldier, is asking Mihaela if she is speaking Romanian, then Mihaela responded with yes.


    "I heard you were talking to the guy in English. Thought you are an American or British as him." says the Romanian soldier.


    "I see." says Mihaela, she looks over to the pile of corpses. "Are these dead for sure?"


    "Yes. Yes, they are dead." respond the soldier who is having his face covered by a ski mask. "I''ve checked them and stopped their transformation. We did solve a problem, now we have to wait and see if a wave of zombies will come after the sound."


    "Hopefully not." says Mihaela in Romanian language. "But they can hear the gunshots from here?"


    "Honey. These things are evolving almost every day. Yesterday, I faced a zombie who was throwing cars. Killed half of my squad in Pitesti. Brave and strong men. Wiped by a few cars who were thrown by a beast without a mind."


    "I kinda experimented something similar today. So, I know your feeling."


    "What do you mean?" asks the soldier out of curiosity to the nurse.


    "There was a muscular zombie, who has thrown a corpse of a zombie, into an old lady. The corpse who hit her, broke several bones and almost killed her instantly. She died because of blood loss cause and also bones who were literally leaving the body."


    "Damnˇ­" says the soldier who could imagine such a scenario. "These things keep evolving every day."


    "What are we going to do?"


    "What do you mean?"


    This book was originally published on Royal Road. Check it out there for the real experience.


    "Do you really think we can stand a chance to fight off these creatures? Not considering that we can neutralize all of them."


    "Yes. We can." says the soldier to Mihaela. "We are having people from different parts of the world who are constantly building bases for survivors. Sending strong men to zones to clean them up. And gathering data to create a cure to stop all of this infection. We may not be able to stop the zombies once and for all, but we can still fight back and create a better land for us, humans."


    The two are looking at each other for a moment. Mihaela, who heard what the soldier was telling her, made her feel a bit perplexed by all of this. If it is true this group is working on finding a cure and creating a multitude of military base, this means humanity will probably one day, achieve peace like it was before the Z Virus spread.


    The soldier, is leaving Mihaela, doing her business with other injured people, he continues to do his job as keeping on guard. When the soldier left, Mihaela is looking at Ron, then she translates the things that soldier said to her earlier. When Ron got everything, a smile appears on his face, signifying that he is feeling thankful, he said to Mihaela in a broken Romanian.


    "We are safe. That is what matters."


    ***


    A few moments later, the group of three people, are at about three kilometres of walking to the community. All three of them are feeling tired from walking and fighting the zombies who were on the road. as the group continues to walk further, they do arrive at an abandoned gas station. All of the three survivors, have decided on unison to check the gas station quick.


    They are searching the place for any valuable supplies for their trip or any anything valuable.


    Inside this place, the soldier, Gancea and Daniel, are looking around the small store. They found there a lot of items who were taken from shelves, like chips, biscuits, drinks and cans, most of them who are still available to eat. The three survivors are feeling a little creped by this because it is unusual to find a store like this to have these many items in it, still intact and untouched by humans.


    "Do you think someone is living here?" asks Daniel to the soldier.


    "Don''t know." responds the soldier. "I''ve never been on this part before. This is my first mission outside of community walls."


    "You were inside since the beginning?" asks Gancea curios.


    "No. I came here a month ago due to a transfer."


    "Guys." says Daniel who is looking down the cashier register. "There''s a corpse over here."


    The two people are gathering to the place Daniel points out. The soldier is looking at the corpse, and when he saw the corpse is having a mushroom on the mouth, he is looking back scared to the two people.


    "We have to get out of here!"


    "Why?" asks Daniel.


    But the soldier did not respond, he jumps out of this store, and is immediately followed by Gancea and Daniel, all running to the direction where the community should. The three people have run from this gas station without taking any goodies.


    After a minute of running, the soldier stops from running, stops to take a breather. Daniel and Gancea are doing the same. Both are looking curios at the soldier, who is revealing as he is breathing heavy why they''ve run from the gas station.


    "The corpse over there is known as Musha by us, soldiers. As some kind of code. This type of zombie is one of the dangerous one to encounter."


    "Why?" asks Daniel.


    "You''ve seen the mushroom from his mouth?"


    "No." responds Gancea.


    "Yes." says Daniel. "I saw it. What is it?"


    "Not sure If I can explain in the best way, but if you see a mushroom like that in a zombieˇ­ Whatever you do, do not break it. It will free in the air a Z virus bacterium, that can go through human respiratory systems and transform the said person into a zombie. This fungus is very dangerous, the best solution being to run away as fast as possible from the contaminated zone and corpse."


    "So, we will leave that zone with goodies to the hands of any person?" asks Daniel feeling a little pissed.


    "Supplies are not a problem for us. Didn''t I tell you we have crops of food and our own mill to make bread? We also have storages of food that will last us even three years." the soldier raises from the ground, takes his rifle on the hands, and continues to lead the way. "We have to hurry. Sun is almost down."


    Soldier continues to lead the way while Gancea and Daniel are following the person. Both are looking at each other, not knowing what to say on the rest of their journey.

 Valley of Flood - Part 11

    ***


    After half an hour, the three people have arrived at the front gates of the community on Valea Ia?ului. When they got in there, Gancea and Daniel are both looking amazed by the huge concrete walls of this place. Walls that can even withstand a zombie class F or a horde of normal zombies. The walls of this place are having a little blood spits all over them, meaning that at one point this place was attacked by zombies, but it survived a wave.


    "Ed!" says the soldier. "Open the gate!"


    A soldier, probably the one named Ed, is opening the gates from inside. The person who opened the gates is an old man, with long grey hair, long grey beard and brown eyes. The said gatekeeper is wearing a military uniform with a Kevlar vest, having on the left side of his hips a shotgun and on the other side of the hip a pistol.


    "Identify yourself!" says Ed to the soldier.


    "Stephen Gran." says the soldier. "Squad V.I., Soldier."


    "And these two?" asks Ed looking at the two survivors, who are looking amazed and shy of this place.


    "I am Gancea." says Gancea.


    "Daniel." says Daniel.


    "Good enough." says Ed. By this he told them the family names doesn''t really matter in today''s world. He takes from a pocket a thermometer like the ones used in Covid pandemic and checks the temperature of the three people.


    "36 Celsius." says Ed after he checked all the three of them. "You good to go in."


    "We need a truck." says Stephen to Ed. "We were attacked by a group of hooligans. And we have a few injured people on the side of the road, with other survivors."


    "What?" asks Ed scared. "That group attacked you?"


    "They''ve come here?"


    "Yes. WE thought we killed all of them. They tried to enter the base, steal our resources and rape the women. Savages. Monsters." then, Ed turns around and walk with Stephen inside the community. "I will give you a truck. Need a squad?"


    "No. Only a truck and three people."


    "Alright." says Ed. "Go ahead, chose the truck and I will as three soldiers to come with you." he looks at the two survivors who are looking around this place like it is some sort of amusement park. "I will give your friends a small tour around this place while you are gone."


    "Be nice to them." jokes Stephen to Ed.


    "I will." says Ed who is going to a group of three soldiers who are sitting at a table, drinking a few bottles of water and chit-chatting about their past lives. "Hey! I need three of you to come and help me take a few of our people back to base."


    "What happened?" ask a soldier.


    "They were attacked by the group of hooligans who were trying to break in."


    "These assholes." says the same soldiers from earlier.


    Stolen content warning: this content belongs on Royal Road. Report any occurrences.


    The soldiers are taking their assault rifles and handguns, the three soldiers are walking to the military truck chosen by Stephen. After they enter it, the truck leaves the compound, Ed is escorting the two survivors to the interrogation room to give their information about themselves.


    ***


    Meanwhile, on the zone where the military truck crashed and got attacked, the group of survivors and soldiers are staying on their one, waiting for the military truck to come and pick them up. The sun has already gone down, making the entire place darker and harder for human eye to see. Thankfully, two soldiers are making a campfire to help them get warmer and create a light in case they will attack by surprise.


    But a soldier of the group, is taking watch, holding his sniper rifle and looking around the place, making sure there will not be any surprise attack coming at this very moment.


    "Any dead here?" asks a soldier to the one who is keeping the watch.


    "No, dude." says the soldier.


    "Great." says the soldier, then he takes from his left pocket a protein bar. "Want some?"


    "What you got?"


    "Whey Protein Bar." says the soldier tossing a green-blue protein bar to his colleague.


    "Thanks." he responds after he caught the protein bar, he unwraps it and takes a bite. "I appreciate it." says the sentence while he is eating.


    The person leaves the watch man, goes to the campfire where the survivors have gathered around the fire to keep warm. When everyone got around the campfire, it was quiet for a minute. Nobody knew what to say to make some conversation to make time pass. So, Ron decides to break the ice, asking a question in his broken Romanian, to the soldiers.


    "Have you guys been in the United Kingdom?"


    "I was there." says a soldier in English to Ron. That is the soldier who spoke earlier English to Mihaela and Ron. "The island got overrun as well as Africa, Asia, Russia, Australia and Europe."


    "Those places are overrun?" asks Mihaela.


    "Only a few parts seem to be safe for us, humans." responds the soldier who is dinging through his backpack, reveals a map around the world and shows to Ron and Mihaela, and other survivors who have gathered to see it.


    But before he can go further, he looks over to one of his colleagues. Who is shaking his head in approval, meaning he can tell them this classified information.


    "In Europe we''ve got a few islands around Greece who are run by The Organization. There are also rumours that Snake Island is in control of a group of soldiers of Ukraine, Russians and Romania."


    "You are kidding?" asks Ron curios because years ago Ukraine was in a war with Russia due to political warfare.


    "No. I am not kidding. But that doesn''t matter now." he points at a few other islands on Scandinavia. "These are safe places controlled by the Organization." he points at a few drawn islands near Holland and United Kingdom. "Here are a few bases built on artificial islands. They seem to be safe for now."


    "What do you mean by that?" asks Ron.


    "We''ve got reports that there are zombies who can survive underwater and swim. Though, these reports haven''t come from officials, we think this are only rumours."


    "Hope they are only rumours."


    "I also hope that." says the soldier. "But that is why I was going to go and check Vidraru Bridge."


    "Come on, dude." says another soldier. "You really think zombies can swim? Based on a rumour of a person with mental problems?"


    "That is the same thing you said about zombies who can be acting like humans, and look. We got undead on our hands."


    "Undeads?" asks Ron.


    "You are not familiar with them?"


    "No. What are these creatures?"


    "They are rare types of zombies. For now, all we know is that this type can survive a zombie transformation, full mental zombie transformation. The exterior they may look like zombies, but on the interior, they are having their carvings like ones."


    "Like Murphy from Z nation?"


    "Yes." says a soldier to Ron. "Like that one. But more twisted. This virus can destroy the mind of a normal human, making him become a bigger threat than a normal or an F Class Zombie."


    "Have you seen one?" asks Mihaela to the soldiers.


    "We have." says the soldier who talked about the map. He puts it back in the pocket. "Once. In London. One guy locked in a house for five days, all by myself, and when he came out, he saw us, and he told us to leave him alone. But unfortunately, we''ve had a guy on the chopper, who made a clean headshot at the poor mutation." says the soldier feeling the regret, even though it wasn''t his fault. "That is the first time, and probably the one time I''ll see an undead on a mission."


    "Hey!" says the soldier who is taking the watch of this campfire. He looks through a scope of his sniper rifle. And sees on the road they''ve taken a military truck that is coming over to help them. "A military truck approaches."

 Valley of Flood - Part 12

    All of the people are standing up, looking at the military truck that is approaching them. They couldn''t see much because of the night and the lights of the military truck aren''t turned on.


    "What the?" asks the sniper before he was killed as he was looking through the scoop to see the military truck approaching.


    "We are attacked!" yells a soldier after everyone turned around and saw the body of the sniper falling from the top of the vehicle and landing on the ground with his gun.


    Everyone is hiding from the shoots coming from the upcoming truck. Mihaela, Ron and with other survivors are hiding on the big rock where a few soldiers used earlier to hide from the attackers earlier. The soldiers are running to their guns, finding good spots and prepare to throw their shoots to the attackers.


    When the truck got there, the soldiers, who have taken good hiding spots and unable to be seen by naked eye in the night, they are suing their assault rifles and machine guns to the attacker. The soldiers have shot almost all of their bullets to the truck, making the entire fuel tank spill the entire petrol on the street. The soldiers have killed every single attacker. They''ve seen all the attackers since a few of the soldiers were having night vision googles that helps them see in the dark.


    "Stop!" yells a soldier to his teammates after a minute of continuous firing. "Think they are dead."


    The firing stops, and the soldiers are advancing to see what were the ones who were invading them.


    Upon approaching the truck, they''ve seen how the ones on the military truck weren''t soldiers, they were like the attackers from earlier this day. There were around seventeen bodies of attackers around the military truck and on the truck cabin. They also notice how this is an old military truck, because a soldier pointed something out as he was analysing the plate.


    "I recognize this truck. I was on a mission near Vidraru Bridge three weeks ago, and I with other soldiers who have survived the horde have fled the place, leaving the military truck and the tank."


    "You ere bringing a tank in there?!" asks a soldier scared.


    "Yes. Not my idea though."


    "Who was the crazy one?"


    "An agent named Garen I think. Don''t know much more because the man was mostly speaking the Netherlands language. Whatever it is called."


    Stolen from Royal Road, this story should be reported if encountered on Amazon.


    "And where is that man now?"


    "Don''t know. He got sent back to Deutschland."


    "Hey!" says a soldier who was near a pile of corpses of attacker. "This one is breathing." he points at an attacker who is still alive, only injured.


    One soldier approaches the attacker and he tell him.


    "Why you attacked us?"


    "ˇ­You are liars." says the person on his last breathing, coughing blood and passing out.


    The soldier checks his pulse, then for a minute of checking. After he observed the body lost any beating, he leaves the corpses, and orders his people to burn the corpses on the campfire.


    The survivors, have seen this attack, all were shocked to see that they were yet again, close to the Death door.


    A while later, the military truck from the community has arrived, the right one, and has taken all of the survivors and military personnel from the temporary campfire made. the truck with survivors is leaving the warfare, leaving behind the military truck wrecked, and the pile of burning attackers burn and slowly made into ashes.


    ***


    On the next day, in a community made by a group of survivors and the help of a few soldiers from The Organization, on a small village house, located in an on the left wing of this community walls, Ron wakes up. When he was about to leave his bed, he got stopped by Mihaela, who stayed beside him, on a wooden chair.


    "Don''t." says Mihaela in English language. "You need to rest."


    "Where am I?" asks Ron in English language.


    "We are in a house. This one belonged to one of the relatives of Petre. The soldier from the restaurant who helped us escape."


    "Where is he?"


    "He''s still in King Michael High school perimeter. Heard he and Andra are working to create a safe zone for survivors. They''ll be there for a while."


    "So, they are safe?" asks Ron.


    "Yes. Just like us."


    "We are in the community, huh?" he looks around. "Looks nice."


    Mihaela is rising from her seat. She approaches closer Ron, checks his injuries he got yesterday at the first attack. As she was looking through the holes for a moment, Ron is looking at her.


    "Is it bad?" he asks in Romanian.


    "Yes." says Mihaela in Romanian language. "But now we have specialist here. They''ll put you on the legs fast."


    She bandages Ron back, and she takes her coat because outside has started to become cold. After she took the coat, Ron asked her before she was about to leave.


    "Where are you heading?"


    "I have to check the injured soldier." says Mihaela. "He is in another house, where other soldiers have been gathered."


    "What happened?"


    "They were attacked by that group of attackers who has taken us, but they''ve repelled their attacks. These people have only inured people, and kidnapped three women. That is what a soldier told me while I was doing the interview."


    "I seeˇ­"


    "You should rest for now." says Mihaela to Ron. "I''ll send someone to see your injuries and someone to take your interview."


    "Interview?"


    "It is a thing here. We just told them some information about us, and then they''ll let us live here. You just have to answer some basic questions about yourself."


    Mihaela leaves Ron in the room, all alone, looking at the white ceiling. He just lay down on the bed, not thinking of anything and enjoying the comfort he hasn''t felt in such a long time. Mihaela, leaves the house by going through the main door, descend the stairs of the house, and walks down to the street.

 Valley of Flood - Part 13

    When she got on the street, she looks around her. She sees how the houses of this community, some were looking like they weren''t touched by the zombies or by destruction of this apocalypse. People, who are leaving and entering the houses without being terrified or scared, like this was once normal for them. People on the street who are communicating like a few months ago about sports, books, TV shows, or anything to talk to make the time pass fast. Mihaela feels happy and safe being here. She never thought there are communities like this who are keeping safe humans and are working together to be safe from the creatures outside of these walls.


    Mihaela crosses the street, opens the gate of the house in front of her, and walks toward the door. The difference between the house and the one where Ron is hospitalized is the rooftop. The Ron''s house is having a red rooftop while this one has a black rooftop with a bunch of solar panels who are still working.


    Houses like this, with solar panels and wind turbines, are a primal source for creating electricity, which his mostly used for communication, light, entertain and making life easier for humans who are living in this zone. When Mihaela got on the door, she knocks on it, and before she could say something, a solider opens the door.


    "Good morning!" says Mihaela to Stephan, the soldier from yesterday. "How are you?"


    "Good morning." says Stephan. "I am feeling better. You?"


    "Good. Are the patients awake?"


    "Most of them." he says the sentence as he moves away and let Mihaela enters the house. "They are in the living room and kitchen. All seven."


    "All are on top of each other like this?" asks Mihaela surprised because in the house earlier, was only Ron.


    "What can we do?" asks Stephan. "We''re limited in spaces for injured personnel."


    "In the house where the Englishman is. There are three beds in there."


    "We can''t." responds Stephan. "We don''t want to risk it in spreading a local epidemic."


    "But Ron''s not infected." says Mihaela concerned.


    "These are the orders ma''am." says Stephan. "We have to respect them."


    Mihaela didn''t say anything. She accepted what Stephan said, even though it feels wrong to put all of the people in a single house, in such a crampy space because they don''t want to risk a zombie pandemic in this community. When she entered the house, she goes to the bathroom to sterilize her hands before she will start her checkout.


    The narrative has been taken without permission. Report any sightings.


    Even if she arrived here last night, she immediately integrated into this place, and started to help as much as she could. Upon entering the bathroom, she closes the door after her, and she starts washing her hands, then she splashes some water into their face to make her feel refreshed. Last night she barely slept. The only time she was sleeping was in the second military truck who was transporting the group to the community.


    Mihaela look on the mirror, then she said to herself before she left the bathroom.


    "Just like in university."


    When the nurse left the bathroom, she takes the gloves and goes to the rooms where are the soldiers gathered and laying on beds, tables and chairs.


    At the moment she entered the room, Mihaela looks a bit scared, seeing how all of the soldiers are bandaged on the body and heads. Most of them have been hit by bullets on the chest, while one was hit on the right eye and made his whole eye blow up from the socket when it happens. Mihaela goes over to the one with a missing eye, she looks worried at him, but the man, with a smile, says to her in English.


    "Tis'' but a scratch."


    "A scratch?" she says in English, then she continues in Romanian. "Your eye is off."


    "It is, but I live." says the Englishman. The man is speaking English, and can understand Romanian, just like Ron and other people from here, but this one is having British nationality, long brown hair, a green eye, and a scorpion tattoo on his neck.


    "How is that possible?"


    "You tell me. I ain''t no doctor."


    "Ma''am." says a soldier to Mihaela, who is laying near the one with a missing eye. "Could you see my wound? I got shot in the leg and I can feel it again."


    "I will." says Mihaela while she is inspecting the wound of the Englishmen. "What is your name?"


    "Adrian."


    "Well, Adrian. Looks like the bullet missed the brain. This is good. Means you are safe and can survive. But you have to wear an eyepatch for the rest of the days."


    "Not a problem. But I can still fight, right?"


    "I don''t know." she says feeling a little creped by this enthusiasm of Adrian. "You want to fight while you are having an eye out."


    "As long as I have my limbs and the other eye, I can still fight and do my duty as a soldier."


    Mihaela continues to check the wound, she sterilizes him, gives him some medicine to ease the pain, but Adrian still insisted he doesn''t feel pain. Mihaela is feeling creped by this since this is the first time she has to give first aid to a guy with missing eye. Plus, she is a nurse, not exactly a doctor like the others from this community.


    After she finished with Adrian, she moves on to the other inured soldiers which most of them are only having minor injuries. Three shoots in the legs, one in the chest, and other one in the arm. Even if they got shoot by the bullet on their bodies, they can still live if the shots haven''t made any contact with vital organs of the body.


    Mihaela treats all of the soldiers in almost an hour and half, and when she finished she leaves the house, then she walks outside.


    "I wonder where''s Gancea." asks Mihaela to herself as she is walking toward a building that was once a cultural place for people to gather around to see graduations of children from primary school, or folklore dancing competitions or just to hear a boring speech of their village chief. She is walking there because on that building is the cafeteria, and right now, she is hungry like every person who hasn''t eaten anything good in like forever.

 Valley of Flood - Part 14

    ***


    Meanwhile, on a dark room, a small room, where there''s only a round table in the middle of the dark space, two chairs on the opposite side. And at those two chairs, are people, sitting and discussing. On the right side there''s Gancea, while on the other, there is someone unknown who is wearing a ski mask, and anti-biting uniform. Even if he is not forced to do that, he is wearing that because it makes him feel safe.


    "State your first name please." says the person on the left side.


    "My name is Gancea." responds Gancea.


    "Isn''t that like family name? Surname doesn''t matter here."


    "No." says Gancea.


    "I see. Sorry about the mistake. Anyway, what''s your age?"


    "I am 27 years old."


    "Aha." says the person and starts to write some information on a piece of paper. "Previous job?"


    "I was a taxi driver here in the city."


    "Oh. Good. You know the city well?"


    "Yes, I do."


    "Good. You possess a good skill."


    "Thanks." says Gancea not knowing if he would really have to take this "skill" as a taxi driver as something to help them in this situation. Plus, he was a taxi driver for five months, and he still used the GPS.


    "Blood type?"


    "A-."


    "Married?"


    "No."


    "Aha." says the person writing this info on a piece of paper. "Birth date."


    "14/2/2020."


    "Good. Place of Birth?"


    "Bucharest."


    "Where you lived before the apocalypse?"


    "Curtea de Arges."


    "Aha." he notes the address and place of birth into the paper. "Now comes the job applications."


    Support creative writers by reading their stories on Royal Road, not stolen versions.


    "Job application?" asks Gancea.


    "You need a job here." says the soldier. "That''s the procedure. In order to remain here for a long period of time you need an occupation. Or we can transfer you to one of the artificial islands, but at the moment, all of the artificial islands on our radius are full, doesn''t have any available room for you."


    "And what job do I have?"


    "Personally." says the soldier checking a bit of file. "Seeing you were a taxi driver on this city. I will recommend a driver or a scavenger. But to be honest, both of these occupations can be one."


    "Scavenger." says Gancea.


    "Alright." responds the person in charge noting this piece of information. "You will be notified when you will be getting on the run."


    "Run?"


    "You are hired as a scavenger."


    "But I don''t even know what I have to do?"


    "Simple. You look for supplies, survivors, vehicles and help us to extend the territory."


    "Alrightˇ­"


    "And that''s it. Thank you for cooperating."


    "That''s all?"


    "Yeap. Now you can go." says the soldier who is putting the written paper into a folder.


    Gancea, being reluctant at first, he raises off from his chair, and walks out of the room, letting the other person enter the room to have his interview taken. The other person who is getting his interview is Daniel. Another survivor from the restaurant group who haven''t had his interview taken yet.


    The man sits on the chair of where Gancea sat. Upon sitting on the chair, he saluted the soldier, but the man, takes an empty piece of paper, and starts writing the name.


    "Name please."


    "Uhˇ­ Bani Daniel." says Daniel taken by surprise.


    "I am more interested in your first name."


    "Daniel."


    "Alright. Now, your age."


    "Thirty-four."


    "You look older than that." says the soldier who is looking at Daniel, a bit surprised by this information.


    "I get that a lot." says Daniel who is usually getting this kind of feedback when he gave the people his true age. Most of them look at him and thought he is on his fifty or sixty.


    "Birth date?"


    "Two December Two thousand twelve."


    "Aha. Blood type?"


    "A-."


    "Previous job?"


    "Middle school teacher."


    "Subject?"


    "Geography. Here at Ferdinand I High School."


    "You know the city well?"


    "Like in my palm."


    "Good, good. Married?"


    "ˇ­ I was." state that meaning his soulmate did not make it this far.


    "Did you have kids?" he asks this question since most of the people when they are getting their interview taken and find they are married, they usually respond that they were having or have kids.


    "No."


    "Place of Birth?"


    "Curtea de Arges."


    "Domicile?"


    "Albestii de Arges."


    "Job application?"


    "What''s that?"


    "You need a job here." says the soldier. "That''s the procedure. In order to remain here for a long period of time you need an occupation. Or we can transfer you to one of the artificial islands, but at the moment, all of the artificial islands on our radius are full, doesn''t have any available room for you."


    "Aha. What do you have in mind?"


    "Wellˇ­ Seeing you are a teacher and know the layout of the zonesˇ­ It''s a tough choice. You can work as a scavenger or as a map drawer."


    "Map drawer?"


    "It''s a bit hard to explain. But you have to go with a team of scavengers and draw the map of zones you explore. Ever draw a map?"


    "Yes. In University, I used to draw a lot of maps from thesis and projects."


    "Good. So, you a map drawer?"


    "Yes."


    "Great. You can go now. We are done."


    "Thank you." says Daniel who is offering his hand to shake it, but the soldier didn''t even look it, he prepares the papers for the next person to have his interview taken.


    Daniel leaves the room, and let another person have this short interview taken. This person is one of the survivors from the military truck from last night. One who was knocked to unconsciousness by the crash and slept until this morning.

 Valley of Flood - Part 15

    ***


    Meanwhile in King''s Michael High School, on the football terrain, a few several camps and beds have been made for the survivors of this high school ground. There are around seventeen camps for survivors, one big camp for the commanders and soldiers, one for supplying food and weapons. From the big camp, leaves a survivor, the teenager named Andra, has left the big camp. She has finished her interview with the commanders and soldiers, and now she is heading to the campfire, where the soldier named Petre, is sitting on a plastic chair and checks his backpack.


    "You''re going somewhere?" asks Andra to Petre.


    "Yes." says Petre. "I am going to Valea Ia?ului."


    "To where is the community?"


    "For what?"


    "That village. Is my home. I gotta go in there and protect my home."


    "I understand."


    "Won''t you come?"


    "Don''t know." says Andra. "I want to stay here for a while more."


    "I see. How was the interview?"


    "Went well."


    "Great to hear." says Petre as he puts a small box of ammo into the bag.


    "Wellˇ­" says Andra and looks in other direction, she sees Viktor siting in one of the green benches of the high school grounds, then he looks at Petre who is packing up essential supplies for his trip to his home village. "Good luck out there."


    "Thanks." says Petre looking at Andra. "I will need it."


    Andra takes her goodbyes from Petre, that has almost finished his packing up essential and weapons for his trip to Community.


    To get there, Petre will just ask the army for a working car. He has the guns and a hunting knife, which hare essentially tools to destroy the heads of these things. He managed to acquire a vehicle, a Dacia 1310 that barely works, but Petre accepted this type of car since it is the only one who won''t be used by the soldiers or the survivors of this safe zone.


    While Andra walks toward Viktor, there are a few soldiers who were walking on her direction, they were talking about something. They avoided Andra from crashing, and continued their walking to one of the tents of this camp. Andra approaches where Viktor is sitting, she is looking at him, but before she could greet him, Viktor said.


    "Hello."


    "Hi." says Andra to Viktor. "How are you?"


    Support creative writers by reading their stories on Royal Road, not stolen versions.


    "Good. You?"


    "Good."


    "Goodˇ­"


    "So. Have you slept well?"


    "Looks like it is going to rain." says Viktor looking at the grey looking clouds on the sky.


    "Yes." says Andra having a look at the sky, then she sits next to Viktor. "Have you meet anyone else? I mean, person from before all of this happened?"


    "I''ve seen some of my classmates." says Viktor looking at Andra. "A few of themˇ­ I think they were Roman, Tanya, Rebeca, Raluca, George, Ana, Tinaˇ­ Saw their corpses in a pub, on this city, while I was going on a run with one of the survivors from the school."


    "That''s awfulˇ­"


    "But I heard a few others have managed to escape from Curtea de Arges. Heard he was thinking of going to Greece, on a dock or somewhere there."


    "By himself?"


    "He had a group. You probably know Elena, right? She was the one who was going on there."


    "Elena? The girl who people used to call "Four eyes" in middle school and make fun of her short stature?"


    "Yes, her. She radically changed on this apocalypse."


    "She just accepted it. Like all of us." says Andra looking at the tenets of this camp.


    She sees a lot of soldiers who are patrolling, sitting on crates or on improvised chairs, preparing their weapons, others are transporting supplies to medical tents, and some are just relaxing by drinking beer or smoking. There are also a few survivors from yesterday who were barricaded inside of the main high school, who are outside, and are helping the soldiers carrying the corpses of humans and zombies into a pile where they will be burned. They are all wearing special suits, like those reactive types that are used in nuclear reactors.


    "You know what I miss about the past? The internet." says Viktor trying to start a new topic into this silence.


    "Me tooˇ­" says Andra. "I miss the internet as much as everybody does."


    "Our only way to communicate with anyone."


    "Yes." says Andra sounding sad by this.


    Back then, Andra has run a few social media apps, she did not have many friends, no over thousands or hundreds like any normal teenagers, she was having enough to talk with them every day to not feel alone and sad. All the talk topics she could remember after days of this apocalypse were mostly about memes, comic books, movies and TV shows. They were pointless but it made her feel happy and not alone.


    "So, none of your parents survived?" asks Andra to Viktor.


    "Yes." says Viktor who had the time to adjust by this fact.


    "Mine neither." says Andra.


    "Hey!" says a soldier who is coming over to the bench of Viktor and Andra. "Kids! I need your help!"


    "What is it?" asks Viktor at the soldier.


    The soldier is a Romanian looking one, wearing an average soldier uniform, with "The Organization" logo name on the right side of the chest, having a shotgun on his hands, and looking to be in his mid-40''s. That soldier is one of the ones who have helped yesterday on freeing the people barricaded on the high school main building.


    "We want to go on a run." says the soldier, who is easy tilting his head to his two other colleagues, who are at the main high school stairs, waiting for the soldier to come over and lead them outside. "We are not familiar with this zone, and we thought you could help us on this mission."


    "Wellˇ­" says Andra raising from her seat, and looking at the soldier. "What are you thinking?"


    "Andra?" asks Viktor.


    "What?" asks Andra with a smile. "I am feeling a little bored. And I want to go out there, to see what we can find."


    "We need clothes." says the soldier to Andra.


    "Clothes?" asks Andra surprised. "That is all?"


    "Wellˇ­ Yeah. Because those clothes will be shipped to Valea Ia?ului. We need clothes that can withstand the harsh cold temperature that will come upon us."


    "I understand." responds Andra. "I know a few stores that do have some of these types of clothes."


    "That''s great to hear." says the soldier. "Go to the armoury tent. Grab a handgun and a sharp weapon. You''ll need it."


    "Yes, sir." says Andra who is going to the tent, then she is followed by Viktor who looks like he wants to tag along onto this mission.

 Valley of Flood - Part 16

    The young girl and her ex-boyfriend are walking about twenty steps to the tent where are the ammunition, guns and melee weapons are stored, kept in safe places and handed for missions such as the one Andra is going in. At the entrance of the tent, there is a survivor, a female survivor, dressed in some dirty clothes, unwashed after days, wearing a pair of broken glasses, and a slim one, but by the body structure and the way she is standing, you can see she was that one obese cashier type.


    "Good day!" says the "cashier" woman to Andra and Viktor. "What can I help you with?"


    "We need two handguns and sharp blades for a mission, ma''am." says Andra to the cashier.


    "For what exactly?"


    "We''ve been asked by soldiers to help them in a mission."


    "What type of mission?"


    "Scavenging." says Viktor. "I think. They just told us to search the place for some clothes that can help us when the cold strikes."


    "If it will." says the cashier to Viktor. "Anyway, I''ve got just the thing for you two."


    The cashier turns around, searches on a crate for weapons. In a few minutes she founded what she is looking for, puts the two handguns on the table, and put there two hunting knives, excellent for killing zombies. The guns that the two teenagers have been handed are Beretta 92, a 15+1 round 9mm Parabellum, double-action, semi-automatic pistol that was introduced in the ''75. A common handgun that is sold in America on the special stores, also the type a normal family in America would have to protect themselves for burglars.


    Royal Road is the home of this novel. Visit there to read the original and support the author.


    "And here are two boxes with 40 ammos, types 9mm."


    "Thank you." says Andra taking the gun.


    The teenager checks the clip, she observes the clip has one mission bullet, so she takes one from the box. Put it into the clip, then puts the clip back, straps the safety on the handgun and puts it on her belt. The girl takes one of the boxes, store into her pants pocket, and holds on the left hand the hunting knife. Viktor only takes the gun, he lets the hunting knife on the counter, but taking the ammo box.


    "I won''t need the knife." says Viktor.


    "As you wish." says the cashier. "I want back these weapons, understand?"


    "Yes, ma''am." says Viktor and Andra in unison.


    The two teenagers are going after the three soldiers, who are walking to the gates of the front school. Andra is looking at Viktor, as both are walking toward the gates.


    "You sure you wanted to come along?"


    "Yes." says Viktor to Andra.


    "Why?"


    "I want to be helpful." says Viktor. "I am getting tired of sitting ducks and letting others do the work."


    "Okay." says Andra. "Me too."


    The two teenagers are stopping at the gate, where the other three soldiers are there. The three soldiers looked at Andra and at Viktor, all three did not comment anything. When the gate has been opened, the five people are running from there. They''ve to run and make noise to distract the zombies who were trying to get inside of this safe zone.


    Their way of distracting zombies from climbing the walls has worked, but as well, because it attracted dozens of zombies to come after them.


    "Here they come!" says one of the soldiers aiming his assault rifle at a zombie who is running toward him.


    Before he could take the shot, the soldier, who is leading the operation, stabs the zombie with a knife, then he throws the lifeless corpse to a crawler zombie. He looks back to his people.


    "Preserve the ammunition. Well need it later."


    The five people are running on the right side of the road, trying to make the zombies, who have encircled this safe zone to move away.

 Valley of Flood - Part 17

    ***


    Back in Valea Iasului, on the community run by The Organization military and medical members, in the Cafeteria, a survivor, Daniel, enters the place, and he walks toward the counter where the person put in charge to be cashier is sitting. Daniel is looking at the food that is displayed for a moment, then he asks the cashier a serious question.


    "Am I dreaming?"


    "This is real." says the cashier as a joke. "The food is real. Although, it is not hot."


    "I don''t care if it is even expired with cockroaches. I want a ˇ­" he looks for a moment at the food displays. "Tochitura and potato soup."


    "Great choice sir. And drink?"


    "Drink?" asks Daniel surprised. "What do you have?"


    "Pepsi, Lipton, Coca-Cola and Water."


    "ˇ­Lipton, please."


    "Sure, sir."


    The cashier goes over to the display, where the food is placed. There, the cashier takes a usual plastic tray, first puts a normal looking bowl made by ceramic material, then a ceramic plate. The cashier puts Tochitura first, then continues to pour the potato soup to the bowl. Before he was about to hand it to Daniel, he puts a big piece of polenta to use for eating tochitura because how else would a person eats tochitura. Then the cashier places the bread on the tray and hands the tray. Then he goes to the working refrigerator, opens it and hands a plastic bottle with Lipton to Daniel.


    Daniel is looking at this food like he is looking at gold. He never thought he would get a day like this, where he would taste an actual food, rather than bread crumbs and brown water from sewage. And as an instinct, the man, holding the food tray with the bottle of Lipton asks the cashier.


    "How much it costs?"


    "It is free." says the cashier with a smile.


    "Free!?" says Daniel too excited to hear this. "Thank you very much! Thank you so much!"


    "Don''t worry." says the cashier sounding pleasant. "But you should taste it, and you should thank the chef, not me. I am just a simple cashier."


    Daniel bows his head a little, and walks with the food to an empty table of this big place. Even if this is a big place to eat, there aren''t so much people in here, only elder people, people older than Daniel.


    Reading on this site? This novel is published elsewhere. Support the author by seeking out the original.


    As the man sit on the table, and was about to take a bite of the Tochitura, he sees the door of the Cafeteria is opening. A familiar face of Daniel entered the building, that familiar face is Mihaela, the nurse who immediately was put in the community medical team. The woman came here to eat her breakfast, after months of missing it since the beginning of this new time of humanity.


    "Good day!" says the cashier to Mihaela. "What can I get you?"


    "A coffee and cereal please?" ask the cashier.


    "What kind of cereal?"


    "You actually have cereals?" asks Mihaela surprised.


    "You''d be surprised how many brads we are having here. But what would you like?"


    "Nesquik."


    "Sure."


    Mihaela used to eat this in the morning on her college times for the medical assistant degree, classes that she was going only at the end of the semester because she was feeling lazy and would spend days on her college campus partying hard. But at the end of her studying, she managed to get a good degree on these courses, get a job, then the apocalypse happened and become jobless. But now she is hired as a medical assistant on this community, but now she has to learn more than what it used to be back then, due to the apocalypse and missing working force.


    Mihaela gets her order on plastic tray, and walks toward the table of Daniel because this was the only available table with a known face in there.


    "Hi." says Mihaela.


    "Hello!" says Daniel after he has taken a bite from tochitura. "This food is amazing."


    "Really?" asks Mihaela. "Wonder how lunch would taste like."


    "Why you ordered only this?"


    "It reminds me of simpler times." says Mihaela taking a small spoon of the cereals with milk, feeling nostalgic of the simpler and good times she was having back then.


    "Ahˇ­ Alright." says Daniel, and he looks at his order, who is almost eaten. "Any plans for today?"


    "Work." says Mihaela sounding happy.


    "Yeah. I also missed the working morning." says Daniel happy drinking from his Lipton. "Oh, I''ve missed this sweet Lemon taste."


    "You are a tea person?" asks Mihaela.


    "Yes. Although, I would''ve preferred a hot tea. But I thought they wouldn''t have."


    "If they have coffee, I am sure they have tea."


    "Probably asking for this later." says Daniel.


    The two survivors are eating their breakfast in peace for a few minutes. Then, when they finished it, they are taking their plastic trays, walk them to a table where other plastic trays are put, walks out of this cafeteria while taking the cashier and the cook who were at the desk talking about their menu.


    When Daniel and Mihaela got outside, the two are walking toward a truck who has recently arrived in this community.


    "Come on in. Come on in!" says a soldier who is on the back of the Mercedes-Benz truck cabin. "Come here and take your jackets!"


    "What are these jackets?" asks a woman having a bandage on her left eye.


    "For cold weather."


    "Thanks." says the woman after a while, taking a piece of jacket and walking off.


    Daniel is walking a bit further to the cabin entrance. He sees a sign that says the following in Romanian and English language: "1 person is allowed to take 1 jacket by his size". Daniel looks at the different models of jackets displayed.


    "Have any 3XL?"


    "Only three." says the soldier who is taking from a box from backside a jacket that is 3XL side and hand it to Daniel.


    "Thank you." says Daniel taking that jacket model and leaving the truck, heading with it to the house he is sitting.

 Valley of Flood - Part 18

    It is 09:23 A.M., Curtea de Arges, near the car park in King Michael First High School, two teenagers and three soldiers, all heavily armed, are leaving the safe zone. Their reason for leaving is going on a mission, searching for clothes that can help the survivors of this safe zone and the community on Valea Iasului withstand the following days.


    "What a mess." says Andra looking at a nearby Caf¨¦ from high school, who is having the windows broken and three zombie corpses laying on the ground.


    "Used to have our morning coffee in there." says Viktor to Andra.


    "You two." says a soldier looking back at the teenagers. "Focus. And keep quiet. Undeads are walking."


    "Rightˇ­ Sorry." says Viktor in a whisper tone.


    The five survivors are walking slowly from the car park, they are looking around the boulevard. They see the entire street is blocked by an enormous number of small cars, heavy cars and even a building remains who have fallen on the boulevard. Looking at the boulevard, they see numerous of zombies on the streets, who are sitting on their butts, walking aimlessly, and others are walking toward the survivors since most of these kinds of zombies can detect humans from smell.


    "They can smell us now?" asks Viktor in a whisper looking at a zombie from twelve steps from them walking toward a soldier.


    "They can do that from beginning." whisper the soldier leader walking closer to the zombie, and stabs the head of the creature with the hunting knife he has on the right hand.


    He threw the corpse of the zombie on the street.


    The landing of that corpse did awaken a few zombies who were laying on the ground, and made them look at the direction of the survivors. They start to walk or run on a slow peace toward the five survivors.


    "Don''t use fire weapons!" says the leader. "These will attract more. Use your knives."


    The soldiers and the two teenagers are taking their knives and start stabbing the heads of the upcoming zombies.


    It was a tough battle for the teenagers, but for the soldiers this felt like a normal cleaning mission. For the kids it was hard to stab the head of these creatures who refuse to die. Viktor and Andra have made a few mistakes like not stabbing the certain zone of the head or stabbing and pushing them down.


    But this fierce combat fighting was over after a few minutes when the zombies on the street boulevard were all killed.


    "Good work." says the soldier leader to his people. "But we still have to move on."


    The author''s tale has been misappropriated; report any instances of this story on Amazon.


    "Where to?" asks a soldier to Andra.


    "I know several stores that probably sells the clothes you are looking for. Most of them are from the left side." she points on left side, where the boulevard continues for about one to two kilometres.


    The direction Andra is pointing is the one where there is an enormous number of cars who are blocking the road, corpses of humans who are about to rise back to life and one helicopter wreckage. That helicopter who has fallen has the news logo of an international TV station. Soldiers and Viktor, seeing the difficulty in their way to acquire the supplies, they shrug it off, and carry on walking to that direction.


    The group is looking at each other, then a soldier asks Andra.


    "You sure there aren''t any other stores on the other side?"


    "Mate." says the leader of the group. "We''ve checked the other places days ago. There''s nothing left there. We have to go further our safe zone."


    "Butˇ­"


    "No buts. We go further." he takes the lead of the group, and stabs the closest zombie on the brain zone with hunting knife, then he pushes the zombie onto a one who was about to rise, and stabs that one zombie.


    The squad of five people are deciding to move further, going forward on the boulevard by taking the side walk, that''s having a huge number of dead creatures laying and standing around. The leader and the two soldiers are taking the front, while Viktor and Andra are following the people, both of them, fighting like the three soldiers, stabbing the zombies on the head, and pushing them back.


    The soldiers are killing a lot of zombies, but are hardly advancing to a zone Andra knows the best to have the supplies the Organization is searching for. The soldiers, seeing they are advancing hard, they decide to look for a way to escape from zombies since all of them are growing tired for killing the zombies. Their anti-biting armour is tiring the stamina of the soldiers and two teenagers.


    "Look!" says a soldier after he killed a zombie with his hunting knife, he sees a shortcut.


    "Come on!" yells the leader of the group, running to the shortcut pointed by the soldier.


    The shortcut pointed by the soldier is a paved road who is leading to the backsides of a countless residential buildings. A road usually used by high schoolers who would take it instead of the stairs at the police station when they''ve come with the microbus from a remote village into this city.


    "Keep going!" says the leader, leading the four people from the dangers of the boulevard.


    The group runs down the road, avoiding five zombies who almost grab them. The group has made possible arriving at the main road of the city, and arriving there, they see the street is as bad as the boulevard of their safe zone. An enormous number of wrecked vehicles, all blocking the road and side walk, but instead of cars with two and six seats, there were trucks, buses, microbuses, fire trucks and ambulances, where very few would work. And as the blockage from the boulevard, there are also zombies, countless alive zombies, who were aimlessly walking around.


    "There." says the leader, pointing his shotgun to his right direction, running toward a street that is transforming in a hill.


    "Don''t!" says Andra to leader. "That road leads back to boulevard." she points to the main road. "We can take the main road. There is a store that sells all sorts of second-hand clothes. Maybe we can find some in there."


    "You sure?" asks the leader of this squad.


    "Yes."


    "We go there." says the leader and he take the lead of his squad of soldiers, running toward the road that Andra indicated.


    The squad is soon flowed by walking fast-paced speed zombies and normal paced zombies. But the soldiers dealt with them by either pushing them, stabbing their heads or breaking their legs by kicking ruthlessly the decaying legs of these creatures.

 Valley of Flood - Part 19

    After a few minutes of running, the squad arrives in front of the store Andra mentioned. They all enter the place, and upon entering, the soldiers and Viktor are quickly moving furniture to the door, to block the main door of this place. Andra joins in to help the squad of soldiers to block the door and the windows of this place by moving the furniture who turned upside down by the panic of this apocalypse.


    "Great." says the leader to his squad after they''ve managed to create a barricade. "We have to remain quiet for a while. Maybe the zombies will scatter from here. Giving us time to escape."


    Soldiers are looking around this building, they see a lot of different types of clothing put on displays. They see hundreds of different shirts, t-shirts, blouse, pants, shorts and other type of clothing laying on the floor, all dirty from mud, blood and human remains.


    They soon discover three bodies of humans, all who were eaten by zombies. All the three bodies of humans not looking like they were there in recent times, more like weeks ago. The rotten smell of the bodies, hitting the nose of the survivors, making them feel nauseous. The soldiers quickly took some facial masks from their vests anti-biting armour pockets, they put the mask on, and they look worried at the bodies.


    "Are they presenting fungus?" asks the leader.


    "No." says a soldier with a sigh of relief who was approaching the three bodies of humans to check to see if the bodies haven''t grown any mushroom species on their dead bodies.


    "Pfuu. We are saved." says the leader of the squad.


    "What is it?" asks Viktor. "What would happen if it will grow a mushroom?"


    "You haven''t seen it, right?"


    "What?"


    "The mushrooms." says the leader. "That start to grow on the trees and on bodies. They can infect humans with the zombie virusˇ­ I''ve seen mushrooms like these, and let me tell you. Things like this, when you saw it. You better be having a good immune system otherwise you''re dead the moment you breathe."


    "These mushrooms are letting in the air spores, that contains the exact structure of a normal zombie virus." says a soldier checking a shelf that is offering baby clothes at a cheap price. "We don''t know how they appeared, or how they grow, but a certain thing is for sure. They are one of the causes this apocalypse happens."


    "And there''s no cure for this?" asks Viktor who has started to understand about these mushrooms.


    "Not yet." responds the leader checking another display of clothing. "From what I''ve heard, our scientists are working on a cure. But that was two months ago."


    The narrative has been stolen; if detected on Amazon, report the infringement.


    "Fire won''t work?" asks Andra.


    "It will, but it will still release these spores on the air." says the soldier who checks the baby clothes'' shelf. "We need a cure or a vaccine, or something to fight against these mushrooms." he takes a box that was left behind the shelf, he uses it and puts all the baby clothes into the box.


    "Are these for your kid?" asks the leader to that soldier.


    "Yes. My wife, she is already on her 9 months. She could give birth any moment."


    "Congratulations." says Andra to that soldier, and checks another shelf.


    The squad continues to look around this second-hand store for any clothing that can help the survivors withstand the cold temperature that is about to come. Andra and with Viktor are looking at the shoe''s shelf. Both are trying to see if any shoe could fit their worn ones. Unfortunate, none of the shoes had the exact size of Andra and Viktor, all of them being two or three numbers lower than their initial shoe size.


    A few moments later, the squad of five people, have made around six cartoon boxes with clothes. In these boxes are packed different clothes. In a box is packed baby clothes, in another are shirts and blouses, a third box are jackets, in a fourth are trousers and pants, in a fifth shoes, and on the six box there are scarfs, gloves, hats and socks. Now with the things they''ve found, the squad is now prepared to head back to the base, but this will be a problem.


    Outside, the vehicles are blocking the entire road, the boulevard is blocked and crawling with a huge number of zombies, and outside of the store there is a huge number of zombies who are trying to break in the store but thankfully, the glasses are covered by the empty shelves from the last survivors and the main door is blocked by furniture pieces. Which leaves the back door of the store.


    The three soldiers have gone in there to check to see if they could use the back door. Thankfully, there were only six crawler zombies in there, which were killed with ease by a stabbing in the head. Upon arriving at the back, they see there a small van, a Mercedes van, unlocked. The three soldiers are inspecting the van and to their luck, the van was abandoned a while ago, and it still has some gas left.


    "What are we going to do with the van? The entire boulevard is blocked." says a soldier.


    "Maybe the East side, but there''s the West side." says the leader.


    "Didn''t you saw the bridged at Lukoil collapsed yesterday?"


    "Yes. But we will not go to the safe zone. We''ll go straight to the community."


    "You mean you want to go on Valea Ia?ului?"


    "What do you want to do?" asks the leader. "You want to risk it carrying the boxes on dangers of the boulevard? You''ve seen how many zombies are only in there, how dangerous and futile it would be to carry it back to safe zone. No, we got a better chance of going to Valea Ia?ului. The Monastery side is blocked by zombies and cars, the roads that connect Curtea de Arge? ¨C Valea Ia?ului are blocked by the military barded wires and walls. Valea Ia?ului road is the safest route to deliver the needed clothes. Plus, we could deliver the clothes to the safe zone by helicopter."


    "Then why aren''t we calling a helicopter to come and pick us on the stadium?" asks a third soldier. Where a stadium is near them.


    "Are you crazy?" asks the leader. "On the beginning days the stadium was used as a safe zone by the military, and in just a day, the entire people in there got bitten, and turn on zombies. God knows if there is a greenhouse of mushroom in there."


    The soldiers debate for a few more minutes on what to do in the Mercedes-Benz van. Meanwhile, Viktor and Andra are inside of the structure, both going on the upper floor of this building.

 Valley of Flood - Part 20

    ***


    The building the squad has entered and barricaded their front entrance presents three floors, but only the first floor is accessible, while the second floor has been blocked and barricaded most likely by the people from the ground floor, who are now corpses that continue to decay. The stairs that lead o the second floor are blocked by two furniture pieces. A blockage that could be easily pushed away by someone.


    "Three rooms." says Andra to Viktor as the two arrived at the first floor, on the hallway.


    "Should we search them to see if we can find any supplies?" asks Viktor to Andra, holding his hunting knife in the right hand.


    "Sure." says Andra who is taking her hunting knife in the right hand.


    The two are walking slowly at the first room. Arriving near the door, the two are leaning on the walls, then Andra slowly pushes the door and continues to lean on the wall. After the door got completely opened the two are waiting a few seconds, then Viktor and Andra are leaving the walls, and look inside of this room.


    The first room has a few matters lying around, with blankets, toys near the blankets, meaning on this very room there were children and this was probably their beds. The two survivors are searching this room, but they found nothing useful to them. Andra did found a first aid kit, but the entire box was empty. What is interesting is that this kit had a few blood spots inside it.


    The two leaves the first room, then they walk slowly toward the second room, which is on the other side of the other room. The two are slowly opening the door, looking inside the room, they see something they''ve never thought they''ve seen. On this very room, there are a lot of cartoon boxes and milk crates, all of them having a bunch of food stored in jars like pickles, mushrooms, hot peppers and many more other types of food that is usually found on a normal looking cellar from countryside. The two search this room, and they see most of the food from there have been exposed, had been opened long time ago which resulted in a growing mould over the food.


    "What''s with these supplies?" asks Andra.


    "Maybe the three people from the ground floor were in a group." says Viktor. "I''ve never thought there would''ve been another group here besides the one in the high school."


    "What makes you say this belongs to a group?"


    "Think about the mattress in the other room. The toys laying near the mattress. Think about the corpses on the ground floor. Maybe this group decided to leave this place after a while. That is my thought."


    "Probably." say Andra continues to check the room.


    Soon, she discovered in this room a notebook. A normal looking "Dictando" notebook, which his having written on the cover, with big letters in a black permanent mark "MY JOURNAL OF THE APOCALYPSE". Andra opens the first page, on there she notices the name of the author, a few other names written in there and a phone umber, which nowadays is used since most of the telephone lines have been destroyed on the first three weeks.


    You could be reading stolen content. Head to the original site for the genuine story.


    She quickly looks at the pages of the journal, then, wanting to know more about this, she takes the notebook, places on the pockets under her jacket, then she heads outside of the room, together with Viktor who wants to check the third and final room of this first floor. Viktor and Andra, decide to open the door slowly, and peek inside. They did not open the door wide enough, they immediately close it when they''ve heard the distinct groan a zombie could make, and Viktor quickly close the door, and both of them are walking from that door.


    "Shit." says Andra breathing heavy. "That scared me."


    "Yeahˇ­" says Viktor who is also breathing heavily.


    "Hey!" says a soldier from the squad who has come on this floor, startling both Viktor and Andra, almost making hem shit their pants. "What are you two doing here?"


    "W-W-We were investigating the place, sir." says Viktor to the soldier, who is the leader of this mission.


    "I see." says the soldier who has taken a quick peek on the second room, noticing the milk crates and the cartoon boxes with the countless jars. "What''s in there?" he asks, pointing is shotgun to the third room.


    "Probably a zombie, sir." says Andra, we got scared the moment we tried to open the door.


    "Aha." says the leader and he walks toward the room.


    The man opens the door wide enough, aims his shotgun in front of his eyes, and pulls the trigger. He heard how the bullets have hit something and the thud noses of a body that has fallen on the floor. He looks around the room, then, he almost felt nauseas the more he was looking at this room.


    "What the fuck is this?" he asks loudly as he is looking at the corpses that are chained to walls.


    The more this soldier looks on the room, the more he was feeing sick and on the verge of puking his breakfast. On the floor, there are corpses of zombies, all alive and chained up by real silver chains, with their mouth covered by a powerful tape and missing eyes. There about six corpses like that on the floor, all chained and laying there, most of these six, still alive and moving their mouths. And on the walls, there eight corpses, all of them being kids, not adults like the ones on the floor. And one of the grotesque things about these corpses on the wall is not the fact they are chained to the wall, and all of them naked. No, one of the most grotesque things is that they are having their abdominal zone cut wide open, to reveal a lot of organs found in human''s body, and upon looking closer, the leader of the team notices how these kid''s insides are missing.


    "My God." says Andra looking shocked on this room. "What kind of sicko would do this?"


    "Oh no." says Viktor looking on this room, and upon smelling the awful stench of decomposing corpses, he backs away, and vomits on the floor in the hallway. The leader looked at the corpses in there for a while, then he closes the door and he leave this floor with his survivors.


    All three of them looked at the door of the second floor, but decided not to check it after they''ve heard the violent door banging in there and zombie screaming. The three leaves the first floor, and they are heading on the backside of this second hand where the other two survivors are loading the van with the clothes crates to be delivered to Valea Ia?ului, and from there, the team would take a helicopter to the safe zone since the bridge has fallen yesterday, after the military trucks has crossed the bridge near the gas station, which has been repaired a countless times back in the past, and now, it will be left like this, for eternity.


    After four minutes of driving, the squad did was surprised to see there was an opening of the blockage. An opening big enough to let them enter the boulevard and drive to their safe zone to deliver supplies found.

 Valley of Flood - Part 21

    ***


    Meanwhile, at a distance of five hundred meters from the community site, a car stops in front of a military blockage. From that car, the door is opened by the driver, who is Petre, and has come in here to stay in the community since the safe zone have approved his leave and relocation to the community.


    Petre opens the car doors from the back, takes from there a backpack he has taken after his leave from safe zone and walks toward the big gate of the community, that is getting opened by people inside, but not only for him, for a military truck that is heading to a scouting mission. When Petre saw the truck leave the community, he looked at the driver, who driver looked back at Petre, slowing the vehicle speed and looking at the soldier.


    "Where are you going?" asks Petre at the soldier with a smile, sign that tells Petre may know this soldier a long time ago.


    "I am heading to Oe?ti." says the driver. "Want to come along?"


    Petre left the backpack on near a tree chunk, he walks on the back of the military truck, with his assault rifle on the back. Petre sees there are only four soldiers in there, and three survivors who have volunteered to come along. From these soldiers there are two people Petre knew from yesterday, Gancea and Daniel, both ready for their first job.


    ***


    While the truck was going through the road that leads to Oe?ti, dodging any barricade in the way, any blockage and any wrecked vehicle in the way, people from the backside of the truck, are looking back, on the zombies who are coming after them. They could not fire their weapons to these creatures since this would attract more creatures coming, all they could do would be to stay in there, and attack any zombie who would manage to jump in the truck.


    The truck goes with a speed that is about thirty kilometres per. hour, a slow speed, enough to not make the zombies grab the truck and try to climb in. But as they were going for about thirty minutes on the road, none of the zombies have managed to grab the truck, and most of them who were trying, either missed, their hand was torn apart from grabbing the truck, or they were running over.


    Looking back, Gancea and Daniel, seeing the familiar buildings they''ve encountered on their survival time here. All they see is places who are still standing, others who have been collapsing, and houses, who were burned to the ground.


    "Never thought I would come back to this village." says Daniel to Gancea, who sits next to him.


    "Me neither." says Gancea looking on the back, seeing the group have passed the sign that says "Welcome to Oe?ti!".


    "I wonder if anybody from there is still alive." says a soldier preparing his guns.


    "Hardly to tell." says Petre to the soldier who asked this question. "Yesterday, the two survivors from here," looks at Gancea and Daniel. "Plus, other people, were escorted from here from a microbus. Where sadly about ten corpses have been found, plus the driver of the vehicle."


    "That sucks." says the soldier. "Hope we''ll find something valuable here. I''ve already heard the people from Curtea de Arge? have found stashes of clothes from a store."


    "Really?" asks Petre. "They''ve already finished it. The two soldiers asked me this morning to go along with them, but I refused, told them I was heading to community. Taking my duty as a watchtower."


    "You sure?" asks another soldier. "Then why you''ve come along?"


    "I felt bored. And I wanted to help."


    If you stumble upon this narrative on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen from Royal Road. Please report it.


    "Guys!" says the driver who is slowing the speed of the vehicle, we cannot go further.


    "Why not?" asks Petre.


    "Look." says the driver of the truck, showing Petre the reason he cannot advance further.


    Looking on the wind shield of the military truck, Petre and the other people from the back of the truck notice how in their way to the centre of Oe?ti there is a gigantic transmission tower that is blocking their road to Oe?ti. On the other side of that transmission tower, there hundreds of zombies who are climbing the tower, or going through the narrow escapes, walking toward the military truck.


    None of the people present in there know how did this happened. How can a transmission tower like that could fall from about a hundred meters from the road, and still block it? But the soldiers and volunteers did not stick too much to question this, because Petre sees the gate to the barn is opened. The man gets out of the truck and tells his people.


    "Come on! We''ll stay in the barn and see if we can find a shortcut!"


    A zombie is walking toward Petre, it is at seven feet''s from him. Petre sensed the zombie, he turns around and takes three shots of his assault rifle, hitting the head of the creature, letting it fall on the old and cold asphalt. Petre continues to march toward the barn, where two soldiers and the two survivors are following him. The other soldiers, and the driver, are turning around the truck, and leave this place, start to search for a shortcut that would lead them to Oe?ti main point.


    Thankfully the soldiers and the survivors have left the truck taking some fire-weapons, otherwise their chances of survival would have been low.


    "Head to the barn!" says Petre to four people he is in a squad with.


    "Yes!" says Gancea.


    Petre and the two soldiers, seeing more zombies are coming after them, they remain on the back, and open fire on those nasty zombies. Killing each of these creatures, one by one, using their assault rifles. Gancea and Daniel are running toward the barn that Petre indicated, they see the door is opened, and they walk in there. The two keep the door opened for the soldiers and Petre to come in.


    When all of the soldier has entered the barn, Gancea and Daniel are pushing the door, and are closing them, moving the locker of these wooden gates, then with the soldiers are moving the three tractors from there, near the door, to sue them as some sort of barricade in case the doors will fall. Thankfully, all the tractors were having their keys in them, making them a convenient for the survivors.


    "Good." says a soldier looking at the barricade and at the gate who is continually getting kicked and punched by the zombies outside. "We are saved."


    "For now." says Petre to the soldier, now we need to wait for them to disperse.


    "It''ll take a while."


    "At least we''ll have some time to analyse the zone." says Daniel who''s taking out from his vest pocket a piece of paper, that resembles a map.


    "You''re drawing the map?" asks Petre looking at Daniel who is looking at an old map.


    "Not yet." responds Daniel to Petre. "We need to see where are we."


    Daniel checks the map for a few seconds, then he sees the barn where they are in, it is drawn in the map. It was easily spotted because of the crops around the barn, and of the road they were taking to Oe?ti.


    "I seeˇ­" says Daniel studying the map for a few more seconds.


    "What?" asks Petre.


    "There are a few ways to go in Oe?ti. This will be useful in case the bridge across Arges River falls."


    "It has fallen." says a soldier from the group who is staying on a wooden chair from this barn. "I was there days ago. With a group. When we arrived in there, we saw the main bridge falling, we were thinking to go other way, but the village''s roads were blocked and infested with zombies."


    "The river has risen?"


    "I don''t know." says the soldier. "I am not a local. But it was supposed to be around three meters deep?"


    "Three meters?!" asks Daniel looking shocked at the soldier. "How the fuck can he raise up that much? Only he bridges has fallen, right?"


    "There were also several of convoys vehicles on that bridge. Somehow it collapsed, mostly due to the weight and formed some kind of den."


    "That''s bad." says Daniel. "Bad for the zombies on this area."


    "What do you mean?" asks Petre to Daniel.


    "I am thinking to use the water on these creatures. We make the bridge tall enough, and the we will open it when it will be enough to wash off all of these zombies."


    "Doesn''t sound to be a good plan." says a soldier.


    "I know." admits Daniel. "Unrealistic and all, but we need to find a way to let the water from there loose, it''ll create a bigger threat for us and for the environment."


    "Plus, we cannot reach the main centre of Oe?ti." says Petre, then he hears something. He whispers to his men. "Quiet. Zombies are walking outside."


    All of his men nod their head, and now they are staying in quiet. All of them. Daniel however, is still looking into the map of Arges county, hoping he''ll find a route to their destination.

 Valley of Flood - Part 22

    Meanwhile, in the community, in Valea Ia?ului, the nurse who was saved from Curtea de Arge? by the military help is attending the wounds of some soldiers who were hurting from yesterday attack when they were all confronted by that weird group of terrorists. As the woman was attending the leg wound of a soldier, by rolling the bandage all over his leg.


    "Those people are against us." says the soldier to Mihaela, making her suddenly stops from her tending the wound.


    "What do you mean?" she asks toward the soldiers laying in the bed.


    "The ones who attacked us that night." say the injured soldier.


    "You mean those?"


    "Yes. Those attackers." responds the soldier coughing.


    Mihaela grabs him as the man was coughing harder, but when she caught him, the soldier tells her the rest of the sentence.


    "They were once members of this community."


    "You should rest." says Mihaela to the soldier. "You will tell me later."


    Mihaela tends the wounds of the soldier, then after she tends the wounds of another person injured in there, which were only some injuries on his body due to a car crash from yesterday. He came into this community by another transport not from Arges county, but from Sibiu county, with another seven survivors.


    After she finished her job, Mihaela heads outside, leaving the two injured people alone to heal.


    ***


    Back on the barn, from the five soldiers and the two survivors who are stuck in there, all are staying in there, waiting for the zombies to scatter from their surroundings. This will take a while since there are more than hundreds of aimlessly walking dead bodies on these crops, roads and on this village. The soldiers and volunteers are all having weapons to help themselves, but they are waiting for their two other soldiers that have left the barn to search for a way to create a big noise. And there are the drivers, who are trying to fend off the zombies who are chasing them.


    Petre is with his group in the barn, they are all waiting for the zombies to leave the surroundings of this barn. He is looking through narrow opening of this barn walls to see the threats outside.


    Unauthorized reproduction: this story has been taken without approval. Report sightings.


    "There are a lot of them." says Petre in a whisper tone to his people.


    "Do you think we can take them?" asks a soldier to Petre preparing his rifle.


    "I don''t think we can." says Petre seeing more zombies walking past the barn, three zombies running in circles, one jumping around the crops of the barn, and a zombie lunging on another zombie. "These things are really aggressive."


    "Didn''t a bullet in the head can kill them?" asks Gancea.


    "Yes." says Petre turning around and looking at Gancea. "A bullet to the head may be killing the zombies. But some of them, cannot be stopped that easily. Even if you can pierce the brain, they can still move. Just like chickens when their heads got caught."


    "And burning is the only solution." says a soldier to Petre.


    "Exactly." says Petre.


    A loud banging is heard on the barn door. The squad members are looking terrified at the door. They are staying quiet and waiting for the loud banging to stop. But the banging noise becomes repetitive and louder, meaning more zombies have joined the banging. The survivors notice how the door is starting to move a little, even though the door is blocked by these tractors who were moved in there by them.


    "Prepare yourselves!" says Petre to his men.


    All of the people in this room have quickly got their weapons armed and ready to fire.


    As the banging and thudding noise of the zombies become louder, the survivors are looking more concentrated to the door. Then, Petre looks to the hole he used to see the zombies, and he is shocked to see there is a zombie, who is looking at them. Petre has never seen a thing like this, a zombie who peeping on the holes of the barn. Then, Petre aims his gun to that hole and shoots the thing. Three bullets it took from that gun, to hit the creature eye and making it fall.


    "What did you do?" asks a soldier to Petre.


    "Now they will all be coming here!" yells a soldier.


    "We''ve been spotted by them a long ago." says Petre and he runs toward the backdoor of the barn, where he takes off the creates who were used as a blockage. "We have to move on from here. The barn may be collapsing."


    The banging and hitting of the barn front door, has made the door move a little more centimetre, enough to make a few zombies tries to slide in this narrow opening. It may be still tough for some to get after survivors since they have been using these tractors as a blockage.


    After taking the crates from the backdoor, the people are running from there, slaying the three zombies who were near that door, by stabbing their heads with big knives and stomping the heads with the back of their assault rifles. The people are running, while Petre stays back, he looks at this barn. He immediately takes from his vest a grenade, he pulls the pin and threw the grenade into the barn, then he runs from there.


    "What did you do?" asks Gancea to Petre.


    "A distract-"


    He couldn''t finish the sentence because of the explosion from the back. The entire barn exploded. The tractors from that barn were all filled with gas, and there were also a few gas cans in there, most were empty or half empty. The explosion was loud enough to make some zombies turn their attention to barn. Who, because it had a lot of wheat and weed stored in, it started to burn on a fast speed.


    The group looked back at this explosion, but seeing this as a distraction and a way to divert the zombie attention from human meat, they all decide to use this moment as an opportunity to escape. This explosion gave the people enough time to run from there into the forest, and run toward the nearby abandoned houses.


    "Was this your best idea?" asks a soldier to Petre.


    "It was the only choice." responds Petre to his people.

 Valley of Flood - Part 23

    The group is running through the thick forest who surpassingly wasn''t cut by the illegal wood manufactures at this point. This forest near the barn have given the survivors the perfect getaway point.


    "Hope the village has some sort of communication radio or something like that." says Petre running through forest, leading his men.


    After a while, the squad of survivors, have entered a house to rest from their running and search for some supplies. They search the place for something useful, all they could find were smartphones without any batteries, not that they would work since all of the phone lines have been cut long ago, and other electronic devices who couldn''t work. Seeing they did not have any luck on finding anything useful, the group goes to the next house.


    In the next house, the squad couldn''t even enter it because of the locked door and broken windows that have been destroyed long ago. But when a soldier has tried to see what is it, a disgusting, awful and dead smell has hit him, making the soldier nauseous.


    "I ain''t going in there." says that soldier to his mates.


    "How bad it can be?" asks Daniel who is taking a peek into the window.


    The smell hit him, and it made him nauseous. He holds his nose, then as he is looking at the insides of this floor, he notices something incredibly scary. The entire floor of this house is stacked up with corpses, but the most disturbing thing about the corpses are children bodies. All having an awful dead smell that could be smelt from kilometres away.


    "What the hell happened here?" asks Petre looking sad at that house windows, to those dozens of corpses.


    "We should check the next one." says Daniel after a while.


    "ˇ­Yes."


    The people have entered a next house, upon entering the house, they''ve encountered a zombie, who got easily destroyed due to the soldier''s knife, who has decapitated the creature, then to Petre who has stomped the head of the zombie. The three people did not say anything, continuing their scavenging of this house.


    Unfortunately, they found nothing on this place, nothing useful to them.


    The fourth house didn''t have anything useful to them, only a few human corpses who were consumed by the zombies weeks ago.


    Seeing the sunlight is about to go, the group decides to head toward the zone where has the bridge collapsed. Thankfully, they will have to go only five hundred meters to there. But there are a lot of zombies on the road toward there, which will make their difficulty harder.


    The group is going down the main road toward the bridge, they saw a lot of zombies on the road. There were thirty or so more on the five hundred meters road, but all of them were killed by the soldiers who have decided to fire their weapons and empty their magazines on them. All of the soldiers have emptied around six magazines of assault rifle weapons, the entire ammo they had available after the departure from the military truck.


    This novel is published on a different platform. Support the original author by finding the official source.


    Arriving at where it is supposed to be the bridge, the group finds it like it was told earlier, fallen, and on the way to Arges River. But the river has not risen, it is at the same level it was always before the apocalypse, only the fallen bridge with the dozens of the vehicles on the river is the new scenery of this once appreciated zone by bikers and tourists who were coming here, only for a short break or ask direction for Transf?g?r??an.


    Down the river, there are a lot of crates with weapons, more of them opened, destroyed and burned by the fires of this fallen military convoy. Some of these weapons may be still used for fighting the zombies, if they could work.


    Down there, there are a few zombies, many of these zombies are dressed in military clothing, meaning most of the soldier have died in there and resurrect as zombies. While other soldiers weren''t as lucky as their colleagues, ending in the wreckages or eaten completely by zombies from there.


    The group, seeing the river can be crossed, they all decide to take the risk and cross the river on the left side rather than going front face because of the trees who are blocking the people way to the street. They all are going downhill on a fast speed toward the river, all running to the wreckage to see if there is something useful in there.


    As they are running toward there, zombies were looking at them, trying to catch them all, but the survivors are good, killing any zombie who was close to their heads.


    Arriving at that wreckage, they see there are several of weapons who see working, crates of ammunition and something Petre never expects to see, a pistol with signal, near him is three of those bullets that can launch a red coloured smoke into the sky to alert authorities. Petre takes this because this may be helping them to alert The Organization aerial squads if they will come in here to rescue them.


    After they take all they needed, all of the people are continuing their running toward a Hotel, that is situated near the intersection of the road, near a big transmission tower who is still standing. To arrive in there, the people need to climb a hill, and kill zombies who are going down and jump to them. All of the people from this squad managed to fend the zombies, and shot zombie''s heads with their weapons.


    Arriving at the door of that Hotel, the group notice how the door is barricaded by planks and strong wood. The squad leader, Petre, knocks on the door, and yell for help.


    "Are you people?" asks a scared voice from the inside of this hotel.


    "We are." says Petre.


    "You are not a zombie, right?" asks another voice, this one sounding like a female. "How can we trust you?"


    "We are not bitten, not green skin, and we are immune to mushroom spores."


    "ˇ­ Are you military?"


    "We are The Organization, ma''am." says Petre.


    "Look out!" yells a soldier turning around, seeing how dozens of zombies are coming toward them, all at ten meters distance from them.


    The soldiers and Gancea, having a submachine gun taken from the wreckage, are using their weapons on those dozens of zombies that are coming, killing them, and more other zombies who are crawling toward them from hill they were climbing earlier. As the soldiers of Petre kills the creatures, the leader tries to negotiate to let the people enter the Hotel to rest. The thing works, because the people from inside the hotel are opening a window for the survivors and let them enter the building, and rest in there.


    All of the people from the squad are running toward the window, entering the interior of the structure and closing the window after the last person, Gancea, has managed to slip by. When the window was closed, the people from hotel are quickly moving the curtains to cover the windows, and moving a heavy furniture desk to block the zombies from coming.


    "Thank you." says Petre who is apparently running out of breath, just like his people, who were on a big run.


    "No problem." says a survivor.


    On this room, there are seen only three humans apart from the squad of soldiers, one male and female who are standing near the window, speechless and scared, and the last person is a kid, a boy. Meaning this group of three people in this Hotel are a family.

 Valley of Flood - Part 24

    ***


    Later the night, on King Michael First High school grounds, on the building, Andra is doing some chores to help the base. That chores consisting into sweeping the dust from the hallway floor with a good quality broom she was handed by the people from The Organization. As she is sweeping near the Biology room door, she turns around as she hears the main door of the building opening. The lights were barely working, making that person who has entered the school building distinguishable. Andra looked at the person, and with a breath of relief she said.


    "Viktor."


    The boy named Viktor has entered the building, with a mope and a bucket with water, he came here to help Andra on this cleaning task she has received. The teenager is to look at Andra.


    "Can I?" asks Viktor.


    "Wait until I am finished with this room." she says as she resumes her ask of sweeping the dirt from the hallway into a pile.


    "Okay." says Viktor letting the things down. "I am going to library, check the library, seeing if there is something in there."


    "A good book?" asks Andra shocked. "You read books?"


    "How do you want to keep yourself entertained on this world?" asks Viktor as a joke and he walks toward the room of the school library.


    Viktor opens the door that is leading to another door who is at ten meters from him, he walks the stairs toward that room. As he arrived at the door, he opens the door, quietly. He enters the room and walks carefully toward the room nearest bookshelves. He takes a peek o his left side, and on there he sees there is two people covered in blankets, sleeping on the table. Viktor also notices the two people are sleeping, hugging tightly, and with their clothes on the floor.


    The teenager decides to take three random books and he heads out of there as quietly as possible from the sleeping and loud snoring couple who decided to make out earlier. When Viktor has left the place, and closed the door quietly, he is leaving the hallway leading to library, and walks toward the classroom near the entrance door. He lets the books in there, and looks at their covers. Viktor has taken three novels written by Stephen King. First is "I.T.", second is "Christine" and the other novel is "Carrie". He lets the books in there, walks out of the classroom, and helps Andra on cleaning.


    This narrative has been purloined without the author''s approval. Report any appearances on Amazon.


    ***


    Back in the Hotel, that is combined with a usual market known by Romanian population by the name of "La Doi Pa?i" translated as "At Two Steps", the group of soldiers is preparing their beds for tonight. The group of soldiers from Valea Ia?ului have managed to convince the family of three to let them enters this place, and have a rest for this night.


    Petre told the family of three people why are here, and what they can do with this place. The place was firstly supposed to be used as a safe zone, but after the group has seen the bridge has for real collapsed, the group is not sure if this will be used as a safe zone.


    "Yes, they can try to take another route," says Petre to the father of the family when he asked if they couldn''t take another route. "But seeing how this entire zone is heavily populated with Z''s, and near the Vidraru Den area of danger in case the huge wall will fall."


    "But he won''t?" asks the mother of the family.


    "Hopefully not." says Petre.


    "You think there is a place for us in there?" asks the father to Petre.


    "Everybody is welcomed in there." says Petre to the family.


    The entire family of three are looking at each other happily. They already start to cry and feel hopeful that tomorrow this family will be rescued from this danger they have faced for around three months. Petre is discussing further with the family of three about their community in Valea Ia?ului, the things they have in there, how are people in there and about the medicine system they have after he has noticed that the husband has a left arm bandaged. When he was asked about the arm, the person answered that he has fallen the stairs after he tried to move a furniture cabinet on the ground floor.


    Meanwhile, on the upper floor, in a room, at a desk, Daniel is working on the map. In this room, there is Gancea, who is checking his weapon for tomorrow. After he checked the magazine of the handgun, and put it back, he looks at Daniel, who is still working on the map.


    "What are you doing there?"


    "I am working on the map." responds Daniel who is writing something on the map with a permanent marker. "There are other ways to get back to Valea Ia?ului, and this one was the quickest and dangerous one."


    Daniel marks with a black letter "X" the zone where it is supposed to be the bridge that has collapsed, near where they are going to sleep this night. He also marks with a letter "X" the village called Albestii de Arges. He looks over the map, analyse a few trails then he says to Gancea.


    "Look. There is a route that can lead to Valea Ia?ului. We can take the roads that can lead to the fish farm from Oe?ti. Butˇ­"


    "But?" asks Gancea.


    "I am not sure if the bridges from that zones had the same fate as the one from here."


    "There is another?" asks Gancea.


    "Cic?ne?ti." responds Daniel. "The zone wasn''t as highly populated like Oe?ti or Albe?ti. There may be fewer cases of zombies in there. It is a tough road, but if it considered to be safer. We''ll have no choice, rather than cross the river, and search for a working vehicle on these hordes on the other side."


    "Hopefully the radio station will work." says Gancea.


    The squad has found a crate with radio stations, walkie-talkie in there, and now, there are two soldiers, in the kitchen, who are trying to make that device work.

 Valley of Flood - Part 25

    In the night, near the village of Albe?ti, on where it was supposed to be a bridge to a den, the military truck has arrived at there. The said truck that earlier had to turn around and had to cut ways with soldiers who had run to that barn to escape the zombies. The two soldiers, after their truck has stopped near the collapsed bridge, are getting out of this vehicle, armed with assault rifles, and looks around.


    "We are lost, mate." asks the passenger of the driver.


    "No idea." respond the driver. "The map has shown us this would be a way to Oe?ti."


    "Now what? Turn around?"


    "I guess."


    The two people are looking around them, they cannot see much because of the night. But they can definitely see the fallen bridge in front of them, all the debris still in the water and the column still standing. The two soldiers are feeling a little creeped by this. Both wondering how come a bridge like this, who was restored countless times could end up in a shape like this.


    The two soldiers, decide to head back to their vehicle, and leave this place. The military truck leaves the zone and heads back to main street, trying to see if they could find another way to Oe?ti. They are going to try the Cic?ne?ti route since the bridge from fish farm has been destroyed like the ones that ties creates access to a quiet part of Albe?ti village.


    The narrative has been illicitly obtained; should you discover it on Amazon, report the violation.


    The moment the military truck has left the road that led to that bridge, and made turn to right, something good has happened. The radio station used for communication has made the sweetest sound of the apocalypse.


    "Hello! Anyone there? Over." says the voice of Petre from the radio station.


    "Yes, yes!" says the passenger taking the microphone. "Squad B2. Over."


    "Squad B2?" asks Petre shocked. "You two are alive?"


    "Petre? Yes, we are safe, mate! How are you? Over."


    "We''re good. Good." says Petre sounding happy on the radio. "We managed to get safe in a hotel."


    "Have you found what you are looking for?" asks the passenger. "Over."


    "We found a family, and a lot of crates from a failed convoy in here. Over."


    "I see. We are going to come in the morning there. First we have to go through Cic?ne?ti." says the driver taking the microphone. "Remain there. We will come in there as soon as possible. Over."


    "Roger that. Good luck on the roads. Over."


    "Thanks. Stay safe over there, captain! Over."


    The transmission is closed, and the military truck is going down the road, toward the small village known Cic?ne?ti, a village deep in a forest that was once known by the nickname of the "The Cursed Village". This nickname represents how the majority of the that population from there were in an addiction to alcohol beverages.

 Valley of Flood - Part 26

    ***


    Back in the community in Valea Ia?ului, Mihaela, is falling on her bed, exhausted after this hard day she has received. The entire days she has worked more as a doctor, rather than a nurse back in the normal days. The woman is laying on her bed, slowly closing her eyes and about to fall asleep. As she was gazing into the dream land, something sinister has happened.


    An explosion was heard inside the community. An explosion so loud, it awakens Mihaela from her sleep and made her jump from the bed. She looks on the windows, she sees some grey smoke rising in the sky. Even if it is night, she still saw it because the smoke was from a close distance from Mihaela house.


    Screams are heard outside, soldiers yelling orders and people running to safety with kids. Mihaela walks from the window, and she heads outside of the house. Walk down the stairs and toward the road, where she sees a soldier who is running from the south, he is having an assault rifle on his hands, and equipped with night vision googles. That soldier sees Mihaela is standing still, looking confused on around her.


    "Go! Go!" yells that soldier to Mihaela, who is on a distance of thirty meters.


    "What happened?" yells Michaela to that soldier.


    "No time! Go to the safe zone." he says and he runs toward another direction with his assault rifle.


    Mihaela runs after a group of people who are running toward the safe zone. That group is all by women and children. As the group continues to run to the safe zone, the explosions multiply and yelling intensifies. As the group was approaching the basement of this community that is declared as a safe zone, Mihaela has stopped from running because she heard someone yelling for help. The screaming was coming from person that is blocked under debris that has come from an explosion.


    If you encounter this narrative on Amazon, note that it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it.


    The nurse runs toward that screaming person, tries to see what happened. The person that is under three logs, badly injured as Mihaela could see the blood soaking from the head of the female under the debris. The nurse tries to see if she can get her out, but it is pointless when she tried to drag her out of there. The nurse turned around to scream for help, but as she turned around, someone flanked her, and hit her hard in the head. Knocking her out with a baseball bat.


    Mihaela falls on the ground, near where the injured person is blocked, and is killed by that attacker with a knife stabbed in the head. That person takes Mihaela on his shoulders and runs away from here, to the darkness, far from people and military.


    It manages to evade this community without being detected by soldiers and survivors in this community.


    This wasn''t the only kidnapping that has happened in this community, there has been three more cases of kidnapping, most involving women. With Mihaela being four women kidnapped by these terrorists.


    The attack was seriously damaging for humans in this community, but they managed to counter-attack these attackers. They sent all of the attackers to flee or kill them in cold blood by shooting them.


    These attackers have killed people in this community, innocent people who were trying to live peacefully in these safe walls. But most of them were captured and will be interrogated about the crimes they have committed into this night.


    People have noticed there were some people missing and a squad of soldiers from Curtea de Arge? were sent to track these people by using their drones. A weird strategy to find someone, but these drones The Organization have created works very good on locating survivors that have been registered into their communities all around the world.

 Valley of Flood - Part 27

    ***


    In the morning, back in Oe?ti, in the hotel, the group of soldiers and the family of three have taken their things, prepared their gear and wait for the command the squad of the two soldiers will come to pick them up. Last conversation the group had was one hour ago. The drivers of that truck are on their way to Oe?ti, taking the Cic?ne?ti route which turns out to be a safe bet. As they said on the radio, the road was all clean and safe from the zombies.


    "How many are there?" asks a soldier to Petre.


    Petre, the leader of the squad of this mission, is peeking through a window blockage, he observes there are countless zombies outside. The man turns around to his squad, he tells them how many are there, and how many different variants are outside on the streets. The soldiers are looking at each other, seeing that everyone is prepared for the upcoming fight.


    Petre goes to the door, together with Gancea and Daniel, moving the furniture that was in front of the door used as a blockage, then a soldier kicks the door and runs through the door. He aims his assault rifle to a zombie who turned around to him, and he kills the creature by firing three shots. Other soldiers and survivors are leaving the building, and start to kill the upcoming zombies. Only the frail women and the daughter are staying behind.


    The soldiers are shooting the zombies far away, and when they see zombies that are close to them, they quickly stab them with their knives, or push them.


    Petre kills three zombies who were on a top of the building rooftop and prepared to jump on them. He successfully kills the three zombies with a dangerous variant to humans. These variant zombies are called "Jumpers", very common, and very dangerous for humansˇ­ and for themselves. Petre turns around, sees a horde of zombies coming from the right, he and three other soldiers are shooting that horde.


    Gancea and Daniel are using their weapons to kill the zombies that are coming from behind the building. The two are not having assault rifles like the soldiers, they are having their handguns. An efficient type of weapons for two people who never handed gun before this apocalypse hit.


    The fight was fierce, but the squad managed to kill most of the zombies, but with a cost. Even if they still killed the zombies Petre saw when he peeked on the window, there are still many creatures like this who are still walking and running. So, the squad, are starting to switch to their melee weapons and prepare to attack. But they''ve stopped the moment they have heard the sound of a motored vehicle coming from somewhere.


    A soldier is looking through the direction of where that noise comes from, and he sees a car approaching them. The soldier is looking at that car, feeling happy that they have found safety. He yells to his people about the car, but when he turned around, he sees the car approaching faster, a thing that make the soldier feel confused.


    You might be reading a pirated copy. Look for the official release to support the author.


    "What?"


    The car is speeding faster, getting closer to that soldier


    And the driver didn''t care that he ran over a soldier with his Toyota pickup truck.


    The group saw this accident, and they quickly change back to their fire weapons and shoot the remain bullets to that car.


    A bullet manages to hit the wheels of the car, making the said pickup truck lose control and crash into a concrete fence.


    The soldiers are walking toward the car, aiming their weapons to that thing, while the family of three and Gancea are checking on the victim of this accident. Daniel is looking through the direction of where that car came from and sees another car coming to them.


    "Here''s another one!"


    But that said car stops, turns around and goes back on the way it came. The driver probably saw this attempt on killing the soldier failed and he would rather try in another time than to risk his life right now.


    Petre is opening the door of that pickup truck, and sees there are two people in that car. Both are looking injured and knocked out from this crash and some bullets who have hit them. Upon a close inspection, he notices the bullets haven''t hit their vital organs, only their arms and the board control of the car.


    "Who the fuck are those people?" asks a soldier to Petre.


    "They are the ones like that night." says another soldier to his comrade.


    "They are the terrorists?" asks Petre.


    "I am certain, sir!"


    Petre observes these two people are having tattoos on their right wrist, that is having a skull with a bullet wound on the base of where the rain is supposed to be. It has written on these tattoos in Romanian language the word "Liberatori", translated in English means "Liberators". He looks at this car, sees there is a dead human in that car, but that said death human was probably dead a long time ago because it had his entire stomach ripped apart.


    "These sickos." says a soldier noticing the body on the backseat.


    "Execute them." says Petre to his soldiers.


    "But sir." says a soldier. "They can be used in interrogation."


    "They will not give anything to us." responds another soldier. "Last time we tried to interrogate one of them, and he tried to jump on us, yelling to kill him and transform into a zombie."


    "He really did that?" asks Petre surprised by this.


    "Yes." says that soldier. "It was a scary experience because I''ve never encountered humans ho would willingly give their lives to become a walking dead corpse."


    Before the soldier say something, another vehicle is approaching, this time, it was the military vehicle from yesterday. It came back to pick them up and deliver them back to safety.


    When the vehicle came back, the soldiers have decided to kill the drivers rather than to spare their lives. And killingˇ­ They stabbed their heads with their knives, and leave the bodies in there to be eaten by the zombies from the other side of the river who are approaching this zone slowly.


    The soldier that has been ran over is injured on his torso and his arms. His injures are looking serious but he isn''t on a critical situation of life and death.


    The squad of soldiers, the small family and the two survivors are getting inside the military truck to be transported back to the community and to rest for real after of this entire event they have encountered. The vehicle takes the Cic?ne?ti route, the one it has taken to come here.

 Valley of Flood - Part 28

    ***


    Hours later, the military truck arrives back to Valea Ia?ului, and are all looking stunned to see the entire place was attackedˇ­ once again, by the same group of psychopaths who injured a comrade earlier in Oe?ti. When the group arrived back to the community, and they were told by the guards what happened and who got kidnapped, Petre, Daniel and Gancea were angry when they found out Mihaela got kidnapped. Yes, they weren''t so close, but she was the one who helped them on that run in Curtea de Arge?.


    Petre is going to the tent where one member of this group is getting interrogated by three soldiers. He enters the tent, after he told the guy who is guarding the tent who is and what does he want, and sees the prisoner being beaten to a pulp by an injured soldier, who was treated by Mihaela yesterday.


    "Where is your hideout!?" yells that soldier to the beaten face of the terrorist.


    "I will not tell you." says the terrorist coughing blood.


    Petre notices how that terrorist, who is wearing only a pair of underwear is having the same tattoo as the dead people from Oe?ti, only this one is on the chest and is big enough to cover the entire torso. Petre cannot interfere in this interrogation, only to watch like his comrades how one of the attackers gets beaten.


    "I am asking once again. Where is your hideout?!" asks the interrogator after he throw three more punches to the face of the tied-up attacker.


    "Noˇ­ Notˇ­ Telling you." says the attacker with his last breath.


    "You fuck!" says the interrogator who is throwing one hard punch, it hits the nose of the attacker, breaking it and making the person knock out of his senses while the blood drips out of the nose.


    "He''s unconscious?" asks Petre to an interrogator.


    "He is. I will interrogate him later." he says turning around and walks toward the exit of the tent. "Take care of it. If he wakes up. Call me for round two."


    "We will." responds a soldier who is occupying to stop the bleeding of the terrorist.


    Petre, the interrogator, with two other soldiers are leaving the tent and are walking toward another one to discuss their plan of retrieving their people from the hands of the terrorist group who have attacked them last night. The four soldiers are looking on a laptop that is monitored by a man wearing the clothes and the armour with the logo of "The Organization".


    Stolen content warning: this content belongs on Royal Road. Report any occurrences.


    "How is the situation looking?" asks a soldier in English to the man working on the laptop.


    "You know I can speak Romanian, Radu." says that man in Romanian to the soldier named Radu. "The situation is the following. One drone of the three got spotted and destroyed. The other two haven''t spotted him."


    "What is the status of the drone that found them?" asks the interrogator.


    "They were spotted in Zigoneni, right at the blocked bridge that ties Zigoneni village to Curtea de Arge?. Here is the video it captured."


    The man shows the video of the drone that recorded the incident where it was last seen running. The footage shows a truck that stops in the middle of the road, the driver of that truck, being dressed as the one of the people they''ve captured. That driver aims his pistol on the drone and proceeds to shoot five bullets, the fifth hitting the turret. There the footage ends.


    "That is the end." says The Organization member to the soldiers.


    "Are you sure this where they are their last headquarters?" asks a soldier.


    "Probably." says the man. "The drone only captured the footage on that direction. I also sent a drone over there, and found out the car wheels track were on the downhill road that leads to an abandoned nightclub from the 2000s."


    "That''s where they should be." says the interrogator. "That zone is big enough to hold the hostages and be used as a base for these criminals."


    "Is it the same as the one where Ramus was hold?" asks the person at the laptop.


    "I don''t know." says the interrogator. "Last time when we asked he told us he was always wearing blindfold when he was transported by that group."


    "Means we have to go on Zigoneni." says Petre.


    "Sir." says the interrogator to Petre. "With all due respect, it would be better to take a break, after everything you''ve gone through the last days. And let us handle this."


    "But-"


    "Don''t worry, sir." says Radu. "We got this."


    "ˇ­Fine." says Petre who knows he had to stop arguing. "Be careful out there."


    "Don''t worry." responds Radu to Petre. "We will be alright."


    The two soldiers are leaving the tent, walking to the next tent to discuss with the soldiers from the safe zone to start a mission of rescuing the kidnapped people from the community. There aren''t so many soldiers in this community who could be fit to go into a fight. Most of them were injured from the attack of last night, only three have perished in this attack. And Petre, decides to go into his house, to rest after these last days, who were really tough for him.


    Later this day, a car leaves the community, a blinded car with three soldiers and a volunteer, Gancea. The soldiers have welcomed Gancea to this mission. One of the volunteers from there was in the last mission with him, and they recommend him to join this mission. Gancea is equipped like the other soldiers, with zombie bite proof armour, helmet with visor and an assault rifle type of gun, an AK model for the gun''s enthusiast. Like the other soldiers, Gancea has three magazines with thirty bullets.


    But they will not be alone, from Curtea de Arge? there is another squad of six soldiers and one volunteer, a man named Ramus, who yesterday came to Curtea de Arge? to deliver ammunition for the safe zone, and had to stay overnight here because he ran out of gas when he arrived at fifty meters from safe zone. And that guy named Ramus, when he found out who was the person kidnapped among the other five, he immediately listed as a volunteer for this mission

 Valley of Flood - Part 29

    One week ago, at the community gates, on a rainy night, a man is carrying something in his arms. The figure that approached the gate was spotted by a guard, by a soldier, the one who was in the present ran over by the pickup truck. That soldier was looking at the figure who approached close to be seen by the functioning lights installed at the community walls.


    "Identify yourself!" says that soldier aiming his M14 to that person.


    The man who is carrying a woman on his arms he is looking all in mud and blood from zombies. That man in front of the gate is looking exhausted and injured in his arm. The man is carrying a woman, who is on the verge of the dying as the blood from her head and other injuries on her legs and arms reveal.


    "My name is Ramus! And I need help!" yells that person to the soldier.


    "Ramus!" says the soldier. "Are you bitten by zombie?"


    "No, sir!" says Ramus to that soldier (who was the only one guarding on this night), looking exhausted and breathing heavily. "I am fine. But my cousin is not! She fell from the second floor. And she is in a bad state. Please. Help me, sir!"


    Stolen story; please report.


    "Is she infected?" asks the soldier.


    "No, sir."


    The soldier goes to open the gates to let them enter the community. Ramus is entering the community, slowly and about to fall anytime. When Ramus was about to trip over something, he quickly gets caught by two survivors and the soldier who opened the gates. The soldier is taking the injured woman on the arms and he is transporting him to nearest house to let her lay on the bed and by one of the doctors from this community.


    As for Ramus, the man was also carried by the soldier and by a survivor to the same house as where his cousin is carried. The two people were having a hard time carrying this man because he is huge and injured.


    Upon closer inspection, the medical staff and soldier have noticed these two weren''t bitten, which was a good sigh of relief, but they noticed all of them were having beating marks, scars that are recent and broken ribs in case of Ramus.


    "What happened?" asks a medical staff member, worried, when he found the all the beating marks on them and the broken ribs on Ramus.


    "Li-Liberatorsˇ­" says Ramus. "Liberators did this to us."


    And that was the last thing he said after he succumbed to a deep sleep of twenty hours. When he wakes up from his coma, he and his cousin were interrogated about what happened there, about that group and how did they escape one of their secret hideouts. Thanks to them, The Organization has stopped the illegal activity of this group of criminals from all over Arge? and Dambovita county.

 Valley of Flood - Part 30

    ***


    Back to the present, two cars are stopping in front of Rompetrol gas station, where the entrance of Curtea de Arge? is, and where a military blockage from three months ago was made. From the three vans, a total of nine soldiers and two volunteers, Gancea and Ramus, are leaving the vehicles and heading to where is suspected to be the last hideout of this criminal group.


    The leader of this mission, a masked soldier with a skull mask is looking on his clock, the time it shows is 15:32, meaning they are having more than two hours of sunlight on the sky. This will not be a problem for them because all of the soldiers are having night vision googles, only the two volunteers aren''t having this equipment.


    "Squad King Michael I." says the masked leader of the six soldier and Ramus. "You are going on the backside of the building. Don''t shoot your weapons. We don''t want to attract Z''s."


    "Roger that." says the leader of his squad.


    "Valea Ia?ului squad." says the masked leader to the group of three soldiers and Gancea. "You all four have to create a diversion."


    Gancea was looking at the bridge, and he spotted there is a truck, with an oil trailer, blocked ion front of several of vehicles and with a lot of corpses surround it.


    "We can try to set an explosion to this truck." says pointing at that truck.


    "We''d rather not." says the leader. "This bridge would be used to us."


    "How about the gas station?" asks a soldier.


    "No." says another soldier. "Remember what happened last time in Caracal. The explosion was so huge, the entire city was burning for three days and our plan to use this as a safe zone failed."


    "At least the zone we''ve taken wasn''t one known for a serial killer."


    "I know." says Gancea seeing a high voltage tower near this supposed abandoned place where is the supposed headquarters of the terrorists group. "We can try to bomb the tower."


    Ensure your favorite authors get the support they deserve. Read this novel on Royal Road.


    Most of them agreed to Gancea''s idea since this was one of their best strategy at the moment. They will bomb it and make it fall in this headquarter of the terrorists. But they will bomb it when they will be getting the signal from the squad of Curtea de Arge? that the prisoners are located on the safety room.


    And the operation begins.


    The Valea Ia?ului squad are going to that tower, planting the C-4''s for the detonating of this huge high voltage electricity tower and preparing to detonate them when the signal will come. The squad stay to get away from that tower, from the radius of the explosion to not be caught in there.


    The part for the squad from Curtea de Arge? is now commencing, the entire group had kicked the door and entered in force the place. They immediately opened fire the moment they saw a man in there, about to grab his gun. Then they see more of those people coming in this room, all of them were shoot dead. All six of them were killed. All of them having the same tattoos as the ones and same clothing colours.


    When the squad has finished with these terrorists from this room, they are going to the next room, in silence and there they see what they were looking for. The hostages, all tied up with ropes, most of them naked, crying and hurt. All of the women from there were alive, barely able to breathe.


    "These psychos." says Ramus angrily looking at the people, and he sees his cousin, naked and unconscious. "Maria."


    He runs over to the body of Maria, checks her to see if she is alive. He notices how the woman has several of beating marks all around her body, a thing that infuriates Ramus, made him takes the gun and rushes to the other room to kill the remaining of this group.


    When he arrived at where it is supposed to be the entrance of this place, they see the truck getting out of there, but when the truck was about to make a turn it quickly got stopped by the other squad of soldiers who have opened fire on them, killed the remaining six people of this group from this headquarter.


    "We got them?" asks a soldier.


    "Yeah." says the masked leader of this mission.


    "Wasn''t that to easy?" asks Ramus looking at the leader of the operation.


    "I guess. But we killed most of their numbers days ago. Hopefully these are the last ones of these psychopaths."


    "So we''ve planted the C-4''s for nothing?" asks a soldier.


    "We will take them back." says Ramus.


    The squad starts to do their job of this mission. They take the refugees to their cars, and search this place. There were only two people searching the place, those were Gancea and a soldier from Valea Ia?ului. The two are searching the upstairs room where are a lot of beds, couches, food supplies, guns and a lot of other things useful to the community. They also found there the map of Romania where it has circled lots of counties such as Arge?, Cluj, Bucharest, Craiova, Dambovita, Tulcea, Deva and Baia Mare. And those circles were all having an "X" mark drawn in there, except Arge?.


    Gancea takes the marker from the desk, and draws a red "X" into this map.


    "Now there''s none." he says to himself and continues his searching.

 Valley of Flood - Part 31

    ***


    Hours later, back in Oe?ti, in a house that is situated on a top of the hill, the house is lighten by the indoors lights, and there is figure at the window, looking down on the garden of this house, where a zombie is having impaled his whole body into the spiky fence. That figure is dragging the curtain of the window to cover the window view.


    In the interior of the house, there is a man, one of the people wearing the clothes of the terrorists from Curtea de Arge?. There is another one, sitting in the couch and looking worried, just like the guy who closed the curtains.


    " What are we going to do now?" asks the guy sitting in the couch.


    "What do you mean what are we going to do?" asks the person who was looking on the window. "We are following the plan."


    "Who is we?" asks that soldier rising up from the couch. "You are on your own."


    "You''re leaving me, bastard?"


    "Yes. I don''t want to be a part of this thing anymore."


    That person is taking his gun from the pants pocket, and without any mercy, he kills the person from the same group as him. He aimed for the heart of the person. One bullet gone through the body of this person, and hit the wall of the house. The victim puts his hands on the zone where he got hit, he looks shocked at the person who shot him, but before he could say something else, that shooter continues to shoot the head of the victim for six times, until the magazine ran down.


    Support the creativity of authors by visiting the original site for this novel and more.


    After the killing, the man empties his magazine of the handgun, throws it to the dead body, and leaves this house before it will be crawling with the dead walking corpses.


    The person walks from this house, leaves the property and goes toward the car that earlier was used by them to try and do a suicide attack on the soldier like their teammates. Sitting on the car, he looks through the map that was laying on the backseat, he looks through the map for a few seconds until he found the location he was looking for. When he found it, the man throws the map back on the backseat, and drives from here down the hill to the streets that lead to Vidraru Lake.


    ***


    Meanwhile, in Valea Ia?ului, on a house used as some sort of hospital, a woman is treating the wounds of Mihaela and Maria, Ramus''s cousin, after they were kidnapped and raped by these savages. Both of these poor souls couldn''t talk to the soldiers on their way here, nor with anyone about what happen, until the nurse managed to convince them to open up about the things that have happened in there.


    "The things we endure in there. We''re horrendous." says Maria first. "They do not care we were humans. Treated us like sex objects, beat us to satisfy their deepest desires and were even trying to kill us for not letting them touch us."


    "This groupˇ­" says Mihaela. "Tried to do blow up something."


    "What?" asks nurse to Mihaela. "What something?"


    "I have no idea. I only heard so little since they were talking in the next room on a low tone. It did not help that the door was metallic type."


    "I understand." says the nurse bandaging the two wounded females. "If you don''t feel like it, it would be better to not talk about this."


    Both of them agreed by shaking their heads in approval way.


    Later, when the two females were healed from the wounds, they were called by Petre to the tent to tell them about what they have heard or saw while they were kidnapped. The girls told them the same thing they have told the nurse earlier. And this information did not help them too much about this.

 Valley of Flood - Part 32

    Ten days have passed since this incident. Everything has returned to normal. Not the apocalypse, the calm before this group of terrorists have arrived at their lives. The community has grown bigger and numbers. The safe zone in Curtea de Arge? it''s the same. But a thing remains the same. The zombiesˇ­ who are now becoming deadlier than ever.


    On the safe zone from Curtea de Arge?, on this fine morning, a group of six people have left the safe zone, all equipped in armour anti-biting, carrying with them assault rifles and machetes. The six people who are going on this mission are four males and two teenagers who were days ago in a similar mission like this.


    The two teenagers are of course Andra and Viktor since they know this city and have some good skills on fighting zombies.


    From the other four males soldiers there is Ron, who has come into this safe zone five days ago because he wanted to transfer himself to the safe zone. And on those five days Ron has done a lot of things for the safe zone like crafting melee weapons like baseball bat with nails like in video games, a made-up javelin with butterfly cake and arrows for their bows. Without his help, the safe one would have been relaying on their equipment whop is starting to run low on the ammunition and start to deteriorate.


    "What is the plan?" asks Ron in a broken Romanian language to the leader of this squad, who is the same one where Viktor and Andra were involved.


    "You don''t know what are we doing?" asks a soldier to Ron.


    "I did not understand it very well. I may be knowing some Romanian, but I still have issues on the conversation." he said to Ron in English language.


    "Our mission is to check the apartments near our safe zone." says a soldier to Ron in a not so broken English language. "We need to make sure the apartments near the safe zones are not infected with zombies when we will be expanding."


    "I understand." responds Ron who understand most of it.


    "What''s the first one?" ask Viktor to leader.


    "We split up." says the leader of this mission. "You, Andra and Ron are going to the ones where the two bakeries, the bar, the drug store, the small shops, the caf¨¦, the betting shop."


    "You mean these?" asks Andra pointing at the doors of the backside of the first bakery.


    "Yes." responds the leader. "And me with other two soldiers are going to the other ones where it is the kindergarten located. Our objective is to check the places, neutralize any zombie alive in there, throw all of the zombies from the windows where later we will be burning them. Remember, there have been almost four months since the first infection, it is likely there will be mushrooms growing on those zombies, so it would be better to avoid them and use the masks I gave you when you enter the building. Understand?"


    Help support creative writers by finding and reading their stories on the original site.


    "Yes, sir!"


    "Good." says the leader and starts to put his breathing mask, then the others are following his example to equip the mask.


    When they were done, the group of six survivors splits into two groups each with three people. One group, Andra, Viktor and Ron, are going to the block door, while the other group are running to their right side, where a car park is located, and several doors to several block buildings.


    ***


    In the community of The Organization from Valea Ia?ului, in the inside of this fortified zone, Mihaela and other women have recovered from their injures they were suffering the time all four of them were kidnapped and used as sex toys as Maria and Mihaela described it ten days ago. Mihaela and the other women have recovered after this incident.


    Mihaela is heading into the cafeteria to take her well deserved breakfast to start this morning. Today she has a lot of work to do on checking the status of the patients who were brought here after some injures they sustain in a mission where they encountered five zombies classified on the class F.


    Entering the cafeteria, Mihaela sees there are a lot of people who have decided to take their breakfast. From these people in here, some are familiar faces to Mihaela such as Daniel, Gancea, Petre and two soldiers, eating together at a table, Maria and Ramus eating at their own table. Mihaela goes to the counter, she asks for a coffee and a croissant from the cashier who brings it to her in a minute. She takes her breakfast and goes to the table where two other doctors are eating together a few eggs and their tea.


    "Good morning, Mihaela!" says one of the doctors to Mihaela approaching them.


    "Good morning, Andrea." says Mihaela and sits on the free space. "How are you all?"


    "We''re good." says the male doctor from this table wearing a badge that displays his name, Mateo B. "We are all good."


    "How were the patients this night?" asks Andrea to Mihaela since she was the one who supervised the patients this night.


    "All are in stable conditions. All seven of them."


    "That''s good to hear." says Mateo to Mihaela.


    "It isn''t strange most of the zombies have evolved already?" asks Mihaela to his small group.


    "It''s really strange." says Mateo. "We all thought there will be only one type of virus into this world. But many variants have appeared. Class Normal, Class Deadly, Class F and Undeads. But we never saw the last kind."


    "You don''t believe it is true?" asks Andrea to Mateo. "That there are humans who can control zombie form."


    "I am not sure." says Mateo to Andrea. "A part of me says this thing is impossible, and other part believes things like this are still humans. But I am certain, if we find Undeads, we must capture them, preserve them and done the testing."


    "Why we should even test these things?" asks Andrea to Mateo.


    "You think we can make a vaccine from those?" asks Mihaela to Mateo.


    "Yes." says Mateo looking at Mihaela. "A vaccine. An antidote. This may be possible."


    The three continue their breakfast in silence. While they were eating, all were discussing about some small topics, like what books they have read from the improvised library from this community, and about the expanding of the community walls.


    On the table of the soldiers with two survivors, all of them, finishing their meal, raise up from their chairs and are going outside where they will be going onto their next mission. The next mission is to drive on the Vidraru Den to check its status and if it will collapse. And to go in there, the team will take a helicopter instead of their cars since the tunnels and the roads have collapsed a long time ago.

 Valley of Flood - Part 33

    ***


    Hours later, back in Oe?ti, in a house that is situated on a top of the hill, the house is lightened by indoor lights, and there is figure at the window, looking down on the garden of this house, where a zombie is having impaled his whole body into the spiky fence. That figure is dragging the curtain of the window to cover the window view.


    Inside the house, a man stands, donned in the attire of the notorious terrorists from Curtea de Arge?.There is another one, sitting in the couch and looking worried, just like the guy who closed the curtains.


    "What are we going to do now?" asks the guy sitting in the couch.


    "What do you mean what are we going to do?" asks the person who was looking on the window. "Following the plan."


    "Who is we?" asks that soldier rising up from the couch. "Are you abandoning me, you coward?"


    "Yes. I can no longer endure being a part of this any longer."That person is taking his gun from the pants pocket, and without any mercy, he kills the person from the same group as him. He aimed for the heart of the person. One bullet went through the body of this person, and hit the wall of the house. The victim clutches his chest in agony, his shocked gaze fixed upon his assailant. Before he can utter another word, the shooter swiftly fires six more shots into the victim''s head.After the killing, the man disposes of the handgun, tosses it onto the lifeless body, and exits the house before it becomes overrun with reanimated corpses.The person walks away from the house towards the car they previously used in a suicide attack on a soldier.Sitting on the car, he looks through the map that was laying on the backseat. He looks through the map for a few seconds until he found the location he was looking for. When he found it, the man throws the map back on the backseat, and drives from here down the hill to the streets that lead to Vidraru Lake.


    Unauthorized tale usage: if you spot this story on Amazon, report the violation.***


    Meanwhile, in Valea Ia?ului, on a house used as some sort of hospital, a woman is treating the wounds of Mihaela and Maria, Ramus''s cousin, after they were kidnapped and raped by these savages. Both of these poor souls couldn''t talk to the soldiers on their way here, nor with anyone about what happen, until the nurse managed to convince them to open up about the things that have happened in there.


    "The hardships we face in there." "We''re in for a terrible time," says Maria first. "They do not care we were humans. Treated us like mere sex objects, physical playthings, relentlessly beat us to satisfy their deepest and darkest desires, and were even attempting to harm us with the intention of controlling us for not permitting them to touch or violate us in any way."This groupˇ­" says Mihaela. "Tried to do blow up something."


    "What?" asks nurse to Mihaela. "What something?"


    "I have no idea. I only heard so little since they were talking in the next room on a low tone. It did not help that the door was metallic type."


    "I understand." says the nurse bandaging the two wounded females. "If you don''t feel like it, it would be better to not talk about this."


    Both of them agreed by shaking their heads in approval way.


    Later, when the two females were healed from the wounds, they were called by Petre to the tent to tell them about what they have heard or saw while they were kidnapped. The girls told them the same thing they have told the nurse earlier. And this information did not help them too much about this.

 Valley of Flood - Part 34

    ***


    In Curtea de Arge?, on a normal apartment, a door is kicked by Ron, and when it opened wide enough, a zombie raises from the bed and heads toward the one who opened the door. Ron, having his assault rifle, he shoots the thing head, and look at it how it falls on the dirty floor.


    "Seven." says Viktor in English to Ron.


    "Check this room." says Andra going inside in this apartment equipped with her knife.


    The three people are checking this apartment, located on the third floor. The ones below didn''t have anything of valuable for them. Not clothes, not ammunition, not melee weapons, not food, not even books. They all have nothing good.


    Ron goes to the room where it is supposed to be the bathroom, when he opened the door wide, he saw in that room a corpse of a dead zombie, laying on the bathtub, and having a bunch of mushrooms growing slim and decaying body.


    Thing that made Ron to quickly close the door, making the two teenagers stop their searching and look at Ron.


    "Mushrooms." says Ron in Romanian language.


    Viktor and Andra understood the signal Ron have given to them, and all of them are evacuating this apartment, and check the other apartment to see if they will find any useful supplies in there for their needs. But, like the ones below, this one was empty, and without anything useful for them to use in creating ingenious and creative close combat weapons.


    And this block, having one last floor, the team of three people are deciding to unison to check the last floor. The three are going upstairs, where they see on the stairs a head of a doll, an object that scared Viktor and Andra, who thought this was another zombie head.


    "That scared me a bit." says Ron seeing the doll, and he kicks it out of the way, falling to the ground floor, and landing on the three corpses on the lobby. "Let''s get going."


    The group continues their advancement to the fourth floor of this block, the last one of the first building they entered it.


    This floor wasn''t like any other, this floor had all of the apartment doors locked with planks and nails. From there growling, and fists beating in doors could be heard by the group of people. A thing that made all of them turn around and leave this floor, back to the third, where they all decided to get furniture pieces and drag them to the stairs leading to the fourth floor, where they can use this said objects as some sort of barricade against zombies.


    This barricade construction was an ingenious one because Ron had the bright idea to use the metal pipes from the floors as some sort of pikes for the zombies in case they will break the doors, but this may be improbable since their bodies must situate on the decay state after they were blocked in there for God knows how long.


    But a question is making the survivors keep wondering: "Who and why?".


    All wondering who was the craziest person to attract a huge number of zombies into this floor. And why he did that instead of letting them go outside.


    The three people are heading outside of this block, and they start walking toward another block, that is situated on where it is the Caf¨¦ that Viktor used to go in there every morning to get his three RON''s coffee with sugar and milk. They enter the backside of where was a metallic cage used as door. That said metallic cage has been taken down by Ron and Viktor who used a saw from their safe zone.


    Ron, Viktor and Andra are entering the building, and on the first room, they see in there a corpse of an elderly woman, who was eaten a long time ago by the zombies. The three survivors are entering the kitchen and in there they see two zombies who were standing still and looked at the windows outside. Viktor and with Ron are quickly jumping on the zombies, and stab their heads with their knives. The two things tried to bite the survivors who jumped on them, but they couldn''t do it because these survivors are wearing anti-bite zombie suits like everyone.


    This tale has been unlawfully lifted from Royal Road. If you spot it on Amazon, please report it.


    These anti-zombie suits aren''t the ones the people from The Organization are wearing. These present only protection on the torso, arms and legs. Their protection being metal bars sewed into clothes. While their body is protected, the head and the neck are on the risk of being attacked by a zombie or knocked unconscious.


    After the two zombies have been put down, the three survivors are searching the storages, the desk, the drawers, the fridges and under the tables. Their search was futile because this whole caf¨¦ had expired food that no longer could be eaten without the risk of food poisoning. It also presented a lot of plates, cups, and other kitchen appliances in there, untouched by four months, all having dust on them. Besides these there were also money, blood, guts from humans and blood stains that look really old.


    "Nothing here." says Ron in Romanian language to the two teenagers after they were scavenging this caf¨¦.


    "Let''s check the other room." says Viktor opening the door to the second room of this caf¨¦, room that was rarely used before the apocalypse.


    The moment Viktor opened the door and looked at the room, he notices on the walls a few stains by the colour black. Right when he was about to take a step inside, he has a look on the ceiling. The thing he saw there, will be the last thing he will see. There was a zombie, who the moment Viktor looked up the ceiling, he pushes from there and lands on Viktor, pinning him down and biting the neck of the teenager.


    The two survivors have quickly jumped on Viktor, where they killed the zombie by stabbing the head, and pushing away from Viktor body. Looking at the zombie closed mouth, we can see blood all around the lips, and pieces of skin from the neck of Viktor.


    Andra and Ron are looking horrified as they look at the neck of Viktor, who is barely breathing, and couching blood.


    "Viktor. Viktor."


    "Andraˇ­ I am sorry." says Viktor coughing the works, on a faint voice, about to die soon.


    "I''m so sorry. I am so sorry, Viktor!"


    "It wasn''t your fault." says Ron in a broken Romanian language, siting on his knees close to Andra. He then looks at Viktor wound, then at Andra.


    "No." she said to Ron, tears coming out of her eyes.


    "I am sorry."


    "No. No. No. No. There can be a way to save him!"


    "I-I-Itˇ­" tries to say Viktor. "It''s pointless." he looks at Ron, and sees him with the knife in his hands. "Pleaseˇ­ Do it."


    "I willˇ­" says Ron to Viktor.


    "A-Andraˇ­" he says with tears on his eyes, as blood comes out from the wound and from hi mouth. "I-Iˇ­ love youˇ­"


    "I love you too." says Andra crying and sobbing as she sees her lover before the apocalypse, closing the eyes and about to drop his last breath.


    When Viktor has dropped his last breath, Ron quickly stabbed the head of Viktor to cancel his transformation as a mutant eating human meat.


    Then, Ron gets up on his feet, walks closer to the body of the zombie who was on the ceiling on the other room, notices something strange at this zombie. He sees the zombie having a darkish blue skin on his fingers, and the rest of his body green to dark and white like most of the zombies seen outside. This one was much more different than any other zombies seen so far by Ron and Andra. His eyes weren''t there. He had no eyes, but his ears on his shaved head were bigger than Ron and Andra ever seen before.


    "What the fuck is this thing?" asks Andra looking at this thing, feeling angry because o the killing this creature has done to her boyfriend.


    "No idea." says Ron in Romanian. "We have to get out of here." he says to Andra.


    "But we cannot let Viktor like this." argues Andra.


    "We will not." says Ron to Andra. "We will come here later to take the bodies and burn them. Right now, we have to alert the others about our findings."


    Andra understood what Ron said in English, and with remorse, she left the body of Ron in the caf¨¦ and walks with Ron to the backside of this building, and walk back to their base to tell them what happened to Viktor and about the new variant they''ve found.


    After a few hours, the soldiers and many other volunteers have gathered all of the zombies from the buildings the two squad have checked. They gathered around two hundred or so corpses, put on a big pile on the car park, together with the body of Viktor since they do not want to risk infection and spreading of the virus. Andra has tried to convince them to try and burry Viktor, but she couldn''t try to convince them to do that. And she accepts that her lover from the apocalypse and who on this apocalypse has it will be burned in her front eyes.


    A lot of things have happened in these ten days for the two teenagers.


    Andra and the other people from the safe zone have looked at the piles of zombie bodies on the car park, burning like logs on a normal fireplace. The disgusting and bad odour of the bodies that were released in the air have made some people get out of there and walks back to their safe zone, made some of the soldiers nauseous. Even if the smell was bad, Andra still stand there, and looked with tears in her eyes at the body of Viktor, burning on that pile of zombies.


    While the bodies of the zombies found in the apartments and blocks were burning, three researchers are entering the building where that strange zombie from the caf¨¦ was. Now the zombie it is placed on the same caf¨¦, but stripped on a table in case the thing will come back since the stabbing wound on the thing was not deep enough.

 Valley of Flood - Part 35

    ***


    Earlier this day, while the group of soldiers and volunteers were checking the buildings, the squad from Valea Ia?ului have gone to Vidraru Den, to check its status if. Wondering if it can still stand after four months without any maintenance. The people on the helicopter, after they arrived in there, they saw something they never thought they would ever see.


    The Vidraru den, one of the most well-known construction from Arge?ˇ­ has been destroyed. A long time ago maybe when the water was on water low level.


    The soldiers from the helicopters are looking down with their sniper rifle and assault rifles scoops to check the roads of the dens who are still standing. Even without the scope, they can see countless corpses on the roads, laying in there, dead for God knows how long. On the roads there are some zombies on their feet, walking aimlessly and others looking at the helicopter on the sky who is attracting a lot of attention.


    "How many are there?" asks the co-pilot of the helicopter, who is Gancea.


    "About seventeen bodies, and eight zombies." says Petre.


    "Are ours?" asks the pilot, who is a soldier.


    "Only three." says a soldier to the pilot.


    "I see something guys." says a soldier who is having his assault rifle pointed at the metallic sculpture of the man holding a thunder.


    On that said sculpture, there is something, that is climbing the sculpture, without any rope nor climbing equipment. The soldiers, looking carefully with their rifles at that thing that is climbing the said sculpture, they see that thing is a zombie. This is not unusual for the soldiers and not for the two volunteers, Gancea and Daniel, who have seen a lot of Climber type zombies.


    If you discover this narrative on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen. Please report the violation.


    "Shoot it down." says Petre to a soldier.


    That soldier aims the rifle at that zombie, looks through the scope, and when he saw he has the head of the zombie, the soldier pulls the trigger. The bullet flies from the rifle and flies toward that zombie, flying on a fast speed to where the head is supposed to be. As the bullet was coming toward the zombie, the thing has stopped from climbing, and jumps from the building. This jump has made the people on the helicopter looking shocked at this.


    Not only the zombie has avoided a bullet in the head, but the dodge wasn''t enough because the zombie has fallen face down about dozens of meters on a rock, splashing his whole a body and destroyed like a vase who has fallen from the table, landed on the floor, and braking into thousands of pieces.


    "D-Did that thing just avoided a bullet?" asks the co-pilot to the soldiers.


    "I-I-I think yes." says the soldier who used the gun to try and kill the creature.


    "The virus has mutated once again." says the pilot. "I have seen my fair shares of zombies evolved. I have seen a lot of zombies. big, small, combined, climbers and even jumpers who tried to grab the helicopter, but they couldn''t."


    "I am sorry. Combined?" asks Petre interested.


    "You people didn''t meet the combined type. This is a wild one, fellas. They are having their bodies sewed together into three or five heads. The only three heads I''ve seen on a mission in Uganda. And I met a survivor from Zimbabwe who told me he witnessed a five head zombie, nine feet tall that killed three people from The Organization."


    "Jesusˇ­" says Petre thinking about the image of three members from the Organization being put down by a huge zombie with five heads. He finds it hard to believe something like this, but if this pilot says the truth, the zombies may be more dangerous than they all thought initially.


    The helicopter flew around the den for a while, then later, the soldiers decide to head back to their base, to alert the higher-ups about their findings. and told them they will all be safe since the biggest problem doesn''t exist anymore.


    As the helicopter departs from the fallen den, on the road there are zombies who are looking on the helicopter, moving their heads and feet slowly, and groaning. The alive zombies in there, are watching the helicopter as it departs, and when it did, the things continue to walk aimlessly.

 Valley of Flood - Part 36

    ***


    "It was my fault." says Andra looking at the fire place, all by herself because all of the survivors and soldiers have gone back to their safe zone.


    The teenager stayed there until the body of Victor, who was on the base of the zombie pile by the way, has been burned to ashes. Looked on the pile that is still burning for a while, and then she decides to head out of there, but as she was about to go, the girl hears a noise coming from a block.


    Andra gets her handgun and points on that location, holding the flashlight on the other hand like in the movies. The flashlight illuminates the thing, which it made the thing cover the eyes with his right hand, make a few steps back and growls. And Andra, pulls the trigger of the handgun, hitting the heart of the creature.


    After the creature got hit, the thing steps back a few more steps, then he looks pissed at Andra and runs to her with aggressivity. But Andra continues to shoot the zombie on the head zone. Killing it with three bullets.


    "What''s going on?" asks a soldier coming to Andra, worried.


    "A zombie, sir." says Andra to the soldier.


    "How it is possible?" asks the soldier to Andra. "We killed all of them and burned them all."


    "I don''t know."


    The two people are walking toward where Andra has shot the thing. but to their surprise, the thing that Andra has killed was not a zombie, it was a human. But the human she just shoots wears some of those jumpsuits the Liberators group would wear. But upon closer inspection, the body has some bitten marks on the face and hands, meaning if even is it wasn''t killed by Andra, it would be still transformed in a zombie.


    The author''s content has been appropriated; report any instances of this story on Amazon.


    But the thing that Andra will never realize is that this person, was the one who tried to demolish Vidraru den in hopes it will kill destroy the safe zone in Curtea de Arge? and the community in Valea Ia?ului. This was the leader of this Liberators gang who kidnapped Mihaela and other women almost two weeks ago.


    Andra and the one soldier, seeing the body, they do not have a choice, other than to carry the body to the burning pile who is still going on, and throw it in the fire like the others.


    "Soˇ­ Want to come inside?" asks the soldier.


    "ˇ­ I guess." says Andra going ahead.


    The soldier and Andra are heading back to the safe zone, not looking back on the pile of the zombies, who will burn until the morning.


    ***


    Two days later things have gone peaceful for the people in the community. After their discovery of the fallen Vidraru Den, they can all breathe a sigh of relief that nothing will danger their safety on this hellish world. But even if the Liberators and the den are gone, there is still that issue with zombie.


    This zombie issue becomes harder and harder to survive after the remaining population of the humans in the world realized these monsters could mutate.


    In the community of Valea Ia?ului, inside of a house, a man, wearing usual clothes with the logo of "The Organization", sits on a desk. The man in that house checks his laptop. An unusual thing to do in this apocalypse, but the man does this because he is the only one in this entire county who controls camera drones.


    On the display of the laptop, the image shows the remains of a village called Radureni, who has been overtaken by zombies weeks ago. The village was partially burned, destroyed and infested with zombies and dead corpses. This is something normal that this person has seen every single day, nothing to unusual. But, when he looked with the drone on the East side of the village, on the forest, he saw something horrifying.


    A zombie horde is approaching the village, horde that measures more than a kilometre wide and long, probably more than tens of thousands of zombies. A horde like this will destroy the entire safe zone of Curtea de Arge?. And maybe the one in Valea Ia?ului if they can pass the city.


    The person looks horrify on the laptop. In a hurry, the person runs to the higher ups and show them the dangers that is coming to their direction.


    And that said danger, will be a difficult one to overcome for this community.

 Valley of Flood - Part 37

    Later this day, a helicopter was sent to check the herd in Rudareni. The helicopter sent was with our soldiers, who two were piloting the helicopter, and other two are using the miniguns installed on the helicopter to kill the upcoming herd. Their mission is to divert them into another direction, or eliminate them. Killing all of the zombies in that herd will require an enormous number of bullets from a minigun and more personnel.


    The four soldiers sent to attack the herd were enough for this part of the mission, while other groups of soldiers and volunteers were sent to the city to escort the survivors from safe zone in The Organization community. They will only take the survivors from the city, and let the zombies roam in this city who has was almost liberated thirty percentages two weeks ago from zombies.


    The helicopter is at three hundred meters altitude, enough distance for the gunner to fire their weapons into the herd. The moment the helicopter arrived close to that herd, the gunners have started to fire their minigun. The two soldiers have made about dozens of kills in ten seconds.


    After a minute, there were around a hundred or so zombies killed from that herd. The zombies were killed for good since most of the bullets were penetrable enough to destroy the heads, limbs and bodies of zombies. Some of the zombies killed in the herd, were later eaten by the Undeads from there. Undeads that were still on the initial state, but now they''ve become full zombies mutant.


    "They are starting to come at us." says the co-pilot looking down, seeing some zombies from the front changing their direction of walking to where the helicopter is.


    "Great." says the pilot of the helicopter, starting to fly the helicopter to another direction. "We can lead them outside of the county. Keep on firing."


    "Yes, sir!" says the soldiers on the miniguns and continue their job of killing the lifeless corpses that continue to move.


    As the horde of zombies starts to move to where the helicopter is flying, another part of the zombies is walking on a different direction. Zombies that are in a number of forty lifeless moving corpses. Corpses who eyes are sealed or missing. And with ears ripped apart. Those forty zombies are walking toward the blood smell.


    The helicopter is dealing with the horde of zombies walking after them, not realizing the other forty zombies are heading in another direction. But this will not matter since these are only forty zombies in number, and not tens of thousands that are getting killed each second by the helicopter.


    Taken from Royal Road, this narrative should be reported if found on Amazon.


    After two minutes of intense fighting, something bizarre happens.


    "Guys!" says the soldier from the chopper on the machine gun.


    He points with his finger, on the horde, a zombie from Class F, who is looking at them angrily, and roars in the sky. The soldiers immediately aimed at the thing and shoot hundreds of bullets to the thing, which it kills it instantly.


    "That was close." says the soldier from the other side of the helicopter.


    But then, before they could breathe a sigh of relief, a zombie is thrown out of nowhere to the helicopter, hitting the metallic blades and getting slashed into dozens of pieces. This single throw, has caused a bit of turbulence and made the people in the helicopter scared. The gunner almost lost their balance from their stationary guns, close to fall on the death below them.


    "What the fuck was that?" asks the co-pilot.


    "Class F!" says a soldier from the other side of the helicopter.


    But before he could say anything, another zombie is tossed to the helicopter, this one however, manages to get inside the helicopter, who had both side doors opened. That zombie has hit the gunner minigun and hold it tight with his frail arms. The soldier, seeing the thing is on the barrel of minigun, he proceeds to roll the gun, which manages to fly the thing from the gun and fall hundreds off meters to the horde. Upon impact to the ground, the zombie has landed on another zombie, which has broken his skeleton and made him into a crawler type zombie.


    "These zombies are flying!"


    "No! They are tossed by a Class F."


    The gunners spot a few class F into this horde. And they immediately start to focus their aim on them, rather of the other zombies. Soon, the gunners have killed around six class F zombies, who were the biggest threat to them at this moment. But before they breathe a sigh of relief, they got hit again.


    This time it wasn''t a zombie like last time. It was boulder, who filed into the opened doors of the helicopter (on the right side), hit both of the gunmen, and send both of them out of the helicopter (on the left side), together with the now wrecked miniguns, where they''ll fall in the hands of the horde.


    "What the fuck?!" yelled the pilot of the helicopter after the turbulence.


    "We have to get out of here!" yells the co-pilot to the pilot, who is scared as the pilot after he saw on his visor how two beloved colleagues of his, got killed so easily.


    But before the helicopter could try to turn around, it got hit by another boulder, who this time hit the engine of the helicopter, and made the aircraft lose control and fall onto the horde of the zombies.


    The moment helicopter has crashed into the earth, it instantly explodes, killing the pilot, co-pilot and a huge amount of zombies. The explosion was big enough to cause a fire, who burned several of the zombies from the horde, but made some hundreds of lifeless corpses back away from the explosion and go to the direction where the other forty zombies have gone.


    And from the horde who is following those forty zombies, there are right remaining Class F zombies, who are all drooling and screeching like other creatures. Those zombies are ignoring the crying and screaming for help from the two soldiers, who are devoured by the dozens of zombies.

 Valley of Flood - Part 38

    ***


    Meanwhile, on the community, on a military tent, on a nearby desk, six people have gathered and observed the fight of the helicopter against the horde. They''ve seen how immense, powerful a tricky this horde is. They all saw the fight thanks to the drone, who still stayed there after this morning, to record this fighting for the people to see.


    From the group of people who have seen the footage, there are two higher ups, one General and one person dressed in a suit, having a logo with the name of "The Organization" on the back of the suit, three soldiers and Petre. All looking horrified for a few moments on the helicopter crashing site, then the guy on the laptop closes the footage and turns around to the other group of people. They stood there, silently for a whole minute, then Petre says.


    "What are we going to do now?"


    "We evacuate the city." says the General, who is one of the two higher ups in here.


    "We leave this land!" says one of the higher ups from The Organization in English language. "It is too dangerous to remain here!"


    "We don''t leave the community!" says the General to the member of The Organization. "We remain here, Mr. Eighteen."


    "We have no choice." says the man named Mr. Eighteen as an alias. "We either lose people fighting for this community, or we save the useful ones, and let the others or find a way to get to another safe community."


    The General frown when Mr. Eighteen said to take only the useful one people. For this man, the people he considers useful are the ones who are in perfect health, fighters ready to go on the attack, doctors and people with training, not people who are not able to defend themselves, or those in great needs.


    "We cannot do that, sir." says a soldier to Mr. Eighteen.


    Then a looked at the soldier, then he says to him.


    "If you know what is good to you, you should follow the orders, common soldier."


    Mr. Eighteen looks at the General of this community and army, and orders him the following.


    "Take with your twenty of your men, and all of your doctors. How many will be that?"


    "One hundred and six." says the General after he calculate the number of doctors and soldiers in his mind.


    "And how many common people you have in this community and safe zone combined?"


    "In the community are one hundred thirteen six." says Petre to Mr. Eighteen. "And eighty-six in the safe zone."


    "Hmˇ­ We will take the soldiers and the doctors." says the General after some thought, then he looks at Petre. "You. You will take a group and head to the nearby community in the map."


    "You mean to Snake Island?!" asks Petre feeling mad.


    "Correct." says Mr. Eighteen. "You will go with the men you choose there. Where will be trying our hardest to provide a home for all of you."


    "B-B-But. Sir!"


    "Of course." says Mr. Eighteen looking at Petre, feeling bored by this discussion. "We will give you weapons for the road."


    "That is not what matters!" argues Petre to Mr. Eighteen.


    "How so?"


    "How so?!" asks Petre feeling sick by the behaviour of the said "leader". "We have children who are sick, pregnant women, newborn babies, injured people and people with critical health condition. You don''t expect them will all arrive at Snake Island by themselves."


    "That is the reason." says Mr. Eighteen to Petre. "Our mission is to strengthen our resources and use them to liberate the humankind from this virus."


    This book''s true home is on another platform. Check it out there for the real experience.


    Petre wanted to argue more, but General stopped Petre, and he told the General they will do this plan. He agreed to let the soldiers and doctors come with Mr. Eighteen to snake island in aeroplane and helicopters, while Petre and the other two hundred more survivors will have to go by foot to Snake Island.


    This thing not only infuriated Petre, but it also made the General feel mad at the Mr. Eighteen, who is one of the one hundred sixty leaders of "The Organization", that represents every country in the world that once was more peaceful than it is now. But these two, will not go after him, they will try their luck to defend their community from the upcoming attack of the horde.


    ***


    Minutes later, on the safe zone, Andra is in a classroom, at the floor 1. Classroom that was her bedroom, who shared with V¨Şctor and other survivors, who unfortunately have been killed a long time ago in scavenging and eliminating zombies missions. As Andra stayed on that room, she is making her backpack, for her leave where she will be escorted to the community walls.


    Earlier, the safe zone was announced by the upcoming horde that will hit the city. All of them being ordered to leave the safe zone, go to the community with the available vehicles.


    But there is a problem with the safe zone transportation system, there''s only enough vehicle for eighty people, while the other ten are either going to wait for another transportation or get to the community by themselves.


    Unfortunately, from those ten people who remained back, there was Andra, Ron, six male survivors and two female survivors. All of these have been ordered by the chief to get to the community by themselves, making these ten people outrage. But the chief was kind enough to hand every survivor a handgun, with only seven bullets each. At least the chief was kind enough to leave some defensive gear in their hands.


    The group of ten people stayed n the safe zone, wondering what to do, and what would their plan be. But then, Ron has an idea.


    "How about we try to stop the horde?"


    "And how will you do that, negro?" asks a racist survivor feeling angry.


    "How about you shut up," says Ron. "And listen. Nowˇ­ Zombies are attracted to noise, right?"


    "Right, right, right." says most of the survivors from the ten group of people.


    "And most of the zombies won''t survive if they go through the flames."


    "So, you want to burn down the whole city?!" asks the racist survivor to Ron.


    "No, no. We''ll redirect the zombies in a nearby village, far from the city, and we will be burning the village they will enter it."


    "That is a stupid idea." says a female survivor.


    "Yeah." says a man. "I''m sorry, Ron. But that will never work."


    "How about we leave the city?" asks a man survivor. "And we come back when the city will be feeling safer."


    "And how will you know it will be safe?" asks Andra. "Look. I get it. Zombies are coming and we are all scared. But, we have to do what we need to do to survive."


    "And what we will do?" asks Ron to Andra.


    "We evacuate the city, and head by ourselves to Snake Island." she proposes Andra who earlier overheard the radio station conversation from Mr. Eighteen to the chief of the safe zone. "I get it. It is very far from county, and the road is infested with zombies, but how about we will navigate there, by taking the Danube."


    "I see." says Ron. "Zombies cannot swim. Which means we can sail safe to Snake Island."


    "But where is the nearby dock for this?" asks a second female survivor.


    "I know where is it." says the survivor who called Ron a negro. "Near the border of Romania to Bulgaria. That is the safest bet we have. We may be lucky to find a boat in there. Hopefully."


    "You are going?" asks a female survivor looking at that person.


    "I don''t know." says the person. "I may be going. If you go."


    "Andra?" asks Ron looking at Andra.


    "Going to a dock and sail to Snake island?" asks Andra in English language. "Hell yeah."


    "Others?" asks Ron to the rest of survivors.


    After a while of talking and deciding what to do, only four people have decided to take supplies and go to Snake island. Those being Ron, Andra, Alex (the one who called Ron a negro) and Raul (an old man from the group of survivors). The four survivors are taking each their handguns, knives and anti-biting gear, left behind by the soldiers and The Organization members who were deteriorating.


    The four survivors are taking the gear on them, and head out from the King Michael I High School to the boulevard. Walking to the boulevard, the four survivors decide to walk toward the nearest police station to check if there is anything useful to them in there since they never tried to inspect that place.


    Later, when a military truck arrived at the High school, that said military truck saw there are only six people waiting in there for them. Truck stops at the entrance of the High school, where five military personnel are getting out of their truck, with their assault rifles in their hands and aim at the survivors.


    A survivor raises his arms up, and yells to the soldiers.


    "What are you doing?!"


    "What it needs to be done." says a person from the military squad, who shoots that said person in the head.


    Other survivors are getting shot by the other soldiers, in the heads and on their bodies. After the massacre, the soldiers are going back to their military truck, and drive off from this high school. Leaving the bodies of the survivors there to be eaten by the zombies that will come into the city.


    "What are doing with the rest, sir?" asks the passenger near the driver.


    "Rest?" asks the driver.


    "The other four. There were ten people left in there."


    "Leave them be." says the driver taking a turn to the road leading to Valea Iasului community. "If they want to die out here. Leave them be."

 Valley of Flood - Part 39

    ***


    In the community, the aeroplane and a few helicopters are leaving the community, leaving behind dozens of survivors. The survivors did not take it to well their doctors and fighters were taken to Snake Island, while the others were left behind to fight the upcoming horde by themselves with almost nothing.


    Doctors and nurses, like Mihaela were taken, while Daniel, Gancea, Ramus and Maria stayed behind with the survivors. And what about Petre? He tried to still convenience Mr. Eighteen to let more survivors and children comes with them, but Mr. Eighteen, not likening that Petre wanted to do good for everyone, he knocks Petre out and ordered his people to chain the soldier in the woods on a tree and leave him in there.


    The survivors were given weapons to protect themselves, only knives and three 9mm bullets each. No gun. No protective gear against the bites and with no food to help them survive later.


    Some of these survivors have tried to attack the soldiers and The Organization personnel, but they were quickly shut down after a soldier killed without any mercy a survivor. That survivor killed was the father of the daughter from Oesti. Then, the woman and the child were killed after they were crying for their dead father by the soldiers.


    "Now, listen!" says Mr. Eighteen to the dozens of survivors in there, all looking shocked that these people have murdered a family of three. "You are all on your own! The upcoming horde will come here and it will take all of you from here. All you need to do is evacuate this place and get to one of the nearest islands on the Mediterranean Sea or to Black Sea Snake island. By yourself!"


    Many survivors argued that this is not a great idea or plan, but the soldiers and The Organization members left the survivors there, yelling and pleading for help.


    Some tried to get on the helicopter, but were quickly killed when they take one step in there by the soldiers who weren''t afraid to kill their friends from this community. And others, like Gancea, Daniel, Ramus and Maria, have decided to run from the community, into the woods nearby their home, to avoid the upcoming horde.


    You might be reading a stolen copy. Visit Royal Road for the authentic version.


    Running through the dense forest, that was at almost one kilometre away from the community walls, the group of four survivors noticed there is someone tied to the trees. They all checked who is that person, and to their surprise, there is Petre, who was wounded very bad by the soldiers and Mr. Eighteen on the face. Three bruises on the left side of the face, and one bloody nose, wrecked.


    "What they''ve done to you?" asks Gancea while he and Daniel are cutting the ropes that tie Petre to the tree.


    "T-Theyˇ­ Leave usˇ­" tries Petre to say.


    "Easy, easy, man." says Gancea catching Petre and walking with him a few meters in the forest.


    The four survivors are carrying the soldier to a nearby bear cave, where they are all sitting in there. Daniel and Gancea are treating the wounds of Petre, as Mihaela explained to them at a breakfast, a few days ago, how they treat wounded soldiers from a zombie fight who sustain bruises.


    But, not having any medical equipment, it will make it hard for them. Luckily, Maria had some painkillers, which she was given by Mihaela, when she was still injured from the kidnapping. They administrate some of these painkillers to Petre, who is starting to feel a little better than previously was.


    "T-Thank you." says Petre to Maria, he looks around and asks. "W-What happened?"


    "We found you tied to a tree, and we carried you here." says Gancea to Petre.


    "Tree?... Ah. They beat me."


    "Who beat you?" asks Ramus to Petre.


    "Mr. Eighteenˇ­ general."


    "Them?" asks Gancea surprised. "B-B-But why?"


    "Theyˇ­ They want to leave the weakˇ­ fend to themselves. While the strong onesˇ­ Are coming with them..."


    "These animals." says Ramus feeling angry.


    "What are we doing now?" asks Daniel to everyone.


    "We stay here." says Gancea to everyone. "We wait until Petre heals, and then we''ll see what we can do."


    "But what about the horde?" asks Ramus. "What if they will come here? We cannot protect ourselves with only knives and bullets."


    "We''ll fight." says Petre coughing. "We''ll stay here. And fight them. With our strength left."


    The survivors, seeing they have no other choice, they all come to an agreement to stay in this cave, and wait for the wounds of Petre to heal. They remain in that cave until the horde of zombies will be approaching, and when it will do, they will leave and run to safety.


    But a good thing for them is that the zombie horde will come into the woods, they will be focussing on the community when they will come.

 Valley of Flood - Part 40

    ***


    A while later, when the helicopters and soldiers have left, the remaining ninety or so survivors have been left behind, to defend themselves from these deadly creatures called zombies who are approaching the community walls in a few hours.


    Most of the remaining survivors have decided top remain behind and protect their home with everything they have, while others, have taken their stuffs and left the community behind, walking in the woods, on the streets and down the river, to a safe location from the horde.


    Only sixty survivors have remained in the community, those sixty being mostly people that suffers from disabilities, wounded and old frail humans who would be taken down even by a breeze. From the sixty left, not many had any faith they will live, but it would be better to fight than run.


    ***


    A while later, the group of five survivors hidden in the cave, were soon awaken by a survivor from the community, who is with other six people. He is looking at the survivors hidden in the cave, then asks them.


    "Who''s your leader?"


    "Leader?" asks Daniel looking around. "We don''t have one, George."


    Daniel knows that man who is in front of their cave, having a group of people after him, four females and two males. And he knows all of the people he is following. People who would share their breakfast and lunch on the cafeteria and meeting on his daily walk on the streets of the community.


    "What happened?" asks George looking at an injured Petre, who is feeling better than before.


    "He was beaten by the soldiers." says Ramus to the people outside the cave.


    "I see." says George. "What are we going to do?"


    "We?" asks Ramus. "You guys want to go somewhere else?"


    "Somewhere far from the horde directionˇ­ I know a place. We stay there for a few days, then we will come back to community."


    "Sounds like a plan." says Petre after a few minutes of silence, he woke up from his sleep, and raise up, feeling better. He looks at George. "Where are we going?"


    "Bratesti." says George to the survivors in the cave.


    "That will be a long ride." says Petre who remembers they had a mission in Bratesti weeks ago. "But if we will be safe from this horde. We''ll take it."


    The group from the interior of the cave did not discuss more about this. They all agreed to do this, rather than staying here and waiting to be eaten by the zombies or die of starvation.


    The group of survivors, who are now eleven people, are getting out from the cave, and starts walking a few more kilometres to another village that is not well known by the people from the community, Bratesti.


    ***


    Minutes of walking have passed for the group of eleven survivors. They managed to get out of the forest zone, and now are walking up the hills that are leading to Bladeni village. They could not take the roads since these were all infested with wrecked vehicles, and corpses that are moving around with no sense of their surroundings. Corpses that can be a danger for the group of eleven people with low ammo and weapons.


    The leader of the group is Daniel, who is familiar with this zone because he is the one who has worked on a map for the community who has been left back in the community. But thankfully, Daniel has memorized the map he made for two weeks straight.


    Their walking to the high point of the hill is taking them minutes. It was a big challenge for Petre, who couldn''t move so much because of the wounds. The painkillers are starting to wear their effects on Petre with every step he takes.


    "Here we are here." says Daniel to the people who have come after them.


    "So, what?" asks Ramus to Daniel.


    "We are going there." says Daniel pointing on a village, who is barely visible from the hill, an abandoned village who has been left since the beginning of the apocalypse. "We may be safe if we are staying hidden in there for long enough until the horde will disappear."


    If you discover this tale on Amazon, be aware that it has been unlawfully taken from Royal Road. Please report it.


    "Good idea." says Maria.


    "Look." says Gancea looking back, and from the top of the hill, he sees the horde who is walking toward the community walls.


    The horde is located far from the group of eleven people. All are looking at the size of the horde, feeling scared and anxious as they are looking at the horde, who is advancing on a slow march. A horde like this one can be stopped by rockets, but it will not be stopped by a few mere survivors with little fighting experience like the ones who remained in the community. All the things survivors from the hill could do at this very moment is to seek refugee and protect themselves from the attacks of the dead corpses.


    Six of the survivors decide to turn around, walk downhill and ignore the horde situation. Most of them are feeling terrible of leaving their people behind, to fight that massive horde advancing toward the community. As the group is walking down the road, they spot one zombie who is walking to them, on a slow walk.


    "I got this one." says George to the survivors, he takes from his sheath a hunting knife he carries with him since he left the community.


    As he is walking toward the zombie, he notices the thing has a knife in his left hand. This made George feel a little worried at first. He stops from his walking. The zombie continues to advance to George, holding the knife in his left hand.


    "What is it?" asks Gancea to George feeling worried.


    "That zombie has a knife." says George.


    "So. Take him." says Ramus.


    George looks at the zombie. He takes deep breaths, let it out and continues to advance close to the zombie. He holds the hunting knife strong. And he is about to stab the creature''s head. But as the knife of George was about to contact the zombie''s head, the zombie manages to stab the lower body, near the appendices zone. But the knife of George has stabbed the head of the zombie, but the stabbing was not deep enough to kill the creature.


    George backs away from the wound, screaming of the pain and trips on his back. And the zombie is walking toward George. Right before when he was about to catch the leg of George, the zombie is getting stabbed again in the head, by Ramus who came fast to aid George. The stabbing zone, now is deep enough to kill the creature.


    "This zombie is a smart type." says Petre shocked.


    George continues to scream, the other survivors are quickly going to him, to see if they could help to his aid. But, seeing the knife is having zombie blood on the dip, it will be pointless to save him now. Seeing that George proceed to lose consciousness, and calls for help.


    The survivors know this will be impossible for George to live.


    Ramus decides to get the knife from the zombie head, after he took the knife, he is looking at George, who continue to cough blood as he is saying in a low tone pitch voice "Help.". The survivors are looking at Ramus, who all agree silently to let him do this. Give mercy to one of the survivors they knew very well for almost a month.


    "I am sorry, George." says Ramus to George, who is fading consciousness.


    Ramus stabs the head of George, on the brain zone where the transformation will not happen to his soulless body. After he killed George, the survivors are continuing their walking to the village.


    "What do you mean that was a smart type?" asks Gancea to Petre, who is next to him.


    "Is a new zombie variant my people found." says Petre to Gancea and to the five people who are listening from the group of now ten people. "One of our soldiers told us these kinds of zombies are carrying tools with them. Tools like that knives, rocks, scissors. One reported that he saw one carrying a handgun. But he couldn''t use it, which was a good thing. But he did try to smash the said thing into a soldier face who has tried to approach it, but failed it since that said soldier wore an anti-bite helmet with visor."


    "These things may be in the horde." says Daniel to Petre.


    "Possible chances." says Petre. "All I know is that most of the cases were reported when zombies with this variant were all alone."


    The group of then people are crossing the road. Head toward the nearby car, that is off the street. They are searching the interior of the car. First thing they see in the car it is a walkie-talkie on the front passenger seat. Petre takes the station, turn it on, calibres a little, then he says on the walkie-talkie.


    "Can anyone hear me, over."


    Then, in a matter of seconds, a voice is heard on the walkie radio.


    "Petre?" asks a familiar voice, a female voice.


    "Mihaela?" asks Petre on the walkie-talkie. "How are you?"


    "We are on the plane. The plane is full of doctors and soldiers. Where are you? Over."


    "I was left behind." says Petre. "Like the rest of us. Over."


    "Rest of us?" asks Mihaela.


    "They did not tell you? They left the people back in the community. Fend to themselves."


    "No. They did not tell us any of that." says Mihaela sounding shocked. "They really left you behind?!"


    "They also beat me and tied me in the woods to be zombie meal."


    "How cruelˇ­ Look. I am sorry."


    "Not your fault." says Petre on the walkie-talkie. "You weren''t any part of this scheme. You have been taken by this plane with a false leavening."


    "What can I do, Petre?" asks Mihaela sounding worried. "What can I do to help you?"


    "Where are you right now?"


    "I am in the plane, in the bathroom. Found tis walkie-talkie in there and received your contact."


    "Aha. Great. Listen. Keep that walkie-talkie hidden. Okay? You keep it hidden." he looks around, he notices how the sunlight is slowly disappearing, meaning the night is about to appear. "We will talk later, alright."


    "ˇ­Alright." says Mihaela. "Over."


    "Over." says Petre.


    The soldier turns off the walkie-talkie. he looks at the other nine survivors, who have checked the car for any goods in there. Unlucky for them, they did not find anything useful to them, only useless photos, papers and phones didn''t run for four months.


    "Let''s get in the house." says a survivor with black hair and glasses, pointing on a nearby house, up on the hill. "The cold has struck us."


    The survivors are walking toward the house, that is located at around hundreds of feet from them. All are getting in this house, and when they''ve entered it, they are closing the door and rest in there for a while. House that wasn''t inhabited by anyone since the begging in of the apocalypse.

 Valley of Flood - Part 41

    ***


    One hour later, in that house, the squad of ten people, have gathered all of the furniture they could''ve found in this four rooms house, dragged them into the living room. When they dragged the furniture they could seat, they align them in some sort of circle for them to sit and rest for the upcoming night. While four people are focussing on the arranging furniture, two people are exploring the other houses nearby this one. And Ramus with Maria are trying to make fire in this house, who is having a tile stove in the living room like many other houses like this one who couldn''t afford to pay for gas and had a lot of firewood at their disposal.


    Minutes passes, the fire has been made in the tile stove, which was a good sign. Soon, the entire room will gain heat.


    A few more minutes later, the people who were send to check the other houses, and came with some good supplies to them. The survivors have handed to the other ones a backpack with food supplies and an aid kit, which contains a lot of useful medical items to help the wounds of Petre. But Petre refused to do it, stating that his wounds are not that bad and this medical kit should be preserved for the future.


    They all gathered around that stove tile, to feel the heat and try to rest. Gancea, seeing that everybody has gone silent, he decides to break the silence.


    "We probably don''t know each other. All of us. How about we present each other?"


    Nobody started to talk. They all look at Gancea, who found this change of his, weird.


    "Alright." says Gancea. "I will start first. I am Gancea."


    "Petre." says the injured soldier, on his military clothes.


    "Daniel." says the mapmaker, who has gained a bit of weight recently, due to the community meals, wearing thick jacket by the colour of black.


    "Maria." says the woman with dark hair and wearing a thick jacket by the colour of yellow.


    "Ramus." says the only looking muscular man from this group, wearing only a vest with a thick blouse.


    "Theodor." says a survivor, in his 20s, wearing some thick clothing to protect himself from the cold environment they''ve all been exposed.


    "Ioan." says another male survivor, wearing a thick jacket, military camo, with a hoodie and a skull mask.


    "Elisa." says the second female of the group, being the only one who is wearing a thin jacket and a pair of glasses to help with her vision.


    "Lucian." says another male survivor, thick jacket by the colour green, with a helmet on his head, and a mask to cover his face. Is eating from a can of soup, who was in that backpack, then after he took three bites he passes to another survivor, possibly his friend.


    The tale has been stolen; if detected on Amazon, report the violation.


    "Vasil." says the last survivor, next to Lucian, wears a thick jacket, opened to reveal a thick blouse with a deer head, is looking like an old man, with white beard and glasses on his face.


    "Good." says Gancea sounding happy. "Now that we meet each otherˇ­ What is the plan?"


    "Plan?" asks Ramus to Gancea. "What plan? We go back to the base and retake what will be left from there. Simple."


    "That would be sweet." says Ioan looking at Ramus. "But here is the thing. Do you think the military will come back to retake what they''ve abandoned?"


    "And they will help us." says Ramus.


    "They will not come back." says Petre. "I''ve been with those for so long. When a community is overrun, or destroyed, all we have to do is move from there, and start a new one somewhereˇ­ I''ve been in like three communities. All around Romania countyˇ­ Well, what it is nowˇ­ All three. Abandoned after they were over run, and created new ones in other regions. This one was the oldest. One month."


    "Shit." says Theodor. "That shortˇ­"


    "For you, it may be short." responds Petre to Theodor remark. "But we all thought this is it. Finally. The moment of peace we''ve been waiting. Now it is gone."


    "Why would they kick you out?" asks Lucian, who was feeling curious about this. He wasn''t paying attention when the survivors talked about this earlier on their walking. "I mean. They should at last take you. After everything you''ve done for the entire community and everything, right?


    "This Organizationˇ­ Wanted to be the best for the best people. Back in the beginning, they would help everyone in need. Nowˇ­ They all wanted to help those who can fight back the apocalypseˇ­ More are not able to defend themselves. Just like the survivors who are still in that communityˇ­ I feel ashamed for leaving them behind."


    "But there is nothing we can do." says Daniel, and look at everybody. "Listen. I have an idea."


    "What''s yours?" asks Lucian to Daniel.


    "If the community will not take us, all we can do is find a habituated island, and live in there, right?" he looks at the faces of all nine people in there, who are all wondering if this would be their only good decision they''ve had at their disposal.


    "And what island you are referring to?" asks Vasil. "There are thousands of islands all around the globe."


    "Petre." says Daniel to Petre. "You''ve said the virus hasn''t reached America yet."


    "From our sources, it did not." says Petre to Daniel. "You think we can make it in there?"


    "No. Risk it is to big. I was thinking to inhabit one of the islands in the Atlantic Ocean."


    Everyone was looking at Daniel. Wondering if this man is right on his head who has proposed such an unimaginable plan to them.


    "Are you alright in your head?" asks Gancea, who has become a good friend to Daniel in the following days.


    "I am just saying." says Daniel. "If we do not find any available islands to our closure, our only choice would be to either risk by going on the inhabitant islands far from civilization. Or we can try and remain in the forest. Survive as long as we can."


    "We will stay here." says Petre. "Then we investigate the community. If we can fight back the zombies in there, we can rebuild it. We''ve worked too hard to leave this piece of heaven behind."


    "But what if there will be survivors in there?" asks Lucian to Petre.


    "Then we''ll have to come to a negotiation with them." says Petre.


    "I see." says Daniel.


    In a second, an explosion is heard from outside. The explosion sounds to be coming from far away. Theodor got up from the chair, he walked to the window, looked through it and saw nothing, only the dark of this cold night.


    But all of them knew the explosion has come from the community.

 Valley of Flood - Part 42

    ***


    Days later, the ten survivors, have gone back to their community to see how are the things in there, how damaged has this community become after the horde attack. When they got closer to the walls of the community, front walls, they see hundreds of corpses laying on the road, most of them killed or eaten by the zombies. A few of these corpses were recognized by the group of ten people.


    "Lydia." says Maria looking with tears in her eyes, at the mauled corpse of one of the girls who were kidnapped by the group of Liberators.


    "Elena." says Vasil looking at an old lady body, who her entire torso is eaten, bones of her torso going through the skin.


    The survivors enter the community, they see a bunch of zombie corpses on the roads, all of them have been killed or eaten by the zombies. And the buildings of this community, were in disaster. Some of them have collapsed, burnt to the ground or partially, abandoned and filled with corpses of decayed zombies.


    The entire group are walking to the abandoned tents, who were all used by military and The Organization to do their things. All of the tents were emptied by the military equipment such as radios stations, laptops, monitors, keyboards, and even walkie-talkies. Even with these stuffs gone, the squad of ten people can still make this community work.


    Cafeteria was like the other places the group have checked so far, countless zombies corpses, and a lot of stenches from decayed bodies on the airs. But they noticed the kitchen room, had all of the fridges filled with fresh food such as vegetables, fruits, milk, who has now aged like any natural dairy product, meat that is still consumable and many more foods like candies. They also found a lot of water, beverages and kitchen equipment in the shelves, all looking to be in a good state. Even if it has passed like four days since the invasion.


    Continuing their exploring, the group of ten people, have found an only survivor of this whole invasion. Who has locked himself in the room? Petre has convinced the man to open the door, but the man did not want it, stating that it will be better to be left alone in there since he was bitten.


    "How long have you been bitten?" asks Petre sounding shocked.


    The story has been stolen; if detected on Amazon, report the violation.


    "Like three days agoˇ­" says the person in a male voice locked in a house bedroom.


    "Oh my god." says Petre sounding worried. "How is your skin?"


    "A little blue with green, I think." says the person.


    "Y-You are an undead."


    "A what?" asks the person.


    "An undead." says Petre sounding happy. "Y-You can control zombies."


    "I can what?!" asks the survivor sounding astonished. "H-How do you know?"


    "Listen. This may sound weird, but I once meet a girl who has become an undead. She was stationed on one of the habituated islands from Greece. now, all I know, is a member of a soldier''s squad, who is stationed on a safe zone in Bilbao, Spain, from all I can remember. But I heard rumours, on how she can control zombies and infiltrate into their hordes."


    "Really?" asks the person in there, sounding more relived than before. "Y-You sure?"


    "Can you open the door?" asks Petre.


    The door is opened by the person who has been locked in there. The man is a half-naked one, his skin looking to be in a green-blue colour, veins being shown on the hands and on the bodies. This said person is having a missing eye, wearing an eyepatch on the missing eye. A zombie bite in the left low body zone and another bite mark, on the right arm, near the wrist.


    "Adrian?" asks Petre surprised. "Y-You weren''t taken by them?"


    "Petre?" asks Adrian surprised as well. "They told all of us you have been missing."


    "So, you have stayed in here to protect the people?"


    "Weˇ­ We were many soldiers in here." says Adrian sounding sad. "But manyˇ­ Have been killed. Many poor bastards have been eaten by these deadly creatures. Some have been running away from the community, while others have tried their best to escort the best ones out to safety. Only I have remained in here. Locked myself in here, waiting for the transformation to take effect."


    "But now you are immune." says Theodor.


    "He is." says Petre. "As long as he doesn''t eat any zombie brains or meat to become fully zombie."


    A pause follows, then Petre adds to make some context for the group of the survivors.


    "I know this from the researchers who have investigated this said undead."


    "Now what are we doing?" asks Petre to the group.


    "We''ll clean the place." says Petre to the group of people.


    "And we will move back in here." says Gancea.


    "Only this time. We will be on our own." says Petre. "First. We take the bodies off from here. Put them outside and burn all of them. Then, we are restructuring the walls to make them safer, and from there. we see what can we do."


    "What about The Organization?" asks Adrian.


    "We''ll ignore their help." says Petre to Adrian. "We are on our own."


    And on this day, the community of Valea Iasului, which will be known in the future in the maps by the name of "Community for the Forgotten", will be reborn into something much greater than it was before the said Organization has done on these past months.

 Valley of Flood - Final Part

    ***


    Meanwhile, in a medical cabinet, on the Snake Island, Black Sea, a patient is sitting on a table, that said patient is a soldier by the looks of his clothes. That patient is strapped on the hospital bed, where in front of the right side of him, there is Mihaela and Dr. Mateo, who are looking at this soldier, deeply worried.


    "I never saw something like this, Doctor." says Mihaela looking at the patient.


    "Neither I have." responds Dr. Mateo looking worried at the corpse who is breathing and connected to the devices that monitor the heart beats of the patient.


    "Are you sure he is still alive, doctor?" asks Mihaela sounding worried.


    "I am not even sure."


    After approximately ten seconds, the patients open his eyes, which hare looking dead, like those zombies from outside. When the eyes have been opened, the soldiers start gnarling and screeching. He is frantically moving his limbs around to get out from there, but it is not possible since his whole body is strapped to the bed.


    "I didn''t work!" says Dr. Mateo, and he is looking on the monitor of the heartbeat who is starting to lose beats.


    This text was taken from Royal Road. Help the author by reading the original version there.


    Dr. Mateo, sees the zombies is looking at him, tries to bite him even though it is not possible. The, before he could do something, Mihaela takes out a scalpel, and uses it to stab the zombie head, breaking the base skull and going with the scalpel through the brain of the creature, who is dying immediately.


    After they are taking their breather, both of them, are moving the bed out from the room, and pushing it into the corridor. From there, they are pushing the bed a few rooms, then they are throwing the zombie body on the doors where was the elevator, now it is a room where they dispose of zombie corpses.


    "Experiment 21 failed." says Doctor Mateo to his assistant.


    "We''ll do it again?" asks Mihaela.


    They look down in the hole of where are the 21 zombie corpses thrown. As they looked there, they notice how some of them were still groaning and screeching. Thing that did not surprise them because they are aware that zombies can regain consciousness even if they are stabbed in the head due to their regeneration ability.


    "To be honest, I don''t even know." says Doctor Mateo to Mihaela. "All these 21 experiments have shown all of us these creatures cannot be transformed back to life by using human and zombie blood."


    "Then what are we going to do?"


    "I am going to tell Mr. Eighteen and Mr. Seventy-Nine that this mission is not possible."


    The two are closing the elevators doors of this building, leaving the zombies still screeching and growling in the darkness, while the two are going back to their cabinet to clean up the room after these exhausted experiments they have done in these past week since their leaving from Valea Iasului.


    THE END OF PART 8

 RapOn - Part 1

    "This was supposed to be my biggest debutˇ­Not the end of my normal life."


    On a normal night, in a normal music festival in Tirana, a well-known city by the people who live in Albania, locals and tourists have come to this music festival to watch their favourite singer from Eastern Europe perform one of their favourite songs. And on that festival, all the people have entered without being checked. Which it will turn out to be a big mistake.


    All the people that have come to this music festival were all looking healthy, energetic and excited to see their favourite performer on the stage to sing their favourite song. But, there was one person who attracted a few visitor''s attention. That person was a skinny man, with a bandage on his left wrist and looking pale like he had made a transfusion before he came into this concert.


    Stolen novel; please report.


    Some members of the staff asked if the man was alright, but the man insisted he is fine. He also states that he was bitten by a dog on his way here, hence why he has a bandage on his left wrist. And the staff, seeing the man is looking a little better than they thought (plus he slipped one thousand Albanian lek to the big guard without looking), decided to let him in the festival, among thousands of people from all around Europe. The bitten man is unaware from the disaster it will happen in the few moments.

 RapOn - Part 2

    ***


    Meanwhile, in a trailer, that is placed on the back of the stage, a man dressed in festival clothes is going at the trailer door. That man is a bulky man, bald, with a goatee, wearing this music festival staff clothing, with a word written on his back in English language "Bodyguard". Reason for this being the fact that most of the visitors of this music festival are not coming from Albania. The bodyguard measures around 1.94 cm, and weights more than 90 kilograms, which can make any person feel intimated by this man appearance. The name of this man is Paulo, and he is the bodyguard of his childhood friend, Ta''Ron, or known by few people as Tahir Aron.


    Ta''Ron was a well-known rap singer, who has made around six singles, but zero albums. This rapper is not so well known as by other musicians from Albania, but his music from social media platforms have made this man reach the fame to sing at his first music festival. Even though it is not the main attraction, he is still happy to start his rap singing debut.


    "Hey, Tahir!" says Paulo, knocking on the trailer door of where Ta''Ron was waiting for his debut. "Get ready, my friend. You''ll start soon."


    Paulo waits for is friend response for a few seconds, but nothing is heard. The man knocks on the door again.


    "Tahir. You awake, man?"


    Paulo, feeling a little anxious, he opens the door and enters the trailer. Upon entering the messy trailer where Ta''Ron stays, he sees the rap singer on the couch, sleeping on it, and on top of him is a naked woman, in her twenties, blonde long and messy hair, having all sort of biting marks from Ta''Ron all over her neck.


    "Tahir!" yells Paulo, and that yell wake Ta''Ron and the escort, who were sleeping and had a good time earlier.


    Tahir, being sober like he mostly is, sees Paulo looking angrily at him, then he realizes he is in big trouble. He gets off from the escort, who''s as sober as him, but did not care the bodyguard has entered the trailer. Tahir quickly gets his good clothes on him, washes his face from all the liquor that poured onto his face, and ties his shoes as fast as possible while Paulo is taking out the escort from the bed, gets her things, throws it at her and push her out of this trailer.


    "Really? At this moment?" says Paulo to Ta''Ron.


    "Yeah, I know." responds Ta''Ron, tying his shoes. "But she had good ass. And that is my weakness, man."


    "I know that, but not now. You have a concert to attend."


    "I am next?" asks Ta''Ron, looking shocked at Paulo.


    "No. You are after Noizy. Who''s now on stage."


    "I understand." responds Ta''Ron, who is checking himself more carefully to look good on his debut. "How much time I have to wait?"


    "About twenty minutes."


    "That''s good. I can exercise my vocals until then."


    Paulo is walking toward a chair, he sits in there, and is looking at Ta''Ron who is tuning his phone to the music he will be singing. He is turning to his karaoke version and sings it perfectly for the next three minutes, while Paulo stayed on the couch and listened to him. After he finished, Paulo applauds his success and tells him.


    "Good job. Your vocals are good."


    "Still pissed, I can only sing this song today." says Ta''Ron looking at Paulo, feeling angry.


    "What can I do, friend? These people who organized the event wanted for you to sing your best song. Plus, this is your first hit. And the album was just released."


    "But still. I had many good songs rather than this hit."


    "So, you hate the hit?"


    "No. I do not hate it."


    "Still. This is better than singing on the streets like you used to do."


    "Yeahˇ­" says Tahir remembering the times he used to sing in the street for spare change to buy himself bread for tonight and tomorrow for himself.


    Find this and other great novels on the author''s preferred platform. Support original creators!


    The two heard a loud knock on their door, they are both looking at the door. And before they could say something, someone opens the door wide enough to let that person enters the trailer. The person that came into the small room of Ta''Ron and Paulo is the same person from earlier, who was bitten by the "said dog". But that person looked greenish, had his dead eyes and a mouth with blood where is dripping from his mouth and teeth.


    "What the fuck?!" asks Paulo Ta''Ron looking at that deranged person who is walking to Ta''Ron.


    "Hey!" yells Paulo jumping from his chair and running to that zombie and tackling him.


    As Paulo was pinning that zombie to the floor, he noticed the thing was trying to bite him several times, but luckily Paulo avoided every single of this incident type to happen. The man throws the zombie to the doorway, and when it hit the doorway, the neck broke and the body lies on the floor of the trailer.


    Paulo and Ta''Ron are looking shocked at the body of that zombie. The neck of the body was having bones coming out of the skin and dark red blood coming out from the zones where the bones have pierced from. But, before they could check the body, the zombies raised his head, growled and tried to get up while his was in a way, on the verge of falling.


    "What the fuck is this guy on?!" yells Ta''Ron, shocked to see the guy with a broken neck get back on his feet, yelling and gargling on blood of his.


    "I don''t know. But we should call the authorities!" says Paulo, looking at that guy. "Hey! Leave this trailer, asshole!"


    Paulo is pushing the zombie outside of the trailer, and when the zombie got thrown out of the trailer, someone comes, and that person who came was an security guard, who shoot the zombie''s head with his handgun. That body of the zombie falls on the ground.


    "What the fuck?!" yells Ta''Ron and Paulo almost at the same time ot the security guard, who is running into the trailer of the two people.


    "Close the door." says the security guard.


    Paulo and Ta''Ron seeing the security guard has a gun on him, both of them are deciding to obey his order. So Ta''Ron closes the door after the security guard entered the trailer and they are looking at the security guard who is staying on the chair Paulo sits and tells them.


    "We are in trouble. Deep trouble."


    "W-What''s going on?" asks Ta''Ron.


    All of sudden, screaming''s are heard outside of the trailer. Girls and men screaming for their lives. Gunshots could be heard outside. Gnarls of the zombies like the one who got killed earlier. And even some explosions heard outside.


    "What''s going on there?" asks Ta''Ron pointing outside.


    "The apocalypse." says the security guard to Ta''Ron. "Like what happens in most of Europe and Asia. Viruses infecting humans and transforming them into humans eating human flesh. Just like in those zombie media that are on the internet."


    "You mean there are zombies like in The Walking Dead?" asks Ta''Ron shocked.


    "Yes. And from World War Z."


    "And Z Nation?" asks Paulo, more scared.


    "Hopefully not."


    At this, Paulo dropped a sigh of relief. He was thinking there are zombies who are going to control other zombies like Murphy from Z Nation.


    Even outside screaming of pain and terror could be heard, the three people haven''t tried to do anything. The security guard is looking on his phone, he sees he got a message that says the following: "From the Government, all safe citizens seek shelter and go to one of the designated safe zones in Albania.". Then, the security guard is looking at Ta''Ron and Paulo.


    "You two have a car?"


    "Yes." says Paulo and Ta''Ron at the same time.


    "Mine''s bigger." says Paulo to Ta''Ron.


    "So I have to follow you?"


    "No." responds the security guard. "You''ll abandon it here."


    "Huh?" asks Ta''Ron to the security guard. "I can''t leave my car here! What would happen to it?"


    "Like many other vehicles. It would be unused."


    "But I have a BMW." says Ta''Ron, sounding sad.


    "They consume a lot of gas." says the security guard, then he looks at Paulo. "Yours. Isn''t a BMW?"


    "No. It''s a Dacia."


    "Good." says the security guard. "We''ll remain here. Until the things are calming down outside. And when they''ll do. We''ll go to a safe zone."


    "Safe zone?"


    "The government send us a message." says the security guard showing the message from his smartphone.


    Ta''Ron and Paulo are checking their phones. Both of them have got a message from the government to got at one of the many safe zones listed in that message. The two were looking through that message for a few moments.


    "Where are we going?" asks Paulo. "What is the safe zone?"


    "It is a hotel near Tirana. We''ll stay in there, and wait for The Organization."


    "The Organization?" ask Ta''Ron. "What''s that?"


    "It''s complicated to say. but they''re known to be the ones who are guaranteeing safety for people like you two. But there is a price for that safety, that being working for them. It''s a good deal compared to what Governments can do."


    "How do you know so many of this?" asks Paulo.


    "ˇ­My brother. It was in Haga when the first infection was rumoured to happen. He told me how this Organization has got him into one of these islands. Where he is now working as a soldier. Last time I heard from him was two weeks agoˇ­ I am afraid my brother is mostly dead since he last time told me he was transferred into a Sweden safe zone." the security guard sees a bottle of whiskey on the ground, he is looking at the two people, who by now have taken a seat from the only two chairs remained on this trailer. "Can I drink from it?"


    "S-Sure." says Ta''Ron.


    "Thanks." responds the security guard walking to that bottle, taking it from the floor, and drinking the remaining from it. It was only fifty millimetres left. "By then way, the name is Ymir."


    "Ta''Ron." says Ta''Ron.


    "Paulo." responds Paulo, looking at the security guard.


    "Nice to meet, both of you."


    The security guard sits on the couch where Ta''Ron and a hooker from earlier have had a sexy time, but Ta''Ron, nor Paulo, would want to tell him about what happened on the couch. The security guard proceeds to lay in there, look at the ceiling and stay quiet for a while. And then the other two survivors are doing the same, stay in that trailer for a while until the dangers level outside will become lower.

 RapOn - Part 3

    ***


    Two hours later, Paulo, Ta''Ron and the bodyguard have equipped themselves with anything useful for combat to what they''ve found useful in there. Ta''Ron has taken a wooden piece of a chair, he smashed it to the floor. Paulo has taken a screwdriver that was in one of the drawers who was in there because things in Ta''Ron do break from time to time. And the bodyguard, whose name is Tomas, is carrying his handgun with only one clip remaining and a knife that was confiscated from someone who tried to enter with it in this festival.


    "Look out." says Tomas to Paulo.


    A zombie is crawling toward Paulo, on his arms, while the legs have been torn apart from the torso. This made the three survivors scared to witness, a crawler zombie type that appears when a zombie is torn apart from the legs or damaged bad enough that they won''t work.


    Paulo takes the screwdriver and uses it to stab the zombie head. Paulo stabbed the creature head so hard, the pointy part of the screwdriver has gone through the hard skull, and gone through the jelly brain of this dead walker. After this, the zombie stopped from moving and breathing.


    "Now''s dead?" asks Paulo, looking at Tomas after two seconds.


    "Yes." says Tomas. "My brother told me these creatures can be killed only on the head zone. Where the brain lays."


    "Alright." says Paulo, who is taking with force the screwdriver from the skull of the zombie corpse.


    The three survivors see more zombies coming to them. The three are looking scared at the upcoming twelve zombies, but they are all keeping their clam, and decide to run instead of face these creatures with their useless weapons. Even if they would face these creatures, their chances of death will be high since one of these survivors uses as a weapon a wooden leg of the chair.


    Love what you''re reading? Discover and support the author on the platform they originally published on.


    "Where we are running?" asks Ta''Ron, who is following where Tomas is running.


    "The car parks." says Tomas. "I know another road to there."


    There was indeed another way to get to the car park, that being, turning around the trailer where the three stayed for a while, and running straight to there, avoiding any contact with the zombies. And this was proven to be hard, but with good reflexes and quick attacks, they''ve got to the car park, only to see it infested with a lot of zombies and corpses laying either in cars or on the concrete.


    "Shit." says Ta''Ron, seeing this big number of zombies eating dead humans and walking toward them. "Where is the car, Paulo?"


    "There." says Paulo, pointing to where his car is.


    The car of Paulo is at one hundred meters from them. They all are running to that car. They''ve pushed and stabbed the three zombies on their way to the car. Paulo did stab two zombies, while Tomas used the knife to slash the neck of a zombie and stab its head. Tomas and Paulo did not mind their clothes were covered in zombie blood, but did make Ta''Ron feel anxious because his clothes were worth a fortune.


    "Get in the car!" says Tomas to Ta''Ron, who was looking at a zombie corpse Paulo killed.


    Ta''Ron runs to the car, and sits on the backseat because the front seat was taken by Tomas. And the wheel has been taken by Paulo, since this is his car and nobody else besides him can drive his beauty he bought from his three salaries as the bodyguard of Ta''Ron.


    Paulo manages to get out from this car park, avoiding any zombie who is trying to grab the car or leap to it like some shady incident scammers all around the world. Paulo has crashed the skull and the ribcage of some corpses, but it did not matter because the law will not punish them for manslaughter. Now, it is about surviving, and not civilization.


    The three people are leaving the car park with success, and they are going toward the nearest safe zone, which is located at a distance of twenty-five kilometres away from here. Which means this will be a quick road for three of them.

 RapOn - Part 4

    ***


    "After this." says Ta''Ron while he is looking at the car window net to him, seeing a lot of black smokes on the sky. "What we''ll do?" he is looking at the driver, Tomas.


    "I don''t know about you two." responds Tomas, continuing to control the wheel of Paulo''s car. "But I will go to Haga. I want to know if my brother is still alive. Since then, I was not able to contact him, and not able to leave the country because of my passport. But now. I am."


    "So." says Paulo. "You couldn''t leave the country because of your passport?"


    "Yeah. And he also advises me to not leave the country and prepare myself when this virus will hit the country. So far, he told me, about seventeen countries from Europe have been hit. That was what he told me. But now, I think most of Europe have been infected."


    The driver of the car, takes a turn and continues to drive, ignoring the zombies who are walking after the car. Ta''Ron and with Paulo are looking outside through the car windows, to see a lot of grotesque things outside. Such as a woman corpse, dressed in a wedding dress, being eaten by three zombies. A bunch of houses on fire next to the road the three survivors are taking.


    "Where is that safe zone again?"


    "It''s on a Hotel." says Tomas. "The message told the hotel is near the capital."


    If you find this story on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen. Please report the infringement.


    "Ain''t it dangerous to be right on the capital?" asks Ta''Ron, feeling sceptical. "How come we are going on there? Where in the movies it states that cities are considered to be a trap."


    "It may be bad." says Tomas to Ta''Ron. "But I am risking on this one. If someone from The Organization is in there. I may be able to convince them to move me to Haga. If not, will ask them to give me a car and a gun and I will make my way there. Whatever it takes to see my brother."


    "I understand." says Ta'' Ron.


    The car stops from running. It was stopped by the Tomas because there is a blockage in front of them. A big wall made out of concrete. Wall like the ones that can be seen in zombies TV shows and video games after a city outbreak. The walls were measuring more than ten meters high, which is a good thing, but the question is, how did they manage to make a wall so fast, and be already breached. But this doesn''t matter to the survivors, because they are getting out of their car, and decide to continue their walk to the safe zone on foot.


    "How did these things break this?!" asks Paulo, shocked to see a hole into the walls.


    "Brother told me most of these zombies can evolve," says Tomas, getting out of the car and going through the hole in the wall. "but he told me one time, that humans do help these zombies create more chaos into the world."


    "You tell us that some psychos help zombies kill humans?" asks Ta''Ron, going through the hole Paulo has gone.


    "Yes." says Tomas, looking at Ta''Ron. "But enough talking, we got a move to the safe house. It is not far away from here."


    The three survivors, armed themselves with melee weapons and a single handgun, they proceed to walk on a fast pace to where they need to be. But their walking turned into running when they saw a bunch of zombies coming after them since they are sensing the survivors movements and smell their blood.

 RapOn - Part 5

    Later, the three survivors have arrived in the front of the hotel doors. But arriving there, they notice the walls are barricaded with woods and metallic gates that are used after closing times to keep the vandals and burglars from entering the place.


    "Open the gate!" yells Tomas knocking on the Hotel door, while Ta''Ron and Paulo are breathing heavy after this run from zombies, who are still after them.


    Five zombies are coming toward where the three survivors have arrived. The three are looking at the zombies who are coming after them. Tomas continues to knock on the door and yell for them to be let in the building, while Paulo and Ta''Ron are preparing to attack the zombies. Paulo notices he sees on the ground, near a zombie corpse, a submachine gun. Paulo takes the weapon from the ground, checks its content and sees there is only fifteen bullets left.


    "Good." says Paulo, looking at the magazine content, and putting it back to the gun. "Enough to kill these things."


    "Wait." says Tomas, seeing Paulo preparing to shoot. "You know how to use a gun?"


    "Yes. I used to do practice shooting on the shooting polygon one year ago."


    "Don''t shoot." says a voice from the speaker placed on the building wall. "Noise will attract more zombies."


    "Then what the fuck do we do?!" asks Ta''Ron, looking at the megaphone. "Let us in already!"


    "We can''t." responds the voice from the speaker. "The place is full. You have to get to another safe house."


    "You have got to be kidding me!" yells Ta''Ron to the speaker.


    Paulo decides to drop the submachine gun magazine on the ground and use the gun as a melee weapon. He managed to crush the skull of a zombie, but this crush alone was not enough to put the thing down to the ground, making it to grab the arm of Paulo. But Ta''Ron came in time to use his wooden leg chair to aim a strong blow into the brain of the thing, shutting the monster down and making it fall on his knees.


    "Thank you." says Paulo, looking at the zombie dead corpse, and at Ta''Ron.


    "Anytime." says Ta''Ron to Paulo, looking scared at the zombie corpse.


    "I know it is tough," says Paulo. "but don''t worry, friend. We are together."


    The story has been taken without consent; if you see it on Amazon, report the incident.


    "T-Thanks." says Ta''Ron.


    The other four zombies are approaching the two survivors. Where they are arming themselves and preparing to attack the four zombies coming to them.


    Paulo manages to break the skull of a zombie with the back of the submachine gun he is holding, pushes the thing back, to fall on the cold ground. He hits the second zombie with the back of the submachine gun, this time, the hit was crushing the skull of the zombie and the brain, making it fall flat face to the ground. The first zombie tries to raise up, but Tomas intervenes to stab the creature head with a knife.


    And Ta''Ron, he dodges the two zombies who are trying to catch him. He tried to swing his wooden chair leg to a zombie, but this was pointless. It only grazed the face of the zombie. But he did get saved in time by Paulo and Tomas, who were quick to put these monsters down to the ground with their weapons. Paulo used the submachine gun to push the thing on the ground, then used the screwdriver to stab the skull zone of the zombie. And Tomas, sued the knife to stab the backside of the skull of the zombie, and pushing with force the body of the zombie to the ground, where the bones of the skull broken into pieces who have pierced the brain.


    The three are grasping for air, exhausted, and looking tired at the zombies they''ve killed. But as hey looked back, they see more zombies coming to them, but before they could try to arm themselves and fight again, a window of the building is being opened by a woman, who is yelling at the survivors to come here.


    Ta''Ron, Paulo and Tomas did not hesitate, they ran to that window, they are climbing inside the interior of the hotel, then the woman closes the window after the last person, who was Ta''Ron entered the place. The zombies are walking toward the window the trio have used it.


    "Thanks." says Paulo, breathing heavily, looking at the woman who have helped them to get inside the building.


    But, before he could say something, the woman that has helped them is looking with a thirsty look at Ta''Ron. She is wearing a shirt that shows the face of Ta''Ron and is name. This brunette short hair is looking at Ta''Ron like it is a celebrity.


    "Oh my god! Ta''Ron!" says the women, almost fainting.


    "Umˇ­" says Ta''Ron, taking by surprise. "Yes. Ta''Ron himself."


    "I. Am. YOUR! BIGGEST FAN!" squeals the woman, and takes off from her purse a notebook. "Can you give me an autograph?"


    "S-Sure." says Ta''Ron, not knowing how to process this turn of events.


    Ta''Ron takes the notebook and the pen handed by her fan and writes his autograph, while the two other survivors are surprised and left for words like the woman. Tomas proceeds to whisper to Paulo.


    "Is your friend really famous?"


    "He had only one single." whispers Paulo. "And that single was supposed to be on the concert."


    "I see." says Tomas, looking surprised by all of this.


    "To whom?" asks Ta''Ron, looking at the woman who just saved them.


    "To Felicia." says the girl, sounding happy.


    "To Felicia." repeats Ta''Ron, writing the autograph on the notebook this fan of his is carrying.


    After he handed the notebook to the girl, who was still squalling, a soldier comes here, and he is looking at the three survivors and at the woman who let them in. The soldier, having his assault rifle, on his hands, is looking at the three survivors who just fight five at the entrance. He saw the fight, and with a smile on his face, he says.


    "You three are going to be a good addition."

 RapOn - Part 6

    ***


    Minutes later, on a guest room on this hotel, who have been made to be some sort of medical examination room, our survivors are coming for a quick check-up. This room features three beds that are used as for the survivor''s examination, a desk where a few medical equipment such as medicine, bandages, syringes, tubes and many other things like this. On this room there is only one soldier, and three doctors who look to be locals of this area. Together with these staff members is a person, a woman in her twenties.


    "The reports said you smoke regularly."


    "That is true." says the woman staying on the side of the bed, looking at the doctor.


    That doctor sits on the chair next to the bed where the patient is. He looks through the medical files he found on the hospital he was working on. On the desk there are many other files like this one, all stored into an open box, taken by the medical staff. The doctor looked at the patient at the bed.


    "Have you had any sudden pain in certain areas of your body?"


    "Like?" asks the woman sounding worried, then she points with her finger on where is the lungs supposed to be located. "Here?"


    "Your heart?"


    "Yes." says the woman after a while.


    "Well. That is what I was worried about." says the doctor, and he glances over to a soldier.


    The soldier sighs and takes out his handgun from the holder of his right wrist. The soldier aims his gun on the head of the patient, where the patient screams and backs way before the soldier was about to pull the trigger of the gun.


    "Are you going to kill me?!" says the woman scared, backing away to the edge of the wall.


    "Yes." responds the soldier. "You are already infected with Z virus."


    "Z virus?" asks the woman.


    "The virus that transforms the human into a meat-eating monster. Like those in the media."


    "No. I am not infected." responds the woman scared, waving her hands up.


    But the soldier did not comment further, he aims the handgun to the head of the woman and shoot her head. Thankfully, the gun had his silencer on, which hasn''t made much noise to alert the other survivors and put fears into them. The death of this woman was nothing new to the doctors and to the soldier who is wearing the armour suit logo of "The Organization", the soldier takes off the body of the woman and throws the body in the bathroom, where other seven bodies of humans are laying in a bathtub.


    "Eight." says the doctor, staying on the chair and writes something on the clipboard where the file of the woman was. "Next person, please."


    Unauthorized usage: this narrative is on Amazon without the author''s consent. Report any sightings.


    "Tahir A." says the soldier who threw that body into the bathtub, taking from that desk another paper, and hands it to the doctor who is looking through it.


    "I know this guy." says the doctor, looking happy at the paper. "He was the one I hired three weeks ago to sing at my daughter party."


    "Really?"


    "Yeah. He is a bad singer, but my daughter liked the performance he did there."


    "Alright." responds the soldier, leaving the room and go after the man who just came here earlier with a squad of other two people.


    Tahir gets brought into this room by the soldier, who is telling him to strip up his clothes. He does as he is told, and takes out his shirt with blood marks on it, to reveal he is having a body with no bites and no marks. Then, the doctor tells him to take off his pants to see if he got any bite or infection on the legs. Tahir does this, and when the doctor saw there was nothing there, he is writing on the paper.


    "Good. You smoke?"


    "No." says Tahir to the doctor.


    "Drugs?"


    "No." responds Tahir right away.


    "Alcohol?"


    "Regularly."


    "How regularly?"


    "One to two beers a week or so." says Tahir to the doctor, sounding sincere.


    "I see. Well. You are in a good shape. So, you can go now."


    "Thanks." says Tahir, starting to put his pants back, then he asks the doctor. "I know you from somewhere but don''t know from where."


    "Sierra birthday party." says the doctor with a smile.


    "Ah. Yes. That birthday. You hired me as a singer."


    "Yeah. Yeah. She likes it."


    "Is she alright?" asks Tahir sounding worried as he puts his shirt on.


    "She is okay. She and her mother are staying on a camp in Greece. Yesterday they arrived."


    "We would also go there?"


    "Depends." says the soldier of this room. "For now. We are recruiting the people who are worthy of safety and can help us survive further."


    "Including us, right?" asks Tahir to the soldier after he puts his clothes back.


    "You can go now." responds the soldier to Tahir.


    "But."


    "Go." says the doctor to Tahir.


    And Tahir, seeing he cannot do anything, he leaves the room and goes to the hallway of this room where other people are in there, waiting for their quick examinations. On this hallway, there is also Paulo and Tomas, who had their medical exam finished. Then, the three of them have gone from there into another room to stay and wait for something.


    The three survivors are entering an empty room, labelled as room 34. The three of them are walking to the window of this room, and are looking outside, where they see a lot of fires and big black smoke coming out of the buildings and houses. They also see on a building nearby, a woman, naked, who is jumping from the rooftop of the flat. These three people looked at how the woman has fallen on the cold and bloody street, becoming a dead corpse, with organs and blood that have splashed all over the place. Six of the zombies nearby, seeing and sensing the corpse of that woman on the ground, they all walk toward the woman corpse and proceed to eat her remains on the ground.


    "That''s crazy." says Ta''Ron, seeing the remains of the woman corpse being eaten by these zombies.


    The three people on this room are looking on the street through the windows, they see there a male who is fighting a zombie by using a scythe. That man was able to decapitate three zombies who were coming toward him with a few moves of his scythe. Even if he was able to kill some zombies who were coming after him, many more were coming at him, swarming him and covering any escape of this brave and stupid warrior. The man was able to kill some zombie, but when a swarm shows up, the man proceeds to feel encircled and with no hope of escape. He tried to push a zombie, but another came from behind, grabbing his neck, and as the man was about to turn, a zombie from the front of him flank him, and take a bite from his neck. The bite in the neck was enough to make the man yell and stops from moving. He tries to fight, but it is pointless since the horde of dozens of zombies have encircled him and are eating him alive.


    "I''ve seen enough." says Tomas, leaving the window view after he saw that man trying to do this stupid stunt.


    The other two male survivors follow his example.


    Ta''Ron is covering the window by drawing the curtains.

 RapOn - Part 7

    ***


    Three hours later, Ta''Ron and Paulo are walking down the stairs, together with other survivors, to the main lobby, where they have been called by the military personnel to come for an announcement. From this group of eighty-five people, Tomas was not there, which made Paulo and Ta''Ron seem concerned, but when they got down to the main lobby, their worried disappear after they saw him in the room with the military personnel.


    "Greetings, everyone." says a man that is wearing a suit, with a label number 56 and with a small emblem with the flag of Albania. "I am Mr. Fifty-six. And I am going to give you good and bad news."


    "What is the bad news?" asks a person from the group.


    "We''ll get there, my friend. But now, here is the good news. We have successfully acquired transportation to the nearest military outpost."


    The people from that group cheered for this, clapped their hands and felt hopeful they will be saved, but then, the bad news came to them after a few seconds.


    "But the bad news is. We are having limited transportation at this moment. Which means you all be leaving in groups." responds Mr. Fifty-six. "Now. We''ve made a list of every group that will leave this safe house. All groups leaving every twelve hours apart from each other. The first group will consist of twenty people. The other one will be also from twenty people. Six group of twenty people have been made."


    "And where we can see from what group we are in?" asks a person from the group of people in there.


    "Here." responds Mr. Eighty-Six to the group of survivors, who is ordering the soldiers to hand the papers of departure to all the people gathered here.


    All the people gathered in this lobby have been receiving their papers hat displays their names and the number of the group they belong. The group that Ta''Ron and Paulo will depart is the one that will leave after two days. The fifth group. From that group there isn''t the name of Tomas, nor on the other groups, which is making Paulo and Ta''Ron feel a little worried about him.


    After all the papers have been sending to everybody in this room, Mr. Eighty-Six starts talking again.


    "Now. That all of you have got your papers, and have been informed about your departure. You have any questions?"


    "Where is the base we are going to live?" asks a woman from the group.


    "That is highly classified and secret."


    "Why?" asks a person from the group. "Why we cannot know the exact location where we are going?"


    "Are you going to use as a lab rats?" asks another person.


    If you come across this story on Amazon, it''s taken without permission from the author. Report it.


    "We are going to be used as zombie food?" asks a scared cracker from the streets.


    "Enough." says Mr. Eighty-Six. "We will protect you. Got it. We will keep you safe. You, all, are the hope of humanity. Hope of Albania. For a better future that what we are dealing at this moment."


    People in the crowd continued to feel anxious and scared because this person doesn''t reveal the location of where they will be kept safe. Even if this didn''t raise more question marks, the other question did.


    "Where is Billie?" asks a person.


    "Who?" asks Mr. Eighty-Six to that person.


    "Billie. Was going to the check-up room. Then he never returned."


    "Ah, Billie." says Mr. Eighty-Six, who knows at what person he is referring. "Yes, Billie. It has been already sent to the laboratory outside the city for further examination. He will be with us shortly, like the other twenty-two people."


    Questions continued to come, about food, the electricity in there, the armaments, the soldiers, the heavy equipment, the houses and the base in general. These people tried to drag some clues about the place. Some of them have realized it is about a military base, but what military base are they talking about because Albania is having a lot of these bases all around this country.


    When the questions have been all answered vaguely and completely, Mr. Eighty-Six leaves the lobby, escorted by the soldiers and leaving the people at this lobby to prepare for their upcoming leave. But for the group with number two and six, they''ll be there for a while.


    ***


    Later this day, after the first group left this hotel, Ta''Ron and Paulo are in the dining room, they have gone in there to grab a dinner they have been informed to take it. The two have entered the dining room, saw there a lot of people, who are sitting on tables and eating a fresh cooked dinner by the soldiers and chef people that have survived on this sudden apocalypse. The two people have noticed Tomas is in this room, sitting on a table, eating by himself a plate of mashed potatoes and peas with sauce.


    Ta''Ron and Paulo decided to join Tomas table and ask him some questions who are bugging them.


    "What happened, friend?" asks Ta'' Ron after him and Paulo sit on the opposites side of the table of Tomas. "Why were you with Mr. Eighty-Six guy?"


    "Believe it or not." says Tomas to the two guys. "This man hired me as a personal soldier."


    "Really?" asks the two guys at the same time.


    "Yes. The man offered me this job after I mentioned my brother. Apparently, he is alive and well. Now he is on an outpost in Sweden. I asked him if I can do a transfer in there, but he told me this can''t be happening, but he let me call him on the video camera. Apparently, this said "The Organization" owns a bunch of satellites they are suing to communicate with other outposts all around from the world."


    "There are many of these outposts?" asks Paulo.


    "He told me there are about hundreds of these official outposts, artificial islands and safe zones for people to gather and survive together that are controlled by highly trained soldiers."


    "That is great to hear." says Ta''Ron.


    "Do you know why the man was so secretive about the location of this base?" asks Paulo.


    "It is because of some circumstances that has happened to a lot of military bases all around the world."


    "What circumstances?" asks Ta''Ron.


    "I don''t really know. They only told me this."


    "Aha." says Paulo, feeling concerned about this. "They are hiding something."


    "Yeahˇ­" says Tomas. "And the less I know. The better."


    "Right, right." says Ta''Ron agreeing to this, while Paulo doesn''t respond to this, he continues to eat his mashed potatoes and peas.


    The three people decides to resume their meals.


    After the three, people ate their meals. They all decided to leave the room, and go to their rooms to rest because they are having two days to wait until their departure times. To the departure of Ta''Ron and Paulo, since Tomas will be a personal soldier of Mr. Eighty-Six.

 RapOn - Part 8

    Two days later, the time of departure have arrived for the group of Paulo and Ta''Ron. From that group there is also Felicia, and many other seventeen unknown people from the hotel where the two survivors didn''t have time to get to know each other. And it didn''t help that the other seventeen people were shutting themselves in rooms and barely socializing with other people.


    Paulo and Ta''Ron are on the rooftop, where they are the first people to be escorted into the helicopter by two soldiers. Entering the helicopter, they see there are a lot of seats in there, about twenty seats that were empty. Paulo and Ta''Ron are taking two seats from the middle of the helicopter inside. Both are putting their seatbelts and are looking at the pilot and the co-pilot who are prepared to depart from the safe house.


    "Are the two okay out there?" asks the pilot, referring to the seats the two have taken.


    "I am fine." responds Paulo.


    "I am f-fine." says Ta''Ron, shaking.


    "Alright." says the pilot, going back to his business to prepare the aircraft for his departure.


    Paulo knows that Ta''Ron is afraid of flying. He saw it one time when the two were flying to Bulgaria to go on a party to a friend of them. This flight they took was short, but it made Ta''Ron go through one of the worst nightmares of his life. Well. Not the worst since the beginning of the zombie apocalypse.


    Ten minutes later, the helicopter has been filled with the people from the fifth group that is scheduled to leave the safe house. All the twenty people have shown for their leaving, which was something normal because who would want it to stay in here for longer than it should since the food resources and electricity is running short on these two days since the establishment of this safehouse.


    The narrative has been stolen; if detected on Amazon, report the infringement.


    When everyone got on board from the twenty people, the helicopter leaves the rooftop of the hotel. Flying high on the black and grey sky of Albania that has been infected by the smoke of humanity, beloved architecture they''ve worked for generations and millennia''s to perfect and make to their modern tastes. The helicopter flies high and fast, that the hotel disappears from the view after a mere minute.


    "We are going to be alright?" asks a woman who is shaking like Ta''Ron after their departure from the hotel.


    "We are going to be alright." assurers a male passenger sitting next to her.


    "Are you afraid of flying?" asks another passenger to the woman.


    "Yes. I am afraid of flying and heights." says that woman passenger. "I was always afraid of these things since I was little."


    "I will assure you." says the passenger next to the woman. "Everything will be alright, nothing bad will happen to us here. Zombies couldn''t reach us even if they can fly."


    Three minutes later, the helicopter passes the altitude labelled with a high number, such as 900 feet. But even at this altitude, something crazy to comprehend and hard to believe if you would see it from the ground has happened. A giant boulder is flying toward the helicopter, which has resulted into an awful hit and a tragic accident. The aircraft is descending from the sky on a fast speed, with most of the passengers panicking and screaming for help as the aircraft is falling into the dense forest near the only highway built in Albania.


    Looking down, the thing that has launched the boulder that weight more than one hundred kilograms was a zombie, but not any normal zombie like the ones the people on the aircraft have seen. This zombie that has launched a boulder to an altitude of 900 feet was a Class F zombie, a common evolved species that creates much more havoc that normal zombies have done in certain areas all around the infected worlds. And that class F zombie, after he saw the boulder hitting the helicopter and seeing falling to the forest, starts walking toward that direction. All alone.


    That said, zombie is a huge one, measuring more than 190 centimetres in height, weighting more than 100 kilograms, and having a massive built of physical force on his body. That zombie is naked and posses a lot of fresh cuts, bullet holes and stabbing marks all over the body. as the zombie continues to walk toward the forest, from his ferocious growl, a word could be heard by human ears.


    "Foodˇ­"

 RapOn - Part 9

    ***


    The crash site was near a highway that connects Albania to Serbia, the helicopter that has crashed there has managed to crash near the streets that are blocked by a bunch of vehicles who have been abandoned a while ago, maybe at the beginning of the apocalypse. From that helicopter, a few people are getting out from there. Most of them look to be fine, while others are injured from their walking style. And from those injured people there is Ta''Ron and Paulo, who are all suffering wounds and bruises on their bodies and faces.


    "You alright, dude?" asks Paulo, looking at Ta''Ron, who is holding his left arm in pain.


    "I am not." says Ta''Ron. "I think I broke my arm."


    "Damn." says Paulo, and he walks with Ta''Ron for a few meters.


    After their walk, Paulo helps Ta''Ron sit down on the cold grass, he tries to rise the sleeves from the shirt of Ta''Ron, but noticed that this pains Ta''Ron, which makes Ta''Ron to stop doing what he was about to do. Unfortunately, neither he and Ta''Ron doesn''t have any idea what to do on this moment.


    "Are you okay?" asks Ta''Ron, looking at Paulo.


    "I am fine." says Paulo, who is having a few bruises on his head from the crash. "I only have these small injures. So, I am fine."


    "G-Good for you." says Ta''Ron to Paulo, sitting down on his ass on the grass and holding his left arm. "This pain is killing me."


    "Help." says a woman who is leaving the helicopter that crashed, dragging a person from there, who looks to in a more critical situation than Ta''Ron.


    This book was originally published on Royal Road. Check it out there for the real experience.


    Paulo tells his friend to stay put and don''t move while he goes to the helicopter and helps as many people as he can to get out from this helicopter. Ta''Ron stays and looks at his bodyguard, how is pulling out a few injured people from the helicopter that suffered this terrible crash.


    There were three people from that crash who have been killed in the crash, those three being the passengers who were earlier talking that nothing bad will happen to them. And the other people are suffering major injuries, such as a broken arm, leg, finger, and one had a bone coming out of the socket. Paulo has tried to help that man with the bone coming out of his socket, but he couldn''t do anything because the man died of blood loss when he transported him out of the helicopter and laid him on the ground, near the helicopter.


    That corpse with the bone out of his socket became a zombie, and was quickly killed by the pilot of the helicopter. The pilot killed the zombie by pointing his handgun to the head o the zombie, pulled the trigger and saw the bullet flying through the skull of the zombie, splashing blood from the brain, and making the body of the zombie falling numb on the back. That pilot then looks at his people and he tells them.


    "We have to move on."


    "What?!" asks a woman from the group, sounding shocked. "We are all wounded!"


    "And? I am wounded! But I still have to move on."


    "Call for backup!" says a person from the group.


    "The device got destroyed in the crash."


    "We''re all going to die!" yells another scared woman from this group.


    Many people were screaming, crying and terrified of the fact that they are stranded in the forest, near nowhere, in the middle of the apocalypse and near on the highway, that is infected with zombies, who are now walking to the crash site. A few people saw the zombie coming and from there panic ensued.


    Seven people were running into the forest, while other two were running into the highway, and the rest stayed on the crash site, those rest ere the ones who were the most injured ones and couldn''t move by themselves. From those seven people who have run in the forest are Paulo, Ta''Ron and the pilot of the helicopter, that all are planning to get to the safe zone at any cost. They are running into the deep forest, ignoring the pain screaming and yelling of the injured people that are eaten by the horde of zombies on the highway.

 RapOn - Part 10

    Later, the seven people have managed to make a five kilometres distance from the crash site into this forest. They decide to stop for a breathing, near a river, where the seven remaining people have all sit down on some rocks and logs who were left in there by nature. Paulo checks the injury of Ta''Ron, and notice the injury is as bad as it was when he saw it.


    "We''re screwed?" asks a survivor, a young adult, looking and the old pilot in military uniform.


    "We are not dead." says the pilot. "The base is at three more kilometres from here I think. Arriving there, we will all be safe."


    "Until when?" asks a female from the group of five males and two females.


    "Until forever." says Paulo to that woman. "Now, quit y''all complaining! And rest."


    "He''s right." says Ta''Ron to take defence of Paulo, holding his broken hand. "We have to rest and see what we can do to the wounded ones."


    "You''re hurt?" asks the pilot looking at Ta''Ron.


    "I broke my arm at the crash."


    "Let me see."


    The pilot comes closer to Ta''Ron, waits for Ta''Ron to let him look closely at his arm, and when he did, the pilot saw the arm devastated state it is in. He touched and asked Ta''Ron where does it hurt him. After he saw where the arm was hurting the most, the pilot takes from under his vest pockets a tablet of painkillers, takes one pill from there and hand it to Ta''Ron unwounded hand.


    "Sorry. I don''t have any water to swallow with."


    "Don''t worry." says Ta''Ron. "Thanks a lot."


    Ta''Ron takes the painkiller on his mouth, swallows it and rests on the log while the pilot is making an improvised bandage to the broken arm of Ta''Ron by using a piece of cloth from his shirt, who was already too destroyed to be worn by a soldier of Albania. After he tied the broken arm, the pilot proceeds to go and check on the others, but then tells Paulo.


    "Use some cloth piece, take some water from the river and use it as a compression for your injured friend."


    "I will." says Paulo who is immediately going to business.


    He rips a little cloth from his shirt, soak it into the river, twists the cloth to make the water runs out of the cloth, make it like a compression and goes with it to his friend, where he puts the compression on the forehead of Ta''Ron.


    "You okay?" asks Paulo to his friend Ta''Ron.


    "I am fine. But my hand isn''t." says Ta''Ron.


    "Rest, buddy." says Paulo to Ta''Ron. "We''ll need to rest. All of us."


    Paulo sits on his ass next to his friend, he looks around, and he looks at the pilot who is desperately trying to reach the headquarters by using the walkie-talkie, but it is to no use after minutes o continues and agonizing tires. He then decides to lose the station and decides to do a risky thing. The pilot looks at the group behind him.


    Support the creativity of authors by visiting Royal Road for this novel and more.


    "I have an idea." says the pilot looking without confidence. "But the plan I''ll say. You all may not like it."


    "Say it." says Ta''Ron.


    "I will go to the safe one, get help and come back as fast as I can. But I cannot leave all of you here by yourself."


    "Why not?" asks Paulo to the pilot. "I will take care of them. You go and do your thing, while I am taking care of the people."


    They argue for a bit about this. but this argument was won by Paulo after more were accepting the plan to let the pilot go after help and let Paulo and Fabian, another survivor who is fit for fighting, protect this group of survivors. The pilot left the group with a knife, letting the two handguns he had to Paulo and Fabian to protect the group with in case a zombie or two shows up.


    Only one zombie showed up to the camp, but it was taken down by Fabian who used the back of the handgun, smashing the skull, then stabbing the brain of the zombie by using a tree branch near him.


    After this incident, things went quiet for the survivors for a few minutes, then someone, a male room of the group, decided to ask a question to start a discussion.


    "You guys are all from Tirana?"


    "No." says a man from the group. "From Serbia."


    "You''re Serbian?" asks a woman from the group. "Your Albanese is good by the way."


    "Thanks. I came here for a job. I was supposed to work for this construction company, but thenˇ­ This."


    "I understand." says that woman. "Do you people know how long it passed?"


    "About forty minutes." says a man looking on his watch from the left arm. "Do you think he made it?"


    "He made it." say Paulo to make his people from the group feel better. "He is well-prepared for this."


    "And the base is safe." says Ta''Ron, then he looks at everyone, confused. "Right, guys?"


    "Right." says Paulo. "The base is safe. And is probably secured for us to live there until a cure is developed."


    And six minutes later, the pilot comes back, but he comes back with bad news about the base. He told the group the news they did not wanted to hear from it.


    "The base got overrun by zombies. Everyone from there has fled the base. Taken everything. Weapons. Food. Furniture. Cars. And communication devices."


    "What are we going to do?" asks a frustrated survivor.


    "I don''t know." says the pilot, who is staying down, at the circle of the survivors. "This was the only plan I had. I never thought these horrible creatures would be able to overrun a base. This is not like a TV show. These things shouldn''t destroy the walls of the base like it is some sort of cartoon boxes."


    "These things are more dangerous than they seem." says Fabian to the pilot, and he looks at the zombie corpse he killed by himself.


    "You killed that one?" asks the pilot pointing at that dead zombie.


    "Yes." says Fabian to the pilot.


    "Good job." says the pilot.


    Before they could say anything else, they hear a growl coming from their behind. Looking at what is laying there, all the survivors got up and gone on a run from the thing that came out of the bushes. From there it was not a zombie, it was a class F zombie. The one who crashed them. But they didn''t know about this fact.


    "What the fuck is that thing?" yells Fabian to the pilot, as he and his group are running in the forest.


    "That''s a class F." says the pilot to the group.


    The entire group is running into the dense forest as fast as they can. Especially the ones who are injured. Paulo and Ta''Ron have decided to run in another direction, while the rest of the group are running where the base it is.


    "Shouldn''t we go with them?" asks Ta''Ron running by the side of Paulo.


    "We''ll see them later." says Paulo. "We cannot risk it, my friend. You are severely injured."


    "I am, but-"


    "No. You have to stay safe." says Paulo.


    The two friends are running for a few more minutes until they arrive at a traffic road, which is empty and with decayed zombie corpses. Both of them decide to walk onto this road, where it is leading to a not so well known zone by the people of Albania, Letan.

 RapOn - Part 11

    Arriving in Letan, Paulo and Ta''Ron are running from a horde of zombies who are coming after them. The two people are empty-handed in weapons, ammunition and everything, and they''ve run for around ten minutes, increasing the level of their exhaustion since they were starving and tired since the crashing of the helicopter.


    "Where to?" asks Ta''Ron after he and Paulo arrive at an intersection and sees a lot of places in ruin, closed, barricaded and wrecked.


    "There." says Paulo looking at a brothel that is having his door opened.


    "For real?" asks Ta''Ron.


    "Any better idea?" asks Paulo to Ta''Ron.


    Ta''Ron looks back and sees a few zombies coming after them. He turns around and runs straight to the brothel, and Paulo goes after him. The two managed to get inside the building, and they are locking the door, by using the key that was in the door. After locking the door, the two survivors are quickly moving heavy furniture to block the main entrance from the zombies outside. Dragged a long and sturdy piece of couch, place near the door, then they try to block the views of the windows by using the curtains pillows tying with duct tape they''ve found on the main lobby. It took them a while to make this blockage, and when they were done, they go upstairs. They look around the hallway and hide in a room.


    "I think we are safe."


    "Yeahˇ­" says Paulo, and he tries to look around the room, but it is too dark. "W-Where''s the light switch?"


    "Jeez. This room smells awful."


    Paulo is looking on the entire room for a light switch. He found it after a few seconds, he turns it on and sees in the room, a human woman corpse, dead, crucified on the left side of the room, where her belly is cut open, and her entire insides have been taken. The two quickly barfed, and ran out of this room, close the door after them, then they vomit on the hallway floor for a while.


    "Jesus Christˇ­" says Paulo after he threw up. "W-What the fuck happened in there?"


    -D-Don''t want to go th-there." says Ta''Ron trying to get himself up. "Ever again."


    The two are searching for another room to hide. They enter a room, but before they could enter it, Paulo turns on the light switch of the room, and the room reveals to be clean, untouched by anyone for many days since the infection of this virus has stated. The two are closing the door and decide to remain in there to rest.


    "Pfew. We are safe." says Paulo to Ta''Ron, he jumps on the first bed on the room.


    "Yeahˇ­" says Ta''Ron going to the second bed of this room.


    Ta''Ron notices there is a mini refrigerator between their beds. The man opens the refrigerator and there it reveals a few snacks for them to last a little longer. The two, without thinking too much about this, are eating everything from that refrigerator for thirty minutes. Later, the two are falling asleep in their beds, with the lights on and dressed in their dirty clothes.


    They wake up after in three hours because of the knocking downstairs. The two were awakened by this, look at each other scared and then around for some weapons. Paulo notices there is a broom near the wall. He gets off the bed, walks toward that broom and take it as some sort of weapons.


    "You''re going to fight with that?"


    "Any better idea?" asks Paulo holding the broom.


    Ta''Ron is looking around the room, seeing there is not many choices that are better than a broom, he responds to Paulo.


    "Good argument."


    This tale has been unlawfully lifted without the author''s consent. Report any appearances on Amazon.


    ***


    The two survivors arrive at the entrance of the building. Paulo having armed himself with a broom and Ta''Ron, who was lucky on the hallway, has found a cane to beat the thing that is knocking on the door. Paulo observes there is not any zombies on the covered windows, and many breaths and screeches coming from outside, meaning there is only one zombie outside. Ta''Ron asks Paulo.


    "Zombie?"


    "I don''t know." says Paulo to Ta''Ron.


    "Hello?" asks a voice from outside. "I-I-Is somebody in there?"


    The two survivors are looking at each other, then, without any hesitation, go to the couch, move it out of the door and open the door after Paulo unlocked it. When they opened the door, three people are entering the building, then they tell Paulo to close the door. Paulo and Ta''Ron look back and see twelve zombies at twenty meters from the building.


    "Oh shit!" says Ta''Ron.


    "Close it!" say that person to Paulo who was glaring at the zombies.


    "O-On it." says Paulo, locking the door of the building and looking back at Ta''Ron. "D-Didn''t th-they looked like?"


    "Y-Yeah." responds Ta''Ron to Paulo question.


    "Poor bastards."


    "W-What?" asks a woman from that trio who entered the building. "You know those zombies who chase us?"


    "T-They were from our flight to the safe zone. I would recognize anywhere that military gear outfit on that zombie. A-And that one zombie, that wore a leather jacket with a bandana."


    "A-Anyway." says Paulo. "Help us move this furniture to block the entrance."


    The five survivors are moving all the furniture they could find and blocking the passage of entrance to this safe house. They moved most of the heavy furniture to the entrance and to the windows that are positioned on a lower level to the ground, and the light ones, such as vases and wooden chair, they''ve decided to use it as some sort of weapons in case zombies will break inside. The survivors decide to walk into the dinning room of this brothel (yes, this one had one), and stay in there to take a breather.


    "Thank for helping us, man." says a survivor, the one with a long blonde hair, from the trio.


    "Who are you guys?" asks Paulo. "I don''t think we''ve got the chance to exchange names."


    "My name is Eric." says the male with long blonde hair.


    "I''m Sonya." says the female from the trio.


    "I''m Taric." says the other male survivor with a long beard and a bandaged neck.


    "What''s with your neck?" asks Paulo looking at Taric neck.


    "A-A bullet has gazed me." says Taric to Paulo question. "We were running from the Mall in panic after we were attacked by the first wave of zombies. It was awful in there. A lot of cops taken their gun to kill these said zombies, and innocents were more unfortunate than we were. But we''ve managed to get out of there. All three of us. I was the most unfortunate one as you can see. We are from Tirana by the way."


    "We''re also from there." says Paulo to Taric who was amazed by this story of their survival. "We were in there of the music festival."


    "That is why you looked familiar." says the man named Eric to Ta''Ron. "You are Ta''Ron."


    "Right here." says Ta''Ron to Eric, and points to Paulo. "And next to me is Paulo. My bodyguard."


    "You two survived the attacks in there?" asks Eric. "I heard on the news it was a mess."


    "It was." says Paulo to Eric. "But we were escorted out of there by someone who was way more capable than I and Ta''Ron are."


    "And? Did that man died?"


    "No. Last time I heard, he was going somewhere in Scandinavia." says Ta''Ron to that man.


    "How he got in Scandinavia?" asks Sonya.


    Paulo and Ta''Ron proceeds to tell the three survivors their whole story of their survival from the beginning of this infection. Paulo told their days of fighting and running from zombies, while Ta''Ron was telling small things about their comfortable short lifestyle they''ve had in that hotel. When they finished, Sonya stomach was grumbling.


    "Do you have something to eat?" asks Sonya to Paulo while she is hiding her stomach in embarrassment.


    "Hopefully." says Paulo. "Like I told you, we just got there, slept and then hear you three."


    Paulo gets up from the table, walks into the kitchen with Ta''Ron to check the room to see if they can find something that is comestible for all of them. It wasn''t in vain, the refrigerator had a lot of supplies such as vegetables and meat, and some delicious sodas for them to drink. The two survivors are taking the things from the refrigerator and walks with them to the table, where the three survivors are looking at the food with big eyes and smiling. They sure haven''t eaten in days from their reactions because when the food was put on the table, Sonya and Eric ate the raw meat, and Taric has taken the vegetables to eat.


    "We could''ve tried to make a dish with them." says Ta''Ron to the three people who are eating from these things from the refrigerator like some sort of wild animals.


    "There''s no electricity." says Paulo to Ta''Ron. "You saw the refrigerator didn''t generate any cold in the interior."


    "You two aren''t going to eat?" ask Taric to Paulo and Ta''Ron.


    "No. We are good." says Ta''Ron to the group.


    The two haven''t told the three people about their arrival in that room, where they''ve emptied a refrigerator and slept like logs for three hours. But they did tell them about that one room they''ve found, and like they were expecting, the three survivors puked what they ate and came to the decision to never go in that room, whatever the circumstances.

 RapOn - Part 12

    ***


    One hour later, the five survivors have finished their searching in this building, and they''ve found nothing in this three floors brothel. They didn''t find anything useful such as radio, walkie-talkie or even a mobile smartphone, nothing that can help them get a chance to communicate with people or military. But they did find in other rooms refrigerators that were filled with food and drinks, where all of them decided to gather all the food possible and stock it to use it when they were going starving.


    "We have no source of communication." says Eric to the group when all of them have gathered in the dinning room to lock the found supplies. "But we have food and water."


    "Yeah." says Sonya.


    "So. We''re going to live here?"


    "What do you expect?" asks Paulo. "You''ve seen how dangerous it is outside?"


    Paulo points to the way where is supposed to be the main lobby, where sounds of zombies that are kicking the door and trying to go through the window could be heard from the dinning room.


    "But we cannot live here like forever." says Eric to the group. "What if this place will be bombarded with bombs like other places I''ve heard."


    "Such as?" asks Ta''Ron.


    "Romania, Bulgaria, Greece, Holland, France, Germany." says Eric. "This is the ones I''ve seen on a news report days ago on the run with my group. These people, who throw the bombs, didn''t show any mercy to humans. They killed everything that was on their way."


    "If that is to happen." says Paulo. "Then we''ll leave."


    "But how do we know if they will ever attack this city?" asks Ta''Ron.


    "We pray." says Sonya.


    "Have you guys checked the security cameras from the outside?" asks Taric after about ten to twelve seconds of silence.


    "We thought they don''t have security cameras." says Paulo to Taric. "But why?"


    "We could use these cameras to see the surroundings outside. And we could also try to see how many of these things are out there in the streets."


    "Doesn''t sound that bad." says Ta''Ron.


    "I will look for it then." says Taric rising from his seat.


    This story originates from a different website. Ensure the author gets the support they deserve by reading it there.


    "I will come too." says Paulo to Taric.


    "Okay." says Taric.


    Taric and Paulo are leaving the dining room, they walk to the main lobby where they are looking on the map of this building, that is put on the wall as a way to know where are fire exits located. But as they inspected the map, it did not show any room that is labelled security room or something like this. Then, Paulo gets an idea.


    "Should we check the office? Most of the hotels I''ve known have monitors that are tracking security cameras all around the building."


    "Maybe." says Taric. "It''s worth giving a shoot. But how can we open that room, we need a way to break it. You''ve seen it is locked."


    "We just smash the door." says Paulo. "What do you think will happen? The boss of this place will come to our throats?"


    Taric was chuckling at this one, and so, the two went to investigate the office. The room was located at the first floor, and on there, the two noticed the door is locked. They tried to force it open, and seeing it doesn''t work, Paulo decided to search the entire place for a fire axe or something heavy to break the door. They''ve found a crowbar in the basement. Paulo used the crowbar to open the door, which worked and let the two enter the room.


    When they entered the room, the first thing Paulo has saw was the huge TV screen, who was turned on when they entered, displaying four security cameras. Paulo and Taric are going to the TV screen, and are looking at it. The security cameras work, but the image is on a low resolution that is not considered to be great for current year, but for a 2010s time it is considered to be excellent quality.


    "Security cameras works." says Taric.


    "Yeah." says Paulo. "They work."


    "Check the camera 4." says Taric in a scared tone.


    "Oh my God." says Paulo looking on the camera 4. "It''s him."


    "Him?" asks Taric.


    "That one zombie. Who has made my helicopter crash not far from here."


    "Only one of those?" asks Taric in a serious tone pointing at the big zombie that is walking out of the forest zone.


    "Yes."


    "Jesus Christ." says Taric looking at that camera, then he looks back at Paulo and asks in panic. "Will that zombie smell us?"


    "Iˇ­I don''t know." says Paulo scared.


    The two are looking at the security camera labelled number four, at the huge zombie who seems to stop from moving in the middle of the road. He looks at the direction where the brothel is and walks toward the building in slow steps. The two saw the big zombie coming to them, and they quickly left the room in a hurry to alert the others about what is going to happen.


    In just a few minutes, the whole group of five people has decided to leave the brothel, by taking the backdoor and run to the nearby building, that is a small grocery store. The five survivors enter on the backdoor, where they locked the door by moving an empty shelf from the meat section to that door. But something like this will not be able to hold a creature like the one that is chasing them.


    "What now?" asks Ta''Ron to Paulo after he and Taric moved the shelf.


    "We have to keep moving." says Paulo who walks into the interior of the store, where he is greeted by seven zombies.


    The group of five people, all armed with improvised weapons, are beating the seven zombies until they''ve been put down and their brains been destroyed beyond regeneration. Taric has a baseball bat that he carried with him in the Hostel. Sonya has a kitchen knife that she has taken from the kitchen. Ta''Ron has a broom. Paulo has a metal pipe that he has taken from the gas pipes from the hostel. And Eric has got his hands on a golf club that was in a room when they checked the rooms in the hostel. The five people get out of the grocery store and on the street, they see many zombies coming toward them because of the door that was opened by Eric, and that opening has triggered a loud alarm that attracts dozens of zombies.

 RapOn - Part 13

    "We''re screwed." says Ta''Ron looking at the big wave of zombies coming toward them.


    "Look." says Eric pointing to a military truck at a hundred of meters from them.


    "Go!" says Paulo to the people, taking the lead and smashing the skull of the zombie that was close to touching his shoulder.


    The five survivors are running to that military truck. But one of them, that one being Eric, wasn''t fortunate enough to make the eleventh step, he got jumped by a zombie, who just jumped from the rooftop of the grocery store they just left, pin Eric down and bite his neck. Eric has tried his best to move this Jumper from him, but he couldn''t do it alone on his condition. Thankfully, Taric was there to push the zombie away and smash the head of the thing with his baseball head.


    "Eric!" yells Taric to Eric in a state of shock.


    Eric, who is covering the zone he was bitten by that zombie who just jumped on his back and pinned him to the ground, he looks in a sadness to Taric, then to his friends, who have stopped from moving to the military truck. Eric takes the hand from the wound, and takes it in both of his arm, his weapon he carries, the golf club, he looks at the upcoming zombies, coming from the left side of the grocery store, and look to his friends.


    "Stay strong!"


    "Eric!" yells Sonya to Eric.


    But Eric turned to the horde of zombie and runs to them with the golf club. As he was running to that horde, he was yelling his fighting spirit and tried his best to injure as many zombies as he can with the golf club. While Eric was fighting the small horde, the four survivors are running to the military truck, without looking back and ignoring the cries of pain of Eric who seems to not manage to fight the horde of zombies with a golf club.


    "Poor Eric." says Ta''Ron.


    "There was no other choice." says Paulo. "He made his mind."


    The four people are arriving at the military truck, they open the backside of the trailer, and there they see a few reanimated corpses of zombies that are looking at the people who disturbed their sleep. The zombies in that trailer were all having equipped military uniform, and all the twelve of the zombies are walking to the survivors.


    "Shit!" says Paulo looking at that horde who is coming to them.


    Taric, quickly takes from that trailer an assault rifle, aims it to the zombies in that trailer and shoots at them. But he only managed to kill ten zombies, while the other two were crawling to them. Taric is backing down, but he made a terrible mistake because he went more steps back than he should''ve done. Taric gets grabbed from behind, then he gets bitten on the back by a zombie. Taric yells out in pain.


    "Taric!" yells Sonya, and she runs there to help her friend.


    "Sonya! Don''t!" says Paulo.


    Sonya gets to Taric, she tries to help him, but as soon she grabbed Taric and tries to drag him from the zombie, the girl gets bitten on the left side of her face and yells in pain. She tires to fight that one zombie who has bitten her, but she then gets attacked by another zombie from her opposite side, who grab her neck and lunges on her face, eating her nose and gauging her eyes with the left arm.


    "Dammit!" says Paulo looking at the three people who just got killed in seconds.


    "We have to get out of here!" says Ta''Ron.


    Paulo looks back on the military truck trailer, there he and Ta''Ron are killing the zombies with their weapons, and the two of them are getting inside the military truck. When the two have entered the military truck, Ta''Ron closes the door behind, he looks to Paulo who is checking the bodies of the dead corpses that were killed by Taric. He finds a gun in a soldier vest, and he looks at Ta''Ron, who is shaking.


    "No. No. No. We will not do it."


    "What?" asks Paulo, then he looks at the gun. "Oh. No. We will not kill ourselves."


    "Then what?" asks Ta''Ron.


    Unauthorized tale usage: if you spot this story on Amazon, report the violation.


    "I don''t know, friend." says Paulo.


    The two stayed quiet for a few moments, listening to the growls and screeching of the zombies, and the faint yelling for help to come from Sonya and Taric, who are disappearing into the noises of the zombies made. The two friends are looking around the military trailer interior, and Ta''Ron, seems something blinking on a soldier corpse. He quickly goes over to that corpse, takes the device from the corpse and looks at it carefully. The device he holds it is something like a pager, and on the monitor, it displays a message in English: "The Organization has sent a squad to your location. It will arrive in 2 hours.".


    "God knows when the message was sent." says Paulo who was starting to lose hope.


    Ta''Ron does something on this pager device, which it displays the timestamp the message was sent, and the timestamp shows the message was sent one hour and fifty minutes ago. He tells this to Paulo who is feeling a little better, but he gets on his guard the moment a loud growl is heard outside. that growl was so loud, it could''ve been heard miles away from the help that is approaching with their helicopter.


    Ta''Ron and Paulo are sitting on the seat of the military cabin, staying with their weapons in hands, irritated by the zombies outsides who are banging with their hands and pushing the military truck. The two have come to the decision to remain there and accept their fate. In this cabin there are weapons, but most of them seem to look jammed and wrecked. Paulo has tried to go over to the driver seat, but he noticed the vehicle has run out of gas.


    "Now what do we do?" asks Ta''Ron after two minutes of not speaking, while the growling outside and the banging is louder.


    "We wait." says Paulo sounding defeated. "Wait for our deaths."


    "There''s really nothing we can do, ey?"


    "Nothing."


    Ta''Ron raises his fist to Paulo, he tells him to bump in.


    "Was nice to meet you, friend."


    "Same, my dear friend." says Paulo fist bumping Ta''Ron.


    The two remain in that military cabin, waiting for the time the zombies will break in and kill them. But, they will not go out without a fight, the two are preparing their weapons. Paulo takes a working shotgun that is on the cabin floor, on a deceased soldier body, loads it with the shells that were on the shotgun put on the attachment. Ta''Ron takes a pistol from one of the deceased soldiers in this cabin.


    A minute later, the two survivors, right when they were aiming their weapons to the military truck backdoor, they hear the loud sound of helicopter motor approaching their location. Paulo is opening the hatch from the upside of the military truck, upon opening, the loud sound of the helicopter is invading the interior.


    "Chivalry has come, man!" says Ta''Ron sounding happy.


    "Yes. They really did." says Paulo going back on the military truck.


    Outside, there is one helicopter that has arrived at the location. That one helicopter belongs to "The Organization", who are immediately firing on the zombies that have gathered on the military truck. This helicopter is using two miniguns, one of the left sides and another one on the right side, that are controlled by two people wearing "The Organization" anti-biting armour. In that helicopter, there is also a guy that is using a sniper rifle to kill the huge zombie.


    "I spot one Class F zombie approaching the military truck!" says that one dude with the sniper rifle in a German language.


    "Take him out." says the pilot in German language.


    "Yes, sir!"


    And the guy pulled the trigger of this rifle, who sends a bullet that flies through the thick skull of the class F zombie, making the thing fall on his stomach to two unfortunate crawlers zombies, who were crushed to death. With that zombie being killed, the two gunners on the helicopter proceed to open fire on the group of the zombies that are surrounding the military truck. Thankfully, none of the bullets hit the vehicle.


    After they''ve cleared the military truck, the two survivors from the trailer cabin, decide to open the hatch, get on the top of the cabin, raise their hands and yells the English word "Help!" because they think the people from that helicopter are Englishmen. But the soldiers have seen them waiving and yelling for help.


    "Look there." says one of the people on the helicopter. "There''s two people in there."


    "I see them." says the pilot of the helicopter.


    "They didn''t get shoot?" asks another soldier from the other side of the helicopter, controlling the second minigun. "Must mean the two are lucky."


    "No. That military truck is a certain type that cannot be easily taken down by hordes of zombies and class F zombies."


    "I see." says that soldier who asked the question. "We rescue them?"


    "For sure." says the co-pilot, and he looks down. "But let''s clear this town from zombies to create a safe zone. As we were ordered, you know?"


    "I know, man." says the pilot.


    The helicopter and the personnel in that helicopter proceeds to kill the hordes of zombies that are approaching the military tuck. While the helicopter was flying on a high altitude and killing zombies, one of the soldiers, the one with the sniper rifle, decides to give a message to the two survivors.


    "Hey, you two! If you want to live, hide yourself somewhere safe and protect yourself from these zombies! We will soon come in to help you two!"


    Ta''Ron and Paulo are getting out of the military truck, the two are running inside a building with the guns they''ve found in the military trailer. The building they''ve entered it looks to be a casino house, upon entering there, the entire place is in out of lights and hard to see. The two survivors have heard a growling sound of a zombie where they decided to close the door and go to another building. which is a second-hand clothing store, which was in a total mess. But there wasn''t any zombie in there.


    "We stay here?"


    "Yeah." says Paulo to Ta''Ron.


    Paulo closes the door after him, the two are going to the office room, where they decided to stay in there and rest until the helicopter clean the area from these deadly creatures called zombies.

 RapOn - Final Part

    ***


    An hour later, the helicopter is landing on a free zone, when they''ve landed, the soldiers are getting out of their helicopter, walk toward the military truck, all armed with weapons and taking down any zombie that dared to live after the cleaning. One of the soldiers goes into the military truck to check the interior, seeing there are a lot of deceased corpses of soldiers who are in Albania Military Program. That soldier goes over to the pager that was left by the two survivors inside the military truck cabin, checks when it was sent then he says.


    "We came too late."


    He takes the pager, puts it on one of the pockets under the anti-biting vest he''s wearing. The soldier gets out of the military truck trailer cabin and walks inside the store with the other soldiers. Where, he sees that Ta''Ron and Paulo are getting their temperature taken.


    "Both are having 36." says the soldier in German language after he has taken the temperature of the two survivors.


    "Good." responds the pilot of the helicopter, and he looks at the two, who were looking in awe at them, then he asks them in English language: "You speak English?"


    "Yes." says Ta''Ron. "I speak a little."


    Unauthorized tale usage: if you spot this story on Amazon, report the violation.


    "Great. You two will come with us to Slovakia base."


    "For real?" asks Ta''Ron sounding happy.


    "Yes." responds the pilot of the helicopter to the two survivors. "You two sure have gone through a lot from the looks of it."


    "We''ve been through some shit." says Ta''Ron to the soldier. "But we''ve survived. Thanks to you."


    "What do you mean?"


    "I-I it wasn''t for you two. We would''ve been killed by that giant zombie who was after us for likeˇ­ an entire day I think."


    "You two were running from a class F zombie?" asks a soldier in English. "And you couldn''t shoot on his face?"


    "We did not have any weapons at us. And we thought that thing was bulletproof."


    "To be fair," says a soldier from the group. "these things cannot be killed by any bullet. So, they are partially bulletproof."


    "Nowˇ­" says Ta''Ron after he translated what they discussed to Paulo. "What are we going to do?"


    "You two stay in here. Rest, while we are cleaning the area and contact the others. Understand?"


    "Yes." says Ta''Ron sounding happy, he then translates it to Paulo, who agrees by a shaking of its head.


    The two survivors are walking out of the second-hand clothing store, walks two more blocks into a flat complex, there they go inside it, walk to the first flat, open the door and the two are laying on the sofas, relaxing for real after a lot of running and fighting with these creatures. Paulo spots on the coffee table a bottle of tequila, which he lunges over to it, opens it and takes a sip from it, then he hands it to Ta''Ron, who is taking a sip from it.


    "We''ve made it." says Paulo.


    "Yes, we did." responds Ta''Ron who is sitting on the other side of the coffee table, and puts the bottle of tequila on the table.


    THE END OF PART 9

 Z stands for Zimbabwe - Part 1

    "God dammit! We missed it!" says a voice of a man getting at the rooftop of a normal looking hospital and seeing the last helicopter leaving the rooftop.


    After him, a group of seven more humans are following him, arriving at the rooftop, unarmed and looking at the helicopter of "The Organization" heading out. All the survivors yelled for the helicopter to come back, but the helicopter opened the door while it was gaining altitude, from that helicopter, a soldier throws a sports bag with weapons and ammo, who is landing on the rooftop, at three steps from the group.


    "Listen up!" says that survivor speaking through a megaphone in an English language with a heavy accent. "The helicopter is over its capacity. Only way out from here for you people are to head by foot or by any ways to Camp Lemonnier! I repeat! Only way out from here for you people are to head by foot or by any methods to Camp Lemonnier!"


    "And where''s that camp?" asks a woman to that announcer, who is already closing the helicopter door.


    A lot of people from the group yelled for the helicopter to come back and pick them up, but it was to no use, the helicopter has long been gone. And what they''ve left behind wasn''t anything to useful for them. In that sports bag lays two 9mm handguns, four knives, and a machete.


    The eight survivors are looking at each other, and at the sports bag.


    "Listen up!" says a male who is looking to be strong. "In this bag there are only two handguns with only one clip, full. Who''s good with weapons besides me?"


    "I am." responds another male from the group. "I often go on Sundays to target practices."


    "Good enough." says that survivor and hands the handgun to the person, then he takes the remaining handgun. "I was a cop last year. Now I am a retired one. But I can still shoot."


    "Whatever you say." responds a young man taking from the sports bag the machete. "I will be taking this one. Thank you."


    "What''s your name?" asks the tall, buffy, black ex-policeman, dressed in civilian type clothes, shaved and with thick eyebrows to the young man. "My name is Chidi."


    "I am Dumisa." says the young man with African ethnicity, shaved, dressed in a pair of jeans and a white t-shirt with the machete.


    "My name''s Giconi." says another young with African ethnicity man with an afro style, with a shirt and a pair of jeans, taking two knives from the sports bag.


    "Eze." responds the person that who is wearing an office outfit with a messy black hair, black by the skin colour, who got his hands earlier on the 9mm handgun.


    "My name is Chimola." responds another African ethnicity human from the group who is wearing messy clothes with a lot of blood on it and wielding an axe on his hands, bald, is the one who arrived first on the rooftop of the hospital.


    "Kalisha." responds an African ethnicity female doctor from the group, wearing a doctor uniform, a bandana to cover her head, holding on her right hand a metal pipe that is soaked in blood.


    This content has been unlawfully taken from Royal Road; report any instances of this story if found elsewhere.


    "My name''s Monifa." says a Zimbabwean woman speaking in the native language, wearing a yellow dress that is covered in blood and ripped on the things zone, hair cut short, carrying a baseball bat.


    "My name is Akinyi." says the third female of the group, who is originally from Zimbabwe by her accent, wearing a jumpsuit, having black dreadlocks, carries on her hands a baseball bat with wires tied all around it, just like the one Negan from The Walking Dead is carrying on his debut.


    "Good to meet all of you. Now, you all are thinking to get out of here to that said camp, or you have a better idea?" asks Chidi. "I am not a local to this place and I don''t know what exactly is the safest place we can stay."


    "How about we first try to get out of this rooftop and from the hospital." says Kalisha. "And then we''ll be thinking on what we are going to do next."


    "Sounds okay." says Chimola.


    And the group of eight survivors are leaving the rooftop, entering the interior of the hospital that is still standing.


    The place the eight survivors are escaping is known to be Parirenyatwa General Hospital, a hospital that is located in the city of Harare, Zimbabwe. A hospital known to his good reputation to help local people to be cured of mild and dangerous illness. And this hospital has served as a point of extraction for the people who managed to came to the rooftop earlier than the group of eight people.


    The eight people have managed to get on the first floor by taking the stairs rather than going with the lift that is blocked on the level three. When the survivors got on the first floor, the group observes a group of five zombies who are walking toward the direction of the survivors. Chimola, Dumisa and Giconi are running to those zombies, smashing and stabbing the five zombies that are in their ways.


    "Why we couldn''t use guns?" asks Kalisha to Chidi.


    "Because zombies are attracted to noise." responds Chidi to Kalisha question. "You want to get mauled by zombies before we get to leave this hell?"


    The female doctor didn''t say anything back to Chidi.


    The eight survivors are continuing their running from the Hospital. They get on the ground floor, and there they see the mess, that was like in any other floor on this entire place. But on the ground floor, the door and the windows are broken, dozens of bodies laying on the floor and four zombies munching on dead bodies. The group of eight survivors are taking down the four zombies in a minute by stabbing their heads with the knives and machetes.


    "Jesus!" says Eze looking around the ground floor. "This is madness."


    "The sun is about to settle." says Chidi to the group of seven people that are following him, pointing at the sun that is slowly settling down. "We have to seek shelter here."


    "Why?" asks Monifa. "We can''t walk on the night?"


    "Zombies are more dangerous on the night." responds Akinyi. "I''ve seen how dangerous they were in the auto shop I''ve been hiding."


    "Oh, you''re a mechanic?" asks Eze. "Cool."


    "Thanks." responds Akinyi to Eze compliment.


    "Look out!" says Giconi to a zombie that is walking on all four on the stairs they''ve taken earlier.


    The group is getting out from the hospital and starts running down the street for a while. While the group was running down the street, they''ve encountered zombies that were coming after them, but the group managed to protect themselves. But, their running went downhill after one of their survivors tripped on a corpse, who immediately reanimated and munched on the leg of that survivor. The survivor who died is Kalisha.


    "Get this thing out from me!" yells Kalisha in pain as she was munched by the zombie on her leg.


    Chidi quickly came to aid, he shoots the thing head, after he saw the thing died, he moves from the leg of Kalisha and looks over to the wound. Survivors are looking on the streets and sees a lot of zombies coming to them. Chidi decides to aim the gun to Kalisha head, and he says to her.


    "I am sorry."


    "No. Please! Do-"


    But the man pulls the trigger, where the bullet goes through the brain of the woman. Chidi takes the metal pipe from the woman, and smashes the head of a zombie that was close to them. The survivors did not say anything to the things that have happened. All understands that what this ex-policeman did was to give her mercy kill, rather than let her be eaten alive by the zombies in this city and came back as a zombie. The now group of seven survivors are continuing their runs from the horde of zombies, who some have stopped to eat the corpse of the dead doctor named Kalisha.

 Z stands for Zimbabwe - Part 2

    ***


    The group of seven people haven''t gone that far from their starting line from Hospital. They have killed zombies that were in their way, hitting with their melee weapons because if they were trying to use their firearms, this would''ve alerted more zombies from a bigger area. The people have managed to cross the street and get inside a sports club because of their leader of the pack, who has seen it as a place to rest.


    "Let''s get inside this place." says Chidi.


    "Alright!" says most of the survivors who did not stay too much to think about this.


    The group of seven people are running toward the entrance, but as they were running to that place, someone from the group, Dumisa, stops from running and looks back, seeing a horde of zombies walking to them. Dumisa is looking back on the group, and decides to do something that is considered to be dumb by some people.


    "Hey!" yells Dumisa to the group holding the machete. "I am going to make the zombies follow me!"


    "Dumisa!" says Giconi to Dumisa who has stopped from running and looks back to his friend.


    "We will meet again on the Camp Lemonnier!" says Dumisa, then he starts running on the other direction, yelling and trying to make the zombies follow them.


    Dumisa has managed to make some of the zombies follow him, and he did that by smashing the machete on the nearby vehicles and yelling bad slurs to the zombies to follow him. The team of now six people are looking at Dumisa who is running from the north direction, to the other side that is leading to the entrance/exit of Harari. But they did not look too much because the entire group is entering the Harari Sports Club interior. When they got in there, Akinyi and Giconi are closing the doors and blocking with furniture, while the other four people, Chimola, Chidi, Monifa and Eze, are killing the zombies on the interior in this place.


    After a while, the group has finished off the twelve zombies from this interior, and now all six of them can have a rest after this fight, running and smashing heads of zombies. All six of the survivors are gathering in the lobby room, takes a few boxes that are lying around, chairs and any sports equipment and uses it as a way to sit. They all make from this equipment like a circle and sparked a conversation on what to do from now.


    If you encounter this narrative on Amazon, note that it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it.


    "Now what are we going to do?" asks Chimola to Chidi. "We can''t just stay here forever, right? The city is falling."


    "We rest." says Chidi to Chimola, then he looks at the rest of the people, and tells them the same thing. "We rest here. And we are waiting for the things outside to calm down."


    "Then what?" asks Giconi who has calmed down after he saw his friend leaving the group.


    "Do you guys think Harare Train Station works?" asks Akinyi.


    "I don''t know." says Chidi.


    "It is worth a shot." says Chimola. "Don''t you all think?"


    "I also think it would work." says Monifa to the group. "The apocalypse has started like yesterday. Maybe there is still one train that hasn''t moved from rails."


    "And you can make it work?" asks Akinyi.


    "No." says Monifa toward the mechanic girl. "Do you?"


    "Yes." says Akinyi with a smug on her face. "My uncle worked in there, and he gave me countless tours when I was little."


    "Convenient." says Chidi starting to feel better about this.


    "Did your uncleˇ­?" asks Eze to Akinyi.


    "Last thing I heard he got into a train and drove it to Zimbabwe." responds Akinyi to the group. "Hopefully he''s safe out there."


    "And the trains all go there?" asks Chimola to Akinyi. "You do know where they are going, right?"


    "I don''t know their routes. But I do know most of the routes are going to Zimbabwe."


    "It''s worth a shot, like I said." says Monifa. "But how are we going there? You don''t suggest walking, right? It''s like two to three kilometres from here. And from what I''ve heard the Avenue is heavily blocked from traffic."


    "Three kilometres." says Giconi. "That''s like ten minutes of walking. But it is risky to do that, especially since we aren''t fully equipped."


    "And these sports equipment," says Eze looking at the cricket bats, boxing gloves and other sports equipment. "doesn''t look sturdy enough."


    "We take a car." says Chidi.


    "A car. For five people?" asks Chimola. "And where do you think we will find that car?"


    After about an hour of staying in silence in that room, a horn of a bus is heard from outside. The group of five survivors hears the horn and are running to the windows. Chimola opens the curtains and see a bus who is stopping near the sports club. From that bus, a guy slides down the window and yells.


    "Is anyone in there?"


    "Oh my God!" says Giconi who recognized the man voice. "It is Dumisa."


    "That lucky young man." says Chidi with a smile.

 Z stands for Zimbabwe - Part 3

    ***


    A bus is stopping in front of Harari Train Station. On that place, who once was filled with people who were commuting from home to work, beggars who were coming here in hope to get a quarter, teenagers who came here to skip classes or do any of the stuff they could do in a train station. Now this place, has a darker atmosphere, and it is not because it is around 15 o''clock, it is because it looks abandoned. Now, instead of alive humans, this place has countless zombie bodies who are moving and looking around aimlessly.


    "So, this is the train station." says Chidi to Dumisa who is on the driver seat.


    "Yes." says Dumisa. "Hopefully it still has a train."


    "It will have." says Akinyi to Dumisa, who is getting out of her seat and takes her wired baseball bat. "Thanks for the ride."


    "It was my pleasure. Sorry if I couldn''t provide any weapons to all of you."


    "It is okay." says Chidi.


    "Are you sure you don''t want to tag along?" asks Giconi to Dumisa.


    "It''s alright, friend. I will find a way to get out of this city and get to that camp. I still have to look for somebody."


    "That somebody is family, right?" asks Giconi.


    "For me, it is." responds Dumisa.


    The group of six survivors, Chidi, Chimola, Monifa, Giconi, Eze and Akinyi, get out from the bus who has helped them go three kilometres to this train station. The road toward this place wasn''t blocked like the avenue where there are a bunch of heavy gear like tanks and cars blocking the road. The route they have taken was Josiah Tongogara Street, where they''ve taken a left to Seventh Street. The bus ran until it had to take a left to Greenwood Park, and march straight to Herbert Chitepo Avenue, which had some blockages like zombie bodies who were killed by buildings who were set in fire during the outbreak that was four days ago. When they reached the Mangawa Rd, they have taken a right, passing Jason Mphepo Little Theatre, who was like most places from the area, tarnished.


    The team hasn''t stopped at the steps of the train station, it is at around 100 meters distance from it because a lot of tents have been installed near region by the people who are wearing this weird logo with the name "The Organization". But these tents, have all been abandoned by doctors and researchers, meaning this outbreak it is worse than what was once Coronavirus for the whole world.


    After Dumisa has left the area, and the six survivors bid farewell with him, all of them are going inside these tents to check for some valuable weapons or supplies to help them keep going further to Camp Lemonnier. Around this zone were only six standing big tents, and eight tents who have been destroyed by either zombies or survivors trampling the zone in a hurry. Chidi finds under a table an AK-47. The man looks at it, inspects its ammo content and finds the gun doesn''t have any bullet left.


    A case of literary theft: this tale is not rightfully on Amazon; if you see it, report the violation.


    "Found a weapon." says Chidi to Chimola.


    "Cool." says Chimola.


    "But it is empty." says Chidi showing the content to Chimola who has approached to inspect the gun.


    "Darn." says Chimola.


    "Found medicine." says Eze coming in the tent where Chimola and Chidi are inspecting.


    "What medicine?" asks Chidi.


    "Look for yourself." says Eze who is handing the bag of medicine. "I don''t have it with the medicines."


    "I understand." says Chidi who is taking the bag, puts on the table and looks through its contents. "We have something hereˇ­ Yesˇ­ Painkiller. Paracetamol. Plasters. Coughing syrup," he finishes checking the bag in about a minute and looks over to Eze. "You did good. These will help us in case of something bad."


    Chimola goes over to the table and beats into the wood with the fingers. The guy is a little superstitious. But the two did not mind this, continuing to search the zone for some useful supplies. Chimola and Chidi are going outside the tent, where both of them see Akinyi coming at them with a sports bag, followed by Monifa and Giconi.


    "I''ve hit the Jackpot!" says Akinyi going with the sports bag to Chimola and Chidi.


    The mechanic woman let the sports bag on the ground, wide opened, revealing a lot of firearms with a lot of the clips for different ammo types. Chimola is looking through the sports bag, sees something worthy in there, takes it from the sports bag and shows to the people a flare gun, but without any flares.


    "We can use it for communication." says Chimola.


    "But there''s no flare gun ammo in there." says Chidi.


    "Flare gun ammo?" asks Chimola.


    "What are they called?" asks Chidi.


    "I believe it is called flare gun ammo." says Akinyi. "But whatever they are called, we have got to keep that thing with us. WE never know when we can get our hands on one of those."


    The group of people are looking through the available weapons in that bag, and they are taking what they can use. Chimola has taken a sawed-off shotgun, lupara, because his father, who was in the Army at that time, had something like this. Illegally of course, but they let them keep it.


    Chidi takes the empty flare gun because he already has a weapon, a handgun, known by the name of Glock 21. Akinyi takes from that bag a submachine gun, a Micro-Uzi.


    "Why?" asks Eze to Akinyi.


    "I used to play a lot of Left 4 Dead in my free time," says Akinyi. "this was always one of my most favourable weapon in game."


    "Hope you know how to use it in real life." says Chimola to Akinyi.


    Akinyi proceeds to check the clip of the weapon, she looks at it carefully and notices the weapon is fully loaded. Didn''t count the amount of bullet, and she puts the clip back to where it was.


    Monifa takes from the sports bag a handgun, a Desert Eagle gun. She has taken this weapon at the first sight. Giconi takes a Micro-Uzi. And Eze takes an M-4 assault rifle style because it was the last gun in that bag.


    After everyone has taken their weapons, they take the ammo clips in there, everyone puts them under their belts, in their pockets, or in Akinyi case, in her bra. The group of six people are going toward the train station, to the interior of the building to check for anything useful to them.

 Z stands for Zimbabwe - Part 4

    The group of six survivors arrive at the front doors of this train station, they all push the door, who were all blocked by piles of zombies and dead humans bodies. After they opened the doors wide enough to get inside, the group enters the building, one by one. The first one was Chidi, where, after he made the first three steps inside this room, he notices a zombie walking to him, and by instinct he pulls the trigger of his Glock 21, aiming the head of the thing, and looking at the zombie falling on the floor after a shot in the head.


    "Oops." says Chidi in a whisper, looking scared at the thing he committed.


    Then, a lot of the zombies, who were laying on the floor, proceeds to get up, one by one, slowly. Chidi looks around, sees about seventeen zombies rising on their two legs. But thankfully, the other members of the group are entering the building and starts to open fire on the zombies who are rising to their feet. And more zombies start to rise on their feet.


    "We have to run!" says Chimola.


    "Where?" asks Eze as he shoots five zombies who are crawling from the bathroom stalls.


    "The office!" yells Akinyi where she takes the lead, running toward the corridor infested with zombies.


    The six people are entering a room, there they see a zombie who''s turning to them, but that zombie is quickly getting killed by Chimola who is smashing his axe into the head of the zombie, leaving on the body who''s falling on the floor. Chimola is looking around the place, and sees a pack of keys laying on the table.


    "Are these the keys to the train?" asks Chimola looking over to the keys.


    "No." says Akinyi who is closing and locks the door from the threat that are following them. "Trains are not supposed to have keys. They have switches."


    "I see." says Chimola who is putting the keys back on the table.


    You might be reading a stolen copy. Visit Royal Road for the authentic version.


    "What are we going to do?" asks Eze to Akinyi. "We followed you here to stay and wait to be eaten?"


    "No." says Akinyi looking around, and spots a computer, she goes to that computer, where she notices it is still working. "Good thing the electricity didn''t fall completely."


    "What are you doing?" asks Chidi looking at Akinyi who is starting to check the computer.


    "I am looking for available tracks. I see we have only one train available for us, but not many free tracks to help us get to Mozambique."


    "Why Mozambique?" asks Giconi.


    "I am thinking to get a boat from there." says Akinyi.


    "And we''ll use it to get to that camp?" says Chidi.


    "Yes."


    "Good." says Monifa who is looking at the door that starts to be hit by the zombies from the hallway. "Could you guys hurry? We are in deep trouble."


    "How do we get out of here?" asks Eze.


    "Window."


    "We are the first floor," says Eze to Akinyi who is getting out of the computer and smashes the window by throwing the chair she just sat on. "are you going to jump?"


    "You want to be eaten by zombies?" asks Akinyi.


    Eze looks back at the door, he hears the knocks and the growls are getting louder, and he immediately jumps first from the window, landing in the ground on his ass. He looks back and sees the survivors from his group getting out one by one. He hears a few zombies coming from the rails, where Eze decides to take out his weapon and shoots the threat.


    After all the survivors have climbed out from the window, all are running to the available train, that is situated on the line number two. Akinyi goes to the driver seat, while the other five are getting inside in the one of the wagon train. The train has only two wagons, who were all having a few dead bodies and zombies in there. And the survivors decide to get to dirty business and clean up the two train wagons that had around twelve zombies in total. They only focused on the zombies, letting the dead bodies in there because they don''t have enough time to worry about this. While the fighting ensues in wagons, Akinyi is working on the train and killing the driver who has now become a zombie.


    In just three minutes, of intense fighting in the train, and the survivors shooting the upcoming zombies that are walking toward the train, Akinyi manages to make the train work, and she proceeds to make it move a few switches on the correct sequences. When the train was moving on a normal speed, many zombies continue to run and walk to the train, but it was pointless for them to catch it as the huge machine started to pick up speed, leaving the station in just a minute, and the horde of zombies who were close to have a feast.

 Z stands for Zimbabwe - Part 5

    ***


    "Are there more?" asks Eze after he and Chimola has dumped a body of a dead human in the other train wagon.


    "Yes." says Chimola looking back at the first train wagon, empty from dead bodies and zombie corpses.


    Chimola, Eze, Monifa, Chidi and Giconi are in the first train wagon, sitting and waiting for the train to reach its destination. And Akinyi is at the train driver seat, controlling the train to move forward and not stop a bit. In the second wagon lays all the dead bodies and zombie corpses who were killed by the squad of the five survivors.


    "You think it will be safe out there." asks Monifa to the group, laying on her butt on two seats like it is some sort of bed.


    "What do you mean?" asks Giconi who is sitting on the left side.


    "I mean. What if that said camp is actually safe for us? What if it is like in the movies where a camp gets raided by zombies and the military fails to contain."


    "Not going to happen." says Chidi to Monifa. "I''ve been in the Army for a few months. I''ve seen the weapons they''ve got. And judging by the way these things infected with this Z virus workˇ­ The military would survive."


    "But why they didn''t do it when this apocalypse begun? They let everyone fend for themselves."


    "That''s not what they did." says Chidi who is approaching to Monifa and sits on the other seat to face her. "I''ve been in police for a long timeˇ­ These people from "The Organization" gave us something. A manual to read. They''ve given to me and my team ten years ago. Told us we will deeply need it in the future, and we all brushed it off and left it somewhere. I didn''t read it completely. Only a page or so, and then dumped it."


    "So, this "The Organization" is the one who we are going to trust? Rather than our own military?"


    "Pretty much." says Giconi, then he decides to lighten the mood and change the conversation: "What jobs you guys had before this? I''ll go first. I was a university student, in engineering with my friend, Dumisa, but we both worked in this company for a while, before we decided to leave it."


    "Why?" asks Monifa to Giconi.


    "The Boss was a prick. Hopefully he died."


    "I hope mine too." says Chimola. "I worked as a cashier for a few months, then decided to quit the job and become a stall seller for my friend. Left it because of the boss who continued to do sexual assaults on me. He was into men."


    "Disgusting." says Chidi.


    "You worked in the police force?" asks Eze.


    "Yes, son." says Chidi. "I was most of the time at the office where nothing big happened."


    "I was a footballer for the team Zimbabwe Tigers." says Eze.


    "Heard about it." says Chidi to Eze. "You guys had a rough season."


    "Yes. One who lead to relegation and disband."


    "That''s a bummer." says Giconi, and he looks at Monifa. "Where you worked?"


    "Ice cream vendor." says Monifa. "Not missing the job one bit."


    "Why?"


    "That was the only job I was qualified for. Serving food and everything."


    The group continues to talk a bit about their lives before this apocalypse has hit the entire planet. While they were talking, Giconi is looking outside at the window, and sees a zombie running at full speed toward the train. But Giconi decides to ignore that zombie rather to alert the people of its existence and continues to listen into the conversation he just created on this train. Giconi notices the smell of urine, poop and blood from the zombies and the dead bodies they''ve found in the train isn''t leaving the air even if they opened all the windows.


    This content has been misappropriated from Royal Road; report any instances of this story if found elsewhere.


    "Hello!" says the announcer coming from the loudspeakers installed in the train wagons. "Here''s Akinyi speaking! We are going to go straight to Mutare which is for two hours or so. From there we will have to find another way to go to Mozambique."


    "But why?" asks Giconi to the loudspeaker.


    But nothing came from the loudspeaker back to response, because Akinyi has come into the first wagon with a map to show them one of the reasons they cannot go in there. Akinyi and everyone from the train wagon are gathering around the map, looking at it and reading the writing that it is on the map written in the Shona language, one of the sixteen official languages that Zimbabwe had. The map shows the entire region of Zimbabwe and a lot of marks with an "X" on cities and under them are written words like "Kuparadzwa" (Destroyed), "Kutorwa nezvikara" (Taken over by monsters) and "Isina kuchengeteka" (Unsafe). But all from one city on the map is not marked, and that one being Mutare.


    "So, we''re going in there?"


    "We are." says Akinyi. "It''s the only choice we have now. Other cities are dead."


    "But how do we know if we trust this map?" asks Chidi.


    "That''s too late," says Akinyi. "we are already going in there."


    "Wellˇ­" says Giconi. "Guess we go in there."


    "And from there we will have to find a way to get to Mozambique." says Chidi.


    "But to where in Mozambique?"


    "To any available dock."


    A while later, the small majority of the group has fallen asleep, those who did are Eze and Giconi, while the others are in the wagon, looking at the landscape of the ruined cities they are all passing by. And Akinyi is on the train conductor place, checking the train and making sure it will not crash into anything.


    "These two are sleeping like logs." says Monifa to Chimola and Chidi.


    "Yeah." responds Chidi who is looking through the map Akinyi has showed them earlier. "If the cities are infested or destroyedˇ­ We can still try to go in them and try to search for help."


    "Not really the best idea." says Monifa. "I saw on the news how many of the cities on our country have been devastated by these monsters."


    "I was suggesting it. Hopefully when we get to Mutare, we all have to face the worst."


    "Mutare wasn''t as populated like Harare.", says Chimola.


    "That is true." says Chidi. "But there may be chances for that city to be under the control of these zombies."


    "Speaking of zombies," says Monifa. "are we sure these things are dead for sure?"


    "What do you mean?" asks Chidi to Monifa question.


    "You may call me crazy after this one. And I will not blame you. When the apocalypse begun, I was only I and my granny in the home. I was attending her house, helping her to clean the house."


    "Granny?" asks Chimola. "How old are you again?"


    "Doesn''t matter." says Chidi to Chimola.


    "Anyway. As we were cleaning the house, our neighbour walked in the house, with a bite mark on his neck, yelling for help and all sorts of things to stop the pain from the biting. My granny has fallen on the floor unconscious, while I was running to my kitchen room to check the medicine I have. Like spiritus, cotton, things to stop the bleeding. But, when I arrived there, it was too late, the neighbour became a zombieˇ­ and ate my granny while I was goneˇ­ It is an image I will never forget, guys. But one thing I will not forget isˇ­ Granny stood up, and she pushed the neighbour back, then she pinned him to the ground. But then. Granny turned around, and she ran after me while I was jumping out of the window and running away from her house."


    The two people have listened to the conservation, both of them didn''t know what to say to this for the next minute, then Chimola asks.


    "So you''re sayingˇ­ The zombies are still humans?"


    "It is a possibility, right?" asks Monifa. "I mean. What I saw there, couldn''t be explained. Aren''t zombies supposed to be attracted by humans?"


    "They are." says Chidi. "I don''t understand it one bit. Did your granny got bitten, transformed into a zombie and then fought the zombieˇ­"


    "And she ran after you?" asks Chimola.


    "Yes." says Monifa sounding a little worried. "I know it is not the best time to bring it out, but this thing still remained on my mind for the following days while we were still in the lower danger threat. Never told anyone about this incident."


    "And you trust us to help you come to a solution to this?" asks Chimola.


    "Yes. You two seem to have more knowledge on these things than an ordinary ice cream vendor like me."


    "This is the first time I ever heard something like this," says Chidi. "so, I don''t know what to say."


    "Me neither." says Chimola. "But it would be game changing if these zombies can still be human after transformation."


    "Likeˇ­ Control them?" asks Chidi.


    "More like we can control their abilities and use them to fight like fire with fire."


    "I see." says Chidi. "But, that is not possible."


    "That is what we said when zombies were on movies," says Giconi who just woke up from his sleep. "but now look at it. We have a lot of zombies all around us."


    The group did not argue further about this, because they heard a bang coming from the second wagon. The group of four people, Eze still sleeps, are looking at that door of the locked wagon scared. Chidi is taking the knife from his belt, he rises from his seat, walk toward the door and he opens it. From that door, a zombie walks out of the wagon, but in the next second, gets stabbed into the head, of the brain zone, and then the zombie is pushed back into the wagon by Chidi. The zombie lies on the floor of the moving wagon.


    "I shot that thing earlier." says Chidi scared.


    "Y-You did?" asks Giconi coming over to Chidi, and looking scared at the zombie he just killed, he remembers that zombie. It is the one he killed on their cleaning in this wagon.


    The group closes the door of the wagon, Chidi locks it and then drag a few detached seats from the wagon, moves them to that door and use it as a blockage to that door.


    "They can come back to life?!" asks Monifa scared.


    "Looks like it." says Giconi who is as terrified as the other by this thing they just saw.

 Z stands for Zimbabwe - Part 6

    A few moments later, the train that has come from Harare stops in the train station Mutare. The moment the train has stopped in the station, the group of five people are leaving the train wagons, armed with fire weapon and melee weapons. Then Akinyi, who was controlling the train the whole time, gets out of the train, with her submachine gun and sprains a few bullets to the upcoming zombies, who were walking toward her. When the woman opened fire, the others have opened fire and started to shoot the zombies coming to them.


    "Where to?" asks Akinyi seeing her teammates are taking aim and shoots the upcoming zombies.


    "Let''s leave the station first!" says Chidi.


    The whole group of six people are killing the zombies who are walking toward the group, but all of them are taken out easily by guns and the melee weapons. And there weren''t as many zombies as they were in Harari, there were only sixteen zombies in this whole station. But more to come after the loud barraging of the guns the group has used to eliminate these snarling and growling zombies. The run from the station was fast and without incidents for the six people who have gone through a lot of disasters on these flowing days.


    "We have to find a way to rest for the night." says Chidi to the group pointing out outside is the night, and the lights of this city are dead.


    "It''ll be hard to see where we will be going as this darkens." says Eze reloading his assault rifle without any problem.


    "You know how to reload a gun like this?" asks Chidi to Eze looking impressed, but on this darkness, it is hard to tell.


    "Yes. I learned in CS: GO 3."


    "Another fellow gamer." says Akinyi approaching Eze, and raising her hand. "High Five."


    This novel is published on a different platform. Support the original author by finding the official source.


    Akinyi and Eze are doing a high-five, but then they are disturbed by the appearance of a zombie who just screeched on the rooftop of a building and jumped toward the survivors, but the thing smashed the skull on the pavement, at ten meters away from the survivors. For reference, the thing has screamed has jumped from a building that is at a distance from thirteen meters way from survivors.


    "That thing just committed suicide?" asks Eze to the group.


    "Looks like it." says Giconi, and he aims toward a nearby building, where from the front door a zombie gets out, but it is shot in the head the moment it got out from there.


    "We''re moving forward, guys!" says Chidi walking further the "H" Avenue.


    The whole group walks for a few hundred meters into the "H" Avenue, encountering only some zombies who were coming after them, but they got killed by the fire weapons and the melee weapons the survivors are carrying with them. Most of these said gun kills were made by Chidi. Akinyi, Eze and Chimola, while Monifa, was too afraid to hold a weapon, has used the wired baseball bat that Akinyi has handed to her in exchange for the weapon Monifa had it. And Monifa has done some kills with that bat, but only three zombies who were coming from behind and close to the group.


    After the group has arrived at the Herbert Chitepo Street, the first thing they see in there are a lot of cars that are forming blockages on the streets, a lot of bodies of humans who were eaten by zombies, a wrecked building and three zombies eating from a human body. The group has taken a left, ignoring those three zombies who were still munching into the dead body of that human and run on slow speed to Institute Avenue, where they have taken a right because of a truck and a trailer that is blocking the entire said street.


    Coming into that Avenue, the group see there are a lot of cars packed that blocks the road, and so they are running inside a house, where they are closing the door behind them and blocking it by these zombies from outside with a large sofa. After the group moves the sofa on the door, they check the entire place to be sure it is safe from zombie activity, a check that took a few minutes. Then, the group decides to rest here for the night, and continue their run in the morning. Everyone besides Eze have gone to sleep, where Eze decides to stay on watch for the night since he was the one who has slept two hours in the train.

 Z stands for Zimbabwe - Part 7

    ***


    "Honey!" says a voice after opened the door of a house and walking two steps inside the house. "I am ho-"


    But a zombie jumps from the couch, to the face of that man.


    Eze wakes up from the nightmare he just had it, and he looks around with the assault rifle in his hands, but deactivate it from firing it. He looks around, breathing heavily and sweating after this nightmare he just had.


    "it Was a nightmareˇ­" says Eze in a whisper having a look at Chidi, who is sleeping on the couch in the living room where Eze stays leaning on the wall.


    Eze raise up from his seat, and walks slowly out of the house he and his team has taken minutes ago. After Eze has arrived at the street, he looks around and sees the zombies that have followed them have disappeared from the scenery, meaning these creatures have found other humans to eat or smell of blood of humans and animals. Eze walks toward the house on the other side of the street, he checks the door to see if it is locked. The door is opening by Eze, and the man walks inside that house, he makes three steps inside the house, then he hears a snarl coming from the room on his right. Eze quickly aims his weapon at that direction, disables the safe mode and shoots the moment that zombie came on close distance to the gun Eze''s holding.


    After two shoots to the head, the thing trips over and falls on the floor with the face on a dish, breaking it, remaining lying without any air on that floor. Eze looks at the thing, he lets''s out a sigh of relief and continues to check out the interior of the house. The man goes in the living room, where he doesn''t see too much because of the darkness and the electricity system doesn''t work. But out of the instinct, he decides to switch the lights, which it worked, making Eze feel amazed.


    Unauthorized usage: this tale is on Amazon without the author''s consent. Report any sightings.


    "Ho-How did this house have any ele- Solar panels. Of course."


    Eze looks at the interior of the house, which it shows to be gruesome for him because there is an infant baby, that has been eaten it''s the entire torso and head, and next to that baby lays an eaten body of a little girl. with a knife stabbed in her throat. Eze, decides to take out the knife, and stabs it to the opened part of the skull, which reveals a part of the brain of the corpse. After he did the deed, Eze shuts the eyes of the small girl with his hands covered in blood from all the killing he did from Harari to here, he looks at the poor corpse of the girl and says to her.


    "I know. I did this to make sure you will not become one of them." he says glances on the body of the zombie he just killed.


    The man catches a glimpse of a photography that is on the wall. He gets up, goes over to that picture, takes with his hands and looks over to the picture, that reveals a happy family of four, a woman, a man and two girls, one resembling the one Eze stabbed the brain and the infant that has been eaten. Eze looks at the picture sad, then a tear falls from his eye.


    "I am sorry." he said after he put the picture back on the wall.


    Eze turns around, heads out from the living room, he switches the lights off, and heads outside from the house, closing the door behind him. When he got out, Eze sees five zombies coming toward him, the noise from the assault rifle and the light from the house might''ve attracted them. Eze decided to turn to the right direction and run toward the blockage.


    When the man got near a car, he starts to break the window of that car with the gun, and sees on the passenger seat a small screwdriver. Takes the screwdriver and decides to use it as a weapon to silently kill these five zombies. But he only killed four of these zombies with stabs to the head, and one with a gun smashed to the skull of the deformed zombie. But to make sure the zombie dies, he stabs the brain with the screwdriver.


    After this action, Eze decides to head back into the house, but as soon as he was walking a few steps, he hears the jet sounds of an aeroplane flying pass this city. Eze looks up, but he couldn''t see too much of it, but he can see the lights of a plane flying on a high altitude and looking like it ascends. Eze looks over to that plane, wondering who is flying a plane at this hour of the day.

 Z stands for Zimbabwe - Part 8

    ***


    Tomorrow morning, the entire group gets out of the house, armed and ready for a new day to get to safety. Their plan is to get out of the city, by getting to the Police Camp because of Chidi who thinks they can go in there, to see if there is anything valuable in there to help to get out of Zimbabwe and get to Mozambique territory. The group have agreed unanimously to go in there and check what is in there.


    After a running in the streets and killing zombies on the roads, the group arrives at the front of the Police Camp, who is barely standing. The entire place has been burned from the ground, but it didn''t fall completely, only partially of it. The group still, seeing the place could collapse any moment, decide to get inside the place to check for supplies. The doors of this place are wrecked, making it easier for the survivors to get inside the interior of this place.


    The six humans are walking in the hallway, then they go in the first room, which is a locker room, and in there they start raiding the lockers. During their search, the group has found only a few batteries, a torch, a map of Mutare and some snacks. The group decides to go to the next room, which is an office room, and there they encounter three zombies, whom are taking down by Chidi, Chimola and Akinyi individuals of melee weapons. The group did not find anything worthy in that room, and so they go to check another room.


    Upon getting in the hallway, the group observes a zombie that is coming from outside. Chimola sees the zombie is looking at them and then starts to sprint toward them. But that zombie is put down by Akinyi who used the knife and with the help of Chidi who is using his other knife to stab the brain zone.


    "This thing started running." says Akinyi to the group looking at the lifeless corpse of the zombie.


    "Seems like these things can run." says Giconi. "I am not sure how, but I can say it is something about the evolution of the virus."


    "Check this out." says Chimola coming from a third room, carrying with her a crowbar covered in blood.


    "Someone was a fighter in here." says Chidi taking that crowbar, looking at it, and then he gives it back to Chimola. "Where was it?"


    "In an office room." says Chimola.


    "The blood on it looks fresh." says Chidi. "Means it must''ve been somewhere here recently."


    "Maybe they''re friendly." says Akinyi to Chidi.


    "Hopefully." says Chidi to Akinyi.


    The group remains in this place, checking the building for a few more minutes, and then they decided to leave the place and get outside, where they are continuing their walk to the border of Mozambique to Zimbabwe. But, the two didn''t make not even seventeen steps that they hear an explosion coming from nearby. The entire group were running toward the source of explosion.


    This content has been unlawfully taken from Royal Road; report any instances of this story if found elsewhere.


    ***


    The group of six people have arrived at the source where the explosion has happened. The place where the explosion occurred it''s on the street known by the locals under the name of Hosgood Avenue, near Barco Chemicals Mutare. The site of the explosion it has been happening it is on a building that is labelled as Portuguese club on the internet, but by some locals it is known to be a great place to come and eat a delicious meal that can be found in Portuguese culture. But now, this place it is on flames and on zombies.


    "What happened in there?" asks Giconi looking at the restaurant being in fire.


    "I don''t know." says Chimola to Giconi questions. "But whoever caused it, might''ve still been in there."


    The group of six people are taking weapons and proceed to shoot the upcoming zombies whom are leaving the fire. Some of these dead humans are running to the living humans while they are burned alive. Some of them have been screaming, growling and snarling from the pain of the fire and the bullets going through their necks and heads. A few of these bullets have gone through the zombies skulls, then goes through another zombie body. More than twenty zombies have been killed in this exchange of bullets. Twenty zombies who have been put back to dead for good.


    After this fight, the group reloads their weapons, they look at the building who is still on fire, but before they could decide to leave, they see someone leaving the fire. That person who left the building is someone who is wearing a firefighter costume, with mask and everything to protect him from the fire, who is someone who is also wearing a firefighter costume. The group of six people are leaving the guns down and are running to that person to help him carry that unknown person.


    "Help me!" says that person dressed in firefighter costume to the group stopping from the run at a safe distance from the flames. "Help me, please!"


    "We''re here!" says Chidi taking that injured person that was carried by that unknown firefighter.


    "What happened?" asks Monifa to that unknown person.


    "Not the timeˇ­" says that person to Monifa. "Please. Help me get at the hideout. And I''ll provide you with the supplies you need it."


    The group of six people decide to help these two unknown people get to their hideout which is located not far from here. The group is walking to the van these two people have used to come here. The injured person in firefighter suit is carried by Chidi and Giconi, Eze and Chimola are helping the other firefighter walk since he is as injured as the one the two are carrying. And Akinyi with Monifa are running in front of the group, killing the zombies who are coming in their way, which weren''t more than three who were walking and five who were crawling.


    After a short run that took a minute, the group arrives at the Mercedes-Benz van these two have used to arrive here, and they place the survivors in the van. Chidi decides to go on the driver seat, and the others go on the backseat to look after the upcoming zombies. While Chidi was trying to make the van go, Eze and Akinyi have killed three zombies who were approaching very close to the van by shooting them after Monifa opened the windows on the bot sides of the car. The van starts and Chidi presses acceleration and leaves the place that is getting destructed by fire and incinerate the corpses of zombies in that restaurant.


    "Where are we going?" asks Chidi driving the van through the roads with zombies, running some over and dodging some of them.


    "To Museum. You know where is it?" asks the person in firefighter suit holding his friend on his arms and taking the mask off to see his state of survival.


    "I am not a local." says Chidi to the firefighter.


    "It''s not far from here." says Chimola who is near Chidi, looking at the map they''ve found in that locker, and shows it where it''s the museum. "Look."


    "Okay. Tell me where to go, Chimola!"


    "To the left." says Chimola looking at the map.


    Chidi is turning to the left, running over a crawling zombie, but that run did not kill the zombies, it only destroyed its ribcage and kept the head intact. The van continues to go through the filthy street with a destination, Mutare Museum.

 Z stands for Zimbabwe - Part 9

    Later, the van arrives in front of the Mutare Museum, parking near the door of the building. The people get out of the car, help the injured ones walk inside the museum, where other three people, all armed with fire-weapons aims at the group of six people. these three people let the weapons down after the injured person dressed in firefighter costume ordered them to put the weapons down.


    "Quanda?" asks a man with a submachine gun.


    "Noah." says a woman wearing a soldier uniform that runs toward the group of six people, and helps the two injured people walk to a safe place to inspect their injures.


    "Thank youˇ­" says the injured firefighter who''s in a critical state of health.


    There comes another man, the man with the submachine gun helping the female soldier carry the two injured people to a room where they''ll see what they can do to make them feel better. The group of other six survivors have tried to make a step, but the third unknown person aims his pump shotgun to the group, tells them the following.


    "Stay here."


    "Please." says Chidi to that man with the pump shotgun. "We are trying to help you."


    "Lay off the weapons then." says the man to the group after he notices all the group are carrying guns. "Including the ones from close distance. Like axe, knives. Anything that can be used as a weapon."


    The group of six people are obeying the order. They leave the weapons on the ground, raise their hands up in sign of surrendering and look at the man with the pump shotgun who proceed to lay the gun slowly. The man let them pass to see the injured people, but one of them, Eze, remains in there to check the weapons.


    "Why aren''t you going with them?" asks the man to Eze.


    "I ain''t trusting you." says Eze looking serious to that man.


    "I get that a lot." says the man with the pump shotgun. "What? You think I''ll be taking your weapons and kill you all?"


    "Maybeˇ­"


    "Maybe? Ahaˇ­ What''s your name?"


    "Why don''t you tell me first?"


    "Alrightˇ­ Name is Udo."


    "Eze."


    "Good to meet you, Eze. Sayˇ­ Aren''t you a footballer?"


    "I was." responds Eze to the question of the man named Udo.


    "Member of Zimbabwe national Teamˇ­ Sucks to be dropped for marrying his daughter."


    "How do you know this?" asks Eze looking suspicious at Udo.


    "Internet." says Udo.


    Then, a screaming is heard and then a gun shot from a room where the two injured people have been dragged to being checked up. Guess one of these two have become zombie and got killed. Eze and Udo are running toward the room where the gun was heard. Arriving at the door frame, they see the corpse of a firefighter shot in the head. The corpse of the person that was in a critical condition was the one that had been killed.


    "It had to be done." says Chidi who is holding a second gun that he kept it hidden.


    "I know." says the female that is dressed as a soldier to Chidi. "We got a move the body of Noah from here."


    "Couldn''t be burry it?" ask the guy in the firefighter suit.


    "No." says the female soldier who is already taking the legs of Noah''s body.


    Chidi takes the other side of the body and starts to move it from this room. The group of six people are taking the body of the firefighter they just killed and throw him in the street, in a car and walks back to the Mutare Museum. The two groups have come to agreement to remain here for the rest of the day to rest after such a stressful day they had. The group of now ten people are gathering in a room that used to be the break room for the staff. All the people are sitting on chairs and uses milk crates as chairs, such as Eze and Akinyi.


    "How long have you been here?" asks Akinyi to Udo.


    Stolen novel; please report.


    Chidi and one of the survivors from the group that has taken shelter in this museum puts food on the table, food like snacks, candy bars, canned food and dog''s food. But Chidi has taken the dog food and put it away for reasons.


    "For two days." say Udo to Akinyi. "Where is your group from?


    "Harare." say Akinyi to Udo.


    "You came all the way from Harare to here? Why?"


    "For a boat in Mozambique." say Chidi after he and one survivor have put all the food on the table, then he looks at everyone who has gathered around him. "My group is going to Mozambique port to take a boat to Camp Lemonier."


    "Camp Lemonier?" asks Udo. "Why there?"


    "The Organization told us." say Chidi. "We were close to take a helicopter from them, but the helicopter left before we could join. But one of the pilots told us about that said Camp Lemonier is a base for The Organization."


    "They really left you like this?" asks the person that helped Chidi put the food on the table.


    "Yes."


    "Like us." say the female soldier of the second group, wearing an African soldier uniform and a pair of glasses with a helmet. "The Organization has ordered us to help survivors reach one of their bases and safe zones. Municipality Park was one of the said safe houses. But it got overrun, now."


    "You all four were part of a safe house?" asks Chidi.


    "Yes." says the female soldier. "All four of us have been living in that safe zone for a while. After it got overrun, most of the people have gone separate ways. Some have died in the overrun, others fend for themselves, and my group of soldiers, have gone their ways. I. I decided to help as many survivors as I can and lead them to a safe place. I managed to help five people."


    "And you did a good job." says a survivor from her group.


    "By any chance," says Chidi. "does the safe zone have some supplies. Like a flare gun ammo or something?"


    "I think so." says the female soldier to Chidi. "But why flare gun ammo?"


    Then, Chidi pulls up his flare gun that kept hidden under his belt. And he says to the female soldier.


    "Found it in Harare. Thought will help us to alert the Organization when we were getting closer to that said camp."


    "They probably have." say the female soldier. "That base still had some supplies stored in a locked house. Maybe we can find a working radio to alert and give our coordinates."


    "So, we''ll go tomorrow there?" asks Giconi.


    "It is worth a shot." say Udo. "The safe zone must''ve been cleaned by now."


    "Why we are not going now?" ask Chimola.


    "It''s too dangerous to go on the night." says the female soldier.


    "I know." say Eze.


    "What are your names?" asks Chimola. "To know that we can trust you."


    "Trust?" asks Udo to Chimola. "Don''t you think you are saying this a bit later than you should''ve. By now you all would''ve been killed and stole everything from you."


    "Udo." says the female soldier to the man, then looks back to the first group who seemed a little uneasy. "Sorry about my friend. He''s a bit of an asshole. But a good man inside. I am Abeni."


    "Name''s Quanda." says the man who helped Chidi set the table, wearing civilian clothes, but still having a nightstick and a gun holder with a 9mm, then he shows his badge to the people. "I was a cop of this jurisdiction."


    "Another cop." says Chidi to that policeman and he scoffs. "I am a retired one, son."


    "You looked like one." says Quanda to Chidi. "Name?"


    "My name is Chidi." say Chidi to Quanda.


    "I am Udo." say Udo, and he points at the man who sits near him, one of the people who wore a firefighter suit and helped the one dead evade the burning building. "He''s Samuel."


    "Hello." says Samuel who rise from the table and takes a protein bar from the table.


    "I am Akinyi." says the girl sitting on the milk crates, he points at Eze. "He''s Eze.", and points at Giconi. "And Giconi."


    "Sup?" say Giconi to the three people as he is cleaning the knives that were soaked in blood with a piece of cloth he found nearby.


    "My name''s Monifa." says Monifa.


    "Chimola." says Chimola.


    "Good." say Quanda. "Now we know each other. How about we split the food and start eating? I bet we are all hungry."


    "Yeah we are." say Chidi to Quanda.


    And the group of ten people are going at the table, split their food even and eat tighter while all of them are having a conversation about what they''ve endured so far in this apocalypse. Chidi told them about their adventure in Harare, about the guy named Dumisa who gave them a hand to get safe and sound to the train station, about the train ride they''ve had here and about their arrival yesterday in Mutare. The other group told them about their experience they''ve had in the safe zone, which was mostly quiet until a few zombies from Class F shows up.


    "What''s a Class F zombie?" asks Akinyi to Quanda as the woman finished relating the events she and her group had it at that time.


    "They are strong." say Quanda to Akinyi, then she looks at the other members of the combined group. "Class F zombies are immense. Stronger. And durable. They can throw cars, rocks and everything they have at them. These things are hard to fight without guns. With guns, if you can shoot the thing head, you can kill it."


    "So, are like Tanks from Left 4 Dead?" says Akinyi.


    "Left 4 Dead?" ask Quanda to Akinyi.


    "It''s a video game about killing zombies. Played it when I had a PC."


    "I seeˇ­"


    "These things die only by a shot to the head?" asks Chidi. "Like the others?"


    "Yes. That is what I said. These things die easily if you have a gun. But if you don''tˇ­ Better know how to run."


    "And they are many?"


    "I don''t know. This new species, to say that, it is kinda new for us, the soldiers and The Organization."


    "We didn''t say anything like this." says Chimola and looks at her group members. "Right?"


    "No. We didn''t." say Chidi taking a sip from the water bottle. "On our way to Mutare we haven''t caught a glimpse of a zombie like this. Hopefully in Mozambique there won''t be any."


    The group continues to discuss for a while, then they all decide to go on the top floor, go into one of the improvised bedrooms, that consists into small room that used to be stored a bunch of animals that can be seen into this area, nine of the group of ten people are sleeping, while Akinyi decides to take the night watch in case any zombie or somebody would break inside here and stole the goods.

 Z stands for Zimbabwe - Part 10

    ***


    Later, Akinyi is looking at the hallway, with an energy bar on her left hand, and a submachine gun on the other hand. She is sitting on a bench and thinking about something. The woman is contemplating about something while is eating that energy bar. Steps are heard coming from her left, the woman quickly drops the energy bar and aims the submachine gun to that direction, aiming to Monifa who''s quickly raising her arms up and whispers.


    "Don''t shoot, Akinyi! It''s me. Monifa."


    "Monifa." says Akinyi lowering the weapon and feeling awkward. "Sorry."


    "It''s alright." responds Monifa approaching Akinyi. "You are tense. Just like me."


    "You want to take over the watch?"


    "Yes. I can''t sleep." says Monifa who is approaching Akinyi and sits near her. "If you want to go to sleep."


    "No." responds Akinyi. "I can''t sleep either."


    "It''s because of the Class F zombie, right? The one that Quanda and Abeni told us about?"


    "That. And many others."


    "Others?"


    "I don''t trust some people from here. Like that Udo guy."


    "Yeah. He is looking sceptical. And holds that shotgun to him all day. I saw him sleeping with it in his hands."


    "Eze told me that guy hold him at gun point and was close to shoot him."


    "Should we go with them?"


    "I don''t know. I trust the others, they seem to be good people, but that Udoˇ­ I don''t really trust him."


    The two hear a scream coming from outside. The two women are getting out of the bench and run outside the museum. When they got outside, on the streets, both are looking around, but cannot see the source of the screaming because of the darkness outside. The two women notices a second scream, which sounds one coming from a man. Akinyi prepares her submachine gun and runs to the source of the screaming, which was coming from about a hundred steps from the museum, in a flat complex.


    Akinyi arrives at the front of that flat complex, where she sees a group of three zombies eating a corpse of a human. The woman is looking at them for a few seconds, then she sees on the ground a metal pipe and use it to smash the head of a zombie. The other two zombies look at Akinyi and Monifa, then abandon the fresh corpse of the human. Akinyi manages to hit another zombie in the head, who falls on the ground, but doesn''t die. Akinyi hits the third zombie in the head, which falls on the ground and stays unmoved. Akinyi sees the second zombie tries to rise, and she hits the thing in the head again, killing it this time.


    "Are you alright?" asks Monifa who was behind of Akinyi, with a log 2X4 she just found in the street to use as a weapon.


    "Yeahˇ­" says Akinyi breathing heavily she is looking at the corpse of the man.


    Cannot see much on this darkness that surrounds her, but from the fresh blood that drips from the upper body of that man she can deduce he was killed recently, and the screaming must''ve come from him. Akinyi observes the man starts to move, which means it is still alive, and hear him whispering in an English language.


    Love what you''re reading? Discover and support the author on the platform they originally published on.


    "K-Killˇ­ meˇ­ pleaseˇ­"


    Akinyi and Monifa heard the dying man last wish, and Akinyi complies by smashing the metal pipe four times to the man skull, making sure he won''t reanimate into a mindless zombie like the others that surrounds this planet. Monifa notices there is a backpack near the corpse of that man and goes over it. She checks the backpack and finds something useful in there, a flare gun ammo.


    "Holy shit." says Monifa holding the flare gun ammo.


    "Like no wayˇ­" says Akinyi looking at the flare gun ammo Monifa holds. "Chidi will be so happy to see this."


    "How can a flare gun ammo be here?" asks Monifa passing the thing she found to Akinyi, and she continues to search for more items like this in the backpack, and finds a walkie-talkie. "Woahˇ­ Found this weird device."


    "It is a walkie-talkie." says Akinyi looking at the device Monifa is holding. "Never saw one of these?"


    "Noˇ­ Only in a film when I was younger. But how do you know it?"


    "My uncle used one of these frequently at work." says Akinyi putting the flare gun ammo safely and taking that walkie-talkie, but sees the device doesn''t have nay batteries on him. "Crap. Don''t have batteries."


    "Do you think the second group has any?" asks Monifa.


    "If they do. We might be able to call for help."


    "It''s worth a shot?"


    "It is." says Akinyi sounding happy.


    The two girls are taking that backpack, they bid farewell to the corpse of the human and say to him a "Thank you." for letting him take the supplies. The girls flee the scene, leaving the fresh body of the human, in the dark, surrounded by the other three corpses.


    Back in the Mutare museum, Akinyi and Monifa arrives with the backpack, and the two are greeted by Udo, who is holding his pump shotgun at them and says to them in whisper tone.


    "What are you two doing?"


    "Look." says Akinyi who is raising her arms up, together with Chimola, who is shaking. "We found something."


    "And?" asks Udo while holding the shotgun. "Does it have your name?"


    "What?" asks Akinyi confused.


    "Give that backpack. To me. Don''t say anything and I will not shoot both of you."


    "Why?" asks Akinyi holding her arms up, looking a bit sceptical. "Why would we do this?"


    "Because I won''t blow your brains away. Now. Give them the backpack and I will leave your group safe. I want to leave this group. And I need something."


    "B-But why? Why?"


    "I got bored." says Udo with a smirk who wants to keep the reason hidden. "Now. Give it to me."


    "You are insane." say Akinyi to that man.


    "Give it to me. And nobody will get hurt. You scream, you both get killed."


    The girls have thought about this for a few seconds about what to do. Both seeing they do not have any choice, they give the backpack to Udo, who is taking the backpack and leaves this place while he is aiming his shotgun at the two girls who continue to keep their hands up. Akinyi handed the backpack because she didn''t have any choice. If she screamed for help, the man would''ve shot both of them and run with the backpack. And if she were to try to fight him, what he could''ve done? Grab the shotgun and try to beat him? That man is one head bigger than her and stronger judging by the appearance of the robber.


    "Why did you do that?" asks Monifa to Akinyi after they see Udo leaving the perimeter.


    "I acted without thinking." says Akinyi to Monifa. "The man had a shotgun to our face. How would you act? Catch it?"


    Monifa did not say anything to this because she knows what did Akinyi earlier was the only option she could''ve done. Akinyi did not say anything, she goes to the bench and sits. Monifa hasn''t said anything, and she goes toward Akinyi, sits on the bench near her and both of them are sitting without speaking a single word. Both of them would say what happened to their leaders.


    "Did that fucker just robbed you?!" says Quanda shocked to Akinyi and Chimola.


    "Yes." says Akinyi. "On that backpack we''ve only found a walkie-talkie, a single flare gun and a lighter."


    "And you just give it tot them?!" asks Chidi to Akinyi looking nervous.


    "The man had a shotgun to my face." say Akinyi. "What do you want me to do?"


    "Fuck." says Chidi angrily, and goes back a few steps mumbling something.


    "Look." says Quanda to Chidi. "That man was always sketchy. I never trusted him."


    "Then why you let that man join you?" asks Chidi to Quanda.


    "The man helped us." say Abeni in her defence and to the defence of Quanda. "The man has helped us get here, and saved us."


    "Ughˇ­" say Chidi.


    The two argued for a few more minutes about this incident, and decided to leave it alone because they have a more important business than to speak about this rob, to get to Mozambique and get on a boat to leave this cursed continent.

 Z stands for Zimbabwe - Part 11

    ***


    Thirty minutes later, the group of nine people walk down the road near a high school that is known by the locals under the name of "Mutare Girls High School", there they see a group of zombies approaching them, walking, snarling and growling. Akinyi switches to her baseball bat and smashes a zombie head by one single swing. That zombie was having a weak skull that has been smashed and was on the verge of breaking. The rest of the group proceeds to fight the zombies by using their melee weapons because they do not want to attract any attention to zombies nearby.


    The group o nine people have killed a total of twelve zombies without pressure. After this fight, the group is looking at the high school in front of them, where both decides to check the place, hoping they will find something useful in there. From the group of nine people, two people remains outside, taking watch, those two being Eze and Giconi, who are armed with pistols and knives.


    Chidi and Quanda are taking the lead of the group, leading them into the hallway with a bunch of teenage girls bodies, who were all eaten and killed in this beginning of the infection. Akinyi almost slip on the floor because of the blood that has flooded the floors of the hallway. The entire group walks in slow steps and prepared for any surprise attack. But luckily, there wasn''t any alive zombie in there, most of the zombies in there were killed a long time ago.


    The group has checked several classrooms, but they didn''t find anything useful in there. The group was about to give up on their search, but Quanda decided to check the principal room. And the group agreed to do one last room check. They spend like two minutes of searching for that room, and when they found it unlocked, they''ve entered it and sees at the chair o the desk the body of someone, without his head, and on the desk lays walkie-talkie. Chidi takes that walkie-talkie, checks it to see if it does have batteries, and the thing has batteries. Chidi turns the walkie-talkie and tries to make a message, but before he could say anything, a message comes from the walkie-talkie.


    "Supply crate has been dropped in Municipality Park in Mutare! Crate that contains medical supplies and ammo to help survivors fend off the zombies."


    This message repeats for a few times because it was robotic, not human. Chidi changes the frequency of the message, looks back to his four people, who has heard that message and ask them.


    "Should we check it?"


    "Yes." says Abeni. "The Organization tends to drop ammo supplies for survivors. Like us. On the ones that used to be safe houses."


    "Why?" asks Chidi to Abeni, curios on why does she know this.


    "It''s something I learned from a squad in Europe. They are ordered to drop weapons and a map of the location of where they could be picked up. Don''t know why they do this."


    "So, we''ll take the supplies?" ask Samuel to the group.


    "Yes." says Abeni. "We may be lucky to find there is a way to communicate with the Organization and request transport to their nearest base."


    If you stumble upon this narrative on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen from Royal Road. Please report it.


    The group agreed to go on the Municipality Park that is located at a few hundred meters from the high school. The group leaves the place, they informed Eze and Giconi about their plan, and all are heading to that place indicated on the walkie-talkie. Now, Municipality Park is known to be some kind of park, but now it is a place filled with corpses and dead corpses walking aimlessly. And this one was one of the said safe zones that Quanda stayed with her group of people.


    After a short walk, the group arrived in at the entrance of Municipality Park. The group spots three zombies coming to them, and the group goes to the zombies, killing the three walking corpses with their close combat weapons. Smashing the heads of the creatures and watching them lay dead on the ground. The group continues their walking toward a big metallic crate that is laying near the main building of this place. Getting to that crate, that measures almost two meters in height and one meter in length, the group sees the crate is locked by a lock.


    "Looked?" ask Chimola to Abeni who is going over to that crate and inspects the locker.


    "Yes." say Abeni after a short inspection of the lock. "It''s one of those with keys. How are we going to open?"


    "I know an idea." say Quanda to the group approaching the padlock with the revolver.


    The man points his revolver at a close distance and pulls the trigger to the padlock. The bullet of the revolver manages to break the padlock somehow. The locker, now being broken, Quanda and Abeni are opening the crate and inspects the contents of the said container. Inside this container lays a lot of melee weapons like axes, wooden spears, knives, forks, a bunch of canned foods and a bunch of water bottles who most of them were empty. There also lays some more important supplies, such as a small radio that is mostly used in houses to listen music at the time when Spotify and YouTube did not exist.


    "A radio." say Abeni happy, taking the radio. "We can try and communicate with The Organization from here."


    "Look." say Eze pointing to a bunch of corpses who are raising up to their feet.


    "The gun woke them up." says Chidi to Quanda.


    "I know. I know."


    "Get in the house." says Abeni pointing to the nearby building in this area.


    Abeni, Giconi, Eze, Quanda, Chimola and Chidi are running inside the building that used to be a restaurant, while the remaining people, Samuel, Monifa and Akinyi remains outside with their guns loaded, shooting the upcoming wave of zombies.


    "Let''s get this part started." says Akinyi in English like some kind of character from a video game.


    Akinyi shoots her submachine gun to the upcoming zombies, managing to kill ten zombies. while she was reloading Samuel joins Akinyi side and uses his submachine gun to kill other upcoming zombies. And Monifa, she is killing any zombie who tries to get inside that building the six survivors have entered to try and communicate with The Organization.


    "Keep the zombies away from the house." say Monifa after she killed three zombies by using an entire handgun clip. The woman reloads her gun and gets closer to her two friends to keep their backs.


    Akinyi and Samuel got the message, both of them turn around and shoots any zombie who is walking toward the house, then they are focusing on the ones that are coming from the road to the property of this Park. The three people starts to run out of ammo from their gun magazines, and while they were reloading their guns, the two hear gunshots coming from the house and hitting the zombies that are entering the area. Akinyi turned around to the house, where she spots Quanda, Chidi and Eze using assault rifles they''ve found inside the house.


    "Thank us later!" yells Eze as he continues to shoot his assault rifle to a zombie who is trying to climb the fence of the property, killing the thing before he had the chance to do a pull-up, then looks back at the three people. "Stay close to the house!"


    "Alright!" says Samuel to Eze and continues his shooting to zombies who are coming from their behind.

 Z stands for Zimbabwe - Part 12

    This entire fight lasted for a solid three minutes. And this whole time while these three survivors fought for their lives, the ones who are inside the house has finally managed to contact one of the many bases of The Organization.


    "Hello." said Abeni to the radio after she heard the voice from the other side picking up. "We need help! We are in danger and need help to be rescued!"


    "Hello!" says the voice on the other side in English. "Who am I speaking with?"


    "Abeni Sama." says Abeni. "Member of Zimbabwe National Army, sir! First Brigade, sir!"


    "What is your motto?"


    "Our swords are the shield of the nation!"


    "Ahaˇ­ Where are you located?"


    "In Municipality Park, Mutare, Zimbabwe, sir! We need help!" says while the shooting outside continues because of survivors who are killing the upcoming zombies. "There are many zombies in here!"


    "Municipality Park? That place still stands?"


    "Negative, sir! The place got overrun days ago because of two class F zombies. They''ve taken us unprepared."


    "Only two?" asks the person on the other side not believing this. "How can only two zombies from class F take down a safe house?"


    "There were in a swarm that contained more than fie a hundred zombies! Listen. Send help! Please!"


    "No can do, ma''am." says the voice in the other side sounding calm.


    "What?" asks Abeni shocked. "No can do?"


    "This is the order. We cannot risk sending men to rescue a group that is located outside o our areas. It is too dangerous."


    "Wait? What base am I talking to?"


    "You are talking to Pirate Greece Base, ma''am."


    "What about Camp Lemonnier?"


    "Camp Lemonnier is still standing? Want to make a contact to them?"


    "Yes, please!"


    "Hang on." says the person on the radio who is closing the radio call.


    "What happened?" asks Chidi going to Abeni who is still on the radio, waiting for the contact at Camp Lemonier.


    "I contacted the wrong camp."


    "What?"


    "Hello! Camp Lemonier." say the caller on the radio. "I heard you are calling from what used to be a base in Zimbabwe. How can we help you?"


    If you discover this tale on Amazon, be aware that it has been unlawfully taken from Royal Road. Please report it.


    "We need help!" yells Abeni on the radio.


    "I know you are stressed and scared. But we cannot help you. Orders are to lead you to nearest port and take a boat to one of our nearest camp in islands. Now I''ve heard you are located in Zimbabwe, the nearest available port from your location is at Mozambique. From there you get on a boat and sail toward the nearest base. Camp Lemonier is further than Europe Island."


    "Europe Island? Is it safe?"


    "Safer than Camp Lemonier. At this moment, the camp it is in full capacity for survivors. Try your luck to the one island we''ve told you about. And contact them when you get on the sea."


    Then the radio caller closes the contact of the radio, leaving Abeni and Chidi looking at the radio, not saying anything. The gunfire outside has stopped, and the trio are entering the house, the three of them tired of fighting and having blood of zombies all around their clothes because some of them got too close distance to them.


    "We finished them all." says Akinyi to the group who is standing around the radio, in awkward silence. "ˇ­ What?"


    "The Organization won''t help us!" say Abeni to the group of nine people who have gathered. "We are on our own to get to the nearest camp."


    "What?" asks Akinyi.


    "These bastards won''t help us?" asks Samuel sounding angry.


    "No." says Chidi, then he looks at everybody. "They told us to go to another island since Lemonnier got has reached its limit population as they said."


    "That''s some bullshit." says Akinyi. "So, what? We go to another island?"


    "Better than staying here." say Abeni. "Now. We have to find a way to get to Mozambique. I don''t mean by walking. We need a transport."


    "Found some keys." say Chimola noticing a pair of keys that were laying on the floor and hands them to Abeni. "You recognize them?"


    "Yes." say Abeni looking at the keys and is happy. "These keys are from a military truck. And I know which one."


    The soldier leaves the room without stating more details. The group of eight people are following her walking. When they get outside, they see many more zombies laying on the ground than they were at first when the group arrived here earlier.


    "Damn." say Chimola looking at a bunch of zombies who got shot in the head and their heads blown. "You three did this?"


    "Five." says Chidi to Chimola.


    "it was tough." admits Eze. "But we made it."


    The group of eight people are walking toward a car park of this place, where they see a military truck is parked irregularly there. Abeni looks at the truck worried, and she presses the button on the key to unlock it and deactivate the alarm. After the truck made that sound of unlocking, Abeni breath a sigh of relief and walks to the truck together with the group. Chidi, Abeni and Quanda are taking the front seats, while the other six survivors are entering the backseat, gets on their seats and take a good rest after a long walk and a fierce fight they''ve had.


    "Check the map." says Abeni to Quanda as she is turning the vehicle motor and prepare for leaving.


    Quanda takes the map and looks at it for a while. While he was trying top find where they are, Chidi asks.


    "We are not taking the highways."


    "Good call." say Abeni. "I''ve seen many highways being packed because of this apocalypse. We have to take roads that were never taken."


    "Found one." say Quanda showing Abeni a possible road they could take to Mozambique nearest port. "But which port we can get?"


    "Let''s go for this one." says Abeni pointing with her hand at a city called Beira. "Here."


    "Beira?" asks Quanda.


    "Nice place." says Chidi. "Used to go on a holiday there for a week."


    "Do you think we''ll find a boat?" asks Quanda to Chidi.


    "Hopefully."


    Abeni drives the military truck from the Municipality Park, leaves the area and goes down the road toward the exit from Mutare city. They''ve taken the populated road with zombies who were walking after them, or were too busy munching on dead bodies. As the truck continues to move down the street, Akinyi notices a person that is running toward them, but that person is chased by five zombies. That runner continues to scream for them to stop the vehicle and help him, but the person trips over a dead body and the five zombies jumps on the unfortunate runner, eating him alive. Akinyi and the other six saw this incident and didn''t say anything to about what happened.

 Z stands for Zimbabwe - Part 13

    After a long drive on the day, the military truck stops in the Chimoio, Mozambique because they''ve run out of petrol and the entrance road to Chimio is blocked by a bunch of cars and corpses that have been eaten by zombies on this area. Besides this blockage, there are a bunch of mindless zombies who are walking toward the military truck that stopped at the entrance of Chimio. And from the back side of the military truck, there are a bunch of zombies who are walking toward the survivors.


    "We are encircled." say Chidi to the group.


    "No shit." say Eze in English, and he aims his assault rifle.


    "We run, or we shoot?" asks Chidi.


    "Both." say Abeni and she goes to a group who is in a lesser number of zombies.


    That group is running to their right side on the highway known N260. In front of this group there were several zombies that raised from their ground and want to take a taste from them, but the group has taken their guns and blasted as they were running to a safe zone to rest because the night is approaching. The group manages to kill several zombies who were standing in their ways, but not all of these zombies could be killed easily. The entire group of nine people haven''t stopped one minute from shooting, reloading and running down the highway for the next one kilometre. Then, the group sees a mud road that is leading toward the city, who is looking to be safe, and the group runs to that road while being chased by zombies.


    "These things don''t stop chasing us." says Akinyi while she is running and breathing heavily as she''s shooting her submachine gun.


    The group of nine people, continue to run as fast as they can, but all of them have started to become exhausted from an intense run like this. Samuel was on the verge of collapsing, while Chimola has tripped on her legs, being one step closer to be food for the Undeads, but it was saved in time by Chidi, Quanda and Abeni who shoot an entire clip to the zombies who were going after them. When they emptied an entire clip, and Eze''s helped Chimola get up, the group continues their running to a safe place while they are reloading their weapons.


    After two more minutes of intense running, the group sees a building on the road. The group is running toward that place. Abeni was with the idea to go in there, but Quanda has asked her while all nine of them are still running.


    "And what we''ll do? We fight with this horde until we run out of ammo?"


    This book is hosted on another platform. Read the official version and support the author''s work.


    "Who says we are going to stay there." say Abeni who is running faster to the gates of the building, and she opens it to let her teammates get in.


    "What?" asks Quanda to Abeni.


    "We''ll be using it as a decoy to lure the zombies to get close to the house. We burn the place to the ground, and zombies will be more focussing at the fire."


    "You think that''ll work?" asks Chidi.


    "I''ve seen it with my eyes in Cairo." say Abeni as the group is entering this building that looks like to be some sort of barnyard. "One group has thrown Molotov cocktails and a bunch of other incendiary stuff to burn a building complex to lure zombies in one location, where our helicopters would shoot the horde of zombies from the air."


    "And you think this will make zombies stop chasing us?" asks Quanda as he and the group are entering the barn.


    "Only one way to find out." says Abeni, and she looks at the group of eight people. "I want all of you to find anything that can be used to burn this barnyard."


    And the group starts searching for anything that can be used to start a fire. Search that did not last that long because Abeni found a working lighter and inside this barnyard there''s a lot of paper, haystacks and corpses of dead people and animals lying around, around three humans (one kid and two women), twelve chickens that are barely distinguishable, one horse and one decapitated dog. Monifa found some petrol in a plastic bottle and decided to pour all of it in the horse.


    Zombies starts to break in the barn, and the group starts to make the fire. Abeni lights up a few papers and throws the paper onto the horse corpse. Then the group starts running through the broken wall that was made because of a car that crashed in there a while ago (they''ve assumed it because there are tires to that big hole on the walls). All eight survivors have run out from the barnyard, but Monifa wasn''t fast enough to maintain the pace of the group. The poor woman got jumped by a fast zombie who ran through the fire of the horse and pins Monifa to the ground. The zombie starts to bite her face off while he was still covered in fire. The woman screamed to be saved and raised her hands to be dragged rather to use it to move the zombie away. But all of this is in vain because the fire quickly gets Monifa, and she starts to burn.


    The group looks terrorized at the poor friend of them. The group of eight people decide to give mercy to their friend, and they shoot the zombie and their friend, Monifa. Monifa''s body is burning on an alarming rate, which means in a few moments it''ll become ashes, like the rest of the zombies who have entered the barnyard and are going straight to the horse to eat it since its meat was still fresh for zombies. The group looked at the barnyard who is quickly being taken over by the fire and by zombies.


    "Fuckˇ­" say Eze looking at a zombie who is leaving the barnyard and goes over to Monifa''s body, whose clothes and skin have burned up.


    The zombie leans over and starts eating the corpse of Monifa veraciously like a wild animal. Then other zombies come out from the fire, two of these zombies are going over to the body of Monifa, while five are walking and running to the eight survivors. And the group continued their running while shooting the zombies that are coming after them. But this fire wasn''t useless. This fire has been sawed by someone that is flying nearby.

 Z stands for Zimbabwe - Part 14

    ***


    In a helicopter, at approximately fifty kilometres away from Chimio entrance, a helicopter is flying at an altitude of one hundred meters. In that helicopter there is a group of nine people from "The Organization" who just now got back from a mission that has taken place in Somalia. The One of the people from that helicopter looks at that black smoke that comes from a barnyard by using a pair of binoculars that can see even from 75 kilometres distance. A pair that in today''s technology doesn''t exist, but something like this exists in the future.


    "There''s smoke coming from there." say that person.


    "And?" ask the pilot of the helicopter.


    "What if there''s people who need to be saved?" asks that person.


    "We cannot risk it, Brian." says the pilot. "We have orders from Mr. Twenty-Three. Establish outposts and search for gas."


    "Where do you see the smoke coming from?" asks the female co-pilot who is quickly looking through a monitor that shows a map of the world.


    "From fifty kilometres from us." says Brian looking with the binoculars and checking the distance between the helicopter and the smoke from Chimoio. "Approximately."


    "On that it shows there are two gas station." say the co-pilot looking through the map of Chimoio, Mozambique. "And a lot of supplies to help Europe''s Island."


    "And you want to go there to gather supplies?" ask the pilot to the co-pilot.


    "I say we should try." says another member of The Organization squad, wearing anti-bite armour like the rest of the people in this helicopter. "Better than go empty-handed and get scolded by Mr. Twenty-Three."


    "ˇ­Fine." says the pilot making a move to turn the helicopter to another direction and fly toward the direction where the smoke comes from. "But if one of you guys die, it will be your fault."


    This book was originally published on Royal Road. Check it out there for the real experience.


    The helicopter flies toward Chimoio, with all the six people from the helicopter who is the two are going to the mounted machine-guns and preparing their arsenal for a fight on the ground in case a wave of zombies will be there.


    ***


    After a wild chase, the group of eight people are entering a warehouse, that looked to be used before this apocalypse. Abeni and Chadi are locking the bid metallic doors of this warehouse, and they are going with the group toward a safe room, which is a room that was designed to be a Cafeteria. The eight people are going inside that room, where they see a lot of tables, chairs and a body of a dead zombie in there. Giconi, Akinyi and Samuel are throwing the body away from this room, and help Abeni, Chadi and Chimola make some sort of blockage by suing the tables and the chairs.


    "You think this''ll hold it?" asks Chadi to the group.


    "Hopefully." responds Chimola who is walking toward a chair and he sits there.


    The group is looking in the windows, they see the night is about to settle, which makes the group feel anxious about this. And they feel more anxious after they discover their guns are running out of bullets and their combat weapons are starting to wear off from how much they were being used.


    "We''re screwed." says Quanda.


    "Don''t say that." say Abeni.


    "Yeah, man." responds Giconi. "This is a minor setback. Tomorrow morning, we''ll find some gas and get away from here."


    "And how you expect to get out?" asks Quanda to Giconi. "Our truck is blocked. The other roads are too."


    "Poor Monifa." say Akinyi out loud without realizing that she changes the sorrow mode into a more miserable one.


    "The girl was unlucky." say Abeni to Akinyi. "There''s nobody fault."


    "You were with her when you found the backpack, right?" asks Quanda to Akinyi.


    "Yes." say Akinyi. "She was always scared and a wuss, but it was still a human. Just like us."


    "Amen." say Giconi. "The woman wasn''t the most athletic nor the strongest. But she did good."


    The group stays in silent, giving a moment of silence for Monifa, who wasn''t the strongest survivor from the group, but was still a human who managed to survive almost a week into the apocalypse. Not the best survivor, but one of those who will be remembered by close people to her.


    After a few minutes, the group hears the loud sound of a helicopter landing. The eight people are quickly taken off their weapons, some of them waking up from a nap they''ve had, others get their weapons and remain in there. Giconi has an idea to go to the light switch and turns on the light of this Cafeteria room hoping this will attract the people from that helicopter to come to them and rescue them.

 Z stands for Zimbabwe - Part 15

    ***


    A military helicopter lands on an open hill near a barnyard that''s still burning. Six humans get out of the helicopter after the landing, wearing heavy armor and helmets, with heavy guns like machine guns.


    These six people are forming a line and heading towards the barnyard to check it out. The zombies are going after these six people in heavy armor, but they''re getting obliterated quickly, and other zombies don''t care. Around hundreds of these zombies were killed in a minute by six people. Hundreds of innocent bodies possessed by a virus like this who has changed the entire world.


    "Sector clear!" said the leader of the squad.


    "Reload!" said a member of the squad loading his machine gun in the dark like it was nothing.


    "The barnyard is burning..." says a member of the squad in English British language. "Should we investigate it?"


    "I am not risking a fire-resistant zombie on my face," said that person who reloaded the weapon.


    "Nor a zombie horse," said another person in the group.


    "We should check the area for gas," said the squad leader turning around to his teammates.


    "This is our priority. Not checking every single building in this village."


    "I see something," says a person from the squad, pointing at a warehouse that has its lights turned on. "We should go?"


    "Let''s check it," said the squad leader.


    "You said we shouldn''t check every single building here," said one of the squad members.


    "This is an exception," said the squad leader. "Now. All on line and prepare for killing any zombies coming for us. Remember. These things smell of blood now."


    The six people, with all of their weapons loaded and aligned in a formation, start to walk in a slow step toward the warehouse that is located at quite a distance from their point of landing. On their way to that warehouse, the squad manages to kill a lot of zombies that are walking and running towards the squad. One zombie even tried to jump on the group from a rooftop of a house, but he got killed by a squad member who switched to his shotgun and with one shot he made that zombie fly back and fall five steps from them on the asphalt.


    The group continues to move further without stopping. When they were running out of bullets, they switched weapons that were hidden under their heavy armour like assault rifles, shotguns and submachine guns.


    The group arrives in front of the warehouse, where the squad leader kicks open the main door and they start entering the place, aiming their weapons. All of them have ditched their machine guns because they have run out of bullets for their machine guns. Now they have to resort to their primary weapons.


    The squad walks slower and prepared toward the hallway that leads to the cafeteria. They notice a body in the hallway, but they all ignore it. The squad of six people are opening the door of the cafeteria slowly, and then they aim their weapons.


    All of the eight survivors from the cafeteria are raising their hands up, and looking scared at the group of those mysterious people.


    "Identify yourself," said the leader of the squad aiming his assault rifle at Abeni.


    "M-My name is Abeni." Says Abeni. "Abeni Sama. Member of the Zimbabwe National Army, sir! First Brigade, sir!"


    "Abeni Sama?" asks a member of the squad, who is lowering his assault rifle, but was about to take off his mask, and his colleague aims his gun at him, making the man stop to reveal himself to Abeni. "Alright." He whispers to himself, then he looks at Abeni Sama, who is feeling confused. "I will tell you later."


    If you discover this tale on Amazon, be aware that it has been unlawfully taken from Royal Road. Please report it.


    "Leave that out of the way," says the leader of the squad and aims his guns at the other people. "Is anyone of you a smoker?"


    "No," responded seven survivors.


    "I was," said Chidi. "But I quit five years ago. I am clean."


    "With all due respect," said Akinyi. "What does this have to do with us?"


    "Check their temperature." says the squad leader to one of his people, who is putting his gun down, on the table where the guns of the survivors are placed.


    "Nice collection you got there." says that mysterious person peeking a bit at the table with guns, and takes from under his armor a digital thermometer that is used to check body temperature.


    He turns around and walks to the group to check their body temperature. The mysterious person starts with Chidi. He checks the body temperature quick by aiming the device at the forehead, and presses the trigger, where after a few seconds a blip follows.


    That heavy armour person looks at the screen and says out loud what the screen indicates.


    "36.4."


    "Safe," said the leader. "Now check the rest of them."


    "Aye."


    After a quick check up on the remaining seven survivors, which all turned out to be fine on the correct body temperature that shows they do not present any risk of getting infected with this Z virus, the people dressed in heavy armour are putting their weapons down, but they did not take off their armor and gas mask due to The Organization order to never take out the equipment in open spaces who are not decontaminated.


    The six fighters are putting their weapons on the table where the ones the survivors had, and resting until sunrise comes because it is dangerous to fend off zombies in the night.


    "Sir," says a fighter from The Organization. "What will we do tomorrow?"


    "We''ll check for gas, and we''ll help our friends move to the docks," said the leader of the squad.


    "Move?" asked Abeni.


    "You are not going to take us?" asked Quanda confused.


    "Orders are orders, ma''am," said the leader of Quanda. "Plus, the helicopter couldn''t handle these many people. So, we have to get you, all eight of you, a way to move out from this god-forsaken city. Nor to the nearest port."


    "And the plan is to help us get a car and go to the nearest port?"


    "Not the nearest port," said the leader of the squad. "Beira. That''s one of the only ports we know is still standing."


    "Shit," says Eze, and he looks back at his team excited. "That was our plan too. We go to Beira and we take a boat."


    "Really?" asked the leader looking at Abeni Sama."We were going to Beira because the person from a radio station from Camp Lemonier told us the place is full and we should try Europe''s Island."


    "That''s where we are also coming from," said a person from the squad of fighters.


    "Yes. We are the 1st Army Fighting Squad of Europe''s Island Army," said the leader. "And you eight are in good hands. As long as all of you know how to fight."


    "Oh," said Quanda. "We know how to fight."


    "Really?" asked a person from the squad looking at them, sitting on a chair near his leader and another ally. "Then tell me. What was your biggest fight with a zombie?"


    "The biggest fight was today. In Municipality Park, Mutare, Zimbabwe. Our people from squad killed more than a hundred zombies while Abeni was communicating with rescuers."


    "Yeah," said Eze. "That was a good fight."


    "We were so close to dying there," said Chimola. "But thanks to the supplies left behind, we made it."


    "Mutare got overrun?" asked a person from the fighter squad who didn''t listen carefully.


    "Yes," said Abeni. "The outpost has fallen quickly. In just a few hours. Probably in five to seven hours. I don''t even know how long it has been since this virus started."


    "Which is a question that we don''t even have an answer to at this moment." said another mysterious person from the squad, the one who checked their body temperature. "Sources say this virus started a long time ago. Hell. Some sources say in the years 2010 to 2020. Or maybe beyond 2000. Which means this thing, the Z virus, has existed much longer than we expected. But those are just some theories our scientists have come up with on our bases all around the world."


    "Did the entire world get this virus?" asked Giconi.


    "From what we know," said that person. "Not the entire worldˇ­ North America, South America, Alaska, Greenland, Canada and Antarctica is safe. But we know Australia, Europe, Asia and us, Africaˇ­ Are under quarantine. But the United Kingdom and Ireland islands seem to be the only safe places from this virus."


    "Americans aren''t helping us?" asked Chimola. "They are supposed to be the strongest army in the world."


    "They don''t know," said the leader of the squad to the whole group. "They don''t know this virus even exists."


    "What?" asked Chidi.


    "You''re joking?" asks Quanda. "You say these assholes don''t know about a virus spread that was alerted on the news a week ago?"


    "Apparently not."


    "How?" asked Quanda.


    The leader shook his head, then Quanda looked at the other members of the squad, who all shook their heads. The other survivors couldn''t believe that a nation, like the United States of America, South America and many others, doesn''t know about the disaster that the world is facing at this moment. How dire the situation has become. And how dangerous the world has turned out in just a single week.


    "We should check the zone." says the leader of the squad, raising from his seat and he goes over to the doors of the Cafeteria.


    He looks at the hallway and sees zombies coming to them.


    "Undeads are walking."

 Z stands for Zimbabwe - Part 16

    A member of his squad goes over to the counter where all the guns are placed, throws a shotgun to the squad leader, who catches with his hands, and he quickly aims his weapon to the zombies that are approaching the door. By one shoot, he kills a zombie. Reloads his gun, then shoots again. The second shoot managed to blow the head off a zombie and kill another. Reloads again, and shoot the third time. The head of a zombie flies out of the body.


    After the leader tried to reload, he found out the gun ran out of ammo, and he quickly closed the door. Turns over to his people and says.


    "Drag every furniture and form a barricade at the door!"


    "Yes, sir!" said his people and Eze.


    Everyone is quickly running toward the empty tables and chairs.


    All of them are working together to move this furniture to the door, who are all used to forming a barricade to protect themselves from the upcoming zombies. Chidi, Quanda and the Squad leader decide to take weapons and kill the zombies through the door window, while the rest of the people are taking furniture and moving them to the door. When the first table arrived, the three shooters are backing away from the door, and help move the huge table to the door. They then helped the other group to move chairs and tables.


    After they build the blockage, the whole group gets armed, and aims their weapons at the door. They all hear the growling, the screeching and the screaming of the dead corpses in the hallway. They hear the bumping and the kicking at the door, who seems to be sturdy for a wooden door.


    "What''s the plan, sir?" asked Abeni the squad leader.


    "We stay," said the squad leader.


    "These fuckers cannot break the blockage. Nor do they have any way to get in."


    The squad leader of the group from Europe''s Island is right, the zombies don''t have any other way they can use to get into this cafeteria. There is no backdoor, nor do side doors, and not a door to a kitchen, who doesn''t exist in a cafeteria room. The group is luckily there aren''t many windows here, and most of them are very small, like the ones you would find in a bathroom. We don''t know who built this room plan, but it sure made it better for a time like this. The survivors and the 1st Army are lowering their guns, and decide to rest on the remaining fourteen chairs in this room. Some stay on the chairs, fall asleep on them, while others are laying on the floor and fall asleep. But two people, the squad leader of the 1st Army and Abeni remain awake, looking at the door who is still hit by the zombies from the other side.


    Unauthorized reproduction: this story has been taken without approval. Report sightings.


    "We should throw something to distract them." said Abeni to the squad leader pointing to one of the six open small windows.


    "No," responded the Leader of the 1st Army. "These things are attracted to the smell of blood."


    "Our blood?"


    "Yes. It is futile to distract them with something like a bomb or a car alarm while they can smell our blood. Just look at their eyes." he points at a nearby zombie, who is having a glowing red light on his iris. If it is red, the thing is guided by blood."


    "And what are we going to do?"


    "We wait until their attention goes elsewhere," says the Leader of the 1st Army. "These creatures tend to give up after a while and go after humans. If they can feel the presence of others.


    "Then, the walkie-talkie of the Leader from the 1st Army proceeds to give some static and a message.


    "Hello! Sir! Are you alright?"


    "Here Brian J.!" says the Squad Leader of the 1st Army. "What''s the situation Charlie?"


    "Cannot see much, sir. It is still dark outside."


    "What''s the time?"


    "It''s 12:23 AM. I can see the warehouse you have entered."


    "Is Marcel with you?"


    "Yes," said Charlie.


    "You want us to initiate a distraction?"


    "Yes," responded Brian. "Initiate strategy B-23."


    "Affirmative, sir!"


    "Strategy B-23?" asked Abeni to Brian.


    "Helicopters fly around. Distract the zombies."


    "I see." say Abeni. "But I thought zombies are attracted to our blood."


    "There are many other zombies. If their eyes are not red, green or blue, it means they are common zombies."


    "What are the green and blue zombies?"


    "Green stands for Undeads and blue stands for Class F zombies."


    "I never knew that."


    "That''s something that we also don''t know, until yesterday. After one of our researchers did a testing to a poor woman in Greece."


    Soon, the helicopter is heard by two people, and the others in the cafeteria are awakened by the loud sound of the motor. The banging and screaming from the other side are covered by the sounds of the heavy flying machine outside.


    After a while, the sound starts to become lower, and the sound of banging at the door continues, this time lower than it was before, meaning the number of zombies from outside has decreased. Brian told everyone about the helicopter, and they all went back to their sleep, ignoring the zombies outside who continues to hit the door like a lunatic flat neighbour.

 Z stands for Zimbabwe - Part 17

    ***


    Next morning, the whole group of sixteen people took out the furniture that is blocking the only entrance and exit from this room. When they were done, they all armed themselves with weapons, and looked at each other. After all of them are ready to face the zombies outside, Brian kicks open the door and the whole group starts blasting the remaining eleven zombies in the hallway.


    "Clear." says Brain after they''ve killed the last zombie.


    The entire group and squad are leaving the room, walking toward the exit of this warehouse. Both groups have left the warehouse armed and proceed to shoot the zombies that are walking at fast speed and running to them. As they are shooting the zombies, Brian, the leader of the 1st Army, stops firing and says to his people.


    "We have to form a line, people! 1st Army members go in front and the survivors take our backs!"


    "Got it," said a person from the 1st Army.


    After they''ve made a line at the back and at the front, the group of sixteen people are going toward the nearest gas station. They are walking at a slow speed, while shooting their guns at the upcoming infected individuals who also jump like five feet in the air. One of the zombies jumped over a car, but it got killed mid-air by a 1st Army squad member who shot his double-barrel shotgun at the chest of the creature, who sent him one foot away, landing on the street. Then the zombie got shot in the head by another member who saw the thing continue to yell. The man who shot the zombie is having his anti-biting zombie armour covered in zombie blood, and is looking worried at Brian.


    "You don''t get infected if you touch blood!" says Abeni while she shoots with a pistol a zombie that is crawling under a car by two shots. "As long as you don''t ingest it."


    "How do you know that?" asked Brian to Abeni.


    "Saw one of my teammates becoming zombies like this."


    "Thank God," said that squad member.


    The group advances forward to the gas station that is located one kilometre away from that warehouse.


    After a while, the group arrived at a gas station, but upon arriving there, they found out the place has a sign that is written in English language with the phrase: "Out of Gas!", a thing that makes people in this group look disappointed at this.


    "This place doesn''t have gas," said Quanda.


    "Now what?" asked Eze. "We look for another?"


    "I saw one yesterday," said Chimola to the group. "Saw one at the entrance to the city. Hopefully there is still some gas in there left."


    "Let''s check it," said Brain. "You lead the way."


    "Me?" asked Quanda surprised.


    "You know where it is?"


    "I said I saw it."


    "Okay. You said at the entrance, right? Then we''ll go there."


    This tale has been unlawfully lifted from Royal Road; report any instances of this story if found elsewhere.


    Brian leads the squad toward the road that leads to the entrance to Chimola. The squad of sixteen people are walking more than two kilometres to the gas station that is located near the highway where the military truck was abandoned yesterday by a group of survivors from Mutare. Their walk was filled with car wreckages, zombies, eaten bodies of humans and animals, traffic lights lying on the road, trash on the streets and a news chopper destroyed in the middle of the street.


    "These reporters," said a member of the 1st Army looking at the news chopper.


    "I know that chopper," said Akinyi. "Saw it fell on a news segment on YouTube."


    "Watch out!" yelled a member of the 1st Squad seeing a zombie running to their left.


    Eze is the one who kills that zombie, who is falling head first into the road. The group look around and see many zombies coming toward them. The group of fourteen people reload their guns, and proceed to shoot while they are running to the second gas station in this city.


    Minutes later, the group arrives at the other gas station, where they see there is a gas trailer near the shop, parked. The group of fourteen people are looking happy at this sign, but their happiness doesn''t last long after they see five people leaving the gas station shop, aiming their weapons at them.


    "Get out!" yelled one of the people.


    "We need gas, sir!" says Brain while his squad mates and the whole group of survivors aim their weapons at those five people.


    "We don''t give gas," said the supposed leader of this group. "If you want gas, then you''ll have to go past us. This is our territory!"


    "Sir," said Brian. "If you do not give us gas, we''ll have to shoot."


    "Shoot?" asked one of the people. "I''d like to see you try, motherfucker!"


    These five individuals are all covered in leather jackets, jeans, boots, wear a bandana over their heads and have some strong firearms. These five people look like a gang of bikers who decided to take this gas station as a hideout for them, and keep the gas for themselves. These five bikers, seeing they are outnumbered by people and guns, decide to do one of the dumbest things. Start the first shoot. One of these five people pulled the trigger of his machine pistol who shot five bullets who were flying towards Chimola. These five bullets hit Chimola on the upper body, making the person fall back and fall on his back on the cold asphalt.


    "CHIMOLA!" yelled Chidi, Akinyi, Eze, and many other survivors as they turned around to the group and started to pull their trigger on the guns, together with the 1st Army squad.


    The five bikers are all mowed by the numerous amounts of bullets. None of them had the strength to dodge or pull the trigger. It was a fast shootout that ended with a blink of an eye where the group of now thirteen people had won, but at a great cost. Chidi and his people from Harare went to check Chimola''s body.


    "Chimola!" says Chidi while looking at him, and looking at Akinyi who is trying to do CPR.


    "It''s too late," said the member of the 1st Army who inspected their body temperature last night. "The wounds have pierced its whole body. There is nothing we can do."


    "We have to do something!" says Akinyi while she tries to wake Chimola up.


    "There''s nothing we can do," says Brian aiming a handgun at Chimola. "All we can do is give this man mercy."


    Akinyi walks away from Chimola''s body after she notices the skin colour starts to shift into green a lot quicker than it usually does. Brian doesn''t shoot and instead looks at how the colour of Chimola''s skin shifts from black into darker green. When the eyes open, and Chimola screeches like a zombie, Brian shoots the head of Chimola with a single 9mm bullet from the gun. Then, he looks over the bodies of five bikers who have been killed.


    "Double tap them." says Brian to his people.


    "Yes, sir!" said the five people from his squad going over to the bodies of five bikers.


    "Look," says Brian turning around to see the group of seven people. "That person got multiple shots to the torso. There was no way for it to survive after this. "Two shots were in the zone of the heart." He says pointing his gun at the wounds in the torso of the man''s body. "And three shots at the lungs."


    The squad of five people shoot the five bikers'' heads at the same time, then are turned over to Brian, who orders them to check the inside and be careful while they are doing it. He sees the survivors turning around and seeing a horde of zombies walking to the gas station. Brian tells the survivors.


    "You people are shooting the survivors while I and my people are trying to contact Charlie!"


    "Okay!" says Chidi, and he looks at his people. "Let''s kill these zombies! For Chimola!"


    "For Chimola!" yells all six people who are reloading their empty firearms and start shooting the horde of zombies that are approaching the gas station.

 Z stands for Zimbabwe - Final Part

    ***


    After an hour of finding a small car that can make seven people sit in it, where five people have taken out all the available gas from the gas trailer (which wasn''t a lot, only 25% of it was still in it) and from the gas pumps, the journey to Beira starts. The car they''ve picked is a small one with four seats, a Toyota, but it is a reliable one to carry seven people across the city. Plus, it has enough gas to last until Beira.


    Akinyi and two people from the 1st Army are tying the car by using those hinges and the helicopter hinges it has in it to transport the vehicle with survivors toward their safe zone instead of using the boats.


    "You sure this is safe?" asks Abeni to Charlie the pilot, while the people are making final preparations.


    "Girl," said Charlie to Abeni. "I''ve transported a lot of boats and cars before and after this apocalypse. Trust me. This will be safe. As long as you all don''t move or have a flying fear."


    "But don''t you transport us to Beira if you are so sure?" asked Abeni.


    "It''s too risky due to weather conditions," says Charlie pointing at the gray clouds in the sky. "There''s a risk of rain. And probably strong winds. We don''t want to lose you seven at five thousand feet altitude now do we?"


    Abeni did not respond to this. She went back to the car, where preparations seemed to be finished. She is still, like many others, feeling unsure about Akinyi''s idea, but she has to trust her, like the three people from Harare.


    When the preparations have been completed, the squad of seven survivors enter the car. It is not comfortable for seven people to be in a car with five seats, but this will do. They were thinking of using the military truck, but Charlie advised them it is too heavy to be lifted at a high altitude.


    After all these seven people managed to make room to sit in this car, they all hold onto something and look at the helicopter who is starting to take off. The survivors group see how the people from the 1st Army are getting inside the helicopter before take-off, with a lot of gas cans that were laid in the gas station and with bottles filled with gasoline.


    In a few moments, the helicopter proceeds to gain altitude, and when it gains enough altitude, the car proceeds to be lifted into the air. At the first centimeters, the survivors were feeling scared to see their car start to raise in the air, but as the helicopter gained altitude, and the car started to gain more and more altitude, some survivors felt nervous.


    When the helicopter reached a good altitude, it started to fly toward the other part of the city. While flying, some survivors were looking down at the window, where they saw a lot of zombies walking toward the helicopter, some looking and others chewing on dead human bodies. This flying experience wasn''t that bad as some survivors thought it would be. It was safe and not that scary. This whole trip took about 15 minutes, where the helicopter decided to land the car on an open hill, and detached the hinges from the helicopter.


    Support the creativity of authors by visiting Royal Road for this novel and more.


    "What a trip!" says Akinyi excitedly after the car lands on the hill.


    "Yeahˇ­" says Chidi and Quanda feeling nervous.


    "It Was crazy!" said Eze.


    "We''re going to Briar, people! All of you should stay comfy and don''t make a commotion until we get there" says Abeni turning on the car, and starts to drive the car to the street who is having a lot of abandoned cars on this vast highway.


    ***


    The road toward Briar has taken a lot of time since they had to do a lot of detours, avoid crowded cities with zombies and drive through a crowded street that is leading to Briar. The squad of seven people have been escorted by the 1st Army helicopter to Briar port.


    Once they arrived in a parking lot, they walk out from there with guns and start firing on the zombies that are roaming the place. While the survivors are killing zombies and walking to the nearest dock to an available motor-boat, the helicopter is providing aerial support to the people on the street.


    "There''s a boat!" says Chidi to the group, pointing at a big motorboat that is near the wooden dock.


    "Look out!" says Abeni seeing a zombie climbing a building like a goat.


    Quanda and Eze are shooting that zombie, who is falling on his back on the hard terrain, on the rooftop of a car.


    The group continues to shoot, walk and kill as many zombies as they can to advance toward the boat Chidi pointed out earlier. The group enters that boat. They check the boat to see if there aren''t any zombies in there. Three minutes later, they found no zombies in there, and Akinyi went over to start the engine of this fishing boat type.


    While the boat was advancing from the dock, Giconi cuts the rope with a knife and helps the other five people, Chidi, Abeni, Samuel, Quanda and Eze, by shoot the zombies that are walking and running toward the boat, but it is kinda pointless since the helicopter of the 1st Army is giving them help to kill these mindless creatures infected with Z virus.


    "We''re safe!" says Giconi smiling and looking at the zombies who are stuck on the dock, screaming and yelling at the boat who is sailing far away from there on a seven miles per hour as the motor of this cuddy cabin boat indicates.


    "We are alive!" says Eze sounding happy.


    "Hallelujah!" says Samuel happy, holding his assault rifle with his hands in the air.


    Most of the people on this sailboat celebrate their victory against these creatures, while others are taking a well-deserved rest. Akinyi continues to make this boat sail further from the docks. She is the only one able to sail because she told his people earlier that her father taught her how to sail on the ocean during a summer vacation.


    Survivors are cheering for their well-earned freedom, looking happy at the sun that is revealed by the gray clouds, and waving at the helicopter who is flying toward Europe''s island. While the survivors were looking at the helicopter flying, some were wondering how their lives would be in there, and how they would live from now on.


    "Akinyi," said Chidi looking at Akinyi.


    "Yes, sir?" asked Akinyi, who focused on sailing.


    "How long will this voyage take us?"


    "A while," said Akinyi.


    "Does this boat have a functioning radio?"


    "I am afraid it doesn''t." says Akinyi showing that the radio here doesn''t work. "Were you trying to call the guys from the helicopter?"


    "Yes. But. We''ll soon be there, and thank them for all the help they''ve done for us."


    Chidi leaves Akinyi''s to continue her sailing, going to the group who has gathered at the back of the boat, safe from the motors, where they lay down and look at the city who is getting further and further with each passing minute. They still cannot believe they''ve managed to escape that chaos without too much trouble. Sure, they''ve lost people, good and bad people on the way to a better place, but their sacrifice will not be forgotten.


    END OF PART 10

 Kingdom of Living I - Part 1

    Six months later after the first infection, the human population decreased and is larger than it was in the beginning of the first month. Zombies have killed a lot of humans all around the world, making countries extinct, places becoming deserted from humans, and animal species that were categorized as extinct disappeared in the blink of an eye, where dogs and cats have started to become extinct species as the days go by.


    But, even if the human population has decreased, there''s still hope for a better tomorrow.


    A squad of five army helicopters are flying at a big altitude, normal altitude for a helicopter to fly by, passing hills, what used to be cities and what remained of villages who are all overrun by zombies. These helicopters are not piloted by people from the army, they are owned by the ones from The Organization. And into one of those helicopters, five beginner fighter levels, fresh from the boot camp outposts from what used to be Taiwan, are getting prepared to do their missions.


    "Listen up, boys and girls!" says a commander in English language to five people who are sitting on the helicopter seats, in their anti-biting armor, helmets with air masks, with backpacks containing needed supplies such as med kits and ammo for their guns who are placed on the other side of the helicopter, in a crate, as the protocol suggests "You five have been given a special mission, unlike the other forty-five people from the other four helicopters. You remember your missions?"


    "Sir, yes, sir!" says a blonde Chinese man rising from his seat and looking at the commander. "Our mission is to eliminate all the zombies from the Dicang Village, Xiahu, China! And establish an outpost!"


    "What is your name, soldier?" asks that commander to the man who answered the question.


    "Name is Ri Ku, sir!"


    "Ri." says the commander. "Listen. You may leave the formalities away from a soldier. I know you were in the Chinese Military, but here, you are not going to be used as a cannon fodder. That is available for all of you. Here, your five will have to work together! You have trained together for three months! Eat. Sleep. Shower. And maybe you had some free time to introduce yourselves. Outside there, your five will have to be together, agile, smart and strong to face these monsters outside. You''ll not act like soldiers who are ordered to kill any zombie on sight. You will kill any zombie on sight, but smart."


    "Sir." says the woman of the group in English, raising her arm. "With all respect, these creatures can still be saved."


    This story is posted elsewhere by the author. Help them out by reading the authentic version.


    "And who are you, girl?"


    "My name is Xin Yan, sir!" says the girl.


    "What makes you say that?"


    "We''ve been informed that some humans are able to control this virus. Undeads, sir."


    "Those are just rumors, Xin. I will not believe it until I see it with my own damn eyes."


    "Not at all, sir." says the second girl from this group. "I have listened to a podcast of one of the survivors from an outpost from Greece. They were talking about a girl from Romania who managed to control her power and fight a whole horde of zombies by herself."


    "You are?" asks the commander looking at the second girl from the group.


    "Apologize. I am Yu Tong, sir!"


    "Well, Yu. Without evidence, these are rumors. Let''s change the subject to what is the most important oneˇ­ The three main rules." The commander looks at one of the people, who is having a black skin, with his helmet off, sitting near him and a buzz cut that looks fresh. "You. Tell me the three main rules."


    "First rule," says the man, raising to his feet and speaking in broken English. "Give hope to those who need it. Second rule. Shoot the zombies. And the third ruleˇ­Give mercy to any infected."


    "Yes," says the commander with a smile. "There are many other rules of The Organization, but these threeˇ­ Are the ones everyone must know." he looks at the man with black skin as he puts his mask on. "You are Ahmed, right? The one who came all the way from Saudi Arabia as the rumors suggest?"


    "Yes, sir!" says Ahmed after he puts on his gas mask. "And those aren''t rumors."


    "So, you came by yourself from Saudi Arabia?"


    "No, sir! I came all the way to Egypt by myself from Dubai. I used to be a bus driver before all of this happened, sir. I''ve taken a lot of boats and ships to get here. Only to be greeted by a convoy from the Organization who accepted me and gave me a new meaning in this life."


    "And that is?"


    "Save the human race, sir."


    "You are going to do a good job." says the commander looking happy at Ahmed, then he looks at the last person he hasn''t exchanged any interaction with. "What is your name?"


    "My name is Li Kay." says that person in a more broken English than a third grade schooler from a foreign country. "Sorry, sir. I don''t speak good English."


    "But you speak Chinese. And it is good to keep communicating with your colleagues."


    Li Kay agreed to this statement by shaking his head.


    The commander turns around and goes toward the pilot who is starting to slow down the helicopter, indicating they are approaching their destination. All the five people are preparing themselves for landing by putting on their gas masks, taking their preferable firearms from the crates, checking their ammo supplies, and taking some favorable melee weapons like knives, machetes and axes with them to slain the zombies in case they''ll run out of ammo. The five, after they have prepared themselves, wait for the helicopter to land in a free zone. All the fighters are feeling nervous, but they don''t show it. They know what they have to do, and that is to clean the entire Dicang Village, all by themselves, while the other forty-five soldiers are focusing on checking the nearby city and checking to see if that place could be used to create a future safe zone.

 Kingdom of Living I - Part 2

    ***


    "Welcome to the boot camp recruits!" yells an elderly man dressed as a soldier, wearing a ton of medals to show the recruits he is one that is not to be messed with. "From this day on, you all will be fighters, not civilians!"


    There are around a hundred people that have formed a line, all wearing military outfits recruits would usually wear, but with a weird logo on the backs of the shirts and T-shirts. In that group there are also the five people who in the present are going to create an outpost in China, that have been presented earlier. Those five people are Ri Ku, Ahmed, Li Kay, Xin Yan and Yu Tang, and all have come from different backgrounds, but after this whole training, they will be brothers in arms.


    "You all look weak and pathetic!" says that older soldier after he looked at all the people who decided to join The Organization Fighting Squads Training Program. "But in these six months, we will make you as strong as the ones who have saved you all!" takes a look at a person, and he asks. "You there! The one with brown hair!"


    "Yes, sir!" says that guy, stepping out of line and looking nervous.


    "Are you nervous? For what? Are you fucking me?"


    "N-N-No, sir!" says that person, looking more nervously.


    "You look like you need a haircut." says that older man to the person, he notices his brown hair is too long. "Go and get yourself a buzz cut or something, or else I''ll throw you to the zombies with only a pistol! The long hair will be a problem in a combat fight because an enemy will grab it, and pull it like a cow''s tits."


    "Yes, sir!" says that person nervously, walking out of the line.


    "Not now!" yells the elder man to that person. "After training!"


    That person turns around and goes back to the line, feeling ashamed. Some of these people were laughing, but others weren''t laughing at this, they looked with pity at the man. Li Kay was giggling at this, and that elder man spotted that giggle and walked fast to Li Kay and yelled at him.


    "You find something funny, funny man?"


    "N-No." says Li Kay in mandarin. "Nothing."


    "What?" asks that elder, looking tough at Li Kay. "Speak English!"


    "S-Sorry, but I don''t know, sir." says Li Kay in a broken English, by using a phrase he learned in a movie.


    "You should learn in these six months!" and he looks at the other people from the line. "And that is available for all of you! One of the most important things about being a member of the Fighting Squad is the ability to speak English. I don''t care if you barely know some words, what I want to see is you people speak English to each other. Communication is key in the Fighting Squad. Unlike in the armies. Understand!"


    "Yes, sir!" says the majority of the group.


    "Louder!"


    "Sir, yes! Sir!" yells most of the people from the line.


    "Louder, motherfuckers!"


    "Sir! Yes! Sir!" yells the people from the line.


    "That''s more like it!" says that elderly man to the group, not sounding happy. "Now. I want all of you to go to the armory, take your guns and some paint. We''ll be using paintball guns, not real guns nor one of those bp''s stuff, or whatever you call it! We will not use real bullets because those are more expensive than some of you! I want all of you to be ready in five minutes and meet me at the shooting range."This tale has been unlawfully lifted from Royal Road. If you spot it on Amazon, please report it.


    The entire group of people are going to the barracks to take out the available weapons. This island, beside being a place to train new recruits for the Fighting Squad, it also presents a weapon factory that has been established not long ago. This factory prepares the needed guns for the soldiers and for the people of the Organization who are needed for their missions. More likely to those who are in the Asian continent.


    This island is located near Taiwan, and it''s heavily fortified from the zombies who are able to swim, but not on large distances from the lands. And beside the weapon factory, this said island provides a vehicle workshop where they are working on fixing and manufacturing cars which are used to kill all of these zombies. Some cars that look like the ones from a Mad Max movie, but these types of cars are rarely used since most of The Organization Fighter Squads possess tanks, military trucks with mounted guns, helicopters and some even have an air jet, but those who have it, are mostly in Europe.


    Arriving at one of the barracks, Li Kay sees a paintball gun laying near the door, he is taking that gun, then, someone hands him a magazine with painting. That someone is Ri Ku, without his short brown bear.


    "Here you go." says Ri Ku in Mandarin to Li Kay.


    "Thank you." responds Li Kay in Mandarin.


    "My name is Ri Ku, but you can call me Ku."


    "Li Kay. You can call me Li or Kay. Doesn''t matter."


    "Alright, Kay. Where were you rescued from?"


    "Beijing."


    The two are taking what they need and head outside, while walking with the other group to the shooting range, Li Kay asks Ri Ku.


    "You were rescued from China?"


    "Yes. Hong Kong." says Ri Ku, then he proceeds to tell him what is a lie. "I was on a business trip there, but this whole apocalypse ruined my plans."


    "What was your job?" asks Li Kay.


    "I was a reporter." lies Ri Ku again.


    "Oh. I worked as a cashier at a convenience store."


    "I also worked on something like that. Mom used to own a shop like this, and every day after school I would usually go there and help her with sales when I was little. Good times."


    "For me, it wasn''t. Thank God, my Boss died."


    "Was it that bad?"


    "It was my brother-in-law."


    The conversation between these two future brothers in arms stops abruptly because of the elder soldier, who used his whistle to warn all the people to stop from talking and listen to what he''ll tell them to do. The elder man points at a cardboard box of a zombie who looks like it was stolen from a Comic Con.


    "You see that. That is a zombie. An ugly zombie who needs to be shot. And where do we shoot?"


    "The head!" says most of the people from that group.


    "Yes. The head. The brain zone is what it should be aimed at. You can also shoot the limbs to incapacitate them. But you risk wasting bullets and be more exposed to dangers, which is not an issue for usˇ­ But if some of you get stranded and have only one magazine at you and a horde of zombies in front of youˇ­ You better know how to fight in close combat."


    The elder man is looking at the recruits who have taken their paintball guns, and he backs away from their shooting range.


    "Show me your aim, people."


    The entire group of people proceed to use the paintball guns, aim at the cardboard on the designated area to shoot and start to spread the paint from their guns. The elder soldier didn''t look impressed at the recruits. Some of them missed their shot completely, others were aiming at the body parts, and others didn''t hold their gun properly, some of them almost dropping on the ground.


    Before the elder man was going to criticize them he notices a Chinese woman holding the gun and aiming at the head of the cardboard, hits every cardboard with such precision, hitting about ten zombies and stops firing when the gun paint bottle gets empty. The elder soldier looks at that young woman and asks her to come to him. The woman obeys the order.


    "What is your name?" asks the elderly man in English.


    "Xin Yan." responds the woman in Mandarin, then switches to English. "My name is Xin Yan, sir!"


    "Where did you learn to shoot like this? It''s better than some soldiers I''ve seen."


    "I was a part of a professional team at Paintball."


    "Something like this exist?"


    "Yes. But it is harder to use a gun."


    "Indeed. You go to the barracks and hand over the paintball gun with the equipment. You are dismissed."


    "Am I done?" asks Xin Yan in mandarin, then switches to English, and asks the same question again.


    "Yes. You head to the barracks, where the others will join you later to teach you about survival techniques you all need in the future."


    "Thank you, sir!" says Yan and walks by herself to the barracks.

 Kingdom of Living I - Part 3

    ***


    When the helicopter has reached the ground, the five fighters and their commander from the Organization Fighting Squad, are heading out of the helicopter as fast as possible and the moment they catch a glimpse from a zombie, the squad starts firing their assault rifles at any nearby zombies in their proximity. Attacking with melee weapons would be pointless because the noise coming from helicopter blades and motors would make zombies turn around and walk after its source from hundreds of meters away. The five people manage to hit the heads of twelve zombies, then they start running ahead, while all six members continue to shoot the upcoming zombies that are walking on their two feet and those who are crawling.


    "We''re one kilometer from Dicang Village, people!" says the commander to the five people. "We run to it! Don''t you all dare to stop walking, pansies!"


    "Yes, sir!" says the five people following the commander and proceed to run toward that place called Dicang Village.


    After a few minutes of running, the squad of five people arrives at the entrance of Dicang village, and there they see a lot of zombies that are roaming on the streets of this village. The zombies that followed them were in smaller numbers than how it was in the beginning. The whole squad proceeds to reload their firearms as fast as possible and continue the fighting. Two of these masked fighters were killing some of the zombies in their proximity. Some of these zombies were laying down due to having their limbs cut, others were running to the people, while some were jumping from a house roof and falling on their face to the street, killing themselves rather than incapacitating survivors. This operation takes about seventeen minutes as the commander calculated by looking on his watch, they entered the village at 1232 and killed the last zombie at 1249.


    The squad of five people are entering a place that looks like a restaurant. Commander, who was last to enter, closes the door behind him, and they all take available seats, tables and everything from that room and use it as a blockage for the door. After they did this all the moving, all the fighters are taking a rest in there after this running, shooting and fighting a horde of zombies on the hill. Two fighters wearing their armor check the building, and lock the windows from zombies who could enter the building through the small windows.


    "We did good." says Ri in English to his people and commander.


    "Yes." Yu Tang says, breathing heavily and looking at her gun, then speaks in English. "I don''t have too many bullets, guys."


    "Neither I." responded Kay, showing his only magazine of AK-47 he has. "But I still have the pistol."


    "We''re good." says the commander. "As long as we have each other, we can survive. But for now, we should rest. Later, I''ll contact you for the backup."


    "We should check the area?" asks Kay, looking at his commander.


    "No." responds the commander to Kay. "You all should be in the same house. We are not sure if we''ve killed all the zombies in this area."


    Kay is looking at Ri, who is cleaning his machete with a piece of cloth he has taken from a corpse that is laying on the floor, near his feet. After the man cleaned his machete, he is looking at his teammates, sees Yan having her armor covered in blood and offers the cloth to clean it, but Yan declines it. The others stay on their chairs, hearing the zombies outside trying to break through the door that is blocked by furniture.


    After this, the commander gets off from the chair, and decides to go in the other room to make a call to report their status and call for backup. The call lasts for about two minutes through the walkie-talkie, then the commander comes back to the room where his people are resisting.This book''s true home is on another platform. Check it out there for the real experience.


    "We''ve got bad news. I cannot contact the other squad. Something must''ve happened in the city."


    "Are we on our own?" asks Kay to the commander.


    "Yes," says the commander. "For a while."


    The commander sees outside through a barricaded window zombies walking from other said "houses" nearby toward their building. He notices the ones who got up were the ones he and his teammates have killed earlier, meaning they did not hit the head of the zombie, which allows them to be knocked out, and get back up somehow. The fighters of Shi Huang squad hear growls and snarling outside, meaning their break ended sooner, and now it is time for round two. All the people are taking their weapons, and decide to use this house as a stronghold against the zombies rather than go outside and risk being encircled by zombies. They take off the furniture that blocks the windows and start shooting immediately.


    "Shoot their heads!" yells the commander at the five fighters who immediately opened fire to the first zombies that are at close distance.


    "Yes, sire!" yells the five fighters at the same time, accompanied by the sounds of their guns.


    Zombies keep coming, and they keep coming to that house, ignoring the bodies of their dead friends laying on the ground, walking on them, while some supposed Undeads are digging into these dead zombies bodies to become fully dead walking zombies. The squad noticed how some Undeads were digging into other zombies, and they shot them on the spot without thinking. It doesn''t matter that they have orders to bring any undead alive and train them to become like Ana-Maria or other Undeads around the world, they are not risking causing a commotion in their new home.


    After an hour of this fierce fight, the squad of five people, who have by now ran out of bullets, are killing the last five zombies with their guns barrels and machetes. Ahmed decapitated a zombie by a single hit. Liu has kicked a zombie on the torso, then did a spin with the machete and slashes the brain zone of that zombie. Ri has stabbed the zombie head with the machete, then he takes it back and kicks the zombie into another dead body on the ground. Yu stabs one zombie neck, then twists the machete, takes it from the neck of the zombie, and does another strike that decapitates the thing from the body. And Yu decapitates the zombie with her machete, then she looks at the zombie head and smashes the thing''s head with the shotgun back.


    All five people are breathing heavily, decide to lay down on their ass and look around them, to all the destruction they caused here. Hundreds of zombies are laying on the area in this village, many zombies are decapitated, shot in the head, smashed and mutilated beyond recognition by the guns of this squad. All six of them are having their armor covered in zombie blood, all of their armor, including their visors from the gas masks.


    "We did good." says Yu Tong to his teammates, sitting near Ri Ku and Li Kay.


    "Yeahˇ­" sighs Ahmed. "We did good enough."


    "Congratulations!" says the commander, covered in blood, and with his shotgun in his hands. "You survived the first wave!"


    "Thank you, sir!" says Ri. "But we have a problem."


    "What is it?" asks the commander.


    "We have no ammo." says Ri showing the magazine from his assault rifle and submachine gun are all empty.


    "Don''t worry, friend." says the commander in a friendly voice. "We called for backup minutes ago. They are on their way to help us clean this place."


    "The cleaning will take an eternity." says Li.


    "That is a joke, recruit?" asks the commander, looking at Li. He wears a breathing helmet like everyone, which doesn''t really sound like a joke, more like a threat.


    "Sorry, sir!" says Li, feeling ashamed for making a dumb joke like this in front of his supervisor.


    "Don''t worry," says the commander. "You''re right. It will take an eternity. That is why we will let them clean this place while all of you are going to clean your suits and rest in one of these houses. You all deserve some rest after the fight. You all have done it."


    "Is the air safe?" asks Ahmed to the commander.


    The commander takes off his helmet, revealing he is the one who had trained them back in the bootcamp six months ago, he takes a deep breath and exhales the fresh air of the mountains.


    "Seems like it!"


    "Thank you, sir!" says the five people, feeling happy they finally get a break.


    Soon, the five people are getting up, walks outside the said restaurant after they''ve taken off the furniture, walking inside a house, where everyone gets in one of the rooms and proceed to take out piece by piece of their armor, leaving only the gas mask on because they did not ask to take their gas mask off. After all of them have taken their armor off, and put some changing clothes they''ve found laying in this house. Some were the size of the fighters, while others were a little too big. They all head outside in these clothes, where the commander looks at them, still wearing the armor but without the helmet, analyzes their spare outfits and tells them.


    "Nice clothes," he says.

 Kingdom of Living I - Part 4

    ***


    Back to the past, to the first night of the newcomers at the bootcamp, the new fighters have finished the first day of their training regime, and now they are all going to their beds to sleep. Now, on this bootcamp, the males and women are sleeping mixed in big tents that hold about twelve sleeping bags. All of them are tired, some on the verge of collapsing, and others have already puked their meal from this morning before leaving. Women and men are sleeping in separate tents, obviously, and they all should wake up from their slumber at around 5 o''clock for a new training session. A habit that will happen daily for them for the next five months. It is harder at first, but at the end it will become easier.


    In one specific tent, twelve people are sleeping on the ground, in sleeping bags, and most of them are snoring, but those who are awake don''t care to wake these people who are snoring. They know all of them are tired from the first day of training. Most of the people in that tent were Chinese, men in their 20s to 40s. All of them are tired after a day like this. Running while chased by soldiers who were on bikes with whips was probably the toughest training program so far for some of them. This training consisted in making the recruits understand the dangers of a zombie from Class F who can throw boulders, cars or anything else at them. Most of them have been whipped several times, while others have managed to escape with only one whip on their back, but a whip still hurts like hell.


    About twenty people give up on their dreams to become recruits after this hellish training they went through. They''ve taken their luggage and gone back into the artificial islands, where they would help maintain the places they''ve been designed by The Organization. They can also choose where they want to live, but if the said place has enough available space for them.


    Another difficult training was combat fighting, where highly trained soldiers were going empty-handed to the recruits, who were armed with logs, bricks, cobblestones, whatever they could find, and had to knock out the soldiers who went to attack them like zombies. But these soldiers were hard to fall down, even if they were getting a brick thrown at them. Although, a few people, like Ahmed, managed to put at least a soldier down which ends the training of the said future fighter. And Ahmed has managed to do it with a plank.


    Ahmed was face to face with a soldier who didn''t look to be in the best form, but neither was Ahmed six months ago, still malnourished to the point where the rib cage could be seen when he was going topless at the shower room. The man put that soldier down by using the plank as a defensive object, and not to attack the soldier. He protected himself with the plank while the soldier was launching the punches and kicks. When the plank breaks, Ahmed hits the soldier in the chest by a kick, which makes the soldier land on the ground. The soldier is looking at Ahmed with a smirk and tells him.This book was originally published on Royal Road. Check it out there for the real experience.


    "Not bad. But you cannot survive out there by protecting yourself. You have got to attack."


    "I know." says Ahmed, getting up, and looks at the soldier who is preparing himself for another attack.


    The soldier goes straight to Ahmed, who by instinct moves to the left, and lands a punch, also by instinct, to the jaw of that soldier. A hit so hard, it makes the soldier fall on his knees on the cold ground. The soldier looks back surprised at Ahmed after he regains his composure, Ahmed is also surprised by his sudden attack while making a punch.


    "You did good. What is your name, recruiter?"


    "My name is Ahmed, sir!" says Ahmed, looking at the soldier getting up on his feet and cleaning himself.


    "You punched well. But zombies can only be killed by aiming at the brain. And your punch cannot go through a zombie''s brain. Their skulls may be weakened with time, but a punch is not enough to destroy that shield. Understand? But your idea of using the plank as some sort of shield is not bad, but it was the worst choice as a shield. You get it?"


    Ahmed only responded to these questions by shaking his head in approval. The soldier tells Ahmed that he passed this exercise, and he can go to rest for the next exercise.


    The next and final exercise of that day consisted of swimming five hundred meters on the ocean, fully clothed. A difficult task that made many of these recruiters quit this training and pack their stuff who want to leave. But those five who managed to pass this test were many, and in that group were Ahmed, Xin, Ri, Li and Yu.


    "Hey." whispers Li Kay to the person named Ahmed in English. "Are you awake?"


    "Yeahˇ­" whispers Ahmed looking at the tent ceiling. "Who are you?"


    "Li. Kay."


    "Li or Kay?"


    "Both are good. Sorry. Bad English."


    "Don''t worry. Mine''s not any better. Ahmed."


    "Huh?"


    "Name is Ahmed."


    "Nice to meet you."


    "Sameˇ­ You cannot sleep?"


    "Noˇ­ All my body hurts like hell."


    "Same here."


    "Training is hard," says another person in a whisper.


    "Would you all shut up!" says a person, sounding pissed off. "People are trying to sleep here."


    From this, everyone decided to stop talking and try to fall asleep. Ahmed and Li fell asleep minutes later, but this wouldn''t last long because four hours later all of them were awakened from the slumber, ordered that all of them leave their sleeping bags, take their boots and leave the tents. They did not need to change clothes because they were sleeping in what are called uniforms, that are just normal civilian clothes with a bulletproof vest.


    This is an average day at the bootcamp, lots of training, small doses of sleep and a lot of time to learn about enemies in the zombies guides that were made and shared to some police stations around the world for the survivors in the early days. But these guides they''ve been handed here at the bootcamp, contains everything.

 Kingdom of Living I - Part 5

    ***


    Back to the present, ten minutes after the fight squad Shi Huang had earlier, all the people from the group have isolated any windows and broken doors from the outside. They''ve used furniture that was laid around and were useless to them at this moment. The group has done this in order to not risk getting a zombie breach inside their temporary shelter to rest and wait for the reinforcements to come to their aid. The whole group stays in the house, without their gas masks because the air in this shelter is safe to breathe.


    "It kinda suits your long hair." say Xin to Li as they all collectively decide to sit on a room, on the floor, couch, and sofas.


    "Thank you." responds Li to Xin comment, and he looks at the girl, thinking of a compliment to give it back. "Yourˇ­ umˇ­ Face looks good."


    Xin giggled at this, which made Li feel a little cringe for saying this bad line.


    "Ahmed." Xin looks at Ahmed, who is cleaning his machete with a cloth he has taken from a zombie corpse. "What is your story?"


    "Story?" asks Ahmed, confused.


    "How did you get here?"


    "Here? You mean in the camp?"


    "Yes."


    "Why?"


    "Want to pass the time while we are all waiting for reinforcements."


    "Alright. But you first."


    "Good." says Xin looking at Ahmed with a smile, she sighs and starts to tell her story on how she got here, on this Fighting Squad program. "Back then, I was a cashier. At a shop that sells clothes. Overpriced clothes that people were buying like it is original. I woke up in the morning, I got out of bed, was about to make my breakfast and my zombie neighbor knocked on my door. I opened the door, saw the neighbor was trying to bite my arm and neck. But I managed to fend him off, lock in my apartment and met with a group of two people who have helped me get on this artificial island."


    "That''s it?" asks Ahmed.


    "Yeah." says Xin. "I was sent to a zone, then to an artificial island."


    "You got lucky," says Ahmed. "I was doing my job as a bus driver in Abu Dhabi. I was a driver on a tourist bus, which was mostly empty. I hated my job and wanted to leave Abu Dhabi, but I couldn''t leave because of the bureaucracy from thereˇ­ I saw zombies on the street, and from video games, I understood what was happening. Likewise, I managed to help a group of twelve people get on the docks, where we and everyone get inside a ship from The Organization."The narrative has been taken without authorization; if you see it on Amazon, report the incident.


    "You helped twelve people?" asks Yu. "Are they on the island?"


    "Yes. They are still on the island. I heard all of them are living great lives there. One guy who was feeling suicidal got better mental health and also got a job as a construction worker."


    "Good for him." say Xin.


    "Guys!" say the commander walking in the room with a walkie-talkie. "I talked with the group. Reinforcements are coming."


    "Great." says the group of five people almost at the same time.


    "And what will we do until then?" asks Xin.


    "We wait." responds the commander to Xin''s question.


    "I see." responds Xin.


    "This wasn''t so-" tried to say, Li Kay.


    "Don''t." say Ahmed and Ri Ku at the same time.


    "Don''t say it." says Yu being a second late.


    "Alright, alright." says Li Kay.


    ***


    There are five other squads, all of them consisting of forty-five highly trained fighters. Those five are mixed to form an army who is currently having a whole different mission than Shi Huang Squad. That mission is to establish a safe zone in the city. That city is known under the name of Lanzhou, a city that has fallen like many others around the world in the past six months. One of the helicopters that came into the city lands on the rooftop of a big building, from that single helicopter only twelve fighters, wearing their anti-biting armor, get out and start shooting the zombies that are getting up on their feet who felt human presence. How they came to this rooftop is a mystery to these fighters, that won''t matter in the slightest. Another helicopter lands on a rooftop of another building, where ten soldiers get out from the helicopter and start shooting. And the last two helicopters are landing in the nearby park of this city.


    "Go! Go! Go!" yells a soldier in English to his squad on the rooftop after he spots a fire door exit. "To the door!"


    The other fighters are running after their leader to that door, who seem to be locked from inside. The squad tries to open it by force, but it was to no use, so a fighter steps ahead, uses his shotgun to shoot the hinges of the door like in some kind of movie, after two shots he kicks it, but the door won''t budge. Then the leader steps ahead, kicks hard enough for this door to break and fall down the stairs.


    "That is how you do it." says the leader to the teammate.


    "Thank you, sir!" responds that fighter, feeling awkward about this moment.


    "Let''s go!" yells the commander. "Remember the mission. Check the building for supplies and survivors!"


    "There are people here?" asks a fighter to the leader.


    "Hopefully there are good people." says another fighter while he was going down the stairs with his teammates.


    "Be quiet," says the commander.


    The squad of twelve fighters have arrived in a hallway, the one situated at the twenty floor. In there, the squad sees a few zombies who are crawling to them. The fighters quickly use the melee weapons such as knives and machetes to decapitate the heads of the bodies. After they''ve killed five zombies, the leader of this squad whispers to his people.


    "Don''t you notice these zombies are having their legs cut off?"


    "Yeah." whispers a fighter, looking carefully at a zombie''s lower part. "His legs look like they''ve been sawed by a blade or some kind of saw." He touches the palace where the leg was sawed with his glove anti-biting armor, notice the cut is old. "He was cut a long time agoˇ­ Really long time ago."


    "How long can you deduce?" asks a teammate.


    "Probably more than a month." says the fighter to his friend who asked this question, then says. "I worked as a criminal investigator before the apocalypse."


    "I understand." says the leader, then he looks at his people. "Check the rooms of this floor. Then we''ll check the other floors."


    "Yes, sir!" says all the fighters in a lowered tone to not attract too much attention to other zombies inside this building.

 Kingdom of Living I - Part 6

    Three fighters enter a room, with the door wide open, revealing one corpse of a woman eaten in half. A fighter looks at the walls of this room, which are all painted in the blood of humans. A soldier is using a flashlight to see the written things on the wall. There are a bunch of Chinese symbols in there that would be alien to foreigners, but for some of these fighters aren''t.


    "Cannibalistic Sanctuary." says a fighter in a lower tone.


    "It makes senseˇ­" says a fighter looking at the corpse of a woman. "The woman doesn''t look like she''s infected."


    "Should we do something about this?"


    "I know." says a fighter. "Should we destroy this building?"


    "No. We need it. And maybe. These crazy people are gone from here." says another fighter. "Even if we encounter them. What could they do? Stab us? We have anti-biting and anti-stabbing armor on us."


    "Yes." says a fighter chucking at this statement. "You are right."


    After a few minutes, the squad of soldiers finished their mission to check the twenty floor, then they walked down to the nineteen floor. Arriving at that floor, they see a lot more corpses of humans and zombies on the hallway. Twelve were counted by a soldier. They all tried to get inside these rooms, but some of them were locked and blocked, and those who weren''t, they were smelling bad like the hallway and the twenty floor. The squad checks this place for a bit, then they all go down to the eighteenth floor. Arriving at that floor, they see the same thing as the nineteen floor, corpses, bad smell and locked doors.


    Later, the squad has arrived at the eighth floor, where they see something macabre to humans. A naked human, covered in blood, stands at the end of the hallway, with a knife, covered in blood. The person turns around to the squad of twelve fighters, who are all aiming their guns at him. That naked person is revealed by the help of flashlights to be a man. Long black hair and small beard, black eyes and a crazy smile. That person is laughing at the soldiers while he yells in Chinese.


    "Fresh meat! Fresh meat!"


    "Hey!" yells a guy in English, then says in Chinese. "Who are you?"


    "Fresh meat, fresh meat. Fresh meat."


    That creepy guy starts to go to the squad of the soldiers, with violent intentions, with the knife in his hands and laughing maniacally. But the creepy guy gets immediately shot in the head by the twelve fighters. The creepy guy falls down on his back to the floor, near the body of a human who is hard to recognize based on gender. The fighters are looking at the body, checking to see if the person is infected, and it is a human.


    "The guy has serious trouble," says a fighter.


    "Do you think there are more people like this here?"


    "If there are more." says the fighter of this squad. "We''ll kill all of them."


    "Do we have to?" asks a fighter.


    "Yes." responds the leader. "These monsters cannot be redeemable."This story has been unlawfully obtained without the author''s consent. Report any appearances on Amazon.


    The squad checked the entire floor, all doors were unlocked and unblocked from the inside. Upon checking the rooms, they see a lot of dead humans and zombies lying around the floor, on the beds and on the desks. To say how bad the situation was in a room like this, in a room they''ve found a head of a zombie, still alive, growling and screeching when the soldiers entered the place.


    "This is sickening." says a fighter going to that head of the zombie, and stabbing him with a knife, killing from the torture he suffers. "These people are crazy."


    "This is bad." says a fighter looking at a bed where a woman lay in there, with her belly opened and her newborn decapitated in the belly. "I don''t think we can use this palace as a hideout. There''s justˇ­ too much to clean up."


    "That is fucked up." says a fighter looking at that bed.


    Others saw the image and left the room, scared and traumatized. One also vomited in the hallway all of his meal he had hours ago. This thing was so messed up that the leader decided to contact the higher ups, and tell them that this palace needs to be bombed. The higher ups, understanding from the fear of the voice the leader had, granted the permission to bomb this place. All the twelve fighters are going back to the rooftop, where the helicopter waits for them.


    While going to the rooftop, the leader tried to contact the other squads, but he couldn''t. He tried and tried several times, then he got a message from a squad that yelled on the walkie-talkie. "We are under attack! We are under attack!". The leader heard the message and responded back with:"Squad Turbo! Where?". Then the person replied with: "P-Park. We are under attack in the pa-" then the conversation cuts off.


    "People!" says the leader to his people when they arrive at the twenty-fourth floor. "We are going to the park."


    "Yes, sir!" says his teammates, who all have heard the message from earlier."


    When they arrived at the rooftop, the helicopter was about to take off. All the people are quickly getting inside the helicopter, with their weapons and all the supplies they''ve found in there. Only three soldiers have found two full backpacks worth of food supplies, which made all of them question why people from this building resorted to this way of surviving. The leader tells the pilots to head over to the park where the Turbo squad was last seen, and the pilots did this.


    A few minutes later, the helicopter arrives close to the Park, and there they see a lot of zombies invading the helicopter of Turbo squad. They also hear gunfire coming from a hundred meters away from the helicopter. That gunfire comes from a person who is shooting at the helicopter from the rooftop of a house. All the fighters and the pilots are taking cover from the bullets that are coming and breaking the windows. A fighter manages to get his hands on a sniper rifle and immediately shoots the attacker, on the chest.


    "Jesus!" says one of the fighters.


    "What a lunatic." says the commander.


    The fighters see how that man lies on the ground, screaming for help and trying to grab the rifle that is meters away from his reach. The fighters don''t do anything, they just watch the man, who soon was eaten by the zombies who came after him. The fighters are looking around the area trying to make a conclusion on how it was possible for this place to get overrun and one squad with an immense firepower get overrun by some mindless creatures, while the ones, the ones Turbo squad was in, managed to flee from here, but Omega squad didn''t make it.


    "Shit. The whole squad got killed." says a soldier looking down at the helicopter flooded with zombies.


    "Not only them." says the leader, pointing at a helicopter that is located on another rooftop of a building not far from here. "Squad Tenes is also gone."


    "Who the fuck did this?" says a soldier and looks at his teammates for an answer.


    "M-Must''ve been the type of guys from earlier in that building."


    "Could be."


    "Let''s leave this place." says the leader to the pilots. "There is nothing we could do here to help. We have to head over to Dicang Village. Regroup and announce the higher ups to bomb this city."


    "How is the status there?" asks the pilot of the helicopter.


    "They did it. Cleaned the whole village."


    "Good." says the pilot and starts to report to the other pilots on the headphones their status and where they are going.


    Soon, the only two remaining helicopters, with Turbo squad and El Tigro squad, head outside this city and fly more than twenty kilometers to Dicang Village, where the Shi Huang squad is waiting for them.

 Kingdom of Living I - Part 7

    On the following morning, the Shi Huang Squad is leaving one of the many houses that look alike to look at the aftermath of the battle they''ve had last night. Walking down the streets, they see all the bodies that have been killed by this squad. Children, women, elderly and what were once healthier individuals, are all resting on this cold ground, with shots to the heads and all around their zombified and decaying bodies. What happened last night was a massacre for this future outpost, but this is how humanity fights during this period of time.


    "How many did you count?" asks Li Kay to Ri Ku while they are walking down the street.


    "There''s definitely more than a thousand." says Ri Ku walking with Li Kay to the street, passing by a decomposed body. "Some of them were here before our arrival. Maybe months ago."


    "The apocalypse started six months ago, right?"


    "In some places around the world, yes," says Ri Ku. "But in Asia, I heard the latest report stating the apocalypse came in 3¨C4 months later than in Europe. In Sri Lanka it was the first infection, then it spread quickly in just a week all over Asia."


    "I know that." says Li Kay to Ri Ku who both stops from walking, and look to the direction of a house.


    The two are equipped in their uniforms, with their breathing masks, anti-biting armor and both having an assault rifle with a few bullets remaining. Li Kay is looking at the opened door of the house and sees there is a zombie walking down the stairs.


    "Undeads?" ask Ri Ku to Li Kay.


    "I don''t know." says Li Kay, backing up to let the said zombie walk out in the sunlight.


    After the zombie walks outside the house, they see who that zombie is, and they are looking baffled by this. The zombie is what used to be a man, with a missing left arm, which is tied in bandages, meaning he had his arm cut a while ago because of the blood that now has become a darker color on the bandage. The body wears a military uniform without any bulletproof vest and has on his back a ripped backpack in half. The body doesn''t have the facial features an Asian would have, he is looking to have those of a person that is born in North America, somewhere in the Southwest. That zombie walks slowly to Ri Ku and Li Kay, raising his arm while growling.


    "I''ll take it." says Ri Ku taking out a knife, walking closer to the zombie and stabbing the head of the said zombie with a precise move. "You can rest." he says, catching the zombie''s body and laying with ease on the ground on his face.


    "A soldier from US?" asks Li Kay to Ri Ku who starts to look at the half-ripped backpack and check its insides.


    "I think." says Ri Ku looking in the backpack, he spots a watch. "Look."


    "I already have one." says Li Kay.


    "Alright." says Ri Ku taking the watch on his right arm, revealing another three watches on his arm. "A fourth one wouldn''t hurt."


    "Why are you taking so many watches?" asks Li Kay curios. "We never heard your reason for this weird thing of yours."


    "It is because I have heard the story of someone who was collecting watches and using them as an "armor" against zombies. At first, I was skeptical, but after he showed it to me, I believed him. I know we have this armor, but a second layer of protection wouldn''t hurt, don''t you think?"Stolen from its rightful place, this narrative is not meant to be on Amazon; report any sightings.


    "Right." says Li Kay.


    Soon, Ri Ku finds on this half-eaten backpack a map that was hidden in a special pocket that hasn''t been ripped apart. Ri Ku takes the map and shows it to Li Kay. Both are looking at the map, feeling curious. They see some markings on this map, like one in red ink that says in English: "Do not go in there. Bad people." in an area not too far from there. In that circle, there is something written in Chinese, the name of an elementary school, that name is: "Xiahe Sangke Jisuzhi Elementary School".


    "Should we go there?" asks Li Kay to Ri Ku feeling unsure.


    "No." says Ri Ku looking at the map. "First we''ll wait for the reinforcements to come, then we''ll see what we''ll do from now on.


    Ri Ku puts the backpack away from the dead soldier''s body to check the insides better. The two fighters leave the body and continue their checking to see if there''s any remaining zombie alive. Later, they''ll have the task to make piles of these bodies and burn them outside the Dicang village.


    While the two were walking to the entrance of Dicang village, the two saw two helicopters approaching the area. Li Kay takes out his pair of binoculars that are hidden under the anti-biting armor to check to see if these helicopters are friendly. And Li Kay says to Ri Ku while looking at the binoculars.


    "That''s them."


    "Turbos squad?" asks Ri Ku to Li Kay.


    "Yes," says Li Kay, passing the binoculars to Ri Ku to watch the helicopters approaching. "Also the El Tigro squad. I thought there were many more helicopters."


    The helicopters proceed to land on a plain land, with a low number of trees but a high number of decayed corpses from humans and animals. When the helicopters land in the area, the fighters from those aircraft leave and walk with their equipment toward where the Shi Huang Squad has gathered to see them. There are only two squads of soldiers from those five that were ordered to check Xiahou and see if they can establish a safe zone, but since they see there are only two squads rather than five, means the three squads have gone down.


    "Greetings!" says the commander of Shi Huang Squad to the leader of a squad. "What happened?"


    "We failed, sir." says the leader of a squad, one who looks to be at the same age as the fighters from Shi Huang squad.


    The three squads are wearing different emblems than the one that Shi Huang has, to help identify the difference between the squads, something that The Organization has thought of at the beginning.


    "H-How?" asks the commander, shocked by this. "How many have died?"


    "From our reports," says another leader of the second squad. "Three squads have been destroyed, that consisted of 15 humans."


    "You''ve lost fifteen people out of fifty?"


    "Yeah." responds the leader, feeling bad. "But, we have an idea how. There weren''t zombies that decimated two squads. There were humans."


    "Humans?" asks Li Kay to his group, stunned by this.


    "Why would they do this?" asks Ahmed to Ri Ku.


    "I don''t know." says Ri Ku.


    "How large was the group?" asks the commander. "The ones that have attacked the two squads?"


    "We don''t know, sir." says that young leader. "We only found one that attacked the squad. Was shot down on the spot. But I think there are many more like this."


    "I see." says the commander. "Alright. Go to the village and rest for now."


    "Is the village safe?" asks a soldier from the group.


    "From nowˇ­" says the commander who is walking with the remaining thirty-five fighters inside the village, while the other five fighters are ordered by their commanders to carry all the nearby bodies in a pile and burn them. "If a horde will show up, we''ll announce it to you and ask for help."


    This whole plain has around more than a hundred bodies, all of them were new and others were so decomposed the bodies show bones, bullet holes and stab wounds all around their bodies who still have some meat on them. The five fighters started to place the first corpses far from the helicopters, then they were burning them after the pile of corpses became big enough and emptied the whole village, a process that has taken more than three hours. It would''ve taken double the time if it weren''t for some other fighters who wanted to join the action.


    Soon, a third helicopter appeared, this one was one of the reinforcements that had to come. The helicopter is transporting only ten fighters and the commander of squad Reido Dragons, Reido. Squad know to be one of the most dangerous ones against zombies due to their way of fighting close and not losing any person since the beginning of this apocalypse.

 Kingdom of Living I - Part 8

    ***


    In a shack inside this village, the commander of Shi Huang Squad and other soldiers have gathered to discuss their next plan. The men inside that shack are all the commanders of their respective squads. There are four commanders and a soldier who is sitting on the desk and tries to establish a radio connection with the nearest base to report that their mission hasn''t worked exactly well for all of them. The radio on that desk is a L3Harris The RF-7850S SPR, an advanced radio model for the 2020s, one that works well to this time on times like this. While the person tries to establish a communication to their base, the four commanders are gathered around a table, with a big map of this area. The four commanders do not have any names, they are called by their squad name.


    "Shi Huang." says one commander to Shi Huang leader.


    "What is it, Reido?" asks Shi Huang to the man named Reido, a middle-aged man, slim, with long beard and long hair, wearing sunglasses.


    "How was the situation here before you all arrived?"


    "It was bad." says Shi Huang. "Really bad.", he walks away from the table, walks toward the nearest window, where he looks at the other soldiers carrying the remaining bodies of zombies from this village where they''ll burn it outside the village. "There were more than a hundred of them hereˇ­" he looks back at the people, standing near the window. "We fought hard for this village. We all thought at one point we will not make itˇ­ But we did it."


    "And you used all of your ammunition?" asks a commander with glasses with a military cap on his bald head.


    "Yes, Turbo." says Shi Huang, commander.


    "Understood. And when did it happen? When did you realize you''ve used the entire ammunition?"


    "I am not sure," says the commander. "Probably at the last wave of zombies. That time I ordered my people to switch to their melee weapons, stand close to each other and protect ourselves as best as we could." He then walks over to the table, looks at the map and points at the city where the other squads had to retreat. "So you say this city cannot be established into a safe zone, right?"


    "Right." says the commander with short blonde hair, a piercing on his lips and a tiger tattoo on the left cheek. That commander wears a tag on the military uniform with the label that is written in Spanish: "El Tigro".


    "How many have died?" asks the Shi Huang commander.


    "Fifteen." responds Turbo. "Three squads, El Meca, Adidas and Tarantula."


    "Fine peopleˇ­" says Shi Huang, feeling bad for this loss. "They were fine people. Strong and smart."


    "And now what will we do?" asks El Tigro. "Will we stay here until further instructions?"Unauthorized usage: this narrative is on Amazon without the author''s consent. Report any sightings.


    "Looks like it." says Reido.


    "In the meantime," says Shi Huang. "We can fortify the village. Use anything heavy to create walls around this village."


    "That''s what you want to do?" asks Turbo to Shi Huang.


    "Yes." says Shi Huang, and points all around the cities on the map. "These places are considered to have millions of zombies. If one day, they all decide to walk to our safe zone, we will all be swapped away like many other safe zones all around Europe. We will have to gather anything heavy we can see to use it as a barricade. Trucks, trailers, containers, it doesn''t matter. Then we''ll have to scout for fences to make electrical fences like an outpost from Japan, I''ve heard from a person who left that outpost."


    "Why would he leave the outpost?" asks Turbo as a curiosity.


    "That person wanted to join the Fighters."


    "Ah, he comes to training, right?" asks El Tigro.


    Shi Huang only shook his head in approval.


    "Good idea." says Turbo to Shi Huang. "But how would we carry it? We only have helicopters."


    "Do you have hinges?" asks Shi Huang.


    "Good idea." says Reido to Shi Huang. "Our helicopters can carry a trailer and containers from a nearby deposit.", he looks at the map and points to a truck deposit not far away from here. "Maybe there we can find some trailers and containers that we can use for our walls. And these containers may have supplies, food, and water."


    "Maybe weapons too." says El Tigro.


    "Small chances, El Tigro." says Turbo to El Tigro. "China had a strict gun law back then."


    "I see." says El Tigro.


    "Good. Is it official?" asks Shi Huang to the squad of four commanders.


    "Yes," says Turbo. "I''ll send six people and two helicopters to go and bring as much stuff as they can from that depot."


    "Good to hear." says Shi Huang. "The rest of us, we should focus on cleaning all the bodies from the village."


    Soon, the commanders of their respective squads leave the shack to let the person on the desk work to a radio communication with the nearest base The Organization opens. The soldier explained this process will take longer since their nearest base is approximately 4000 kilometers away from their location. This radio station can make this connection secure because it has been upgraded a month ago by a genius technician from Micoy (the base they are trying to contact).


    After the commanders have left the shack, they all walk toward the entrance of the village, where the helicopter''s pilots are helping the soldiers carry the bodies of the dead humans. The pilots were stopped from working by their commanders, who had ordered them to prepare for a trip to the nearest truck depot to take anything heavy with their helicopters. But the pilots have told their commanders their transportation needs have run out of fuel after they travel far away from Chengdu, the place where they last refueled their helicopters last time.


    "How much fuel do you need?" asks El Tigro.


    "A lot." says the pilot after he and his copilot have thrown a zombie body into the body pile. "But not any fuel. We need jet fuel. And the nearest airport is hundreds of kilometers away from us."


    "We''ll find a way." says El Tigro to the pilots, then he looks at the commanders. "Give me three men and I will bring back this jet fuel in no time."


    "You sure can do this?" asks Shi Huang.


    "I can do it." says El Tigro assures the group. "I''ve been through the worst situations in Palestine before this apocalypse came. I''ve been dealing with the fall of Odessa. This will be a walk in a park."


    "Understood." says Turbo. "Go ahead if you can do it."


    "When will you leave?" asks Reido.


    "Now." says El Tigro. "We need the fuel as fast as possible."


    An hour later, a jeep leaves the Dicang village, in that jeep there is the commander named El Tigro and three fighters, from those three fighters there is Ri Ku, who has volunteered to be a part of this mission. While in the jeep, the group listens to the mixtape of El Tigro, which contains mostly music that Mexicans would enjoy. The group did not comment on this, they did not say anything to their commander during their trip to the nearest abandoned airport.

 Kingdom of Living I - Part 9

    Hours later, a jeep arrives in front of an airport that is located hundreds of kilometers away from their safe zone. Now this said airport was once populated, but looks like a wasteland now. At the front of the airport, there are a lot of dead bodies of humans, decomposed a while ago, most of them were having biting marks all around their body parts, zombie bodies who were all laying in there for months, and there is also a blockage of vehicles that prevent people from outside from entering the area.


    "This is the airport?" asks a soldier in El Tigro while they are looking at the cars that block the entrance to the airport.


    "Yes." respond El Tigro. "Nearest to our safe zone."


    "The entrance is blocked." says another soldier to El Tigro, after he looked all around.


    "I can see that." says El Tigro. "But this is not my first trip here, boys."


    "What do you mean by that?" asks Ri Ku looking at El Tigro who is walking toward the airport entrance.


    But El Tigro did not respond to this question, he instead went inside without any carefree with his double-barrel shotgun in one single hand, going through a hole in the fence. Soon, his fighters are coming inside the airport where they are following El Tigro who''s walking toward the nearest gate of the airport. The group passes a lot of dead bodies that belong to humans who once were civilians and to military personnel. Some of these bodies have been decomposed for a while, while others seem to be fresh, which is considered to be something suspicious for many.


    "This airport was once a battlefield months ago." says El Tigro to his group walking down the hallway and passing the immense amount of bodies laying on this cramped hallway. "Thousands were fighting for their lives here, in hopes to catch a plane that would transport them to our nearest base. Many who came from this airport survived, but others did not make it after they were taken from here. Reports told us at least one out of five people coming from here were infected with this virus. Those who were presenting symptoms of the Z virus, were immediately shot upon their arrival. It did not matter if you could control it or not. You had the risk of possessing the Z virus. You die. End of the story."You might be reading a pirated copy. Look for the official release to support the author.


    "How do you know all of this?" asks Ri Ku to El Tigro after he finished his speech about this airport.


    "I was sent here by The Organization, to maintain the protection of this evacuation point. But like many, it had failed the moment people came in masses and in hours."


    The group stop in front of the airport gate, where they see in front of them seven zombies, who are on their feet walking aimlessly, and another one eating the body of a decomposed human. One of the people from the group of fighters takes his melee weapon, a machete, the others and El Tigro do the same, walking slowly toward the zombies and slashing all seven of them in a minute. Ri Ku has killed only two zombies, while the others have killed the rest by themselves. The zombies Ri Ku has killed came from one of the many hangars.


    "Good work." says El Tigro to his group.


    The group walks toward the planes and helicopters that are laying in there. At this airfield, there is a great mass of dead bodies, military vehicles that look damaged, a lot of destroyed equipment all around the zone and a lot of trash. There are five hangars that are located a hundred steps away and ask El Tigro in broken English.


    "What''s with these?"


    "These?" ask El Tigro to that man, who has stopped from walking, letting Ri Ku and the others check the perimeter. "Ah those? Those are called hangars. It is a shame these are locked from the side."


    "Have you tried to take down the doors?" asks that fighter.


    "No, we did not." says El Tigro to that fighter, then he looks at the hangars, holding his double-barrel shotgun. "That''s what we''ll try now."

 Kingdom of Living I - Part 10

    ***


    Inside a hangar, the group of squad from Dicang Village have managed to enter this huge hangar by breaking the back door lock. When they enter the building, they notice a truck in there, with a tanker trailer that transports fuel. The group has hit the jackpot, and this was just the first hangar out of the other four from this airport alone. The group also notices there are a few crates lying in these hangars, some are opened revealing their contents while others are closed with locks like any container of The Organization would be at the beginning of the apocalypse to not let zombies get their hands on the weapons. One of the fighters walked toward an opened crate, where found in one a ton of guns and ammunition.


    "Check this out." says that fighter to his leader of the mission and the other fighters, showing them a working shotgun in this crate.


    "Wait a minute." says El Tigro walking closer to that crate, and he looks on the left side of the crate, where he sees something he expected to find. "I knew it."


    "What is it?" asks Ri Ku.


    "Remember one of The Organization tasks was to supply the civilians around the infected parts of the world with firearms?"


    "Yes."


    "Wellˇ­ These are our weapons." he checks another crate, looks after the sign and the name label that reveals "The Organization" name and logo. "And these are our weapons."


    "What are they doing here?" asks a fighter.


    "Don''t know." responds El Tigro. "But these weapons should not be here."


    "What if there''s someone in here?" asks Ri Ku. "You know, living in this zone?"


    "That''s a probability. This area has fewer active zombies than other areas I know."


    "What will we do?" asks a fighter.


    "We take these." says El Tigro. "We take everything. It belongs to The Organization."


    "And the fuel tanker?" asks a fighter.


    "Of course we''ll take it." says El Tigro."Who''ll be driving it?"


    "I will do it." says a fighter. "Before the apocalypse hit I was a truck driver in Poland."


    "You have it with trucks?"


    "This modelˇ­" says while looking at the truck. "It''s Changan. I''ve driven something like this once."


    "Then you can go." says El Tigro.


    "You''ll let him go now?" asks a fighter to El Tigro.


    "Yes. I will." says El Tigro looking at the fighter. "It''s there a problem?"


    "No, sir. I meanˇ­ Will it be safe? To go by his own?"


    "I will." says the driver to the fighter. "The base is not far from here. While we were in the helicopter I looked at the map, and I''d found some routes that could help us all get safely to the destination. Avoiding the cities and villages all around the area."


    The fighter hops in the truck, there he finds the keys in the contact, which was strange since how can the keys be placed in a truck and left there, but the driver did not think too much about this because he is in a hurry, to deliver the tanker to the base. After he did the checking of the truck, he realized the truck has a problem, and a big problem, his truck battery is missing. He checks under the truck hood, sees the place where the battery should be is empty, and this makes the driver feel annoyed because now they have to find another truck or a battery for their truck. The driver reports this to El Tigro, who is angry.You could be reading stolen content. Head to Royal Road for the genuine story.


    "Fucking thieves." says El Tigro, then he looks at the driver. "Can it work with another truck?"


    "To transport the oil tanker?" asks the driver. "Absolutely. But we''ll stay here for a little longer than we planned."


    "At least we''ll get time to check the other hangars." says El Tigro to the group of fighters. "Listen up, we''ll search the entire airport for a truck. If we find it, we''ll attach it to the said trailer to that tanker of oil, and we''ll get out of here."


    "What about the weapons?" asks Ri Ku.


    "We''ll take them later. Right now, our priority is to find a truck and deliver the oil to the base. Understood?"


    "Sir, yes, sir." says the three fighters at the same time, and soon, they all walk outside the hangar by the door they''ve taken to get inside.


    Outside, the group walks toward the next hangar. When they arrive at the main front door, they see the door is locked like what was in the first hangar, from inside, they could open it, but this will lead to a loud sound which will attract the nearby hordes of zombies. At the gate, El Tigro checks the backside door of the hangar. Soon the group decides to check the door from the back, and this one was unlocked, letting the group get inside the hangar and scavenge the closed interior.


    In the second hangar, the group of four people have managed to breach inside the hangar, but after they''ve walked for a bit, they are greeted by three zombies who gazed at them and started walking at a slow pace. El Tigro, Ri Ku and the two fighters quickly jumped on these zombies, stabbing their heads with their machetes. After these three zombies have been killed, the group notices this hangar has a plane, a few crates with weapons, armor and supplies like food, medicine and even books to serve as a source of entertainment. But these said books inside the crate are novels in Mandarin language.


    After a short look around, the group decided to go and check the third hangar. They left by the backside door, walked toward the third hangar feeling better because this whole airport seems to be their lucky jackpot so far.


    When the group arrived at the front of the third hangar gate, they saw that the hangar gate was locked and the other doors were also locked. One of the fighters saw the window of this hangar was opened. Ri Ku decided to come and take a peek, but when he did, he quickly backed down and told the group of fighters.


    "There is Class F in there."


    "How many?" asks El Tigro.


    "Too many." says Ri Ku looking at the window to be sure the zombies from Class F don''t hear him.


    "I see." says El Tigro looking back at the hangar, then he looked back away after he saw a Class F approaching the window. "We''ll detonate the place when we get enough explosives."


    "Good." says the fighters.


    The fighters proceed to walk away from the third hangar and check the fourth. The group enters the hangar with ease, and inside this empty hangar, they see nothing in there. No crates, no airplanes, no fuel tanker, no vehicles, nothing worth their time and spaces for their places in the base.


    The group decides to check the last hangar, but this hangar is wide open at the front. The group observes this hangar has something they did not expect. There are a bunch of bunk beds all around the hangar, tents, refrigerators and a lot of crates that contain different things. But in this hangar there are not any vehicles that can help them use the battery on the truck inside the first hangar. Seeing the bunk beds inside this hangar, and there are a lot of weapons placed in there, they realize this hangar is habitable, which means there are people living in there. Ri Ku finds a book under someone''s bed and looks inside it. In this book, which looks more like an agenda, he finds a lot of notes like a journal.


    "Look like there is a group of people living here." he says after he read the first paragraph of the journal.


    "How many?" asks a fighter to Ri Ku as he continues to look on the agenda.


    "They''re friendly?" asks another person.


    "There are many," says Ri Ku. "And armed. And dangerous." Then he looks at El Tigro. "I think we''re dealing with those that may have attacked you in Lanzhou."


    The group chat a bit about this, then El Tigro says while being calm.


    "We''re taking the fuel tanker and leaving. Find any truck that can work out, or battery, and let''s get out of here as soon as possible before these savages show up."


    The group starts their search for a new truck inside this airport. And soon, they found one working truck that was hidden in another hangar that looks to be a service for planes. The group hops on the truck, which is a Scania truck model, the driver leads the vehicle toward the first hangar to take the tanker trailer with them. Arriving at the hangar, the driver of the truck and the others are taking the trailer out of the first truck, then manage to connect it to the truck they''ve found and get away from this airport as fast as possible. But first, El Tigro and Ri Ku had to leave the truck to the other two fighters, while they''ll be taking the jeep with whom they come here. Soon, the truck and the jeep leave the airport, taking an off-road route, away from the population and the big city infested with zombies and dangerous people.


    Later, another group of people arrive at the airport, this time, there were less than the number of twenty bunk beds, all are injured and feeling sick while they are walking toward their first hangar, not realizing their first hangar has been robbed hours ago. But none pay any mind to this because this group will not stay there for long.

 Kingdom of Living I - Part 11

    Later, in the Dicang Village, the group that went on a mission to come with the gas needed for their helicopter came back without any issue on the long road they''ve taken. The truck stops nearby the helicopters, where the co-pilots and pilots are getting to work to pump the fuel from the tanker to one of the helicopters.


    "There''s not enough fuel for all the helicopters." says a pilot to El Tigro.


    "Doesn''t matter." says El Tigro to the pilot. "All that matters is we need a single helicopter for this task."


    "We understand that, sir."


    "By the way," says El Tigro to a Commander. "Where are my people?"


    "They''ve gone to check a nearby warehouse." says the Commander to El Tigro.


    "Without me?" asks El Tigro, feeling sad. "With whom?"


    "With two fighters from Shi Huang."


    "Shi Huang, ey?" he says as he looks at Ri Ku who is telling the pilots what he and others encountered at the airport. "Good fighters."


    "Indeed." says the Commander to El Tigro, both are looking at the improvised walls made by the fences nearby to protect them from small hordes of zombies. "They managed to make it a great safe zone for us."


    "Did the communication get established?" asks El Tigro.


    "Not yet. Hugo is still working on it."


    The two commanders remain a bit outside the Dicang Village, then they all turn around and walk toward the fences that protect Dicang Village and walk inside the safe zone where they meet the commander of Shi Huang, sitting on a bench and enjoying a can of tea made by one of the soldiers.


    "Care to join for a tea?" asks the commander of Shi Huang to El Tigro and to the other commander.


    "Maybe another time." says the Commander. "I have to make preparations for the voyage the pilots will make."


    "You take charge of it?" asks El Tigro.


    "Yes," says the Commander.


    "We all let him take charge of this operation while you and your people were gone to extract fuel for our helicopters." responds Shi Huang commander.


    The Commander leaves the two alone, walking toward a shack where they did the planning for their task to fortify the village. El Tigro decides to walk toward the bench and sits nearby Commander of Shi Huang, who is drinking his tea in peace. Then, El Tigro asks.


    "Do you have any energy drinks?"


    "Found none while searching," says the commander of Shi Huang. "Hopefully that truck depot has some supplies for us."


    "Hopefully." says El Tigro. "What tea is that?"


    "Green tea. Want to call Jabil to make some for you?"


    "Yes." responds El Tigro. "With three sugar cubes."


    The commander takes out his walkie-talkie station and calls Jabil to prepare tea for El Tigro.


    ***


    Meanwhile, in a warehouse, located about three kilometers away from the Dicang village, a group of seven fighters are killing zombies left and right that have swarmed this warehouse. The group is composed of five people from El Tigro squad, and by two members from Shi Huang squad, Yu Tong and Li Kay.The tale has been stolen; if detected on Amazon, report the violation.


    "Don''t use guns." says Yu Tong as she uses her machete to cut the head off a zombie with a single slash. "Noise will attract the zombies who cannot feel our presence."


    "Understand!" says a man wearing a fighter''s uniform who uses his assault rifle as a baseball bat, smashing the skull of a zombie with a single swing.


    Many of the fighters are using their melee weapons to beat the small number of zombies in this warehouse. Inside this warehouse, there are a lot of crates locked, a lot of improvised beds and a lot of dead bodies that were eaten by the zombies who were locked inside this warehouse for many months. Now, the fighters are going to put all of them at rest.


    The area that surrounds this warehouse had a lot of cars that were there for a long time. Most of the cars were models that civilians would use in need to travel high distances for different purposes. The squad checked the interior of the cars, and noticed most of the cars weren''t having any gas in their tanks, meaning the people must''ve left their car with the engine on for months, or the gas was stolen by a group of people who needed it for their vehicles.


    "Yu!" says Li Kay throwing a knife toward a zombie that was close to grab Yu Tong.


    The knife gets stuck in the neck of the zombie, but the zombie doesn''t stop from grabbing the shoulder of Yu Tong. A fighter that was closer to Yu Tong rushes to her aid, he charges into the zombie, pins him to the ground and uses a hammer he has to break the skull of the zombie. He sees the zombie continue to move its hands and screech while pinned down, so the fighter turns the hammer around and uses the sharp part to stab the opened brain of the zombie. The zombie stops moving, breathing and eyes become dead again.


    "Thank you." says Yu Tong, seeing the fighter rising from the zombie corpse. "Did it bite you?"


    "No." responds the fighter, he turns around and sees three more zombie''s silhouettes coming from the dark warehouse. "Three on the right."


    "Roger." says Yu Tong, slashing the first zombie head out of the neck with the sharp machete.


    The group continues to fight the zombies in that warehouse for two minutes. There were many zombies in there, most of them looking malnourished pointing out that these things have been locked in there for months without any source of alimentation like human or animal meat to keep their form strong. All the zombies were looking to be common ones inside this warehouse, which was a relief for the group. One fighter counted thirty zombie bodies that they''ve killed, but there were also seven bodies of humans who were eaten by the zombies. Well, these bodies had only their skulls in there with small chunks of meat in their bones.


    "How did this happen?" asks Yu Tong while she and Li Kay check an office.


    "No idea," says Li Kay pointing the flashlight around to help Li Kay search through the desk drawers. "Maybe some sort of improved group establishment like we''ve seen in India."


    "Or like the ones in the city?"


    "It''s a possibility."


    "Check it out." says Yu Tong after he found a notebook in one of the desk drawers.


    Li Kay approaches Yu Tong, he aims the flashlight at the cover of this notebook who reveals it is one of those notebooks that children would take it to write. On the cover it is written in Chinese with the title "Journal". Yu Tong opened the journal.


    "You know it is not good to look through other people''s journals." jokes Li Kay.


    "Why did I catch you looking through Xin Yan phone?" asks Yu Tong as a response to Li Kay''s joke.


    Li Kay shuts up, this reply made him feel guilty and busted. But then, Yu Tong responds again.


    "I won''t tell her this time."


    "What do you mean?" asks Li Kay.


    "I won''t tell her this time unless you help me with something."


    "With what?" asks Li Kay.


    "I''ll tell you at the base." says looking through the journal, then she reads the first sentence to Li Kay. "Day one of isolation, people have gathered all around the village and nearby zones. We''re around twenty people at first, then many more came until nightfall. Right now, I am writing this at what is supposed to be 10 o''clock in the night. Hopefully, the military will come and help us all."


    Yu Tong stops from reading the journal, she and Li Kay leave the office and go outside where the rest of the group have gathered to check the surroundings. While walking toward the main gate, the two observe the brutal image of a dead zombie, who''s left arm continues to move. Yu Tong took her machete, sliced the arm of that zombie, then she cleaned the machete''s by using the dirty clothes of the zombie whose arm got cut off.


    "Don''t want to risk it." says Yu Tong to Li Kay.


    "I know." responds Li Kay, who both continue walking toward the main gate where the rest of the group waits for them.


    Outside, the group of El Tigro is checking the insides of a small truck that is used to transport goods for small markets. The two fighters of Shi Huang, arriving outside the warehouse, walk toward the member that is leading this mission.


    "Go something." says Yu Tong in English to the fighter.


    "Thank you." says the fighter in English, he looks at it confused then says to Yu Tong. "What is this? Chinese?"


    "Yes."


    "What is it?"


    "A journal that was written by someone who lived here with a group."


    "I seeˇ­ But I don''t know Chinese, ma''am." he hands the journal back to Yu Tong. "You should hand it to the Commanders. Maybe they''ll need it."


    "Alright." says Yu Tong.


    The group checks other vehicles before they go on their own and get back to the safe zone to report their findings to this warehouse they''ve investigated.

 Kingdom of Living I - Part 12

    ***


    An hour later, one group of fighters are getting inside the helicopter after its preparation has finished. The hinges that will be used to transport heavy containers are loaded inside the helicopter compartment, they will be automatically dropped through a trap door by the push of the pilot''s button on the board. This helicopter is a new AH-1Z Viper model, a kind that was new to the 2020s, but before the apocalypse this model is considered to be old, but it is still reliable, especially with all the modifications it has received over the years. This kind of helicopter it''s like the other ones, and this one belonged to Squad Turbo. They chose this helicopter because it had more jet fuel at first, and automatic machine guns that are programmed to auto-aim the zombies. These turrets only auto-aim, the shooting has to be made inside by the soldier who has connected the machine gun to his Bluetooth device like a phone or tablet.


    "We''ll leave in a minute." says the leader of Turbo squad to the group of nine fighters who are on their seats, checking their weapons.


    From the group of nine fighters there is Ahmed, Li Kay and Xin Yan, who were ordered by their Shi Huang Squad Commander to aid the Turbo Squad, who is having one single member from El Tigro squad as well. The three fighters from Shi Huang Squad look at their assault rifles pistols.


    "How was the warehouse?" asks Ahmed to Li Kay.


    "The warehouse?" asks Li Kay curios, then he remembers he was there. "Oh, right. The warehouse I and Yu investigated. It was full of zombies and corpses. And supplies from what I could see."


    "Was it really dark in there?"Unauthorized usage: this narrative is on Amazon without the author''s consent. Report any sightings.


    "Really dark." respond Li Kay. "The generators from there haven''t worked for months. That''s what I overheard from Rengar while he was investigating the Boiler room."


    "Why would a generator be in a boiler room?"


    "Beats me." says Li Kay to Ahmed. "At least, we have found some useful supplies for us. Like food, clothes and others."


    "Others like?"


    "Don''t know, friend. Didn''t check all the crates from the warehouse."


    "I see." says Ahmed, then he looks around, sees how some of the fighters are tense, he looks at one fighter who has dropped his gun on the helicopter floor. "Are you alright?"


    "I guess." says the fighter in English with a Colombian accent. "Haven''t slept much, Ahmed."


    "Don''t worry," says Ahmed. "You''ll have plenty of time to sleep after we finish this task."


    "Hopefully."


    "Alright." says the commander of turbo Squad entering the helicopter, armed like the others with his anti-biting armor, but with his gas mask. "We''re ready to roll. Put on your gear, fighters!"


    All the fighters proceed to put on their helmets and gas masks while the doors of the helicopters are automatically closing. In a few seconds, the helicopter proceeds to fly away from Dicang village, while he is flying away, the noises of the motors and the blades have attracted the common zombies. Thankfully, the remaining fighters were expecting this to happen, so their commanders ordered a group of four people from El Tigro to get inside their jeep and made the zombie follow them to the Xiahe, or whatever far away from their safe zone. The group has to take the mounted machine gun jeep in order to increase their chances to distract the zombies since one of the soldiers will have the duty to mow down as many zombies as he can with the machine gun.


    The remaining fighters are running to the safe zone, close the fences. After all of them have gotten inside, they all look at how the group of El Tigro squad is distracting the horde of zombies to follow them toward the Xiahe direction. Others zombies did not want to follow the jeep, so they continued to move forward to the safe zone, but thankfully, the group of zombies that came were more than fifty, which was an easy cleaning with their melee weapons since they all had to waste precious ammo on a group of fifty zombies.

 Kingdom of Living I - Part 13

    ***


    Later, the helicopter arrived at the truck depot area, where the person in charge of the automatic machine guns on both sides proceeded to fire bullets at any aimed zombie, killing dozens of zombies in more than a minute that were outside the broken gates, and in the area of the building. While the fighter from El Tigro was killing the zombies outside, from his tablet, Ahmed prepares to take out his weapon and jump the moment the helicopter will be on a low altitude, prefect for them to jump out of the helicopter and run inside the area to see what they could find inside the truck depot building.


    "Ready to jump!" says the pilot who has gotten to a lower altitude, near the gates of the truck depot.


    "Ready!" says the Turbo squad Commander to the pilot through the earpiece.


    The door of the helicopter has opened, and the fighter jumps down the helicopter, armed with guns, with armor and melee weapons, prepared to kill any zombie on sight. The group landed safely and ran inside the truck depot to kill the zombies that were blocked inside. The moment the door gets knocked out by a person from El Tigro squad, the fighters run inside the place, and start shooting the zombies that are in their sight. All the five people are cleaning the building, while the helicopter with pilots and the commander are cleaning the outside from any zombies and hordes. The Commander of this mission has now got its hands on the tablet and uses the machine gun to hit every moving zombie on the hills and the road.


    Inside, the group of fighters has killed all the moving zombies inside by using their assault rifles and pistols, not afraid of attracting any zombie with their loud guns since the helicopter does all of this outside. The group opens the door of an office, and there they find a zombie being tied to a chair with chains on his desk, the zombie is screeching and yelling while he sees the fighters entering the room and approaching him. Ahmed uses his pistol, shoots a bullet on the head of this infected, then he notices the zombie has a paper written on him. The writing is in Chinese, but Li Kay was here to help him translate it.


    "Dear Boss, I love that you are dead and a zombie. I''ll let you die here for eternity like a dick head you''re here. Signed, your secretary."


    "I''ve heard stories of secretaries killing their bosses and tormenting them in this apocalypse." says Xin. "But I''ve never seen one like this."


    "You never killed your boss while he was a zombie?" asks a fighter to Xin.


    "No. He ran away during the evacuation. He was bad, but he wasn''t one of those bosses. But even if he was, I wouldn''t do such a thing to him."This novel''s true home is a different platform. Support the author by finding it there.


    "I see." says the fighter.


    The group looks through the office room, hoping to find something worth it in there. A lighter found a cabin with keys in there, five keys for trucks, all labeled with their license plate. The fighter takes the five keys, and hands them to each other. The fighter then tells them his idea.


    "We check any truck. If it works, we''ll bring them to our safe zone. Would work for us to transport the goods to a warehouse or anywhere far. How is it?"


    "Not bad." says Ahmed, who is taking his walkie-talkie and tells his Commander from the helicopter their plan.


    "Go for it." says the Commander through walkie-talkie, "The more truck trailers the better to create walls and transport goods. And if they have any goods, it''s better."


    The group of fighters proceeds to leave the building, go outside where they see several trucks with trailers. The fighters check the trucks in no rush since every single zombie on site and outside the gates have been taken care of by the helicopter outside. Ahmed checks a small truck cabin by opening the gate, and when he sees there is nothing in there, he closes the cabin and goes to check the other trucks. It didn''t take long, until a fighter opened the door of a trailer, and what he saw there shocked him and ended him.


    Five Grade F zombies jumped down from the cabin, one of them pins down the fighter and smashes his head with his muscular left arm. One single grasp was enough to break the skull and kill the poor soldier in a minute. The other fighters quickly opened fire and retreated somewhere safe to make space from the helicopter''s machine guns to use their guns to kill the five grade F zombies. This took a good three minutes of intense shooting, and when these zombies got killed, the squad reloaded their guns and one of the fighters went over to check the fighter that got his head crushed like a tomato.


    "Shit. They got Manil." says Ahmed who looked at the body of the Columbian that got killed.


    "Take his body in one of the trucks." says Xin to the group of fighters, pointing at the truck that Ahmed checked earlier. "We''ll bury him later and give the bad news to his girlfriend."


    "Poor man," says a fighter looking at the head of the man, then he looks over the others. "We''ll mourn later. We have to continue checking the truck trailers."


    The remaining fighters continue their searching. Soon they found three trucks that were having trailers that contained supplies, clothes, useless electronics, books, and cruise missiles.


    "Missiles!?" says Li Kay when he found a truck trailer with nine cruise missiles. "What the fuck are they doing here?"


    "Cruise missiles more exactly." says Ahmed. "But yeah. WHAT THE FUCK ARE THEY DOING HERE?!"


    "Doesn''t matter." says one of the fighters closing the doors. "We''ll take this trailer and report it to our commanders. Maybe we can transport it to our islands."


    The group proceeded to get in four trucks. Xin and Li are getting in the truck that had more than ten tons of mixed goods, Ahmed takes the small truck with the body of his killed friend, one truck with mixed goods is taken by a fighter and the one with cruise missiles is taken by another fighter. The trucks proceed to leave this palace in order and be escorted by the helicopter who managed to get its hands on a random container that was found outside the gates, locked of course.

 Kingdom of Living I - Part 14

    ***


    After the funeral that has taken place for their colleague who perished in the mission, the entire population from the safe zone in Dicang village, have moved the trailers and the containers with their available heavy vehicles in ways that zombies couldn''t climb it, on parts where the fences are destroyed and missing. This operation took a while, and when they were all finished, they all went to a big house, where they''ll take their dinner since the night has come. All the fighters have gone to eat some good bean soup with tea.


    More than thirty people have gathered in a big room where three tables have been combined to form one. The group gathered chairs from the house and the nearby houses for everybody to have where to sit. This whole preparation took a while, and when it did finish, everyone sat at the table, did their prayers because of El Tigro who is religious. After the prayers, everyone started to eat their bean soup and drink their tea.


    "Today was hard." says a fighter at the table.


    "Indeed." says Li Kay, who sits next to that fighter. "But at least we''ve made it."


    "So," says El Tigro to Xin Yan. "What did you guys find in the warehouse? You did not fill me in with the details."


    "A lot of the dead and untouched supplies for some reason. And a journal that may have every bit of data needed to know what has happened in there."


    "Besides the journal." responds Li Kay. "We have found weapons. Most of them were fire weapons jammed."


    "I see." says El Tigro. "As long as the supplies are there, we are good."


    "We''ll go tomorrow and check it out." says Turbo squad leader. "We take a vehicle and take everything we need."


    "Sounds good." says Shi Huang, squad leader. "We''ll send only three people. And then we''ll send seven people to Xiahe Sangke Jisuzhi Elementary School. Our radio got a signal of a group of people that are living there."


    "Doesn''t it seem strange?" asks a fighter to the Shi Huang squad leader.


    "It does seem strange," says Shi Huang. "How come they''ve not heard the helicopters, shootings, fighting and all the zombies coming here. This elementary school is not even that far from what I''ve seen on the map. It''s like 2 to 4 kilometers away from us."


    "What?" asks El Tigro.


    "1 mile away." says a fighter to El Tigro while eating his bean soup.The author''s content has been appropriated; report any instances of this story on Amazon.


    "Aha. That sounds strange." says El Tigro to the fighter, and he looks at Shi Huang leader. "Do you have anyone in mind?"


    "My people and two more fighters from your squad." says Shi Huang.


    "Okay," says El Tigro looking at his people, then he says. "Gordon and Eduard. You two are going."


    "Eh?" asks a bald guy, pointing at himself, with a military uniform that has the name tag Eduard on the right side of the chest.


    "Yes." says El Tigro to Eduard. "You and Gordon are going. Am I clear?"


    "Yes, sir." says Eduard to El Tigro, looking nervous.


    "Good." says El Tigro, taking a sip from the tea he had, then he looks at the tea. "This tea ain''t so bad. But I still prefer my energy drink."


    "Me too." says Ri Ku to El Tigro.


    The dinner continues with small talks about their day, eating the bean soup served and drinking tea for more than five minutes. Afterward, all of them left the table, and Ri Ku, Xin Yan and Yu Tong have been ordered to wash off the dishes at the sink of this house. The three while washing the dishes decide to start a casual conversation.


    "Have you read the book I recommend to you?" asks Ri Ku.


    "It was amazing," says Yu Tong.


    "Oh. You finished it?" asks Ri Ku to Yu.


    "Yes. Before I went to the warehouse. I liked the ending where Martin comes back home from the war and finds his family fine."


    "Yeahˇ­" says Ri Ku feeling deeply sad, then he sighs. "We may be different. But a thing that makes us unite is that we kinda went through the same hardships. We all witnessed all of our family members dying one by one."


    "Mine died in an airplane crash," says Xin Yan washing the dishes. "A plane crashed into the tower and killed everyone in thereˇ­ The only day I felt lucky to go to work."


    "We all lost our families. But we''ve gained a new one in return."


    "Right." says Ri Ku washing a plate with a sponge. "Let''s change the subject. Do you think we''ll stay here forever?"


    "Hopefully." respond Xin. "But knowing The Organization crisis, sooner or later they''ll call us and in order to help clear another safe zone that has been overrun."


    "At least give us a small vacation here." jokes Yu Tong. "We deserve it."


    "Yeah, hah." play along Ri Ku. "But, you know the saying of The Organization: "This is our fight."."


    "Yeapˇ­" says Yu.


    The three finish washing the dishes after a few minutes, then they all put the dishes in the cabinets, they head outside, before Ri Ku was about to leave, he turns off the light and leaves the room. This house, like many others, has been connected to a solar power station that''s installed on one of the rooftops of their neighbor. This is not classified as stealing since the owner of the house has been found with his insides out in the bedroom.


    Outside, the whole village is illuminated by torches that have been placed earlier this day by three people from Turbo squad. These are improvised torches made by using broomsticks with clothes that were put on fire. They possess generators, but they cannot waste all the fuel for lighting. The whole village needs to conserve electricity for more important matters.


    The three fighters are going to their house that has been designed by their commanders to sleep in. The house they are sleeping in is one that has only a first floor. Upon entering the house, which has only a room and a bathroom, they see their two colleagues sleeping on the floor, on their sleeping bags. This house had a bed, but it was infected with blood, vomit and a lot of mushrooms, which made them take the bed outside earlier this day before taking the house, and burning the whole bed, just in case. The three take their sleeping bags that were placed on the floor, make way on the floor for them to sleep and all went to sleep immediately, not saying a word and only snoring of Ahmed could be heard.

 Kingdom of Living I - Part 15

    ***


    Meanwhile, in the shack, where the person named Hugo lies to work the radio station has intercepted a signal from the base, after he worked his whole body to find a signal, he managed to make a contact with a military base, that is located in one of the artificial islands that have been built in Indian Ocean by The Organization.


    "Hello, hello." says a voice coming from the radio station, speaking in English with an Indian accent. "Can you intercept me? Over."


    "Hello!" Hugo says to the person he''s talking to through the radio. "Can you hear me loud and clear? Over."


    "Yes." says the person from the radio. "Identify yourself."


    "Hugo Walker. Member of 4th Fighter Asia Squad. Member of The Organization. Communication Team."


    "Asia Squad, eh?" asks that person from the radio. "I am Raj Rajanka, The Organization Communication Team on The Organization 45th Artificial Islands Residents."


    "Thank God." says away from the radio to not trigger the person on the radio, then continues to talk. "I thought this radio was broken. For a moment I lost all hope."


    "Where are you Hugo? Over."


    "In Dicang Village, Xianhu, China. Well, what it used to be."


    "Dicang, eh? I heard about the report of the newest safe zone established recently after I''ve seen the reports. How it''s the place over there?"


    "Good. For now. But we need more people. Weapons and fuel."


    "Aha. I''ll send a request to the Headquarters. Hopefully in the next one to two working days it will arrive. It''s okay?"This novel''s true home is a different platform. Support the author by finding it there.


    "Yes."


    "Alright. We''ll send it. By the way. Out of curiosity. Have you heard about the attacks?"


    "Attacks?"


    "You haven''t heard."


    "What attacks?" Hugo asks, feeling nervous.


    "There was one in Sweden. I believe a group of fighters has tried to go over a zone to check a signal from survivors, but they were ambushed by Vikings. Literally Vikings. People dressed in vikings costumes, with swords, axes, shields, maces and many other weapons instead of fire weapons. The group of fighters made the group of vikings flees, but some of them left the place wounded. Not dead, but wounded."


    "Really?"


    "Yeah. They were attacked by about fifteen people, they say about forty have been wounded, and three were killed in the attack. This news came through our Hub and made all of us feel bad for the group who went there. And made our leader worry a little."


    "That''s bad."


    "Yeahˇ­ The fighter group would never go there again. Feel kind for the people who actually need help there."


    The two continue to talk for a few more minutes about the news that Hug hasn''t received due to two days being away from The Organization. He heard about a safe zone falling from Romania, in Valea Ia?ului, a base that has fallen, but it will be reconstructed while nobody from The Organization knows. He also told him about a weird event in Spain, where a survivor was riding a bull and killing zombies with a flail, a mace with chains, while helping a fighter who was left behind during a mission.


    A man walks inside the shack, that man is a fighter from Turbo squad, the man comes in the shack, disrupting the conversation Hugo and the person from the other side of the radio were having. That person is a man in his 50s, he came into this shack and asked Hugo.


    "Does the radio work?"


    "Yes." says Hugo.


    "Can I use it later? I want to have a discussion with someone from Greece."


    "Greece? What base?"


    "Delta Base Number 2, Delta Islands."


    "Aha, aha." he says Hugo, he goes over to the radio, tells the person from the other side he has to log off, thanked the man for the help and both bid farewell. Hugo turns around to the person from the Turbo squad. "Out of curiosity, with whom you''re talking?"


    "To a man named Alin, my trainer." says that person from Turbo squad.


    "Of course." Hugo says establishing a radio communication to Delta Islands, then he talks a bit with the person that is in charge of communication and hands the device to his comrade in arms, then he leaves the chair and let the person communicate with the person named Alin.

 Kingdom of Living I - Part 16

    ***


    Not far away from Dicang Village, in a park, specifically Sangke Wetland Park, a zombie is walking aimlessly around the area, looking around in the dark and snarling like a person who suffers the cold symptoms. That zombie cannot be seen well in the dark, but judging by the posture of walking and his way of snarling, you could deduce the zombie is a male. That zombie is the only one walking in this park, and he is hungry.


    The zombie sees a human body laying on the ground, he walks toward that body, gasping for air and screeching like a zombie while walking to that body, indicating he has seen meat, and he is going to digest it. The zombie drops on his knees, goes closer with his deformed mouth to the chest of the dead human and starts to eat the remains of its insides which were devoured a while ago by another zombie. He was about to grab its first bite, but then, a thrown knife hits the back head of the zombie, plugging its face in the insides of the dead human body.


    "Nice throw." says someone in the Mandarin language.


    "Thank you." responds the other person in the Mandarin language.


    One of the humans takes the knife from the zombie body, then the other is stabbing the head further with its knife, to make sure the zombie is dead completely and unable to move anymore. One of the humans is looking at the dark sky on this night, he is thinking about something while his friend cleans the bloody knife by using the tall grass around him.The story has been illicitly taken; should you find it on Amazon, report the infringement.


    "How many months have passed, Yan?"


    "Six. I think." responds that guy named Yan and looks at his friend with an eye patch on his eye. "Why?"


    "Sure the times have changed, ey?"


    "Right." he takes a close look at the human body that was about to be eaten earlier. "Back then we used to clean the streets for money and packs of cigarettes. Nowˇ­ We are hunting humans for survival."


    "You think we''ll have the chance to find fresh humans?" asks his friend who both continue to walk down in this park.


    "To be honest, we may have to move on and eat vegetables."


    "That''s what I was thinking too, but with this virus. We don''t even know if vegetables are safe. What if we are eating a wild carrot and the next day we woke up as zombies, or each other inside?"


    "And if we find some wild vegetables, we''ll boil them. Just like our Leader told us."


    The two Chinese arrive in front of a cabin, where the person with the eye patch opens the door, checks inside by using his flashlight, and after he sees everything is alright, he and the other go inside, where they close the door behind them and rest inside. Both of them, they are slowly taking out the backpacks with human bodies found earlier today, place the backpacks on the first floor, the two are looking in each other eyes, they approach closely to one another and start to make out, both walking toward the nearest sofa i this small cabin has offered. There, they start to undress each other and start to make love right next to a decayed zombie body that lies on the floor.

 Kingdom of Living I - Part 17

    ***


    The next day, a group of seven fighters arrive in front of a gate where a lot of kids'' decayed bodies are laying down, eaten by zombies and with only clothes and bones to show they were there during The Infection Days. The group of seven have arrived at the kindergarten in their two jeeps, all seven of them are wearing their anti-armor, helmets, with their weapons being a bunch of different melee weapons, handguns and assault rifles, and some gadgets like a walkie-talkie and a thermometer to measure the temperature of the survivors. Yu is carrying a medical aid kit in case one of them gets wounded in an attack.


    The fighters who have been sent to this kindergarten are the following: Ri Ku, Ahmed, Li Kay, Xin Yan, Yu Tong, Eduardo and Gordon, which is a combination between Shi Huang Squad and El Tigro''s Squad. These seven people, after they looked around and saw the perimeter is safe, they walked inside the area of the kindergarten and walked slowly toward the gate, armed and ready to shoot at any moment. The person that is leading the pack is Ri Ku since he is one of the most qualified among all of them.


    Ri Ku arrives at the main door of this building with a shattered window, bullet holes on the walls and a skull on the steps. Ri Ku listens closely to look for the sound of breathing from people inside by leaning his head on the door. A technique that not many would do, but he has to do it since a signal came from here yesterday. While Ri Ku was listening to the other side, a zombie rose from the ground, which made Xin Yan to turn around, since she is on the last pack. The woman takes out her dagger and stabs the head of the zombie multiple times, until this skinny creature stops moving and falls hard on the ground.


    "Sorry." whispers Xin Yan to the whole group who were watching her, with some looks.


    After a few seconds, a knock is heard from the other side, Ri Ku backs away, and grabs his rifle, then he says out loud to that other person.


    "We are not a threat! Do not be afraid! We are The Organization Fighter Squad Shi Huang."


    "What?" asks a person in the Mandarin language, who seems like he did not understand a single thing.


    "We are not a threat! Do not be afraid!" says Ri Ku in Chinese.


    Soon, the doors are opened by a man with long brown hair and long beard, who is looking at them like he has not seen humans in a long time. The group of fighters is aiming their weapons at the man with the long hair and long beard, which made the man retaliate back, with hands up and saying in Chinese the following.


    "Don''t shoot. Don''t shoot!"


    "Xin." says Ri Ku to Xin. "Check for temperature."


    "36.1 Celsius." says Xin to Ri Ku after she aimed her thermometer to the head of the Chinese man.


    The group enters the building, closes the door behind them and walks with the Chinese man toward a room where the other survivors are waiting. But when they arrived there, they saw in a classroom, five people had jumped at them with knives. The group of fighters immediately opened fire to those five survivors, killing all five men who were dressed in black and gray, looking unwashed and stinking like a homeless person from a 7-Eleven. Eduardo saw the Chinese man was fleeing from them, the one who led them here, and he shot him in the leg, making the person fall on the ground and yelling out of pain.


    From another classroom, a door gets kicked, and a woman runs with a knife at the group, but Yan manages to take a shot with her handgun, killing the deranged woman on the spot. When that woman was killed, the man that got shot in the leg backs away and whimpers as he sees Eduardo approaching him.You could be reading stolen content. Head to Royal Road for the genuine story.


    "What are you doing to him?" asks Ri Ku in English to Eduardo who arrived close to the man.


    "I''ll make him talk!" says Eduardo who, without any hesitation, steps on the leg of the man that got shot.


    The attacker yells out in pain for a few minutes, then Eduardo takes his foot off, kicks the man in the stomach, and raises him up with his hands, yelling at him in English.


    "Who are you?!"


    "I-Iˇ­ don''t speakˇ­ English." tries the Chinese man to say to Eduardo, sweating and having his eyes closed.


    "Hmph." says Eduardo who pushes the man down the floor, and looks at the people. "Talking with him. Maybe he''ll give us some info-"


    A shoot is heard, coming from another classroom. That shot sounded like a handgun. The shot came from the room that is left to Eduardo, the one where the woman fled and tried to attack the group of fighters with a suicide attack. The shot has hit Eduardo, who made him fall quickly on the floor, on his side, holding the arm that got shot and holding his screams of pain.


    After this, the group of fighters runs to that room, shoot the people in the classroom, killing all the three people that were in there, not leaving a single human alive in there. Yan and Xin go over Eduardo, to inspect his wounds and use their training on first aid to stop the bleeding that comes from the arm of Eduardo. While the girls are doing their thing, the remaining people of the group start to slowly check the remaining rooms. They found a lot of creepy things in classrooms, like a room that displays about ten human bodies, who were hanged like pigs meat in a butcher shop, all naked and most of them were skinned alive, some also had mushrooms going to their bodies, indicating sooner of later would become a source of infesting. Li Kay almost vomited to this, but he held himself to not vomit on his mask that would stop the breathing mechanisms and asphyxiate him.


    "These are cannibals." says Ri Ku looking shocked in the room with the human bodies that were hanged on hooks.


    "We have to burn this palace." propose Ahmed.


    "Agreed." says Li Kay to Ri Ku. "We cannot let this place remain standing."


    "First we check the remaining classrooms." says Ri Ku. "Then we''ll burn everything. Any supplies from here are infected with this virus."


    The group continues to check the remaining classrooms of this school. Every classroom had one to two people in there, who were hiding and having weapons on them. The group has killed about six people in that school, and found a lot of human bodies who were skinned and eaten by humans. But one thing they found in a classroom was the body of a pregnant woman, who was lying on the teacher''s desk, naked and with her stomach cut. The body looked fresh, which means it was recently found, killed and eaten. They discovered the belly of the woman was the body of the unborn child, but without its head and looking like it was still in the phase of development.


    "Savages." says Ahmed looking at the body of the woman with sadness and feeling his blood boiling.


    "That''s the last room?" asks Li Kay to Ri Ku.


    "Yes." responds Ri Ku.


    "Good." responds Li Kay who is taking from his pants pocket a lighter. "We should start burning this vile place."


    The group of six people evacuated the school grounds, while Li Kay was busy gathering all the books from this school in one place, a classroom full of degraded desks that can burn fast causing the fire to grow bigger. This man alone has managed to throw more than one hundred notebooks, books and papers in the middle of a classroom, then he ignites them with his lighter and leaves the school ground after he saw the books were starting to burn.


    "How did it go?" asks Eduardo to Li Kay who came in the jeep that stayed behind.


    "I''ve finished it." says Li Kay to the four people that are in the jeep. "Any zombies showed up?"


    "Only five," says Yan. "Five zombies."


    "Good." says Li Kay. "Means the numbers are going down, right?"


    "Even if they do," says Ahmed. "There''s still a lot more in the nearby places."


    "I know." says Li Kay. "I was trying to give some hope."


    "Sorry," says Ahmed.


    The group remained close to the school to see if it starts burning. When the first smoke evacuated through the shattered window, the group of fighters that were in the jeep, left the area and went back to the Dicang village. While they were fleeing, some zombies that were laying nearby the fences got up and looked at the burning smoke then went through the shattered windows of the school. Some of the zombies are getting up and walking to that building, while others remain still and look at the smoke coming from the windows in amazement.

 Kingdom of Living I - Part 18

    ***


    One day has passed since this incident at Sangke Jisuzhi Elementary School, and things are going in a better in Dicang village. One member of the mission that got shot in the arm, Eduardo, is safe from death. The bullet didn''t hit anything vital or bone structure, which is a good sign for him because he will soon be recovered and able to fight for another day.


    Yesterday, the other group, who went to check the supplies, came with some good supplies such as canned foods, water bottles still good to drink, seeds for planting vegetables and fruits, clothes, ammunition, batteries, radios to listen to music if there''s any working radio station in this world, and three functioning flashlights. They''ve also found weapons, but those weapons were jammed and impossible to be fixed by anyone in this base, so they''ll have to use it like a baseball bat.


    And for the remaining of the day and night, it was quiet for the group of this village.


    Ahmed is walking inside a shack, where Hugo is giving the report to the nearby base he could contact, one located in what was once South Korea. Ahmed stood there and waited for Hugo to finish writing his report. While the person on the other side of the communication device was talking to Hugo, he was fully aware of Ahmed''s presence, but he wasn''t going to finish his task at a faster rate, rather usually talk to the person on the other side, stating what he needs to know.


    "And you people have managed to clean a whole village in one day?" asks the person from the radio, in a broken English accent.


    "Yeah, sir. That''s what they told me. I was with another group before I came here." says Hugo to the radio. "How is South Korea''s state so far? Over."


    "Bad." says the person from the radio. "The nuclear bombs that were launched upon Seoul have ravaged the city and anything close to it. Over."


    "But did it exterminate the creatures nearby? Over."


    "Not all of them. Some were still moving, but unable to walk, nor crawl. Over."If you encounter this narrative on Amazon, note that it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it.


    "I seeˇ­ Have you established any communication with any nearby base besides us?"


    "No." responds the person immediately. "You''re the first one I''ve made contact with after almost a week."


    "I see. How many are you? Over."


    "Fifty-nine." says the person from the radio which made Hugo and Ahmed impressed. "How many at your base? Over."


    "We are only thirty or so. I don''t know since many of my people went on missions outside the base, like yesterday. Over."


    "Yeah, you told me about it earlier. Over."


    And this is true information incoming from Hugo Because this morning, a squad of ten fighters have been summoned to go to Sangko Wetland Park to get their aid package that has been delivered by one of The Organization''s planes. The said package contains working weapons, tools to fix the jammed guns they found yesterday, food, medical aid and much more needed for the people in this village to live another day.


    The two talk for a bit more on the radio, then they bid farewell and Hugo closes the call that he had with the South Korea base.


    "So, what do you need?" asks Hugo, turning around to Ahmed.


    "I want to go out on a scout mission." says Ahmed to Hugo.


    "But why?"


    "I want to help any way I can with the map."


    "I think you need to rest Ahmed. Please, let this scout mission for someone else. Plus, we don''t know for sure how bad things are outside these hills."


    "I need to check a place." says Ahmed.


    "And what kind of place?" asks Hugo.


    "Do you have a map?"


    Hugo takes out from the drawer a map of this area, he gets up from his chair and walks with the map toward the nearest free table, where he places the map and looks at Ahmed, making a sign for him to come closer and take a look at it.


    "Where do you want to go?"


    "Here." he says Ahmed pointing at Xining.


    "Why there? Off all the places?"


    "I see we haven''t checked that city yet. We need supplies right. Maybe we''ll also find people there, too. Well, hopefully not like the ones we found yesterday."


    "I don''t know." says Hugo to Ahmed. "I think it would be better to go in there after we''ll get more humans and more needed supplies from the Organization. In the meantime, it would be better to stay here and rest for the time being. I''ll talk with the commander about this idea. If he accepts, I''ll let you know and give you a squad to check the area."


    Ahmed wanted to argue, but he left the place leaving a "Thank you." to Hugo. The man places the map back in the drawer and goes over to the radio station, to do his thing. While he was looking at the radio, he was thinking about establishing a communication with Xining, wondering if there is someone there he can contact and make a connection with.

 Kingdom of Living I - Part 19

    ***


    Two hours later, in Sangke Wetland Park, a group of fighters arrived there to check a crate that had been dropped by The Organization a while ago after Hugo had made a call yesterday. The crate that has been dropped contains a lot of needed supplies to aid for Eduardo injuries, food and more needed clothes for this cold environment. The group of six fighters arrived there without any issue with their jeep. In that group of six fighters, there is Ri Ku, who has offered to come with Turbo squad members to check the supplies and the area.


    At the entrance of this park, the group leave their jeep behind and walk in a formation, with their assault rifles prepared to shoot any zombie in sight. They walked for a good one hundred meters, then they saw a zombie getting up from the ground, and one of the fighters quickly took out his knife and threw it at the zombie''s head, killing it and putting it back to rest.


    "Nice throw." compliments Ri Ku that soldier from Turbo squad who threw the knife.


    "Thanks." responds the fighter.


    The group continues their walking, when they arrive in front of the crate that has been dropped. The group looked around the area, in case someone had come here, and decided to take the supplies for themselves instead of sharing. The crate that has been dropped in the middle of a hill is like any supplies crate that belongs to the Organization, one that measures about two meters tall, green with camo and The Organization logo to let the fighters know this is the crate they''ve ordered.


    "It''s almost empty." says a person from Turbo squad checking the crate while the rest are looking around the area.


    "What?" asks another fighter, walking to his comrade in arms.


    "Look."


    Soon, most of the group came to check the crate, they saw there are essential missing things in there, like medical aid, ammunition, clothes and food. They would''ve just taken it like this and gone back to their base like they should''ve done, but they took the entire medicine that Eduardo and many others would need in the future in case they''ll ever get wounded. Luckily, Ri Ku found some footprints leading to a nearby building. The group is arming themselves and walking toward that place, careful and without making any sudden noise.


    Arriving at that house, the group opens the door and walks inside with their guns, aiming at the two people who are resting in bed, almost naked and with a lot of supplies that are stashed under the said bed. The group looked at the two with confusion and laughter. Some were confused on why the two would decide to have a sexy time outside, with broken windows and in an environment with a deadly virus, while others were laughing under their helmets that they''ve sure got balls to do this.A case of theft: this story is not rightfully on Amazon; if you spot it, report the violation.


    "D-D-Don''t shoot." says the two people at the bed, raising their hands and shaking up.


    "We don''t want any trouble." responds the guy from the bed, the one with an eye patch.


    "Speak English." says Ri Ku to the two.


    "We don''t know English," says the other man.


    "You''re lucky I know Chinese." says Ri Ku to the two lowering his weapon.


    Ri Ku is in the front of the group, when he has laid his weapon, the others proceed to do it as well, slowly and cautiously.


    "Now." says Ri Ku in Chinese. "What are your names?"


    "Yan." says Yan, and he points at the dude with an eye patch.


    "Shin." says the person with the eye patch.


    "Nice to meet you." says Ri Ku to Yan and Shin. "My name is Ri Ku, and I am a member of the Shi Huang Squad, owned by the Organization. You two are in a group?"


    "We were." says Shin to Ri Ku.


    "Were? What happened to it?"


    "We got attacked by another group in Xining. We were going in that city to search for any supplies. We were attacked after we stepped in the city."


    "Seven of us have perished, including our leader, which left me, my lover and three other people to flee the city, going all separate ways." says Yan to Ri Ku. "I don''t even know if the others are still alive at this moment."


    "And that said city," says Ri Ku. "It is safe?"


    "It had a lot of zombies in there. Don''t know if it is worth risking our lives there. This event happened like a week or two ago. I lost count of time, Ri Ku."


    "We both did. From then, we decided to remain in this shack, living and spending our last moments with each other until we perish one day."


    "Now be well," says Ri Ku taking his thermometer and measuring the two body temperatures, then he looks at the thermometer and says to them under his anti-bite helmet. "Because you will have a new place to stay in."


    Then, Ri Ku proceeds to translate the discussion with the other five people, who don''t speak mandarin at all. After he explains he will take them, one of the fighters asks Ri Ku.


    "Are you sure they won''t possess any harm?"


    "I am sure of that." responds Ri Ku to that one fighter question.


    Soon, the two quickly take their clothes on, get out of the bed and help the fighters load the supplies in the jeep trailer cabin that they''ve used to come here and get the supplies. This whole thing lasted for twenty minutes or so, and when they were all done, the group and the two new survivors got in the crammed jeep and drove toward Dicang village which is a few kilometers away.


    "You two haven''t noticed the noises coming from there?" asks Ri Ku to the two survivors while the jeep is driving on the ravaged roads.


    "Yes, we did." says Shin. "But we thought they were coming from the group that had attacked us."


    "And this group, how many were there?"


    "I don''t know, but I believe there are many in numbers. Probably more than you."


    "I see." says Ri Ku. "You two, I want later tonight to come and relate the entire attack you''ve suffered to our commanders. If you can."


    "What are you thinking?" asks Shin.


    "You''ll see." says Ri Ku to the group and the discussion stops because they arrived at the gates of the base.

 Kingdom of Living I - Part 20

    ***


    Later that day, in a shack in Dicang Village, four commanders have all gathered to discuss what they are going to do now. After they heard the confessions from the two new survivors, Shin and Yan, about the Xining, they all have come to a decision to send a squad of twenty people, all armed with weapons, a few trucks to come and see if they can get the people from there in hope to make them join the Dicang village outpost. The commanders have all agreed to send the full squad of Shi Huang and Turbo squads, and a part of squad from the El Tigro squad, having a total of twenty fighters and letting the rest of fifteen remain on a standby.


    "The mission will start tomorrow morning!" says Shi Huang commander to his people.


    The commander of Shi Huang has come to the house where the five people are sleeping, sharing meals and enjoying their free time when they have the chance. The commander and his people are in the kitchen, all sitting on chairs, looking at each other, the table being moved aside since it will stand in their way. The commander proceeded to tell his squad his plan.


    "Listen up. Your mission from tomorrow will have an objective to capture the survivors. As some of you know, the two people that have been "rescued" have told us about a potential group that lives in Xining. This said group is believed to be dangerous as they told us."


    "Hopefully it''s not like the ones we''ve encountered so far." says Li Kay.


    "What do you mean?" asks the commander looking at Kay.Support the author by searching for the original publication of this novel.


    "Cannibals, sir." says Li Kay without hesitation.


    "I know. This has become a problem in today''s world. Let''s hope they are not like this and are actually people who are feeling frightened by all of this disasterˇ­ About the mission. Capture as many people alive as possible. Innocent people, that won''t be thinking of killing any of us, you understand? Also, if you found any worthy supplies that would help us. Take it."


    "So," says Ri Ku raising his hand. "We''ll do it peacefully first."


    "And if they obey," says Yan. "We''ll open fire?"


    "Correct, you two." says the commander to the squad members.


    "And you''ll come with us?" asks Ahmed.


    "I''m afraid I cannot." says the commander. "I''ll stay here, and watch the outpost. Tomorrow is also scheduled for a meeting with Number Twenty."


    "Number Twenty?" asks Li Kay. "Y-You meanˇ­ The President of China?"


    "Yes." responds the commander, rising from his seat and heading for the exit door, but he turns around and says. "Have a good night. And good luck tomorrow."


    The commander leaves the room, and the squad members are going to their beds to get their sweet seven hours of sleep that will give them enough energy for tomorrow''s mission.


    The commander walks away from the house of his squad members, walks for a bit, then he sees a fighter walking by his side, carrying a crate with weapons.


    "For tomorrow?" asks the Shi Huang Commander.


    "Yes." says the fighter toward the commander, holding a small crate with a lot of handguns and ammunition for this type of gun. "For Xining."


    "What squad are you from?"


    "Turbo squad, sir."


    "I see." says the commander looking at the crate for a bit, then he tells him. "Carry on."


    The fighter walks with the crate of weapons toward the nearby truck that will be used for tomorrow''s mission. The commander however, walks down the road to his house to get a good night''s sleep, not like the other two squad commanders who are staying up all night to guard the gates of Dicang village.

 Kingdom of Living I - Part 21

    ***


    Tomorrow morning, at exactly 5:32 AM, two military trucks are leaving the Dicang village, each having ten fighters, armed with their anti-biting armor, gas masks, melee and firearms weapons for today''s big mission. Each fighter has a different weapon from each other, for example, Ahmed has an UZI, Li Kay has a M4A1 rifle, Ri Ku an AK-47 rifle, Yan has what it looks like to be a Gali, and Tang a shotgun and a Glock on her belt. These are not new weapons, these have been found in a warehouse that was visited a while ago. Looks damaged, but they were fixed by the specialists gunsmiths of this outpost.


    After about an hour of driving, the two military trucks arrive close to the entrance of Xining, the entire group of twenty fighters get out of the vehicle, arm themselves with weapons and proceed to open fire on the nearby zombies. The plan is to make enough noise to alert the group of survivors who live here. Only two fighters from Turbo squad remained at the trucks to look after it in case something bad were to happen. These two fighters remain close to the trucks, killing the groups of zombies who are walking and crawling toward them. The rest of eighteen fighters are advancing inside the perimeter, shooting and slashing any zombie in their way.


    The group of combined fighters arrive close to an intersection, and before they are about to make a turn to the left, a bullet flies from a ninth story building, hitting a fighter''s head, putting him on the ground. The rest of seventeen fighters are quickly running toward the nearest building, avoiding other shots that are fired at them. The building they''ve entered is a Hotel, where there lays a lot of dead corpses, some waking up by the smell of human flesh. Those zombies who were rising from their slumber, were quickly put down by the fighters who are walking to the upper floors of this hotel.


    "Over there!" says Ri Ku to the group, leading them into what it looks like to be a dinning hall.


    The group enters this dining hall, closes the doors after them and walks away from the windows after they heard a shot and a bullet that almost took someone''s head. The group enters the kitchen, and there they all lock the door and proceed to rest after this exhausted run from zombies and stray bullets.


    "Take your masks off." says an exhausted Ri Ku to the group.


    "Yes, sir." says his squad mates to Ri Ku, taking their masks off.


    Soon, the squad leaders of his people proceed to do the same, to get some air and rest properly. When everyone has taken off their masks, Ahmed notices the person that has been shot is Eduardo, a member of El Tigro squad.


    "They''ve got Eduardo." says Ahmed.


    "Poor fighterˇ­" says the squad leader of El Tigro.


    "These savages." says another fighter. "How can we face them?"


    "We won''t." says Ri Ku to the people. "This group is like Shin and Yan described to us. Shoot us without hesitation. We have to do it."


    "What do you mean?" asks Ahmed.


    "Bomb this place."


    The fighters were looking at Ri Ku, they knew this was the procedure, but isn''t this going too far as one of the fighters asked. Where Ri Ku replied to him.


    "And we cannot risk getting them in our outposts. Many survivors have used this chance to turn their weapons against us, attack from the interior and decimate the number of valuable fighters and soldiers."


    "But what about the supplies?" asks another fighter.


    "We''ll search another city." says Ri Ku taking from his backpack a walkie-talkie, sets the coordinates of his outpost and proceeds to talk over it. "Commander Shi Huang! Commander Shi Huang! Do you copy?"


    "Hear you loud and clear." says Commander Shi Huang over the station. "How''s the status?"


    "Not good. We''ve lost a fighter. And the group is shooting at us."


    "I see." says the Commander, sounding disappointed. "Guess we have to execute Order 24."The author''s content has been appropriated; report any instances of this story on Amazon.


    "Look like it, sir."


    "Leave this place as soon as you can. We''ll call for an airstrike."


    A minute later, the commander tells Ri Ku on the station.


    "You and the remaining group have about an hour to leave the city. We''ve made contact with a nearby base to send an airstrike to demolish the remains of this city."


    "Thank you, Commander."


    The transmission is over, Ri Ku looks over to the others who have understood what is about to happen now. All of them proceed to put on their helmets, reload their weapons and prepare for a leave to get back to their military trucks. Ri Ku kicks the door, takes down a zombie that was close to them, the others do the same with the other five zombies. The group of fighters quickly run downstairs, killing three more zombies on their way to the hallway.


    When they arrived in the hallway, they saw a human who was aiming his shotgun at them and was about to shoot, but Yu Tang was quicker and put a bullet through the neck of the aggressor, then another fighter put a bullet through the aggressor''s head. They were close to leaving the hotel, but shots were heard coming from the nearby buildings. The entire group of seventeen fighters are leaning by the wall, waiting for an opportunity to escape.


    "How many snipers are there?" asks Li Kay.


    "I don''t know." says Ahmed. "But we have got to do something."


    Xin Yan looks around, she sees a map of the building that is on the floor, she quickly takes it, looks at it, then she hands it to Ri Ku, who was next to her and tells her.


    "We should take the exit from the back."


    "Yes," says Ri Ku to Xin Yan. "But we have to distract them somehow."


    "I have an idea." responds a fighter taking out a pipe bomb from the belt. "I''ll toss this outside. Saw a tanker trailer not far from here. If it has any gas, it will enlighten the whole palace and maybe start a big fire that will distract us from the zombies, and hopefully from these snipers."


    "And what are you going to do?" asks Ahmed to the fighter.


    I''ll catch up with all of you."


    "Good luck." says most of the fighters to that anonymous fighter who proceeds to go back upstairs to the top floors to execute his plan.


    After a minute, a pipe bomb is thrown from the window, and lands nearby a tanker trailer that is having "Shell" logo on the sides. The pipe bomb explodes in a few seconds, and this explosion has somehow made this tanker explode. This bang was loud and provoked enough havoc to make the swarm of zombies from nearby look at the source of noise, walk toad the fire unaware of the consequences. And this explosion has made the group of attackers stops their shooting at the building where the fighters are now escaping from.


    They all left the place through the backdoor, killing a zombie on their way by smashing his head with the back of an assault rifle. The group has entered another building, which looks like it is another hotel. There the group has killed five zombies on their way and proceed to walk further to the other side of the building without too much effort. The fighters proceed to walk toward the way they''ve come from, avoiding shots of the enemy snipers by running through buildings who are still standing, half destroyed and with walls gone.


    While the group was running through another eight buildings, the group managed to arrive at the open road where their military trucks are located. There they see a swarm of zombies who have encircled the two special vehicles. All the group members proceed to shoot the zombies with their weapons. All of them have shot from a building, not taking a chance to get outside to get in one of the snipers'' scope and have their heads blown-up.


    Five minutes later, the swarm of zombies has run down, and the group proceed to run toward the special vehicles, killing the small amount of zombies who were in their way. While they were all running to the military trucks, a bullet almost hit Ahmed, but it gazed into his ear, almost taking it out with the bullet hitting the ground. Ahmed did not stop from running toward the trucks like the others.


    "Get in everyone!" yells the driver of the first military truck.


    In the first military truck, ten people had climbed in it, and in the other there were only seven people who ran into it. The group remained there for a bit for the other fighter to come. All of them haven''t caught a glimpse of him on their run. Some were starting to feel the fighter has fallen, or was captured, or wounded, or worse, has been stopped by a zombie. But to their surprise, the fighter proceeds to come out from a building and run toward them.


    "Hey!" says a fighter to the other, waving his hand. "We''re here, buddy!"


    Then, a shot was heard, coming from a nearby building. That shot was heard from the people inside the military truck, who all peeked outside, and saw their comrade, falling to his knees and to his face on the ground. The people from the military truck look sad by this, but they all quickly get back to reality and proceed to do their missions. The military trucks proceed to leave this area, who will be hit by an airstrike minutes later.


    "We''ve failed!" says Ahmed inside the moving military truck, to his squad mates.


    "Yeahˇ­" says Li Kay. "Let''s hope these criminals are killed in the airstrike."


    "They''ll be," says a fighter. "Feel bad for the two fighters we''ve lost."


    "Eduardo and Rajak will be missed," says another fighter.


    "That one was Rajak?" asks Ahmed, surprised. "Poor dude."


    "You''ve known him?" asks Ri Ku.


    "Yeah. Back at the bootcamp before he was transferred to Pakistan as a fighter."


    "We''ll do a funeral back at our house." says Ri Ku to Ahmed and to everyone.


    The trucks are entering the main street they''ve taken to come here, and proceed to go fast toward Dicang village, where the commanders are starting their meeting with the mysterious Mister Twenty, who is considered to be the President of China.

 Kingdom of Living I - Part 22

    ***


    Meanwhile, in Dicang village, in what was once used to be a temple, the three commanders of the outpost in Dicang village are having a video call with someone important. Hugo has managed to make this area have internet access which will be able to have video communication with people from other safe zones and outposts. The three commanders are looking at a big computer screen, where three windows are shown on the screen. On one window is displayed the face of a man, shaved, cut hair and glasses, sitting on a chair, revealing he wears an office costume that looks like it was washed. On the second window it shows the image of an older man, with long beard and bald, wearing sunglasses and having a cigar in his mouth. This man, judging by the peak of the uniform, looks like to be either a soldier or a general. And the third window did not display any face, only the logo of The Organization, that looks like an eye watching straight at your soul if you look longer at it.


    "Good morning, General Razor and Mr. Twenty." says the Commander of Turbo squad, doing a small bow.


    "Good morning, General and Mr. Twenty!" says the other two commanders, doing a small bow as well.


    "Good morning!" says Mr. Twenty to his people.


    "Good morning, commanders!" says General Razor to his commanders. "How are things going out in the outpost?"


    "Things are going as planned, sir." says Turbo squad commander. "We''ve achieved around 0.350 kilometers squares of area."


    "Good to hear." says General Razor. "What about the water supply?"


    "We have a built two wells in this area, sir." says El Tigro commander.


    "Ingenious." says Mr. Twenty. "Have you decontaminated the water?"


    "Yes, sir." says El Tigro commander. "The two wells we''ve built will supply fresh water for the people of this outpost."


    "What about electricity?"


    "We have it," says El Tigro.


    "Supplies?"


    "Yes, sir." says Shi Huang commander. "Also weapons and ammunition."


    "Watchtowers?"


    "We don''t have it at the moment." says the El Tigro commander.


    "Make it as soon as possible." says Mr. Twenty.


    "A watchtower is not something obligatory to build." says General Razor. "Heard you are situated on a high altitude area."


    "Not exactly high altitude, sir, but enough to give us a heads-up." says El Tigro commander.Stolen from its rightful author, this tale is not meant to be on Amazon; report any sightings.


    "That is good enough for me." says General Razor.


    "Walls?" asks Mr. Twenty.


    "Yes, sir." says El Tigro commander.


    "Number of fighters?"


    "Thirty three, sir." says Shi Huang commander. "Two have perished this morning as our reports suggest."


    "How?" asks General Razor, intrigued by this.


    "We sent a squad of twenty people to check Xiahe province, but they were ambushed by savages. Only eighteen escaped without injuries, while two have perished in the attack."


    "That''s sad to hear," says General Razor. "Have you arranged an airstrike in that province? As our protocol."


    "We did. The airstrike should happen in any minute." responds Shi Huang commander.


    "What about radio communication?" asks Mr. Twenty. " Look to be working fine as I can see."


    "It is, sir." says Turbo commander.


    "And lastly, how many survivors have you taken?"


    "Only two." says Shi Huang commander.


    "Are they trustworthy?" asks General Razor, looking concerned.


    "They are." says Shi Huang commander.


    "Well, that''s reassuring." says Mr. Twenty. "I''ll log off and report it to Mister One."


    The window where Mr. Twenty was shown to disappear, together with the other window that displays the logo of The Organization. After the two windows have closed, the General is looking at his commanders, with a smile.


    "You three have done a good job, so far." says General Razor to his three commanders. "It''s a shame I cannot be here personally to shake you all''s hands."


    "We are flattered, general." says Shi Huang commander. "How are the things outside?"


    "Looking far better than what it was in the beginning of the apocalypse, Cleetus. Outposts have started to appear all around Europe, artificial islands have been filled with survivors and by the reports, we''ve managed to deliberate one city. "


    "You mean a city without zombies?" asks Turbo commander, surprised by this.


    "Yes. You heard it right." says General Razor looking proud.


    "Where''s that city?"


    "It''s in Greenland. I believe it''s named Nuuk or something on the map. From the sources, it states there are about five hundred survivors so far and fifty fighters."


    "It is expected." says Turbo squad commander. "Greenland it''s known to have a cold environment, and so far, zombies seem to not be able to face the cold."


    "We''re entering Winter, my pupils. Soon, we''ll face zombies who will be slower than what we are facing now."


    The three comrades and the general Razor have spoken for a bit more about the situation outside before they were logging off to end this meeting, which was only a checking situation like many outposts are having the moment on their establishment. But this outpost had one a little late because they were having problems with electricity in the first days, but thanks to several working solar powers who were placed on the rooftops, they now have working electricity for the day and a little for the night. But there is not enough electricity to help them make this palace be classified in the documents as a safe zone and more like an outpost.


    When you look at the map of Dicang village, you can say this place enters the category of a safe zone, if everything were to meet their criteria. Like I said earlier, the issue with electricity, there is also the issue with watchtowers, which every safe zone should have at least two built watchtowers, or improvised, but on this outpost they should be built when the needed materials will be provided. Another issue is the number of fighters. Thirty-three fighters is a good amount, but not enough to make this a safe zone, and getting more fighters is costly, hard and a long tedious process. The other issue is food sources, but this can be resolved easily if they can use some land for farming activities. But this issue is one that even safe zones are experiencing. And this one will be a little harder due to the climate and terrain of this outpost.


    After the close call, the commander leaves this temple and goes outside to meet their squad mates who are coming tired from Xiahe province, empty-handed and without two good fighters who have perished in this ambush. Some of the fighters are looking angry, while others are sad thinking about Eduardo and Rajak.

 Kingdom of Living I - Part 23

    ***


    A day has passed since the incident at Xiahu. A group of ten fighters have been sent with a military truck to go there and check how is the city holding up after the big airstrike they''ve faced. They arrived at a distance and checked the area using their binoculars to see the rumbles that surrounded the city, the fallen buildings and the dead corpses of humans and zombies that were outside the city.


    "They''ve got hit badly." says a fighter with his helmet and equipment on.


    "No shit." says Li Kay to the fighter looking through binoculars, also wearing the standard armor.


    "Do you think anyone survived?"


    "Even if they were. Chances are, they would be able to live for a long time."


    The squad of fighters remains there for a few minutes to check how the ravaged city is doing. After a few zombies proceed to walk toward their location, the fighters get inside their military truck and the driver, who is Ahmed, drives the truck away from the upcoming zombies, to the main road. But instead of going to their Dicang village, the squad of ten people are heading to another place, where they are having an important mission. The squad is heading to Riamang, where it is believed there are still some functioning solar powers who the outpost could use to maintain their outpost longevity. This mission was received earlier by Ri Ku, who was tagged along with the squad of ten fighters, from Turbo commander via walkie-talkie.


    "What makes you think there are any solar panels in there?" asks Ri Ku to his commander after he gave him all the brief details.


    "The satellite maps have shown us several solar panels there." says Turbo commander. "If they function, it is worth a try, don''t you think?"Did you know this text is from a different site? Read the official version to support the creator.


    "I know, sir." says Ri Ku. "We''ll investigate."


    "Good. Your mission is just to check if they are functioning and get back to the outpost. Then, we''ll send trucks to come and take them out from there. Later."


    "Understood, sir." says Ri Ku to the commander Turbo. "Over."


    And Ri Ku closes the transmission.


    The others have heard the conversation between Ri Ku and Turbo commander, where all agreed to do this task. After all, it is just a mission to check the solar panels and come back to the base to report to the higher-ups to come and send another squad to pick them up.


    About an hour later, the squad arrives in Riamang area, in front of a broken fence, where behind it there are several solar panels that look functioning while other looks damaged from the lack of maintaining, something that is logical due to the fact the world is still going through the apocalypse. The people from the vehicle got out armed and walked through the broken fence to check the solar panels. All ten of them have looked and touched the solar panels, moving away the dust that covers all of them.


    "All of them look fine to me." says Li Kay.


    "This one is broken." says Ahmed to Li Kay, pointing at a solar panel with nine bullet holes.


    "Are those bullet holes?" asks Li Kay to Ahmed.


    "Looks like it." responds Ahmed, who is looking at the destroyed fence that covers this entire area with solar panels. "Someone must''ve entered here, fought against zombies and ran away. Or died."


    "That''s your conclusion?" asks Li Kay.


    "Looks like. But anyway. Leave the broken ones and check the functioning ones."


    Li Kay and Ahmed are looking around the area at the solar panels, checking them over and over to be sure they are looking functioning and can help them achieve cleaner energy they''ll be needing in the winter. There were about ten working solar panels, twelve damaged and nine damaged from a said fighter who has the slightest idea about these solar panels.


    Soon, the squad leaves the area by going back to their heavy vehicle, and leaving these solar panels like they were. While the truck was heading back to its base, a zombie corpse raised off from the road, and walked slowly to the direction of where the truck went away. While the zombie was walking, the other two raised up and followed the zombie body.

 Kingdom of Living I - Part 24

    ***


    Later that day, a group of two fighters, Yu Tong and Ahmed, went to Manma, to check the place to be sure there weren''t any zombies in the area. They are doing this because their Shi Huang commander has ordered them to go there, check the palace to see if it will be sustainable for them to create another outpost that will act as a safe area to hold the possible survivors in there until they''ll be allowed to move in the outpost. That''s how the procedure of the Organization works in terms of outposts, survivors get to live in a safe area as a means to be sure they aren''t infected, to see if they are trusted and can be useful to The Organization.


    Ahmed and Yu Tong enter the land of what it looks like to be a farm by looking at what it looks like barns, fences where animals are used to be put, stables and two tractors who are having their tires stolen. One of the tractors is having their windshields broken by what it looks like, either by bullets or someone just threw an ax at it. Ahmed pointed the tractors to Yu Tong, where she looked at it, then they both shook their shoulders and continued their walking toward a nearby house.


    "Z." says Ahmed to Yu Tong to a zombie who is crawling from them, who was hiding under the tractors.


    Ahmed and Yu Tong both took their machetes, looked at each other, then Yu Tong let Ahmed go and took the kill. Ahmed approaches the zombie, stabs his head with his machete, then cleans the blade with the dirty clothes of the zombies, as he was cleaning the zombie blade, he sees something weird at him, a radio-talkie that is on the belt on the backside. He also notices the legs of this corpse weren''t cut, they looked like they were eaten by zombies. Ahmed takes the walkie-talkie from the corpse, looks at it, then he shows it to Yu Tong, who walks to see it herself.


    "Does it work?" asks Yu Tong to Ahmed.


    "Don''t know." says Ahmed to Yu Tong, then he turns it on. "Worth to try."


    Ahmed turns on the walkie-talkie, some buzzing comes from the device, the two are looking at it for a second, then, before they are about to change transitions, a voice comes from the device in Mandarin language.


    "Hello."


    "Hello." says Yu Tong in Chinese, taking the walkie-talkie from Ahmed because she can speak Chinese. "Who am I speaking with?"


    "No wayˇ­" says the person on the other side, sounding surprised. "Hello. Who am I speaking with? Humans? Military? Zombies?"


    "Calm down, sir." Yu Tong says to the person from the other side, who is speaking rapidly. "We are fighters from the Dicang Village outpost. You are speaking with Yu Tong, a fighter of the Shi Huang squad. Who am I speaking with?"


    "M-My name is Machiko." says the voice of a man from the other side of the walkie-talkie. "I''m in Gansu. In a bunker with five more people."


    "Bunker?" asks Yu Tong, who looks surprised at the walkie-talkie. "I heard it right? You said you live in a bunker?"


    "Yeah. I said right. Bunker. We found it three months ago, unlocked and with supplies. Not even us believed this, but then we learned the truth about this bunker. It was built by a crazy man to lock his family in there as a sort of punishment. There was a note in there. But that is not important. We need help."


    "We''ll send a squad there." says Yu Tong, looks over at Ahmed, then she looks at the walkie-talkie. "Tomorrow. Probably."


    "Probably?" asks the person from the walkie-talkie.Love this novel? Read it on Royal Road to ensure the author gets credit.


    "We don''t know. We need to ask the higher-ups about this."


    "Alright. Alright. Can you tell me how far it is?"


    "Pardon?"


    "How far is this Dicang village you said from Gansu?"


    "We don''t know, sir," says Yu Tong. "But it''s probably far away from here. Like, maybe hundreds of kilometers away. I advise you, it is not a good idea to come here by yourself. It will be better to remain there and wait for a response. We''ll call you later. Over the transmission."


    "Alright." says the person, sounding disappointed. "We''ll talk later. Over."


    Yu Tong closes the walkie-talkie, puts it next to the other walkie-talkie, she looks at Ahmed, who listened to the whole conservation between them. Then, Yu Tong tells him.


    "We found people in-"


    "Gansu?" asks Ahmed.


    "Yeahˇ­" says Yu Tong, surprised. "How did you know?"


    "You forgot I was in the bootcamp with you for six months? I learned some Mandarin there."


    "And? Can you tell me what we were talking about?"


    "About a bunkerˇ­ a group of five people andˇ­ a note."


    "Yeah." says Yu Tong, impressed at Ahmed. "You learned well in the bootcamp."


    "Should we continue our reckoning?" asks Ahmed to Yu Tong.


    "Sure." says Yu Tong.


    Both of the fighters proceed to walk further, both decide to enter a stable. Due to the smell of dead animals that came through the masks air breather holes, both looked away, then they decided to move away from there after they heard a growl from a zombie. The two realize this stable is not worth looking over after this receding smell of dead animals and zombies. Ahmed and Yu Tong walk toward another stable, where they see the doors are wide open, and show a lot of the skeletons of the animals in the interior, with a zombie still munching the bones of a sheep. That zombie senses Yu Tong and Ahmed, he raises up and walks toward them, but is quickly put down by Ahmed, who takes out his handguns with a silencer and shoots the zombie''s head.


    "Should we check the house instead?"


    "Yeah," says Yu Tong to Ahmed. "By the looks of it, all of them must have the remains of animals."


    The two are walking toward the house, they open the main door slowly, revealing the disaster of the main hallway and the living room to the two fighters. The two fighters are looking around, then, they decide to check the other rooms to be sure this house looks empty and without any zombies. First they checked the bathroom, where it revealed only disasters like dust on the sink, curtain on the bathtub, a broken toilet and a broken mirror. The second room they checked was a kitchen, and that showed a body of a zombie, long dead and on the decayed process where the skull could be seen. This room also looks like an earthquake was going there, tables rolled over, chairs broken, plates broken and dark blood all around the floor. The two fighters continued to check the bedrooms, but they were interrupted by a zombie from the kitchen, the one that was long dead. He growled and was rising to his feet, slowly and steadily, but was soon put back to his misery by Ahmed who did a swing with his machete and cut the skull in half with the intact brain.


    "These things don''t know when to die." says Ahmed to Yu Tong.


    "Should we check the other rooms?" says Yu Tong.


    "You don''t?"


    "By the looks of it, there isn''t anything helpful to us."


    "Yeah." says Ahmed. "Let''s just check the other buildings nearby because this one looks like it has been long abandoned by humans. And it smells way nastier than what was in Dicang village in the first days."


    "Not gonna lie, the first day it smelled terrible. But orders were to check these farms for something worth."


    "And we found something." says Ahmed, pointing at the walkie-talkie Yu Tong has on her belt.


    "You are right. But we should look over more." says Yu Tong looking at the window of the house, and sees what it looks like an improvised garage, where it displays a pickup truck. "How about there?" says as she points at the garage. "Don''t we need one of those back at the base?"


    "Yeah." says Ahmed, looking at the improvised garage with a pickup truck under the roof. "Better than taking a big military truck that burns way too much fuel for short runs."


    The two leave the house, walk toward that pickup truck for a minute, kill a zombie without limbs that was in the pickup truck''s backside, then they dump its body away from there and get inside the small truck. Inside, it smelled like someone died in there, but after checking, they couldn''t determine the source of the smell. Ahmed looks over at the truck fuel shortage, sees it has enough fuel for them to get back to the base, but he doesn''t have the key to turn on the motor of this vehicle. Ahmed decides to take off the wires under the pickup truck, and does a thing like hijackers do in the movies to turn on the truck. Yu Tong was skeptical about this, but when she saw the motor of the truck turning on, she looked surprised at Ahmed.


    "How did you learn that?" she asks.


    "From movies, Yu Tong." says Ahmed, starting to cruise away from the garage, and toward the outpost who is not far away from them.

 Kingdom of Living I - Part 25

    ***


    Tomorrow morning, a helicopter flies over the skies of Gansu. This helicopter is carrying five fighters, two from Turbo squad, other two from El Tigro squad and a member from Shi Huang squad, Yu Tong. She was forced to participate in this by the commanders after she told the survivors about this location''s name, gave them her information and told them they''ll send a squad to their rescue. Now, the Organization procedure in terms of rescuing survivors was to give the location and tell them they''ll await their arrival. But now, since the fighters exist, they''ll send a handful of fighters with a vehicle and help said survivors escape.


    The fighters are all wearing their anti-biting armor, gas masks to not get infected from the air and not get bitten by any zombies on the neck zone. They all carry assault rifles, shotguns and one of the fighters is having on his hands an assault rifle. But a fighter will remain on the helicopter to use the machine gun installed on the left side of the helicopter.


    "Z''s all around the street." says the fighter mounting machine gun. "Holy shit. There''s many of them out there."


    "Proceed to clean them up." says the co-pilot to the fighter.


    "Yes, sir." says the fighter on the mounted machine gun, who proceeds to pull the trigger of the gun.


    A lot of zombies on the road have fallen on the ground due to the bullet rain coming from the helicopters. A lot of zombies have lost their limbs, heads and torsos, but most of them haven''t died, some crawling after their entire limbs were taken down. And those who were dead were either becoming food for other zombies, or future fertilizers, but most of them were eaten by the living corpses who could move. The fighter did not care to kill all the zombies, all he cared was to mow down as many zombies as possible to make their way to rescue the survivors.


    After about ten minutes, the helicopter lands in an empty spot, where the four fighters quickly get out and proceed to walk further while Yu Tong is talking on the walkie-talkie with the survivor.


    "We''ve landed." says Yu Tong in Chinese over the walkie-talkie. "Over."


    "I''ve heard the shots from outside." says the person on the other side in Chinese. "Is everyone alright? Over?"


    "Yeah. We''re all safe. We just cleaned the road from zombies. Where are you? Over."


    "Are the streets safe? Over."


    "They''re still zombies out there. Over."


    "I am in what used to be a restaurant that served Mongolian food. I am inside, with the other survivors. Over."


    "Be more specific."


    "It has a banner that says in Chinese, "Help. People inside.", that was made weeks ago by me and my son. Over."


    "I see." says Yu Tong. "We''re on our way. Over." and she closes the walkie-talkie while the group proceeds to move forward.Royal Road is the home of this novel. Visit there to read the original and support the author.


    After minutes of searching, the group of five fighters arrive at this supposed restaurant with a banner that is written in green paint. This banner is not exactly a banner, more like a bed cloth that is tied to the upper floors windows. No wonder not any helicopter saw the sign, the entire area is cramped and very hard to navigate in these corridors with zombies. Yu Tong goes to the door, she opens it and in front of her, there is a frightened man, with a baseball bat in his hand. The man was close to hitting her, but Yu Tong told her in Chinese.


    "Yu Tong. Special Fighter Division, Shi Huang."


    "Y-Yu Tongˇ­" says the man, looking pale at the group of armed and armored fighters. "Oh my godˇ­" the man falls on his knees and starts crying. "Thank goddess, you are here!"


    The other four people, who were all hiding, came from their hideout and greeted the fighters who had come to their rescue. The fighters look at the four people, and one of them sees something strange at them. Its skin shows a darker blue, something not normal for a human. That said fighter walks closer to that human, with a flashlight, and then, he gasps through his mask.


    "Jesus Christ!"


    "What is it Hank?" asks Ahmed walking to the fighter, then he also looks shocked at the human with a darker blue skin. "My goddess."


    "What''s the matter?" asks that person in Chinese.


    "No way." says Yu Tong walking closer to the two fighters, sees the darker blue person skin, and she gasps as well through her breathing mask. "A-An undead?"


    "A what?" asks the person with darker blue skin. "What is that?"


    The person doesn''t look to be an adult nor a younger adult, it looks like a kid that is at the beginning of teenage years. This said person in front of them has the entire skin colored in blue, has ravaged clothes that shows a few bite marks, brown hair and a pair of glasses to help him see and read.


    "What''s the matter?" asks a survivor of the fighter in Chinese, looking worried.


    "Yes." says the man named Machiko to Yu Tong in Chinese. "What is it with Enir?"


    "Enir." says Yu Tong. "I-Is an undead."


    "Undead?" asks two survivors.


    The survivors were looking at each other, confused about this, they don''t know what an undead means, then Yu Tong proceeds to tell the survivors about the undead, and how they are becoming an important resource to help them remake the world as it was before this apocalypse has happened. But she got cut short because of a fighter who tells them there are zombies coming toward them, and they quickly decide to get the important stuff from indie this building and run back to the helicopter.


    "Enir has to go a separate route." says Yu Tong in Chinese.


    "What?" asks Enir.


    "Why?" asks a survivor.


    The group of fighters and survivors sees a pack of zombies walking to them, the fighters quickly take out the guns and proceed to shoot the zombies. All of this pack dies immediately, then they continue moving.


    "That is the protocol," says Yu Tong to Erin. "Don''t blame us. We are following the protocol."


    "But I cannot go by myself." says Erin.


    "I''ll go with him." says a survivor, a woman.


    "I''ll escort you two." says Hank, a fighter from the El Tigro squad.


    "But-" says Machiko.


    "No, but. It''s settled." says Yu Tong to Machiko as they continue to move forward to the helicopter that awaits them.


    Arriving at the helicopter, the three survivors get in, while Hank, Erin and the woman who wanted to go with Erin depart ways, walking toward a nearby car. Hank breaks the window of the car with the gun, opens the door from the insides, gets on the driver seat, sees this car has some fuel remaining for an hour.


    "Is that car good, buddy?!" yells Ahmed from the helicopter, who is about to take off.


    "Yes!" yells Hank to Ahmed. "We''ll meet at the base later!"


    The helicopter proceeds to take off from there, then the car with Hank, the unknown woman and Erin, leave this infested town by taking a road that leads to the rural area since the main road is filled with cars and zombies. This group of three people will come back to the base, safely and without any issue, but on foot since the vehicle would run out of gas at a distance of ten kilometers away from the outpost.

 Kingdom of Living I - Final Part

    ***


    Days have passed since that event and not much has happened in Dicang Village and its surroundings. Erin has been sent to live in one of the farmhouses Ahmed and Yu Tong have investigated a while ago to live with the unknown woman, whose name is Nami, who is his cousin. The two live by themselves in that farmhouse where they are given food, water and everything necessary by Hank, who has volunteered to be the one who will send them supplies for an entire month, as the protocol suggests, before they could be eligible to be granted the access to enter the base. And by the looks of it, the two have grown fond of that farmhouse.


    What does The Organization do against undead? They are keeping them as far as possible from the humans for a month, where an assigned doctor by The Organization will come every day to do regular checkups on Erin, in this case. These check-ups consist of muscular tissue check, mouth saliva check, skin check, temperature check, like an annual checkup to make it short, but it has a test that is considered one of the dangerous, and that being, zombie consumption. Now, an undead can eat a zombie, but if they do this, they''ll lose their humanity traits, and will become a more dangerous zombie, not like a class F type, but a more dangerous one like the normal ones. And The Organization wants to avoid this, so they do these tests in order to see if the undead can behave like a human and be useful in a special fighter regiment.


    This kind of checkup happens at every beginning of the week, and in the fourth week, the patient will have to go through the zombie consumption test. If he ate the plate that presents some zombie''s meat, the patient will be immediately killed on the spot, but if he doesn''t, he''ll be set free to live with humans under surveillance after a month of continuous lockdown. This is a test that can backfire, but it was the only solution they could come up under these unfortunate circumstances, where the world is now in ruins and more divided than it was before.


    Now, back at Dicang Village, a squad of fighters has been sent to Yaliji Village after they''ve seen some smoke coming from a rooftop of a house, the squad of fighters had about ten fighters, but none from Shi Huang squad. And that is because this squad has been given another mission.


    "We''re what?" asks Li Kay, surprised at his commander, who has come into their house with a folder that presents an important document.If you spot this narrative on Amazon, know that it has been stolen. Report the violation.


    "You''ll be sent to Thailand. All five of you." says the commander, handing the folder to a half-awake Ri Ku. "Here it is the special military mission you will all participate in." then he continues to talk while his people are looking through the files. "To make it short, you five are sent together with other fifty Fighters to clean up a city and reestablish an outpost. You will be supplied with weapons, food, medicine and everything important for your mission."


    "S-So, we''re sent to Thailand?" asks Xin Yan, who is, like most of them, half-awake because this was supposed to be their free day. "What''s this special military mission?"


    "It says," says Ri Ku looking through the first page of the folder. "We''re ordered by the Thailand Army and Mister Ninety-Eight to free an airport from a horde of zombies, take control of it and go intoˇ­ Sis-Sisa-Sisaketˇ­ Am I right, commander?"


    "Yes, Ri Ku." says Shi Huang commander. "You five have been sent to your very first special military mission."


    "That means something good, right?" asks Ahmed, sounding happy, not unlike most of them.


    "Yeap." says Shi Huang commander to Ahmed. "Now, I''ll advise you five to get prepared. The Helicopter will take you all to a nearby airport, where a plane will be delivering all of you to one of the artificial islands, where the army of Thailand waits for you. Departure is at 09:30. I''ll be waiting for all of you outside."


    The commander leaves, letting the squad of five fighters get dressed, get their equipment on, weapons, ammo and everything they need for this mission they''ve sent to. While all of them were dressing up, some were questioning the reason they''d been sent there. Li Kay had a theory they''ve been selected after the report Mr. Twenty has given to the higher ups. Yu Tong had a theory that they''d been randomly chosen. None of them had any other theory to come up with because all of them were in a hurry to get prepared as fast as possible for the big adventure they will be going through in the next hours.


    The group of five fighters leave the house in about ten minutes, all prepared, dressed in armor and with their weapons ready. None of them took anything else useful because in the folder that was given to Ri Ku it is stated they''ll be given the necessary at their arrival in Laguna Islands (an artificial island that is two hundred kilometers away from Thailand), but it says that they''ll have to bring out their own guns since this army is having troubles with weapons shortage. The group of five fighters are walking closer to the helicopter who is about to take off, they see their commander, saluting them in a military style, which they do as well.


    "Good luck out there, kids! Make me proud!"


    "WE WILL!" yells the five fighters at the unison of their commander before they are boarding the helicopter who will transport them there, where a plane will be waiting for them.


    END OF KINGDOM OF LIVING I